Treatment Manual
Some processes, equipment, and materials described in this manual may be patented. Inclusion in this 

manual does not constitute permission for use from the patent owner. The use of any patented invention in 

the performance of the processes described in this manual is solely the responsibility of the user. APHIS 

does not indemnify the user against liability for patent infringement and will not be liable to the user or to any 

third party for patent infringement.

The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits discrimination in all its programs and activities on the 

basis of race, color, national origin, age, disability, and where applicable, sex, marital status, familial status, 

parental status, religion, sexual orientation, genetic information, political beliefs, reprisal, or because all or 

part of any individual’s income is derived from any public assistance program. (Not all prohibited bases 

apply to all programs). Persons with disabilities who require alternative means for communication of 

program information (Braille, large print, audiotape, etc.) should contact USDA’s TARGET Center at (202) 

720-2600 (voice and TDD). To file a complaint of discrimination, write to USDA, Director, Office of Civil 

Rights, 1400 Independence Avenue, SW., Washington, DC 20250-9410, or call (800) 795-3272 (voice) or 

(202) 720-6382 (TDD). USDA is an equal opportunity provider and employer.

When using pesticides, read and follow all label instructions.

Interim Edition Issued 2023
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual TOC-1

Treatment 

Manual

Contents

 TOC-1-1

Figures LOF-1-1

 LOF-1-1

Tables LOT-1-1

 LOT-1-1

Introduction 1-1-1

 1-1-1

Chemical Treatments 2-1-1

 Fumigants 2-2-1

 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide 2-3-1

 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation 2-4-1

 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation 2-5-1

 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency 

Situations 2-6-1

 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Structure Fumigation 2-7-1

 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin 2-8-1

 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation 2-9-1

 Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride 2-10-1

 Fumigants—Phosphine 2-11-1

 Aerosols 2-12-1

 Dips 2-13-1

 Dusts 2-14-1

 Sprays 2-15-1

Nonchemical Treatments 3-1-1

 Overview 3-1-1

 Heat 3-2-1

 Heat – Hot Water Immersion 3-3-1

 Heat – Steam Treatments 3-4-1

 Heat – Vapor Heat and Forced Hot Air 3-5-1

 Heat – Forced Hot Air – Niger Seed 3-6-1

 Cold Treatment (CT) 3-7-1

 Irradiation 3-8-1

Residue Monitoring 4-1-1

 Collecting, Packaging, and Shipping 4-1-1

Treatment Schedules 5-1-1

 Index 5-1-1
 

TOC-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

 T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables 5-2-1

 T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material 5-3-1

 T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products 5-4-1

 T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products 5-5-1

 T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens 5-6-1

 T600 - Controlled Atmosphere Temperature Treatment System 5-7-1

 D301 - Schedules for Domestic Movement of Regulated Articles 5-8-1

Certifying Facilities 6-1-1

 Overview 6-1-1

 Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers 6-2-1

 Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers 6-3-1

 Certification of Cold Treatment 6-4-1

 Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities 6-5-1

 Certification of Niger seed Treatment Facilities 6-6-1

 Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities 6-7-

1

 Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities 6-8-1

 Certifying Facilities for the Heat Treatment of Firewood 6-9-1

Hazard Communication Standard 7-1-1

 Safety Data Sheets 7-1-1

Emergency Aid and Safety 7-2-1

 Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills 7-2-1

Equipment 8-1-1

 8-1-1

Glossary Glossary-1-1

 Glossary-1-1

Appendix A A-1-1

 Forms A-1-1

Appendix B B-1-1

 Coast Guard Regulations B-1-1

Appendix C C-1-1

 Conversion Tables C-1-1

Appendix D D-1-1

 APHIS Certified Treatment Facilities and Conveyances D-1-1

Appendix E E-1-1

 Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety 

Equipment E-1-1

Appendix F F-1-1

 EPA Crop Groups F-1-1

Appendix G G-1-1

 Respirator Protection Information G-1-1

Index G-1-1

 G-1-1
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual LOF-1

Treatment 

Manual

Figures

Figure 2-4-1 Container Arrangement in Two Rows with Both Doors 

Open 2-4-14

Figure 2-4-2 Container Arrangement in Two Rows With One Door Open 2-

4-14

Figure 2-4-3 Example of the Position of Gas Sampling Tubes (Side 

View) 2-4-18

Figure 2-4-4 Typical Break Bulk Arrangement with Fans, Leads, Introduction 

Line, Padding, and Sand Snakes 2-4-21

Figure 2-4-5 Formula for Calculating MB Dosage for Tarpaulin 

Fumigations 2-4-25

Figure 2-4-6 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add to Schedules Not Equivalent to T101-a-1 2-4-33

Figure 2-4-7 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add to Schedules Equivalent to T101-a-1 2-4-34

Figure 2-4-8 Formula to Calculate Air Exchange Rate (AER) 2-4-40

Figure 2-5-1 Formula for Calculating MB Dosage for Chamber 

Fumigations 2-5-9

Figure 2-6-1 Formula for Calculating MB Dosage for Vessel 

Fumigations 2-6-10

Figure 2-6-2 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add for Vessel 

Fumigation 2-6-13

Figure 2-8-1 Formula for MB Calculating Dosage for Container Fumigations 

Without a Tarpaulin 2-8-14

Figure 2-8-2 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add for Schedules Not T101-a-1 Equivalent and Conducted in a Container 

Without a Tarpaulin 2-8-21

Figure 2-8-3 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add For T101-a1 Equivalent Schedules for Container Fumigations Without a 

Tarpaulin 2-8-22

Figure 2-8-4 Ductwork configuration for aeration of untarped containers: full 

loads (top) and partial loads (bottom) 2-8-28

Figure 2-9-1 Diagram of placement of temperature sensors, represented by 

a star 2-9-8

Figure 2-9-2 Formula for Calculating MB Dosage for Closed-Door Container 

Fumigations 2-9-15

Figure 2-9-3 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add to ClosedDoor Containerized Cargo 2-9-20

Figure 2-9-4 Duct work configuration for aeration of closed-door containers: 

full loads (top) and partial loads (bottom) 2-9-24

Figure 2-11-1 Diagram of ECO2FUME® Gas Cylinder 2-11-9
Figures 

LOF-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Figure 2-11-2 Diagram of One Type of Dispensing Equipment for 

ECO2FUME 2-11-11

Figure 2-11-3 Diagram of One Type of Blending Equipment for 

VAPORPH3OS 2-11-15

Figure 2-11-4 Diagram of VAPORPH3OS® and Forced Air Blending 

Equipment 2-11-17

Figure 2-12-1 Formula for Calculating Aerosol Spray Time in Specific Areas of 

Aircraft 2-12-2

Figure 2-12-2 Preparing to Dispense a Partial Can of 2% d-phenothrin + 2% 

permethrin 2-12-7

Figure 2-12-3 Preparing to Dispense a Full Can of 2% d-phenothrin + 2% 

permethrin 2-12-7

Figure 2-13-1 Example of % Concentrate From Puma® Label (EPA #5813-

100) 2-13-5

Figure 2-13-2 Formula to Determine Total Parts of Water to Prepare a Bleach 

Disinfectant 2-13-5

Figure 3-7-1 Proper Placement of Pulp Sensor within Larger Fruit 3-7-7

Figure 3-7-2 Proper Placement of Pulp Sensor within Smaller Fruit 3-7-7

Figure 3-7-3 Fruit Stack with Middle Row Temperature Probe 

Placement 3-7-9

Figure 3-7-4 40-foot Refrigerated Container with 18 Pallets of Fruit (not 

drawn to scale) 3-7-10

Figure 3-7-5 Proper Placement of Cardboard Between the Last Pallet Row of 

Fruit and the Back Doors of the Container 3-7-10

Figure 6-3-1 Formula to Calculate Air Exchange Rate (AER) 6-3-7

Figure 6-8-1 Flow Diagram for Plan Approval Application for Irradiation Facilities in Countries Other Than the United States 6-8-3

Figure 7-2-1 Abbreviated Spill Plan, Personal Reference Card (Walletsize) 7-2-2

Figure 7-2-2 Emergency Contacts for Pesticide Spills 7-2-3

Figure 7-2-3 Poison Control Center 7-2-4

Figure 7-2-4 Medical Emergency Facility 7-2-4

Figure 7-2-5 Federal Aviation Administration (FFA) Office 7-2-5

Figure 7-2-6 Community-Right-To-Know or Emergency Planning Coordinator (Fire Marshall) 7-2-5

Figure 7-2-7 Fish and Game Department 7-2-6

Figure 7-2-8 Regional Veterinary Services (VS) Office 7-2-6

Figure 7-2-9 Regional Safety and Health Coordinator 7-2-6

Figure 7-2-10 Local Police 7-2-7

Figure 7-2-11 Local Hazardous Waste Official 7-2-7

Figure 8-1-1 Fumiscope® Models D, 4.0, and 5.1 8-1-2

Figure 8-1-2 Fumiscope® Model 5.1 8-1-3

Figure 8-1-3 Spectros Methyl Bromide Monitor 8-1-9

Figure 8-1-4 Methyl Bromide Volatilizer Coil 8-1-15

Figure 8-1-5 Tubing Specifications 8-1-16

Figure 8-1-6 Auxiliary Pump 8-1-19

Figure 8-1-7 Example of Pressure Measurement in an Open-arm 

Manometer 8-1-20
Figures 

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual LOF-3

Figure 8-1-8 Example of U Tube Manometer 8-1-22

Figure 8-1-9 Example of a Water Trap 8-1-26

Figure 8-1-10 Example of an Approved Fan 8-1-28

Figure A-1 APHIS Form 205-R, Instructions and Worksheet for Calibrating 

Portable Temperature Sensors A-1-3

Figure A-2 APHIS Form 206-R, Test of the Accuracy of the Permanent 

RTD Sensors Installed in Hot Water Tanks A-1-4

Figure A-3 APHIS Form 207-R, Sensor Location Diagram Fruit Weights 

and Pulp Temperatures A-1-5

Figure A-4 APHIS Form 208, Performance Test for Mango Hot Water Immersion Tank A-1-6

Figure A-5 Calibration of Temperature Probes (Cold Treatment) A-1-7

Figure A-6 Location of Temperature Sensors in Containerized Cargo (Cold 

Treatment) A-1-8

Figure A-7 Example of PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record, With Tarpaulin (front) A-1-10

Figure A-8 Example of PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record, With Tarpaulin (back) A-1-11

Figure A-9 Example of PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record, Without Tarpaulin (front) A-1-13

Figure A-10 Example of PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record, Without Tarpaulin (back) A-1-14

Figure A-11 Example of PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement A-1-17

Figure A-12 Example of PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification A1-20

Figure A-13 Example of PPQ Form 449-R, Temperature Recording Calibration Report A-1-30

Figure A-14 Example of PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or Treatment A-1-32

Figure A-15 Example of PPQ Form 556, In Transit Cold Treatment Clearance Report A-1-35

Figure A-16 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 

1 of 8) A-1-36

Figure A-17 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 

2 of 8) A-1-37

Figure A-18 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 

3 of 8) A-1-38

Figure A-19 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 

4 of 8) A-1-39

Figure A-20 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 

5 of 8) A-1-40

Figure A-21 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 

6 of 8) A-1-41

Figure A-22 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 

7 of 8) A-1-42

Figure A-23 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 

8 of 8) A-1-43

Figure G-1 Approved Half Face Respirators G-1-2
Figures 

LOF-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Figure G-2 Approved Full Face Respirators G-1-3

Figure G-3 Approved Organic Vapor/Acid Gas/P100 Cartridges G-1-3

Figure G-4 Approved SCBA G-1-3

Figure G-5 Approved AirHawk Ultra Elite Spectacle Kit-Sidewire G-1-4
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual LOT-1

Treatment 

Manual

Tables

Table 1-1-1 How to Use Decision Tables 1-1-6

Table 1-1-2 Example of a FIFRA Section 18 Exemption Treatment 

Schedule 1-1-9

Table 1-1-3 Reporting Issues with or Suggestions for the Treatment 

Manual 1-1-9

Table 2-2-1 Properties of Gaseous Phases of Fumigants 2-2-5

Table 2-3-1 List of Commodities Covered by FIFRA Section 18 

Exemption 2-3-3

Table 2-4-1 Determine Reporting Requirements 2-4-7

Table 2-4-2 Determine the Number of Temperature Sensors 2-4-9

Table 2-4-3 Determining Number and Placement of Circulation Fans for 

Tarped Break Bulk Cargo 2-4-16

Table 2-4-4 Determine Whether to Use Commodity or Air Temperature for 

Determining Dosage Rate for Nonpulpy Commodities 2-4-22

Table 2-4-5 Determine the Need to Add Gas and Adjust Exposure 2-4-32

Table 2-4-6 Determine the Extended Exposure Period for Non-equivalent 

Schedules 2-4-33

Table 2-4-7 Determine Gas Concentration Values and Corrections for Fruits 

and Vegetables at the 30-minute Reading of T101-a-1 or Equivalent Schedules 2-4-36

Table 2-4-8 Determine Gas Concentration Values and Corrections for Fruits 

and Vegetables at the 2-Hour Reading of T101-a-1 or Equivalent Schedules 2-4-37

Table 2-4-9 Determine Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity 2-4-39

Table 2-4-10 Determine the Aeration Procedure 2-4-39

Table 2-4-11 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Nonsorptive, 

Containerized Cargo 2-4-41

Table 2-4-12 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Nonsorptive, 

Noncontainerized Cargo—Outdoors 2-4-42

Table 2-4-13 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Nonsorptive, 

Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors 2-4-43

Table 2-4-14 Determine Number of Fans for Aeration of Fresh Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers 2-4-44

Table 2-4-15 Determine When to Release the Commodity After Aeration of 

Fresh Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers—Indoors or 

Outdoors 2-4-45

Table 2-4-16 Determine when to Release the Commodity for Sorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Outdoors 2-4-46

Table 2-4-17 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Sorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors 2-4-46
Tables 

LOT-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Table 2-4-18 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Sorptive Commodities in Containers—Indoors 2-4-48

Table 2-4-19 Determine when to Release the Commodity for Sorptive Commodities in Containers—Outdoors 2-4-49

Table 2-5-1 Determine Whether to Use Commodity or Air Temperature for 

Determining Dosage Rate 2-5-9

Table 2-5-2 Determine the Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity 

During Chamber Fumigations 2-5-11

Table 2-5-3 Determine the Aeration Procedure for Chamber 

Fumigations 2-5-11

Table 2-5-4 Determine When to Release the Commodity After NAP 

Fumigation 2-5-12

Table 2-5-5 Determine When to Release the Commodity After Vacuum 

Fumigation 2-5-13

Table 2-6-1 Determine Time for Extended Exposure 2-6-14

Table 2-8-1 Responsibilities for Approving Tarpless Container 

Fumigations 2-8-3

Table 2-8-2 Determine Whether to Use Commodity or Air Temperature for 

Determining Dosage Rate For Nonpulpy Commodities 2-8-13

Table 2-8-3 Determine the Need to Add Gas and Adjust Exposure 2-8-20

Table 2-8-4 Determine the Extended Exposure Period to Commodities that 

are Not T101-a-1 Equivalent 2-8-21

Table 2-8-5 Determine Gas Concentration Values and Corrections for Fruits 

and Vegetables at the 30-Minute Reading 2-8-24

Table 2-8-6 Determine Gas Concentration Values and Corrections for Fruits 

and Vegetables at the 2-Hour Reading 2-8-25

Table 2-8-7 Determine Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity for Tarpless Container Fumigation 2-8-26

Table 2-9-1 Determine the Extended Exposure Period for Closed-Door Containerized Cargo 2-9-20

Table 2-10-1 Effect of Hose Inside Diameter on Rate of Gas Introduction 

through a 25-Foot Hose (approximates, depending on cylinder 

pressure) 2-10-4

Table 2-10-2 Effect of Hose Length on Rate of Gas Introduction Through a 1/

8-Inch Inside Diameter Hose 2-10-4

Table 2-11-1 NIOSH Recommended Respiratory Protection When Applying 

Phosphine 2-11-7

Table 2-11-2 Amount of Phosphine Liberated by Various Products 2-11-8

Table 2-11-3 Phosphine Residue Tolerances 2-11-31

Table 2-13-1 Common Products Dilution Ratio to Add to 1 Part Bleach 2-

13-6

Table 3-4-1 Pressure Temperature Relationships 3-4-2

Table 3-5-1 Example of a Treatment Schedule 3-5-4

Table 3-7-1 Number of Sensors in a Warehouse 3-7-17

Table 5-2-1 Pest-Specific Minimum Absorbed Dose (Gy) For Any Approved 

Imported Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers, and Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers Moved Interstate from Hawaii, Puerto 

Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands 5-2-25
Tables 

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual LOT-3

Table 5-4-1 Fumigation Treatment Options for Khapra Beetle Infested 

Material 5-4-12

Table 6-2-1 Vacuum Chamber Classification Table 6-2-4

Table 6-2-2 Chamber Checklist 6-2-6

Table 6-3-1 Chamber Checklist 6-3-13

Table 6-4-1 Number of Temperature Sensors per Compartment 6-4-6

Table 6-4-2 Number of Temperature Sensors in a Warehouse 6-4-11

Table 6-5-1 Hypothetical Certification Results: Treatment Tank with Multiple 

Set Points 6-5-3

Table A-1 Instructions for Completing PPQ Form 429A and PPQ Form 

429B A-1-15

Table A-2 Instructions for Completing PPQ Form 519, Compliance 

Agreement A-1-18

Table A-3 Distribution of PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement A-1-

19

Table A-4 Instructions for Initiating an EAN A-1-22

Table A-5 Instructions for Completing PPQ Form 449-R A-1-31

Table A-6 Determine Paperwork to Be Presented upon Arrival of a Precleared Commodity A-1-33

Table A-7 Distribution of PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or Treatment A-1-34

Table C-1 Conversion Tables C-1-1

Table D-1 Hyperlinks to Lists of Certified Treatment Facilities, Vessels, 

and Containers D-1-1

Table E-1 Cylinder Tare, Net, and Gross Weights E-1-25

Table E-2 DC Scientific Glass - Approved Thermometers E-1-45

Table E-3 Fisher Scientific - Approved Thermometers E-1-46

Table E-4 VWR - Approved Thermometers E-1-46

Table E-5 Cole-Parmer - Approved Thermometers E-1-47

Table F-1 Crop Group 1: Root and Tuber F-1-2

Table F-2 Crop Group 2: Leaves of Root and Tuber Vegetables F-1-3

Table F-3 Crop Group 3: Bulb Vegetable (Allium spp.) F-1-4

Table F-4 Crop Group 4: Leafy Vegetables (except Brassica 

vegetables) F-1-5

Table F-5 Crop Group 5: Brassica (Cole) Leafy Vegetables F-1-6

Table F-6 Crop Group 6: Legume Vegetables (succulent or dried) F-1-7

Table F-7 Crop Group 7: Leaves of Legume Vegetables F-1-8

Table F-8 Crop Group 8: Fruiting Vegetables F-1-9

Table F-9 Crop Group 9: Cucurbit Vegetables F-1-10

Table F-10 Crop Group 10: Citrus Fruit F-1-11

Table F-11 Crop Group 11: Pome Fruit F-1-12

Table F-12 Crop Group 12: Stone Fruit F-1-13

Table F-13 Crop Group 13: Berries and Small Fruit F-1-14

Table F-14 Crop Group 14: Tree Nuts F-1-16

Table F-15 Crop Group 15: Cereal Grains F-1-17

Table F-16 Crop Group 16: Forage, Fodder,and Straw of Cereal 

Grains F-1-18

Table F-17 Crop Group 17: Grass, Forage, Fodder, and Hay F-1-19
Tables 

LOT-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Table F-18 Crop Group 18: Nongrass Animal Feeds (Forage, Fodder, 

Straw, and Hay) F-1-20

Table F-19 Crop Group 19: Herbs and Spices F-1-21

Table F-20 Crop Group 20: Oilseed F-1-23

Table F-21 Crop Group 21: Edible Fungi F-1-24

Table F-22 Crop Group 22: Stalk, Stem, and Leaf Petiole Vegetables F1-25

Table F-23 Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible 

Peels F-1-26

Table F-24 Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible 

Peels F-1-27

Table F-25 Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible 

Peels F-1-28

Table F-26 Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible 

Peels F-1-29

Table F-27 Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible 

Peels F-1-30

Table F-28 Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible 

Peels F-1-31

Table F-29 Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible 

Peels F-1-32
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 1-1-1

Chapter

1

Introduction

Contents

Purpose 1-1-2

Restrictions 1-1-2

Scope 1-1-2

What the Manual Does Not Cover 1-1-3

Users 1-1-4

Related Documents 1-1-4

Conventions 1-1-4

Advisories 1-1-5

Boldface 1-1-5

Bullets 1-1-5

Change Bar 1-1-6

Chapters 1-1-6

Contents 1-1-6

Control Data 1-1-6

Decision Tables 1-1-6

Examples 1-1-6

Footnotes 1-1-7

Heading Levels 1-1-7

Hypertext Links (Highlighting) to Tables, Figures, and Headings 1-1-7

Indentions 1-1-7

Italics 1-1-7

Numbering Scheme 1-1-8

Transmittal Number 1-1-8

FIFRA Section 18 Treatment Schedules 1-1-9

Using the Manual 1-1-9

Reporting Issues with or Suggestions for the Treatment Manual 1-1-9

Manual Updates 1-1-10

Ordering Additional Manuals and Revisions 1-1-10
Introduction

Purpose

1-1-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Purpose

The procedures and treatment schedules listed in this manual are 

administratively authorized for use in the U.S. Department of Agriculture, 

Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Plant Protection and Quarantine 

(USDA-APHIS-PPQ). The treatment of listed commodities prevents the 

movement of agricultural pests into or within the United States. An officer may 

determine that other commodities require treatment to prevent similar pest 

movement.

Restrictions

Treatment recommendations listed in this manual are based on uses authorized 

under provisions of the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act 

(FIFRA), as amended. Directions appearing on the label, Section 18 

Emergency Exemptions, and manual instructions must be followed. 

Nevertheless, some treatments may damage commodities. 

PPQ personnel may not make any warranty or representations, expressed or 

implied, concerning the use of these pesticides.

The occasional use of registered trade names in this manual does not imply an 

endorsement of those products or of the manufacturers by the USDA-APHIS.

Scope

This manual covers treatments for quarantine significant plant pests for 

imported and domestic commodities. 

This manual is broadly divided into ten sections:

NOTICE

Do not treat unlisted commodities until consulting and receiving approval from the 

USDA-APHIS-PPQ Science and Technology, Treatment Mitigation Technology 

(S&T-TMT) in Miami, Florida.

Approval from S&T-TMT must be obtained any time a treatment schedule is used 

that is not an approved schedule from this manual.

NOTICE

Do not treat unlisted commodities until consulting and receiving approval from 

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT.

Obtain approval from S&T-TMT each time a treatment is used that is not an 

approved schedule from this manual.
Introduction

What the Manual Does Not Cover

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 1-1-3

Chemical Treatments

Nonchemical Treatments

Residue Monitoring

Treatment Schedules

Certifying Facilities

Emergency Aid and Safety

Equipment

Glossary

Appendixes

Index

Each section contains a Table of Contents, an Overview, and where 

appropriate, a Methods and Procedures section. The Overview is a broad, 

general description of what is covered in the section. Methods and Procedures 

cover the “how to” of that particular activity, as well as procedural and 

reference material for performing tasks associated with each activity. The 

Appendixes contain information directly associated with treatment activities, 

but are placed in the back so they do not interfere with the flow of procedural 

instructions.

What the Manual Does Not Cover

This manual does not cover treatments conducted in the United States for 

export to a foreign country. Export treatments are based on the importing 

countries’ requirements and may be obtained from the Phytosanitary Export 

Database (PExD) or official communication from the importing country.

With exports, PPQ does not have the authority to require more restrictive 

measures than the importing country requires. When certifying an export 

treatment has occurred, ensure that the mandatory components of the treatment 

are met, and all safety guidelines are followed. Importing countries treatment 

requirements are provided through published regulations, import permits, and 

other official communication. Maintain quality assurance at the local level to 

ensure that all treatments are conducted according to the importing country’s 

requirements.

Mandatory components to consider related to an export treatment:

1. Follow the current pesticide label.

2. Ensure the safety of the employee.

3. Base the treatment on the foreign country’s import requirements.
Introduction

Users

1-1-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

For more information, contact the PPQ Export Certification Specialist in your 

state or state of export. You can also visit the Export Services Program website 

or email the general Export Services mailbox.

Users

This manual is used primarily by PPQ officers, PPQ headquarters personnel, 

and State cooperators involved in conducting treatments. The secondary users 

of this manual are other government agencies, fumigators, pest control 

operators, foreign governments, and other interested parties.

Related Documents

The following documents are related to this manual:

Agricultural Commodity Import Requirements (ACIR) database

APHIS Safety and Health Manual (internal document only)

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

Title 7 (Agriculture)

Title 46 (Shipping) Chapter 1, Part 147—Interim Regulations for 

Shipboard Fumigation

Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, Rodenticide Act, as amended

Pesticide labels and labeling

Plant Import Manuals

Safety Data Sheets (SDS)

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Technical 

Manual

Application

This manual serves both as a field manual for employees conducting 

treatments and as a reference for PPQ officers, program managers, and staff 

officers. Under APHIS policy, only certified pesticide applicators may conduct 

or monitor treatments. This manual will also serve as a reference for 

researching the types of treatments available for imports and to answer 

questions from importers, industry, and foreign countries.

Conventions

Conventions are established by custom and are widely recognized and 

accepted. Conventions used in this manual are listed below.
Introduction

Conventions

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 1-1-5

Advisories

Advisories are used throughout this manual to bring important information to 

your attention. Please carefully review each advisory. The definitions have 

been updated as to coincide with the American National Standards Institute 

(ANSI) with the goal of making the warnings easy to recognize and 

understand, thus limiting the human and dollar cost of foreseeable errors and 

accidents.1

Boldface

Boldface type is used to emphasize important words throughout this manual. 

These words include, but are not limited to: cannot, do not, does not, except, 

lacks, must, neither, never, nor, not, only, other than.

Bullets

Bulleted lists indicate that there is no order of priority to the information being 

listed.

1 TCIF Guideline, Admonishments (Safety-Related Warning Message), TCIF-99-021 Issue 1, p.4.

! DANGER

Danger box is used in the event of imminent risk of death or serious injury.

! WARNING

Warning box is used in the event of possible risk of serious injury.

! CAUTION

Caution box is used for tasks involving minor to moderate risk of injury.

NOTICE

Notice box is used to alert a reader of important information or Agency policy.

SAFETY

Safety box is used for general instructions or reminders related to safety.
Introduction

Conventions

1-1-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Change Bar

A black change bar in the left margin is used to indicate a change appearing on 

a revised page.

Chapters

This manual contains the following chapters: Introduction, Chemical 

Treatments, Nonchemical Treatments, Residue Monitoring, Treatment 

Schedules, Certifying Facilities, Emergency Aid and Safety, Equipment, 

Glossary, Appendixes, and Index.

Contents

Every chapter has a table of contents listing only the first- and second-level 

headings within the chapter.

Control Data

Control data is located at the top and bottom of each page to help users keep 

track of where they are in the manual and be aware of updates to specific 

chapters, sections, appendixes, etc., in the manual. At the top of the page is the 

chapter title and first-level heading for that page. At the bottom of the page is 

the transmittal number (month, year, number), manual title, page number, and 

unit responsible for content. To track revisions, use the control data.

Decision Tables

Decision tables are used throughout the manual. The first and middle columns 

in each table represent conditions, and the last column represents the action to 

be taken after all conditions listed for that row are considered. Begin with the 

column headings and move left to right, and if the condition does not apply, 

then continue one row at a time until you find the condition that does apply.

Examples

Examples are used to clarify a point by applying it to a real-world situation. 

Examples always appear in boxes as a means of visually separating them from 

the other information contained on a page.

Table 1-1-1 How to Use Decision Tables

If you: And if the condition 

applies: Then:

Read this column cell and 

row first

Continue in this cell TAKE the action listed in this 

cell

Find the previous condition 

did not apply, then read this 

column cell

Continue in this cell TAKE the action listed in this 

cell
Introduction

Conventions

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 1-1-7

Footnotes

Footnotes comment on or cite a reference to text and are referenced by number. 

The footnotes used in this manual include general text footnotes, figure 

footnotes, and table footnotes.

General text footnotes are located at the bottom of the page.

When space allows, figure and table footnotes are located directly below the 

associated figure or table. However, for multi-page tables or tables that cover 

the length of a page, footnote numbers and footnote text cannot be listed on 

the same page. If a table or figure continues beyond one page, the associated 

footnotes will appear on the page following the end of the figure or table.

Heading Levels

Within each chapter and section there are four heading levels. The first-level 

heading is indicated by a horizontal line across both left and right columns 

with the heading language across the left and right columns directly 

underneath. The body text after a first-level heading is located inside the 

margined text area, one line after the heading language. The second- and thirdlevel headings are inside the margined text area with the body text following 

underneath. The fourth-level heading is inside the margined text area followed 

by a period and leading into the text.

Hypertext Links (Highlighting) to Tables, Figures, and 

Headings

Figures, headings, and tables are cross-referenced in the body of the manual 

and are highlighted in boldface type. These appear in blue hypertext in the 

online manual.

Indentions

Entry requirements which are summarized from CFR’s, import permits, or 

policies are indented on the page.

Italics

The following items are italicized throughout the Treatment Manual:

EXAMPLE Examples are graphically placed boxes within the text as a means of 

visually separating information from other information contained on 

the page. Examples will always appear in a box.

EXAMPLE Refer to Reporting Issues with or Suggestions for the Treatment 

Manual on page 1-1-9 to determine where to report problems with 

this manual.
Introduction

Conventions

1-1-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Cross-references to headings

Publication names

Scientific names of commodities

Numbering Scheme

A three-level numbering scheme is used in this manual for pages, tables, and 

figures. The first number represents the section. The second number represents 

the chapter. The third number represents the page, table, or figure. This 

numbering scheme allows for easier updating and adding pages without having 

to reprint an entire chapter. Dashes are used in page numbering to differentiate 

page numbers from decimal points.

Transmittal Number

The transmittal number contains the month, year, and a consecutively-issued 

number (beginning with -01 for the first edition and increasing consecutively 

for each update to the edition). The transmittal number is only changed when 

the specific chapter sections, appendixes, glossary, tables, or index is updated. 

If no changes are made, then the transmittal number remains unchanged. The 

transmittal number only changes for the entire manual when a new edition is 

issued or changes are made to the entire manual.

EXAMPLE 12/2018-14 is the transmittal number for this update and is located in 

the control data on the pages in this chapter

12 is the month the update was issued

2018 is the year the update was issued

14 is the number (the original new edition was 01, plus 13 updates)
Introduction

Using the Manual

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 1-1-9

FIFRA Section 18 Treatment Schedules

Treatment schedules which are FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions (such as the 

example below) are followed by a “Notice” box to help you determine the 

current exemption status.

Using the Manual

Review the contents of this manual to get a feel for the scope of material 

covered. Glance through the section you will be using, and familiarize yourself 

with the information organization. Use the table of contents to find the 

information you need. If the table of contents is not specific enough, use the 

index to find the topic and corresponding page number.

Reporting Issues with or Suggestions for the Treatment 

Manual

Use Table 1-1-3 to determine where to report issues with the Treatment 

Manual.

Table 1-1-2 Example of a FIFRA Section 18 Exemption Treatment Schedule

Minimum Concentration Readings (ounces) At:

Temperature 

(°F)

Dosage Rage 

(lb/1000 ft3) 0.5 hrs 2 hrs 3 hrs 3.5 hrs

90 or above 2 26 19 19 —

80-89 2.5 32 24 24 —

70-79 3 38 29 24 —

60-69 3 38 29 — 24

NOTICE

Do not use this treatment schedule if its FIFRA Section 18 Exemption has expired. 

For the current exemption status, call your local State Plant Health Director (SPHD).

Table 1-1-3 Reporting Issues with or Suggestions for the Treatment Manual

If you: Then:

 Are unable to access the 

online manual

 Have a suggestion for improving the format (layout, spelling, 

etc.)

CONTACT the PPQ Manuals Unit at 240-529-0350 or 

email PPQ.IRM.ISMU.Manuals.Feedback@usda.gov

Disagree with policy, procedures, 

or the admissibility of a commodity

CONTACT PPQ Import Services Customer Support at 

301-851-2046 or 1-877-770-5990 with the reason for 

the disagreement and a recommendation

Have a urgent situation requiring 

an immediate response

CONTACT a PPQ treatment specialist by e-mail 

ppq.ops.treatments@usda.gov 
Introduction

Using the Manual

1-1-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Manual Updates

The PPQ Manuals Unit issues and maintains manuals electronically on the 

Manuals Unit website. The online manuals contain the most up-to-date 

information. Immediate update revisions are distributed via the APHIS 

Stakeholder Registry to anyone who has subscribed to receive Treatment 

Manual updates. To subscribe to the Stakeholder Registry, register at this 

website.

Ordering Additional Manuals and Revisions

Although using the online manuals is the preferred method, APHIS employees 

may order hard copies of manuals from the APHIS-MRP Business Services, 

Acquisition & Asset Management, Printing, Distribution, Mail, Copier 

Solutions (PDMCS). Visit the PDMCS website for detailed information and 

printing costs. The Manuals Unit is not responsible for printing costs.
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-1-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Overview

Contents

Overview 2-1-1

Fumigants 2-2-1

Aerosols 2-12-1

Dips 2-13-1

Dusts 2-14-1

Sprays 2-15-1

Introduction

The Chemical Treatments section of this manual is organized by chemicals as 

follows:

Fumigants

Aerosols and Micronized Dust

Use the Contents in this section to quickly find the information you need. If the 

Contents is not specific enough, then turn to the Index to find the topic and its 

page number.
Chemical Treatments Overview

Introduction

2-1-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-2-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants

Contents

Fumigants—Methyl Bromide 2-3-1

Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride 2-10-1

Fumigants—Phosphine 2-11-1

Introduction

Fumigation is the act of releasing and dispersing a toxic chemical so it reaches 

the target organism in a gaseous state. Chemicals applied as aerosols, smokes, 

mists, and fogs are suspensions of particulate matter in air and are not

fumigants.

The ideal fumigant would have the following characteristics:

Easily and cheaply generated

Easily detected by human senses

Easily diffuses and rapidly penetrates commodity

Harmless to foods and commodities

Highly toxic to the target pest

Inexpensive

Insoluble in water

Nonexplosive

Nonflammable

Nonpersistent

Nontoxic to plants and vertebrates (including humans)

Stable in the gaseous state (will not condense to a liquid)

Unfortunately, no one fumigant has all the above properties, but those used by 

APHIS and PPQ have many of these characteristics.

The toxicity of a fumigant depends on the respiration rate of the target 

organism. Generally, the lower the temperature, the lower the respiration rate 

of the organism which tends to make the pest less susceptible. Fumigation at 

lower temperatures requires a higher dosage rate for a longer exposure period 

than fumigation at higher temperatures. 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants

Monitoring of Quarantine Treatments

2-2-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Fumigants vary greatly in their mode of action. Some kill rapidly while others 

kill slowly. In sublethal dosages, some fumigants may have a paralyzing effect 

on the pest while others will not allow the pest to recover. Some fumigants 

have no effect on commodities, while others are detrimental even at low 

concentrations. Commodities vary in their sorption of fumigants and in the 

effort required to aerate the commodities after fumigation.

Due to the reduction in number of labeled fumigants, there is seldom a choice 

in selecting fumigants. When there is a choice, factors such as the commodity 

to be treated, pest and stages present, type of structure, and cost should be 

considered in selecting a fumigant.

The only authorized fumigants are:

Methyl bromide (MB)

Phosphine (PH) (There are two chemicals used for phosphine: AP–

aluminum phosphide; and MP–magnesium phosphide)

Sulfuryl fluoride (SF) (Vikane)

Much of the information on fumigants is based on MB, with modifications as 

needed for the other fumigants.

Monitoring of Quarantine Treatments

Monitoring of program fumigations is performed to ensure that effective 

fumigant concentration levels are maintained throughout the treatment to 

prevent the introduction of quarantine pests. Quarantine fumigations 

employing restricted use pesticides require careful monitoring to assure 

efficacy and personal safety, to maintain pesticide residues within acceptable 

limits, and to preserve commodity quality. These requirements are included in 

the fumigant label, and it is a violation of Federal law to use fumigants and 

pesticides in a manner inconsistent with their labeling.

Nonperishable Commodities in Commodities Temporary 

Enclosures

PPQ officers will provide onsite monitoring from introduction of the fumigant 

through completion of the 2 hour gas concentration readings. Half hour and 2 

hour readings are required for these treatments. These readings and general 

observations permit the officer to determine how a particular treatment is 

progressing and to make necessary corrections to the enclosure or fumigant 

concentration level.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants

Monitoring of Quarantine Treatments

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-2-3

Perishable Commodities in Temporary Enclosures

The monitoring officer will remain on the site through the entire fumigation of 

perishable commodities. Continuous monitoring allows the officer to alert the 

pest control operator at any time to implement necessary corrective measures. 

Due to the nature of the commodity and the length of treatment, onsite 

monitoring of yam and chestnut fumigations may be interrupted after the 2 

hour reading when efficacy and safety considerations warrant.

These instructions do not prevent the officer from leaving the immediate 

fumigation site for brief periods when it is necessary and safe to do so. The 

pest control operator must be notified of the PPQ officer’s intended absence. 

These absences would ordinarily be limited to 20 minutes (e.g., restroom 

breaks or a medical condition) and do not constitute a break in service. These 

practices are in place in many locations and will require only minor 

modifications in other areas.

Fumigation Guidelines

The following fumigation guidelines are commonly used throughout this 

manual:

Blowers or fans should be operated as follows:

For all bulk material, forced recirculation is required, check for 

uniform gas distribution by taking gas readings at four or five 

locations, including at least three from the commodity

For propagative material (T200-series schedules), the entire period of 

exposure, whether NAP or vacuum

Under tarpaulin (and vacuum fumigation for other than propagative 

material), fans should operate for 30 minutes after gas introduction or 

until an APHIS-approved gas detection device indicates uniform gas 

distribution

Dosages are listed by weight in the treatment schedules. If liquid measures 

are needed, convert from weight to volume using the conversion figures.

Dosage rate is based on 1,000 cubic feet of enclosure space, whether 

chamber, tarpaulin, van, freight car, ship hold, etc. Calculate dosage from 

the volume of the tarped fumigation enclosure.

All chamber fumigations should be conducted in USDA-approved 

chambers. (Refer to Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers on 

page 6-2-1 or Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers on 

page 6-3-1.)

NOTICE

Phosphine fumigations do not require fans.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants

Monitoring of Quarantine Treatments

2-2-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Methyl bromide treatment schedules are indicated as “MB.” MB generally 

refers to any methyl bromide label. Specific MB label restrictions are 

noted in this manual for the “Q” label. Always check the label of the 

fumigant to be sure the commodity is listed on the label. Commodities 

that are not listed on the fumigant’s label are not authorized for 

fumigation with the manufacturer’s gas.

Ounces per 1,000 cubic feet (oz/1,000 ft3) is equal to milligrams per liter 

(mg/liter) and is equal to grams per cubic meter (g/m3).

Specified vacuum should be held throughout the exposure period

Volume of commodity being treated should not exceed two-thirds of 

enclosure volume unless otherwise specified in the treatment schedule
Chemical Treatments Fumigants

Physical Properties of Fumigants

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-2-5

Physical Properties of Fumigants

Table 2-2-1 summarizes the properties of fumigants:

Table 2-2-1 Properties of Gaseous Phases of Fumigants

Properties Methyl bromide Phosphine Sulfuryl fluoride

Chemical Formula CH3Br PH3 SO2F2

Boiling Point 3.6 °C (38.5 °F) -87.7 °C (-125.9 °F) -55.2 °C (-67 °F)

Vapor Density1

1 Vapor density is the weight of gas in air, with ‘1’ as the weight of air.

3.3 1.17 3.7

Flammability 

Limits in Air (v/v%)

10-15 percent by 

volume

>1.79 percent by 

volume

Nonflammable

Odor Odorless Garlic-like Odorless

Effects on Metals Reacts with aluminum, 

may damage electronic 

equipment

Copper, brass, gold, 

and silver severely 

damaged; electronic 

equipment damaged, 

other metals slightly 

affected in high 

humidity.

Non-corrosive
Chemical Treatments Fumigants

Physical Properties of Fumigants

2-2-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-3-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Contents

Properties and Use 2-3-1

Section 18 Exemption Treatment Schedules 2-3-2

Leak Detection and Gas Analysis 2-3-5

Effects of Temperature and Humidity 2-3-8

Packaging Materials Approved for Fumigation 2-3-8

Sorption 2-3-10

Residual Effect 2-3-11

Properties and Use

Methyl bromide (MB) (CH3Br) is a colorless, odorless, nonflammable 

fumigant. MB boils at 38.5 °F and has a very low solubility in water. As a gas, 

MB is three times heavier than air. As a liquid at 32 °F, 1 pound of MB is 

equivalent to 262 ml. For ease in transportation and handling, MB is 

compressed and stored in metal cylinders as a liquid.

MB is an effective fumigant for treating a wide variety of plant pests associated 

with a wide variety of commodities. MB is the most frequently used fumigant 

in quarantine fumigations. MB may also be used to devitalize plant material. 

MB is effective in treating the following pests:

Fungi (such as oak wilt fungus)

Insects (all life stages)

Mites and ticks (all life stages)

Nematodes (including cysts)

Snails and slugs

MB is effective over a wide range of temperatures (40 °F and above). In 

general, living plant material tolerates the dosage rate specified, although the 

degree of tolerance varies with species, variety, stage of growth, and condition 

of the plant material. MB accelerates the decomposition of plants in poor 

condition.

Since MB is three times heavier than air, it diffuses outward and downward 

readily, but requires fans to ensure upward movement and equal gas 

distribution. Fan circulation also enhances penetration of MB into the 

commodity. A volatilizer is used to heat the liquid MB in order to speed up its 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Section 18 Exemption Treatment Schedules

2-3-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

conversion to a gas. Once the gas is evenly distributed, it maintains that 

condition for the duration of the treatment unless an outside event such as 

excessive leakage occurs.

Section 18 Exemption Treatment Schedules

Methyl bromide fumigants, except those with “Q” labels, may be subject to 

requirements of the FIFRA Section 18 Quarantine Exemption. When 

commodities intended for food or feed are fumigated with methyl bromide 

under the FIFRA Section 18 Quarantine Exemption, one additional EPA 

requirement must be met: PPQ must monitor aeration by sampling the gas 

concentration to determine when a commodity may be released.

The EPA defines a Federal quarantine exemption (40 CFR 166.2(b)) as “A 

quarantine exemption may be authorized in an emergency condition to control 

the introduction or spread of any pest new to or not theretofore known to be 

widely prevalent or distributed within and throughout the United States and its 

territories.”

The Section 18 Exemption has been amended to permit treatment of 

commodities that are at risk for carrying Federal quarantine pests. This means 

that treatments are permitted not only for imported commodities, but also for 

domestic commodities growing in areas under quarantine for a regulated pest. 

This exemption does not authorize treatments of domestically grown 

commodities for export certification unless the treatment is necessary to move 

the commodity out of quarantine, i.e. the target pests must be Federally 

regulated pests.

In the Agriculture Commodity Import Requirements (ACIR) Treatment Tile 

treatment schedules, fumigation schedules under the FIFRA Section 18 

Quarantine Exemption are preempted by a “NOTICE” box to help determine 

the current exemption status. 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Section 18 Exemption Treatment Schedules

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-3-3

Table 2-3-1 is a list of commodities covered by the FIFRA Section 18 

exemption. This list will expire on March 03, 2026.

Table 2-3-1 List of Commodities Covered by FIFRA Section 18 Exemption 

Commodity

Minimum 

Temperature 

(°F)

Maximum 

Dosage 

Range 

(lb/1000 ft3)

Exposure 

Period 

(hours)

Avocado 70 4 4

Banana and Plantain 40 4 2

Banana leaf 40 4 2

Blueberry and unlabeled commodities from the berry and small fruit 

crop group 13-07

40 4 4

Cacti, edible (includes Opuntia) 40 4 3.5

Citrus fruit (crop group 10) 40 3 2

Coffee bean (green, unroasted) 40 9 12

Coconut (unprocessed, whole coconut without husk) 60 2.5 2

Cottonseed (for animal feed) 40 7 24

40 5 48

Cucurbit seed (unprocessed) 40 9 12

Dasheen (root and tuber) 40 4 4

Dragon fruit, Yellow dragon fruit (pitaya or pitahaya)1 40 4 2

Flowers, squash and loroco 40 4 2

Genip (Spanish lime) 40 4 4

Herbs and spices, fresh (crop group 19) 40 4 4

Ivy gourd 40 4 2

Kaffir lime leaves 40 4 2

Kola nut (cola) 40 6 6

Longan 40 4 2

Lychee fruit 40 4 2

Mango 40 4 2

Mint, dried 40 3 24

Mint, fresh 40 4 2

Oilseed (crop group 20) 40 9 12

Persimmon 40 4 2

Pomegranate, fresh 40 4 3

Pointed gourd 40 4 2

Rambutan 60 4 2

Seeds in the family Malvaceae for food use, including hibiscus and 

kenaf seed

40 3.5 2

Unlabeled commodities in the leaves of legume vegetable crop 

group 72

40 4 2.5

Unlabeled commodities in the root and tuber crop group 12 50 3 3.5
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Section 18 Exemption Treatment Schedules

2-3-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

The EPA only authorizes fumigation of commodities if they are listed on the 

label of the gas being used for the fumigation. The fumigator is responsible for 

ensuring that the commodity, its dosage, and the treatment duration is listed 

either on the product label or within the Section 18 authorization letter, which 

the PPQ officer should have readily available for any fumigator who requests 

it. The methyl bromide products that fumigators are authorized to use for 

Section 18 treatments are identified within the Section 18 authorization letter. 

To comply with State requirements, the fumigator is responsible for ensuring 

that the fumigant is registered in the State where it is being used.

Fumigation schedules in this publication are more detailed than what is 

provided in commercial labels in order to ensure that the phytosanitary 

treatments of imported commodities are efficacious.

When the treatment schedule is marked "MB", any methyl bromide fumigant 

may be used for the fumigation as long as the commodity, its dosage, and 

treatment duration are on the fumigant label.

Unlabeled commodities in the stone fruit crop group (12-12)2 (i.e., 

pluot, plumcot, aprium, cherrycot, peachcot)

40 4 3

Unlabeled commodities from the Bulb Vegetable Crop Group (3-07)2 40 4 4

Unlabeled commodities in the stalk, stem, and leaf petiole crop 

group (22)2

40 4 3.5

Unlabeled commodities in the following crop groups:2

 Brassica leafy vegetables (crop group 5)

 Cucurbit vegetables (crop group 9)

 Edible podded legume vegetables (crop group 6A)

 Fruiting vegetable (crop group 8-10)

 Leafy vegetables (except Brassica) (crop group 4)

 Leaves of roots and tubers (i.e., chicory) (crop group 2)

 Tropical and subtropical fruit, edible peel (crop group 23)

 Tropical and subtropical fruit, inedible peel (crop group 24)

40 4 2

1 Refer to the document Ecuador Dragon Fruit, Yellow Dragon Fruit, Pitahaya, Pitaya Fruit Admissible into Continental United 

States for more information.

2 The EPA crop groups are listed in Appendix F on page F-1-1 for quick reference. Refer to 40 CFR 180.41 Crop Group Tables 

for the official list of commodities within each crop group. All commodities included in the EPA sub-groups of each EPA crop 

group are also eligible for the FIFRA Section 18 exemption fumigation.

Table 2-3-1 List of Commodities Covered by FIFRA Section 18 Exemption (continued)

Commodity

Minimum 

Temperature 

(°F)

Maximum 

Dosage 

Range 

(lb/1000 ft3)

Exposure 

Period 

(hours)
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Leak Detection and Gas Analysis

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-3-5

Leak Detection and Gas Analysis

Require the fumigator to use an APHIS-approved gas detection device to 

measure gas concentration levels in tarpaulins. Require the fumigator to use an 

APHIS-approved leak detection device primarily to check for leaks around 

tarpaulins, chambers, application equipment, and as a safety device around the 

fumigation site. For a partial list of manufacturers of detection devices, refer to 

Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety 

Equipment on page E-1-1. Colorimetric tubes, which are supplied by the 

fumigator, are used to measure gas concentration levels during aeration.

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

In 2015, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) directed all methyl 

bromide (MB) registrants to amend the use directions on the labels of all 100% 

MB products. EPA required the changes in order to reflect recommendations in 

an EPA report.1

These amendments modify the use directions for fumigation and aeration 

procedures, modify respiratory requirements and equipment and update gas 

monitoring equipment. EPA requires all labels on newly manufactured MB to 

reflect these recommendations effective October 01, 2016; however, EPA is 

allowing existing stocks of MB to be used in accordance with the use 

directions on the existing stock’s (older) labels. 

PPQ officials and fumigators must closely examine gas cylinder labels in order 

to validate that the dosage, exposure, and commodity are either on the cylinder 

label or covered by a FIFRA Section 18 exemption. If a label is not affixed to 

the cylinder, DO NOT allow the fumigator to use that cylinder.

1 “Report of Food Quality Protection Act (FQPA) Tolerance Reassessment and Risk Management 

Decision (TRED) for methyl bromide, and Reregistration Eligibility Decision (RED) for Methyl 

Bromide’s Commodity Uses”, archive dated August 2006. 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

2-3-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

New Buffer Zone Requirements

All 2016 MB labels now require both a treatment and an aeration buffer zone. 

Both the treatment and aeration buffer zones are specific to the enclosure being 

fumigated and must be determined by tables in the Environmental Protection 

Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup 

Tables. The fumigators are responsible for using this website to determine the 

buffer zones and reporting both buffer zones to the PPQ official. If the 

treatment buffer zone is determined to be less than 30 feet, the PPQ official 

will maintain PPQ’s standard 30 foot treatment buffer zone; otherwise, the new 

treatment buffer zone must be observed. If the aeration buffer zone is 

determined to be less than 200 feet, then PPQ’s standard “200 feet for 10 

minutes” aeration buffer zone still applies for the first 10 minutes of aeration. 

The fumigator must refer to EPA’s website to determine the minimum aeration 

buffer zone to be maintained until the aeration period is complete and the 

fumigator has verified that gas concentration levels meet the conditions in the 

MB label. 

Transiting through buffer zones

The label permits vehicles to transit through both treatment and aeration buffer 

zones under specific conditions found in the label; it is up to the fumigator 

determine how or whether vehicles may transit in accordance with the label.

When using the newer 2016 MB label, changes to certain procedures and 

equipment in this chapter are displayed in a NOTICE box with a heading titled 

“MB 2016 Label”. 

MB 2016 Label (example)

When using existing stocks, follow the equipment and procedural guidance 

that is displayed in the body of the text (outside of the NOTICE box). 

If there is no “MB 2016 Label” NOTICE box, then the instructions apply to all 

MB labels, 2016 and older.

NOTICE

Use this information when the fumigator is using the 2016 MB label.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-3-7

MB 2016 Label

NOTICE

The PPQ official and the fumigator must use the following leak detection and 

gas analysis equipment:

An air purifying NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece respirator 

when gas concentrations are between 1 and 5 ppm

A self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approved prefix 

TC-13F when gas concentrations are 5 ppm or above

An APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device that is 

permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities or a portable 

photoionization detector to monitor gas concentrations in the breathing 

space

An APHIS-approved direct read gas detection device, such as colorimetric 

tubes, to determine gas concentrations when aerating and releasing the 

commodity

For a list of manufacturers and approved models refer to Reference Guide to 

Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment.

PPQ policy is to wear appropriate respiratory protection when air 

concentrations are above 1 ppm. However, the new MB labels allow workers to 

be present without respiratory protection for specific time limits over a 24-

hour period when air concentrations are:>3 to 5 ppm (90 minutes),

>2 to 3 ppm (160 minutes),

>1 to 2 ppm (4 hours), and

>0 to 1 ppm (8 hours).

These permissible work-time allowances will give the PPQ official sufficient 

time to calmly locate and don the appropriate respiratory protection should 

their PID (alarm set to go off at 1 ppm) indicate the presence of MB in the air.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Effects of Temperature and Humidity

2-3-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Effects of Temperature and Humidity

MB is effective at the same temperatures plants are generally handled (usually 

40 °F and above). In general, increases in temperature give a corresponding 

increase in the effectiveness of MB. All treatment schedule temperatures are 

listed with the corresponding dosage rate. Follow the dosage rates listed. A 

Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA) Section 3 

registration (the labeled rate of MB provided), or a Section 18 Exemption must

be in effect at the time of treatment.

For live plant material which is actively growing or with leaves, maintain a 

high percentage of humidity (above 75 percent) in the chamber by placing wet 

sphagnum or excelsior in the chamber or by wetting the chamber walls and 

floor. Protect actively growing or delicate plants from the direct air flow of 

fans. Do not add any moisture to the chamber when fumigating seeds. Too 

much moisture on the material to be fumigated may prevent the fumigant from 

reaching some of the pests.

Packaging Materials Approved for Fumigation

Plastic wrappings such as cellophane, films, and shrink wrap, and papers that 

are waxed, laminated, or waterproofed are not readily permeable and must be 

perforated, removed, or opened before fumigation. Approved packaging 

materials may be layered as long as perforations allow adequate MB 

penetration.

Packaging is considered either “routine” or “non-routine”. Routine packaging 

does not require S&T approval. Routine packaging is packaging that can be 

visually confirmed that it meets one of the following criteria:

Dry cloth

Dry, non-waxed or non-painted cardboard

Dry, non-waxed or non-painted, non-glossy paper

Dry, woven fabrics and plastics

Woven polypropylene bags that are not laminated with plastic or paper 

inside or out (these bags are typically used for holding seeds or grains)

Bags containing large quantity of seeds or grains (>2,000 lbs.) are 

referred to as “super sacks” or “totes” and must have the top of the bag 

opened to aid in fumigant dispersal and aeration

NOTICE

PPQ is not responsible for opening or perforating the wrapping.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Packaging Materials Approved for Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-3-9

Perforated plastics with evenly distributed holes on all sides and 0.93 

percent open area of surface, for example:

Holes that are 3/16-inch in diameter every 3 square inches

Holes that are 1/4-inch in diameter every 4 square inches

49+ pinholes per square inch

Plastic clamshells

Evenly distributed holes on all sides and 0.93 percent open area of 

surface

Holes on top and bottom must not be blocked when clamshells are 

stacked (i.e., clamshells must have recesses or ridges to prevent 

blockage)

Wooden boxes (lids removed if tightly sealed)

Non-routine packaging must be approved by S&T. Contact ppqtmt@usda.gov

for specifications for approval. Refer to Packaging—Non-Routine USDAApproved For Fumigation on page E-28 for a list of approved non-routine 

packaging manufacturers.

If the commodity is undergoing fumigation, the consignment can be rejected 

because of packaging.

NOTICE

Inform prospective importers that the wrappings on their shipments may have to be 

perforated according to PPQ specifications, removed, or opened if PPQ requires 

fumigation. 

To expedite commodity movement, importers should send a complete bag/wrap 

sample to S&T-TMT for approval.

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Email: ppqtmt@usda.gov
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Sorption

2-3-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Sorption

Sorption is the process of chemically or physically binding free MB on or 

within the fumigated commodity. Sorption makes the fumigant unavailable to 

kill the plant pest. There are three types of sorption—absorption, adsorption, 

and chemisorption. Sorption rate is high at first, then gradually reduces to a 

slow rate. Sorption increases the time required for aeration.

Commodities known or believed to be highly sorptive should not be fumigated 

in chambers unless concentration readings can be taken to ensure the required 

minimum concentration is met. Additional readings may be necessary in order 

to properly monitor gas concentration sorptive commodities in chambers.

For tarpaulin fumigation, additional gas readings are necessary to monitor 

concentration of gas to determine the rate of sorption. The following is a partial 

list of commodities known to be highly sorptive:

Burlap bales

Carpet backing

Cinnamon quills

Cocoa mats

Cotton

Flour and finely milled products

Gall nuts

Hardboard (MasoniteTM)

Incense

Myrobalan

Pistachio nuts

Polyamide waste

Polystyrene foam (Styrofoam)

Potato starch

Rubber (crepe or crude)

Vermiculite

Wood products (unfinished)

Wool (raw, except pulled)

Contact S&T-TMT if you are concerned about the sorptive properties of other 

commodities.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Residual Effect

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-3-11

Residual Effect

MB may adversely affect the shelf life of fresh fruits and vegetables, the 

viability of dormant and actively growing plants, and the germination of seed. 

Although MB may adversely affect some commodities, it is a necessary risk in 

order to control pests. Some dosage rates are near the maximum tolerance of 

the commodity, so care must be exercised in choosing the proper treatment 

schedule and applying the treatment.

MB may also adversely affect nonplant products. In general, articles with a 

high sulfur content may develop “off-odors” on contact with MB. In some 

commodities the odors are difficult or impossible to remove by aeration. If 

possible or practical, remove from the area to be fumigated any items that are 

likely to develop an undesirable odor.

The following items should not be fumigated:

Any commodity not listed on the label or lacking a FIFRA Section 18 

exemption

Any commodity lacking a treatment schedule

Automobiles

Baking powder

Blueprints

Bone meal

Butter, lard, or fats, unless in airtight containers

Charcoal (highly sorptive)

Cinder blocks or mixed concrete and cinder blocks

CO2 scrubbers2 (calcium hydroxide and calcium carbonate; MAXtend®)

EPDM rubber (ethylene propylene diene M-class; a type of synthetic 

rubber)

Electronic equipment3

Ethylene absorbers (potassium permanganate sachets used to remove 

ethylene from an enclosure, usually a container loaded with fruit)

Feather pillows

2 If the scrubbers are removed prior to fumigation, the consignment may be fumigated.

3 Electronic equipment may be fumigated, as long as it is properly sealed to protect against internal 

fluid contamination by the MB gas. Ensure that the liquid MB is completely volatilized before it is 

introduced into the area to be fumigated. Obtain a waiver from the importer agreeing to release the 

USDA from any damages.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide

Residual Effect

2-3-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Felt

Furs

High-protein flours (soybean, whole wheat, peanut)

Horsehair articles

Leather goods

Machinery with milled surfaces

Magazines and newspapers (made of wood pulp)

Magnesium articles (subject to corrosion)

Paper with high rag or sulfur content

Photographic chemicals and prints (not camera film or X-rays)

Polyurethane foam

Natural rubber goods, particularly sponge rubber, foam rubber, and 

reclaimed rubber including pillows, mattresses, rubber stamps, and 

upholstered furniture

Neoprene

Rug pads

Silver polishing papers

Woolens (especially angora), soft yarns, and sweaters; viscose rayon 

fabrics

Yak rugs
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin 

Fumigation

Contents

Methods and Procedures 2-4-1

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information 2-4-2

Materials Needed 2-4-3

PPQ Official Provides 2-4-3

Fumigator Provides 2-4-4

Preparing to Fumigate 2-4-6

Conducting the Fumigation 2-4-27

Special Procedures for Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period 2-4-33

Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period to Commodities that are 

Fumigated Using Treatment Schedules Other Than T101-a-1 or Equivalent 

(may include perishables) 2-4-33

Adding Gas to Fruits, Vegetables, or Perishable Commodities Using 

Schedule T101-a-1 or Equivalent 2-4-34

Aeration 2-4-38

Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity 2-4-38

Aeration Buffer Zones 2-4-39

Wearing Respiratory Protection 2-4-39

Aerating Nonsorptive, Containerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors 2-4-40

Aerating Nonsorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors 

2-4-41

Aeration Procedures for Fresh Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers—Indoors 

or Outdoors 2-4-43

Aerating Sorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors 2-4-45

Aerating Sorptive Commodities in Containers—Indoors and Outdoors 

2-4-47

Methods and Procedures

The procedures in this section provide PPQ officials and commercial 

fumigators with the methods, responsibilities, and precautions for tarpaulin 

fumigations.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

2-4-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

In 2015, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) directed all methyl 

bromide (MB) registrants to amend the use directions on the labels of all 100% 

MB products. EPA required the changes in order to reflect recommendations in 

an EPA report.1

These amendments modify the use directions for fumigation and aeration 

procedures, modify respiratory requirements and equipment and update gas 

monitoring equipment. EPA requires all labels on newly manufactured MB to 

reflect these recommendations effective October 01, 2016; however, EPA is 

allowing existing stocks of MB to be used in accordance with the use 

directions on the existing stock’s (older) labels. 

PPQ officials and fumigators must closely examine gas cylinder labels in order 

to validate that the dosage, exposure, and commodity are either on the cylinder 

label or covered by a FIFRA Section 18 exemption. If a label is not affixed to 

the cylinder, DO NOT allow the fumigator to use that cylinder.

New Buffer Zone Requirements

All 2016 MB labels now require both a treatment and an aeration buffer zone. 

Both the treatment and aeration buffer zones are specific to the enclosure being 

fumigated and must be determined by tables in the Environmental Protection 

Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup 

Tables. The fumigators are responsible for using this website to determine the 

buffer zones and reporting both buffer zones to the PPQ official. If the 

treatment buffer zone is determined to be less than 30 feet, the PPQ official 

will maintain PPQ’s standard 30 foot treatment buffer zone; otherwise, the new 

treatment buffer zone must be observed. If the aeration buffer zone is 

determined to be less than 200 feet, then PPQ’s standard “200 feet for 10 

minutes” aeration buffer zone still applies for the first 10 minutes of aeration. 

The fumigator must refer to EPA’s website to determine the minimum aeration 

buffer zone to be maintained until the aeration period is complete and the 

fumigator has verified that gas concentration levels meet the conditions in the 

MB label. 

Transiting through buffer zones

The label permits vehicles to transit through both treatment and aeration buffer 

zones under specific conditions found in the label; it is up to the fumigator 

determine how or whether vehicles may transit in accordance with the label.

1 “Report of Food Quality Protection Act (FQPA) Tolerance Reassessment and Risk Management 

Decision (TRED) for methyl bromide, and Reregistration Eligibility Decision (RED) for Methyl 

Bromide’s Commodity Uses”, archive dated August 2006. 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Materials Needed

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-3

When using the newer 2016 MB label, changes to certain procedures and 

equipment in this chapter are displayed in a NOTICE box with a heading titled 

“MB 2016 Label”. 

MB 2016 Label (example)

When using existing stocks, follow the equipment and procedural guidance 

that is displayed in the body of the text (outside of the NOTICE box). 

If there is no “MB 2016 Label” NOTICE box, then the instructions apply to all 

MB labels, 2016 and older.

Materials Needed

PPQ Official Provides

APHIS-approved leak detection device

Calculator (optional)

Forms (PPQ Form 429A and APHIS Form 2061, if necessary)

Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or supplied air respirator

NOTICE

Use this information when the fumigator is using the 2016 MB label.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Materials Needed

2-4-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

MB 2016 Label

Fumigator Provides

APHIS-approved gas detection device2 (e.g. thermal conductivity (TC) 

analyzer, infrared device, etc.)

Auxiliary pump for purging long gas sample tubes

Carbon dioxide filter (e.g., Ascarite®)

Colorimetric tubes (Refer to Appendix E for a list of APHIS-approved 

product ranges)

Desiccant (Drierite®)

Electrical wiring (grounded, permanent type), three prong extension cords

Exhaust blower and ducts

Fans (circulation, exhaust, and introduction)

Framework and supports

Gas introduction line

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from PPQ, PPQ must also 

provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage. The Air 

Check Advantage can be calibrated either by the manufacturer or by 

the PPQ official. Calibrate according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000. The MiniRAE 3000 must be calibrated by the PPQ 

official according to the manufacturer’s User Guide. Refer to Chapter 

8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C

2 The MB monitor must be calibrated annually. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for calibration 

information. If using a TC analyzer, Drierite and Ascarite must be used.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Materials Needed

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-5

Gas sampling tubes

Heat supply

Insecticides and spray equipment

Loose, wet sand

Methyl bromide

Padding

Sand or water snakes or adhesive sealer

Scales or dispensers3

Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or supplied air respirator

Tape

Tape measure

Tarpaulin

Temperature recorder and temperature sensors4

Thermometer5

Volatilizer (filled with water or antifreeze)

Warning signs/Placarding

3 All scales must be calibrated by the State, a company that is certified to conduct scale calibrations, 

or by the fumigator under the supervision of PPQ. The source and date of calibration must be posted 

in a visible location on or with the scale at all times. The scale must be calibrated following every 

repair or a minimum of every year.

4 Temperature sensors must be calibrated annually by the manufacturer or National Institute of 

Standards and Technology (NIST) within the range of 40 °F to 80 °F (4.4 °C to 26.7 °C).

5 The thermometer must be calibrated or replaced annually.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

MB 2016 Label

Preparing to Fumigate

Step 1: Selecting a Treatment Schedule

The PPQ official will select a treatment schedule to effectively eliminate the 

plant pest.

Turn to the Treatment Schedule Index and look up the available treatment 

schedule(s) by commodity (example—apples, pears, or citrus) or by pest (e.g., 

Mediterranean fruit fly). Some commodities may have several treatment 

schedules. Refer to Residual Effect on page 2-3-11 for a list of those 

commodities which may be damaged by MB. Each treatment schedule lists the 

target pest or pest group (e.g., Ceratitis capitata, surface feeders, wood borers), 

commodity, or both pest and commodity. If there is no schedule, the 

commodity may not be fumigated. Refer to Table 2-3-1 on page 2-3-3 to 

determine if a schedule is available under a FIFRA Section 18 Exemption. If a 

treatment is required, go to Table 2-4-1.

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from the fumigator, the 

fumigator must also provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved direct read gas detection device

Colorimetric tubes (e.g. Draeger, Sensidyne)

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device 

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000

Devices must be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-7

Step 2: Issuing a PPQ Form 523 (Emergency Action Notification)

When an intercepted pest is identified and confirmed by a PPQ Area Identifier 

as requiring action, the CBP or PPQ official will issue a PPQ Form 523 

(Emergency Action Notification - EAN) to the owner, broker, or 

representative. The EAN will list all treatment options. Follow instructions in 

Appendix A for completing and distributing the PPQ Form 523.

Step 3: Determining Section 18 Exemptions and Sampling Requirements

After selecting the treatment schedule, the PPQ official will be able to 

determine which treatment schedules are FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions. The 

schedule will be followed by a “NOTICE” box to help identify the current 

exemption status. Some treatment schedules are only FIFRA Section 18 

Exemptions at specific temperature ranges. Check the treatment schedule and 

temperature to determine if the fumigation will be a FIFRA Section 18 

Exemption. Refer to Table 2-3-1 on page 2-3-3 to determine if a schedule is 

available under a FIFRA Section 18 Exemption.

Step 4: Selecting a Fumigation Site

The PPQ official and the fumigator must consider the following factors in 

selecting a fumigation site:

Ability to heat (in colder areas)

Aeration requirements

Electrical power supply

Impervious surface

Multiple fumigation buffer zone overlap

Nonwork area that can be effectively marked and safeguarded or isolated

Water supply

Well-lighted area

Well-ventilated, sheltered area

Table 2-4-1 Determine Reporting Requirements

If a Treatment is Required: Then:

As a result of a pest interception GO to Step 2

As a condition of entry GO to Step 3
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Well-Ventilated, Sheltered Area

The PPQ official and the fumigator must select sites that are well-ventilated 

and sheltered. A well-ventilated site is required for exhausting gas before and 

when the tarpaulin is removed from the stack. Most warehouses have high 

ceilings and a number of windows/doors which can be used for ventilation. 

Some gas will escape from the tarpaulin even in the best conditions. Avoid 

areas where strong drafts are likely to occur.

In warehouses, the fumigator must provide an exhaust system to exhaust MB 

to the outside of the building. The fumigator must ensure that the exhausted 

gas does not reenter the building nor endanger people working outdoors.

When treatments are conducted in a particular location on a regular basis, the 

PPQ official must ensure that the fumigator designates a permanent site. At 

such sites, the fan used to remove the fumigant from the enclosure during 

aeration must be connected to a permanent stack extending above the roof 

level.

If fumigations are conducted outside, ensure that the fumigator selects a site 

that is semi-sheltered such as the leeward side of a warehouse, pier, or building 

that offers some protection from severe winds. Severe winds are defined as 

sustained winds or gusts of 30 m.p.h. or higher for any time period. Do not

allow the fumigator to proceed if there is a forecast from the National Weather 

Service of severe winds and/or thunderstorms at the beginning of, or for the 

entire length of, the fumigation.

Ability to Heat

When cooler temperatures (below 40 °F) are expected, the fumigator must 

ensure that the commodity temperatures are maintained above 40 °F. The PPQ 

official will take the ambient (air) temperature 12 inches above the floor. 

For treatments lasting 6 hours or longer, temperatures must be maintained at or 

above the starting treatment temperature for the entire duration of the 

treatment. Additionally, the PPQ official must monitor the temperature of the 

enclosure using temperature sensors and a temperature recorder. The 

temperature recording system for treatments lasting 6 hours or longer must 

meet the following specifications:

Accurate to within ±0.6 °C or ±1.0 °F in the treatment temperature range 

of 4.4 °C to 26.7 °C (40 °F to 80 °F)

Calibrated annually by the National Institute of Standards and Technology 

(NIST) or by the manufacturer

The calibration certificate will list a correction factor, if needed, and 

the correction factor would be applied to the actual temperature 

reading to obtain the true temperature.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-9

Capable of printing all temperature readings or downloading data to a 

secure source once per hour throughout the entire treatment (all 

temperature data must be accessible at a safe distance during the 

fumigation)

Tamper-proof

If one or more of the temperature readings go below the minimum temperature 

specified in the treatment schedule, the fumigation will be considered a failed 

treatment. The commodity must be re-treated, returned to the country of origin, 

reexported, or destroyed.

The PPQ official ensures that the fumigator places thermocouples evenly 

throughout the enclosure or container. The placement of the temperature 

sensors will vary depending on the item fumigated and the configuration of the 

fumigation site. Contact the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT (305) 278-4877 

for instructions regarding exact placement of the temperature sensors. Use 

Table 2-4-2 to determine the number of temperature sensors needed based on 

size of the enclosure.

! CAUTION

Commodities used for food or feed may not be re-treated. If commodities fall into this 

category, the only options are the following:

 Return to the country of origin

 Reexported to another country if they will accept the shipment

 Destroy by incineration

Table 2-4-2 Determine the Number of Temperature Sensors

Size of Enclosure (ft3) Number of Temperature Sensors

Up to 10,000 3

10,001-25,000 6

25,001-55,000 9

Larger than 55,000 12

NOTICE

Do not use flame or exposed electrical element heaters under the tarpaulin during 

treatment because MB may cause the formation of hydrogen bromide. Hydrogen 

bromide (hydrobromic acid) is a highly corrosive chemical which can cause damage 

to the heater and to surrounding materials, including the commodity. Hot air or 

radiator type heaters can be used for heating under tarpaulins. When using space 

heaters to heat warehouses, there must be adequate ventilation.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Impervious Surface

Select an asphalt, concrete, or tight wooden surface—not soil, gravel, or other 

porous material. If you must fumigate on a porous surface, require the 

fumigator to cover the surface with plastic tarpaulins. For large fumigations, 

covering the surface is not usually practical because pallets must be 

rearranged and heavy equipment used to move the commodity. On docks, 

wharfs, and piers, require the fumigator to seal cracks, holes, and manhole 

covers which will allow the MB to escape through the floor.

Nonwork Area

MB 2016 Label

NOTICE

The fumigator will determine the treatment buffer zone in accordance with the 

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity 

Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup Tables.

The treatment buffer zone surrounds the area where access is limited during 

treatment. If the fumigator determines that the buffer zone is less than 30’, then 

PPQ requires a 30’ buffer zone. If the fumigator determines that the buffer zone 

is greater than 30’, then PPQ must observe the prescribed buffer zone.

The treatment buffer zone extends from the perimeter of the enclosure to a 

distance determined by the fumigator in accordance with the label. Entry by 

any person except the PPQ official and the fumigator is prohibited except as 

provided in the “Exceptions to Buffer Zone Entry Restrictions” section of the 

label. 

The treatment buffer zone begins when the fumigant is introduced into the 

enclosure and ends when aeration begins, at which point the aeration buffer 

zone requirements apply.

The fumigator must define treatment and aeration buffer zone perimeters using 

physical barriers (such as walls, ropes, etc.) and placards to limit access to the 

buffer zone. Placards must meet all label requirements regarding specific 

warnings, information, and language.

The fumigator will permit transiting through buffer zones in accordance with 

the “Transit Exception” section of the label.

Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures

For multiple enclosures where buffer zones overlap, the fumigator must 

recalculate both the treatment and aeration buffer zones in accordance with the 

label and supply them to the PPQ official.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-11

Nonwork Area

The PPQ official and the fumigator must select a secure area where traffic and 

people are restricted from entering and which is isolated from people working. 

A nonwork area is preferred to help prevent accidents, such as a forklift 

piercing a tarpaulin. The fumigation area is the area 30 feet surrounding the 

tarpaulin and is separated from the non-fumigation area by a physical barrier 

such as ropes, barricades, or walls. If a wall of gas-impervious material is less 

than 30 feet from the tarpaulin, the wall may serve as the edge of the secured 

area. The fumigator must placard within the perimeter of the secured area. 

Placards must meet label requirements regarding specific warnings, 

information, and language. Placards generally include the name of the 

fumigant, the fumigation date, time, and the name of the company conducting 

the fumigation. The fumigator must restrict access to the fumigation area to the 

fumigator’s employees and PPQ employees monitoring the treatment. Use 

rope or marker tape to limit access within 30 feet of the enclosure. Unless you 

(PPQ) authorize their use, do not allow motor vehicles (includes forklifts) to 

operate within 30 feet of the enclosure and aeration area during the fumigation 

and aeration periods. The area outside the 30-foot perimeter is usually regarded 

as a safe distance from the tarpaulin. Gas concentrations exceeding 5.0 ppm 

(TLV for MB) are seldom recorded by gas monitoring, except during aeration. 

The 30-foot perimeter is not specifically mentioned on the MB label, but is 

required for PPQ supervised fumigations. When space is tight, it is permissible 

to overlap two adjoining 30-foot perimeters. When multiple fumigations are 

occurring simultaneously, there must be sufficient space for a person wearing 

SCBA to walk between the tarpaulins.

Electrical Power Supply

An adequate electrical source must be available to run the circulation fans and 

the gas detection device. A separate line should be available for the gas 

detection device. Electrical outlets must be grounded and conveniently located 

in relation to the fumigation area. PPQ does not allow generators as a power 

source except under emergency conditions.

Water Supply

A water supply is necessary for safety purposes. Water is necessary for 

washing off MB if the liquid form is spilled on someone. If no permanent 

water is present on site, the fumigator must provide a 5-gallon supply of 

potable, unfrozen water.

Well-Lighted Areas

The fumigator will ensure that the area has adequate lighting for safety 

purposes and for reading gas detection devices, thermometers, and determining 

whether the tarpaulin has holes or tears.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Aeration Requirements

The fumigator is responsible for all aspects of aeration. When the fumigation is 

a Section 18 exemption fumigation, the PPQ official is required to verify the 

final gas concentration reading(s). Refer to Aeration on page 2-4-38 for more 

information.

Step 5: Arranging the Stack

Break Bulk Cargo

Ensure that the fumigator arranges the cargo in a square or rectangular shape, if 

possible, to make it easy to cover and to calculate the volume of the stack. An 

even shaped stack is easy to tarp. The height of the stack should be uniform so 

dosage can be calculated accurately. For loose cargo, the tarpaulin should be 2 

feet above the load and 1 foot from the sides and ends. Unless specified in the 

treatment schedule, cargo should not exceed two-thirds of the volume of the 

area to be fumigated. Contact S&T-TMT for approval for any enclosure larger 

than 25,000 ft3

. For large enclosures, it may be necessary to:

Add more sampling tubes

Install extra circulation fans

Introduce the fumigant at several sites, using multiple volatilizers

Run the circulation fans longer than the first 30 minutes if the difference 

between the highest and lowest gas concentration readings exceeds four 

ounces

Once S&T-TMT has approved the site and enclosure, it does not require 

additional approvals for subsequent fumigations. The PPQ official must

ensure that the commodity is on pallets to permit air movement along the floor 

and between the cargo. Allow an inch or more of space between pallets. By 

arranging the stack evenly and with space between pallets or cartons, the 

fumigant will be effectively distributed and dosage calculation should be easier 

and more accurate. Dosages are easier to calculate when the dimensions are 

uniform.

When the fumigation involves multiple stacks, PPQ will ensure that the 

fumigator allows 10 feet of space between each uncovered stack. After the 

stack is tarped, there should be approximately 5 feet between enclosures.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-13

Containerized Cargo

Ensure that the fumigator places no more than eight containers that are 20 to 

40 feet in length under a single tarpaulin. APHIS does not allow containers to 

be stacked. Stacking may create too great a safety risk to the person placing the 

tarp, fans, and gas monitoring leads. If fumigating multiple containers in a 

single row, ensure that the fumigator has all the doors opening on a center aisle 

toward each other (see Figure 2-4-1 on page 2-4-14). The aisle must be at least 

3 feet wide. Open all doors completely, if possible.

However, APHIS will allow fumigation of containerized cargo with one door 

open on each container using a configuration such as the one shown in Figure 

2-4-2 on page 2-4-14, or in a single row of eight containers. Require the 

fumigator to introduce gas at both ends of this long row configuration, either at 

the same time or half at one end and half at the other end. In any case, the 

single open door on each container must be kept from closing during the 

fumigation, either taped or blocked open.

! CAUTION

APHIS recommends that perishable commodities be fumigated outside their 

containers, but does allow fumigation inside the container. Because it is difficult to 

aerate the container, the commodity may be damaged by the fumigant if left in the 

container. When a commodity is removed from the container, spray the empty 

container according to T402-d Pests: Miscellaneous Hitchhiking Insects (E.g., 

Crickets, Scarab Beetles, Ants, Africanized Honeybee Swarms, Spotted Lanternfly)

as a precaution against hitchhiking pests.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

To conserve MB use, S&T-TMT recommends that containers be removed from 

their chassis prior to fumigation. If this is not done, then the space beneath the 

container must be calculated as part of the total volume being fumigated.

.

Figure 2-4-1 Container Arrangement in Two Rows with Both Doors Open

Figure 2-4-2 Container Arrangement in Two Rows With One Door Open
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-15

If fumigating multiple containers in a single row, require the fumigator to open 

the rear doors on the same side of the stack. If containers are parked parallel to 

one another and close together, it is permissible to open only the door on the 

right side of each container, overlapping and taped to the closed left door of the 

container adjacent to it. If containers are not parked closely together, all doors 

must be completely open.

Ensure that containers are not loaded beyond 80 percent of their capacity. 

Ensure that bulk commodities are placed in boxes or containers on pallets. The 

pallets must be loaded in the container so that there is at least 2 inches of space 

under the commodity and between each pallet. There must be a minimum of 18 

inches above the commodity. This facilitates uniform gas distribution and 

allows a crawl space for placing the gas sampling tubes and fans. (Some 

restacking of cargo may be necessary to meet this requirement.) If the 

container is tarped, no additional head space is required between the roof of the 

container and the tarp, unless the pest is found on the outside of the container.

Gas Penetration and Distribution

MB will penetrate most cargo easily. Penetration is enhanced by the 

availability of free MB. 

All packaging used in USDA quarantine fumigations must comply with the 

standards in Packaging Materials Approved for Fumigation on page 2-3-8. 

Some of the more common types of impermeable materials are cellophane, 

plastic, wax coated materials, laminated, and waterproofed papers. Tight 

wooden packing cases are also relatively gas tight. Impermeable materials will 

allow some gas to penetrate, but make it difficult to aerate and evacuate the 

gas. Require the fumigator to remove, perforate, or open all impermeable 

materials.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-16 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 6: Arranging and Operating Fans

Break Bulk Cargo

Require the fumigator to use fans which have the capacity to move a volume in 

cubic feet per minute equivalent to the total volume of the enclosure. Refer to 

Table 2-4-3 to determine the number and placement of fans.

Require the fumigator to turn on all fans to make sure they work. The fans 

must be operated during gas introduction and for 30 minutes after the gas is 

introduced. If after taking gas concentration readings the fumigant is not

evenly distributed (as indicated by concentration readings within 4 oz. of each 

other), require the fumigator to run the fans until the gas is evenly distributed. 

Require the fumigator to run fans when adding gas, but only long enough to 

obtain even gas distribution.

Table 2-4-3 Determining Number and Placement of Circulation Fans for Tarped 

Break Bulk Cargo

Volume of 

Enclosure (ft3)

Number of 

2,500 CFM 

Fans (2 axialtype blade)

Require the fumigator to place the fans:

5,000 2 1. On the floor at the rear of the stack facing the front

2. At the top front (MB introduction site) facing the 

rear

5,001-7,500 3 1. On the floor at the rear of the stack facing the front

2. At the top front (MB introduction site) facing the 

rear

3. Upper middle facing the rear

7,501-10,000 4 1. On the floor at the rear of the stack facing the front

2. At the top front (MB introduction site) facing the 

rear

3. Upper middle facing the rear

4. On the floor near the middle facing the front

10,001-25,000 5-7 1. On the floor at the rear of the stack facing the front

2. At the top front (MB introduction site) facing the 

rear

3. Upper middle facing the rear

4. On the floor near the middle facing the front

5. Various locations

> 25,000 Consult S&T-TMT
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-17

Containerized Cargo

Require the fumigator to use an appropriate number of fans which have the 

capacity to move the equivalent cubic feet per minute of the total volume of the 

enclosure. Use two fans in the container to circulate the gas. Place one fan of at 

least 2,500 cfm at the top of the load (near door) of each container facing the 

opposite end of the container. Place the second fan on top of the load facing the 

door.

Require the fumigator to place air introduction ducts for aeration into the far 

ends of each container opposite the doors and to place exhaust ducts on the 

ground in front of the doors of the containers. The fumigator must place the 

end of the ducts near the edge of the tarpaulin so they can be pulled under the 

tarpaulin when aeration begins.

Step 7: Placing the Gas Introduction Lines

MB is converted from a liquid into a gas by a volatilizer. Ensure that the line 

that runs from the MB cylinder into the volatilizer is 3,000 PSI hydraulic high 

pressure hose with a 3/8 inch interior diameter (I.D.) or larger. From the 

volatilizer, MB gas is introduced into the structure by means of a gas 

introduction line. The gas introduction line must be a minimum of 350 PSI 

with a 1/2 inch I.D. or larger.

Break Bulk Cargo

Ensure that the fumigator places the gas introduction line directly above the 

upper front fan and attaches the line to the top of the fan to prevent movement. 

An unsecured introduction line could tear the tarpaulin, move the line, or direct 

it out of the airflow. Require the fumigator to attach the fan firmly to the cargo 

or have a base that prevents it from toppling (not a pedestal type). Require the 

fumigator to place a piece of impermeable sheeting over the commodity and to 

the front of each gas supply line. The sheet will prevent any liquid MB from 

coming in contact with the cargo.

Containerized Cargo

The number and placement of gas introduction lines depend on the number and 

arrangement of containers to be fumigated.

For single containers, ensure that the fumigator installs the introduction line 

directly above the fan near the door of the container.

For multiple containers, ensure that the fumigator places the appropriate 

number of introduction lines to ensure even gas distribution.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-18 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

If you are fumigating five or more containers under one tarpaulin, then require 

the fumigator to use a minimum of two gas introduction lines to ensure even 

gas distribution.

Step 8: Placing the Gas Sampling Tubes

Break Bulk Cargo

Ensure that the fumigator installs a minimum of three gas sampling tubes for 

fumigations up to 10,000 ft3 positioned in the following locations (refer to 

Figure 2-4-3):

Front low—front of the load, 3 inches above the floor

Middle center—center of the load, midway from bottom to top of the load

Rear high—rear of the load, at the extreme top of the load

For fumigations from 10,001 to 25,000 ft3

, require the fumigator to use six gas 

sampling tubes, positioned in the following locations:

Front low—front of the load, 3 inches above the floor

Upper front quarter section

Middle center—center of the stack, midway from bottom to top

Upper rear quarter section

Lower rear quarter section

Rear high—rear of the stack, at the extreme top

The PPQ official must contact S&T-TMT for approval of fumigations larger 

than 25,000 ft3

, for instructions for number of gas sampling tubes, and for 

other technical information.

Figure 2-4-3 Example of the Position of Gas Sampling Tubes (Side View)
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-19

.

Containerized Cargo

For all containers (either 20 or 40 feet in length) under the same tarpaulin, 

require the fumigator to use at least three tubes per container, positioned as 

follows:

Front low—near the floor at the door end of the container

Middle center—rear of the load at the high end opposite the fan

Rear high—midway from front to back, at mid-depth

If treating commodities for khapra beetle, require the fumigator to install the 

following additional gas sampling tubes:

High (in the commodity)

Low (in the commodity)

Require the fumigator to cover the end of the gas sampling tube with burlap 

taped to the tube before inserting into the commodity.

NOTICE

For Khapra beetle cargo containing baled, packaged, finely milled, or closely packed 

commodities, require the fumigator to place two additional gas sampling tubes in the 

center of the bags, packages, or bales. Before placing gas sampling tubes in commodities, require the fumigator to place burlap over the end of the tube and secure 

the burlap to the tube with tape.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-20 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Break Bulk and Containerized Cargo

Require the fumigator to use gas sampling tubes of sufficient length to extend 

from the sampling position inside the enclosure to at least 30 feet beyond the 

tarpaulin. Ensure that all the gas sampling tubes meet in one area for ease and 

safety in taking gas concentration readings. Do not permit gas sampling tubes 

to be spliced. Before starting the fumigation, check for gas sampling tube 

blockage or pinching by connecting each tube to a MityVac hand pump or to 

the gas detection device for a short time. If the tube is blocked, the flow to the 

device will drop sharply. Require the fumigator to replace any defective gas 

sampling tubes. 

Require the fumigator to secure all gas sampling tubes in place under the 

tarpaulin and label each one at the end where the gas concentration readings 

will be taken. By labeling each gas sampling tube, you will be able to record 

concentration readings easily.

Step 9: Padding Corners

Ensure that the fumigator looks for corners and sharp angles which could tear 

the tarpaulin. Do not allow the fumigator to use commodity to support the 

tarpaulin. If the sharp angles or corners cannot be eliminated, the fumigator 

must cover them with burlap or other suitable padding (e.g., old tires or cloth) 

(see Figure 2-4-4).
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-21

Step 10: Measuring the Temperatures

The PPQ official must determine the temperature of the commodity in order to 

select the proper dosage rate. Depending on whether or not you are fumigating 

a pulpy fruit or vegetable, either the commodity temperature or an average of 

the commodity and air temperatures will be used. A pulpy fruit or vegetable 

can support internal feeding insects, is fleshy and moist, and can be probed 

with a temperature measuring device. Examples include, but are not limited to 

peppers, onions, and grapes.

For pulpy fruits and pulpy vegetables, insert the thermometer into the pulp and 

use only the commodity temperature to determine the dosage rate. For 

Figure 2-4-4 Typical Break Bulk Arrangement with Fans, Leads, Introduction 

Line, Padding, and Sand Snakes

NOTICE

Commodity and space temperatures must be 40 °F or above.

Temperature recordings should be rounded to the nearest tenth of a degree (°C or 

°F).
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-22 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

commodities that have been refrigerated, probe the fruit that have the lowest 

pulp temperature. Again, fumigate only when the fruit pulp is 40 °F or higher.

If the commodity has no pulp (for example, peas, beans, grains, herbs, spices, 

etc.) take the temperature of the air space immediately surrounding the 

commodity as well as the commodity temperature and use Table 2-4-4 to 

determine the correct temperature for use when selecting the proper dosage 

rate.

To take temperature readings, use a calibrated bimetallic, mercury, or digital 

long-stem thermometer.

NOTICE

Fresh fruits and vegetables that require fumigation treatment as a condition of entry, 

must meet the minimum temperature requirement of 40 °F (4.4 °C), at the time of 

discharge. This may require the gradual warming of the shipment over the later 

course of the voyage to ensure that the commodity achieves the proper minimum 

temperature of 40 °F (4.4 °C). 

This process will facilitate whether or not the fumigation treatment of the cargo takes 

place on the same day of arrival.

NOTICE

The presence of ice indicates temperatures below 40 °F. If ice is present anywhere 

in the box, pallet, or fumigation enclosure, do not fumigate the commodity.

Table 2-4-4 Determine Whether to Use Commodity or Air Temperature for 

Determining Dosage Rate for Nonpulpy Commodities

If the air temperature is: And:

Then, for commodities other than 

pulpy fruits, pulpy vegetables, or 

logs and lumber:

Higher than the commodity 

temperature

Use the single lowest commodity 

temperature for determining the 

dosage rate (Do not use the average 

commodity temperature.)

Lower than the commodity 

temperature

By less than 10 

degrees

By 10 degrees or 

more

Use the average of the single lowest 

air and commodity temperatures for 

determining the dosage rate. (Never

initiate a fumigation if any commodity 

temperature reads lower than 40 °F.)
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-23

Logs and Lumber

The PPQ official will select several representative locations within the stack at 

the ends of the logs or pieces of lumber. Require the fumigator to drill holes in 

them to accommodate a thermometer. After drilling, wait at least 10 minutes to 

allow the wood around the holes to cool. Insert the thermometer into the drilled 

holes. Record the temperature from each hole. 

Base the dosage calculation on the lowest reading obtained. Do not average 

temperatures. All readings must be above 40 °F to initiate the fumigation. If 

not, the fumigation must be postponed.

The PPQ official must record the temperatures in Block 22 of the PPQ Form 

429A.

In the electronic 429 database, record the temperatures in the space and 

commodity fields in the Treatment form.

Step 11: Covering the Stack

The fumigator must cover the stack, check the tarpaulin for rips, tears, and 

holes, look at the spots that have been taped, and verify they are properly 

sealed. If needed, the fumigator must repair all holes, rips, and tears.

The tarpaulin should be made of a material such as vinyl, polyethylene plastic, 

or coated nylon. 

4 mil vinyl or polyethylene plastic tarpaulins are only approved for one

usage

6 mil vinyl or polyethylene plastic tarpaulins may be used up to four

times with the PPQ official’s approval for each usage

EXAMPLE You are about to fumigate a shipment of fresh herbs. The commodity 

temperature is 82 °F and the air temperature is 55 °F. Average the air 

and commodity temperatures to determine the dosage rate because 

the air is 27 degrees lower than the commodity temperature and the 

commodity is not pulpy. The average of the two temperatures is 68.5 

°F. Use 68.5°F to determine the dosage rate. (T101-n-2: use 2.5 lbs. 

for 2 hours)

NOTICE

When the commodity and air temperature drastically differ, moisture may condense 

inside the gas sampling tubes or inside the gas detection device and cause 

inaccurate gas concentration readings. The fumigator is responsible for ensuring 

that the gas sampling tubes are free from water as described in the instrument 

instruction manual. The PPQ official must check the Drierite and Ascarite frequently, 

and change it as soon as it becomes saturated with water (turns pink) to obtain true 

gas concentration readings. Never fumigate commodities that are frozen.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-24 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

10 to 12 mil vinyl or plastic coated nylon tarpaulins may be approved for 

multiple uses with the PPQ official’s approval for each usage

The fumigator should cover all corners and sharp ends with burlap or other 

padding to prevent the tarpaulin from ripping. Have the fumigator pull the 

tarpaulin over the stack, being careful not to catch or tear the tarpaulin. Make 

sure there is sufficient structural support to raise the tarpaulin 2 feet above and 

1 foot beyond the sides of the commodity.

The tarpaulin must be large enough to provide a floor overlap of at least 18 

inches around all sides of the stack. The fumigator must carefully lay the 

tarpaulin out to prevent excess folds or wrinkles along the floor, especially 

around corners.

Step 12: Sealing the Tarpaulin

The fumigator must seal the tarpaulin with loose, wet sand, sand snakes, water 

snakes, adhesives, or a combination. If there is danger of crushing or crimping 

the gas sampling or introduction tubes, use the loose, wet sand. If using snakes, 

use two rows of snakes along the sides and three rows on the corners. The 

snakes should overlap each other by approximately 1 foot. The goal in sealing 

the tarpaulin is to get the tarpaulin to lie flat against the floor to prevent gas 

from leaking out. When wind is not a factor, plastic tape may be used for 

sealing the tarp. The tape must be at least 2 inches in width, and applied (only 

to a smooth surface) with the aid of high-tack spray adhesive.

The fumigator must seal the corners by laying two sand snakes around the 

corner and working the tarpaulin until it is flat. Place a third snake on top of the 

two other snakes to provide additional weight to force the tarpaulin against the 

NOTICE

Sealed containers and vans cannot be considered “fumigation chambers” and 

therefore must be covered by a tarpaulin unless they can pass the pressure-leakage 

test. (Refer to Chapter 2-8.)
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-25

floor. Loose, wet sand can be used in the area where the gas introduction line, 

electrical cords, and gas sampling tubes extend from under the tarpaulin.

Step 13: Measuring the Volume

Using a 100-foot tape measure, the PPQ official and the fumigator must

carefully measure the length, width, and height of the enclosure. Never

estimate the measurements. An error in measurement of as little as 12 inches 

can result in miscalculation of the dosage by as much as 15 percent. When 

measuring, round off to the nearest quarter foot (example: 3 inches =.25 feet). 

In the case of fumigations of edible commodities, an error can result in an 

unacceptable level of residue on the commodity. If the sides of the enclosure 

slope outward from top to bottom, measure both the top and bottom and 

average the two to determine the dimension. Enclosure height should always 

be uniform and not require adjustment.

Formula for determining volume:

Length x Width x Height = volume in cubic feet

The PPQ official must record the volume in Block 26 of the PPQ Form 429A.

In the electronic 429 database, record the length, width, and height in the 

corresponding fields under the “AMT of Gas Introduced” heading on the 

Treatment form. The total volume of the enclosure will be calculated.

Step 14: Calculating the Dosage

The PPQ official must calculate the dosage using the following steps:

1. Refer to the treatment schedule for the correct dosage rate (lbs/1000 ft3) 

based on temperature. See Measuring the Temperatures on page 2-4-21.

2. Multiply the dosage rate (lbs/1000 ft3

) by the volume (ft3) to get the dosage 

in pounds.

3. Round to the nearest 1/4 pound.

EXAMPLE A stack with measurements H=10’6”, L=42’3”, W=10’9”

10.50 x 42.25 x 10.75 = 4,768.9 ft3 round to 4,769 ft3

Figure 2-4-5 Formula for Calculating MB Dosage for Tarpaulin Fumigations

Dosage (lbs.) Volume (ft3) Dosage Rate (lbs.) 

1,000 ft3 = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-4-26 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

In the electronic 429 database, the PPQ official must enter the dosage rate in 

the “dosage” field and the total amount of gas required for the fumigation will 

be displayed in the “GAS REQUIRED” field.

Step 15: Making a Final Check

Before introducing the gas, the PPQ official and the fumigator must ensure 

that the following activities are performed:

1. Turn on all fans and APHIS-approved gas detection devices to make sure 

they work.

2. Warm up and zero APHIS-approved gas detection devices (if required) as 

described in Equipment on page 8-1-1.

3. Start volatilizer and heat water to 200 °F or above. A minimum 

temperature of 150 °F is required at all times during the introduction 

process. Refer to Volatilizer on page 8-1-14 for temperature monitoring 

procedures.

4. Place fumigant cylinder with gas introduction line on scale and take the 

initial weight. 

A. Ensure the gas introduction hose is attached to the cylinder.

B. After obtaining the correct weight, subtract the dosage to be introduced 

into the enclosure. 

C. After introducing the proper amount of gas, the scale will be balanced.

5. Ensure that the tarpaulin is placarded and the area secured; only people 

working on the fumigation are allowed in the area.

6. Ensure that the tarpaulin is free from rips, holes, and tears.

7. Ensure that all gas sampling tubes are labeled and are not crimped or 

crushed. 

Visually inspect sampling tubes or use a gas detection device, an 

electric or Mityvac® hand pump to test for unrestricted gas flow. 

EXAMPLE You need to determine the dosage rate for a stack with a volume of 

3,000 ft3. For 72 °F (air and commodity temperatures), the treatment 

schedule lists the dosage rate at 2 pounds per 1,000 ft3. Determine 

the dosage using the following calculation:

3,000 ft3 x 2 lbs./1000 ft3 = 6 lbs. methyl bromide
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-27

8. Verify that there is enough gas in the cylinder and if necessary, that other 

cylinders are available.

9. Check the gas introduction line connections to ensure they are tight and 

free of leaks (wearing the SCBA.)

10. Verify that all safety equipment, especially SCBA, is available and in 

working order.

11. If using a T/C analyzer, install Drierite® and Ascarite® filters as required 

in Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers on page 8-1-2

Conducting the Fumigation

Step 1: Introducing the Gas

MB 2016 Label

NOTICE

Erroneous gas readings may occur if the sampling tubes become blocked or 

crimped. It would be impossible to install new sampling tubes during the fumigation. 

To avoid an unsuccessful fumigation, test sampling tubes before the treatment 

begins. 

Refer to the following steps to test the sampling tubes using a MityVac pump: (See 

Mityvac Hand-Held Vacuum Pump on page 8-1-23)

1. Prior to gas introduction, connect a MityVac hand-held vacuum pump to a sampling tube.

2. Squeeze the handle on the MityVac unit. If the line is blocked, a vacuum will be 

indicated on the MityVac gauge. For sampling tubes longer than 25 feet, squeeze 

the handle two or three times. The MityVac pump has the capacity to attain and hold 

25 inches of Hg vacuum and a minimum of 7 psig pressure.

3. Disconnect the MityVac pump from the sampling tube and repeat this procedure 

for each sampling tube. 

NOTICE

Other gas detection devices may not require the use of Drierite® or Ascarite®.

! CAUTION

The acceptable air concentration level for methyl bromide (MB) is 5 ppm. A respirator (approved SCBA) is required if the MB concentration level in the air is unknown 

or greater than 5 ppm at any time. The PPQ official and the fumigator must use 

SCBA while introducing the gas, checking for leaks, when taking aeration readings, 

and inside the buffer zone.

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

2-4-28 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Require the fumigator and PPQ official to use SCBA while introducing and 

adding gas. The PPQ official is not required to be in the treatment buffer zone 

during the fumigation except as required for monitoring activity. The PPQ 

official must ensure that the fumigator turns on all fans before introducing the 

gas. When using large cylinders of MB, the fumigator should slightly open the 

cylinder valve, then close the valve.

With an APHIS-approved continuous real time gas detection device, the 

fumigator must check all connections on the gas introduction hose (between 

the MB cylinder and the volatilizer) for leaks. If leaks are found the fumigator 

must tighten the connections and repeat the test.

When no leaks are found, require the fumigator to open the valve to the point 

where 3 to 4 pounds of MB are being introduced per minute. The water 

temperature in the volatilizer should never go below 150 °F at any time during 

gas introduction. The water in the volatilizer may include an antifreeze and 

should be handled with the appropriate safeguards. 

The fumigation time begins once all the gas has been introduced. The PPQ 

official must record the time gas introduction was started and completed in 

Block 32 on the PPQ Form 429A.

In the electronic 429 database, record the fumigation date, gas introduction 

start and finish time in the corresponding fields under the “GAS 

INTRODUCTION” heading on the Treatment form.

! DANGER

If the PPQ official or fumigator notices a cloud, plume, vapor, or mist coming from 

the introduction equipment during gas introduction, the fumigator must TURN OFF 

the valve on the gas cylinder, EVACUATE the area immediately, and ABORT the 

fumigation. 

No person should place any part of their body into the cloud, plume, vapor, or mist. 

After the cloud plume has dissipated, measure gas concentration levels at the gas 

cylinder using any APHIS-approved continuous real time gas detection device. 

When gas concentration levels at the cylinder reach 5 ppm or less, the fumigator 

must identify the source of the leak and correct it before restarting the fumigation.

Any person within the treatment buffer zone must wear and use SCBA equipment 

during gas introduction and gas addition.

! CAUTION

Do not touch the gas introduction line with your bare hands—you could get burned! 

Close the cylinder valve once the proper dosage has been introduced.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-29

Require the fumigator to run the fans for 30 minutes to achieve even gas 

distribution. The PPQ official must take the initial concentration reading 30 

minutes after all the gas has been introduced.

Step 2: Testing for Leaks

Require the fumigator to wear the SCBA to test for leaks using an APHISapproved leak detection device before the 30 minute reading or anytime when 

the concentration level is unknown or above 5 ppm. 

MB 2016 Label

The fumigator must test around the perimeter of the tarpaulin on the floor, 

corners, and especially where electric cords, gas sampling tubes, or gas 

introduction lines are present. When the fumigator detects leaks, ensure that 

they are sealed using more sand or sand snakes for floor leaks and tape for 

sealing small holes in the tarpaulin. Loose, wet sand may be used to reduce 

leakage from electric cords, gas sampling tubes, gas introduction lines, or 

uneven flooring.

If the fumigator detects excessive leakage (concentration readings of 50 

percent or less of the minimum concentration), do not attempt to correct the 

problem by adding more gas. For non-food, non-feed commodities, require the 

fumigator to quickly evacuate the remaining gas from the enclosure, eliminate 

the problem, and construct a new enclosure. Aerate as usual following 

procedures outlined in Aeration on page 2-4-38. If the commodity is non-food 

or feed, restart the fumigation in the new enclosure.

NOTICE

Do not begin counting the fumigation time until all the gas has been introduced and 

the valve on the MB tank is closed.

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.

NOTICE

If a PPQ employee encounters unsafe conditions (such as holes in the tarpaulin or a 

breach in safety protocol) and the condition(s) cannot be corrected in a timely 

manner, the employee may CANCEL the fumigation. Consult with a PPQ Supervisor 

prior to cancellation.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

2-4-30 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 3: Taking Concentration Readings

Before taking concentration readings, require the fumigator to purge the gas 

sampling tubes with a mechanical or hand pump. If using a T/C analyzer, 

connect it to the gas sampling tube, adjust the gas flow rate to 1.0, and wait 

until the meter registering “ounces per thousand cubic feet” stabilizes. This 

may take a minute or more, depending on the length of the gas sampling tube 

and whether or not an auxiliary pump is used.

The PPQ official must take concentration readings 30 minutes after gas 

introduction. Use an APHIS-approved gas detection device to determine the 

gas concentration and distribution within the enclosure. Allow gas 

concentration readings to stabilize; do not disconnect the sampling line from 

the gas detection device when the minimum concentration reading has been 

met. If the gas distribution is even (all readings within 4 ounces of each other) 

and meet the minimum concentration required by the treatment schedule, 

advise the fumigator to turn off the fans. Running the fans longer can 

contribute to gas leakage. If used, the PPQ official must check desiccant tubes 

before each reading and change Drierite® if its color is pink.

Take concentration readings at the times designated in the treatment schedule:6

30 minutes

2 hours

4 hours

6 hours

12 hours

24 hours

! CAUTION

Commodities used for food or feed cannot be re-treated. The commodity must be 

either:

 Returned to the country of origin

 Re-exported to another country (if they will accept the shipment)

 Destroyed by incineration

NOTICE

Living plant and plant products generate carbon dioxide gas, which interferes with 

the MB readings from the T/C. In order to remove CO2, install an Ascarite® tube in 

line with the Drierite® tube if fumigating living plant and plant products, including 

fruits and vegetables, timber, flowers, and seeds.

6 If fumigating oak logs or lumber for export, see “Special Procedures for Adding Gas to Oak logs and 

lumber.”
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-31

36 hours

48 hours

72 hours

Any final concentration reading

Avoid using hand-held two-way radios near the T/C analyzer. Two-way radios 

may interfere with an accurate concentration reading.

Thirty-minute Reading

The 30-minute reading shows the initial concentration and distribution of gas. 

The 30-minute reading can indicate leakage, sorption, incorrect dosage 

calculation, or error in fumigant introduction—all of which require immediate 

attention. If the 30-minute readings are below the minimum, require the 

fumigator to check for leaks around the perimeter of the tarpaulin.

Concentration readings should not differ more than 4 ounces among the leads. 

When concentration readings differ more than 4 ounces, run the fans to 

equalize the gas and record readings in the Remarks block on the PPQ Form 

429A. In some cases, several cycles of fan operation may be necessary to 

equalize the readings. The PPQ official will record all gas readings on the PPQ 

Form 429A or in the electronic 429 database.

Two-hour Reading

In comparison with the 30-minute reading, the 2-hour reading also will 

indicate if the tarpaulin is leaking or the commodity is absorbing gas. Refer to 

Table 2-4-8 on page 2-4-37for detailed instructions.

Final Reading

The final reading is required for all tarpaulin fumigations in order to determine 

if the fumigation has been successfully completed. You (the PPQ official) may 

start the final reading before the finishing time of the treatment so that aeration 

commences at the finishing time. Starting the final reading before finishing 

time is especially critical when fumigating perishables.

Additional Readings

Decide the need to take additional readings based on the following:

Any condition which could change the gas concentration, such as severe 

winds, or rain

EXAMPLE The dosage for the fumigation was 4 pounds (64 ounces). The 30-

minute reading was 50 ounces. The 2-hour reading is 26 ounces. 

The 2-hour reading is low and according to Table 2-4-8 the 

fumigation needs to be extended by 30 minutes.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

2-4-32 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Rate of gas concentration decrease

When concentration readings differ by more than 4 ounces, run the fans to 

equalize the gas and record readings in the Remarks block on the APHIS 

429A. Generally, gas should be evenly distributed, and you should not have to 

restart the fans unless you added gas. If readings continue to differ by more 

than 4 ounces, continue running the fans until the gas is evenly distributed. 

If unpredicted severe winds occur, additional readings must be taken. Any 

sharp or unusual decreases of the readings in relation to previous readings is a 

clue to take corrective action and supplementary readings. Take additional 

readings every 30 minutes until problems are rectified. 

Sorptive commodities may also require additional concentration readings. See 

Sorption on page 2-3-10.

Step 4: Determining the Need to Add Gas and Adjust Exposure

Use Table 2-4-5 to determine when to add gas or extend exposure period.

Table 2-4-5 Determine the Need to Add Gas and Adjust Exposure

If the lowest 

gas reading is:

And the treatment schedule is: Then:

Below the 

required minimum concentration

T101-a-1 or equivalent1

1 T101-a-1 or equivalent schedules are those schedules that are:

NOT greater than 2 hours long (exposure time)

NOT greater than 4 lbs. per 1000 ft3 (dosage rate)

Minimum concentration readings and temperature ranges match EXACTLY the readings 

in T101-a-1

If the minimum concentration readings do not meet these requirements, the schedule is NOT

equivalent. When schedules are NOT equivalent, use Table 2-4-5 to determine the length of 

time to extend exposure and use the formula in to determine the amount of gas to add.

See Table 2-4-7 on page 2-4-36 for corrections at 

0.5 hour, or Table 2-4-8 on page 2-4-37 for corrections at 2 hours.

Other than T101-

a-1 or equivalent1

See Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period 

to Commodities that are Fumigated Using Treatment Schedules Other Than T101-a-1 or Equivalent (may include perishables) on page 2-4-33

At or above the 

required minimum concentration

T101-a-1 or equivalent1See Table 2-4-7 on page 2-4-36 for actions to take 

at 0.5 hours, or Table 2-4-8 on page 2-4-37 for 

actions to take at 2 hours.

Other than T101-

a-1 or equivalent1

No action necessary.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Special Procedures for Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-33

Special Procedures for Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period7

Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period to Commodities 

that are Fumigated Using Treatment Schedules Other Than 

T101-a-1 or Equivalent (may include perishables)

Use Table 2-4-6 to determine if you need to add gas or extend or decrease the 

exposure time to T101-a-1 schedules that are not equivalent. Use the formula 

in Figure 2-4-6 to determine the amount of gas to add.

When adding gas, require the fumigator to follow these steps:

1. Heat water in volatilizer.

2. Turn on fans.

3. Weigh cylinder.

7 The MB label does allow the extension of exposure time due to low gas readings for non-food commodities.

Figure 2-4-6 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add to Schedules 

Not Equivalent to T101-a-1

Table 2-4-6 Determine the Extended Exposure Period for Non-equivalent 

Schedules

If the exposure 

time is:

And any individual 

reading is below 

minimum by:1

1 If any individual reading is 50 percent or more below the minimum concentration reading, 

then abort the treatment. For example, if the minimum reading is 38 ounces then the reading 

50 percent below the minimum is 19 ounces (38 oz.- (30 oz. x 0.50) = 19 oz.) For oak logs 

(T312-a, T312-a-alternative), refer to Special Procedures for Adding Gas to Oak Logs Using 

T312-a or T312-a-Alternative for specific instructions.

Then extend exposure:

Less than 12 hours 10 oz. or less 10 percent of the time lapse since gas introduction or the last acceptable reading

11 oz. or more 30 minutes

12 hours or more 10 oz. or less 10 percent of the time lapse since gas introduction or the last acceptable reading

11 oz. or more 2 hours or 10 percent of the time lapse since 

the last acceptable reading, whichever is 

greater

1.6 number of ounces below minimum  volume in cubic feet

1000 cubic feet  ------------------------------------------------ 116  ----- = pounds of gas to add
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Special Procedures for Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period

2-4-34 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

4. With SCBA on, open valve on cylinder and introduce gas.

5. Close valve when the weight of the cylinder indicates that the needed 

amount of gas has been added.

6. The PPQ official must record quantity of fumigant added in Block 34 and 

additional fan time in Block 30 of the PPQ Form 429A.

7. In the electronic 429, record the amount of gas added in the “Additional 

Gas Recommended” field and the actual amount of additional gas added in 

the “ACTUAL ADDITIONAL GAS” field. Record the additional fan time 

in the “TIME FANS OPERATED” field in the Treatment form.

8. Note the time the fumigator started introducing additional gas and the time 

the fumigator finished introducing gas and record in Block 40 (Remarks) 

of the PPQ Form 429A or in the “Remarks” form in the electronic 429 

database. Require the fumigator to run the fans for 30 minutes. Turn off 

fans, then take a concentration reading. If all readings are above minimum 

concentration levels, then proceed as usual with the remaining scheduled 

concentration readings.

Adding Gas to Fruits, Vegetables, or Perishable Commodities 

Using Schedule T101-a-1 or Equivalent

Use Table 2-4-7 and Table 2-4-8 to determine if you need to add gas or extend 

or decrease the exposure time. Select the proper table based on the time of the 

gas reading (30 minutes or 2 hours). 

Use the formula in Figure 2-4-7 to determine the amount of gas to add.

Figure 2-4-7 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add to Schedules 

Equivalent to T101-a-1

NOTICE

DO NOT average the gas concentration readings before using the tables. Base your 

decision on whether to add gas from the LOWEST gas concentration reading of any 

individual gas reading.

! CAUTION

Fresh fruits and vegetables are sensitive to MB, so double check volume calculations and dosage measurements to avoid accidental overdoses. 

1.6 number of ounces below minimum  volume in cubic feet

1000 cubic feet  ------------------------------------------------ 116  ----- = pounds of gas to add
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Special Procedures for Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-35

When adding gas, require the fumigator to follow these steps:

1. Heat water in volatilizer.

2. Turn on fans.

3. Weigh cylinder.

4. With SCBA on, open valve on cylinder and introduce gas.

5. Close valve when the weight of the cylinder indicates that the needed 

amount of gas has been added.

6. The PPQ official must record quantity of fumigant added in Block 34 and 

additional fan time in Block 30 of the PPQ Form 429A.

7. In the electronic 429, record the amount of gas added in the “Additional 

Gas Recommended” field and the actual amount of additional gas added in 

the “ACTUAL ADDITIONAL GAS” field. Record the additional fan time 

in the “TIME FANS OPERATED” field in the Treatment form. 

8. Note the time the fumigator started introducing additional gas and the time 

the fumigator finished introducing gas and record in Block 40 (Remarks) 

of the PPQ Form 429A or in the “Remarks” form in the electronic 429 

database. Run the fans until there is even gas distribution throughout the 

stack. Turn off fans, then take a concentration reading 30 minutes after the 

gas has been introduced. If all readings are above minimum concentration 

levels, then proceed as usual with the remaining scheduled concentration 

readings.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Special Procedures for Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period

2-4-36 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Table 2-4-7 Determine Gas Concentration Values and Corrections for Fruits and 

Vegetables at the 30-minute Reading of T101-a-1 or Equivalent 

Schedules

If the 

schedule 

is:

And the 

minimum 

concentration 

reading (oz.) in 

the schedule is:

And the 

lowest 

concentration 

(oz.) is:

Then:

40-49 °F

4 lbs. for 2 

hrs.

48 65 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

64-48 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 48 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

50-59 °F

3 lbs. for 2 

hrs.

38 52 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

51-38 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 38 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

60-69 °F

2.5 lbs. for 

2 hrs.

32 48 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

47-32 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 32 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

70-79 °F

2 lbs. for 2 

hrs.

26 37 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

36-26 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 26 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

80-89 °F

1.5 lbs. for 

2 hrs.

19 27 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

26-19 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 19 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Special Procedures for Adding Gas and Extending Exposure Period

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-37

Table 2-4-8 Determine Gas Concentration Values and Corrections for Fruits and 

Vegetables at the 2-Hour Reading of T101-a-1 or Equivalent 

Schedules

If the schedule 

is:

And the lowest 

concentration (oz.) at 2 

hours is:

Then do not add gas, but::

40-49 °F

4 lbs. for 2 hrs.

38 and above AERATE commodity

37-28 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

27-25 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 25 ABORT

50-59 °F

3 lbs. for 2 hrs.

29 and above AERATE commodity

28-24 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

23-21 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 21 ABORT

60-69 °F

2.5 lbs. for 2 hrs.

24 and above AERATE commodity

23-21 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

20-18 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 18 ABORT

70-79 °F

2 lbs. for 2 hrs.

19 and above AERATE commodity

18-16 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

15-13 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 13 ABORT

80-89 °F

1.5 lbs. for 2 hrs.

14 and above AERATE commodity

13-12 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

11-10 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 10 ABORT
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aeration

2-4-38 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 5: Exhausting the Gas

Require the fumigator to exhaust the gas at the completion of the exposure 

period. If the treatment schedule is a FIFRA Section 18 Exemption, then the 

PPQ official must verify the final gas concentration reading. Record detector 

tube readings and the time interval from the aeration in the corresponding 

fields in “DETECTOR READINGS”.

Aeration

The fumigator must:

Arrange for the aeration to proceed once the treatment is completed.

Consider the wind direction when pointing the exhaust duct, and face the 

duct outlet toward an open area away from people.

Ensure that, during the first 10 minutes of aeration, no one is present 

within 200 feet downwind of the exhaust duct outlet.

Determine aeration buffer zones in accordance with Environmental 

Protection Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation 

Buffer Zone Lookup Tables.

Ensure no one is present within the perimeter of the aeration buffer zone 

unless they are wearing SCBA.

Refer to “Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures”.

Follow all label instructions, state, county, and local regulations, in 

addition to the instructions in this manual.

Inform people located in occupied structures and personnel in the 

immediate area within the buffer zone that release of MB is about to take 

place and give them the option of leaving the area or remaining inside the 

building.

Restrict access to the area where the exhaust duct extends beyond the 

enclosure.

Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity

The label requires that at least two people trained in the use of the fumigant 

must be present at all times during gas introduction, treatment, and aeration. 

The PPQ official, however, is not required to be present at the fumigation site 

throughout the aeration process unless specified by the label or by State or 

local regulations. Refer to Table 2-4-9 to determine responsibility for aerating 

the commodity.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aeration Buffer Zones

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-39

Refer to Table 2-4-10 to determine which aeration procedure to use.

Aeration Buffer Zones

The aeration buffer zones are determined by the fumigator in accordance with 

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity 

Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup Tables.

Wearing Respiratory Protection

The fumigator must wear approved respiratory protection (SCBA, supplied air 

respirator, or a combination unit) when:

A risk of exposure to concentrations above 5 ppm exists; this includes any 

time the concentration is unknown

Opening the tarpaulin for aeration

Removing the tarpaulin if measured levels of fumigant are above 5 ppm

Table 2-4-9 Determine Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity

If the treatment schedule is: Then:

A FIFRA Section 18 Exemption 1. PPQ official must be present at the initiation of 

aeration and to VERIFY the final aeration readings.

2. USE Table 2-4-10 to determine which aeration 

procedure to follow.

A labeled Treatment Schedule 1. RELEASE the fumigation to the fumigator to aerate 

according to Table 2-4-10.

2. RELEASE the commodity.

Table 2-4-10 Determine the Aeration Procedure

If: And: And: Then:

Nonsorptive Containerized GO to page 2-4-40

Noncontainerized Fresh fruits and 

vegetables, and cut 

flowers

GO to page 2-4-43

Other than fresh fruits and 

vegetables, and cut 

flowers

GO to page 2-4-41

Sorptive, 

including yams

and chestnuts 

(see Sorption on 

page 2-3-10 for 

a list of sorptive 

commodities)

Containerized GO to page 2-4-47

Noncontainerized GO to page 2-4-45
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aerating Nonsorptive, Containerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors

2-4-40 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Setting up the air introduction and exhaust systems (if they were not set up 

prior to gas introduction)

MB 2016 Label

Aerating Nonsorptive, Containerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors

Step 1: Installing Exhaust System

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Install an exhaust fan (minimum of 5,200 cfm capacity) to a 16 inch, or 

greater, diameter duct located at the floor near rear doors of the container.

2. Install an air introduction duct system consisting of a 3,750 cfm, or greater, 

fan attached to a 12 inch, or larger, duct which reaches two-thirds of the 

length of the container at the top of the load. Have the ducts installed prior 

to the start of fumigation. For indoor fumigation, extend the exhaust duct at 

least 30 feet beyond the building or through a vertical stack extending 

through the roof. For outdoor fumigations, extend the exhaust duct at least 

30 feet beyond the container.

Refer to Figure 2-4-8 and the associated example for the formula for 

calculating the air exchange rate (AER). 

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.

NOTICE

The exhaust fan(s) must be capable of a minimum of 10 air exchanges per hour. The 

sum of cubic feet per minute (cfm) of the exhaust fan(s) or exhaust blower divided by 

the volume of the enclosure (in cubic feet) and multiplying the fraction by 60 equals 

the number of complete gas volume exchanges per hour.

Figure 2-4-8 Formula to Calculate Air Exchange Rate (AER)

EXAMPLE
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aerating Nonsorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-41

Step 2: Aerating the Commodity

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Connect the exhaust duct to the exhaust fan.

2. Start the exhaust fan(s) and lift the end of the tarpaulin opposite the end at 

which the exhaust fan and duct are located.

3. Aerate for 3 hours.

4. Stop the aeration fans.

5. Use a colorimetric tube to take a concentration reading in the airspace 

around and, when feasible, within the carton or box. Exceptions may 

include compressed cotton and other very difficult to probe commodities. 

Obtain prior approval from S&T-TMT for exceptions to this rule.

For FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (in ppm) in “Detector Readings” 

field.

Then use Table 2-4-11 to determine when to release the commodity.

Aerating Nonsorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors and 

Outdoors

Step 1: 

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Install an exhaust duct (minimally one 3,500 cfm capacity fan connected to 

an exhaust duct). An exhaust duct is optional for outdoor fumigations.

2. Extend the exhaust duct outlet to an outside area where there is adequate 

ventilation and at least 30 feet away from the building or through a vertical 

exhaust stack extending through the roof.

Table 2-4-11 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Nonsorptive, 

Containerized Cargo

If the gas concentration level is: Then:

5 ppm or less RELEASE the commodity

6 ppm or more 1. CONTINUE aeration until the concentration is 5 

ppm or less, then

2. RELEASE the commodity
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aerating Nonsorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors

2-4-42 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 2: Aerating the Commodity

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Start the exhaust fan.

2. Lift the end of the tarpaulin opposite the end with the exhaust fan and duct 

(if used).

3. Aerate the enclosure for 2 hours.

Outdoor Fumigations

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Stop the fans.

2. Remove the tarpaulin.

3. Take concentration readings with colorimetric tubes in the airspace around 

and, when feasible, inside the box or cartons.

For FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (in ppm) in the “Detector Readings” 

field.

Then use Table 2-4-12 to determine when to release the commodity.

Indoor Fumigations

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Stop the fans.

NOTICE

The exhaust fan(s) must be capable of a minimum of four air exchanges per hour. 

The sum of cubic feet per minute (cfm) of the exhaust fan(s) or exhaust blower 

divided by the volume of the enclosure (in cubic feet) and multiplying the fraction by 

60 equals the complete gas volume exchanges per hour.

Refer to Figure 2-4-8 and the associated example for the formula for calculating the 

air exchange rate (AER). 

Table 2-4-12 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Nonsorptive, 

Noncontainerized Cargo—Outdoors

If the gas concentration level is: Then:

5 ppm or less RELEASE the commodity

6 ppm or more 1. CONTINUE aeration and take concentration 

readings until the level is 5 ppm or less, then

2. RELEASE the commodity
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aeration Procedures for Fresh Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers—Indoors or Outdoors

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-43

2. Take concentration readings with colorimetric tubes in the airspace around 

and, when feasible, in the carton or box.

For FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (in ppm) in the “Detector Readings” 

field.

Then use Table 2-4-13 to determine when to release the commodity.

Aeration Procedures for Fresh Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers—

Indoors or Outdoors

Step 1: Installing Exhaust System

Use Table 2-4-14 to determine fan size.

Table 2-4-13 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Nonsorptive, 

Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors

If the gas 

concentration level 

is:

Then:

5 ppm or less 1. ADVISE fumigator to REMOVE the tarpaulin, and

2. RELEASE the commodity

6 ppm to 99 ppm 1. ADVISE fumigator to REMOVE the tarpaulin, and 

2. CONTINUE aeration until the concentration is 5 ppm or less, then

3. RELEASE the commodity

100 ppm or above 1. CONTINUE aeration and take concentration readings until the 

concentration level is below 100 ppm, then remove the tarpaulin, 

and

2. CONTINUE aeration until concentration is 5 ppm or less, then

3. RELEASE the commodity

NOTICE

Do not use these procedures for fresh chestnuts or yams. (See procedures for sorptive commodities on page 2-4-45.)
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aeration Procedures for Fresh Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers—Indoors or Outdoors

2-4-44 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

An alternate procedure to using exhaust fans and ducts is to aerate through a 

vertical stack.

Step 2: Aerating the Commodity

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Connect the exhaust duct to the exhaust fan.

2. Start the exhaust fan(s) and lift the end of the tarpaulin opposite the end at 

which the exhaust fan and duct are located.

3. Aerate for 2 hours.

4. Remove the tarpaulin and allow 2 hours for passive aeration.

5. Stop the fans and take concentration readings with colorimetric tubes in the 

airspace around and, when feasible, inside the cartons or boxes.

For FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (in ppm) in the “Detector Readings” 

field.

Table 2-4-14 Determine Number of Fans for Aeration of Fresh Fruits, 

Vegetables, and Cut Flowers

If the enclosure is: Then:

Up to 1,000 cu ft USE one fan, 67-350 cfm

1,001 - 15,000 cu ft USE one or two fans. The sum of the cfm of the fans divided 

by the volume of the enclosure and multiplying the fraction by 

60 should equal four air exchanges per hour or more. Refer to 

Figure 2-4-8 and the associated example. Connect the fan(s) 

to exhaust duct(s) 3 feet in diameter.

15,001 - 25,000 cu ft USE two fans, each 1,000 to 5,000 cfm. The sum of the cfm of 

the fans divided by the volume of the enclosure and multiplying the fraction by 60 should equal four air exchanges per 

hour or more. Connect fan(s) to exhaust duct(s) 3 feet in 

diameter.

More than 25,000 cu ft CONTACT S&T-TMT for advice prior to conducting the first 

fumigation.

NOTICE

The exhaust fan(s) must be capable of a minimum of four air exchanges per hour. 

The sum of cubic feet per minute (cfm) of the exhaust fan(s) or exhaust blower 

divided by the volume of enclosure (in cubic feet) and multiplying the fraction by 60 

equals the number of complete gas volume exchanges per hour. Refer to 

Figure 2-4-8 and associated example for the formula for calculating air exchange 

rate (AER).
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aerating Sorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-45

Then use Table 2-4-15 to determine when to release the commodity.

Aerating Sorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors

Step 1: Installing the Exhaust System

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Install an exhaust duct (minimally one 3,500 cfm capacity fan connected to 

an exhaust duct.)

2. Extend the exhaust duct outlet to an outside area where there is adequate 

ventilation and at least 30 feet away from the building or through a vertical 

exhaust stack extending through the roof.

Step 2: Aerating the Commodity

Outdoor Fumigations

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Lift both ends of the tarpaulin.

2. Start the circulation fans and exhaust fans (if available).

3. Aerate oak logs and lumber a minimum of 48 hours. If, after 48 hours, the 

concentration is 5 ppm or greater, continue aeration for 24 more hours. 

Continue this procedure until concentration readings are less than 5 ppm.

4. Run the fans for 4 hours for commodities other than oak logs and lumber.

5. Remove the tarpaulin.

6. Stop the fans and take concentration readings with colorimetric tubes in the 

airspace around and, when feasible, inside the cartons or boxes.

For FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (in ppm) in the “Detector Readings” 

field.

Then use Table 2-4-16 to determine when to release the commodity.

Table 2-4-15 Determine When to Release the Commodity After Aeration of Fresh 

Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers—Indoors or Outdoors

If the gas concentration level is: Then:

5 ppm or less RELEASE the commodity

6 ppm or more 1. CONTINUE aeration and take concentration 

readings until the level is 5 ppm or less, then

2. RELEASE the commodity
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aerating Sorptive, Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors and Outdoors

2-4-46 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Indoor Fumigations

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Complete the installation of the exhaust duct.

2. Start the circulation fans and exhaust fans.

3. Lift the end of the tarpaulin opposite the exhaust fan.

4. Aerate oak logs and lumber a minimum of 48 hours. If, after 48 hours, the 

concentration is 5 ppm or greater, continue aeration for 24 more hours. 

Continue this procedure until concentration readings are less than 5 ppm.

5. Run the fans for 4 hours for commodities other than oak logs and lumber.

6. Stop the fans and take concentration readings with colorimetric tubes in the 

airspace around and, when feasible, inside the carton or box.

7. Remove the tarpaulin.

For FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (in ppm) in the “Detector Readings” 

form.

Then use Table 2-4-17 to determine when to release the commodity.

Table 2-4-16 Determine when to Release the Commodity for Sorptive, 

Noncontainerized Cargo—Outdoors

If the gas concentration level is: Then:

5 ppm or less RELEASE the commodity

6 ppm or more 1. CONTINUE aeration and take concentration 

readings until the level is 5 ppm or less, then

2. RELEASE the commodity

Table 2-4-17 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Sorptive, 

Noncontainerized Cargo—Indoors

If the gas 

concentration level 

is:

Then:

5 ppm or less 1. ADVISE fumigator to REMOVE the tarpaulin, and

2. RELEASE the commodity

6 ppm to 99 ppm 1. ADVISE fumigator to REMOVE the tarpaulin, and 

2. CONTINUE aeration until the concentration is 5 ppm or less, then

3. RELEASE the commodity

100 ppm or above 1. CONTINUE aeration and take concentration readings until the 

concentration level is below 100 ppm, then remove the tarpaulin, 

and

2. CONTINUE aeration until concentration is 5 ppm or less, then

3. RELEASE the commodity
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aerating Sorptive Commodities in Containers—Indoors and Outdoors

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-47

Aerating Sorptive Commodities in Containers—Indoors and 

Outdoors

Step 1: Installing the Exhaust System

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Install an exhaust fan (minimum of 5,200 cfm capacity) to a 16 inch or 

greater diameter duct located at the floor near rear doors of the container.

2. Install an air introduction duct system consisting of a 3,750 cfm or greater 

fan attached to a 12 inch or greater duct which reaches two-thirds of the 

length of the container at the top of the load. Have the ducts installed prior 

to the start of the fumigation. For indoor fumigations, extend the exhaust 

duct at least 30 feet beyond the building or through a vertical stack 

extending through the roof. For outdoor fumigations, extend the exhaust 

duct 30 feet beyond the container.

Step 2: Aerating the Commodity

Indoors

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Complete installation of exhaust duct and begin exhaust fan operation.

2. Lift both ends of the tarpaulin and begin exhaust fan operation. Do not

remove the tarpaulin until the gas concentration level is below 100 ppm 

(see Table 2-4-18).

3. Start the circulation and air introduction fans. Require a minimum of 4 

hours aeration for all sorptive commodities. Sorptive commodities 

generally require 12 hours or longer to aerate; however, since sorptive 

commodities vary in their rates of desorption, aeration may be completed 

in less than 12 hours.

4. Aerate oak logs and lumber a minimum of 48 hours. If, after 48 hours, the 

concentration is 5 ppm or greater, continue aeration for 24 more hours. 

Continue this procedure until concentration readings are less than 5 ppm.

5. Stop the fans and take concentration readings with colorimetric tubes in the 

airspace around and, when feasible, inside the carton or box.

For FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (in ppm) in the “Detector Readings” 

form.

Then use Table 2-4-18 to determine when to release the commodity.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aerating Sorptive Commodities in Containers—Indoors and Outdoors

2-4-48 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Outdoors

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Complete installation of exhaust duct and begin exhaust fan.

2. Lift both ends of the tarpaulin that are furthest from exhaust fan.

3. Start the circulation and air introduction fans. Require a minimum of 4 

hours aeration for all sorptive commodities. Sorptive commodities 

generally require 12 hours or longer to aerate; however, since sorptive 

commodities vary in their rates of desorption, aeration may be completed 

in less than 12 hours.

4. Aerate oak logs and lumber a minimum of 48 hours. If, after 48 hours, the 

concentration is 5 ppm or greater, continue aeration for 24 more hours. 

Continue this procedure until concentration readings are less than 5 ppm.

5. Remove the tarpaulin after 4 hours aeration.

6. Stop the circulation fans and take concentration readings with colorimetric 

tubes in the airspace around and, when feasible, inside the cartons or boxes.

For FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (in ppm) in the “Detector Readings” 

form.

Then use Table 2-4-19 to determine when to release the commodity.

Table 2-4-18 Determine When to Release the Commodity for Sorptive 

Commodities in Containers—Indoors

If the gas 

concentration level 

is:

Then:

5 ppm or less 1. ADVISE fumigator to REMOVE the tarpaulin, and

2. RELEASE the commodity

6 ppm to 99 ppm 1. ADVISE fumigator to REMOVE the tarpaulin, and 

2. CONTINUE aeration until the concentration is 5 ppm or less, then

3. RELEASE the commodity

100 ppm or above 1. CONTINUE aeration and take concentration readings until the 

concentration level is below 100 ppm, then remove the tarpaulin, 

and

2. CONTINUE aeration until concentration is 5 ppm or less, then

3. RELEASE the commodity
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aerating Sorptive Commodities in Containers—Indoors and Outdoors

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-4-49

Table 2-4-19 Determine when to Release the Commodity for Sorptive 

Commodities in Containers—Outdoors

If the gas concentration level is: Then:

5 ppm or less RELEASE the commodity

6 ppm or more 1. CONTINUE aeration and take concentration 

readings until the level is 5 ppm or less, then

2. RELEASE the commodity
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation

Aerating Sorptive Commodities in Containers—Indoors and Outdoors

2-4-50 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-5-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber 

Fumigation

Contents

Methods and Procedures 2-5-1

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information 2-5-1

Materials Needed 2-5-3

Conducting the Fumigation 2-5-6

Aeration 2-5-10

Normal Atmospheric Pressure Chamber—Aerating Noncontainerized Cargo 

2-5-12

Vacuum Fumigation Chambers—Aerating Containerized and 

Noncontainerized Cargo 2-5-13

Methods and Procedures

The procedures covered in this section provide commercial fumigators and 

chamber owners with the methods, responsibilities, and precautions for normal 

atmospheric pressure (NAP) and vacuum chamber fumigations. The chamber 

owner is responsible for hiring a state certified fumigator and for ensuring that 

the chamber is certified for conducting PPQ quarantine treatments. 

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

In 2015, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) directed all methyl 

bromide (MB) registrants to amend the use directions on the labels of all 100% 

MB products. EPA required the changes in order to reflect recommendations in 

an EPA report.1

These amendments modify the use directions for fumigation and aeration 

procedures, modify respiratory requirements and equipment and update gas 

monitoring equipment. EPA requires all labels on newly manufactured MB to 

reflect these recommendations effective October 01, 2016; however, EPA is 

allowing existing stocks of MB to be used in accordance with the use 

directions on the existing stock’s (older) labels. 

1 ““Report of Food Quality Protection Act (FQPA) Tolerance Reassessment and Risk Management 

Decision (TRED) for methyl bromide, and Reregistration Eligibility Decision (RED) for Methyl 

Bromide’s Commodity Uses”, archive dated August 2006. 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

2-5-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

PPQ officials and fumigators must closely examine gas cylinder labels in order 

to validate that the dosage, exposure, and commodity are either on the cylinder 

label or covered by a FIFRA Section 18 exemption. If a label is not affixed to 

the cylinder, DO NOT allow the fumigator to use that cylinder.

New Buffer Zone Requirements

All 2016 MB labels now require both a treatment and an aeration buffer zone. 

Both the treatment and aeration buffer zones are specific to the enclosure being 

fumigated and must be determined by the Environmental Protection Agency 

(EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup Tables. 

The fumigators are responsible for using this website to determine the buffer 

zones and reporting both buffer zones to the PPQ official. If the treatment 

buffer zone is determined to be less than 30 feet, the PPQ official will maintain 

PPQ’s standard 30 foot treatment buffer zone; otherwise, the new treatment 

buffer zone must be observed. If the aeration buffer zone is determined to be 

less than 200 feet, then PPQ’s standard “200 feet for 10 minutes” aeration 

buffer zone still applies for the first 10 minutes of aeration. 

The fumigator must refer to EPA’s website to determine the minimum aeration 

buffer zone to be maintained until the aeration period is complete and the 

fumigator has verified that gas concentration levels meet the conditions in the 

MB label. 

Transiting through buffer zones

The label permits vehicles to transit through both treatment and aeration buffer 

zones under specific conditions found in the label; it is up to the fumigator 

determine how or whether vehicles may transit in accordance with the label.

When using the newer 2016 MB label, changes to certain procedures and 

equipment in this chapter are displayed in a NOTICE box with a heading titled 

“MB 2016 Label”. 

NOTICE

USDA-APHIS granted the State of California a waiver from the 200’ aeration buffer 

zone requirement provided the following criteria are met:

 The local CA Department of Pesticides or local Air Pollutions Department has issued a local 

permit allowing less than 200’ aeration buffer zone.

 The permit applies only to a chamber with a vertical aeration stack.

USDA-APHIS may consider other waivers on a case-by-case basis.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Materials Needed

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-5-3

MB 2016 Label (example)

When using existing stocks, follow the equipment and procedural guidance 

that is displayed in the body of the text (outside of the NOTICE box). 

If there is no “MB 2016 Label” NOTICE box, then the instructions apply to all 

MB labels, 2016 and older.

Materials Needed

PPQ Official Provides

APHIS-approved leak detection device

Calculator (optional)

Forms (PPQ Form 429A and APHIS Form 2061 if necessary)

Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or supplied air respirator

NOTICE

Use this information when the fumigator is using the 2016 MB label.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Materials Needed

2-5-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

MB 2016 Label

Fumigator Provides

APHIS-approved gas detection device2 (e.g. thermal conductivity device, 

infrared device, etc.)

APHIS-approved leak detection device

Auxiliary pump for purging long gas sample tubes

Carbon dioxide filter (e.g. Ascarite®)

Colorimetric tubes (Refer to Appendix E for a list of APHIS-approved 

product ranges)

Desiccant (e.g. Dririte®)

Electrical wiring (grounded, permanent type), three prong extension cords

Gas introduction line

Heat supply

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from PPQ, PPQ must also 

provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage. The Air 

Check Advantage can be calibrated either by the manufacturer or by 

the PPQ official. Calibrate according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000. The MiniRAE 3000 must be calibrated by the PPQ 

official according to the manufacturer’s User Guide. Refer to Chapter 

8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C

2 The methyl bromide monitor must be calibrated annually. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for 

calibration information. If using a thermal conductivity (TC) analyzer, Drierite® and Ascarite® must 

be used.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Materials Needed

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-5-5

Methyl bromide

Scale or graduated cylinder for volume (liquid measurements)3

SCBA or supplied air respirator

Temperature recorder and temperature sensors4

Thermometer5

Volatilizer

Warning signs/placarding

MB 2016 Label

3 All scales must be calibrated by the State, a company that is certified to conduct scale calibrations, 

or by the fumigator under the supervision of PPQ. The source and date of calibration must be posted 

in a visible location on or with the scale at all times. The scale must be calibrated a following every 

repair or minimum of every year.

4 Temperature sensors must be calibrated annually by the manufacturer or National Institute of 

Standards and Technology (NIST) within the range of 40 °F to 80 °F (4.4 °C to 26.7 °C)

5 The thermometer must be calibrated or replaced annually.

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from the fumigator, the 

fumigator must also provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved direct read gas detection device

Colorimetric tubes (e.g. Draeger, Sensidyne)

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device 

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000

Devices must be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

2-5-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Conducting the Fumigation

Step 1: Selecting a Treatment Schedule

The PPQ official will select an appropriate treatment schedule to effectively 

eliminate the plant pest without damaging the commodity to be fumigated.

Turn to the treatment schedule index and look up by commodity or by pest the 

treatment schedule(s) available. Treatment schedules which are approved for 

chambers will be listed as either “NAP” (normal atmospheric pressure) or as 

“vacuum.”

Step 2: Issuing a PPQ Form 523 (Emergency Action Notification)

When an intercepted pest is identified and confirmed by a PPQ Area Identifier 

as requiring action, the CBP or PPQ official will issue a Form 523 (Emergency 

Action Notification - EAN) to the owner, broker, or representative. The EAN 

will list all treatment options. Refer to Appendix A in the Manual for 

Agricultural Clearance for instructions on completing and distributing the 

EAN.

Step 3: Determining Section 18 Exemptions and Sampling Requirements

After selecting the treatment schedule, the PPQ official will determine which 

treatment schedules are FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions. The schedule will be 

followed by an “IMPORTANT” note to help you determine the current 

exemption status. Some treatment schedules are only FIFRA Section 18 

Exemptions at specific temperature ranges. Check the treatment schedule and 

temperature to determine if the fumigation will be a FIFRA Section 18 

Exemption.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-5-7

Residue monitoring by taking samples of the commodity prior to the start of 

the fumigation and after aeration is no longer required.

Step 4: Setting up the Fumigation Site

MB 2016 Label

NOTICE

The PPQ official and the fumigator must select a secure area where traffic and 

people are restricted from entering and which is isolated from people working. 

A nonwork area is preferred to help prevent accidents.

The treatment and aeration buffer zones are determined by the fumigator in 

accordance with EPA’s fumigation buffer zone tables. [https://www.epa.gov/

pesticide-registration/mbcommoditybuffer]

The buffer zones surround the area where access is limited during treatment. If 

the fumigator determines that the buffer zone is less than 30’, then PPQ 

requires a 30’ buffer zone. If the fumigator determines that the buffer zone is 

greater than 30’, then PPQ must observe the prescribed buffer zone.

The treatment and aeration buffer zones extend from the perimeter of the 

enclosure to a distance determined by the fumigator in accordance with the 

label. Entry by any person except the PPQ official and the fumigator is 

prohibited except as provided in the “Exceptions to Buffer Zone Entry 

Restrictions” section of the label. 

The treatment buffer zone begins when the fumigant is introduced into the 

enclosure and ends when aeration begins, at which point the aeration buffer 

zone requirements apply.

The fumigator must define the treatment and aeration buffer zone perimeters 

using physical barriers (such as walls, ropes, etc.) and placards to limit access 

to the buffer zone. Placards must meet all label requirements regarding specific 

warnings, information, and language.

The fumigator will permit transiting through buffer zones in accordance with 

the “Transit Exception” section of the label.

Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures

For multiple enclosures where buffer zones overlap, the fumigator must 

recalculate both the treatment and aeration buffer zones in accordance with the 

label and supply them to the PPQ official.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

2-5-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 5: Measuring the Temperature

The PPQ official must determine the temperature of the commodity in order to 

select the proper dosage rate. Depending on whether or not you are fumigating 

a pulpy fruit or vegetable, you may use either the commodity temperature or

an average of the commodity and air temperatures. A pulpy fruit or vegetable 

can support internal feeding insects, is fleshy and moist, and can be probed 

with a temperature measuring device. Examples include, but are not limited to 

peppers, onions, and grapes.

Determine the temperature to use in selecting the proper dosage rate:

For fruits, pulpy vegetables, or logs use only the commodity temperature.

For all other commodities, use both the commodity and air temperature.

To take the temperature readings, use a bimetallic, mercury, or digital longstem thermometer that has been calibrated. Use Table 2-5-1 to determine 

which temperature to use when selecting the proper dosage rate for 

commodities other than fresh fruits, vegetables, or logs. Record the 

temperatures in Block 22 of the PPQ Form 429A.

In the electronic 429 database, record the temperatures in the space and 

commodity fields in the Treatment form.

NOTICE

Commodity and space temperatures must be 40 °F or above.

! CAUTION

The presence of ice indicates temperatures below 40 °F. If ice is present anywhere 

in the box, pallet, or fumigation enclosure, DO NOT fumigate the commodity.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-5-9

Step 6: Calculating the Dosage

In order to calculate the dosage, the PPQ official must have the following 

information:

Temperature of commodity and air (°F)

Treatment schedule

Volume of the fumigation chamber (ft3)

The PPQ official must refer to the specific treatment schedule to determine the 

dosage rate (pounds/ft3).

Refer to the formula in Figure 2-5-1 for calculating dosage:

Table 2-5-1 Determine Whether to Use Commodity or Air Temperature for 

Determining Dosage Rate

If the air temperature is: And:

Then, for commodities 

other than fresh fruits or 

vegetables or logs and 

lumber1:

1 Use commodity temperature for fresh fruits or vegetables or logs and lumber.

Higher than the commodity 

temperature

Use the single lowest 

commodity temperature for 

determining the dosage rate 

(do not use the average 

commodity temperature.)

Lower than the commodity 

temperature

By less than 10 degrees

By 10 degrees or more Use the average of the air 

and commodity temperature 

for determining the dosage 

rate.

Figure 2-5-1 Formula for Calculating MB Dosage for Chamber Fumigations

Dosage (lbs.) Volume (ft3) Dosage Rate (lbs.) 

1,000 ft3 = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Aeration

2-5-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 7: Conducting the Fumigation

Since fumigation chambers vary by manufacturer and model, refer to the 

manufacturer’s operating manual to determine how to use the chamber. In 

NAP chambers, run circulation fans for 15 minutes following introduction of 

the gas.

Taking concentration readings is not required when conducting chamber 

fumigations.

Step 8: Leak Detection

Turn on any leak detection devices prior to gas introduction and ensure that 

they run throughout the entire fumigation and aeration.

Aeration

The fumigator must:

Arrange for the aeration to proceed once the treatment is completed.

Consider the wind direction when pointing the exhaust duct, and face the 

duct outlet toward an open area away from people.

Ensure that, during the first 10 minutes of aeration, no one is present 

within 200 feet downwind of the exhaust duct outlet (see California 

waiver details on page 2-5-2).

Determine aeration buffer zones in accordance with EPA’s fumigation 

buffer zone tables (https://www.epa.gov/pesticide-registration/

mbcommoditybuffer).

Ensure no one is present within the perimeter of the aeration buffer zone 

unless they are wearing SCBA.

Refer to “Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures”.

Follow all label instructions, state, county, and local regulations, in 

addition to the instructions in this manual.

Inform people located in occupied structures and personnel in the 

immediate area within the buffer zone that release of MB is about to take 

place and give them the option of leaving the area or remaining inside the 

building.

EXAMPLE Using a fumigation chamber which has a volume of 500 ft3, you 

determine the temperature of the commodity and space is 72 °F. The 

treatment schedule requires 2 lbs. MB/1,000 ft3 at 70 °F or above. To 

calculate dosage multiply the volume (500 ft3) by the dosage rate (2 

lbs. MB/1,000 ft3). This equals 1.0 lbs. of MB needed for the dosage.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-5-11

Restrict access to the area where the exhaust duct extends beyond the 

enclosure.

Secure the fumigation area and allow only the chamber operator and the 

PPQ official monitoring the fumigation into the secure area.

Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity

Responsibility for aerating the chamber and releasing the commodity depends 

on whether the treatment schedule used was a labeled use or FIFRA Section 18 

exemption. Use Table 2-5-2 to determine responsibility for aerating the 

commodity.

Use Table 2-5-3 to determine which procedures to follow for aerating normal 

atmospheric pressure (NAP) and vacuum chambers.

Each chamber must be equipped with at least one permanent, metal gas 

sampling tube to allow the fumigator to take colorimetric tube readings during 

the aeration. Any extensions of the gas sampling tube or flexible connectors 

must be made of TeflonTM tubing or metal. The extensions of the sampling 

tube must run from an area in between the treated boxes and end outside the 

chamber to allow for colorimetric tube readings.

! WARNING

Do not allow motorized vehicles to operate within the secure area.

Table 2-5-2 Determine the Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity During 

Chamber Fumigations

If the fumigation chamber 

is:

And the treatment 

schedule is: Then:

Privately or State owned A labeled treatment RELEASE the fumigation to 

the fumigator to aerate and 

release the commodity.

A FIFRA Section 18 

Exemption (noted in the 

treatment schedules)

1. PPQ official must be 

present at the initiation of 

aeration, and to verify the 

final aeration readings.

2. USE Table 2-5-3 to 

determine which aeration 

procedures to follow

PPQ owned

Table 2-5-3 Determine the Aeration Procedure for Chamber Fumigations

If the chamber is: Then:

NAP Use the procedures on page 2-5-12.

Vacuum Use the procedures on page 2-5-13.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Wearing Respiratory Protection

2-5-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Wearing Respiratory Protection

The fumigator must wear approved respiratory protection (SCBA, supplied air 

respirator, or a combination unit) when there is a risk of exposure to 

concentrations above 5 ppm; this includes any time the concentration is 

unknown.

MB 2016 Label

Normal Atmospheric Pressure Chamber—Aerating 

Noncontainerized Cargo

Advise the fumigator to:

1. While wearing SCBA, turn on the chamber fans.

2. Aerate a minimum of 3 hours for all commodities.

3. Stop the fans and take concentration readings with colorimetric tubes in the 

airspace around and, when feasible, within the carton or box. 

Use Table 2-5-4 to determine when to release the commodity.

For FIFRA Section 18 exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (ppm) in the “Detector Readings” 

form.

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.

Table 2-5-4 Determine When to Release the Commodity After NAP Fumigation

If the gas concentration is: Then:

5 ppm or less 1. CONTINUE aeration for 30 minutes.

2. REQUIRE the fumigator to confirm that gas concentrations remain at 5 ppm or less.

3. RELEASE commodity.

6 ppm or more 1. REQUIRE the fumigator to conduct two additional air 

washes.

2. TAKE gas concentration readings.

3. If concentration readings are 5 ppm or less, CONTINUE aeration for 30 minutes.

4. REQUIRE the fumigator to confirm that gas concentrations remain at 5 ppm or less.

5. RELEASE the commodity.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Vacuum Fumigation Chambers—Aerating Containerized and Noncontainerized Cargo

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-5-13

Vacuum Fumigation Chambers—Aerating Containerized and 

Noncontainerized Cargo

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Adjust any vacuum remaining at the end of the fumigation to zero by 

temporarily opening the air intake valve, then closing it.

2. Draw a 15 inch vacuum and adjust it to zero.

3. Repeat this process of drawing a 15 inch vacuum and releasing it a 

minimum of four times.

4. Take concentration readings using a colorimetric tube in the airspace 

around and, when feasible, within the carton or box. 

For FIFRA Section 18 exemptions, record the concentration reading (in ppm), 

date, and time in Block 39 of PPQ Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, 

record the date, time, and detector reading (in ppm) in the “Detector Readings” 

form.

Use Table 2-5-5 to determine when to release the commodity.

Table 2-5-5 Determine When to Release the Commodity After Vacuum 

Fumigation

If the gas concentration is: Then:

5 ppm or less 1. CONTINUE aeration for 30 minutes.

2. REQUIRE the fumigator to confirm that gas concentrations remain at 5 ppm or less.

3. RELEASE commodity.

6 ppm or above 1. REQUIRE the fumigator to conduct two additional air 

washes.

2. TAKE gas concentration readings.

3. If concentration readings are 5 ppm or less, CONTINUE aeration for 30 minutes.

4. REQUIRE the fumigator to confirm that gas concentrations remain at 5 ppm or less.

5. RELEASE the commodity.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Chamber Fumigation

Vacuum Fumigation Chambers—Aerating Containerized and Noncontainerized Cargo

2-5-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-6-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation 

for Emergency Situations

Contents

Methods and Procedures 2-6-1

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information 2-6-1

Materials Needed 2-6-3

PPQ Official Provides 2-6-3

Fumigator Provides 2-6-3

Taking Safety Measures When Fumigating Ships 2-6-5

Preparing to Fumigate 2-6-6

Conducting the Fumigation 2-6-11

Aeration 2-6-14

Wearing Respiratory Protection 2-6-15

Methods and Procedures

The procedures covered in this section provide the methods, responsibilities, 

and precautions for the fumigation of dry stores, galleys, and crew quarters 

infested with Khapra beetle and other pests that require treatment.

Emergency fumigation for other pests and commodities may be approved on a 

case-by-case basis. Contact USDA-APHIS-PPQ Field Operations at 

PPQ.Ops.Treatment@usda.gov for more information.

Even though ship fumigations are allowed by the manufacturers of methyl 

bromide, APHIS policy PROHIBITS fumigation of bulk commodities in the 

ship hold because of the difficulty in meeting APHIS standards.

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

In 2015, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) directed all methyl 

bromide (MB) registrants to amend the use directions on the labels of all 100% 

MB products. EPA required the changes in order to reflect recommendations in 

an EPA report.1

1 “Report of Food Quality Protection Act (FQPA) Tolerance Reassessment and Risk Management 

Decision (TRED) for methyl bromide, and Reregistration Eligibility Decision (RED) for Methyl 

Bromide’s Commodity Uses”, archive dated August 2006. 
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

2-6-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

These amendments modify the use directions for fumigation and aeration 

procedures, modify respiratory requirements and equipment and update gas 

monitoring equipment. EPA requires all labels on newly manufactured MB to 

reflect these recommendations effective October 01, 2016; however, EPA is 

allowing existing stocks of MB to be used in accordance with the use 

directions on the existing stock’s (older) labels. 

PPQ officials and fumigators must closely examine gas cylinder labels in order 

to validate that the dosage, exposure, and commodity are either on the cylinder 

label or covered by a FIFRA Section 18 exemption. If a label is not affixed to 

the cylinder, DO NOT allow the fumigator to use that cylinder.

New Buffer Zone Requirements

All 2016 MB labels now require both a treatment and an aeration buffer zone. 

Both the treatment and aeration buffer zones are specific to the enclosure being 

fumigated and must be determined by tables in the Environmental Protection 

Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup 

Tables. The fumigators are responsible for using this website to determine the 

buffer zones and reporting both buffer zones to the PPQ official. If the 

treatment buffer zone is determined to be less than 30 feet, the PPQ official 

will maintain PPQ’s standard 30 foot treatment buffer zone; otherwise, the new 

treatment buffer zone must be observed. If the aeration buffer zone is 

determined to be less than 200 feet, then PPQ’s standard “200 feet for 10 

minutes” aeration buffer zone still applies for the first 10 minutes of aeration. 

The fumigator must refer to EPA’s website to determine the minimum aeration 

buffer zone to be maintained until the aeration period is complete and the 

fumigator has verified that gas concentration levels meet the conditions in the 

MB label. 

Transiting through buffer zones

The label permits vehicles to transit through both treatment and aeration buffer 

zones under specific conditions found in the label; it is up to the fumigator 

determine how or whether vehicles may transit in accordance with the label.

When using the newer 2016 MB label, changes to certain procedures and 

equipment in this chapter are displayed in a NOTICE box with a heading titled 

“MB 2016 Label”. 

MB 2016 Label (example)

NOTICE

Use this information when the fumigator is using the 2016 MB label.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Materials Needed

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-6-3

When using existing stocks, follow the equipment and procedural guidance 

that is displayed in the body of the text (outside of the NOTICE box). 

If there is no “MB 2016 Label” NOTICE box, then the instructions apply to all 

MB labels, 2016 and older.

Materials Needed

PPQ Official Provides

APHIS-approved leak detection device

Calculator (optional)

PPQ Form 429A and the electronic 429 database

SCBA or supplied air respirator

MB 2016 Label

Fumigator Provides

Adhesive sealer, tape, and putty or other pliable material for sealing off 

holes around pipes

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from PPQ, PPQ must also 

provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage. The Air 

Check Advantage can be calibrated either by the manufacturer or by 

the PPQ official. Calibrate according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000. The MiniRAE 3000 must be calibrated by the PPQ 

official according to the manufacturer’s User Guide. Refer to Chapter 

8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Materials Needed

2-6-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

APHIS-approved gas detection device2 (e.g. thermal conductivity device, 

infrared device, etc.)

Auxiliary pump for purging long gas sample tubes

Carbon dioxide filter (Ascarite®)

Colorimetric tubes (Draeger/Kitagawa)

Dessicant (Drierite®)

Electrical wiring (ground, permanent type), three prong extension cords

Exhaust blower and ducts

Fans (circulation, exhaust, and introduction)

Framework and supports

Gas sampling tubes (leads)

Gas supply line

Heat supply

Insecticides and spray equipment

Methyl bromide

Padding

Sand or water snakes

Scales or dispensers3

SCBA or supplied air respirator

Tape

Tarpaulin and supports

Temperature recorder and temperature sensors4

Thermometer5

Volatilizer

Warning signs

2 The methyl bromide monitor must be calibrated annually. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for 

calibration information. If using a thermal conductivity (TC) analyzer, Drierite® and Ascarite® must 

be used.

3 All scales must be calibrated by the State, a company that is certified to conduct scale calibrations, 

or by the fumigator under the supervision of PPQ. The source and date of calibration must be posted 

in a visible location on or with the scale at all times. The scale must be calibrated a following every 

repair or minimum of every year.

4 Temperature sensors must be calibrated annually by the manufacturer or National Institute of 

Standards and Technology (NIST) within the range of 40 °F to 80 °F (4.4 °C to 26.7 °C)

5 The thermometer must be calibrated or replaced annually.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Taking Safety Measures When Fumigating Ships

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-6-5

The PPQ official and the fumigator should be prepared to use auxiliary power 

if shore power is not available as most ships’ power is 220 volts.

MB 2016 Label

Taking Safety Measures When Fumigating Ships

The most important consideration when fumigating ships is the protection of 

human life. The commercial fumigator has the following safety responsibilities 

when fumigating ships:

Conduct fumigation properly to result in an effective treatment

Evacuate gas from ship and aerate when fumigation is completed

Observe all safety precautions while fumigating

Prevent access of unauthorized personnel, including the ship’s crew, to the 

fumigated area

Test with a gas detector, all areas aboard ship to ensure freedom from MB 

before allowing crew members access to the ship

The commercial fumigator must abide by the following guidelines when 

fumigating ships:

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from the fumigator, the 

fumigator must also provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved direct read gas detection device

Colorimetric tubes (e.g. Draeger, Sensidyne)

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device 

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000

Devices must be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Preparing to Fumigate

2-6-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Have a representative present throughout the entire fumigation. The 

representative must be familiar with directions for using the fumigant, 

warnings, antidotes, etc., shown on the label, on the gas cylinder, and 

contained in the manufacturer’s application manual.

Have adequate first-aid equipment, SCBA, and other safety equipment 

available

Have all areas of the ship tested with a gas detector prior to crew reentry. 

Pay particular attention to all fumigated areas, crew quarters, and the 

engine rooms

Provide for immediate contact with the responsible ship’s officer to 

provide information and access to areas of the ship which may be needed 

to assure a safe fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

Step 1: Meeting with Ship’s Captain and Agent

When planning a ship fumigation, the PPQ official must meet with the ship’s 

captain, agent, and the fumigation company representative to discuss the 

conditions of the fumigation. If cargo is present in an area about to be 

fumigated, determine if any materials might be adversely affected by the 

fumigant (see Residual Effect on page 2-3-11 for a list of commodities 

adversely affected by MB.) Notify the ship’s agent of possible effects and if 

conditions permit, allow removal of the material for an alternate treatment.

Discuss plans for removing all crew from the ship. Prior to fumigating a vessel, 

the master of the vessel and the fumigator must determine whether it is 

suitably designed to allow for safe occupancy by the ship’s crew. If it is 

determined that it does not allow for safe occupancy, then all crew members 

must be removed.

It is the responsibility of the commercial fumigator to comply with all label 

requirements, and with State, local, and U.S. Coast Guard regulations (See 

Coast Guard Regulations on page B-1-1) concerning shipboard fumigation.

Step 2: Selecting a Treatment Schedule

Refer to T402—Containers, Ships, and Surrounding Areas for the correct 

treatment. Select a treatment schedule based on the plant pest and commodity 

to be fumigated. Consider all the commodities present in the area to be 

fumigated when determining the best treatment available. In the case of 

Khapra beetle fumigation, determine if finely milled products (example–flour) 

will be fumigated. To ensure all life stages have been mitigated, have all 

fumigated commodities destroyed either by incineration or sterilization after 

the fumigation has been completed.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-6-7

Treating Deck Areas

Areas which may be pest contaminated or suspected of being contaminated, 

such as the deck, hatch covers, drain channels, crevices around hatches, 

hallways, and similar areas that cannot be fumigated, should be treated 

according to T402-b-3-1 Pest: Trogoderma granarium (Khapra Beetle).

Step 3: Determine Buffer Zones

MB 2016 Label

Step 4: Preparing Areas to be Fumigated

Open all bins, drawers, and cupboards. Stack all bagged commodities on 

pallets to facilitate gas distribution and penetration.

NOTICE

The fumigator will determine the treatment buffer zone in accordance with the 

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity 

Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup Tables.

The treatment buffer zone surrounds the area where access is limited during 

treatment. If the fumigator determines that the buffer zone is less than 30’, then 

PPQ requires a 30’ buffer zone. If the fumigator determines that the buffer zone 

is greater than 30’, then PPQ must observe the prescribed buffer zone.

The treatment buffer zone extends from the perimeter of the enclosure to a 

distance determined by the fumigator in accordance with the label. Entry by 

any person except the PPQ official and the fumigator is prohibited except as 

provided in the “Exceptions to Buffer Zone Entry Restrictions” section of the 

label. 

The treatment buffer zone begins when the fumigant is introduced into the 

enclosure and ends when aeration begins, at which point the aeration buffer 

zone requirements apply.

The fumigator must define treatment and aeration buffer zone perimeters using 

physical barriers (such as walls, ropes, etc.) and placards to limit access to the 

buffer zone. Placards must meet all label requirements regarding specific 

warnings, information, and language.

The fumigator will permit transiting through buffer zones in accordance with 

the “Transit Exception” section of the label.

Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures

For multiple enclosures where buffer zones overlap, the fumigator must 

recalculate both the treatment and aeration buffer zones in accordance with the 

label and supply them to the PPQ official.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Preparing to Fumigate

2-6-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 5: Arranging and Operating Fans

Storerooms normally require a minimum of two, 1,800 cfm fans. Ensure that 

the fumigator places one fan at a low level and the other at a high level. Fans 

with capacity above 1,800 cfm create strong air currents which could result in 

gas leakage around the seals. If you are fumigating an area which includes the 

galley and adjoining storerooms, ensure that the fumigator places the fans to 

evenly distribute gas. Make certain that fans can be turned on and off from an 

area outside the fumigation site.

Require the fumigator to test all fans to ensure that they are in good operating 

condition. Operate fans during the gas introduction and for 30 minutes after 

introduction is completed.

Step 6: Placing Gas Sampling Tubes

The fumigator must place gas sampling tubes in areas and commodities which 

will give representative samples within the fumigated area. Require the 

fumigator to bring all tubes to one central point outside the treatment buffer 

zone of the area being fumigated. Label all gas sampling tubes so they can be 

easily identified when you take concentration readings. Label each tube by 

identifying the level of the hold and whether the gas sampling tube is in a 

commodity or space.

The fumigator must place a minimum of two gas sampling tubes in open space 

and at least one gas sampling tube within the commodity considered to be the 

most difficult for the fumigant to penetrate.

Step 7: Placing the Gas Introduction Lines

Numerous gas introduction lines may be necessary in order to obtain even gas 

distribution throughout the fumigation area. Require the fumigator to place the 

gas introduction line directly through an opening from the outside (example–a 

door or window) directly above a fan. The introduction line must be securely 

attached to the top of the fan to prevent movement of the hose. An unsecured 

introduction line could move the line out of the airflow. Require the fumigator 

to place a piece of nonpermeable sheeting (example–plastic or vinyl) over the 

commodity in front of and below each gas supply line. The nonpermeable 

sheet will prevent any liquid MB from coming in contact with commodities 

and will prevent damage.

Step 8: Measuring the Temperature

The PPQ official must determine the temperature of the commodity and the air 

(space) in order to select the proper dosage rate using a calibrated thermometer. 

Record the temperatures in Block 22 on the PPQ Form 429A.

In the electronic 429 database, record the temperatures in the space and 

commodity fields in the Treatment form.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-6-9

If the temperature is below the minimum listed for the treatment schedule, then 

require the fumigator to heat the hold or other space to be fumigated.

Step 9: Sealing Stores

One of the most important steps in preparing for a ship fumigation is sealing all 

openings and areas which have the potential to leak gas. Consider the entire 

area to be fumigated as a natural atmospheric chamber and make the area as 

gas tight as possible. The most important task is to locate all openings (e.g., 

drain pipes, bilge drain holes, or air ducts) and seal them.

Ensure that the fumigator does not seal or make gas tight recessed areas, ducts, 

or similar apertures which may harbor an infestation. In some cases, it is better 

to seal sources of leaks on the outside of the area to be fumigated. Require the 

fumigator to use caulking compound or tape for sealing small spaces, doors, 

and other openings. For sealing larger areas, such as hatch cover openings, use 

polyethylene or similar material secured with tape or adhesive spray. When 

practical, seal air ventilation ducts on the outside of the space being fumigated 

so sealing tape can be removed when the fumigator evacuates the gas and 

begins aeration. 

Require the fumigator to look for and seal off the following ship areas when 

preparing a ship for fumigation:

Air vents

All passageways, engine room, and other crew areas for electric pipeline 

or other duct work common with cargo holds

Bilge and drainwell vents and drains to all cargo holds sometimes 

common with more than one hold or engine room bilges

CO2 piping to all cargo holds; degassing systems (older ships) which 

usually run from hold to hold

Drains

Dumbwaiter openings

Emergency escape hatches from shaft alley and escape hatches from all 

holds

Engine room—recirculation air systems controlled from and common 

with the engine room areas—especially on newer ships; check for drilled 

holes or other openings in fore and aft bulkheads of engine room spaces, 

all engine room vent systems, and housing or casing leading into spaces 

to be fumigated

Galley intake and exhaust systems (may be common with the dry stores)

Heating, air conditioning, electrical, communication, and ventilation 

systems
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Preparing to Fumigate

2-6-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Inner bottom and deep tank covers to ensure that they are closed prior to 

fumigating

Pipes and other utility conduits through decks and bulkheads

Fire and smoke detector systems from fumigated areas

Steam-smothering systems for connection between holds

Vents in shaft alley and gear lockers to holds; breaks in bulkhead

Wall plates

Step 10: Measuring Volume

Obtain the volume of the dry stores, galleys, and crew quarters from the chief 

mate, captain, the ship’s plan, or by measuring the actual dimensions. 

Step 11: Calculating Dosage

Use the formula in Figure 2-6-1 to calculate dosage.

Step 12: Making a Final Check

Just before introducing the gas, the PPQ official and the fumigator must ensure 

that the following activities are performed:

Check all sealed areas to make sure they are securely taped and free from 

holes

Check the gas introduction line connections to make sure they are tight

Check to make sure all safety equipment is available and in working order

Check to make sure the ship’s gangway and areas to be fumigated are 

properly placarded and the area is secured. A guard should be present at 

the entrance to the gangway to restrict access to the ship. If the crew has 

been removed, walk through the quarters and other areas to make sure no

one is on board

Figure 2-6-1 Formula for Calculating MB Dosage for Vessel Fumigations

EXAMPLE The dry storage area is infested with Khapra beetle. The volume is 

8,000 ft3, and the temperature is 65 °F. The treatment schedule lists 

the dosage rate as 6 lbs. MB/1,000 ft3. To calculate the dosage, 

multiply the volume (8,000 ft3) by the dosage rate (6 lbs./1,000 ft3). 

This equals 48 lbs. of MB needed for the dosage.

Dosage (lbs.) Volume (ft3) Dosage Rate (lbs.) 

1,000 ft3 = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-6-11

Place fumigant cylinder with gas introduction line on scale and take initial 

weight reading. Make sure the gas introduction line is attached to the 

cylinder. After obtaining the correct weight, subtract the dosage to be 

introduced into the enclosure. When the entire dosage has been 

introduced, the scale will be balanced.

Start volatilizer and heat water to 200 °F or above

Take gas concentration readings to determine if any contaminant gases are 

present

Turn on all fans and gas detection devices to make sure they work

Conducting the Fumigation

Step 1: Introducing the Gas

MB 2016 Label

Require the fumigator and PPQ official to use SCBA while introducing and 

adding gas. Require the fumigator to turn on all fans while introducing the gas. 

When using large cylinders of MB, have the fumigator slightly open the valve 

then close the valve. Using an APHIS-approved continuous real time gas 

detection device, check all connections on the gas introduction line for leaks. If 

leaks are found, the fumigator must tighten the connections and repeat the test. 

When no leaks are found, require the fumigator to open the valve to the point 

where 3 to 4 pounds of MB are being introduced per minute. The water 

temperature in the volatilizer should never go below 150 °F at any time during 

gas introduction. The water in the volatilizer can include an antifreeze and 

should be handled with appropriate safeguards.

! CAUTION

The acceptable air concentration level for methyl bromide (MB) is 5 ppm. A 

respirator (approved SCBA) is required if the MB concentration level in the air is 

unknown or greater than 5 ppm at any time. The PPQ official and the fumigator must

use SCBA while introducing the gas, checking for leaks, when taking aeration 

readings, and inside the buffer zone.

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.

! CAUTION

Do not touch the introduction line with your bare hands—you may get burned! Have 

the fumigator close the cylinder valve once the proper dosage has been introduced.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Conducting the Fumigation

2-6-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

The fumigation time begins when all the gas has been introduced. The PPQ 

official must record the time gas introduction was started and completed in 

Block 32 on the PPQ Form 429A.

In the electronic 429 database, record the fumigation date, gas introduction 

start and finish time in the corresponding fields under the “GAS 

INTRODUCTION” heading on the Treatment form.

Require the fumigator to run the fans for 30 minutes after all the gas has been 

introduced. The PPQ official must take the initial concentration reading 30 

minutes after all the gas has been introduced.

When using cylinders, getting the final amounts of gas out of the cylinder may 

take a long time. Consider taking gas concentration readings 30 minutes after 

the gas is first introduced. If the gas distribution is even (all readings within 4 

ounces of each other) and at an adequately high concentration, then require the 

fumigator to turn off the fans. Running the fans longer may contribute to gas 

leakage. Allow the remainder of the gas to discharge at its slow rate with 

intermittent running of the fans for dispersal.

Step 2: Taking Concentration Readings

The PPQ official must take concentration readings with an APHIS-approved 

gas detection device to determine the gas concentration and distribution within 

the area being fumigated. If using a T/C, check Drierite® tubes before each 

reading and change Drierite® if its color is pink. Take concentration readings at 

the times prescribed in the treatment schedule.

Consult the treatment schedule being used for the actual concentration 

readings. You may start the final concentration reading 30 minutes prior to the 

end of the exposure period.

Take additional readings when there is indication that the gas is not properly 

distributed or the minimum gas concentration is not being maintained. Record 

readings on PPQ Form 429A.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-6-13

Step 3: Testing for Leaks

Require the fumigator to wear the SCBA and use an APHIS-approved 

continuous real time gas detection device to test for leaks after all the gas has 

been introduced. Test around the perimeter of the area being fumigated, 

especially where doors, windows, pipes, electric cords, gas sampling tubes, 

and gas introduction lines are present. If the fumigator detects leaks, ensure 

they are sealed with additional tape, adhesive, or by placing more polyethylene 

and adhesive over the leaking areas.

Step 4: Adding Gas and Extending Exposure

If you determine that you need to add gas and extend time, use the formula in 

Figure 2-6-2 to calculate the amount of gas to add and Table 2-6-1 to determine 

how long to extend the exposure period.

Use Table 2-6-1 to determine how long to extend the exposure period:

Figure 2-6-2 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add for Vessel 

Fumigation

EXAMPLE You are fumigating a ship’s storeroom for Khapra beetle and the 

minimum concentration for the 2-hour reading is listed at 50 oz., but 

your readings average 45 oz. The volume of the storeroom is 1,500 

ft3. Using the formula in Figure 2-6-2, you would figure the following:

1.6 x 5 (oz. below minimum) x 1,500/1,000

8 x 1.50 = 12 oz. gas to be added

1.6 number of ounces below minimum  volume in cubic feet

1000 cubic feet  ------------------------------------------------ 116  ----- = pounds of gas to add
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Aeration

2-6-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 5: Exhausting the Gas

Require the fumigator to exhaust the gas at the completion of the exposure 

period. Record detector tube readings and the time interval from the aeration in 

the corresponding fields in “DETECTOR READINGS” on the PPQ Form 

429A.

Removal of the fumigant is facilitated by using an outside blower to force fresh 

air through portable canvas, plastic, or similar ducts. Another method is to use 

compressed air hoses to force fresh air into the area. Require the fumigator to 

use suction type fans with portable ducts to evacuate gas from storerooms to 

outside, downwind areas away from crew areas, preferably on the offshore side 

of the ship. Ensure that the fumigator does not point the ducts upward, since 

dissipation onto the deck may occur. Use the ship’s aeration/ventilation 

equipment if possible. Make sure that use of ship’s equipment will not

distribute the exhausted gas to other areas within the ship.

Aeration

The fumigator must:

Arrange for the aeration to proceed once the treatment is completed.

Consider the wind direction when pointing the exhaust duct, and face the 

duct outlet toward an open area away from people.

Ensure that, during the first 10 minutes of aeration, no one is present 

within 200 feet downwind of the exhaust duct outlet.

Determine aeration buffer zones in accordance with Environmental 

Protection Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation 

Buffer Zone Lookup Tables.

Ensure no one is present within the perimeter of the aeration buffer zone 

unless they are wearing SCBA.

Refer to “Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures”.

Table 2-6-1 Determine Time for Extended Exposure

If the exposure time is: And the reading is below 

minimum by: Then extend exposure:

12 hours or more 10 oz. or less 10 percent of the time lapse 

since gas introduction or the 

last reading

11 oz. or more 2 hours or 10 percent of the 

time lapse since last 

reading, whichever is 

greater
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Wearing Respiratory Protection

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-6-15

Follow all label instructions, state, county, and local regulations, in 

addition to the instructions in this manual.

Inform people located in occupied structures and personnel in the 

immediate area within the buffer zone that release of MB is about to take 

place and give them the option of leaving the area or remaining inside the 

building.

Restrict access to the area where the exhaust duct extends beyond the 

enclosure.

Wearing Respiratory Protection

The fumigator must wear approved respiratory protection (SCBA, supplied air 

respirator, or combination unit) when there is a risk of exposure to 

concentrations above 5 ppm; this includes any time the concentration is 

unknown.

MB 2016 Label

Aerating the Area

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Wearing the SCBA, open doors, hatches, tarpaulins, and areas to facilitate 

aeration.

2. Connect the exhaust system.

3. Start the exhaust system (minimum 3,500 cfm exhaust fan connected to an 

exhaust duct).

4. Aerate until gas concentrations are 5 ppm or less.

5. Stop the aeration fans. 

6. While wearing SCBA, take a concentration reading with a colorimetric 

tube in the airspace within the fumigated area. 

The PPQ official must record the date, concentration reading, and time on PPQ 

Form 429A. In the electronic 429 database, record the time, and detector 

reading (in ppm) in the corresponding fields on the “Detector Readings” form.

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Ship Fumigation for Emergency Situations

Wearing Respiratory Protection

2-6-16 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-7-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Structure 

Fumigation

Under Construction

The information in this chapter has been temporarily removed. For more 

information, contact USDA-APHIS-PPQ Field Operations at 

PPQ.Ops.Treatment@usda.gov.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Structure Fumigation

Under Construction

2-7-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special 

Procedures for Container Fumigations Without 

a Tarpaulin

Contents

Introduction 2-8-1

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information 2-8-1

Responsibilities 2-8-3

Methods and Procedures 2-8-4

Materials Needed 2-8-5

PPQ Officer Provides 2-8-5

Fumigator Provides 2-8-6

Preparing to Fumigate 2-8-7

Conducting the Fumigation 2-8-17

Aeration 2-8-25

Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity 2-8-26

Wearing Respiratory Protection 2-8-26

Introduction

APHIS allows the fumigation of a container WITHOUT a tarpaulin provided 

the containers are located outdoors and can be shown to be structurally sound. 

For cut flower, fresh fruit and vegetable treatments of 4 hours duration or less, 

APHIS may approve on a case-by-case basis the use of containers without the 

use of a tarpaulin. The commercial fumigator should contact the local PPQ 

office to initiate the process for container approval. Refer to Table 2-8-1 for 

detailed responsibilities.

The integrity of these containers (ability to hold methyl bromide adequately) is 

predetermined by passing a pressure test. See Container Prepping and PreTesting on page 2-8-14.

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

In 2015, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) directed all methyl 

bromide (MB) registrants to amend the use directions on the labels of all 100% 

MB products. EPA required the changes in order to reflect recommendations in 

an EPA report.1
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

2-8-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

These amendments modify the use directions for fumigation and aeration 

procedures, modify respiratory requirements and equipment and update gas 

monitoring equipment. EPA requires all labels on newly manufactured MB to 

reflect these recommendations effective October 01, 2016; however, EPA is 

allowing existing stocks of MB to be used in accordance with the use 

directions on the existing stock’s (older) labels. 

PPQ officials and fumigators must closely examine gas cylinder labels in order 

to validate that the dosage, exposure, and commodity are either on the cylinder 

label or covered by a FIFRA Section 18 exemption. If a label is not affixed to 

the cylinder, DO NOT allow the fumigator to use that cylinder.

New Buffer Zone Requirements

All 2016 MB labels now require both a treatment and an aeration buffer zone. 

Both the treatment and aeration buffer zones are specific to the enclosure being 

fumigated and must be determined by tables in the Environmental Protection 

Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup 

Tables. The fumigators are responsible for using this website to determine the 

buffer zones and reporting both buffer zones to the PPQ official. If the 

treatment buffer zone is determined to be less than 30 feet, the PPQ official 

will maintain PPQ’s standard 30 foot treatment buffer zone; otherwise, the new 

treatment buffer zone must be observed. If the aeration buffer zone is 

determined to be less than 200 feet, then PPQ’s standard “200 feet for 10 

minutes” aeration buffer zone still applies for the first 10 minutes of aeration. 

The fumigator must refer to EPA’s website to determine the minimum aeration 

buffer zone to be maintained until the aeration period is complete and the 

fumigator has verified that gas concentration levels meet the conditions in the 

MB label. 

Transiting through buffer zones

The label permits vehicles to transit through both treatment and aeration buffer 

zones under specific conditions found in the label; it is up to the fumigator 

determine how or whether vehicles may transit in accordance with the label.

When using the newer 2016 MB label, changes to certain procedures and 

equipment in this chapter are displayed in a NOTICE box with a heading titled 

“MB 2016 Label”. 

1 “Report of Food Quality Protection Act (FQPA) Tolerance Reassessment and Risk Management 

Decision (TRED) for methyl bromide, and Reregistration Eligibility Decision (RED) for Methyl 

Bromide’s Commodity Uses”, archive dated August 2006. 
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Responsibilities

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-3

MB 2016 Label (example)

When using existing stocks, follow the equipment and procedural guidance 

that is displayed in the body of the text (outside of the NOTICE box). 

If there is no “MB 2016 Label” NOTICE box, then the instructions apply to all 

MB labels, 2016 and older.

Responsibilities

Refer to Table 2-8-1 for the processes and responsible parties when approving 

a container for tarpless fumigation.

NOTICE

Use this information when the fumigator is using the 2016 MB label.

Table 2-8-1 Responsibilities for Approving Tarpless Container Fumigations 

Action:

Responsible Party

Local 

PPQ 

Field 

Office

Field 

Operations Hub 

(FO-H)

QPAS S&T-TMT

1. Receives request from fumigator about tarpless 

fumigation. Request includes fumigator contact 

information and details of fumigation location

X

2. Local field office sends details of the inquiry to: X

3. FO-H sends details of the inquiry to: X X

4. Acknowledges receipt of request via email to the 

fumigator; sends requirements for pressure testing (see Container Prepping and Pre-Testing) and 

ensures that the requirements are understood

X X (if non-routine) X (if non-routine)

5. Fumigator submits proposed protocol to: X

6. Once protocol is agreed upon, fumigator is notified 

whether the protocol is approved or denied by:

X

7. When fumigator is ready for on sight approval, 

dates for testing are scheduled by:

X X (if non-routine)

8. On sight approval conducted, trip report, including 

recommendation, sent to S&T-TMT and QPAS by:

X X (if non-routine)

9. Concurrence reached over whether approval is 

granted

XX X

10. Notification of approval in writing sent by: X
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Methods and Procedures

2-8-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Methods and Procedures

The procedures covered in this section provide PPQ officials and commercial 

fumigators with the methods, responsibilities, and precautions for container 

fumigation without a tarpaulin.

A refrigerated container may be used for fumigations without a tarpaulin 

provided the following requirements are met:

Air exchange vents must be closed and taped if any openings are visible

Air introduction and exhaust ducts installed

Container must be a refrigerated sea container or refrigerated over-theroad freight trailer with metal flooring

Container must have three gas monitoring leads in the front-high, middlemiddle, and rear-low of the container (the “rear” is considered to be at the 

doors)

Container must be packed (in some cases repacked) so that two circulation 

fans can be placed on top of the commodity; one in the front and one in 

the back

Packing will ensure a minimum of 18 inches of air space above the 

commodity

Rear fan (at the doors) has the gas introduction hose attached to it and is 

referred to as the gas introduction fan

Use fans that have the capacity to move a volume of air in cubic feet per 

minute equivalent to the total volume of the container

Container must have all drainage holes (corner drip holes) sealed

Container must not have side doors or rear doors with damaged/missing 

gaskets

Container must successfully complete the Official Pressure Test described 

in this chapter

11. Training of local PPQ officials (pressure testing) 

by:

X

12. Follow up audits conducted if needed X X (if non-routine)

Table 2-8-1 Responsibilities for Approving Tarpless Container Fumigations (continued)

Action:

Responsible Party

Local 

PPQ 

Field 

Office

Field 

Operations Hub 

(FO-H)

QPAS S&T-TMT
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Materials Needed

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-5

Container must have all refrigeration units turned off during pressure 

testing and when under fumigation

Materials Needed

PPQ Officer Provides

Calculator (optional)

PPQ Form 429B

Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or supplied air respirator

Stopwatch

MB 2016 Label

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from PPQ, PPQ must also 

provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage. The Air 

Check Advantage can be calibrated either by the manufacturer or by 

the PPQ official. Calibrate according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000. The MiniRAE 3000 must be calibrated by the PPQ 

official according to the manufacturer’s User Guide. Refer to Chapter 

8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Materials Needed

2-8-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Fumigator Provides

Aeration fans with ducts

APHIS-approved methyl bromide monitor1

 (e.g. thermal conductivity 

device, infrared device, etc.)

Auxiliary pump or Mighty Vac for purging long gas sampling lines

Colorimetric tubes (see Appendix E for a list of APHIS-approved product 

ranges)

Ducts (introduction and exhaust)

Electrical wiring (grounded, permanent type), three-prong extension cords

Fans (circulation and introduction)

Gas introduction hose

Gas sampling tubes

Methyl bromide

Pressure testing equipment

Any device or equipment with the ability to pressurize a container (for 

example, blowers, compressors, tanks, manifolds)

Manometer

Sealing putty

Scales or dispensers2

Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or supplied air respirator

Tape

Temperature recorder and temperature sensors3

Thermometer4

Volatilizer

Warning signs/placarding

1 Methyl bromide monitor must be calibrated annually. See Equipment on page 8-1-1 for calibration 

information. If using a thermal conductivity (T/C) analyzer, Drierite® and Ascarite® must be used.

2 All scales must be calibrated by the State, a company that is certified to conduct scale calibrations, 

or by a state-certified fumigator under the supervision of PPQ. The source and date of calibration 

must be posted in a visible location on or with the scale at all times. The scale must be calibrated a 

minimum of every year.

3 Temperature sensors must be calibrated annually by the manufacturer or National Institute of 

Standards and Technology (NIST) within the range of 40 °F to 80 °F (4.4 °C to 26.7 °C).

4 The thermometer must be calibrated or replaced annually.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-7

MB 2016 Label

Preparing to Fumigate

Step 1: Selecting the Container

The fumigator must obtain a letter of authorization from the owner of the 

container, the shipping line, or the broker prior to attempting to gain access 

through the container doors or making any structural changes to the containers. 

The fumigator will maintain the letters of authorization and provide copies to 

the local PPQ office upon request. PPQ is not responsible for any damage 

incurred by the fumigator due to modification or manipulation of a container's 

original condition.

Step 2: Selecting the Fumigation Site

The PPQ official and the fumigator must consider the following factors when 

selecting a fumigation site:

Aeration requirements

Electrical power supply

Nonwork area that can be effectively marked and safeguarded or isolated

Water supply

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from the fumigator, the 

fumigator must also provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved direct read gas detection device

Colorimetric tubes (e.g. Draeger, Sensidyne)

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device 

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000

Devices must be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

2-8-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Well-lighted area

Well-protected area

Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures

Aeration Requirements

The fumigator must restrict access to the area where the exhaust duct extends 

beyond the container. Before a fumigation begins, the fumigator must ensure 

the exhaust duct is located in a safe place. During the first 10 minutes of 

aeration, the fumigator must not allow anyone within 200 feet downwind of 

the exhaust duct outlet. The fumigator is responsible for planning the 

fumigation so that aeration can be safely conducted immediately following the 

fumigation.

MB 2016 Label

Electrical Power Supply

Require the fumigator to supply an adequate electrical source to run the 

circulation fans and the gas detection unit. A separate line should be available 

for the gas detection unit. Electrical outlets must be grounded and conveniently 

located in relation to the fumigation area. PPQ does not allow the use of 

generators as a power source, except under emergency conditions.

NOTICE

The fumigator is responsible for all aspects of aeration. When the fumigation is 

a Section 18 exemption fumigation, the PPQ official is required to verify the 

final gas concentration reading(s). Refer to xx for more information.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-9

Nonwork Area-MB 2016 Label

Nonwork Area

The PPQ official and the fumigator must select a secure area where traffic and 

people are restricted from entering and that is isolated from people working. A 

nonwork area is preferred to help prevent accidents such as a forklift piercing a 

container. The fumigation area is the area 30 feet surrounding the container(s) 

and is separated from the non-fumigation area by a physical barrier such as 

ropes, barricades, or walls. 

Restrict access to the fumigation and aeration areas to the fumigator’s 

employees and PPQ employees monitoring the treatment. The area outside the 

30-foot perimeter is usually regarded as a safe distance from the fumigation. 

NOTICE

The fumigator will determine the treatment buffer zone in accordance with the 

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity 

Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup Tables.

The treatment buffer zone surrounds the area where access is limited during 

treatment. If the fumigator determines that the buffer zone is less than 30’, then 

PPQ requires a 30’ buffer zone. If the fumigator determines that the buffer zone 

is greater than 30’, then PPQ must observe the prescribed buffer zone.

The treatment buffer zone extends from the perimeter of the enclosure to a 

distance determined by the fumigator in accordance with the label. Entry by 

any person except the PPQ official and the fumigator is prohibited except as 

provided in the “Exceptions to Buffer Zone Entry Restrictions” section of the 

label. 

The treatment buffer zone begins when the fumigant is introduced into the 

enclosure and ends when aeration begins, at which point the aeration buffer 

zone requirements apply.

The fumigator must define treatment and aeration buffer zone perimeters using 

physical barriers (such as walls, ropes, etc.) and placards to limit access to the 

buffer zone. Placards must meet all label requirements regarding specific 

warnings, information, and language.

The fumigator will permit transiting through buffer zones in accordance with 

the “Transit Exception” section of the label.

Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures

For multiple enclosures where buffer zones overlap, the fumigator must 

recalculate both the treatment and aeration buffer zones in accordance with the 

label and supply them to the PPQ official.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

2-8-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

The fumigator must placard within the perimeter of the secure area (including 

the entrance) with the appropriate DANGER/PELIGRO signs. Make sure the 

placards meet the appropriate fumigant label or labeling requirements. The 

skull and crossbones should be present as well as “AREA UNDER 

FUMIGATION, DO NOT ENTER/NO ENTRE”; date of the fumigation; name 

of the fumigant used; and the name, address, and telephone number of the 

fumigator. Unless you (PPQ) authorize their use, do not allow motorized 

vehicles to operate within 30 feet of the fumigation and aeration areas. The 30-

foot perimeter is not specifically mentioned on the MB label, but is required 

for PPQ officials.

When multiple containers are being fumigated, there must be sufficient space 

for a person wearing SCBA to walk between the containers.

Water Supply

A water supply is necessary for safety purposes. Water is necessary for 

washing off MB if the liquid form is spilled on someone. If no permanent 

water is present on site, the fumigator must provide a five-gallon supply of 

potable, unfrozen water.

Well-Lighted Area

The fumigator will ensure that the area has adequate lighting for safety 

purposes and for ease in reading gas detection units, thermometers, and for 

determining whether a container has holes or places where the MB may leak.

Well-Ventilated, Sheltered Area

The PPQ official and the fumigator must select sites that well-ventilated and 

sheltered. A well-ventilated site is required for exhausting the gas. Avoid areas 

where strong drafts are likely to occur.

Ensure that the fumigator selects a site that is semi-sheltered, such as the 

leeward side of a warehouse or pier to offer some protection from severe 

winds. Severe winds are defined as sustained winds or gusts of 30 m.p.h. or 

higher for any time period. Do not allow the fumigation to proceed if there is a 

forecast from the National Weather Service of severe winds and/or 

thunderstorms at the beginning of or for the entire length of the fumigation.

Some gas will escape from the container even in the best conditions. The 

fumigator must ensure that the exhausted gas does not endanger people 

NOTICE

Nontarped containerized fumigations cannot be conducted in a warehouse
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-11

working outdoors. When treatments are conducted in a particular location on a 

regular basis, a permanent site should be designated. 

Step 3: Arranging the Containers

Ensure that the containers are not loaded beyond 80 percent of their capacity. 

There must be a space of a minimum of 18 inches above the commodity. This 

allows a crawl space for placing the gas sampling lines and fans, and facilitates 

uniform gas distribution. (Some restacking of cargo may be necessary to meet 

this requirement.) Require the commodity to be on pallets to allow adequate 

space (at least 2 inches) below the commodity. 

APHIS does not allow stacking of containers. Stacking creates a safety risk to 

the person(s) installing fans, sampling lines, and aeration ducts.

Step 4: Arranging and Operating Fans

Require the fumigator to use a minimum of two 2,500 cfm fans for efficient 

gas circulation. Ensure that the fans are placed on top of the palletized 

commodity; one fan at the doors (rear) and one fan in the front. The rear fan is 

the gas introduction fan and should be pointed into the container. The front fan 

is pointing in the opposite direction.

Step 5: Placing the Gas Introduction Line

MB is converted from a liquid into a gas by a volatilizer. The hose that runs 

from the MB cylinder into the volatilizer must be 3000 PSI hydraulic high 

pressure hose with a 3/8 inch inner diameter (ID) or larger. From the 

volatilizer, MB gas is introduced into the container by means of a gas 

introduction hose. The gas introduction line must be a minimum of 350 PSI 

with a 1/2 inch ID or larger. Ensure that the fumigator places the introduction 

line directly above the fan at the rear door of the container. Each container 

must have a gas introduction line.

Step 6: Placing the Gas Sampling Tubes

Ensure that the fumigator installs at least three gas sampling tubes per 

container. Insert the gas introduction line and sampling tubes between the 

closed rear door gaskets, or in some other location that does not interfere with 

successful pressure testing. Position the gas sampling tubes as follows:

Front low — near the floor at the door end of the container

Rear high — rear of the load at the high end opposite the fan

Middle center — mid way from front to back, at mid depth 

NOTICE

Do not run the container’s fan or refrigeration unit during the fumigation.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

2-8-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Require the fumigator to use gas sampling tubes of sufficient length to extend 

from the sampling position inside the container to at least 30 feet beyond the 

container. Ensure that all the gas sampling tubes meet in one area for ease and 

safety in taking gas concentration readings. Do not permit gas sampling tubes 

to be spliced. Before starting the fumigation, check for gas sampling tube 

blockage or pinching by connecting each tube to the gas detection device for a 

short time. If the line is blocked, the flow to the device will drop sharply. Tubes 

can also be checked with a MityVac® hand pump or other air pump device. 

Require the fumigator to replace any defective gas sampling tubes. 

Step 7: Measuring the Temperature

The PPQ official must determine the temperature of the commodity in order to 

select the proper dosage rate. To take the temperature readings, use a calibrated 

bimetallic, mercury, or digital long-stem thermometer.

Depending on whether or not you are fumigating a pulpy fruit or vegetable, 

you may use either the commodity temperature or an average of the 

commodity and air temperatures. A pulpy fruit or vegetable can support 

internal feeding insects, is fleshy and moist, and can be probed with a 

temperature measuring device. Examples include, but are not limited to 

peppers, onions, and grapes.

For pulpy fruits and pulpy vegetables, insert the thermometer into the pulp and 

use the only the commodity temperature to determine the dosage rate. For 

commodities that have been refrigerated, probe the fruits that have the lowest 

pulp temperature. Again, fumigate only when the fruit pulp is at 40°F or 

higher. 

If the commodity has no pulp (e.g., peas, beans, grains, herbs, spices, etc.), 

take the temperature of the air space immediately surrounding the commodity 

as well as the commodity temperature and use Table 2-8-2 to determine the 

correct temperature to use when selecting the proper dosage rate.

NOTICE

Do not fumigate at temperatures below 40°F. 

The presence of ice indicates temperatures below 40°F. If ice is present anywhere in 

the box, pallet, or container, do not fumigate the commodity.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-13

Step 8: Measuring the Volume

Using a 100-foot tape measure, the PPQ official and the fumigator must 

carefully measure the length, width, and height of the container. Never 

estimate the measurements. An error in measurement of as little as 12 inches 

can result in miscalculating the dosage by as much as 15 percent. When 

measuring, round off to the nearest quarter foot (e.g., 2 1/4 inches = 0.25 feet). 

In the case of fumigations of edible commodities, an error can result in an 

unacceptable level of residue on the commodity.

Formula for determining volume:

length x width x height = volume in cubic feet

The PPQ official must record volume in Block 26 of PPQ Form 429B. In the 

electronic 429 database, record the length, width, and height in the 

corresponding fields under the “AMT of Gas Introduced” heading on the 

treatment form.

Step 9: Calculating the Dosage

The PPQ official must calculate dosage by doing the following:

1. Refer to the treatment schedule for the correct dosage rate (lbs/1,000 ft3) 

based on temperature (°F).

2. Multiply by the dosage (lbs/1,000 ft3

) rate by the volume (ft3) to get the 

dosage in pounds.

3. Round to the nearest quarter pound.

Table 2-8-2 Determine Whether to Use Commodity or Air Temperature for 

Determining Dosage Rate For Nonpulpy Commodities

If the air temperature is: And: Then:

Higher than the commodity 

temperature

Use the single lowest commodity temperature for determining 

the dosage rate (DO NOT use 

the average commodity temLower than the commodity peratures).

temperature

By less than 10 degrees

By 10 degrees or more Use the average of the single 

lowest air and commodity temperatures for determining the 

dosage rate.

(Never initiate a fumigation if 

any temperature reads lower 

than 40°F.)

EXAMPLE A stack with measurements H=10’6”, L=42’3”, W=10’9”

10.50 x 42.25 x 10.75 = 4,768.9 ft3

 rounded to 4,769 ft3
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

2-8-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Formula for calculating dosage:

The PPQ official must record dosage in Block 33 of PPQ Form 429B. In the 

electronic 429 database, the PPQ official must enter the dosage rate in the 

“dosage” field and the total amount of gas required for the fumigation will be 

displayed in the “Gas Required” field.

Step 10: Container Pressure Testing

In order to ensure that the container can maintain the required gas 

concentrations, it must be pressure tested. Sea containers or over-the-road 

freight trailers may be considered for pressure testing and tarpless fumigation 

if they possess solid metal walls and ceilings, a channeled solid metal floor, 

and were originally manufactured with two rear doors. Side doors are not

permitted.

Any process for pressure testing or tarpless container fumigation which 

requires modification or a structural change to the container will require a 

letter of authorization from the owner. The fumigator shall maintain the letters 

of authorization and provide copies to the local PPQ office upon request. The 

container owners must agree to repair any container with modified drain holes 

before they are used for tarpless fumigation.

Required Equipment

The fumigator must supply the following equipment for the pressure test:

Any device or equipment with the ability to pressurize a container (for 

example, blowers, compressors, tanks, manifolds)

A manometer for recording the internal container pressure during the test. 

The units may be either Pascals (Pa) or inches of water, and must be able 

to reach a minimum of 250 Pa or 1.0 inch of water.

Sealing putty for plugging around drain holes, gaps between door gaskets, 

and sealing around pressure insertion hose.

Container Prepping and Pre-Testing

In preparation for the pressure test, the fumigator must:

1. Close vents and turn off refrigeration unit

Figure 2-8-1 Formula for MB Calculating Dosage for Container Fumigations 

Without a Tarpaulin

Dosage (lbs.) Volume (ft3) Dosage Rate (lbs.) 

1,000 ft3 = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-15

2. Seal corner drain holes

3. Repair any visible damage to the container or any parts potentially 

impacting air tightness

4. Attach a pressurization and monitoring apparatus to the container

5. Pressurize the container to a minimum pressure of 250 Pa (1.0 inch of 

water)

6. Monitor the pressure to ensure that the decrease from 200 Pa to 100 Pa (0.8 

inches to 0.4 inches) takes at least 15 seconds

7. Identify and repair leaks

After the fumigator has conducted a successful pressure test, PPQ will observe 

and record the official time for the final pressure test. 

Official Pressure Test

The PPQ official will:

1. Observe the fumigator pressurizing the container to 250 Pa (1.0 inches).

2. Allow the pressure to decrease to 200 Pa and then record the time it takes 

to decrease from 200 Pa to 100 Pa (0.8 inches to 0.4 inches) with a 

stopwatch.

A successful (passing) test is defined by a minimum of 15 seconds transpiring 

while pressure decreases from 200 Pa to 100 Pa (0.8 inches to 0.4 inches). The 

PPQ official should confirm a passing test before permitting the fumigator to 

proceed with a tarpless fumigation. Record the passing test time on PPQ Form 

429B, and enter it into the electronic 429 database. This data field is in the 

“Treatment” tab of the fumigation report in the “Setup” section. If “Approved 

Tarpless Container” is selected as the “Enclosure” type, then two additional 

fields appear in the report, “Was the pressure test conducted?” and “Pressure 

Test Time (seconds).” Record the time it takes the pressure to drop from 200 to 

100 Pa and enter the time (in seconds) into the fumigation report. Officials are 

not to stop timing after the time exceeds 15 seconds; continue timing until the 

pressure reaches 100 Pa or 90 seconds have elapsed. If the latter occurs, record 

“90” seconds as pressure loss interval.

If the container fails the pressure test (as defined by not holding pressure for a 

minimum of 15 seconds), record the time lapse in “REMARKS” in PPQ Form 

429B and in the electronic 429 database. Tarp the container and fumigate 

according to this manual, Chapter 2-4-Chemical Treatments, Fumigants, 

Methyl Bromide, Tarpaulin Fumigation.

Ensure that the fumigator places three gas sampling tubes within the container 

as described in Placing the Gas Sampling Tubes. Ensure the placement of the 
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Preparing to Fumigate

2-8-16 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

lines where they exit the container so the integrity of the sealed container is 

maintained. For example, an acceptable location for sampling tubes is along 

the sill of the container below the left door, pressed onto a small snake of 

plumbers putty to make a good seal with the sill and door gasket.

Step 11: Making a Final Check

Before introducing the gas, the PPQ official and the fumigator must ensure 

that the following activities are performed:

Turn on all circulation fans and APHIS-approved methyl bromide gas 

detection monitors to make sure they work.

Warm up and zero (if required) the APHIS-approved methyl bromide gas 

detection monitor as described in the Equipment chapter of this manual.

Start volatilizer and heat water to 200°F or above (See Volatilizer on page 

8-1-14 for temperature monitoring procedures.) A minimum temperature 

of 150°F is required at all times during the introduction process.

Place fumigant cylinder with gas introduction hose on scale and take 

initial weight reading.

Ensure the gas introduction hose is attached to the cylinder.

After obtaining the correct weight, subtract the dosage to be introduced 

into the container.

After introducing the proper amount of gas, the scale will be balanced.

Ensure the container is placarded and the area is secured; only people 

working on the fumigation can be in the area.

Ensure that any vents or holes in the container are sealed.

Ensure all gas sampling tubes are labeled and are not crimped or crushed.

Visually inspect lines or use an electric or Mityvac® hand pump to 

check for blockage.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-17

Confirm that there is enough gas in the cylinder and if necessary, that 

other cylinders are available.

Ensure that all safety equipment, especially SCBA, is available and in 

working order.

Confirm that the gas introduction line connections are tight and free of 

leaks.

If using a T/C monitor, install Drierite® and Ascarite® filters as stated in 

the instructions in this manual.

Conducting the Fumigation

Step 1: Introducing the Gas

MB 2016 Label

Require the fumigator and PPQ official to use SCBA while introducing and 

adding gas. The PPQ official is not required to be in the treatment buffer zone 

during the fumigation except as required for monitoring activity. The PPQ 

official must ensure that the fumigator turns on all circulation fans before 

NOTICE

When conducting fumigations, erroneous readings can occur if the sampling lines 

become blocked or crimped. It would be impossible to install a new sampling line 

during a fumigation treatment. Therefore, to avoid an unsuccessful fumigation, test 

sampling lines before the treatment begins.

Refer to the following steps to detect blocked sampling tubes with the use of a MityVac® hand-held pump (for supplier, see Appendix E.)

1. Prior to gas introduction, connect a MityVac® hand-held vacuum pump to sampling tubes.

2. Squeeze the handle on the MityVac® unit. If the line is blocked, a vacuum will be indicated 

on the MityVac® gauge. For sampling tubes longer than 25 feet, squeeze the handle two or 

three times. The MityVac® pump has the capacity to attain and hold 25 inches of Hg vacuum 

and a minimum of 7 psig pressure.

3. Disconnect the MityVac® pump from the sampling tube and repeat this procedure for each 

sampling tube. (Connect sampling tubes to the gas analyzer prior to fumigant introduction.)

! CAUTION

The acceptable air concentration level for methyl bromide (MB) is 5 ppm. A respirator (approved SCBA) is required if the MB concentration level in the air is unknown 

or greater than 5 ppm at any time. The PPQ official and the fumigator must use 

SCBA while introducing the gas, checking for leaks, when taking aeration readings, 

and inside the buffer zone.

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Conducting the Fumigation

2-8-18 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

introducing the gas. When using large cylinders of MB, the fumigator should 

slightly open the cylinder valve, then close the valve.

With an APHIS-approved continuous real time gas detection device, the 

fumigator must check all connections on the gas introduction line (between the 

MB cylinder and the volatilizer) for leaks. If leaks are found, advise the 

fumigator to tighten the connections and repeat the test. If no leaks are found, 

require the fumigator to open the valve to the point where three to four pounds 

of MB are introduced per minute. 

The water temperature in the volatilizer should never go below 150°F at any 

time during gas introduction. The water in the volatilizer can include an 

antifreeze and should be handled with the appropriate safeguards. See 

Volatilizer on page 8-1-14 for temperature monitoring procedures.

The fumigation time begins once all the gas has been introduced. The PPQ 

official must record the time gas introduction was started and completed in 

Block 32 on PPQ Form 429B. In the electronic 429 database, record the 

fumigation date, gas introduction start and finish time in the corresponding 

fields under the “GAS INTRODUCTION” heading in the Treatment form.

Require the fumigator to run the fans for 30 minutes to achieve even gas 

distribution. The PPQ official must take the initial concentration reading 30 

minutes after all the gas has been introduced.

When evacuating large cylinders, getting the final amount of gas out may take 

a long time. Consider taking a gas concentration reading 30 minutes after the 

gas was first introduced. If the gas distribution is even (all readings within 4 

! DANGER

If the PPQ official or fumigator notices a cloud, plume, vapor, or mist coming from 

the introduction equipment during gas introduction, the fumigator must TURN OFF 

the valve on the gas cylinder, EVACUATE the area immediately, and ABORT the 

fumigation. 

No person should place any part of their body into the cloud, plume, vapor, or mist. 

After the cloud plume has dissipated, measure gas concentration levels at the gas 

cylinder using any APHIS-approved continuous real time gas detection device. 

When gas concentration levels at the cylinder reach 5 ppm or less, the fumigator 

must identify the source of the leak and correct it before restarting the fumigation.

Any person within the treatment buffer zone must wear and use SCBA equipment 

during gas introduction and gas addition.

! CAUTION

Do not touch the introduction line with your bare hands — you could get burned! 

Close the cylinder valve once the proper dosage has been introduced.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-19

ounces of each other) and at a significantly high concentration, advise the 

fumigator to turn off the fans. Running the fans longer can contribute to gas 

leakage. Allow the remainder of the gas to discharge while intermittently 

running the fans. Normally, all the gas should be introduced within 30 minutes.

If the fumigator detects excessive leakage (concentration readings of 50 

percent or less of the minimum concentration), do not attempt to correct the 

problem by adding more gas. Aerate the container and return, re-export, or 

destroy the commodity. Commodities used for food or feed cannot be 

retreated. 

Step 2: Taking Concentration Readings

The PPQ official must take concentration readings 30 minutes after gas 

introduction. Use an APHIS-approved gas detection device to determine the 

gas concentration and distribution within the container. Allow gas 

concentration readings to stabilize; do not disconnect the sampling line from 

the gas detection device when the minimum concentration reading has been 

met.

Take concentration readings at the times designated in the treatment schedule. 

Concentration readings should not differ more than 4 ounces among the lines. 

When concentration readings differ more than 4 ounces, run the fans to 

equalize the gas and record readings in the Remarks block on the PPQ Form 

429B. In some case, several cycles of fan operation may be necessary to 

NOTICE

Do not begin counting fumigation time until all the gas has been introduced and the 

valve on the MB tank is closed.

NOTICE

Before taking a reading, always purge sampling lines with a mechanical or hand 

pump. If using a T/C unit, connect it to the sampling line, adjust the gas flow rate to 

1.0, and wait until the meter registering “ounces per thousand cubic feet” stabilizes 

before taking a reading. (This may take a minute or more, depending upon the length 

of the tubing and whether or not an auxiliary pump is used.)
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Conducting the Fumigation

2-8-20 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

equalize the readings. The PPQ official must record all gas readings on the 

PPQ Form 429B and in the electronic 429 database.

Step 3: Determining the Need to Add Gas and Adjust Exposure

Use Table 2-8-3 to determine when to add gas or extend the exposure.

NOTICE

Avoid using hand-held, two-way radios near a T/C unit. Using two-way radios near a 

T/C unit will interfere with accurate concentration readings.

Table 2-8-3 Determine the Need to Add Gas and Adjust Exposure

If the lowest gas 

reading is: And the schedule is: Then:

Below the required 

minimum concentration

T101-a-1 or equivalenta

a T101-a-1 or equivalent schedules are those schedules that are:

NOT greater than 2 hours long (exposure time)

NOT greater than 4 lbs. per 1000 ft3

 (dosage rate)

Minimum concentration readings and temperature ranges match EXACTLY the readings 

in T101-a-1

If the minimum concentration readings do not meet these requirements, the schedule is NOT

equivalent. When schedules are NOT equivalent, use Table 2-8-4 to determine the length of 

time to extend exposure and use the formula in Figure 2-8-2 on page 2-21 to determine the 

amount of gas to add.

SEE Table 2-8-5 for corrections at 

0.5 hours, or Table 2-8-6 for corrections at 2 hours

Other than T101-a-1 or 

equivalent1

See Adding Gas and Extending 

Exposure to Commodities that are 

Fumigated Using Treatment 

Schedules Other Than T101-a-1 or 

Equivalent (may include perishables) on page 2-8-21

At or above the 

required minimum 

concentration

T101-a-1 or equivalent1 SEE Table 2-8-5 for corrections at 

0.5 hours, or Table 2-8-6 for corrections at 2 hours

Other than T101-a-1 or 

equivalent1

NO ACTION necessary
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-21

Adding Gas and Extending Exposure to Commodities that 

are Fumigated Using Treatment Schedules Other Than T101-

a-1 or Equivalent (may include perishables)

Once you have determined that you need to add gas and extend time, use the 

formula in Figure 2-8-2 to calculate the amount of gas to add and Table 2-8-4

to determine how long to extend the exposure period.

Adding Gas

When adding gas, require the fumigator to follow these steps:

1. Heat water in volatilizer.

2. Turn on fans.

3. Weigh the cylinder.

4. With SCBA on, open valve on cylinder and introduce the gas.

5. Close valve when the weight of the cylinder indicates that the needed 

amount of gas has been added.

The PPQ official must record quantity of fumigant added in Block 34 and 

additional fan time in Block 30 of PPQ Form 429B. 

In the electronic 429, record the amount of additional gas listed in the 

Treatment Manual in the added in the “Additional Gas Recommended” field 

and the actual amount of additional gas added in the “Actual Additional Gas” 

field. Record the additional fan time in the “TIME FANS OPERATED” field in 

the Treatment form.

Figure 2-8-2 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add for Schedules 

Not T101-a-1 Equivalent and Conducted in a Container Without a 

Tarpaulin

Table 2-8-4 Determine the Extended Exposure Period to Commodities that are 

Not T101-a-1 Equivalent

And any individual reading 

is below minimum by: Then extend exposure:

10 oz. or less 10 percent of the time lapse since gas introduction or the 

last acceptable reading

11 oz. or more 30 minutes

1.6 number of ounces below minimum  volume in cubic feet

1000 cubic feet  ------------------------------------------------ 116  ----- = pounds of gas to add
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Conducting the Fumigation

2-8-22 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Note the time the fumigator started and finished introducing additional gas and 

record in Block 40 (Remarks) of PPQ Form 429B and in the “Remarks” form 

in the electronic 429 database. Require the fumigator to run the fans until there 

is even gas distribution throughout the stack. Turn off fans, then take a 

concentration reading 30 minutes after the gas has been introduced. If all 

readings are above minimum concentration levels, proceed as usual with the 

remaining scheduled concentration readings.

Adding Gas to Fruits, Vegetables, or Perishable Commodities 

Using Schedules T101-a-1 or Equivalent

Use Table 2-8-5 and Table 2-8-6 to determine if you need to add gas or extend 

or decrease the exposure time. Select the proper table based on the time of the 

gas reading (30 minutes or 2 hours). Use the formula in Figure 2-8-3 to 

determine the amount of gas to add.

Adding Gas

When adding gas, require the fumigator to follow these steps:

1. Heat water in volatilizer.

2. Turn on fans.

3. Weigh the cylinder.

4. With SCBA on, open valve on cylinder and introduce the gas.

Figure 2-8-3 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add For T101-a-1 

Equivalent Schedules for Container Fumigations Without a 

Tarpaulin

NOTICE

DO NOT average the concentration readings before using the tables. Base your 

decision on whether to add gas from the LOWEST gas concentration of any individual gas reading.

NOTICE

Fresh fruits and vegetables are sensitive to MB so you should double check volume 

calculations and dosage measurements to avoid accidental overdoses.

1.6 number of ounces below minimum  volume in cubic feet

1000 cubic feet  ------------------------------------------------ 116  ----- = pounds of gas to add
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-23

5. Close valve when the weight of the cylinder indicates that the needed 

amount of gas has been added.

The PPQ official must record quantity of fumigant added in Block 34 and 

additional fan time in Block 30 of PPQ Form 429B. 

In the electronic 429, record the amount of additional gas listed in the 

Treatment Manual in the added in the “Additional Gas Recommended” field 

and the actual amount of additional gas added in the “Actual Additional Gas” 

field. Record the additional fan time in the “TIME FANS OPERATED” field in 

the Treatment form.

Note the time the fumigator started and finished introducing additional gas and 

record in Block 40 (Remarks) of PPQ Form 429B and in the “Remarks” form 

in the electronic 429 database. Require the fumigator to run the fans until there 

is even gas distribution throughout the stack. Turn off fans, then take a 

concentration reading 30 minutes after the gas has been introduced. If all 

readings are above minimum concentration levels, proceed as usual with the 

remaining scheduled concentration readings.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Conducting the Fumigation

2-8-24 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Table 2-8-5 Determine Gas Concentration Values and Corrections for Fruits and 

Vegetables at the 30-Minute Reading

If the 

schedule 

is:

And the minimum concentration (oz.) in 

the schedule 

is:

And the lowest 

concentration 

reading (oz.) is:

Then:

40-49 °F

4 lbs. for 2 

hrs.

48 65 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

64-48 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 48 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

50-59 °F

3 lbs. for 2 

hrs.

38 52 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

51-38 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 38 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

60-69 °F

2.5 lbs. for 

2 hrs.

32 48 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

47-32 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 32 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

70-79 °F

2.0 lbs. for 

2 hrs.

26 37 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

36-26 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 26 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

80-89 °F

1.5 lbs. for 

2 hrs.

19 27 or greater REDUCE exposure by 15 minutes

26-19 TAKE 2 hour reading as scheduled

Lower than 19 1. ADD gas, and

2. EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Aeration

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-25

Step 4: Exhausting the Gas

Require the fumigator to exhaust the gas at the completion of the exposure 

period. If the treatment schedule is a FIFRA Section 18 Exemption, then the 

PPQ official must verify the final gas concentration reading of the commodity. 

Detector tube readings and the time interval from the aeration must be 

recorded in the corresponding fields in the “DETECTOR READINGS” form.

Aeration

The fumigator must:

Arrange for the aeration to proceed once the treatment is completed.

Consider the wind direction when pointing the exhaust duct, and face the 

duct outlet toward an open area away from people.

Table 2-8-6 Determine Gas Concentration Values and Corrections for Fruits and 

Vegetables at the 2-Hour Reading

If the schedule is:

And the lowest concentration reading (oz.) at 2 

hours is:

Then DO NOT add gas, but:

40-49 °F

4 lbs. for 2 hrs.

38 and above AERATE the commodity

37-28 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

27-25 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 25 ABORT

50-59 °F

3 lbs. for 2 hrs.

29 and above AERATE the commodity

28-24 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

23-21 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 21 ABORT

60-69 °F

2.5 lbs. for 2 hrs.

24 and above AERATE the commodity

23-21 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

20-18 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 18 ABORT

70-79 °F

2.0 lbs. for 2 hrs.

19 and above AERATE the commodity

18-16 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

15-13 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 13 ABORT

80-89 °F

1.5 lbs. for 2 hrs.

14 and above AERATE the commodity

13-12 EXTEND exposure by 15 minutes

11-10 EXTEND exposure by 30 minutes

Lower than 10 ABORT
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Aeration

2-8-26 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Ensure that, during the first 10 minutes of aeration, no one is present 

within 200 feet downwind of the exhaust duct outlet.

Determine aeration buffer zones in accordance with Environmental 

Protection Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation 

Buffer Zone Lookup Tables.

Ensure no one is present within the perimeter of the aeration buffer zone 

unless they are wearing SCBA.

Refer to “Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures”.

Follow all label instructions, state, county, and local regulations, in 

addition to the instructions in this manual.

Inform people located in occupied structures and personnel in the 

immediate area within the buffer zone that release of MB is about to take 

place and give them the option of leaving the area or remaining inside the 

building.

Restrict access to the area where the exhaust duct extends beyond the 

enclosure.

Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity

The label requires that at least two people trained in the use of the fumigant 

must be present at all times during gas introduction, treatment, and aeration. 

The PPQ official, however, is not required to be continuously present at the 

fumigation site throughout the aeration process unless specified by the label or 

by State or local regulations.

Refer to Table 2-8-7 to determine who is responsible for aerating the 

commodity.

Wearing Respiratory Protection

The fumigator must wear approved respiratory protection (SCBA, supplied air 

respirator, or a combination unit) when:

A risk of exposure to concentrations above 5 ppm exists; this includes 

anytime the concentration is unknown

Opening the container for aeration

Table 2-8-7 Determine Responsibility for Aerating the Commodity for Tarpless 

Container Fumigation

If the Treatment schedule is: Then:

A FIFRA Section 18 Exemption PPQ official must be present at the initiation 

of aeration and to VERIFY the final aeration 

readings.

A labeled treatment schedule RELEASE the fumigation to the fumigator to 

aerate and RELEASE the commodity.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Aeration

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-27

Setting up the air introduction and exhaust systems

MB 2016 Label

Step 1: Installing the Exhaust System

Advise the fumigator to:

1. Install an exhaust fan (minimum of 5,200 cfm capacity) with one end of a 

round ventilation duct at least 16 inches in diameter, oriented so that the 

fan pulls air through the duct. The fan dimensions should complement the 

diameter of ductwork chosen, fitting flush and tight so that no leaks exist 

between the fan and duct. The exhaust duct will be at least 30 feet in length 

with the fan end placed external and alongside the container extending 

toward the nose, so the exhaust air is directed away from the end of the 

container which is opened during aeration.

2. Install a fresh air introduction fan (minimum 3,750 cfm) with a round 

ventilation duct at least 12 inches in diameter, oriented so that the fan 

pushes the air through the duct. The fan dimensions should complement the 

diameter of ductwork chosen, fitting flush and tight so that no leaks exist 

between the fan and duct. Extend the introduction duct (non-fan end) along 

top of the load two-thirds of the length of the container.

Palletized Partial Loads

For palletized partial loads (where at least 2 feet of open space is present at the 

door end of the container), ensure that the fumigator extends the exhaust duct 

intake (non-fan end) on the container floor with the duct face flush against the 

bottom of the load along a side of the container. Store the remaining section of 

the exhaust duct and fan at the rear of the load so it is easily accessible at the 

start of aeration.

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.

SAFETY

Install air introduction and exhaust ducts prior to fumigation in order to limit human 

exposure to the fumigant at the start of aeration.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Aeration

2-8-28 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Full Loads

For full loads (where less than 2 feet of open space is available at the door end 

of the container and there is no central aisle between pallets), if there is room to 

store the duct inside the container during fumigation, ensure that the fumigator 

secures the duct (non-fan end) face flush against the load at the floor/pallet/

commodity interface along a side of the container so it will not shift or twist 

during aeration. Use straps, ties, or other fasteners to secure this interface 

tightly. If there is not sufficient room to pre-install the duct prior to fumigation, 

the fumigator can carry out these steps at the start of aeration.

For partial or full loads where a central aisle exists between the pallets, ensure 

that the fumigator places the duct along the floor center and extend 1-2 feet 

into this space if possible.

Refer to Figure 2-8-4 for detailed diagrams of air and exhaust ducts. In this 

diagram, air introduction ducts are blue and exhaust ducts are red.

Step 2: Aerating the Commodity

Advise the fumigator to:

1. While wearing SCBA, open the doors of each container.

2. Turn on all fumigant circulation fans inside the container and leave them 

on throughout the aeration.

3. Start the container introduction and exhaust duct fans. 

4. Require a minimum of 4 hours aeration for all sorptive commodities.

5. Stop the fans and take concentration readings with colorimetric tubes in the 

airspace around and, when feasible, within the commodity.

Figure 2-8-4 Ductwork configuration for aeration of untarped containers: full 

loads (top) and partial loads (bottom)
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Aeration

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-8-29

6. RELEASE the commodity when the concentration reading is 5 ppm or less.
Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin

Aeration

2-8-30 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door 

Container Fumigation

Contents

Methods and Procedures 2-9-1

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information 2-9-1

Materials Needed 2-9-3

Preparing to Fumigate 2-9-5

Conducting the Fumigation 2-9-17

Aeration 2-9-21

Methods and Procedures

The procedures covered in this section provide PPQ officials and commercial 

fumigators with the methods, responsibilities, and precautions for closed-door 

container fumigations.

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

In 2015, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) directed all methyl 

bromide (MB) registrants to amend the use directions on the labels of all 100% 

MB products. EPA required the changes in order to reflect recommendations in 

an EPA report.1

These amendments modify the use directions for fumigation and aeration 

procedures, modify respiratory requirements and equipment and update gas 

monitoring equipment. EPA requires all labels on newly manufactured MB to 

reflect these recommendations effective October 01, 2016; however, EPA is 

allowing existing stocks of MB to be used in accordance with the use 

directions on the existing stock’s (older) labels. 

PPQ officials and fumigators must closely examine gas cylinder labels in order 

to validate that the dosage, exposure, and commodity are either on the cylinder 

label or covered by a FIFRA Section 18 exemption. If a label is not affixed to 

the cylinder, DO NOT allow the fumigator to use that cylinder.

1 “Report of Food Quality Protection Act (FQPA) Tolerance Reassessment and Risk Management 

Decision (TRED) for methyl bromide, and Reregistration Eligibility Decision (RED) for Methyl 

Bromide’s Commodity Uses”, archive dated August 2006. 
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

2016 Methyl Bromide Label Information

2-9-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

New Buffer Zone Requirements

All 2016 MB labels now require both a treatment and an aeration buffer zone. 

Both the treatment and aeration buffer zones are specific to the enclosure being 

fumigated and must be determined by tables in the Environmental Protection 

Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup 

Tables. The fumigators are responsible for using this website to determine the 

buffer zones and reporting both buffer zones to the PPQ official. If the 

treatment buffer zone is determined to be less than 30 feet, the PPQ official 

will maintain PPQ’s standard 30 foot treatment buffer zone; otherwise, the new 

treatment buffer zone must be observed. If the aeration buffer zone is 

determined to be less than 200 feet, then PPQ’s standard “200 feet for 10 

minutes” aeration buffer zone still applies for the first 10 minutes of aeration. 

The fumigator must refer to EPA’s website to determine the minimum aeration 

buffer zone to be maintained until the aeration period is complete and the 

fumigator has verified that gas concentration levels meet the conditions in the 

MB label. 

Transiting through buffer zones

The label permits vehicles to transit through both treatment and aeration buffer 

zones under specific conditions found in the label; it is up to the fumigator 

determine how or whether vehicles may transit in accordance with the label.

When using the newer 2016 MB label, changes to certain procedures and 

equipment in this chapter are displayed in a NOTICE box with a heading titled 

“MB 2016 Label”. 

MB 2016 Label (example)

When using existing stocks, follow the equipment and procedural guidance 

that is displayed in the body of the text (outside of the NOTICE box). 

If there is no “MB 2016 Label” NOTICE box, then the instructions apply to all 

MB labels, 2016 and older.

NOTICE

Use this information when the fumigator is using the 2016 MB label.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Materials Needed

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-3

Materials Needed

PPQ Official Provides

APHIS-approved leak detection device

Calculator (optional)

Forms (PPQ Form 429A and APHIS Form 2061, if necessary)

Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or supplied air respirator

MB 2016 Label

Fumigator Provides

APHIS-approved gas detection device2 (e.g. thermal conductivity device, 

infrared device, etc.)

Auxiliary pump for purging long gas sample tubes

Carbon dioxide filter (Ascarite®)

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from PPQ, PPQ must also 

provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage. The Air 

Check Advantage can be calibrated either by the manufacturer or by 

the PPQ official. Calibrate according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000. The MiniRAE 3000 must be calibrated by the PPQ 

official according to the manufacturer’s User Guide. Refer to Chapter 

8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C

2 The methyl bromide monitor must be calibrated annually. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for 

calibration information. If using a thermal conductivity (TC) analyzer, Drierite® and Ascarite® must 

be used.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Materials Needed

2-9-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Colorimetric tubes (Refer to Gas Detector Tube (Colorimetric) and 

Apparatus on page E-1-20 for a list of APHIS-approved product ranges)

Desiccant (Drierite®)

Electrical wiring (grounded, permanent type), three prong extension cords

Exhaust blower and ducts

Fans (circulation, exhaust, and introduction)

Framework and supports

Gas introduction line

Gas sampling tubes (leads)

Heat supply

Insecticides and spray equipment

Loose sand

Measuring tape

Methyl bromide

Padding

Sand or water snakes or adhesive sealer

Scales or dispensers3

Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or supplied air respirator 

Tape

Tape measure

Tarpaulin and supports

Temperature recorder

Temperature sensors4

Thermometer5

Volatilizer

Warning signs/placarding

3 All scales must be calibrated by the State, a company that is certified to conduct scale calibrations, 

or by the fumigator under the supervision of PPQ. The source and date of calibration must be posted 

in a visible location on or with the scale at all times. The scale must be calibrated a minimum of every 

6 months.

4 Temperature sensors must be calibrated annually by the manufacturer or National Institute of 

Standards and Technology (NIST) within the range of 40 °F to 80 °F (4.4 °C to 26.7 °C).

5 The thermometer must be calibrated or replaced annually.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-5

MB 2016 Label

Preparing to Fumigate

APHIS has historically required dry box ocean containers (non-refrigerated 

containers with a tongue-and-groove flooring) be fumigated under tarp with 

the doors open. The total methyl bromide gas introduced is based on the entire 

volume under the tarpaulin. This is referred to as “open-door container 

fumigation.” As an alternative to the “open-door” procedure, APHIS also 

allows for the fumigation of wood products (includes logs, lumber, and 

bamboo) in dry box containers with the doors closed. This procedure 

eliminates the need to include the empty space under the container as part of 

the total volume fumigated. This procedure is referred to as “closed-door 

container fumigation” and can be used only with the following treatment 

schedules:

T312-a

T312-a-Alternative

T312-b

T404-b-1-1

T404-d

NOTICE

In addition to the bulleted equipment list required from the fumigator, the 

fumigator must also provide:

Air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge for concentrations between 1 and 4 ppm

APHIS-approved direct read gas detection device

Colorimetric tubes (e.g. Draeger, Sensidyne)

APHIS-approved continuous real time gas monitoring device 

Permanently mounted in PPQ owned facilities only, PureAire 

Monitoring Systems, Inc., model Air Check Advantage

Portable Photoionization Detector (PID), RAE Systems, Inc. model 

MiniRAE 3000

Devices must be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s User 

Guide. Refer to Chapter 8: Equipment for more information.

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) NIOSH approval prefix TC13F or supplied air respirator NIOSH approval prefix TC-19C
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-9-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T404-e-1

Step 1: Selecting the Container

The fumigator must obtain a letter of authorization from the owner of the 

container, the shipping line, or the broker prior to attempting to gain access 

through the container doors or making any structural changes to the containers. 

The fumigator will maintain the letters of authorization and provide copies to 

the local PPQ office. PPQ will not be held responsible for any damage 

incurred by the fumigator due to modification or manipulation of a container’s 

original condition.

No dry box container will be permitted to be fumigated using this procedure if 

it has side doors, if the rear gasket is missing, or if the gasket is damaged such 

that gas lines cannot be placed effectively with the doors closed. PPQ officials 

must ensure that all vents are sealed on each container to be fumigated. If this 

cannot be accomplished, the fumigator will be required to fumigate with the 

doors open.

Step 2: Selecting a Fumigation Site

The PPQ official and the fumigator must consider the following factors when 

selecting a fumigation site:

Ability to Heat

Aeration Requirements

Electrical Power Supply

Impervious Surface

Nonwork Area

Water Supply

Well-Lighted Areas

Well-Ventilated, Sheltered Area

Ability to Heat

When cooler temperatures (below 40 °F) are expected, the fumigator must

ensure that the commodity temperatures are maintained above 40 °F. The PPQ 

official will take the ambient (air) temperature 12 inches above the ground. 

Temperatures must be maintained at or above the starting treatment 

temperature for the entire duration of the treatment. Additionally, the PPQ 

official will monitor the temperature of the container using a temperature 

sensor and a temperature recorder. Specifications for the temperature recording 

system are as follows:

Accurate to within ±0.6 °C or ±1.0 °F in the treatment temperature range 

of 4.4 °C to 26.7 °C (40 °F to 80 °F)
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-7

Calibrated annually by the National Institute of Standards and Technology 

(NIST) or by the manufacturer

The calibration certificate will list a correction factor, if needed, and 

the correction factor would be applied to the actual temperature 

reading to obtain the true temperature.

Capable of printing all temperature readings or downloading data to a 

secure source once per hour throughout the entire treatment (all 

temperature data must be accessible at a safe distance during the 

fumigation)

Tamper-proof

If one or more temperature readings dip below the minimum temperature 

required for the selected dosage rate in the treatment schedule, the fumigation 

will be considered a failed treatment. The container must be heated to the 

minimum temperature in the treatment schedule and the fumigation restarted. 

The gas remaining in the container does not need to be evacuated, but 

additional gas may need to be added to meet the required concentration 

readings for a new fumigation. There are two options for re-treatment, 

depending on the treatment schedule used.

1. Reheat the container and restart the fumigation at the original dosage rate. 

The gas remaining in the container does not need to be evacuated, but 

additional gas may need to be added to meet the required concentration 

readings for a new fumigation.

2. Re-fumigate the container at the lower temperature using the dosage 

required by this manual for that temperature. (This option may not be 

available for all schedules.) The gas remaining in the container does not

need to be evacuated, but additional gas may need to be added to meet the 

required concentration readings for a new fumigation.

Require the fumigator to place one temperature sensor in each container in the 

coldest location in the container, which will be near the floor towards the 

middle of the container at the end of a log-stack. If there is only one log-stack 

in a container, require the fumigator to place the temperature sensor near the 

floor at the end of the stack closest to the container doors. Refer to 

Figure 2-9-1 for further information on temperature sensor placement.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-9-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Aeration Requirements

The fumigator is responsible for all aspects of aeration. Refer to xx for more 

information.

Electrical Power Supply

An adequate electrical source must be available to run the circulation fans and 

the gas detection device. A separate line should be available for the gas 

detection device. Electrical outlets must be grounded and conveniently located 

in relation to the fumigation area. PPQ does not allow generators to be used as 

a power source except under emergency conditions.

Impervious Surface

Select an asphalt, concrete, or tight wooden surface—not soil, gravel, or other 

porous material. If you must fumigate on a porous surface, require the 

fumigator to cover the surface with plastic tarpaulins. For large fumigations, 

covering the surface is not usually practical because pallets must be 

rearranged and heavy equipment used to move the commodity. On docks, 

wharfs, and piers, require the fumigator to seal cracks, holes, and manhole 

covers which will allow the MB to escape through the floor.

Figure 2-9-1 Diagram of placement of temperature sensors, represented by a 

star
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-9

Nonwork Area - MB 2016 Label

NOTICE

The fumigator will determine the treatment buffer zone in accordance with the 

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity 

Fumigation Buffer Zone Lookup Tables.

The treatment buffer zone surrounds the area where access is limited during 

treatment. If the fumigator determines that the buffer zone is less than 30’, then 

PPQ requires a 30’ buffer zone. If the fumigator determines that the buffer zone 

is greater than 30’, then PPQ must observe the prescribed buffer zone.

The treatment buffer zone extends from the perimeter of the enclosure to a 

distance determined by the fumigator in accordance with the label. Entry by 

any person except the PPQ official and the fumigator is prohibited except as 

provided in the “Exceptions to Buffer Zone Entry Restrictions” section of the 

label. 

The treatment buffer zone begins when the fumigant is introduced into the 

enclosure and ends when aeration begins, at which point the aeration buffer 

zone requirements apply.

The fumigator must define treatment and aeration buffer zone perimeters using 

physical barriers (such as walls, ropes, etc.) and placards to limit access to the 

buffer zone. Placards must meet all label requirements regarding specific 

warnings, information, and language.

The fumigator will permit transiting through buffer zones in accordance with 

the “Transit Exception” section of the label.

Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures

For multiple enclosures where buffer zones overlap, the fumigator must 

recalculate both the treatment and aeration buffer zones in accordance with the 

label and supply them to the PPQ official.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-9-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Nonwork Area

The PPQ official and the fumigator must select a secure area where traffic and 

people are restricted from entering and which is isolated from people working. 

The fumigator must placards clearly in sight of all who come near. Placards 

must meet label requirements regarding specific warnings, information, and 

language. Placards generally include the name of the fumigant, the fumigation 

date, time, and the name of the company conducting the fumigation. The 

fumigator must restrict access to the warehouse to the fumigator’s employees 

and PPQ employees monitoring the treatment. PPQ officials who work within 

the 30-foot perimeter must wear (and use) respiratory protection (SCBA), until 

the gas levels are safe to breathe and validated as safe by gas monitoring. The 

30-foot perimeter is not specifically mentioned on the MB label, but is 

required for PPQ officials. When space is tight, it is permissible to overlap two 

adjoining 30-foot perimeters. However, there must be sufficient space for a 

person wearing SCBA to walk between the tarpaulins.

Water Supply

A water supply is necessary for safety purposes. Water is necessary for 

washing off MB if the liquid form is spilled on someone. Water is also used to 

fill the volatilizer. If no permanent water is present on a temporary site, the 

fumigator must provide a portable shower that meets OSHA specifications or 

a 5-gallon supply of clean water. All permanent fumigation sites must have a 

safety shower/eyewash station installed and maintained in good working order 

throughout the year or when fumigations are performed at the site.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-11

Well-Lighted Areas

The fumigator will ensure that the area has adequate lighting for safety 

purposes and for ease in reading gas concentration, thermometers, and for 

determining whether a tarpaulin has holes or tears.

Well-Ventilated, Sheltered Area

The PPQ official and the fumigator must select sites that are well-ventilated 

and sheltered. A well-ventilated site is required for exhausting gas before and 

when the tarpaulin is removed from the container(s). Most warehouses have 

high ceilings and a number of windows/doors which can be used for 

ventilation. Some gas will escape from the tarpaulin, even in the best 

conditions. Avoid areas where strong drafts are likely to occur.

In warehouses, the fumigator must provide an exhaust system to exhaust MB 

to the outside of the building. The fumigator must ensure that the exhausted 

gas does not reenter the building, nor endanger people working outside.

When treatments are conducted in a particular location on a regular basis, the 

PPQ official must ensure that the fumigator designated a permanent site. At 

such sites, the fan used to remove the fumigant from the enclosure during 

aeration must be connected to a permanent stack extending above the roof 

level. 

If fumigations are conducted outside, ensure that the fumigator selects a site 

that is semi-sheltered, such as the leeward side of a warehouse, pier, or 

building that offers some protection from severe winds. Severe winds are 

defined as sustained winds or gusts of 30 m.p.h. or higher for any time period. 

Do not allow the fumigator to proceed if there is a forecast from the National 

Weather Service of severe winds and/or thunderstorms at the beginning of, or 

for the entire length of the fumigation.

Step 3: Arranging the Containers

Ensure that the fumigator places no more than 8 containers that are 20 to 40 

feet in length under a single tarpaulin. APHIS does not allow stacking of 

containers. Stacking may create too great a safety risk to the person placing the 

tarp, fans, and gas monitoring leads.

Containers should not be loaded beyond 80 percent of their capacity. No

additional head space is required between the roof of the container and the tarp 

unless the pest is found on the outside of the container. If the pest is found on 
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-9-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

the exterior of the container, then DO NOT use this procedure. See 

Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation on page 2-4-1.

Step 4: Arranging and Operating Fans

For proper gas circulation, require the fumigator to place two axial-type 

(blade) fans in each container. The fans must have the capacity to move a 

volume in cubic feet per minute (CFM) equivalent to the total volume of the 

container. Require the fumigator to place one fan at the rear of the container 

(doors) pointed inward, and the second fan placed in the front (nose) of the 

container pointed in the opposite direction. In addition, require the fumigator 

to place the exhaust fans and ducts as instructed in Aeration on page 2-9-21.

Step 5: Placing the Gas Introduction Lines

MB is converted from a liquid into a gas by a volatilizer. The hose that runs 

from the MB cylinder into the volatilizer must be 3000 PSI hydraulic high 

pressure hose with a 3/8 inch inner diameter (ID) or larger. From the 

volatilizer, MB gas is introduced into the structure by means of a gas 

introduction line. The gas introduction line must be a minimum of 350 PSI 

with a 1/2 inch ID or larger. Require the fumigator to place the introduction 

line directly above the fan at the rear door of the container. Each container 

must have a gas introduction line.

Step 6: Placing the Gas Sampling Tubes

Require the fumigator to install at least three gas sampling tubes per container, 

positioned as follows:

Front low—near the floor at the door end of the container

Rear high—rear of the load at the high end opposite the fan

Middle center—mid way from front to back, at mid depth

If treating for khapra beetle, the fumigator must install the following 

additional gas sampling tubes:

High (in the commodity)

Low (in the commodity)

Require the fumigator to install gas sampling tubes of sufficient length to 

extend from the sampling position inside the container to at least 30 feet 

beyond the tarpaulin. Ensure that all the gas sampling tubes meet in one area 

for ease and safety in taking gas concentration readings. Do not splice gas 

sampling tubes. Before starting the fumigation, check for gas sampling tube 

blockage or pinching by connecting each tube to the gas detection device for a 

short time. If the line is blocked, the flow to the device will drop sharply. Tubes 

can also be checked with a MityVac hand pump or other air pump device. 

Replace any defective gas sampling tubes.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-13

Require the fumigator to secure all gas sampling tubes under the tarpaulin and 

label each one at the end where the gas concentration readings will be taken. 

By labeling each gas sampling tube, the PPQ official will be able to record 

concentration readings easily.

Step 7: Padding Corners

Ensure that the fumigator looks for corners and sharp angles which could tear 

the tarpaulin. Do not allow the fumigator to use the commodity to support the 

tarpaulin. If the sharp angles or corners cannot be eliminated, the fumigator 

must cover them with burlap or other suitable padding (e.g., old tires or cloth).

Step 8: Measuring the Temperature

The PPQ official must determine the temperature of the commodity in order to 

select the proper dosage rate using a calibrated bimetallic, mercury, or digital 

long-stem thermometer.

Select several representative locations within the stack at the ends of the logs 

or pieces of lumber and drill holes in them to accommodate a thermometer. 

After drilling, wait at least 10 minutes to allow the wood around the holes to 

cool. Insert the thermometer into the holes drilled. All readings (not just the 

average) must be above 40 °F.

If fumigating multiple containers under one tarp, take temperature readings in 

each container under the tarp. Base the dosage calculation on the lowest 

reading obtained. (Do not average temperatures.) All readings must be above 

40 °F to initiate the fumigation. If not, you must postpone it.

Record the temperatures in Block 22 of the PPQ Form 429A.

In the electronic 429 database, record the temperatures in the space and 

commodity fields in the Treatment form.

NOTICE

Regardless of the commodity, never fumigate at temperatures below 40 °F.

Temperature recordings should be rounded to the nearest tenth of a degree (°C or 

°F)
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-9-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 9: Covering the Stack

The fumigator must cover the stack, check the tarpaulin for rips, tears, and 

holes, look at the spots that have been taped, and verify they are properly 

sealed. If needed, the fumigator must repair all holes.

The tarpaulin should be made of a material such as vinyl, polyethylene plastic, 

or coated nylon. 

4 mil vinyl or polyethylene plastic tarpaulins are only approved for one 

usage

6 mil vinyl or polyethylene plastic tarpaulins may be used up to four times 

with the PPQ official’s approval for each usage

10 to 12 mil vinyl or plastic coated nylon tarpaulins may be approved for 

multiple uses with the PPQ official’s approval for each usage

The fumigator should cover all corners and sharp ends with burlap or other 

padding to prevent the tarpaulin from ripping. Have the fumigator pull the 

tarpaulin over the containers, being careful not to catch or tear the tarpaulin. 

The tarpaulin must be large enough to provide a floor overlap of at least 18 

inches around all sides of the stack. Carefully lay the tarpaulin out to prevent 

excess folds or wrinkles along the floor, especially around the corners.

Step 10: Sealing the Tarpaulin

The fumigator must seal the tarpaulin with loose, wet sand, sand snakes, water 

snakes, adhesives, or a combination. If there is danger of crushing or crimping 

the gas sampling or introduction tubes, use the loose, wet sand. If using snakes, 

use two rows of snakes along the sides and three rows on the corners. The 

snakes should overlap each other by approximately 1 foot. The goal in sealing 

the tarpaulin is to get the tarpaulin to lie flat against the floor to prevent gas 

from leaking out. When wind is not a factor, plastic tape may be used for 

sealing the tarp. The tape must be at least 2 inches in width, and applied (only 

to a smooth surface) with the aid of high-tack spray adhesive.

The fumigator must seal corners by laying two sand snakes around the corner 

and working the tarpaulin until it is flat. Place a third snake on top of the two 

other snakes to provide additional weight to force the tarpaulin against the 

NOTICE

When the commodity and air temperature drastically differ, moisture may condense 

inside the gas sampling tubes or inside the gas detection device and cause 

inaccurate gas concentration readings. Check the gas sampling tubes frequently for 

possible puddling of condensed water, and drain it off, as needed, before taking a 

reading. Also, check the Drierite frequently, and change it as soon as it becomes 

saturated with water (turns pink), to obtain true gas concentration readings. Never

fumigate commodities that are frozen.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-15

floor. Loose, wet sand can be used in the area where the gas introduction line, 

electrical cords, and gas sampling tubes extend from under the tarpaulin.

Step 11: Measuring the Volume

Using a 100-foot tape measure, the PPQ official and the fumigator must

carefully measure the length, width, and height of the container. The area 

underneath the container is not included in the calculations. Never estimate the 

measurements. When measuring, round off to the nearest quarter foot 

(Example: 3 inches = .25 feet).

Formula for determining volume:

Length x width x height = volume in cubic feet

The PPQ official must record volume in Block 26 of the PPQ Form 429A.

In the electronic 429 database, record the length, width, and height in the 

corresponding fields under the “AMT of Gas Introduced” heading on the 

Treatment form. The total volume of the enclosure will be calculated.

Step 12: Calculating the Dosage

The PPQ official must calculate dosage by doing the following:

1. Refer to the treatment schedule for the correct dosage rate (lbs./1,000 ft3

) 

based on temperature (°F).

2. Multiply by the dosage (lbs./1,000 ft3

) rate by the volume (ft3) to get the 

dosage in pounds.

Round to the nearest 1/4 pound.

The formula for calculating dosage is:

EXAMPLE A stack with measurements H=10’6”, L=42’3”, and W=10’9”

10.50 x 42.25 x 10.75 = 4,768.9 ft3

 round to 4,769 ft3

Figure 2-9-2 Formula for Calculating MB Dosage for Closed-Door Container 

Fumigations

Dosage (lbs.) Volume (ft3) Dosage Rate (lbs.) 

1,000 ft3 = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Preparing to Fumigate

2-9-16 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

In the electronic 429 database, the PPQ official must enter the dosage rate in 

the “dosage” field and the total amount of gas required for the fumigation will 

be displayed in the “GAS REQUIRED” field.

Step 13: Making a Final Check

Before introducing the gas, the PPQ official and the fumigator must ensure that 

the following activities are performed:

Check tarpaulin to make sure it is free from rips and tears

Check that all gas sampling tubes are labeled and are not crimped or 

crushed. 

Visually inspect tubes, or use a T/C analyzer, an electric pump, or a 

Mityvac® hand pump to check tubes for unrestricted flow

Check that all safety equipment, especially SCBA is available and in 

working order.

Check that tarpaulin is placarded and the area is secured. Only people 

working on the fumigation may be in the area.

Check that there is enough gas in the cylinder and, if necessary, that other 

cylinders are available.

Check that the gas introduction line connections are tight and free of 

leaks.

If using a T/C, install Drierite® and Ascarite® tubes as stated in the 

instructions in this manual.

Place fumigant cylinder with gas introduction line on scale and take initial 

weight reading. 

NOTICE

Erroneous gas readings may occur if the sampling tubes become blocked or 

crimped. It would be impossible to install new sampling tubes during the fumigation. 

To avoid an unsuccessful fumigation, test sampling tubes before the treatment 

begins. 

Refer to the following steps to test the sampling tubes using a MityVac pump: (See 

Mityvac Hand-Held Vacuum Pump on page 8-1-23)

1. Prior to gas introduction, connect a MityVac hand-held vacuum pump to a sampling tube.

2. Squeeze the handle on the MityVac unit. If the line is blocked, a vacuum will be 

indicated on the MityVac gauge. For sampling tubes longer than 25 feet, squeeze 

the handle two or three times. The MityVac pump has the capacity to attain and hold 

25 inches of Hg vacuum and a minimum of 7 psig pressure.

3. Disconnect the MityVac pump from the sampling tube and repeat this procedure 

for each sampling tube. 

NOTICE

Other gas detection devices may not require the use of Drierite® or Ascarite®.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-17

Ensure the gas introduction hose is attached to the cylinder. 

After obtaining the correct weight, subtract the dosage to be 

introduced into the enclosure.

After the fumigator has introduced the proper amount of gas, the scale 

will be balanced.

Start volatilizer and heat water to 200 °F or above. A minimum 

temperature of 150 °F is required at all times during the introduction 

process. Refer to Chapter 8-Equipment for temperature monitoring 

procedures.

Turn on all fans and APHIS-approved gas detection devices to make sure 

they work.

Warm up and zero (if required) APHIS-approved gas detection devices as 

described in Chapter 8-Equipment.

Conducting the Fumigation

Step 1: Introducing the Gas

MB 2016 Label

Require the fumigator and PPQ official to use SCBA while introducing and 

adding gas. Ensure that the fumigator turns on all fans before introducing the 

gas. When using large cylinders of MB, the fumigator should slightly open the 

cylinder valve, then close the valve. With an APHIS-approved continuous real 

time gas detection device, the fumigator must check all connections on the gas 

introduction hose for leaks. If leaks are found, the fumigator must tighten the 

connections and repeat the test. When no leaks are found, require the 

fumigator to open the valve to the point where 3 to 4 pounds of MB are being 

introduced per minute. The water temperature in the volatilizer should never

go below 150 °F at any time during gas introduction. The water in the 

volatilizer may include antifreeze and should be handled with the appropriate 

safeguards.

! CAUTION

The acceptable air concentration level for methyl bromide (MB) is 5 ppm. A respirator (approved SCBA) is required if the MB concentration level in the air is unknown 

or greater than 5 ppm at any time. The PPQ official and the fumigator must use 

SCBA while introducing the gas, checking for leaks, when taking aeration readings, 

and inside the buffer zone.

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

2-9-18 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

The fumigation time begins once all the gas has been introduced. The PPQ 

official must record the time gas introduction was started and completed in 

Block 32 on the PPQ Form 429A.

In the electronic 429 database, record the fumigation date, gas introduction 

start and finish time in the corresponding fields under the “GAS 

INTRODUCTION” heading on the Treatment form.

Require the fumigator to run the fans for 60 minutes to achieve even gas 

distribution. After gas is evenly distributed, require the fumigator to turn the 

fans off. The PPQ official must take the initial concentration reading 60 

minutes after all the gas has been introduced.

Step 2: Testing for Leaks

Require the fumigator to wear the SCBA while checking for leaks. The 

fumigator must use an APHIS-approved leak detection device to test for leaks 

before the 60 minute reading or anytime when the concentration level is 

unknown or above 5 ppm. The fumigator must test around the perimeter of the 

tarpaulin on the floor, corners, and especially where electric cords, gas 

sampling tubes, or gas introduction lines are present. When the fumigator 

detects leaks, ensure they are sealed using more sand or sand snakes for floor 

leaks and tape for sealing small holes in the tarpaulin. Use loose, wet sand to 

reduce leakage from electric cords, gas sampling tubes, gas introduction lines, 

or uneven flooring.

If the fumigator detects excessive leakage (concentration readings of 50 

percent or less of the minimum concentration) in a tarpaulin which cannot be 

corrected in a practical way, do not attempt to correct the problem by adding 

more gas. Require the fumigator to quickly evacuate the remaining gas from 

the enclosure, eliminate the problem, and construct a new enclosure. Aerate as 

usual following procedures on page 2-9-21. Record the aborted fumigation in 

Block 40 (Remarks) of the PPQ Form 429A or in the “Remarks” form in the 

electronic 429 database. Restart the fumigation in the new enclosure.

NOTICE

Do not begin counting fumigation time until all the gas has been introduced and the 

valve on the MB tank is closed.

NOTICE

If an employee encounters unsafe conditions (such as holes in the tarpaulin or a 

breach in safety protocol) and the condition(s) cannot be corrected in a timely 

manner, the employee may CANCEL the fumigation. Consult with a PPQ Supervisor 

prior to cancellation.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-19

Any “closed-door” treatment that is aborted cannot be retreated until the 

remaining containers have completed treatment and all have aerated for a 

minimum of 48 hours. Refumigate aborted containers with both container 

doors open. Report aborted fumigations in the 429A as required by the 

Environmental Protection Agency.

Step 3: Taking Concentration Readings

The PPQ official must take concentration readings with an APHIS-approved 

gas detection device to determine the gas concentration and distribution within 

the enclosure. If used, check desiccant tubes before each reading and change 

Drierite® if its color is pink. Allow gas concentration readings to stabilize; do 

not disconnect the sampling line from the gas detection device when the 

minimum concentration reading has been met.

Take concentration readings at the times designated in the treatment schedule. 

Concentration readings should not differ more than 10 ounces among the 

leads. If they do, run the fans for an additional 30 minutes and take another 

reading to verify that gas concentration levels have equalized. In some cases, 

several cycles of fan operation may be necessary to equalize the readings. 

Record all gas readings on the PPQ Form 429A or in the electronic 429 

database. Regardless of the number of containers under each tarp, every 

container must have a separate 429 record.

Step 4: Determining the Need to Add Gas and Adjust Exposure

If the lowest gas reading is BELOW the required minimum indicated by the 

treatment schedule, you must add gas and extend the exposure period. Use the 

formula in Figure 2-9-3 to determine the amount of gas to add.

NOTICE

Before taking a reading, always purge sampling lines with a mechanical or hand 

pump. If using a T/C unit, connect it to the sampling lead, adjust the gas flow rate to 

1.0, and wait until the meter registering “ounces per thousand cubic feet” stabilizes 

before taking a reading. (This may take a minute or more, depending upon the length 

of the tubing and whether or not an auxiliary pump is used.)

! CAUTION

Avoid using hand-held two-way radios near the T/C unit. Using two-way radios near 

the T/C unit will interfere with an accurate concentration reading.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Conducting the Fumigation

2-9-20 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Use Table 2-9-1 to determine how long to extend the exposure period.

Require the fumigator to follow these procedures when adding gas:

1. Heat water in volatilizer.

2. Turn on fans.

3. Weigh the cylinder.

4. With SCBA on, open cylinder valve and introduce the gas.

5. Close valve when the weight of the cylinder indicates that the needed 

amount of gas has been added.

The PPQ official must record quantity of fumigant added in Block 34 and the 

additional fan time in Block 30 of the PPQ Form 429A.

In the electronic 429, record the amount of additional gas listed in the 

Treatment Manual in the “Additional Gas Recommended” field and the actual 

amount of additional gas added in the “ACTUAL ADDITIONAL GAS” field. 

Record the additional fan time in the “TIME FANS OPERATED” field in the 

Treatment form.

Note the time the fumigator started introducing additional gas and the time the 

fumigator finished introducing gas and record in Block 40 (Remarks) of the 

PPQ Form 429A or in the “Remarks” form in the electronic 429 database. Run 

Figure 2-9-3 Formula for Determining the Amount of Gas to Add to Closed-Door 

Containerized Cargo

Table 2-9-1 Determine the Extended Exposure Period for Closed-Door 

Containerized Cargo

If any individual reading is 

below minimum by: 1

1 If any individual reading is 50 percent or more below the minimum concentration reading, 

then abort the treatment. For oak logs (T312-a, T312-a-alternative), refer to the ACIR 

treatment schedule for specific instructions.

Then extend exposure:

10 oz. or less 10 percent of the time lapse since gas introduction or 

the last acceptable reading

11 oz. or more 2 hours or 10 percent of time lapse since last 

acceptable reading, whichever is greater

1.6 number of ounces below minimum  volume in cubic feet

1000 cubic feet  ------------------------------------------------ 116  ----- = pounds of gas to add
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Aeration

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-21

the fans for 30 minutes. Turn off fans, then take a concentration reading. If all 

readings are above minimum concentration levels and within 10 ounces of 

each other, then proceed as usual with the remaining scheduled concentration 

readings. If the readings are not above the minimum or within 10 ounces of 

each other, run the fans for another 30 minutes. It may take several cycles to 

stabilize the gas concentration.

Step 5: Exhausting the Gas

Require the fumigator to exhaust the gas at the completion of the exposure 

period. 

Aeration

The fumigator must:

Arrange for the aeration to proceed once the treatment is completed.

Consider the wind direction when pointing the exhaust duct, and face the 

duct outlet toward an open area away from people.

Ensure that, during the first 10 minutes of aeration, no one is present 

within 200 feet downwind of the exhaust duct outlet.

Determine aeration buffer zones in accordance with Environmental 

Protection Agency (EPA) Methyl Bromide Commodity Fumigation 

Buffer Zone Lookup Tables.

Ensure no one is present within the perimeter of the aeration buffer zone 

unless they are wearing SCBA.

Refer to “Buffer Zone Overlap for Multiple Enclosures”.

Follow all label instructions, state, county, and local regulations, in 

addition to the instructions in this manual.

Inform people located in occupied structures and personnel in the 

immediate area within the buffer zone that release of MB is about to take 

place and give them the option of leaving the area or remaining inside the 

building.

Restrict access to the area where the exhaust duct extends beyond the 

enclosure.

Wearing Respiratory Protection

The fumigator must wear approved respiratory protection (SCBA, supplied air 

respirator, or a combination unit) when:

A risk of exposure to concentrations above 5 ppm exists; this includes any 

time the concentration is unknown

Setting up the air introduction and exhaust system
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Aeration

2-9-22 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Opening the container door(s)

Opening the tarpaulin for aeration

MB 2016 Label

Advise the fumigator to:

Install an exhaust fan (minimum of 5,200 cfm capacity) with one end of a 

round ventilation duct at least 16 inches in diameter, oriented so that the 

fan pulls air through the duct. The fan dimensions should complement the 

diameter of the duct work chosen, fitting flush and tight so that no leaks 

exist between the fan and duct. For indoor fumigations, extend the 

exhaust duct (fan end) at least 30 feet beyond the building or into a 

vertical stack extending through the roof. For outdoor fumigations, the 

exhaust duct will be at least 30 feet in length with the fan end placed 

external and alongside the container extending toward the nose, so the 

exhaust air is directed away from the end of the container which is 

opened during aeration.

Palletized Partial Loads

For palletized partial loads (where at least 2 feet of open space is present at the 

door end of the container), extend the exhaust duct intake (non-fan end) on the 

container floor with the duct face flush against the bottom of the load along a 

side of the container. Store the remaining section of the exhaust duct and fan at 

the rear of the load so it is easily accessible at the start of aeration.

Full Loads

For full loads (where less than 2 feet of open space is available at the door end 

of the container and there is no central aisle between pallets), if there is room 

to store the exhaust duct inside the container during fumigation, secure the 

exhaust duct intake (non-fan end) face flush against the load at the floor/pallet/

commodity interface along a side of the container so it will not shift or twist 

during aeration. Use straps, ties, or other fasteners to secure this interface 

tightly. If there is not sufficient room to pre-install the exhaust duct prior to 

fumigation, carry out these steps at the start of aeration.

For partial or full loads where a central aisle exists between the pallets, run the 

exhaust intake duct along the floor center and extend 1-2 feet into this space, if 

possible. Store the remaining section of the exhaust duct and fan at the rear of 

the load so it is easily accessible at the start of aeration.

NOTICE

If MB concentration levels are between 1-4 ppm, the PPQ official and the fumigator 

may wear an air purifying respirator NIOSH certified half-mask or full face piece with 

a cartridge.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Aeration

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-9-23

Non-Palletized Logs

For non-palletized logs, secure the duct face flush against the load at the floor/

interface on a side of the container so it will not shift or twist during aeration.

Integrate an air introduction fan (minimum 3,750 cfm) with a round 

ventilation duct at least 12 inches in diameter, oriented so that the fan 

pushes the air through the duct. The fan dimensions should complement 

the diameter of duct work chosen, fitting flush and tight so that no leaks 

exist between the fan and duct. Extend the introduction duct (non-fan 

end) along top of the load two-thirds of the length of the container. For 

partial loads, the intake duct may run along the container floor, with the 

end placed on top of the load. Store the remaining introduction duct and 

fan at the rear of the load so it is easily accessible at the start of aeration.

Integrate an additional exhaust fan (minimum of 5,200 cfm capacity) with 

one end of a round ventilation duct at least 16 inches in diameter, oriented 

so that the fan pulls air through the duct. The fan dimensions should 

complement the diameter of duct work chosen, fitting flush and tight so 

that no leaks exist between the fan and duct. This duct will be used to 

aerate the space between the container and tarp prior to tarp removal. The 

duct length should be approximately 10 feet and should remain outside 

the tarp during fumigation.

Refer to Figure 2-9-4 for detailed diagrams of air and exhaust ducts. In this 

diagram, air introduction ducts are blue and exhaust ducts are red.

NOTICE

If commodities other than logs are not palletized, consult S&T-TMT before treatment.

NOTICE

Install introduction and exhaust ducts prior to fumigation in order to limit human 

exposure to the fumigant at the start of aeration.
 Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Closed-door Container Fumigation

Aeration

2-9-24 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Step 6: Aerating the Commodity

Advise the fumigator to:

1. While wearing SCBA, insert a spacer (at least 16 square inches in area) to 

vent the tarpaulin at the nose end of the container. At the opposite end of 

the tarp, insert the additional exhaust duct 5 feet under the tarp and turn the 

fan on.

2. Exhaust the gas from underneath the containers before opening the doors 

of the containers for at least 15 minutes or until the gas concentration level 

underneath the containers is below 5 ppm.

3. While wearing SCBA, remove the tarp when the gas concentration level 

underneath the containers is below 5 ppm.

4. With the tarp removed and while wearing SCBA, turn off the fan used to 

aerate the space and open the doors of each container.

5. Turn on all fumigant circulation fans inside the container and leave them 

on throughout the aeration.

6. Start the container introduction and exhaust ducts fans. Require a minimum 

of 4 hours aeration for all sorptive commodities. Sorptive commodities 

generally require 12 hours or longer to aerate; however, since sorptive 

commodities vary in their rates of desorption, aeration may be completed 

in less than 12 hours.

7. Aerate oak logs and lumber a minimum of 48 hours. If, after 48 hours, the 

concentration is 5 ppm or greater, continue aeration for 24 more hours. 

Continue this procedure until concentration readings are less than 5 ppm.

8. Stop the fans and take concentration readings with colorimetric tubes in the 

airspace around and, when feasible, within the log stack.

9. RELEASE the commodity when the concentration reading is 5 ppm or less.

Figure 2-9-4 Duct work configuration for aeration of closed-door containers: 

full loads (top) and partial loads (bottom)
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-10-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride

Contents

Properties and Use 2-10-1

Leak Detection 2-10-2

Tarpaulin Fumigation 2-10-2

Sealing 2-10-2

Circulation 2-10-3

Prevention of Condensation 2-10-3

Gas Sampling Lines 2-10-3

Gas Introduction 2-10-3

Dosage Rate 2-10-4

Measure Gas Concentrations 2-10-5

Replacing Lost Gas 2-10-5

Aeration 2-10-5

Structural Fumigation 2-10-5

Chamber Fumigation 2-10-6

Shipboard Fumigation 2-10-6

Safety and First Aid 2-10-6

Protective Clothing 2-10-6

If SF is Inhaled 2-10-7

If Liquid SF is Spilled on the Skin 2-10-7

If Liquid SF is in the Eyes 2-10-7

Consult the Vikane1 Gas Fumigant Label and Structural Fumigation Manual 

for more detailed instructions and additional supportive information.

Properties and Use

Sulfuryl fluoride (SF) is a compressed-gas fumigant which is used primarily 

against insects that attack wood. The following characteristics make this 

fumigant especially desirable:

2.88 times heavier than air

High vapor pressure—13,442 mm Hg @ 770 °F

Low solubility in water and low sorption by soil or commodity

Odorless, colorless, and nonflammable

1 Trademark of Dow AgroSciences
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride

Leak Detection

2-10-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Penetrates wood better than any other commercial fumigants, including 

methyl bromide

Relatively nonreactive

Very low loss through plastic tarpaulins

SF boils at minus 67 °F. SF is not registered for use on foodstuffs or on living 

plant material.

SF is effective at very low dosages on dry wood termites where control of the 

adult stage is the only concern (typically 0.5 to 1.0 lbs/1,0002). Higher dosages 

are required for control of the egg stage of other insects (typically 3 to 5 lbs/

1,0002). Consult treatment schedules in this manual for specific dosages.

Leak Detection

Interscan (Model GF 1900) or Miran gas analyzers (these units are portable) 

may be used to detect SF in the range of 0 to 150 ppm respectively. Consult the 

Vikane Structural Fumigation Manual for further instructions. Colorimetric 

(“detector”) tubes are not available for detecting SF gas leaks around 

tarpaulins, chambers, and application equipment.

Tarpaulin Fumigation

Sealing

The commodity to be fumigated should be placed onto a relatively even and 

non-porous surface, such as concrete, asphalt, or macadam. Special attention 

should be given to the seal along the ground or floor. The inspector should 

have tape, sand, or water snakes properly positioned.

NOTICE

Refer to the Vikane label and Vikane Structural Fumigation Manual for a detailed 

discussion of proper procedures.

Also, refer to Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation for additional 

information on the following:

 Placing gas sampling lines

 Sealing tarpaulins

 Securing fumigation areas

 Selecting fumigation sites

 Taking concentration readings
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride

Tarpaulin Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-10-3

Circulation

Fans are necessary to distribute SF and to help prevent condensation. The 

number of fans depends upon the cubic volume of the enclosure being treated, 

and the arrangement of cargo. Axial fans of approximately 5,000 cfm have 

proven effective. Usually two fans are used, one on either end facing the lower 

center and upper center of the load. If the enclosure is over 35 feet long, 

additional fans should be used. It is usually not necessary to run fans longer 

than 15 minutes after the gas has been introduced.

Prevention of Condensation

In cool weather, moisture may condense under tarpaulins if the sun is shining 

directly on the load. Continuous air circulation can prevent this from 

occurring. Do not tarp or seal any item while it is wet.

Gas Sampling Lines

A thermal conductivity unit calibrated for Vikane must be available for 

readings. Sampling lines should be arranged so that gas samples are drawn 

from representative parts of the fumigation area and lead to a common point.

A minimum of three sampling lines should be placed in enclosures of up to 

10,000 ft3 at the following locations:

Center of the load, midway from the bottom to the top of the load

Front of the load, 3 inches from the floor

Rear of the load, at the top

When 10,000 to 15,000 ft3 are being treated, two additional lines should be 

appropriately deployed.

Gas Introduction

Unlike methyl bromide, SF does not require the use of a volatilizer to speed up 

its conversion from a liquid to a gas. The gas introduction tube should be 

placed directly in the air flow of a fan away from the cargo. Also, place a drip 

cloth under the tube. The introduction rate is controlled by the introduction line 

length and diameter. A 1/8-inch-inside-diameter by 100-foot-long hose will 

allow a flow rate of approximately 2 pounds per minute, while a 25-foot-long 

hose will allow approximately 4 pounds per minute.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride

Tarpaulin Fumigation

2-10-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

It is important not to overshoot the ability of the fan to rapidly disperse the 

cool air near the fumigant introduction site. Fan capacity should be at least 

1,000 cfm for each pound of Vikane introduced per minute. In addition, a 

volatilizer (heat exchanger) may be used in fumigating containers or small 

chambers to prevent a “fog-out” (condensation) which could cause corrosion 

or damage to the contents. The last few pounds of fumigant will turn to gas 

within the cylinder before moving out, and the flow rate will be reduced. The 

cylinder and tubing will often become frosted. Be certain that no open flame or 

glowing hot surfaces above 400 °C are present since corrosive substances 

(mainly hydrofluoric acid) are formed when SF is exposed to such conditions. 

To avoid possible damage, do not apply the fumigant directly to any surface.

Dosage Rate

To control a particular pest, locate the proper fumigation schedule to be 

followed in the Treatment Manual. The three variables in these schedules are 

temperature, dosage, and exposure duration. Treatment is not recommended 

below 50 °F. Dosages are in pounds per 1,000 feet3 of space. To determine the 

total amount of fumigant required by weight in pounds, divide the total volume 

of space by 1,000. Then multiply the resulting figure by the dosage rate 

schedule expressed in pounds (per 1,000 feet3). The cylinder should be placed 

on a scale, and the flow of gas is controlled by the valve and introduction line 

until the desired cylinder end-weight is obtained. The valve should be turned 

fully open to fill the fumigant introduction hose with liquid SF. Initially, the 

valve should be opened slightly until flow has begun and then opened about 

one full turn, giving full flow through the 1/8” fumigant introduction hose.

Table 2-10-1 Effect of Hose Inside Diameter on Rate of Gas Introduction 

through a 25-Foot Hose (approximates, depending on cylinder 

pressure)

Inside Diameter (inches) Vikane Per Minute (pounds)

1/8 4

1/4 20

1/2 45

Table 2-10-2 Effect of Hose Length on Rate of Gas Introduction Through a 1/8-

Inch Inside Diameter Hose

Hose Length (in feet) Pounds Vikane Per Minute

25 ft 4.0

50 ft 2.8

100 ft 2.01

1 Where fumigant introduction rates lower than 2 lbs/min are needed, a longer hose can be 

used, e.g., 200 ft.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride

Structural Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-10-5

Measure Gas Concentrations

During the course of fumigation, minimum concentrations must be maintained 

according to the schedules used. Readings on the thermal conductivity if not

calibrated for Vikane, must be multiplied by a factor to obtain the actual 

ounces per 1,000 feet3 present. Contact the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for 

calibration information. Record the gas reading without the multiplied factor 

on PPQ Form 429A and the electronic 429 database. Do not use filters 

containing sodium hydroxide (Ascarite) with SF. Fresh desiccant (Drierite) 

should be used with the T/C unit. Desiccant should be changed at appropriate 

intervals to insure accurate readings.

Replacing Lost Gas

When it appears that additional SF will be needed, the officer should use their 

best judgment to determine the amount of gas to add, according to the 

prevailing conditions of tarpaulin tightness or wind conditions. Usually, 1.6 oz. 

of gas should be added for every ounce of deficiency in the minimum 

concentration required.

Aeration

For detailed guidelines, consult the Vikane Gas Fumigant label, Vikane 

Structural Fumigation Manual, and Aeration on page 2-4-38. The threshold 

limit value for SF is 5 ppm (20 mg/cubic meter), the same as for MB. Since no

colorimetric (“detector”) tubes are available for SF, a suitable instrument must

be used, such as the Interscan GF 1900 or Miran (calibrated for SF).

Structural Fumigation

Refer to the section on MB structural fumigation (or aeration) in this manual, 

the Vikane label, and Vikane Structural Fumigation Manual for a detailed 

discussion of proper procedures.

When preparing a structure for fumigation with SF, the surrounding soil should 

be watered thoroughly at the base of trees, shrubs, and other ornamental plants 

around the perimeter of the structure to prevent loss of fumigant into the soil. 

Watering around the plants will protect the roots; however, plants and grass 

closer than 1 foot may die even if this precaution is taken.

Before placing the tarpaulin over the structure, be sure to remove items for 

which the use of SF is not registered. These include food, feed, drugs, and 

medicines. Extinguish all flames (including pilot lights), unplug all heating 

elements, and turn off all lights. Open all internal doors.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride

Chamber Fumigation

2-10-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Chamber Fumigation

Refer to the section on MB chamber fumigation (and aeration) in this manual, 

the Vikane label, and Vikane Structural Fumigation Manual for a detailed 

discussion of proper procedures.

The gas will generally be introduced through a volatilizer or heat exchanger in 

order to prevent a “fog-out” which could damage the contents. Introducing a 

very small amount of gas into a small chamber, however, is difficult to do with 

precise accuracy because the amount introduced must be calculated by weight 

loss from the cylinder. The scale used beneath the cylinder must be readable in 

ounces or grams, not just in pounds or kilograms.

Shipboard Fumigation

Refer to the section on MB ship fumigation (and aeration) in this manual, the 

Vikane label, and Vikane Structural Fumigation Manual for a detailed 

discussion of proper procedures. Surface ships (only those in port) must be 

fumigated at dock side, and not when the vessels are underway. Shipboard 

fumigation is also regulated by the U.S. Coast Guard (Department of 

Transportation). That regulation appears as 46CFR 147A.

Safety and First Aid

Read and understand all directions and safety precautions on the Vikane label 

before applying. Additional information is presented in the Vikane Structural 

Fumigation Manual. There is no known antidote for SF. Vikane is odorless. 

However, the chance of a lethal exposure is not probable unless an individual 

actually enters the fumigation space. An SCBA must be worn by anyone in the 

fumigated areas when the level exceeds 5 ppm.

Protective Clothing

Wear goggles or full face shield for eye protection during introduction of the 

fumigant. Do not wear gloves or rubber boots. Do not reuse clothing or shoes 

that have become contaminated with liquid SF until thoroughly aerated and 

cleaned.

! CAUTION

Trying to measure out a small quantity of SF in a graduated glass tube (sight 

gauge)—which is common practice with MB chamber fumigations—should never be 

attempted with SF because the cylinder pressure is much greater, and the glass 

gauge may explode and shatter.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride

Safety and First Aid

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-10-7

If SF is Inhaled

An individual who has inhaled high concentrations of SF may exhibit the 

following symptoms:

Difficulty breathing

Dulled awareness

Nausea

Numbness in the extremities

Slowed body movements

Slowed or garbled speech

If any of the above symptoms appear, immediately do the following:

Remove the victim to fresh air

Put victim at complete rest

Keep the victim warm and see that breathing is normal and unhampered; 

if breathing has stopped, give artificial respiration

Do not give anything by mouth to an unconscious person

Obtain medical assistance

If Liquid SF is Spilled on the Skin

Immediately apply water to the contaminated area of clothing before 

removing. Wash contaminated skin thoroughly or shower.

If Liquid SF is in the Eyes

Flush with plenty of water for at least 20 minutes, and get medical attention. 

Damage to the eye may result from cold or freezing temperatures.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Sulfuryl Fluoride

Safety and First Aid

2-10-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Fumigants—Phosphine

Contents

Properties and Use 2-11-1

Phosphine 2-11-3

Carbon Dioxide 2-11-4

Leak Detection: Gas Analysis 2-11-4

Safety 2-11-4

Applicator Requirements 2-11-4

Storage and Handling 2-11-5

First Aid Treatment 2-11-6

Respiratory Protection 2-11-7

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS® 2-11-8

Packaging 2-11-8

Dispensing ECO2FUME® Fumigant Gas 2-11-10

Blending VAPORPH3OS® Fumigant Gas 2-11-14

Dosage 2-11-17

Preparing to Fumigate Break Bulk Cargo 2-11-20

Preparing to Fumigate Containerized Cargo 2-11-27

Preparing to Fumigate Bulk Commodities 2-11-28

Probing 2-11-29

Aeration Requirements 2-11-30

Contacts 2-11-31

Cytec® 2-11-31

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT 2-11-31

Properties and Use

There are a number of phosphine formulations registered with the United 

States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to control a variety of insects 

currently infesting raw agricultural commodities, processed foods, animal 

feed, feed ingredients, and nonfood commodities, including tobacco. 

Aluminum phosphine (AP), magnesium phosphide (MP), ECO2FUME® and 

VAPORPH3OS® are phosphine formulations that are currently approved for 

use by Plant Protection and Quarantine (PPQ). Always refer to this manual to 

determine if there is an available treatment. There are commodities and pests 

listed on the labels that are not authorized for treatment by USDA PPQ.

AP and MP are solid products and are available under various trade names 

(Table 2-11-2) as tablets, pellets, prepacs, bags, or plates. In the presence of 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

Properties and Use

2-11-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

moisture, phosphine (hydrogen phosphide, PH3) a colorless gas, is emitted 

from the solid product.

The flash point of PH is 212 °F. Direct contact with a liquid could cause 

spontaneous combustion. In case of fire, a CO2 dry chemical fire extinguisher 

should be used. Never use water to extinguish a PH-ignited fire. PH has an 

odor somewhat like garlic, which enables the gas to serve as its own warning 

agent. However, under some conditions, the odor can be lost, even at high toxic 

concentrations.

ECO2FUME® fumigant gas is a nonflammable, premixed mixture of 

phosphine and carbon dioxide. The phosphine is liquefied and mixed with 

carbon dioxide in high-pressure cylinders for shipment. Phosphine, the active 

ingredient, makes up 2 percent by weight (2.6 percent by volume) of the 

product. The carbon dioxide is used as a propellant and a flame inhibitor, 

making the product nonflammable in air. Do not store the fumigant near heat 

or open flame. Do not drop, puncture, or incinerate the cylinder.

Under pressure, ECO2FUME® is a poisonous liquefied gas. The product is 

withdrawn from the cylinder as a liquid, but dispensed as a gas. When 

expanding from a liquid to a gas, the volume of ECO2FUME® is multiplied by 

hundreds. Proper dispensing equipment (see Dispensing ECO2FUME® 

Fumigant Gas on page 2-11-10) is necessary to ensure a safe and effective 

fumigation; therefore, always contact the manufacturer concerning proper 

dispensing equipment for the fumigant. Fumigators should provide PPQ with 

all Cytec® equipment authorization documentation. The documentation 

should be on file and available for periodic audits by the USDA.

The rate at which phosphine is dispensed is not dependent on temperature or 

humidity, but on the dispensing equipment used. Unlike metal phosphide 

fumigants, the phosphine is not generated through a chemical reaction and its 

release is instantaneous. The choice of dispensing methods will depend on the 

type and duration of the fumigation planned.

VAPORPH3OS® consists of 100 percent phosphine gas packaged in highpressure gas cylinders. Unlike solid phosphide fumigants, the phosphine is not

generated through a chemical reaction and its release is instantaneous. 

Phosphine is pyrophoric and will spontaneously ignite in air. Phosphine is 

dispensed as a gas from the cylinder and can be safely blended with carbon 

dioxide to less than 3 percent volume (30,000 ppm) or diluted with the 

surrounding air to 1 percent volume (10,000 ppm) to eliminate the 

flammability hazard. Contact the manufacturer for approved blending 

equipment necessary to ensure a safe and effective fumigation. Never store the 

cylinders where the temperature will exceed 125 °F. Fumigators should 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

Properties and Use

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-3

provide PPQ with all Cytec® equipment authorization documentation. The 

documentation should be on file and available for periodic audits by the 

USDA.

Phosphine

Phosphine (PH) is highly toxic to humans and other animals. Avoid exposure 

to nontarget organisms. The current U.S. OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit 

(PEL) for phosphine is 0.3 ppm as an 8-hour time weighted average. The Short 

Term Exposure Limit (STEL) for phosphine is 1 ppm as a 15-minute time 

weighted average.

Phosphine is colorless and, at concentrations below the OSHA PEL, has the 

odor of decaying fish or garlic. Intermittent low concentration exposure may 

cause headaches, malaise, ringing of ears, fatigue, nausea, and chest pressure. 

Moderate exposure causes weakness, vomiting, and pain in the stomach and 

chest with difficult breathing. Phosphine gas reacts with moisture to form 

phosphoric acid, which causes pulmonary edema.

Phosphine may spontaneously ignite in air at levels above its lower 

flammability limit of 1.8 percent v/v (18,000 ppm). Do not exceed this 

concentration because, under these conditions, explosions can occur that could 

cause severe personal injury. Never allow the buildup of phosphine to exceed 

explosive concentrations.

Under high vacuum conditions, phosphine gas can cause an explosive hazard. 

Do not apply either fumigant in vacuum chambers.

Phosphine can react with certain metals and cause corrosion (especially at 

higher temperatures and lower relative humidity). Gold, silver, copper, brass, 

and other copper alloys are susceptible to corrosion.

! CAUTION

Remove or protect the following items prior to fumigation:

 Batteries and battery chargers

 Brass sprinkler heads

 Communication devices

 Computers

 Electric motors

 Electronic or electrical equipment

 Fork lifts

 Smoke detectors

 Switching gears

 Temperature monitoring systems
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

Leak Detection: Gas Analysis

2-11-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Fans and blowers used with phosphine products should be manufactured from 

materials resistant to the fumigant. Aluminum or plastic wheels and housings 

are preferred. For phosphine fumigations, always contact the manufacturer for 

recommended fan and blower types.

Carbon Dioxide

In a liquefied state and when contact is made with exposed areas of the body, 

carbon dioxide can cause frostbite and freeze burns. Overexposure to carbon 

dioxide at low levels can cause headache, nausea, weakness, confusion, and 

labored breathing. Overexposure to higher concentrations can cause excitation, 

dizziness, euphoria, loss of consciousness, coma, and death.

The current U.S. OSHA PEL for carbon dioxide is 5,000 ppm as an 8-hour 

time weighted average.

Leak Detection: Gas Analysis

Phosphine levels can be detected using either colorimetric detector tubes or 

any approved electronic instrument, such as the PortaSens detector. (See 

Phosphine Detector on page 8-1-23 for instructions on how to use the 

PortaSens.) This equipment is used to determine both the high (fumigation 

concentration) and low (personnel safety) levels of PH. Do not use thermal 

conductivity (T/C) units to measure PH.

Safety

Applicator Requirements

Before using ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS®, all users (fumigators) are 

required to attend the fumigant gas product stewardship course offered by 

Cytec® Industries. PPQ Officers are not required to attend the stewardship 

courses, but attendance is recommended.

It is a violation of Federal law to use AP, MP, ECO2FUME® and 

VAPORPH3OS® fumigants in a manner inconsistent with their labeling. These 

fumigants are Restricted Use Pesticides that can only be used by certified 

applicators. Prior to using the fumigants, submit to PPQ all documentation 

concerning applicator certification and stewardship program completion by 

personnel working for the fumigation company. The documentation should be 

on file and available for periodic audits by the USDA.

A certified applicator must be physically present, responsible for, and maintain 

visual and/or voice contact with all fumigation workers during the application 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

Safety

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-5

of the fumigants and during the initial opening of the fumigation structure for 

aeration.

Storage and Handling

Although PH is flammable and can ignite when exposed to excessive moisture, 

the commercial precautions of AP and MP are considered fire safe and 

explosion safe when used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction. 

Place no more than 10 pellets of Phostoxin in a single envelope, which is 

supplied by the manufacturer. A Fumi-Cel plate should not contact another 

Fumi-Cel plate or the commodity.

Store containers of AP and MP in a cool, dry, locked, ventilated, protected area 

not subject to extremes of temperature. Never allow water to come in contact 

with AP or MP. The shelf life of unopened containers is virtually unlimited. 

When a tube or container is first opened, the odor of PH (garlic) and ammonia 

will be noticeable and a blue flame sometimes occurs. However, the quantity 

of free PH present within that container should not be considered dangerous.

When planning a storage area for ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS®

cylinders, consider the needs of the local authorities. Provide all emergency 

response personnel with Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and detailed 

information regarding the quantities of product stored and the nature and 

location of the storage area.

Develop an Emergency Response Plan that defines procedures and outlines 

responsibilities in the event of an accident. Train all site personnel in the plan. 

Store all cylinders with the valve discharge cap securely in place.

In addition to instructions and precautions found on the label, be certain to:

Allow only properly trained personnel to conduct fumigations under the 

supervision of certified pesticide applicator(s)

Always wear safety glasses when handling pressurized equipment

Always work in pairs, never alone—a minimum of two people must be 

present during the introduction, sampling, and aeration of the fumigant

Comply with all regulations

Do not apply either PH fumigant in vacuum chambers

Ensure that first aid equipment, MSDS sheets, and fumigant labels are 

readily available at the fumigation site

Never eat, drink, or smoke when handling PH products

Placard the area to be fumigated and an area extending 30 feet from the 

fumigation enclosure—refer to the fumigation label for appropriate 

wording on all placards
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

Safety

2-11-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Read and understand sections XI. STORAGE OF CYLINDERS and XII. 

TRANSPORT in the ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® Application 

Manual

Remove placards when aeration is complete and concentrations are below 

the TLV

Only certified pesticide applicators or individuals under the direct 

supervision of the certified applicator should remove placards

Study and follow the recommended application procedure

Wear dry cloth gloves when handling AP or MP products

Wear leather or leather-faced cotton gloves when connecting or 

disconnecting ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® cylinders from the 

dispensing or blending equipment

Wear steel-toed shoes

First Aid Treatment

Mild inhalation exposure causes:

Fatigue

Malaise

Nausea

Pressure in chest

Ringing of the ears

Moderate inhalation exposure causes:

Chest pain

Diarrhea

Dyspnea (difficulty breathing)

Epigastric pain

Vomiting

Weakness

Severe inhalation poisoning can occur within a few hours or up to several 

days—symptoms may be:

Cyanosis (blue or purple skin color)

Death

Dizziness

Pulmonary edema (fluid in lungs)
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

Respiratory Protection

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-7

Unconsciousness

Respiratory Protection

When applying AP, MP, ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS®, respiratory 

protection must be available at the site. An adequate number of NIOSHapproved self-contained breathing apparati (SCBA) with full face piece and 

operated in pressure-demand mode must be available.

The slow evolution of PH from the AP or MP enables the operator to dispense 

the tablets, pellets, packets, plates, or pre-pack ropes safely, usually without

the need for wearing an SCBA.

However, wear SCBA during exposure to concentrations in excess of 

permitted limits (Table 2-11-1) or when concentrations are unknown. If the 

concentration of phosphine is unknown or known to exceed the STEL’s for 

phosphine and/or carbon dioxide, wear SCBA during troubleshooting for 

leaks. Use respiratory protection according to local regulations, including 

regular worker training in using respiratory protection equipment properly, 

medical clearance for respirator use, fit testing, inspection, maintenance, and 

cleaning and storage of respiratory protection equipment.

! DANGER

Get the victim to fresh air, treat for shock, and call a physician.

Table 2-11-1 NIOSH Recommended Respiratory Protection When Applying 

Phosphine

Phosphine Gas (ppm) Minimum Respiratory Protection

0.3 - 3.0 Supplied-air respirator

3.1 - 7.5 Supplied-air respirator operated in a continuous-flow mode

7.6 - 15 1. SCBA with full face piece, OR

2. Supplied-air respirator with full face piece, OR

3. Air-purifying full face piece respirator (gas mask) with chin 

style front or back-mounted canister

16 - 50 1. Supplied-air respirator with a full face piece and operated 

in pressure-demand mode, OR

2. SCBA with full face piece and operated in pressuredemand mode
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

Packaging

AP and MP are packaged in a variety of ways, depending on the manufacturer. 

Use Table 2-11-2 to determine the amount of phosphine liberated by each 

product.

ECO2FUME® fumigant gas is packaged in a steel compressed gas cylinder 

designed, manufactured, maintained, and filled in compliance with regulations 

established by the United States Department of Transportation (DOT). 

(Figure 2-11-1). The product flows to the dispensing equipment through the 

cylinder outlet valve, which is equipped with a “dip tube.” This tube extends to 

the bottom of the cylinder to facilitate the withdrawal of the liquefied gas 

mixture. As liquid is withdrawn from the cylinder, some of the product 

vaporizes to fill the remaining space in the cylinder. Through this vaporization, 

the cylinder pressure is maintained.

Table 2-11-2 Amount of Phosphine Liberated by Various Products

Product Type Unit and Weight in 

Grams

Grams of 

Phosphine

Degesch Fumi-Cel® MP 1 plate; 117.0 33.0

Degesch Fumi-Strip® MP 20 plates; 2340.0 660.0

Degesch Phostoxin® AP 1 tablet; 3.0 1.0

Degesch Phostoxin® Tablet Prepac Rope AP 1 prepac; 99.0 (strip 

or rope of 33 tablets)

33.0

Detia AP 1 tablet; 3.0 1.0

Detia Rotox AP AP 1 pellet; 0.6 0.2

Detia Gas EX-B AP 1 bag or sachet; 

34.0

11.4

Fumiphos tablets AP 1 tablet; 3.0 1.0

Fumiphos pellets AP 1 pellet; 0.6 0.2

Fumiphos bags AP 1 bag; 34.0 11.0

Fumitoxin AP 1 tablet; 3.0 1.0

Fumitoxin AP 1 pellet; 0.6 0.2

Fumitoxin AP 1 bag; 34.0 11.0

Gastoxin AP 1 tablet; 3.0 1.0

Gastoxin AP 1 pellet; 0.6 0.2

“L” Fume AP

AP

1 pellet; 0.5

1 pellet; 0.6

0.18

0.22

Phos-Kill AP 1 tablet; 3.0 1.1

Phos-Kill AP 1 pellet; 0.6 0.22

Phos-Kill AP 1 bag; 34.0 12.0
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-9

The capacity of one 2ECO2FUME® cylinder at 200 and 500 ppm is 78,000 and 

31,100 ft3 respectively. With the volume of ECO2FUME® at 500 ft3 the 

internal volume of the cylinder is 49 liters. The maximum cylinder pressure is 

2,400 psig.

The Compressed Gas Association (CGA) established the valve outlet fitting as 

a CGA350. The valve outlet is protected by a threaded gas tight outlet cap, 

which must be secured whenever the cylinder is not in use. To dispense 

ECO2FUME® fumigant gas at the time of fumigation, attach only Cytec®-

provided (or approved) dispensing equipment to the cylinder valve outlet. 

Using any other dispensing equipment is prohibited. 

Most compressed gas cylinder valves are equipped with a safety device that 

releases the cylinder contents due to fire exposure or over-pressurization. 

Because ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® fumigant gases are poisonous, 

Hazard Class A, the DOT regulations prohibit using such a device.

Each cylinder is supplied with a cylinder cap designed to protect the outlet 

valve. Secure this cap whenever a cylinder is not in use. It is unlawful to 

transport an ECO2FUME® or VAPORPH3OS® fumigant gas cylinder without

the valve outlet cap and the cylinder cap securely in place.

ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® fumigant gas cylinders can only be refilled 

by authorized distributors. They can be filled countless times within a 5-year 

Figure 2-11-1 Diagram of ECO2FUME® Gas Cylinder
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

period. Every 5 years, however, the cylinder is required, by law, to be tested by 

a qualified facility.

VAPORPH3OS® is packaged in much the same way as ECO2FUME® with two 

critical exceptions. First, VAPORPH3OS® does not contain a dip tube, which 

means the fumigant is withdrawn from the cylinder directly through the outlet 

valve. Second, the capacity of one VAPORPH3OS® cylinder at 200 and 500 

ppm is 2.25M and 900,000 ft3 respectively. With the volume of 

VAPORPH3OS® at 500 ft3, the internal volume of the cylinder is 49 liters. The 

maximum cylinder pressure is 2,400 psig. One VAPORPH3OS® cylinder 

contains 18,000 grams of phosphine and is capable of fumigating 2.25M ft3

.

Dispensing ECO2FUME® Fumigant Gas

The following instructions are intended to provide general guidelines for 

typical ECO2FUME® fumigation. There are a number of critical factors 

involved in the design of dispensing equipment (see Figure 2-11-2). As such, 

dispensing equipment must meet both high-pressure standards and chemical 

compatibility requirements. Improper or inappropriate use of dispensing 

equipment can result in severe injury or death. Application inconsistent with 

the labeling and Application Manual is a violation of Federal law. Buyer 

assumes all risk should the product be used contrary to label or Application 

Manual instructions.

! WARNING

ECO2FUME® cylinders are painted yellow with a dark green shoulder and cap. If you 

receive a cylinder of a different color or without a Cytec® ECO2FUME® label, do 

not use the cylinder. Contact your distributor or Cytec® with the cylinder serial 

number.

! WARNING

VAPORPH3OS® cylinders are painted silver with a red shoulder. If you receive a 

cylinder of a different color or without a VAPORPH3OS® label, do not use the 

cylinder. Contact your distributor or Cytec® with the cylinder serial number.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-11

Equipment Specification and Use

The equipment used to dispense ECO2FUME® provides a means of containing 

the gas during the fumigation and controlling the release of the product into the 

desired space. While some dispensing equipment has been developed and used 

to date, it cannot be expected to cover all possible fumigation scenarios. The 

development of suitable dispensing equipment is an ongoing process based on 

the needs of the users and available technology.

The design of dispensing equipment must account for a number of technical 

issues including pressure rating, material compatibility, temperature 

limitations, and operator safety. For this reason, only use appropriate 

equipment when dispensing ECO2FUME®. Only persons trained in the proper 

use of ECO2FUME® and the dispensing equipment shall be permitted to use 

ECO2FUME® for fumigation. Consult the instruction materials provided with 

the dispensing equipment for their proper use and maintenance.

Unapproved Dispensing Methods

It has been common practice with other cylinderized fumigants, to place the 

cylinder in the space to be fumigated and the cylinder outlet valve opened to 

allow the fumigant to release. This is not an approved dispensing method and 

should not be used with ECO2FUME®.

Figure 2-11-2 Diagram of One Type of Dispensing Equipment for ECO2FUME
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Approved Dispensing Methods

The approved dispensing methods for ECO2FUME® include using pressurereducing regulators for slow release and selected piping components for quick 

release. The slow release of ECO2FUME® is generally used for fumigating 

bulk storage facilities such as silos or bins, or for small fumigation chambers or 

spaces, and for fumigating stacked materials under tarpaulins. The quick 

release method is used for space fumigation, or where the commodity to be 

treated is warehoused. The selection of the dispensing method will depend on 

the size of the fumigation, the time required, and facility limitations.

Two gas regulators, ambient and heated, have been developed for use with 

ECO2FUME®. Each of the regulators is designed to reduce the high cylinder 

pressure (less than 30 psig) and provide the heat necessary to vaporize the 

fumigant. Once reduced to this lower pressure, the fumigant can be distributed 

to the desired dispensing points using inexpensive and easy-to-use materials, 

such as plastic tubing. Flow indicators are used with regulated dispensers to 

measure and set the dispensing rate.

Ambient Heater Regulated Dispenser. The slower of the two dispensers relies on 

ambient heat to vaporize the fumigant and is limited to a dispensing rate of 

about one-half pound of ECO2FUME® per hour.

Heated Regulated Dispenser. The heated regulator uses an external heating 

vaporizer to provide the energy needed to vaporize the liquid fumigant at a 

much higher rate than the ambient heat regulator. This regulator is limited to a 

dispensing rate of about 24 pounds of ECO2FUME® per hour. The equipment 

is designed for a service pressure up to 3,000 psig. From the cylinder, the 

liquid mixture flows down a flexible hose or pigtail through a filter and into a 

heater. The heater is thermostatically controlled and the temperature setting 

can be adjusted. Exiting the heater, ECO2FUME® gas flows through an 

actuated valve that can be used for emergency shutdown purposes. 

ECO2FUME® gas then flows through a gas regulator that drops the pressure to 

30 psig. A diaphragm valve is used to control the gas flow at any desired value 

up to 100 liters/minute as indicated by the flow rotameter. The heater provides 

1,000 watts of power that can vaporize a maximum of 100 ppm. Lower 

rotameter ranges are possible. ECO2FUME® regulator assemblies, equipped 

with basic features, are available through authorized ECO2FUME®

distributors. Multiple regulators may be used together to achieve higher 

fumigant flows than available through a single regulator and custom 

equipment can be developed for specific types of applications.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-13

Quick-Release Dispensing Equipment. When the fumigation space is very large, 

such as a mill, warehouse, or large fumigation chamber, using a number of 

cylinders is anticipated, a quick means of dispensing ECO2FUME® is 

available. Specially selected components can be used to direct the cylinder 

discharge into the fumigation space without the need to enter the space during 

the fumigation. Using this method, a single cylinder can be completely 

discharged in as little as 15 minutes. Unlike the regulated dispensing methods, 

the dispensing rate is not adjustable and generally, entire cylinders are emptied 

using this process. If partial cylinder contents are needed, the ECO2FUME®

cylinder can be placed on a weight scale and the amount of released fumigant 

can be measured. The quick release method must not be used for fumigation 

of small-sized stacked materials under tarpaulins, however, the quick 

dispensing method will be used for most applications. Three techniques of 

quick dispensing are presented in this section, with the major difference being 

the tubing size.

1. One technique uses high pressure tubing (stainless steel or hydraulic hose 

with a nylon core) connected directly to the cylinder valve. The tubing is 

then routed into the fumigation space. When the cylinder valve is opened 

the majority of the liquid will be dispensed in 4 to 5 minutes. The last few 

pounds below the cylinder internal dip pipe will require several additional 

minutes to vaporize and be dispensed. When the cylinder is empty of 

liquid, approximately 18 pounds of gas will remain in the cylinder. For 

larger fumigations, manifolds may be used with the cylinders to make the 

dispensing faster. Always leak test the dispensing piping and cylinder 

connection before opening the cylinder valve.

2. When a slower dispensing rate is desired, use smaller tubing (stainless steel 

or hydraulic hose with a nylon core). The fumigator must not throttle the 

cylinder valve to slow the dispensing rate; to do so will cause a high 

pressure drop through the valve. The pressure drop will result in cooling 

and dry ice formation. This solid dry ice formation will plug the dispensing 

pipe and possibly the cylinder valve. Attaching a short section of 1/8 inch 

tubing to the end of the 1/4 inch tubing will slow the dispensing rate to 

approximately 5 pounds per minute. Use a calibrated scale to ensure the 

proper amount of product dispensed.

3. If a dispensing rate of less than 5 pounds per minute is required, a small 

section of 1/16 inch tubing, 0.04 inch internal diameter (stainless steel or 

hydraulic hose with a nylon core) can be attached to the end of the 1/4 inch 

tubing to slow the dispensing rate to approximately 1.6 pounds per minute. 

Use a scale to ensure the proper amount of product is dispensed. The tubing 

is also available in smaller internal diameters (I.D.) for reduced dispensing 

rates. When 1/8 inch tubing or 1/16 inch tubing is used, a filter is 

recommended to prevent plugging of the smaller tubing.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Blending VAPORPH3OS® Fumigant Gas

The following instructions are intended to provide general guidelines for 

typical fumigations. There are a number of critical factors involved in the 

design of blending equipment. As such, blending equipment must meet both 

high-pressure standards and chemical compatibility requirements. Improper or 

inappropriate use of blending equipment may result in severe injury or death. 

Application inconsistent with the labeling and Application Manual is a 

violation of Federal law. Buyer assumes all risk should the product be used 

contrary to label or Application Manual instructions.

Equipment Specification and Use

The equipment used to blend VAPORPH3OS® on site with carbon dioxide or 

surrounding air into a nonflammable gas mixture provides a means of 

containing the gas during the application and controlling the release of the 

product into the desired space. While some blending equipment has been 

developed and used to date, they cannot be expected to cover all possible 

fumigation scenarios. The development of suitable blending equipment is an 

ongoing process based on the needs of the users and available technology.

Blending equipment design must account for a number of technical issues 

including pressure rating, material compatibility, temperature limitations and 

operator safety, and controlling the phosphine concentration between 2.0 and 

2.9 percent volume for carbon dioxide blending, and less than 10,000 ppm (1 

percent volume) for dilution with air. For this reason, use only Cytec®- 

approved equipment in VAPORPH3OS® blending. Only persons trained in the 

proper use of VAPORPH3OS® and the dispensing equipment shall be permitted 

to use VAPORPH3OS® for fumigation. These persons must also be licensed 

pesticide applicators.

Consult the instruction materials provided with the blending equipment or 

dilution equipment for their proper use and maintenance. FOSFOQUIM, the 

authorized manufacturer of the phosphine air blending equipment, will provide 

training and written instructions for the use and maintenance of its HDS 

equipment.

Unapproved Dispensing Methods

It has been common practice with other cylinderized fumigants to place the 

cylinder in the space to be fumigated and the cylinder outlet valve opened to 

allow the fumigant to release. This is not an approved dispensing method and 

should not be used with VAPORPH3OS®. VAPORPH3OS® phosphine 

fumigant is pyrophoric and will spontaneously ignite in air. VAPORPH3OS®

must be properly blended with carbon dioxide or diluted with air to eliminate 

the flammability hazard.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-15

Blending Equipment for VAPORPH3OS® and Carbon Dioxide

Phosphine gas (VAPORPH3OS®) from high-pressure cylinders flows into the 

blender unit where it combines with carbon dioxide gas sourced from bulk 

storage, mobile bulk truck, semibulk, or cylinders. Various models of on-site 

blending equipment have been designed, built, and tested. All of the designs 

have incorporated engineering safeguards to ensure that the blended product is 

a nonflammable mixture.

One design uses a pressure regulator and flow control orifice on both the 

VAPORPH3OS® and carbon dioxide gases to control the flow rate and to 

properly blend VAPORPH3OS® with carbon dioxide. The size of each orifice 

is engineered for a specific fixed flow rate and, therefore, the blending rate 

cannot be adjusted. By controlling the pressure drop across the orifice plates, 

the phosphine concentration can be controlled around 2.5 percent v/v.

A more sophisticated design uses mass meters, control valves, and the 

electronics to allow an adjustable blending rate while maintaining the proper 

blend of phosphine concentration from going outside the range of 2.0 to 2.9 

percent volume (1.6 to 2.2 percent weight). The product from this equipment is 

equivalent to ECO2FUME® fumigant gas. Blending equipment is intended for 

large facilities that have on-site carbon dioxide bulk storage and vaporizing 

equipment or facilities where it is feasible to bring in bulk carbon dioxide and 

vaporizing equipment for the fumigation. The blending equipment is designed 

for use only with carbon dioxide gas; therefore, a bulk supply of liquid carbon 

dioxide must be equipped with suitable vaporizing equipment. Contact 

Cytec® for blending equipment design specifications and recommendations. 

For smaller fumigation jobs, it is recommended that preblended ECO2FUME®

cylinders be used. VAPORPH3OS® fumigant gas can only be blended with 

Figure 2-11-3 Diagram of One Type of Blending Equipment for VAPORPH3OS
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-16 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

registered carbon dioxide products. Never allow the buildup of phosphine to 

exceed explosive concentrations. When phosphine is blended with carbon 

dioxide, the LFL is raised to 3 percent v/v. The fumigator should always check 

with Cytec® for approved blending equipment. Fumigators should provide 

PPQ with all Cytec® equipment authorization documentation. The 

documentation should be on file and available for periodic audits by the 

USDA.

Blending Equipment for VAPORPH3OS® and Forced Air

Phosphine gas (VAPORPH3OS®) can spontaneously ignite in air if the 

concentration is greater than 1.8 percent (18,000 ppm). With specialized 

equipment, pure phosphine can be safely blended with a forced air stream to 

ensure the final concentration does not exceed 10,000 ppm (55 percent of the 

Lower Flammability Limit of 18,000 ppm). The equipment has incorporated 

engineering safeguards to ensure the flammable concentration is never

exceeded.

Various models of phosphine/forced air blending equipment have been 

designed, built, and tested. The Horn Diluphos System (HDS) from 

FOSFOQUIM is approved by Cytec® and the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

to blend VAPORPH3OS® with forced air (see section on HDS80 and HDS200 

Blending Equipment). One design uses inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) 

to prepurge the phosphine lines and equipment. Once purged, phosphine flows 

through a pressure regulator and flow controller to the mixing point. Here, 

phosphine is safely blended into the forced air stream. The forced air can be 

supplied by various fans, blowers, or compressors. The air flow is measured 

and the phosphine flow will stop if the air flow is insufficient.

If the phosphine flow is stopped for any reason, post-purging of the phosphine 

lines and equipment is automatic.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-17

Dosage

The dosage rate for AP, MP, ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® is measured in 

grams per 1,000 cubic feet or grams per cubic meter and varies with the 

commodity, treatment temperature, and type of enclosure. The initial fumigant 

dose is determined by the volume of the space to be fumigated and the required 

phosphine dose rate needed to kill the target pest. ECO2FUME® and 

VAPORPH3OS® fumigant gas and carbon dioxide/forced air can be added if 

the desired target concentration changes due to a loss of the fumigant through 

leaks in the fumigation enclosure.

AP and MP

To calculate the number of tablets or pellets of AP or MP required for the 

fumigation:

Dosage Rate = the dosage rate from the treatment schedule (grams)

Volume of enclosure = Length x Width x Height (ft3)

Grams of phosphine liberated = Table 2-11-2

Step 1: Grams of PH3 = (Dosage Rate x Volume of enclosure)/1,000 ft3

Step 2: Number of Tablets or Pellets needed = grams of PH3/grams of 

phosphine liberated

Figure 2-11-4 Diagram of VAPORPH3OS® and Forced Air Blending Equipment
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-18 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

ECO2FUME®

Method 1:

1 gram of phosphine (PH3) = 25 ppm PH3/1,000 ft3

To calculate the total amount of ECO2FUME® required for each treatment:

Target concentration in ppm = (Dosage rate in grams from Treatment 

Schedule x 25 ppm)

Grams of PH3 = (Target concentration x Volume of enclosure)/25,000

Pounds of ECO2FUME® = (Target concentration x Volume)/226,800

Method 2:

1 pound of ECO2FUME® = 9.07 grams PH3

Divide the dosage rate from the treatment schedule (in grams) by 9.07

EXAMPLE T308-b-2. Tobacco for Export in a warehouse requires 20 grams of 

phosphine per 1,000 ft3. The size of the warehouse is 100’ x 75’ x 

50’. To determine the number of Fumiphos tablets and pellets to 

introduce, use the following procedure:

100’ x 75’ x 50’ = 375,000 ft3

Step 1: (20 g x 375,000 ft3)/1,000 ft3 = 7,500 g

Step 2:

Tablets: 7,500/1.0 = 7,500 tablets

Pellets: 7,500/0.2 = 37,500 pellets

EXAMPLE T301-d-1-2 Cotton and cotton products requires 36 g of phosphine 

per 1,000 ft3. The volume of this enclosure is 10’ x 10’ x 10’. To 

determine the pounds of ECO2FUME® follow these steps:

Step 1: Convert grams of phosphine to ppm:

36 g x 25 = 900 ppm / 1,000 ft3

Step 2: Determine total volume of the enclosure

10’ x 10’ x 10’ = 1,000 ft3

Step 3: Apply the formula to determine the amount of ECO2FUME®

to introduce (900 ppm x 1,000 ft3) / 226,800 = 3.97 pounds

Therefore, 3.97 pounds of ECO2FUME® will be introduced into the 

structure.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-19

VAPORPH3OS®

To calculate the amount of VAPORPH3OS® required for the fumigation:

1 pound of VAPORPH3OS® = 454 grams PH3

Target concentration = the desired phosphine concentration (ppm) from the 

treatment schedule

Step 1: Grams of PH3 = (Target concentration x Volume of enclosure)/25,000

Blending with CO2. Once the amount of phosphine has been determined, the 

appropriate amount of carbon dioxide must be calculated. It is recommended 

that twice the amount of carbon dioxide be available to ensure an adequate 

supply for the initial dose, the addition of gas, and equipment purging.

To calculate the amount of carbon dioxide required for the fumigation:

Step 2: Pounds of CO2 = (Grams of PH3/454) x 105.3

Blending with Forced Air. When blending with forced air, only the amount of 

phosphine needs to be calculated. A closed circulation system is created if the 

air supply is sourced from inside the fumigation enclosure. This will prevent a 

positive pressure from developing within the fumigation space. If recirculation 

is not used, the perimeter of the fumigation site will need to be monitored 

because the air will be displaced from the fumigation space. The HDS 80 

blending equipment used with forced air dispenses at 50g/min. If the minimum 

air flow is not maintained, the blending equipment will automatically shut 

down and phosphine will no longer be dispensed.

EXAMPLE Assuming the same Treatment Schedule as the previous example 

(T301-d-1-2 Cotton and cotton products):

36 / 9.07 = 3.97 pounds

NOTICE

When the amount of gas introduced is less than 68 pounds, use a calibrated scale to 

determine when the proper amount of gas has been introduced into the space.

EXAMPLE T301-d-1-2 Cotton and cotton products requires 36 g of phosphine 

per 1,000 ft3. The volume of the enclosure is 75,000 ft3. To determine 

the amount of VAPORPH3OS® gas to introduce, follow these steps:

Step 1: (36 g x 25 x 75,000 ft3) / 25,000 = 2,700 grams PH3

Step 2: (2,700 / 454) x 105.3 = 626 pounds CO2
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-20 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Adding ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® Gas to an Enclosure

Depending on the sealability of the type of space to be fumigated, it may be 

necessary to add additional gas to the structure in order to maintain the target 

concentration required by the treatment schedule.

To calculate the amount of ECO2FUME®/VAPORPH3OS® to be added:

Grams of PH3 = (Target Concentration - Actual Concentration) x Volume/

25,000

The target and actual concentrations are measured in ppm and must be 

monitored with a device approved by S&T-TMT.

Preparing to Fumigate Break Bulk Cargo

Break bulk cargo has been unloaded from a ship hold, a container, or rail car. 

This cargo can be fumigated by covering the pallets, boxes, or raw cargo with 

an impervious tarpaulin.

Always check this manual to determine if there is an approved treatment 

schedule using either AP, MP, ECO2FUME® or VAPORPH3OS® fumigant for 

the infested commodity. Treatment schedules typically list the commodity to 

fumigate with its associated pest(s). If the commodity in question does not

have a treatment schedule, contact the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT to 

determine if there is an alternative treatment available.

Step 1: Site Selection

Consider the following factors when selecting a fumigation site:

Ability to heat (in colder areas)

Aeration requirements

Electrical power supply

Impervious surface

Nonwork area that can be effectively marked and safeguarded or isolated

Water supply

Well-lighted area

Well-ventilated, sheltered area

Ability to Heat Area

When cool temperatures (below 40 °F) are expected, heat the site to maintain 

commodity temperatures above 40 °F; take the ambient temperature 12 inches 

above the floor.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-21

The temperature of the enclosure must be monitored using a temperature 

recording system, consisting of temperature sensors and a data recorder. The 

temperature recording system must meet the following specifications:

Accurate to within ± 0.6 °C or ±1.0 °F in the treatment temperature range 

of 4.4 °C to 26.7 °C (40 °F to 80 °F)

Calibrated annually by the National Institute of Standards and Technology 

(NIST) or by the manufacturer

The calibration certificate will list a correction factor, if needed, and 

the correction factor would be applied to the actual temperature 

reading to obtain the true temperature.

Capable of printing all temperature readings or downloading data to a 

secure source once per hour throughout the entire treatment (all 

temperature data must be accessible at a safe distance during the 

fumigation)

Tamper-proof

If one or more of the temperature readings go below 40 °F the fumigation will 

be considered a failed treatment. The commodity must be re-treated, returned 

to the country of origin, reexported, or destroyed.

Place temperature sensors evenly throughout the enclosure. The placement of 

the sensors will vary depending on the item fumigated and the configuration of 

the fumigation site. Contact USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for instructions 

regarding the exact placement of the temperature sensors.

Because phosphoric acid will be produced if phosphine is burned, never 

use flame or exposed electrical element heaters during treatment.

Contact USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for appropriate heating 

sources.

An Impervious Surface

Select an asphalt, concrete, or tight wooden surface, not soil or gravel, or other 

porous surfaces. If you must fumigate on a porous surface, cover the surface 

with plastic tarpaulins.

For large fumigations, covering the surface is not usually practical because 

pallets must be rearranged and heavy equipment used to move the commodity.

On docks, wharfs, and piers, check for cracks, holes, and manhole covers that 

will allow the phosphine gas to escape through the floor.

Seal all cracks, holes, and manhole covers with plastic tarpaulins.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-22 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

A Nonwork Area

Select a secure nonwork area where traffic and people are restricted from 

entering.

The fumigation area is considered either the entire structure area or an 

area that extends 30 feet from the tarpaulin and is separated by a physical 

barrier, such as ropes, barricades, or walls.Place placards clearly in sight 

of all who come near.

If a wall of gas-impervious material is less than 30 feet from the tarpaulin, 

the wall may serve as the edge of the secured area.

Additional guidelines may be required by some state’s Department of 

Agriculture. Some states (California, for example) require a 100-foot 

buffer zone.

Place placards clearly in sight of all who come near

Placards must meet label requirements regarding specific warnings, 

information, and language.

Placards generally include the name of the fumigant, the fumigation 

date, time, and the name of the company conducting the fumigation.

Restrict access to the fumigation area to the fumigator’s employees 

and PPQ employees monitoring the treatment.

Use rope or marker tape to limit access within 30 feet of the enclosure.

Do not allow motor vehicles (including forklifts) to operate within 30 

feet of the enclosure during fumigation and aeration periods.

The area outside the 30-foot perimeter is usually regarded as a safe 

distance from the tarpaulin. 

The 30-foot perimeter is not specifically mentioned on the AP, MP, 

ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® labels, but is required for safety to 

PPQ Officers.

Electrical Power Supply

An adequate electrical source must be available to run the dispensing 

equipment (ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® only).

A separate line should be available for the dispensing and blending units.

NOTICE

Gas concentrations should never exceed 0.3 ppm phosphine and 5,000 ppm carbon 

dioxide in the safety zone (30 feet from the enclosure where officers are taking gas 

concentration readings).

Use colorimetric tubes or other approved devices to measure gas concentrations.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-23

Electrical outlets must be grounded and conveniently located in relation 

to the fumigation area.

Except under emergency conditions, do not use generators as a power 

source.

Water Supply

A water supply is necessary for safety purposes; if no permanent water source 

is present on site, the fumigator must provide a portable, 5-gallon supply of 

clean water.

Well-Lighted Area

The area should have adequate lighting for safety purposes and for ease in 

reading the gas monitoring devices, thermometers, and for determining 

whether a tarpaulin has holes or tears.

Well-ventilated, Sheltered Area

Select sites that are well-ventilated and in a sheltered area. A well-ventilated 

site is required for exhausting gas before and when the tarpaulin is removed 

from the stack.

If fumigations are conducted outside, select a site that is semisheltered such as 

the leeward side of a warehouse, pier, or building that offers some protection 

from strong winds.

Step 2: Arranging the Stack

Arrange the cargo in a square or rectangular shape, if possible, to make it 

easy to cover and to calculate the volume of the stack.

An even-shaped stack is easier to tarp.

By arranging the stack evenly and with space between pallets or 

cartons, the fumigant will be effectively distributed.

The height of the stack should be uniform so dosage can be calculated 

accurately.

The maximum size for an enclosure is 25,000 ft3

Contact the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT to get approval for any 

enclosures larger than 25,000 ft3

For very large enclosures, it may be necessary to add more sampling 

leads or introduce the fumigant at several sites.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-24 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

When the fumigation involves multiple stacks, allow 10 feet of space 

between each uncovered stack; after the stack is tarped, there should be 

approximately 5 feet between enclosures.

Step 3: Padding the Corners

Examine all areas that typically tear tarpaulins, e.g., corners and sharp angles. 

If the sharp angles or corners cannot be eliminated, they must be covered with 

burlap or other suitable padding (e.g., old tires or cloth).

Step 4: Covering the Stack

After covering the stack, check the tarpaulin for rips, tears, and holes. Look at 

the taped areas and verify they are properly sealed. Have the fumigator repair 

all holes.

The tarpaulin must be made of a tough material such as vinyl, polyethylene 

plastic, or coated nylon. The tarpaulins should be a minimum of 2-mil 

thickness; however, it is recommended to use 6 mil tarpaulins whenever 

possible.

The tarpaulin must be large enough to provide a floor overlap of at least 18 

inches around all sides of the stack. Carefully lay the tarpaulin out to prevent 

excess folds or wrinkles along the floor, especially around corners.

Step 5: Sealing the Tarp

The goal in sealing the tarpaulin is to get it to lay flat against the floor to 

prevent gas from leaking out. Seal the tarpaulin with loose, wet sand, sand 

snakes, water snakes, adhesives, or a combination. If there is danger of 

crushing or crimping the gas sampling or introduction tubes, use the loose, wet 

sand. If using snakes, use two rows of snakes along the sides and three rows on 

the corners. The snakes should overlap each other by approximately 1 foot. 

Seal corners by laying two sand snakes around the corner and working the 

tarpaulin until it is flat. To force the tarpaulin against the floor, place a third 

snake on top of the two other snakes to provide additional weight. Loose, wet 

sand can be used in the area where the gas introduction line, electrical cords, 

and gas sampling tubes extend from under the tarpaulin.

Step 6: Introducing the Gas

Depending upon the type of AP or MP formulation used, the gas may be 

dispensed in a variety of methods. Follow the application procedures from the 

manufacturer’s label for detailed instructions on gas introduction.

For ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS®, install the gas introduction line(s) at 

ground level on the floor or secured onto a pallet. These lines should not be 

located in or attached to commodity package and should be secured to 

eliminate the movement of the line(s). Direct the discharge toward the center 

of the space being treated and away from equipment, if possible. For tarpaulin 
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-25

enclosures, control the dispensing rate of the gas. The tarpaulin can become 

damaged and sealing undone if the fumigant is dispensed at high speeds. For 

small enclosures, a cylinder pressure less than 100 psig is recommended. A 

regulated dispenser with a pressure regulator and flow restricting nozzles are 

options to control the rate of the fumigant.

Place the fumigant cylinder with gas introduction line on a calibrated scale and 

take an initial weight reading. Ensure the gas introduction line is attached to 

the cylinder. After obtaining the correct weight, subtract the dosage to be 

introduced into the enclosure. After introducing the proper amount of gas, the 

scale will be balanced.

When no further fumigant is required to maintain target concentration levels, 

close all cylinder valves, depressurize the dispensing equipment, and 

disconnect all ECO2FUME® or VAPORPH3OS® cylinders. Replace the 

cylinder cap after the valve discharge cap is securely installed.

Step 7: Placing the Gas Sampling Tubes

Place a minimum of three gas sampling tubes for fumigations up to 10,000 ft3. 

Position the gas sampling tubes in the following locations:

Front—low and front of the load, 3 inches above the floor

Middle—center of the load (inside the box with the commodity), midway 

from bottom to top of load

Rear—high and rear of the load, at the extreme top of the load

For fumigations from 10,001 to 25,000 ft3, use six gas sampling tubes. Position 

the gas sampling tubes in the following locations:

Front—low and front of the load, 3 inches above the floor

Lower rear quarter section (inside the box with the commodity)

Middle—center of the stack (inside the box with the commodity), midway 

from bottom to top

Rear—high and rear of the stack, at the extreme top of the load

Upper front quarter section (inside the box with the commodity)

Upper rear quarter section

For approval of fumigations larger than 25,000 ft3, contact the USDA-APHISPPQ-S&T-TMT for instructions regarding the number of gas sampling tubes, 

and for other technical information.

Before inserting into the commodity, cover the end of the gas sampling tubes 

with burlap or wire gauze taped to the tube.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-26 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Use gas sampling tubes of sufficient length to extend from the sampling 

position inside the enclosure to at least 30 feet beyond the tarpaulin. Connect 

all the gas sampling tubes in one area for ease and safety in recording gas 

concentration readings. Do not splice gas sampling tubes. Fix all gas sampling 

tubes securely in place under the tarpaulin and label each one where the gas 

concentration readings will be recorded. By labeling each gas sampling tube, 

concentration readings can be easily recorded.

Step 8: Testing for Leaks

To ensure they are within acceptable levels outside the fumigation area, 

monitor phosphine and carbon dioxide levels at the fumigation site and 30 feet 

from the fumigation enclosure. Phosphine and carbon dioxide levels can be 

detected using chemical-specific colorimetric tubes or electronic monitors, 

e.g., Draeger and PortaSens detection kits. Do not use a Gow-Mac or 

Fumiscope to record gas readings.

The fumigator should leak test all connections and fittings before opening the 

cylinder valve. Instructions concerning cylinder leak detection can be found 

under the section “Poison Gas Hazards–Leak Detection and Repair” of the 

ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® fumigant Application Manuals.

Step 9: Monitoring Gas Concentrations

Take concentration readings within the enclosure using sampling lines 

connected to an APHIS-approved phosphine monitoring device. The 

fumigation does not begin until all of the gas has been introduced. Monitoring 

must take place 30 feet or more from the enclosure.

Phosphine and carbon dioxide levels can be detected using chemical-specific 

colorimetric tubes or approved electronic monitors, e.g., Draeger and 

PortaSens detection kits. To determine if additional gas is needed, check gas 

concentration levels 30 minutes after the fumigant is added and periodically 

throughout the fumigation. Record gas concentration readings on PPQ Form 

429A and in the electronic 429 database at the time intervals prescribed by the 

treatment schedule in this manual.

The 30-minute reading shows the initial concentration and distribution of gas 

and can indicate leakage, incorrect dosage calculation, or error in fumigant 

introduction. 

If the desired phosphine concentration is met before all of the gas is 

introduced, stop the addition of ECO2FUME® or VAPORPH3OS® and check 

all calculations. When fumigating with ECO2FUME®, 200 ppm of phosphine 

will release 7,700 ppm of carbon dioxide.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-27

Preparing to Fumigate Containerized Cargo

Containers require small amounts of phosphine. Therefore, AP, MP, or 

ECO2FUME® fumigant gas (not VAPORPH3OS®) is recommended for all 

container fumigations for which an approved treatment exists.

PPQ does allow the fumigation of nontarped containers provided the container 

can be completely sealed in order to prevent gas loss.

To fumigate containerized cargo, follow Steps 1 through 9 in the previous 

section, Preparing to Fumigate Break Bulk Cargo on page 2-11-20.

Additional Considerations for Fumigating Containerized Cargo

If fumigating a nontarped container:

Close and secure one of the doors

If possible, caulk all joints and drape entire doorway with polyethylene 

sheeting, securing the edges to the inner walls, floor, and ceiling with 

duct tape

Seal all openings and joints

Inspect the roof, floor, and walls for holes and cracks

Containers require close inspection and a great deal of sealing to 

prevent fumigant leakage

Seal all openings with either duct tape or caulking compound

If possible, drape remaining doorway with polyethylene sheeting before 

the door is closed

Close door and secure

NOTICE

Erroneous readings can occur if the monitoring leads become blocked or crimped. It 

would be impossible to install a new monitoring lead during a fumigation treatment; 

therefore, always test monitoring leads before the treatment begins.

In order to detect blocked monitoring leads, follow the procedure below using a 

Mityvac® hand-held pump (for supplier, See Vacuum Pump on page E-1-54.)

1. Prior to fumigant introduction, connect the Mityvac® hand-held vacuum pump to a monitoring lead.

2. Squeeze the handle on the Mityvac® unit. If the lead is blocked, a vacuum will be indicated 

on the vacuum gauge of the Mityvac® unit. For monitoring leads longer than 25 feet, 

squeeze the handle two or three times. The Mityvac® hand-held pump has the capacity to 

attain and hold 25 inches of Hg vacuum and a minimum of 7 psig pressure.

3. Disconnect the Mityvac® hand-held pump from the monitoring lead, and repeat this procedure for each monitoring lead. Connect monitoring leads to the gas analyzer prior to fumigant introduction.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-28 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

If doorway is draped with polyethylene, it may not be necessary to 

seal the door from the outside

If doorway is not draped, seal all cracks, openings, and joints with 

masking tape and caulking compound from the outside

Secure edges to door jams and floor

Placard all doors of the container with the appropriate warnings before 

fumigation begins

If fumigating a tarped container:

If unable to completely seal the container, use a tarpaulin to cover the 

entire container

Use a 4, 6, 10, or 12 mil vinyl, polyethylene plastic, or coated nylon 

tarpaulin

After covering the container with a tarpaulin, check for rips, tears, and 

holes

Examine all taped areas and verify they are properly sealed

Have the fumigator repair all holes

The tarpaulin must be large enough to provide a floor overlap of at least 

18 inches around all sides of the container—carefully lay the tarpaulin out 

to prevent excess folds or wrinkles along the floor, especially around 

corners

Preparing to Fumigate Bulk Commodities

AP, MP, ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® can be used to fumigate any type 

of bulk commodity storage for which there is an approved treatment in this 

manual. These include, but are not limited to, bins, tanks, flat storage, and 

bunkers. The most important aspects of a successful fumigation, as with any 

fumigant, are the degree to which the space is sealed and the assurance that the 

minimum fumigant concentrations are maintained for the required time.

To fumigate bulk commodities, use the procedures outlined in the section, 

Preparing to Fumigate Break Bulk Cargo on page 2-11-20.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-29

Probing

AP and MP Fumigation

When treating large quantities of grain or other bulk commodities, it will be 

necessary to “probe” tablets or pellets into the mass of the commodity for 

adequate distribution. Specially constructed probes made of steel tubing one 

and one-quarter inch in diameter are generally available as described below:

Head Piece—Dosing device and numerical counter to indicate number of 

tablets used

Tubing—Usually in 3-foot sections that can be added to one another to 

provide the desired length

End Piece—Cut obliquely and provided with a hinged flap, closing the 

entrance to the tube

When the tube is inserted into the commodity, the flap is closed and 

prevents the commodity from entering

When the probe is withdrawn, the flap opens due to the slightly larger 

diameter on the flap

The tablets or pellets are then released one at a time as the probe is 

withdrawn

Grain or other bulk or loose commodities up to 30 feet deep can be probed. 

Best results are obtained by probing twice every square foot and as regularly as 

possible. Penetration of phosphine is up to 10 feet below the area in which the 

tablets are placed. When large bulk grain stores are treated, many probes can 

be placed prior to treatment. One head piece can be moved from probe to 

probe, or pellets or tablets can be placed in the tubes by hand (use surgical or 

disposable thin rubber or polyethylene gloves).

Gas generation starts within 4 hours of placing the pellets or tablets (depending 

on relative humidity). Therefore, the whole procedure of pellet or tablet 

placement or tarpaulin covering must be accomplished within this time frame. 

It is possible to work in a probed area if the area is covered with a gas-proof 

tarpaulin. Monitor gas concentrations to determine if toxic levels are 

approached and take corrective action to prevent exposure.

Additional Considerations for Fumigating Bulk Commodities

Based on the size of the structure being fumigated, refer to the 

ECO2FUME® and VAPORPH3OS® Application Manuals for acceptable 

dispensing equipment

For large storage facilities, (>25,000 ft3), consider multiple dispensing 

points to assist in fumigant distribution
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

MP, AP, ECO2FUME®, and VAPORPH3OS®

2-11-30 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Contact the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for a determination on the 

number of sampling lines for large fumigations

If a bulk consignment is in a large storage facility with a high roof, it may 

be better to tarp on top of the grain, rather than seal the roof

When side walls of the facility are not gas impervious, place tarpaulins 

(minimum 6 mm thickness) around the outside of the facility to the 

height of the commodity

If it is known ahead of time that grain or cottonseed will require treatment 

prior to placement in a means of conveyance or storage, properly seal the 

space before loading. Use tarpaulins of at least 6 mm thickness if walls 

are permeable since lighter tarpaulins may tear.

Aeration Requirements

Break Bulk, Containers, and Bulk Fumigations

Following completion of treatment, aerate phosphine-treated commodities 

using either electric exhaust fans or by passive aeration in the open air. 

Personnel are not allowed to enter or reenter fumigated areas until gas 

concentrations are determined to be below the Threshold Limit Values (TLV) 

for phosphine and carbon dioxide. Check ambient air and the air inside the 

box, carton, bin, etc., of the commodity during aeration. Measure gas 

concentration levels with a sensitive gas detection device. Aerate all 

commodities to acceptable tolerance levels (Table 2-11-3). Because they can 

continue to release gas after the initial gas levels have dropped to acceptable 

levels, continue to monitor densely packed commodities. A certified applicator 

must be physically present, responsible for, and maintain visual and/or voice 

contact with all fumigation workers during the initial opening of the 

fumigation structure for aeration. Always follow the aeration instructions 

provided with the fumigant label.
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

Contacts

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 2-11-31

Disposal of AP and MP Residue

Following treatment with AP, a powdery residue, essentially aluminum 

hydroxide, will remain. Collect this material and mix it in a container of water 

to which liquid detergent has been added (2 tablespoons of detergent per gallon 

of water). Bury or deposit the liquid in an approved pesticide disposal landfill.

Following treatment with MP, dispose of the plates by burial in an approved 

landfill or by burning where approved by local ordinances.

Follow the manufacturer’s label instructions for detailed disposal guidelines.

Contacts

Cytec®

Cytec Industries, Inc.

5 Garret Mountain Plaza

West Patterson, NJ 07242

Phone: (973) 357-3100

email: custinfo@cytec.com

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Table 2-11-3 Phosphine Residue Tolerances

Commodity Tolerance of Phosphine 

Residues (ppm)

Minimum Aeration Period 

(hours)

Animal feeds, grains, nuts, 

and dates

0.1 48

Processed foods 0.01 48

Fresh fruits and vegetables 0.01 48

Nonfood commodities <0.3 None

Tobacco <0.3 48
Chemical Treatments Fumigants—Phosphine

Contacts

2-11-32 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
01/2016-132 Treatment Manual 2-12-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Aerosols

Contents

Introduction 2-12-1

10% d-phenothrin 2-12-1

Passenger Compartment Application 2-12-2

Treating Baggage/Cargo Holds 2-12-4

Precautions for Aircraft Transiting Airports at High-Risk for Japanese 

Beetles 2-12-6

2% d-phenothrin + 2% permethrin 2-12-6

Ordering Information 2-12-8

10% d-phenothrin 2-12-8

2% d-phenothrin + 2% permethrin 2-12-8

Precautions 2-12-8

Introduction

The information in this section provides CBP and PPQ officials and 

commercial applicators the procedures and precautions for applying aerosol 

insecticides in aircraft. 

PPQ uses aerosol insecticides to treat for Japanese beetle, Khapra beetle, and 

other hitchhiking pests. Respirators are recommended but not required by the 

chemical labels.

There are currently two aerosols approved for use in aircraft passenger areas, 

aircraft cargo holds, and aircraft pods, Callington 1-ShotTM (2% d-phenothrin + 

2% permethrin) and 10% d-phenothrin.

10% d-phenothrin

The application rate (T409-b-1) is 8 g/1,000 ft3. Without an extender tube, the 

aerosol can is calibrated to dispense 5 grams per second; therefore 8 grams per 

1,000 cubic feet will take 1.6 seconds to dispense. 

! WARNING

Do not subject these chemicals to extreme temperatures.

! CAUTION

10% d-phenothrin is not approved for use in California, except in Federal installations such as military airports.
Chemical Treatments Aerosols

10% d-phenothrin

2-12-2 Treatment Manual 01/2016-132

Apply 10% d-phenothrin in the cargo or passenger areas of the aircraft no more 

than one hour before loading.

The time needed to spray the aerosol is a function the following three things:

Volume (in 1000 cubic feet) of a specific area in the aircraft 

Spray rate of the nozzle (in grams per second)

Required application rate for the pesticide (in grams per 1000 cubic feet)

This relationship is shown in the formula in Figure 2-12-1.

Passenger Compartment Application

Treatment of passenger compartments is under the authority of a compliance 

agreement between PPQ and the airline or other contractor.

Ensure that the compliance holder follows these application procedures:

1. Vacuum the compartment before treatment.

2. Close flight deck windows. 

3. Thoroughly inspect flight deck area and remove any insects. Keep 

windows closed until departure. 

Figure 2-12-1 Formula for Calculating Aerosol Spray Time in Specific Areas of 

Aircraft

EXAMPLE You are supervising the application of 10% d-phenothrin. The volume 

of the aircraft cabin is 10,800 ft3: The required application rate is 8g/

1,000 ft3. The spray rate of the nozzle is 5.0 g/sec.

10,800/1,000 = 10.8 units of 1,000 ft3

8/5 = 1.6 seconds

1.6 seconds x 10.8 = 17.3 or 17 seconds of dispensing time

! CAUTION

Never treat passenger compartments when passengers are inside.

Volume of a specific area in the aircraft Required Application Rate

Spray Rate of Nozzle  --------------------------------------------------------------- = Time Needed to Spray Aerosol
Chemical Treatments Aerosols

10% d-phenothrin

01/2016-132 Treatment Manual 2-12-3

4. Close flight deck door to prevent aerosol from entering the flight deck.

5. Install barrier curtains (i.e. doors, plastic sheets, or prefabricated 

structures) in galley areas to prevent aerosol particles from entering the 

galley area.

6. Outside the galley areas, cover the following items with an impervious 

material, such as polyethylene.

Beverage and food preparation surfaces

Exposed oxygen masks

7. Open doors to bathrooms and carefully inspect. Remove any insects, then 

close bathroom doors.

8. Check aisles and remove all obstacles.

9. Put on safety glasses (and respirator, if desired).

10. Stop all aircraft ventilation systems.

11. Close aircraft entrance doors.

12. Treat at the rates in T409-b-1.

13. Start (perhaps with another applicator) 10 feet from the end of the aircraft. 

While backing slowly through the aircraft, dispense aerosol in a sweeping 

motion with cans pointing upward at a 45° angle. Keep the dispensing 

valve fully depressed. To avoid wetting surfaces, hold the nozzle at least 18 

inches away from all surfaces.

14. When treating passenger aircraft with two aisles, it is recommended to 

have two individuals dispensing the material at the same time. When 

dispensing the aerosol, use a stopwatch, a wristwatch with a second hand, 

or count aloud using the technique 1001, 1002, etc. Accurate timing not 

only ensures the proper amount is dispensed, but also increases the 

likelihood of obtaining an equal distribution. 

15. Exit the aircraft and close all doors.

16. Keep the aircraft closed for 15 minutes post-treatment.

17. After the 15-minute post-treatment period, start the aircraft ventilation 

system. 

18. Ventilate the aircraft for 15 minutes before boarding passengers, crew, or 

ground personnel.

NOTICE

Curtains must be full-length to prevent the entrance of aerosol particles into the galley. If the curtains are not full-length, use other means to seal the entrance. Airlines 

should provide materials, such as polyethylene, to seal galley areas.

! WARNING

The individual who starts the ventilation equipment must wear safety glasses.
Chemical Treatments Aerosols

10% d-phenothrin

2-12-4 Treatment Manual 01/2016-132

19. If aerosol particles are still noted in the air after the ventilation period, 

continue aeration until the particles disappear. 

20. After treatment and ventilation, safeguard the aircraft until departure.

Post-Treatment Cleanup Procedure

Ensure that the compliance holder follows these post-treatment clean up 

procedures:

Do not open flight deck doors.

Do not remove barriers from galleys until catering is completed; insects 

can enter during the catering process.

Reinspect and collect all insects.

Remove covers used to protect specific items outside the galley (e.g., 

drinking fountains).

Thoroughly wash hands, faces, and arms before smoking, eating, or 

drinking.

Maintaining a Pest-Free Condition in the Passenger Compartment

After treating a passenger compartment, ensure that the aircraft is kept pestfree with the following procedures:

Keep the barrier (closure, curtain, or door) from the galley to the inside of 

the aircraft closed until after catering. After catering, thoroughly inspect 

for insects in the galley area.

Monitor the entrance to the aircraft to determine if insects are entering. 

Remove and destroy any insects that enter the aircraft.

Use enclosed walkways to board passengers either from the terminal or 

from the vehicles carrying passengers to the aircraft.

Treating Baggage/Cargo Holds

Whenever possible, treat baggage/cargo holds before loading. Treatment 

before loading allows penetration of the insecticide to cargo areas that become 

inaccessible after loading. 

Loaded aircraft that stand open during the day must be treated, regardless of 

loading time. Insects often fly into and remain in open aircraft.

NOTICE

Military (and other) cargo is often stored outside on pallets for lengthy periods. 

Insects (Japanese beetles in particular) often rest overnight on the cargo pallets. 

Loading the aircraft with infested pallets will infest the aircraft. Therefore, treat the 

aircraft holds containing cargo pallets that have been stored outside and are likely to 

be infested. After treatment, remove all insects.
Chemical Treatments Aerosols

10% d-phenothrin

01/2016-132 Treatment Manual 2-12-5

Treating Loaded Baggage/Cargo Holds

To treat a loaded baggage/cargo hold, ensure that the compliance holder 

follows these application procedures:

1. Ensure that there are no live animals on board before treatment. (If there 

are, remove them (in cages or holding containers) to a protected area, away 

from the treatment environment.)

2. If possible, visually inspect baggage/cargo hold before loading; collect and 

destroy all insects found.

3. If possible, visually inspect all baggage or cargo as it is being loaded. 

4. Put on safety glasses (and respirator, if desired).

5. Treat the baggage/cargo hold at the rates in T409-b-1.

6. In small holds, open the hatch just enough to allow a hand and the aerosol 

container inside; as an alternative, apply through an open porthole, if 

available, in the hatch. Many holds are small; therefore, applicators may 

treat these small areas by standing at the hatch and directing the spray 

either aft or forward.

7. If live animals are being shipped following treatment, keep baggage/cargo 

hold closed for 15 minutes.

8. Open the hold door(s); use a mechanical barrier to protect the treated hold.

9. Ventilate the baggage/cargo hold for 15 - 30 minutes.

10. If live animals are being shipped, check the animals and cages for live 

beetles before loading and then reload the animals.

11. Close hold door(s).

Treating Unloaded Baggage/Cargo Pods

To treat unloaded baggage/cargo pods, ensure that the compliance holder 

follows these application procedures:

1. Select relatively airtight pods in good condition and without hand holes.

2. Put on safety glasses (and respirator, if desired).

3. Slightly open the pod door.

4. Spray for 1 second.

5. Keep pod closed for 15 minutes.

6. Open and ventilate the pod for 15 - 30 minutes.

7. Load baggage or cargo.

8. Close pod.
Chemical Treatments Aerosols

2% d-phenothrin + 2% permethrin

2-12-6 Treatment Manual 01/2016-132

Precautions for Aircraft Transiting Airports at High-Risk for 

Japanese Beetles

The following precautions must be used for aircraft transiting high-risk 

airports.

Keep cargo holds closed except during loading and unloading.

Keep flight deck windows closed.

Seal off the galley(s) if the aircraft is to be catered at the hazardous 

airport. Inspect galleys after catering, but before removing barriers 

separating the galleys from the cabins.

Use enclosed walkways to board passengers. Always keep the enclosed 

walkway tight against the aircraft.

2% d-phenothrin + 2% permethrin

Currently, there is one manufacturer of this aerosol, 1-ShotTM, Callington Inc. 

1-ShotTM is labeled for use only in aircraft.

The application rate (refer to T409-b-3) is 40 g/1,000 ft3. One, 150-gram can 

treats 3,750 cubic feet and takes 75 seconds to dispense completely.

Apply using the following procedures:

1. Calculate the number of cans needed (refer to Table 5-5-7 through Table 5-

5-29 or use the formula in Figure 2-12-1 on page 2-12-2).

2. Prearrange cans in the treatment areas.

3. Dispense partial cans into the farthest parts of the cargo hold before 

dispensing full cans. Carefully remove the locking tab that keeps the nozzle 

depressed using caution not to damage the dispensing mechanism. 

(Figure 2-12-2)

4. Fully depress the nozzle when dispensing.

5. To dispense a full can, depress the spray nozzle on the top of the can until 

the locking tab engages. Once the locking tab is engaged, the can sprays 

continuously until empty. (Figure 2-12-3)

! CAUTION

Do not apply in the passenger cabin area of the aircraft or when passengers or crew 

are present.
Chemical Treatments Aerosols

2% d-phenothrin + 2% permethrin

01/2016-132 Treatment Manual 2-12-7

6. Ventilate the aircraft for 30 minutes before boarding passengers, crew, or 

ground personnel.

Figure 2-12-2 Preparing to Dispense a Partial Can of 2% d-phenothrin + 2% 

permethrin

Figure 2-12-3 Preparing to Dispense a Full Can of 2% d-phenothrin + 2% 

permethrin
Chemical Treatments Aerosols

Ordering Information

2-12-8 Treatment Manual 01/2016-132

Ordering Information

10% d-phenothrin

Currently, 10 percent d-phenothrin is available from USDA-APHIS-PPQ. For 

ordering and shipping information, contact your Field Operations Program 

Manager or the USDA-APHIS-PPQ Quarantine and Policy Analysis staff in 

Riverdale, Maryland.

2% d-phenothrin + 2% permethrin

Purchase 1-ShotTM directly from the manufacturer (Callington Inc.) using a 

micropurchase card. Email the following information to 

orders@callington.com:

Delivery address

Method of payment

Quantity (consider local storage capabilities)

Precautions

Refer to the manufacturer’s labels and material safety data sheets for more 

detailed safety instructions, but in general:

Do not apply when animals or people are present.

Do not smoke or eat during application and not until after washing. Wash 

as soon as possible after application of pesticides.

Remove or cover food, food preparation surfaces, and equipment prior to 

treatment.

The applicator may wear a suitable respirator, approved by the National 

Institute of Safety and Health (NIOSH). 

The applicator may wear goggles or safety glasses if the applicator 

experiences any eye irritation.

Wipe any pesticide residue noted on smooth surfaces after treatment using 

a clean damp cloth.

! CAUTION

10% d-phenothrin is not approved for use in California, except in Federal installations such as military airports.

NOTICE

Supplies are limited.

10% d-phenothrin will be available only until existing supplies are depleted.
10/2020-40 Treatment Manual 2-13-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Dips

Contents

Overview 2-13-1

Safety and Dip Treatment Equipment and Materials 2-13-1

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 2-13-1

Dip Treatment Equipment and Materials 2-13-2

Dip Treatment Procedures 2-13-3

Sodium Hypochlorite (Bleach) Treatments 2-13-5

Bleach Product Formulation Dilution Information 2-13-5

Adjusting pH 2-13-7

Using pH Test Color Strips 2-13-7

Health and Safety When Adjusting pH 2-13-7

Safety Responsibilities 2-13-8

Overview

As with other treatments, chemical dips require careful planning and 

preparation. Make sure you have all the necessary safety and treatment 

equipment and materials ready before you start the dip treatment procedure. 

When you handle pesticides, always comply with the pesticide label 

instructions, and State and local regulations.

Safety and Dip Treatment Equipment and Materials

The following lists include safety equipment (personal protective equipment, 

PPE) and basic material that you will need for dip treatments. However, other 

materials may be required by additional label requirements that are specific to 

the chemical being used.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Always check the label and Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for additional 

requirements of personal protective equipment. The following is a basic list of 

PPE that you will need for dip treatments:

Chemical-resistant footwear (rubber or neoprene boots)

Chemical-resistant gloves (neoprene)

Chemical-resistant headgear for overhead exposure

Chemical-resistant rain suit with hood
Chemical Treatments Dips

Safety and Dip Treatment Equipment and Materials

2-13-2 Treatment Manual 10/2020-40

Protective eye wear (goggles)

Respirator (per label and SDS requirements)

Dip Treatment Equipment and Materials

Always check the label for additional requirements for equipment and 

materials. The following is a basic list of equipment and materials you will 

need for dip treatments:

Fans1

Liquid soap1

Mixing containers and dipping containers must be provided with lids to 

prevent spills during transportation and storage

New boxes (when reconditioning or excess contamination of original 

boxes is not possible)

Newspaper or any other absorbent paper

Packing material1

Pallets1

Pesticides

Plastic bags (4 to 6 mil plastic)1

Shear scissors

1 This equipment will be provided by USDA when available.

NOTICE

A mechanical exhaust is the preferred method of aeration when it is specifically 

installed to remove chemical fumes from the treatment area. Fans may be used if 

they do not cause airborne pesticides to contaminate the treatment facility or the 

breathable air. The flow of air should be across the dip vat/container and away from 

people in the treatment area.

NOTICE

Place plastic backed paper on pallets prior to covering with paper and/or absorbent 

paper to preclude the pesticide being absorbed onto the wood.

NOTICE

Place plastic backed paper on pallets prior to covering with paper and/or absorbent 

paper to preclude the pesticide being absorbed onto the wood.

NOTICE

Pesticides should be fresh (not over 1 year old). Labels and SDS must be attached 

to the pesticide container and all instructions must be followed.
Chemical Treatments Dips

Safety and Dip Treatment Equipment and Materials

10/2020-40 Treatment Manual 2-13-3

Sponges

Dip Treatment Procedures

Step 1: Plan for the Dip Treatment

Before you start the dip treatment, inform the customer (broker/importer) of 

the specific material and PPE that will be needed to perform the dip treatment 

procedure. All required materials and equipment must be available at the time 

of treatment.

Step 2: Designate Restricted Use Areas

Designate the following restricted use areas:

Measuring and mixing area—The measuring and mixing area for the 

specific pesticide(s) must be in a well-ventilated area away from food 

preparation, eating areas, and offices. Areas that contain mechanical 

exhaust systems are preferred.

Plant material dipping area—The plant material dipping area must be 

an area where access is limited by a barricade or warning signs. Areas 

that contain mechanical exhaust systems are preferred.

Plant material drying area—The plant material drying area must have 

proper air circulation and exhaust ventilation. These areas should be 

closed to the dipping area. The route from the dipping area to the drying 

area should be lined with plastic backed absorbent paper or plastic and 

paper to catch excess pesticide solution.

Step 3: Prepare Plant Material

Prepare the plant material for the dip treatment according to the PPQ Treatment 

Manual and pesticide label requirements.

Step 4: Prepare the Pesticide Solution

1. Measure the amount of water required for the treatment.

2. Measure the amount of pesticide required for the treatment.

3. Prepare a pesticide paste as follows:

! CAUTION

Wear PPE and keep the exhaust system running when you are preparing pesticide 

solutions. To minimize your exposure to the pesticide dust or airborne particles, keep 

the pesticide between you and the exhaust.

NOTICE

It is important to use fresh chemicals for every solution. If questions arise during this 

procedure, stop and seek assistance from the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT (305) 

278-4877.
Chemical Treatments Dips

Safety and Dip Treatment Equipment and Materials

2-13-4 Treatment Manual 10/2020-40

A. Add the previously measured amount of water into a clean and empty 

container, for example, an empty can or plastic container.

B. Form a paste (with dry pesticides) by adding the measured pesticide to 

the small amount of water and mix gently.

C. Dilute the paste by slowly adding more water from the previously 

measured water.

D. Slowly add the concentrated solution(s) to the rest of the measured 

water.

4. Add some drops of liquid soap to the solution (soap is used as a sticking 

agent).

5. Mix the final solution by stirring it gently.

Step 5: Dip the Plants in the Pesticide Solution

Dip the plants in the solution for the time required by this manual.

Step 6: Remove the Plants from the Pesticide Solution

Remove the plants from the solution and allow excess solution to drip into the 

dipping container.

Step 7: Dry the Plants

Place the plants on newspaper covered pallets and allow them to dry (make 

sure to space the plants out for maximum drying).

Step 8: Disinfect Original Shipping Containers

Disinfect the original shipping containers with a sponge containing the 

pesticide solution. The plant material may be packed with new packing 

material in a previously used container that has been disinfected.

Step 9: Clean Up the Treatment Area and Equipment

Discard all empty containers, excess pesticides, packing materials, plastic 

bags/backing materials, and newspaper/absorbent paper in compliance with 

instructions on the label and State/local regulations. Decontaminate all 

treatment areas and equipment while you are wearing your PPE.

Step 10: Release the Cargo

After the plant material is dry, release it to the customer or broker if agreed to 

by the airline and if it has been released by Customs.

! CAUTION

Thoroughly dry the plants before releasing them to the customer.
Chemical Treatments Dips

Sodium Hypochlorite (Bleach) Treatments

10/2020-40 Treatment Manual 2-13-5

Sodium Hypochlorite (Bleach) Treatments

Sodium hypochlorite is considered a pesticide and is regulated by the EPA. 

Applicators must follow the EPA label and have it available when applying 

sodium hypochlorite. Each EPA registration has a rate, application method, and 

site. The site being treated must be listed on the label. If the site is not on the 

EPA label, you cannot use the product. 

The applicator must read and follow all precautionary statements on the EPA 

label and associated container. Always refer to the EPA label for use sites and 

dilutions.

Bleach Product Formulation Dilution Information

Refer to the label to determine the concentration (% concentrate) of the sodium 

hypochlorite product you are using. In the example in Figure 2-13-1, the 

percent concentrate is 8.25%.

Determine the total parts of water needed using the formula in Figure 2-13-2.

Figure 2-13-1 Example of % Concentrate From Puma® Label (EPA #5813-100)

Figure 2-13-2 Formula to Determine Total Parts of Water to Prepare a Bleach 

Disinfectant

BleachConcentrate

DesiredFinalDilution

---------------------------------------------------------- 1 Total Parts Water =–
Chemical Treatments Dips

Sodium Hypochlorite (Bleach) Treatments

2-13-6 Treatment Manual 10/2020-40

Table 2-13-1 provides calculated values of common dilution formulations used 

by PPQ. If the bleach formulation and desired solution values are not included 

in Table 2-13-1, refer to the formula in Figure 2-13-2.

EXAMPLE The treatment schedule, T511-1, requires a 0.525% chlorine solution 

(5,250 ppm). The sodium hypochlorite product you are using has 

8.25% active ingredient. 

Calculate the dilution as follows:

[8.25% / 0.525%] - 1 = 15.71 - 1 = 14.71

Do not convert the percentage values to decimals before dividing. 

The final result can be rounded up or down. 

In this example, you would take 1 part of the 8.25% product and add 

15 equal parts of water to make a 0.525% disinfecting solution.

Apply this dilution using any volume. For example: 

 Mix 1 cup bleach with 15 cups water.

 Mix 1 tablespoon bleach with 15 tablespoons water.

Table 2-13-1 Common Products Dilution Ratio to Add to 1 Part Bleach 

Bleach Formulation Desired Solution (PPM) Parts Volume of Water

5.25% 200 262

5,250 9

6% 200 299

5,250 10

8.25% 200 411

5,250 15

8.3% 200 414

5,250 15

8.4% 200 419

5,250 15

8.5% 200 424

5,250 15

8.6% 200 429

5,250 15

10% 200 499

5,250 18

12.5% 200 624

5,250 23

15% 200 749

5,250 28
Chemical Treatments Dips

Sodium Hypochlorite (Bleach) Treatments

10/2020-40 Treatment Manual 2-13-7

Adjusting pH

The bleach solution must be pH 5.5 to 7.0. Use pH test color strip kits to 

determine the pH of the solution. If needed, adjust the pH to 5.5 to 7.0 using 

5% acetic acid (white vinegar) under a fume hood or in a well-ventilated area. 

Avoid a pH lower than 5.5.

Using pH Test Color Strips

Use pH test strips with a range of 0-14 pH with color chart intervals from 1 to 

14. 

1. Remove the test strip from the bottle and recap the bottle tightly.

2. Dip the strip in the bleach solution deep enough to wet the test pad(s) and 

remove according to bottle directions.

3. Remove excess water by shaking the strip once briskly according to bottle 

directions.

4. Hold strip horizontally, pad side up, for 15 seconds according to bottle 

directions.

5. Compare the color of the strip with the color chart on the bottle.

Health and Safety When Adjusting pH

Acidifying sodium hypochlorite solutions to modify the pH may result in 

release of chlorine gas. 

Follow all safety precautions listed on the label. Precautions include, but are 

not limited to:

Respiratory Protection—When exposures exceed the OSHA 8-hour time 

weighted average of 0.5 ppm or the OSHA 15-minute short term 

exposure limit of 1 ppm, an air-purifying respirator with proper chemical 

cartridges or air-supplying respirator must be worn. When exposure 

levels exceed the NIOSH IDLH of 10 ppm, an air-supplying respirator 

must be worn.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)—Wear ANSI-approved safety 

glasses or goggles, chemical resistant gloves, lab coat or protective 

clothing, long pants, and closed-toe shoes.

! WARNING

Chlorine gas can cause severe skin burns and eye damage. It is corrosive to the 

respiratory tract and may be fatal if inhaled. Adverse symptoms may include pain 

and redness in the eyes, coughing, blistering of the skin, and stomach pain. The 

absence of odor is not a reliable indicator of safety. 
Chemical Treatments Dips

Safety Responsibilities

2-13-8 Treatment Manual 10/2020-40

Engineering Controls—Work under a certified chemical fume hood. In the 

field, ensure adequate exhaust ventilation is provided to ensure exposures 

remain permissible exposure levels.

Safety Responsibilities

The PPQ Officer is responsible for the following safety issues:

Make the broker/importer aware of his or her responsibilities as it pertains 

to:

Materials

Personal protective equipment (PPE)

Health hazard and safety concerns when performing the dip treatment 

process

All personnel involved in the dip treatment process are required to wear 

the appropriate and label required PPE while performing the treatment. 

PPQ Officers may need to wear PPE if the dip treatment process area 

prevents them from observing the process from outside the restricted 

area.

Designated dip treatment process areas must be located away from food 

preparation, eating areas, and offices. Make every effort to place dip 

treatment processes in an area containing a mechanical exhaust.

The broker/importer personnel involved with treatments must be aware 

and briefed on the location of the emergency eyewash and all other 

required safety equipment. They also need to be aware of the areas that 

they will be limited to working within and any other specific restrictions 

determined by the PPQ Officer in charge of the process. The PPQ Officer 

monitoring the process should be aware of the procedures to be followed 

in the event of an accidental release of the pesticide or an injury to one of 

the broker/importer’s personnel.

The broker/importer personnel should shower as soon as possible after 

performing a dip treatment. The PPQ Officer should ensure that 

personnel are aware of the location and route to the shower. Guidance 

should also include instruction on how to disrobe and dispose of clothing 

used during dip treatment processes. All contaminated clothing and PPE 

must be removed before entering the shower room. Contaminated 

clothing should be placed in plastic bags and PPE in separate plastic bags.

Inform the broker/importer personnel that clothes worn during treatment 

must be washed in hot water with detergent and that they should be 

washed separately from other clothes.
Chemical Treatments Dips

Safety Responsibilities

10/2020-40 Treatment Manual 2-13-9

Release the plant material to the broker/importer only if they are using or 

provide a vehicle that has a compartment physically separated from the 

cab, for example, a pick-up truck or tractor trailer.
Chemical Treatments Dips

Safety Responsibilities

2-13-10 Treatment Manual 10/2020-40
09/2012-01 Treatment Manual 2-14-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Dusts

Contents

This section for future development.
Chemical Treatments Dusts

Contents

2-14-2 Treatment Manual 09/2012-01
09/2012-01 Treatment Manual 2-15-1

Chapter

2

Chemical Treatments

Sprays

Contents

This section for future development.
Chemical Treatments Sprays

Contents

2-15-2 Treatment Manual 09/2012-01
10/2002-04 Treatment Manual 3-1-1

Chapter

3

Nonchemical Treatments

Overview

Contents

Heat 3-2-1

Cold Treatment (CT) 3-7-1

Irradiation 3-8-1

The nonchemical treatment section of this manual is organized as follows:

Cold

Heat

Irradiation

Use the Table of Contents at the beginning of each section to quickly find the 

information you need. If the Table of Contents is not specific enough, then turn 

to the Index to find the topic and its page number.
Nonchemical Treatments Overview

Contents

3-1-2 Treatment Manual 10/2002-04
06/2008-25 Treatment Manual 3-2-1

Chapter

3

Nonchemical Treatments

Heat

Contents

Introduction 3-2-1

Heat – Hot Water Immersion 3-3-1

Heat – Steam Treatments 3-4-1

Heat – Vapor Heat and Forced Hot Air 3-5-1

Heat – Forced Hot Air – Niger Seed 3-6-1

Introduction

Heat treatments are generally based on maintaining the plant material at a 

specific temperature for a specified time. Heat treatments, as other quarantine 

treatments, are designed to kill plant pests without destroying or appreciably 

devaluing the infested commodity. The following heat treatments are described 

in this section:

Hot Water Immersion Treatment

Steam Treatments

Vapor Heat and Forced Hot Air Treatment

Forced Hot Air – Niger Seed
Nonchemical Treatments Heat

Introduction

3-2-2 Treatment Manual 06/2008-25
02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 3-3-1

Chapter

3

Nonchemical Treatments

Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Contents

Hot Water Immersion Treatment—Fruit Fly Host Commodities Such as 

Mangoes 3-3-3

Principle 3-3-3

Schedules 3-3-3

Procedures 3-3-3

Checklist of USDA-APHIS Minimum Requirements for Hot Water Immersion 

Treatment Facilities: General Requirements 3-3-4

Proposal Submission 3-3-4

On-Site Inspection Option 3-3-4

Facility Design 3-3-4

Electrical and Electronic Components 3-3-6

Wiring 3-3-6

Computers and Microprocessors 3-3-6

Commercial Line Conditioner (Surge Protector) 3-3-6

Electrical Generator 3-3-6

Fruit Sizing Equipment 3-3-6

Boilers and Thermostatic Controls 3-3-7

Adequate Water Heating Capacity 3-3-7

Thermostatic Controls (Set Point) 3-3-7

Multiple Set Point Option 3-3-7

Water Circulation 3-3-8

Temperature Sensors 3-3-8

Type of Sensor 3-3-8

Number of Sensors Required and Their Placement 3-3-8

Tank Access for Temporary Placement of Portable Sensors 3-3-9

Certified Glass-Mercury, Non-mercury, and Digital Thermometer 3-3-9

Temperature Recorder 3-3-9

Automatic Operation 3-3-9

Long-Term Recording 3-3-9

Recording Frequency 3-3-9

Accuracy 3-3-10

Repeatability 3-3-10

Calibration 3-3-10

Range 3-3-10

APHIS-Approved Recorder Models 3-3-10

Approved Strip Chart (Pen) Recorder Models 3-3-11

Approved Data Logger Recorder Models 3-3-11
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Contents

3-3-2 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30

Chart Paper Specifications 3-3-12

Alarm System 3-3-13

Safeguarding the Treated Fruit 3-3-13

Layout and Flow Pattern 3-3-13

Garbage Disposal 3-3-13

Quarantine Area 3-3-13

Pretreatment Warming Options 3-3-14

Post-treatment Cooling Options 3-3-14

Refrigerated Room 3-3-15

Fans 3-3-15

Hydrocooling 3-3-15

Facility Changes 3-3-15

Safety and Health Checklist 3-3-15

Work Plan 3-3-16

Plant Material Not Tolerant to Fumigation 3-3-16

Address for Technical Contact 3-3-17
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Hot Water Immersion Treatment—Fruit Fly Host Commodities Such as Mangoes

02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 3-3-3

Hot Water Immersion Treatment—Fruit Fly Host Commodities Such 

as Mangoes

Principle

Hot water immersion treatment (also called hydrothermal treatment) uses 

heated water to raise the temperature of the commodity to the required 

temperature for a specified period of time. This is used primarily for certain 

fruits that are hosts of fruit flies, but may also be used for nursery stock for a 

variety of pests.

Schedules

Refer to the appropriate section in the this manual for treatment schedules. The 

time/temperature relationship varies with the commodity and pest. Typically, 

the pulp temperature is raised using water heated to between 115 °F and 118 °F 

for a prescribed period of time.

Procedures

Before the start of each treatment, examine the facility for proper 

operation of the heating, circulation, and recording equipment. Examine 

continuous flow equipment (submerged conveyor belt) at the start of each 

day or run.

Commodities subject to size restrictions require a preliminary culling 

procedure to eliminate oversized items prior to treatment.

Conduct all treatments in an approved tank.

Entire treatment will be under general monitoring of APHIS, and may be 

further governed by a signed work plan (for foreign facilities), or 

compliance agreement (for domestic facilities).

Load immersion tanks in a manner approved by the USDA, usually using 

baskets with perforations that allow adequate water circulation and heat 

exchange.

Number each treatment container or lot before placing in the immersion 

tank.

Record the temperature and duration of each hot water dip with an 

automatic temperature recording system.

A responsible employee of the packing company must indicate on the 

printed temperature record the starting time, lot number, duration of 

each treatment, and initial each entry.

An alternative recording system can be used only with prior APHIS 

approval.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Checklist of USDA-APHIS Minimum Requirements for Hot Water Immersion Treatment Facilities: General Requirements

3-3-4 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30

During certification, the average pulp temperature becomes the 

minimum commercial treatment pulp temperature.

During commercial treatments, the “Adjusted Tank Sensor 

Temperature” is used as the lowest treatment temperature. See 

Hypothetical Certification Results: Treatment Tank with Multiple Set 

Points on page 6-5-3 for more information.

Stamp all boxes of hot water-treated fruit, “Treated with Hot Water, 

APHIS-USDA,” together with the numerical designation APHIS has 

assigned to the particular treatment facility.

When treatment is complete, promptly move commodities treated at 

origin to an insect-free enclosure.

Use insect-proof containers, screened or enclosed rooms, doors with 

air curtains, or some combination to maintain commodities insect free 

throughout the shipping process.

Checklist of USDA-APHIS Minimum Requirements for Hot Water 

Immersion Treatment Facilities: General Requirements

Proposal Submission

Follow guidance from APHIS-PPQ Preclearance and Offshore Programs 

(POP) when submitting proposals for new hot water facilities.

On-Site Inspection Option

When the construction is 75 percent complete, the firm can request APHIS to 

make an on-site inspection. This interim inspection is optional. However, a 

final inspection is required, as well as performance tests of the equipment. All 

costs involved must be prepaid by the requesting firm.

Facility Design

APHIS does not provide construction details, but only this list of minimum 

requirements. Design and construction of the hot water facility is the 

responsibility of the owner, in consultation with an engineering firm. 

(Engineering firms and sources of supply are provided in Appendix E on page 

E-1-1). To take into account variations in facility size, availability of materials, 

economic feasibility, and individual preference, APHIS allows a wide range of 

design flexibility.

Although each facility is somewhat unique, there are two basic designs for hot 

water facilities. The two types are referred to as the Batch System (Sometimes 

called “Jacuzzi System”) and the Continuous Flow System.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Checklist of USDA-APHIS Minimum Requirements for Hot Water Immersion Treatment Facilities: General Requirements

02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 3-3-5

Batch System (Sometimes called “Jacuzzi System”)

Most hot water immersion treatment facilities are the batch system type. In this 

system, baskets of fruit are loaded onto a platform, which is then lowered into 

the hot water immersion tank where the fruit remain at the prescribed 

temperature for a certain length of time, then are taken out, usually by means 

of an overhead hoist. In this system, the treatment chart must indicate (by an 

identifiable marking) when a fruit basket is prematurely removed from the 

tank. Other alternatives include a solenoid switch, sensor, or similar device that 

disengages whenever a basket is removed from the treatment tank, or a locking 

device to make it physically impossible to remove the fruit until the treatment 

is fully complete.

Continuous Flow System

In the continuous flow type of system, the fruit are submerged (either loosely 

or in wire or plastic mesh baskets) on a conveyor belt, which moves slowly 

from one end of the hot water tank to the other. Belt speed is set to ensure the 

fruits are submerged for the required length of time. This system requires an 

instrument to monitor the speed of the conveyor belt. This can be 

accomplished by attaching a speed indicator (encoder) to the gear mechanism. 

The belt speed is recorded on the same chart as the time and temperature, and 

also indicates whether the belt is moving or stopped during the treatment cycle. 

Smaller fruits require less treatment time than larger fruits. Therefore, 

conveyor belt speed should be adjustable to accommodate treatments of 

different lengths of time. As an alternative, the belt speed may remain constant, 

but the length of the submerged portion of the belt is adjusted according to the 

length of treatment time required for the particular size of fruit. The conveyor 

must prohibit either forward or backward movement of the fruit during 

treatment (due to flotation).

Some operators believe that treating fruit while it passes through the system on 

a conveyor belt is an advantage. Few new systems of this type were built after 

1990, presumably because mechanical fruit damage (scratching of the peel) 

often occurs if the fruit are not in baskets. The system also occupies much 

more floor space in the plant than a batch system.

Water Quality

The water used for washing, dipping, hydrocooling, or showering the fruit 

should be chlorinated at a level not to exceed 200 parts per million (ppm). This 

level is easier to maintain if the water is first filtered and run through a 

flocculation process to remove organic material that would otherwise bind with 

the chlorine.

The facility should check the water for microbial contamination on a regular 

basis. To maintain sanitary conditions, change water as necessary. Implement 

standard operating procedures to include water change schedules for all 
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Electrical and Electronic Components

3-3-6 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30

processes that use water. To ensure the safety of the fruit, the facility must

clean and sanitize surfaces that come into contact with water, such as wash 

tanks, hot water tanks, and hydrocooling tanks, as often as necessary. To ensure 

efficient operation, routinely inspect and maintain equipment designed to assist 

in maintaining water quality, such as chlorine injectors, filtration systems, and 

backflow devices.

Electrical and Electronic Components

Wiring

Electrical wiring throughout the facility must meet both international, as well 

as local safety code requirements. To eliminate shock hazard, earth grounding 

is required for all electrical wiring located in the vicinity of water. To prevent 

damage, shield wires inside metal or PVC conduit.

Computers and Microprocessors

To maintain accuracy and reliability, place computers and microprocessors in a 

climate-controlled (air conditioned) room. This room should be above tank 

level, provide a clear view of the treatment tank(s), and be lockable. This room 

can also serve as an office for the inspector.

Commercial Line Conditioner (Surge Protector)

A commercial line conditioner is recommended for use with computers and 

microprocessors to provide protection from voltage irregularity (power 

surges), noise reduction, and harmonic distortion.

Electrical Generator

In the event of a power outage and to provide a secondary source of electricity 

to enable continued plant operation, an electrical generator is recommended as 

a backup power supply.

Fruit Sizing Equipment

In the treatment schedule, the duration of hot water immersion depends on the 

particular weight class and variety of the fruit being processed. The inspector 

must visually inspect and weigh the largest fruit until the inspector is satisfied 

that all of the fruit is within the weight class. The weight inspection must

occur for each lot change (orchard or variety) to ensure the accuracy of the 

sizing equipment. No mangoes will be accepted that are over the weight class.

! CAUTION

Periodic monitoring by the facility is critical, because chlorine levels above 300 ppm 

can result in metal corrosion.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Boilers and Thermostatic Controls

02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 3-3-7

It is very important to have accurate sizing equipment that sorts the fruit into 

groups, either by diameter or by weight. (Weight sorting is the preferred 

method.) If the weight range is too broad, recalibrate the equipment.

Boilers and Thermostatic Controls

Adequate Water Heating Capacity

The hot water facility must have adequate water heating capacity (i.e., a 

powerful enough boiler), and accurate enough thermostatic controls to hold the 

water temperature at or above the temperatures prescribed in the treatment 

schedule for the given length of time.

Thermostatic Controls (Set Point)

APHIS requires that the thermostatic controls be automatic. The temperature 

set point(s) are determined and approved during the official performance test, 

and must be high enough to ensure the water in the treatment tank will meet or 

exceed the minimum treatment temperature prescribed for the fruit. Once 

approved, do not tamper with the temperature set points. Temperature set 

points must remain constant for the entire shipping season. However, if the 

operator of the facility requests a change in set points, the inspector should 

conduct a new performance test. If this test is unsuccessful, revert the tanks to 

their prior set points.

Multiple Set Point Option

Managers of some facilities use multiple set points for each tank. The initial set 

point is higher than the other set points. All set points will be selected by the 

facility manager or systems engineer based on results of the preliminary 

performance test.

Verify the set points during the official performance test, and the same 

procedure must be repeated on each subsequent commercial treatment. This 

system works only for tanks that treat only one cage (basket) of fruit at a time.

NOTICE

Tanks are not allowed to have any set point that is lower than the standard treatment 

temperature for the commodity being treated (115 °F in the case of mangoes).
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Water Circulation

3-3-8 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30

Water Circulation

Install a water circulation system in the tank to provide uniform water 

temperatures throughout the treatment process and to avoid the formation of 

cool pockets during treatment. To guarantee that the equipment is not turned 

off during the treatment process, the controls for the circulation pumps or 

propellers must be tamper resistant. For the safety of personnel working in the 

area, shield pulleys on all pumps located within 6 feet of the floor.

After the first 5 minutes of treatment (with the tank sensor at “lowest 

temperature permitted at that set point”), differences in the lowest and highest 

actual temperature sensor readings of more than 1.8 °F may be accepted on a 

case-by-case basis.

Using a flotation barrier, keep the fruit at least 4 inches (10.2 cm) below the 

water surface during the treatment.

Temperature Sensors

Type of Sensor

Permanently install platinum 100-ohm resistive thermal detectors (RTD 

sensors) in the lower third of the tank. The resistance of an RTD sensor linearly 

changes with temperature, whereas thermistors and thermocouples are 

nonlinear and less stable. Major advantages of RTD sensors include long-term 

stability, high signal levels, and overall accuracy of the system. Place the 

sensor unit within the distal 1 inch(2.54 cm) of the sensor rod. The sensor must

have an outer sheath of 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) or less in diameter.

Number of Sensors Required and Their Placement

For continuous flow systems, the minimum number of sensors required is at 

least 10 per tank, which must be spaced throughout the length of the conveyor. 

For batch systems, the requirement is at least two sensors per tank. However, 

in tanks that treat multiple baskets (cages) of fruit, there must be at least one 

sensor per basket position. (A tank with four basket positions, for example, 

would require at least four sensors.) In both the batch and continuous flow 

systems, install sensors in the lower third of the tank.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Temperature Recorder

02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 3-3-9

Tank Access for Temporary Placement of Portable Sensors

The hot water tank must be designed to accommodate the temporary 

placement of numerous portable sensors or probes to be used during the 

performance testing procedure required for certification or recertification. 

During the testing procedure and at the direction of the inspector who conducts 

the performance test, position the temporary sensors throughout the load of 

fruit. The facility is required to purchase and have available 24 portable 

thermistor or thermocouple sensors (each with its own flexible cord at least 10 

feet in length), and a portable temperature monitor that reads to the nearest 

one-tenth of a degree.

Certified Glass-Mercury, Non-mercury, and Digital 

Thermometer

The treatment facility is required to have at least one high-accuracy, waterimmersible, certified mercury, non-mercury, or digital thermometer on the 

premises at all times. This thermometer must be accurate to 0.1 °F (or C) and 

will cover the range between 113 °F to 118 °F (45 °C to 47.8 °C). It will be 

used as the standard against which all sensors are calibrated.

Temperature Recorder

Use an automatic temperature recorder (strip chart or data logger) to record the 

time and temperature during each treatment.

Automatic Operation

The instrument used for recording the time and temperature must be capable 

of automatic operation whenever the hot water treatment system is activated.

Long-Term Recording

The recording equipment must be capable of nonstop recording for an 

extended period of time. Continuous flow systems require recording 

equipment capable of operating for up to 12 consecutive hours.

Recording Frequency

The time interval between prints will be no less than once every 2 minutes. 

Alternatively, a strip chart system can be used that gives continuous color pen 

lines. The numerical print or pen line representing each temperature channel 

(sensor) must be uniquely identified by color, number, or symbol. It is not

necessary to record temperatures from sensors located in portions of the tank 

not in use.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Temperature Recorder

3-3-10 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30

Accuracy

The accuracy of the temperature recording system (i.e., sensors and recorders) 

must be within 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of the true temperature (as verified by a 

certified mercury, non-mercury, or digital thermometer). The temperature 

variation for the control sensors should be as close to zero as possible.

Repeatability

When used under field conditions over an extended period of time, the 

recording equipment must be capable of repeatability to within 0.1 °F (or C) of 

the true calibrated readings. Failure to maintain reliability, accuracy, and 

readability in a previously approved instrument will result in canceling 

approval. The design, construction, and materials must be such that the typical 

environmental conditions (including vibration) will not affect performance.

Calibration

Individually calibrate channels (sensors) against a certified mercury, nonmercury, or digital thermometer reading in tenths of a degree Fahrenheit or 

Centigrade, within the range of 113 °F to 118 °F (45 °C to 47.8 °C). The 

engineering firm that installs the recording equipment must also calibrate it. 

(Calibration equipment often used for this purpose includes, for example, a 

Decade instrument and relay range cards.) Calibrate the sensors at or near the 

fruit treatment temperature (around 115 °F), not at 32 °F.

Range

The recorder must be programmed to cover the entire range between 113 °F to 

118 °F (45 °C to 47.8 °C), with a resolution of one-tenth of a degree. The range 

should not extend below 100 °F (37.8 °C) nor above 130 °F (54.4 °C). If the 

range band of the recorder is wider than this, restrict it (narrowed) with proper 

programming.

APHIS-Approved Recorder Models

Some recorder models currently on the market are not approved by APHIS for 

various reasons. For example, if the recorder only displays the sensor numbers 

and temperatures without making a printout on paper; or if it prints out the 

temperature data only after the treatment has been completed, it is not

approved by APHIS. (These are known as “memory loggers.”) These two 

types of recorder models do not provide an adequate level of monitoring 

during treatment. Also, revolving circular charts are not acceptable because of 

the difficulty in reading fractions of one degree.

Temperature recorder models presently approved by APHIS are listed below. 

They can be either of the strip chart or data logger type. Some have adjustable 

chart speeds. Additional temperature recorder models may be added to this list 

upon petition to the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT. To seek APHIS approval 
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Temperature Recorder

02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 3-3-11

for recorder models not listed, submit the manufacturer’s technical brochure to 

the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for evaluation.

Approved Strip Chart (Pen) Recorder Models

Chessel 346

Honeywell DPR 100A (3-channel capability)

Honeywell DPR 100B (6-channel capability)

Honeywell DPR 100C (3-channel capability)

Honeywell DPR 100D (6-channel capability)

Honeywell DPR 180 (36-channel capability)

Honeywell DPR 1000 (6-channel capability)

Honeywell DPR 3000, version D4 (32-channel capability)

Molytek 2702

Neuberger P1Y

Toshiba AR201

Tracor 3000

Approved Data Logger Recorder Models

ASICS Systems B & C

Chino AA Series

Cole Parmer (32-channel capability)

Contech (10-, 16-, and 32-channel capability)

Model: Smart Seda

Flotek (must be attached to a printer)

HACCP Warrior PTR-4 (4-channel capability)

HAACP Warrior PTR-10 (10-channel capability)

Hidrosoft

Honeywell DPR I00B (6-channel capability)

Honeywell DPR-1500 (30-channel capability)

Honeywell DPR-3000, version D4 (32-channel capability)

HyThsoft v2

IBM-PC (must be attached to a printer)

NOTICE

Strip chart recorders are no longer approved for installation in new facilities or used 

to replace any style of recorder.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Temperature Recorder

3-3-12 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30

Koyo, Model Direct Logic DL 350, with Hidro Soft

Nanmac H30-1

National Instruments (all HTS models and Labview 6.1 software)

NOJOXTEN-BR with software–Automation Studio V 3.09 IEC 61131-3-

ST

Omega OM-205

Omega OM-503

Ryan Data Mentor (12-channel capability)

Tracor Westronics (DDR10)

Chart Paper Specifications

Celsius or Fahrenheit Scale

Temperature can be recorded either in Fahrenheit or Celsius, although 

Fahrenheit is preferred by APHIS.

Scale Deflection

Scale deflection on the strip chart paper must be at least 0.10 inches for each 

degree Fahrenheit, or at least 5 mm for each degree Celsius. Greater width 

between whole degrees, however, is preferred. Between each line representing 

one degree, there must also be finer lines, each representing subdivisions of 

one-tenth or two-tenths of a degree, in the range of 113 °F to 118 °F (45 °C to 

47.8 °C).

Sample Required

Submit a sample of the strip chart or numerical printout made by the recording 

equipment to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT. It should be in the exact format 

to be used at the facility during the treatment cycle. Each symbol on the print 

wheel (or ink color, in the case of strip charts) must correspond to and identify 

the particular sensor that it represents.

Chart Speed

Chart speed for strip chart recorders must be no less than 1 inch for every 5 

minutes of treatment time.

Chart Length

The chart paper must be long enough to display at least 1 entire treatment. 

Continuous flow systems must contain enough chart paper to continuously 

record temperatures for up to 12 consecutive hours.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Alarm System

02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 3-3-13

Alarm System

An alarm is required for all batch (Jacuzzi) systems, in order to notify 

packinghouse employees that a treatment has been completed for a particular 

basket (cage). This system can be an audible noise (such as a horn, buzzer, or 

bell) or a highly visible light attached to a timing device located on the 

equipment that indicates time and temperature. Some facilities use both a noise 

and a light. To avoid “overcooking,” the alarm system alerts the operator of the 

hoist to remove a basket from the tank at the end of treatment.

Safeguarding the Treated Fruit

Layout and Flow Pattern

Design the flow pattern of the fruit moving through the hot water treatment 

process to ensure that fruit waiting to be loaded into the hot water immersion 

tank cannot become mixed with fruit that has already completed treatment. 

Submit a drawing showing the proposed layout of the packinghouse to USDAAPHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for approval.

Garbage Disposal

In order not to attract fruit flies, place cut fruit, culled fruit, rotting fruit, and 

miscellaneous garbage into covered containers and remove from the premises 

daily.

Quarantine Area

Bring treated fruit to an insect-free enclosure immediately after treatment. The 

treated fruit must remain there until loading into insect-proof shipping 

containers. The designated enclosure is usually a screened room. Packing line 

equipment, hydrocooling equipment, and cool storage room (if any), should be 

located in this area, but this equipment is not a requirement. To prevent the 

movement of untreated fruit (accidentally or intentionally) into the insect-free 

quarantine area, enforce effective procedures.

Screening and Other Materials

Ordinary window screen or mosquito netting (at least 100 mesh per square 

inch) is sufficient to exclude fruit flies. Inspect it regularly and repair it as often 

as needed. Solid glass, concrete, drywall, or wooden walls are also acceptable.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Pretreatment Warming Options

3-3-14 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30

Air Curtain

Place on the wall or ceiling prior to entering any quarantine area an apparatus 

that generates a high-velocity wind barrier or air curtain (such as fans or 

blowers and associated air-directing chambers or enclosures such as baffles, 

boxes, etc.). This device must exclude the possible entry of fruit flies into the 

insect-free enclosure. (For facilities approved prior to July 1, 1997, vertically 

hang clear plastic flaps, as minimally required, at the doors to the insect-free 

enclosure.)

Loading of Treated Fruit

When not in use, close doors leading from the quarantine area to the loading 

dock. When loading, truck vans and containers must form a fly-proof seal with 

the exterior wall. Prior to loading, inspect and disinfect truck vans and 

containers. If wooden pallets are used, they must be completely free of woodinfesting insects and bark. Apply a numbered APHIS seal to each container 

before its departure.

Pretreatment Warming Options

Prewarming the fruit is sometimes desirable in order to meet the APHIS 

requirement that all fruit pulp temperatures be at least 70 °F before the start of 

the certification performance test. At the very least, the fruit pulp temperature 

must reach the minimum pulp temperature stabilized during the certification 

test for commercial treatment. After prewarming, take pulp temperatures from 

the mangoes located at the coldest part of the crates and/or baskets. Do not

take the pulp temperatures from the mangoes that are located on the outside of 

the basket or crate.

Post-treatment Cooling Options

Cooling the fruit after hot water treatment is not an APHIS requirement. 

However, from the standpoint of fruit quality, many facilities choose to install 

a system to cool the fruit after removal from the hot water.

Hydrocooling of the treated mangoes is allowed after a waiting period of 30 

minutes following treatment, unless the original dip times indicated in the 

treatment schedule are extended for 10 minutes. Allowing the fruit to simply 

stand for at least 30 minutes after being removed from the hot water tank is 

thought to be helpful in killing immature stages of fruit flies because the 

mangoes complete their “cooking” process during that time.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Facility Changes

02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 3-3-15

Refrigerated Room

The recommended storage temperature for mangoes is between 55 °F and 57 

°F (12.8 °C and 13.9 °C) at 85 to 90 percent relative humidity. These 

temperatures delay softening and prolong storage life to approximately 2 to 3 

weeks.

Fans

APHIS allows the use of fans in the screen room to blow air over the fruit as 

soon as they are removed from the hot water tank (if desired). However, the 

ambient air cannot be less than 70 °F.

Hydrocooling

APHIS allows the use of a cool water tank or shower system, but with the 

following provisions:

During the waiting period and hydrocooling period, safeguard the 

mangoes in a room or tunnel, separate from the hot water tanks

Water temperatures used during hydrocooling must be 70 °F or above

Water used for hydrocooling should be chlorinated (not to exceed 200 

ppm)

Any other chemicals, such as fungicides, are optional, but must be 

approved in advance by the FDA

Facility Changes

Hot water immersion treatment facilities whose construction was approved 

under earlier guidelines can continue to operate with APHIS approval. Newer 

facilities, however, are required to meet the current requirements outlined in 

this checklist, which in most cases are more strict.

Once USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT has formally approved the plans and 

drawings for a hot water immersion treatment facility, the facility can make no

further changes in the equipment without APHIS approval. Any proposed 

changes or improvements must be described in writing (with accompanying 

drawings, if necessary) and must be approved by APHIS in writing. Examples 

of proposed changes include adding additional treatment tanks, adding a cold 

storage room, and changing the model of the temperature recorder.

Safety and Health Checklist

Adequate lavatory

Admission of children or unauthorized persons into the treatment and 

packing areas is prohibited if not accompanied by a responsible employee
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Work Plan

3-3-16 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30

Approved safety ladders or walkways (catwalks, etc.) for observing 

treatment tank operations

Electric power meets safety code requirements

Electrical wiring, including switches and other connections, contained 

in metal or PVC conduit and grounded to prevent electrical shock

Engines, pulleys, drive belts, and other hazardous moving parts, if located 

within 6 feet of floor level, guarded with a safety shield or barrier

Fire extinguisher located near the boiler

First aid kit located near moving machinery

Hard hats for workers and visitors must be worn in the treatment and 

loading areas (optional if not required by local regulations)

Steam and hot water pipes insulated or otherwise protected

Sufficient lighting provided in working areas

Work Plan

A Work Plan is a formal agreement signed by a representative of each 

treatment facility in a particular country, the Agriculture Ministry of the host 

government, and by USDA-APHIS. Work Plans govern the day-to-day 

operations of each facility and can be improved from one year to the next. 

Work Plans usually contain additional provisions not included in this checklist.

Fruit exporters are required to operate under general APHIS monitoring and to 

be in full compliance with all APHIS regulations as outlined in detail in the 

current Work Plan. The operator of the facility, as well as the inspector 

assigned to the facility, should each keep a copy available to resolve any 

disputes.

Plant Material Not Tolerant to Fumigation

Propagative material may be free from visible pests, but certain pathogens may 

cause undetectable symptoms.

Hot water dip treatment (52 °C/125.6 °F for 30 minutes), combined with hand 

removal of visible pests is effective against numerous pests. See T201-p-4 

Plant Material Not Tolerant to Fumigation on page 5-3-9 for a list of pests 

controlled. 

Operational procedures and equipment specifications are under development.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Address for Technical Contact

02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 3-3-17

Address for Technical Contact

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Hot Water Immersion

Address for Technical Contact

3-3-18 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30
07/2019-26 Treatment Manual 3-4-1

Chapter

3

Nonchemical Treatments

Heat – Steam Treatments

Contents

Principle 3-4-1

Steam Pressure Sterilization 3-4-1

Loose Masses of Material 3-4-2

Closely Packed Material 3-4-2

Steam Jet Method 3-4-3

Principle

Steam at a temperature of 212 °F will destroy most pathogenic microorganisms 

of the common vegetative forms or the spore types when in the growing or 

vegetative state in a short period of exposure. Some spores, however, are much 

more resistant and will withstand prolonged periods of exposure to steam at 

atmospheric pressure. Saturated steam at temperatures of 240 °F to 248 °F (10 

to 15 lbs. pure steam pressure) will destroy the most resistant spores in a brief 

interval of exposure. However, near-complete air discharge from the autoclave 

or steam chamber is necessary. When steam is admitted to a chamber from 

which the air is completely evacuated, the temperature of the steam throughout 

the chamber will advance at once to the maximum range that can be attained 

for the pressure carried. If air remains in the chamber, the ultimate temperature 

will be reduced dependent upon the quantity of air remaining. Refer to a 

recording or indicating thermometer for correct chamber temperature-pressure 

relationships.

Detailed operational procedures and equipment specifications are under 

development.

Steam Pressure Sterilization

Live steam is introduced into a closed chamber containing the material to be 

treated until the required temperature and pressure are indicated. The 

temperature/pressure relationship is maintained at or above this point for the 

required exposure period. The exposure period will depend on the nature of the 

material, quantity, and its penetrable condition.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Steam Treatments

Steam Pressure Sterilization

3-4-2 Treatment Manual 07/2019-26

Loose Masses of Material

For loose masses of material, which permit rapid and complete penetration of 

steam to all parts of the mass, no initial vacuum is needed, but air must be 

released until steam vapor escapes, and exposure at 20 pounds pressure for 10 

minutes, 15 pounds for 15 minutes, or 10 pounds for 20 minutes is sufficient.

Closely Packed Material

For closely packed material, such as soil or baled straw, special measures are 

needed to ensure rapid heat penetration to all parts of the material. Baled rice 

straw, for example, is required to have a density of less than 30 pounds per 

cubic foot since penetration at higher densities is too slow to be practical. Soil, 

if in large containers, will not allow adequate treatment under normal 

sterilization exposure periods. Quicker penetration of the steam is obtained by 

first exhausting the air in the chamber to a high vacuum and then introducing 

live steam until the required positive pressure is reached.

Examples of the pressure-temperature relationships are listed in Table 3-4-1. 

The gauge pressure in pounds per square inch corresponds to the temperature 

of saturated steam in degrees Fahrenheit. Zero gauge pressure corresponds to 

an absolute pressure of 14.7 pounds per square inch. The figures are based 

upon the complete replacement of air by steam. If air replacement is not

complete, the temperature for any given pressure will be less than the 

corresponding temperature.

Table 3-4-1 Pressure Temperature Relationships

Gauge Pressure (lbs. per sq. in.) Temperature °F

10 239.4

15 249.8

20 258.8

30 274.1

40 286.7

50 297.7

60 307.4
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Steam Treatments

Steam Jet Method

07/2019-26 Treatment Manual 3-4-3

Steam Jet Method

Live steam from a jet or nozzle is forced into or through a more or less loose 

and open mass of material in such amount and for such period required to raise 

the temperature of all parts of the mass to approximately 212 °F. This method 

takes advantage of the considerable latent heat liberated when steam condenses 

into water. This process does not effect complete sterilization since sporeforming bacteria are not always destroyed. Since no spore-forming bacteria 

are known that cause plant diseases, however, and fungi are readily killed by 

the temperatures reached, this process is effective for quarantine purposes if 

the necessary degree of heat is generated in all parts of the material.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Steam Treatments

Steam Jet Method

3-4-4 Treatment Manual 07/2019-26
12/2015-130 Treatment Manual 3-5-1

Chapter

3

Nonchemical Treatments

Heat – Vapor Heat and Forced Hot Air

Contents

Introduction 3-5-1

Procedures 3-5-2

Pretreatment 3-5-2

Loading 3-5-3

Conducting the Treatment 3-5-3

Verifying the Treatment 3-5-3

Post-Treatment Handling 3-5-4

Record Keeping 3-5-4

Common Problems and Failure Points 3-5-5

Introduction

Vapor Heat (VH) and Forced Hot Air (FHA) treatments use heated air to warm 

fruit to temperatures that are lethal to target pests, primarily fruit flies. 

Generally, VH treatment differs from FHA only in the relative humidity of the 

air in the treatment chamber; higher humidity levels may preserve fruit quality. 

Unless otherwise noted, information in this chapter applies to both VH and 

FHA treatments for fruits and vegetables.

Each treatment facility is encouraged to develop automated data collection 

systems designed to automate treatment tracking and ensure that treatment 

specifications are met.

This chapter describes processes for routine (commercial) treatments for fresh 

fruits and vegetables at VH and FHA facilities. See Certification of Forced Hot 

Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities on page 6-7-1 for VH and FHA 

certification and equipment requirements.

VH treatment schedules can be found in T106—Vapor Heat on page 5-2-27. 

FHA treatment schedules can be found in T103—High Temperature Forced 

Air on page 5-2-21.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Vapor Heat and Forced Hot Air

Procedures

3-5-2 Treatment Manual 12/2015-130

Procedures

Before any treatments are conducted at a facility, the authorized PPQ official 

or APHIS designated representative should familiarize themselves with the 

facility and the way the chamber functions. The official should also carefully 

review the treatment schedule for the commodity(ies) that will be treated, and 

any special requirements specified during certification, in the work plan, or in 

the compliance agreement. The PPQ official or APHIS designated 

representative approving the facility has the option to increase the number of 

permanent temperature sensors based on testing performed at the facility.

Pretreatment

Prior to treatment, the PPQ official or APHIS designated representative must

ensure that the facility and the chamber are in good working order and the 

temperature sensors are functioning properly. For the purposes of this chapter, 

the term “sensors” will refer to both permanent and portable temperature 

sensors. Conduct a brief facility inspection, including chamber and equipment, 

before any other steps in the treatment process are taken. During this 

inspection, the official verifies that all safeguarding and quarantine measures 

are in place and that there are no obvious problems that may affect the 

treatment. If any deficiencies are found, correct them prior to treatment. After 

the inspection, the official will assist facility personnel in the calibration of the 

temperature sensors. See Calibrating the Sensors on page 6-7-4 for calibration 

procedures.

Before treatment, the official ensures that the commodity meets the 

requirements specified in this manual, the certification conditions, the work 

plan, and/or the compliance agreement. These requirements generally include:

Fruit size and weight requirements: Verify the process and/or 

equipment used to sort the fruit by measuring or weighing the fruit that is 

to be treated. Weigh and measure the largest fruit per treatment lot. If fruit 

are found that do not meet the size and weight requirements, evaluate the 

sorting process and/or equipment and resort the fruit.

Fruit pulp temperature: There are no specific pretreatment fruit pulp 

temperature requirements. However, the temperature of the fruit pulps 

within the treatment lot should not vary by more than 3.0 °C (5.0 °F). The 

PPQ official verifies that the pulp temperatures meet this requirement 

prior to treatment.

Pest inspection: The PPQ official conducts pest inspections required by 

the work plan and/or compliance agreement.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Vapor Heat and Forced Hot Air

Procedures

12/2015-130 Treatment Manual 3-5-3

Loading

Load the fruit into containers (crates, lugs, or bins) according to the 

requirements in the certification conditions or work plan. Generally, these 

requirements will indicate whether or not the fruit must be sorted and the 

volume of fruit allowed in each container.

Load the containers onto pallets or into cabinets according to the requirements 

in the certification conditions or work plan. These requirements may specify 

that containers with larger fruit must be located in the colder areas of the stack, 

or that certain layers of containers are left empty when partial loads are treated.

The sensors are placed in the largest fruit in the treatment lot as it is being 

loaded into the containers. Insert the tip of the sensor into an area of the fruit 

pulp that will take the longest to reach treatment temperature. The PPQ official 

or APHIS designated representative monitors the placement of the sensors and 

verifies that the probes are placed in the locations required by the certification 

conditions.

Conducting the Treatment

After all the fruit is loaded into the containers and onto the pallets, and the 

sensors are properly installed into the heaviest fruit, load the fruit into the 

chamber. Close and lock the chamber doors to prevent accidental openings. 

The PPQ official or APHIS designated representative (and the NPPO official, 

if required by the work plan or compliance agreement) must initial the 

treatment temperature record and the chamber operator can then initiate the 

treatment.

During the treatment, the PPQ official or APHIS designated representative 

must monitor the sensor data to ensure the treatment is proceeding in the 

approved manner. The official must also check the chamber for leaks or other 

problems during the treatment.

Verifying the Treatment

The PPQ official or APHIS designated representative must review the 

treatment temperature record after the treatment is complete. The official must

ensure that the temperature and recording interval requirements have been met. 

Additionally, the official must verify that the requirements for the duration of 

the run up and dwell times are conducted according to the treatment schedule. 

Time requirements for the run up and dwell times are continuous. Once the 

official determines that all the treatment requirements are met, the official 

must sign and date the treatment record.

Important Treatment Terminology

The following terms are referred to in the treatment schedules:
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Vapor Heat and Forced Hot Air

Record Keeping

3-5-4 Treatment Manual 12/2015-130

Heat up time: the minimum time allowed for all the temperature probes 

to reach the prescribed minimum pulp temperature (may also be referred 

to as the approach or run-up time)

Heat up recording interval: the time interval required for recording 

temperatures during the heat up time

Minimum air temperature: the minimum temperature required for the 

air in the chamber

Minimum pulp temperature at end of heat up: the minimum 

temperature required for all fruit pulp temperature probes

Dwell time: the length of time all pulp temperature probes must maintain 

the minimum pulp temperature

Dwell recording interval: the time interval required for recording 

temperatures during the dwell time

Cooling method: optional and may be either hydrocooled or air cooled

Post-Treatment Handling

After the treatment is complete, move the fruit from the chamber into the 

quarantine area. Cool the fruit according to the requirements listed in the 

treatment schedule.

Record Keeping

Keep all treatment records at the treatment facility for 1 year after treatment. 

The facility must also maintain a record of all problems and/or breakdowns, 

and any maintenance performed on the chamber. All the records listed above 

must be made available to the PPQ official upon request.

Table 3-5-1 Example of a Treatment Schedule

Heat Up Time: 4 hours

Heat Up Recording Interval: 5 minutes

Minimum Air Temperature: N/A

Minimum Pulp Temperature at End of Heat Up: 47.2 °C/117.0 °F

Dwell Time: 5 minutes

Dwell Recording Interval: 5 minutes

Cooling Method: Forced air or Hydrocooled

NOTICE

“N/A” in any of the requirements in the Treatment Schedule indicates that PPQ has 

no requirement.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Vapor Heat and Forced Hot Air

Common Problems and Failure Points

12/2015-130 Treatment Manual 3-5-5

Common Problems and Failure Points

If the temperature recording intervals and minimum temperature requirements 

are not met, the treatment fails. The only exception to this is that a sensor may 

record no data for a single recording interval during the treatment. (Note: This 

does not mean the temperature may be out of range, only that the data may be 

missing.) After reviewing the treatment data, the official should sign and date 

the data. 

If a problem arises during treatment, such as a sensor stops recording data, 

records above other sensors, appears to be broken, or if the temperature drops 

below the required temperature, the following actions must be taken:

After the treatment is complete, test the sensor according to calibration 

procedures.

If the sensor passes calibration, then there was a problem with the 

treatment. FAIL the treatment.

If the sensor fails calibration, then there was a problem with the sensor. 

PASS the treatment. If there is more than one failed sensor, then fail 

the treatment.

The facility manager must determine if the fruit will be re-treated or will be 

removed from the chamber into the non-quarantine area.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Vapor Heat and Forced Hot Air

Common Problems and Failure Points

3-5-6 Treatment Manual 12/2015-130
08/2011-66 Treatment Manual 3-6-1

Chapter

3

Nonchemical Treatments

Heat – Forced Hot Air – Niger Seed

Contents

Heat Treatment of Niger Seed (Guizotia abyssinica) 3-6-1

Minimum Requirements for Heat Treatment Facilities 3-6-1

Treatment Requirements 3-6-2

Documentation Requirements 3-6-2

Sanitation and Pest Control 3-6-2

The Plant and Warehouse Premises 3-6-2

Containers and Packaging 3-6-2

Waste Disposal 3-6-2

Post Treatment Requirements 3-6-2

Heat Treatment of Niger Seed (Guizotia abyssinica)

Niger seed is imported into the United States for bird feed and is frequently 

contaminated with Federal noxious weed seeds. In order to devitalize the weed 

seeds, the Niger seed is required to undergo heat treatment in accordance with 

T412 treatment schedule. Conduct the heat treatment in a foreign or domestic 

APHIS-certified treatment facility.

Minimum Requirements for Heat Treatment Facilities

If the facility is located in the United States, it must be constructed near the 

port environs (10 miles or less). The facility and equipment must adhere to the 

following requirements:

All facilities must comply with treatment schedule T412-a in this 

Treatment Manual. See Certification of Niger seed Treatment Facilities

on page 6-6-1 for certification guidelines.

All facilities must possess a current work plan or compliance agreement.

Facility operators or managers must record the following information on 

each treatment recorder printout:

Date

Lot number

Operator signature
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Forced Hot Air – Niger Seed

Sanitation and Pest Control

3-6-2 Treatment Manual 08/2011-66

Treatment Requirements

The Niger seed heat treatment schedule requires the seed be treated for a 

minimum of 15 minutes at 248 °F/120 °C. Determine if the treatment standards 

are met using the following guidance:

Examine treatment recorder printout for completion of treatment and 

verify that the Niger seed was kept at the target temperature for the 

required time.

If records indicate that any temperature reading fell below 248 °F/120 °C 

for 15 minutes, nullify the treatment for that specific lot, correct the 

reason for the faulty treatment, and re-treat the seed.

Documentation Requirements

Maintain a log book of all Niger seed treatments.

Maintain records of equipment breakdowns and repairs, changes, or 

modifications to the treatment process, facility, and/or equipment.

Sanitation and Pest Control

The Plant and Warehouse Premises

Require the facility manager to ensure that there is a cleaning and control 

program in the plant and/or warehouse, and that there are no potential breeding 

grounds for pests on the premises.

Containers and Packaging

Require the facility manager to ensure that seed containers and/or packaging, 

whether used or new, is checked and cleaned for pests so that the packages are 

not a source of pests and contamination.

Waste Disposal

To minimize contamination risk and eliminate pest breeding sites, require the 

facility manager to implement a regular waste program for waste and 

nonconforming or infested produce.

Post Treatment Requirements

After treatment and cooling, immediately place the Niger seed in new bags or 

in a storage area only for treated seed. Dispose of the original bags in a manner 

that will eliminate regulated pests. PPQ will:

Sample treated seeds for actionable contaminants according to guidelines 

in the work plan or compliance agreement, or by conducting random 

inspections and TZ (tetrazolium) tests as needed at the port of entry.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Forced Hot Air – Niger Seed

Post Treatment Requirements

08/2011-66 Treatment Manual 3-6-3

Label each treated sample with the following information:

Bill of lading number

Container and lot number

Date the sample was taken

Date the seeds were treated

Origin of seed

Vessel name and nationality

Send the sample to an APHIS-approved testing facility

When the laboratory results are available, send the results with the information 

above to the address identified on the work plan or compliance agreement.
Nonchemical Treatments Heat – Forced Hot Air – Niger Seed

Post Treatment Requirements

3-6-4 Treatment Manual 08/2011-66
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-7-1

Chapter

3

Nonchemical Treatments

Cold Treatment (CT)

Contents

Intransit Cold Treatment in Conventional Vessels, Self-Refrigerated (Integral) 

Containers, and Warehouses 3-7-2

Packaging—Pallet Covers 3-7-2

Precooling Procedures 3-7-2

Initiating Intransit Cold Treatment in Vessels and Containers 3-7-3

Verification of Temperature Recording Equipment 3-7-3

Calibration of Temperature Sensors 3-7-4

Loading of Commodity in Conventional Vessels and Self-Refrigerated 

(Integral) Containers—General 3-7-6

Conventional Vessels 3-7-8

Placement of Temperature Sensors 3-7-8

Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers 3-7-9

Secure the Load 3-7-10

Treatment Requirements 3-7-11

Prepare Documents 3-7-11

Distribution of Documents 3-7-11

Clearance of Cold Treated Consignments 3-7-12

Conventional Vessels 3-7-12

PPQ Form 556, InTransit Cold Treatment Report 3-7-13

Cold Treatment in Refrigerated Warehouses 3-7-16

Initiating the Cold Treatment 3-7-16

Placement of Temperature Sensors 3-7-17

Quick Freeze Guidelines 3-7-17

Contact Information 3-7-18
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Intransit Cold Treatment in Conventional Vessels, Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers, and Warehouses

3-7-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Intransit Cold Treatment in Conventional Vessels, Self-Refrigerated 

(Integral) Containers, and Warehouses

The use of sustained cold temperatures as a means of insect control has been 

employed for many years. Rigid adherence to specified temperatures and time 

periods effectively eliminates certain insect infestations. Treatments may be 

conducted in warehouses, refrigerated compartments of transporting vessels 

(Conventional Vessels), containers cooled by the ship’s refrigeration system 

(Container Vessels), or by individually refrigerated containers (SelfRefrigerated/Integral Containers). Information concerning conventional 

vessels, self-refrigerated containers, and warehouses is found in this chapter.

Only certified USDA representatives have permission to conduct warehouse, 

vessel, and/or container approval tests under the general guidance of USDAAPHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT. Refer to the S&T Intransit Cold Treatment website

for information regarding the testing of specific vessels and/or containers.

Packaging—Pallet Covers

If the pallet is covered, the pallet cover must be approved by S&T. See 

Packaging—USDA-Approved For Cold Treatment on page E-30 for a list of 

APHIS-approved cold treatment pallet covers. Contact ppqtmt@usda.gov for 

approval specifications.

Precooling Procedures

Experience with intransit cold treatments and Computational Fluid Dynamics 

(CFD) modeling of refrigerated vessel compartments show that the fruit must

be precooled at or below the prescribed cold treatment temperature before 

loading. Otherwise, a large quantity of fruit in the middle of large pallet groups 

may require a week or more to reach the cold treatment temperature.

Fruit intended for intransit cold treatment must be precooled to the 

temperature at which the fruit will be treated prior to beginning treatment.

Conduct random fruit pulp sampling in the precooling location prior to loading 

in order to verify that the commodity has completed precooling.

NOTICE

The precooling process cannot be conducted in the intransit cold treatment conveyance unless authorized by the Executive Director of USDA-APHIS-PPQ Plant Health 

Programs.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Initiating Intransit Cold Treatment in Vessels and Containers

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-7-3

Use the following general guidelines for fruit pulp sampling in the precooling 

location:

Pulp temperatures will be taken by personnel authorized by APHIS, which 

includes industry representatives

Take pulp temperatures by probing the fruit on the periphery of the pallet

If pulp temperatures are 0.28 °C (0.5 °F) or more above the 

temperature at which the fruit will be treated, the pallet will remain in 

the precooling location for further precooling

Also, sample fruit pulp temperatures immediately before the fruit is loaded on 

the intransit cold treatment conveyance. Take fruit pulp temperatures by 

probing fruit in the top of the pallet. An official authorized by APHIS will 

sample the fruit pulp temperatures in all sections of the load to verify 

temperatures have not risen appreciably. If the pulp temperatures for the 

sample are 0.28 °C (0.5 °F) or more above the temperature at which the fruit 

will be treated, the pallet will be rejected and returned to the precooling 

location for further precooling until the fruit reaches the treatment temperature.

Initiating Intransit Cold Treatment in Vessels and Containers

For cold treatments conducted in approved vessels and containers, the ship’s 

officers will have already received instructions on the APHIS requirements 

from their owners. However, a discussion by the authorized APHIS official 

with these individuals will provide for better understanding and cooperation. 

Such a discussion should include:

General treatment procedures in accordance with 7CFR 305.6

Stowage arrangement

Temperature sensor and instrument calibration testing

Treatment conditions

Ensure that there is an adequate communication system in place between 

personnel in the compartments and the recording room.

Verification of Temperature Recording Equipment

Approved vessels and containers must be capable of maintaining fruit pulp 

temperatures within the specified CT schedules. To monitor these treatments, 

they must be equipped with a temperature recording device which meets the 

approval of USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT. All approved temperature 

recording devices must be password protected and tamper proof and have the 

ability to record the date, time, sensor number, and temperature during all 

calibrations and actual treatments.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Initiating Intransit Cold Treatment in Vessels and Containers

3-7-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

If APHIS determines that the records and calibrations can be manipulated, the 

vessel and/or container will be suspended from conducting cold treatments 

until proper equipment is installed. Submit any changes to the temperature 

recording and monitoring equipment to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for 

approval before installation in the vessel or container. Compare the existing 

equipment with the equipment listed at https://treatments.cphst.org/vessels/ to 

determine if new equipment has been installed that was not approved by S&TTMT.

Specifications for temperature recording installations and other requirements 

for approval are discussed in Certification of Cold Treatment on page 6-4-1. 

Refer to Appendix E for a list of approved temperature recorders.

Strip Chart Recorder

Data Logger

A sufficient supply of log sheets must be available to provide a continuous 

record of calibration and treatment temperatures. The instrument should be in 

operation for at least 30 minutes prior to calibration tests. Examine a 

completed log sheet printout and the functioning of the visual scanner, the 

printer, and the high limit setting. Check the log sheets for proper format and 

serialization. Activate the temperature set-point for an alarm printout to verify 

that this function is operational.

Calibration of Temperature Sensors

Calibrate all air and pulp temperature sensors in a clean ice water slurry 

mixture that is at 0 °C (32 °F), the freezing/melting point of fresh water.

NOTICE

Since December 31, 2005, strip chart recorders were no longer acceptable 

temperature recording devices. Consequently, by December 31, 2008, there should 

be no strip chart recorders in use for APHIS cold treatment.

Contact USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for approved temperature recording 

instrumentation.

NOTICE

Data logger installations are utilized to record various components of the vessel’s 

operating systems. Temperature recording is only a part of the record produced. 

Under S&T-TMT approval requirements, the log sheets upon which the intransit cold 

treatment is recorded are generally more detailed in design than the standard 

commercial log sheet. They are prepared and serialized to facilitate scanning and to 

provide a level of security against fraudulent records. The USDA log should be 

printed on separate sheets with no other ship data interspersed. Data loggers are 

programmed to print out the temperatures above a set limit in a contrasting color. 

Some instruments print a symbol to indicate this. The limit is set at the time of 

loading to a temperature level that coincides with the projected treatment schedule.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Initiating Intransit Cold Treatment in Vessels and Containers

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-7-5

1. Check individual sensors to verify that they are properly labeled and 

correctly connected to the temperature recorder. This can be accomplished 

by hand warming each sensor when its number appears on the visual 

display panel of the recording instrument. A temperature change, which 

can be observed on the instrument, should occur. If the instrument fails to 

react, the sensor is incorrectly connected or malfunctioning and should be 

corrected by the instrument representative.

2. Prepare a mixture of clean ice and fresh water in a clean insulated 

container.

3. Crush or chip the ice to completely fill the container.

4. Add enough water to stir the mixture.

5. Stir the ice and water for a minimum of 2 minutes to ensure the water is 

completely cooled and good mixing has occurred.

Generally, the ice will occupy approximately 85 percent of the total 

volume of the container, with the water occupying the remaining 

space.

6. Add more ice as the ice melts.

7. Stir the ice water slurry to maintain a temperature of 0 °C (32 °F).

8. Submerge the sensors in the ice water slurry without touching the sides or 

bottom of the container.

9. Stir the slurry mixture again.

10. Continue testing of each sensor in the ice water slurry until the temperature 

reading stabilizes.

11. Allow at least a 1-minute interval between two consecutive readings for 

any one sensor; however, the interval cannot exceed 5 minutes.

The difference between the two readings cannot exceed 0.1 °C.

12. Record at least two consecutive readings on a written calibration report. If 

the two readings are different, test the sensors again and record the 

temperature.

13. Contact an instrument company representative immediately if the time 

interval exceeds the normal amount of time required to verify the reading 

and accuracy of the sensor and recorder system.

The recorder used with the sensors must be capable of printing or 

displaying on demand and not just at hourly intervals.

14. Have the instrument company representative correct any deficiencies in the 

equipment before certification.

15. Replace any sensor that reads more than +/- 0.3 °C (0.5 °F) from the 

standard 0 °C (32 °F).
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Loading of Commodity in Conventional Vessels and Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers—General

3-7-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

16. Replace and recalibrate any sensors that malfunction.

17. Determine the calibration factors to the nearest tenth of 1 degree Celsius.

18. If the temperature recorder microprocessor can be zeroed, tared, or if the 

calibration factors can be otherwise entered into the recorder 

microprocessor for automatic adjustment, this must be done. In this case, 

verify that the adjustment factors have been entered or that the recorder 

was zeroed or tared by the instrument company representative. Enter zero 

as the calibration factor for each individual probe in the online 556 

database <https://treatments.cphst.org//> (if the database is not used, then 

enter zero for each individual probe in the written calibration report that is 

submitted with the consignment). 

19. If the temperature recorder microprocessor cannot be zeroed, tared, or if 

the calibration factors cannot be entered into the recorder microprocessor 

memory (so that they are sustained in memory and can be viewed again 

after all the factors are entered), the calibration factors for each individual 

probe must be recorded in the online 556 database <https://

treatments.cphst.org//> (if the database is not used, then enter the 

calibration factors for each individual probe on the written calibration 

report that is submitted with the consignment).

20. After the calibration factors have been accounted for, no other changes 

should be made to the temperature recorder microprocessor.

21. Refer to the section on Clearance of Cold Treated Consignments for 

complete instructions on entering data into the Form 556 or preparing 

written calibration reports.

Loading of Commodity in Conventional Vessels and SelfRefrigerated (Integral) Containers—General

1. Each compartment or container must contain only one type of fruit loaded 

in one type of carton.

2. Load fruit directly from the precooling area so fruit temperatures do not

rise significantly after loading and during the transfer of the container to 

the vessel.

3. Open the cartons in which the sensors will be located and insert the sensors 

well into the fruit (Figure 3-7-1). The tip of the sensor must not extend 

through the fruit.

NOTICE

In countries with which USDA-APHIS has a cooperative agreement, these activities 

can be conducted by qualified officials from that country. Contact the USDA-APHISPPQ-S&T-TMT for a list of qualified officials.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Loading of Commodity in Conventional Vessels and Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers—General

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-7-7

In the case of small fruit, cover a minimum of two thirds of the tip of the sensor 

using multiple fruit. If, for example, the fruit is grapes, insert the sensor 

directly into the grapes in a shish kebob fashion (Figure 3-7-2). Completely 

cover the probe with the top layer of fruit in the top of the box or carton located 

in the middle of the pallet.

4. Securely close the cartons following insertion of the sensors. If the fruit is 

palletized, it may be necessary to insert the sensor into the fruit from the 

side of the carton. If the side of the carton or box is opened to insert a 

sensor, reseal the opened side of the carton or box using tape.

Figure 3-7-1 Proper Placement of Pulp Sensor within Larger Fruit

Figure 3-7-2 Proper Placement of Pulp Sensor within Smaller Fruit
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Loading of Commodity in Conventional Vessels and Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers—General

3-7-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Conventional Vessels

There are two sensor types used for the compartments during cold treatment.

Ambient air sensors—the cables which are attached to the ceiling of the 

compartment should be long enough to extend from the ceiling to the 

floor. Place the sensors on the center line of the vessel approximately 30 

centimeters from the ceiling. Attach the sensors in such a way that they 

do not touch the bulkhead and are protected from damage from the cargo. 

One sensor must be located on the fore and aft bulkheads of each 

compartment.

In the case of twin deck compartments, two sensors are required in the 

upper compartment plus one sensor in the lower compartment. Place the 

lower sensor on the bulkhead furthest from the cooling unit. Ensure that 

all sensors are readily detachable and stowed in compartments to protect 

from damage when not in use.

Fruit pulp sensors—the cables which are attached to the side walls of the 

compartment must be distributed throughout the compartment so that all 

areas of the compartment can be reached. The cables should be long 

enough to extend from the hold walls to 3 meters beyond the center line 

of the ship hold.

Placement of Temperature Sensors

All of the sensors for conventional vessels must be located at the mid-level of 

the pallets as depicted in Figure 3-7-3. The black circles represent pulp 

sensors.

NOTICE

Hanging decks, hatch coamings within vessels, and double-stacking of pallets 

are not approved for intransit cold treatment. The treatment will not begin until all 

double-stacked pallets are reconfigured into a single-stack pallet arrangement and 

any pallets located in hanging decks or hatch coamings are removed.

Contact USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for more information regarding hatch 

coamings or hanging decks for particular vessels.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Loading of Commodity in Conventional Vessels and Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers—General

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-7-9

Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers

When loading refrigerated containers, place the warmest fruit in the last 

quarter of the load (near the back doors of the container), completely cover the 

floor and ensure that the load is of uniform height.

Place a numbered seal on the loaded container. This must not be removed until 

the load has been cleared at the port of destination.

Use a minimum of three pulp sensors. Place all sensors as far into a box of fruit 

as possible. Use Figure 3-7-4 as a general guideline for sensor placement.

Place the first sensor, labeled USDA1, in a box at the top of the stack of 

fruit nearest to the air return intake.

Place the second sensor, labeled USDA2, slightly aft of the middle of the 

container, halfway between the top and bottom of the stack.

Figure 3-7-3 Fruit Stack with Middle Row Temperature Probe Placement

NOTICE

It is highly recommended that more temperature sensors be installed than the 

minimum number required for each refrigerated compartment. If a sensor 

malfunctions during a treatment, the certified USDA representative has the option of 

disregarding it, providing that an additional working sensor is present, and the 

functional sensors were appropriately placed, certified, and calibrated. Otherwise, 

the entire treatment must be repeated for the fruit in that compartment.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Loading of Commodity in Conventional Vessels and Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers—General

3-7-10 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Place the third sensor, labeled USDA3, one pallet stack in from the doors 

of the container, halfway between the top and bottom of the stack.

Secure the Load

Place a piece of cardboard that extends from the front edge of the second to last 

pallet row to the back doors on the container floor before the last pallet row is 

loaded. Once the cardboard is installed properly, load the last pallet row so the 

pallets rest on top of the cardboard. Place a second piece of cardboard 

perpendicular to the first piece of cardboard and staple to the cartons in the last 

pallet row (Figure 3-7-5). The placement of the cardboard between the back 

doors of the container and the last row of pallets aids in maximizing air flow 

through the pallets. Complete this procedure for all pallets in the last pallet row 

of the container.

Figure 3-7-4 40-foot Refrigerated Container with 18 Pallets of Fruit (not drawn to scale)

Figure 3-7-5 Proper Placement of Cardboard Between the Last Pallet Row of Fruit and the Back Doors 

of the Container
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Prepare Documents

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-7-11

Treatment Requirements

Temperatures must be recorded at intervals no longer than 1 hour apart. Gaps 

of longer than 1 hour may invalidate the treatment or cause treatment failure.

Fruit pulp temperatures must be maintained at the temperatures specified in 

the treatment schedule with no more than 0.39 °C (0.7 °F) variation in 

temperature between two consecutive hourly readings. Failure to comply with 

this requirement may result in treatment failure.

The time required to complete the treatment begins when all temperature 

probes reach the prescribed treatment schedule temperature.

Prepare Documents

Complete the following PPQ forms and worksheets:

“Calibration of Temperature Probes” record showing the temperature 

readings as taken from the temperature chart or log sheet during the 

calibration testing. Record readings to the nearest tenth of one degree. 

When the loading of each compartment has been completed, obtain the 

temperature reading of each fruit probe from the temperature recorder and 

record on this form.

“Location of Temperature Sensors” record to show the actual position of 

each fruit temperature sensor. (See sample form in Appendix A.) This can 

be accomplished by a written description or by a diagrammatic sketch. 

Include compartment loading start and end times and dates on the form.

PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate (for APHIS pre-inspected fruit)

Shipper’s manifest containing the quantity and kind of commodity

Distribution of Documents

Conventional Vessels and Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers

Place the following documents in a sealed envelope and give to the Captain for 

presentation to the clearance official at the port of arrival.

Original “Calibration of Temperature Probes”

Original “Location of Temperature Sensors”

For reference purposes, present the Captain with the following documents:

Copy of the “Calibration of Temperature Probes”

Copy of the “Location of Temperature Sensors”
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Clearance of Cold Treated Consignments

3-7-12 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Send copies of all documents to the clearance official at the port of arrival and 

to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT.

Clearance of Cold Treated Consignments

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT has developed electronic versions of all 

required documentation for containerized, intransit cold treatments (not

vessel). PPQ officials must use the 556 Cold Treatment database to clear all 

containerized, intransit cold treatments. Contact ppqctis@aphis.usda.gov to 

request access and training.

Off-loading of self-refrigerated containerized fruit that is under treatment must

be accomplished rapidly. Containers must be off-loaded and treatment 

reconvened within 2 or 3 hours from the time the container was disconnected 

from the refrigerating unit. The pulp sensors should never exceed the 

maximum allowable treatment temperature.

Observe the stacking pattern. Double stacking is not permitted. Do not release 

the consignment if the pallets have been double stacked.

Conventional Vessels

The “Calibration of Temperature Sensors” and “Location of Portable Sensors” 

documents from the country of origin should have been received at the port of 

entry prior to the arrival of the carrying vessel.

The document, “Calibration of Temperature Sensors,” is required for all 

consignments and includes information regarding the loading date and location 

of temperature sensors within the commodity, as well as calibration correction 

factors for every sensor.

Refer to the S&T Intransit Cold Treatment website to familiarize yourself with 

the compartment layout.

Check the documents and any accompanying correspondence for comments 

relating to deficiencies noted at origin. The documents must bear the signature 

of an APHIS-approved official or of an authorized official of the exporting 

country. A list of authorized names and signatures for each country is on file at 

S&T-TMT and is available upon request.

Inform shipping line officials and pier supervisors of the quarantine safeguards 

to be observed pending clearance. The authorized APHIS official boarding the 

vessel must have several calibrated thermometers.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Clearance of Cold Treated Consignments

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-7-13

PPQ Form 556, InTransit Cold Treatment Report

Complete PPQ Form 556, InTransit Cold Treatment Report. Record the date 

and time of completion of each compartment and the officer’s signature on the 

temperature chart or log sheet. Do not add fruit to the compartment after 

loading has been completed.

Complete the entries on the PPQ Form 556 during the actual performance of 

each step of the clearance procedure. The PPQ Form 556 instructions provide 

for a progressive clearance in the event that treatments are not completed 

before a vessel sails for a second U.S. port.

The Officer responsible for a U.S. vessel is typically the Chief Engineer or 

Reefer Engineer. The Officer responsible for a Foreign Flag vessel is typically 

the Chief Officer or Captain.

Inform the ship’s officer to withhold discharging the treated commodity until 

clearance has been completed. Obtain the clearance officer’s copy of the 

calibration documents from the ship’s officer (Record in Blocks 1-6 and 10).

Proceed to the data logger with the ship’s officer and retrieve a temperature 

printout.

Review the temperature chart.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Clearance of Cold Treated Consignments

3-7-14 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

The vessel is permitted to store logged temperatures on magnetic media 

instead of printed on paper. However, the stored data must be printed in the 

presence of the authorized APHIS official.

Assemble log sheets so that a review can be made starting at the beginning of 

the temperature record. Check the calibration record; compare the actual 

calibration readings on log sheets with the calibration data on the calibration 

document (record in Block 23).

NOTICE

If the initial treatment period is broken because of excessive temperatures, failure of 

the recorder, or improper procedure, and the treatment is later restarted, enter the 

date and time of restart on the second line of item 28. 

Air temperatures may occasionally exceed treatment temperatures during defrost 

cycles; however, fruit temperatures should not rise appreciably during this time and 

must not exceed the temperature listed in the schedule. During non-defrost times, 

the temperatures of the air sensors should never exceed the maximum allowable 

treatment temperature. 

For each compartment of a hold, the hourly sensor printouts will be examined by a 

PPQ official at the port of entry. Based on these records, the PPQ official will make a 

determination as to whether to accept the treatment as satisfactory. In case of 

dispute, the ultimate decision will be made by the Officer in Charge (PPQ), who will 

take all factors into consideration. 

Occasionally, for example, there are cases in which one or two sensors in a 

compartment mechanically malfunctioned during the voyage due to situations 

beyond the ship’s control (e.g., rough seas). This is generally excusable, as long as 

the other sensors in the same compartment showed no readings higher than the 

cold treatment schedule allows. If, however, the ship stopped at another port while in 

route to the discharge destination in the U.S., but failed to have the facility sensor(s) 

repaired and recalibrated, it may be considered negligence on the part of the 

shipping line. The fruit from such refrigerated compartments would have to be 

retreated (in a cold warehouse) to be eligible for entry.

If a sensor is reading consistently high, it should be tested by using the ice water 

bath technique. If this sensor proves to be accurate (i.e., readings within +/- 0.3 °C 

from zero) then it must be assumed that the high readings obtained in the fruit were 

indeed accurate, which would be sufficient grounds for rejection. For additional 

evidence, the PPQ official can also obtain independent fruit pulp readings from a 

hand-held portable temperature-sensing instrument in the area of the load where 

high readings were obtained from the ship’s sensor(s).
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Clearance of Cold Treated Consignments

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-7-15

Review the log sheets up to when the loading of the compartment was 

complete. Determine the maximum and minimum fruit temperature at the time 

the sensors were inserted (record in Blocks 24, 25, and 26).

Continue reviewing the log sheets through the precooling period to the time 

when treatment commenced. Note abnormalities in the temperature readings 

that could indicate an irregularity in the treatment process (record in Block 27).

Review the treatment portion of the log sheets for irregularities and excessive 

temperatures (record in Block 28).

Clearance Action by Authorized APHIS Official

The authorized APHIS official will:

Hold shipment pending further evaluation if total effects of irregularities 

are not consistent with treatment requirements. Contact the supervisor 

regarding the reasons for holding the consignment.

Record all exceptions in the narrative form and attach to the clearance 

report.

Release consignment for discharge if all requirements have been met and 

notify ship’s officers, pier superintendents, and Customs and Border 

Protection Agriculture Specialist(s).

Inspection of Load and Compartments

Time permitting, examine the load and compartments during and after 

unloading. Observe sensor locations, labeling, and physical condition and 

report irregularities.

NOTICE

Many data logger installations are programmed to record temperature variations to 

one-hundredth of a degree centigrade (0.01 °C). With this high resolution of 

temperature readings, a deviation of up to three-hundredths of a degree can be 

expected from consecutive readings in a standard ice water test. Accordingly, 

calibration certifications that are acceptable under our accuracy requirements show 

either the average of two consecutive calibration readings or two consecutive 

readings that are within three-hundredths of a degree centigrade of each other. 

Report deviations beyond this standard.

NOTICE

If the initial treatment period is broken because of excessive temperatures, failure of 

the data logger, or improper procedure, and the treatment is later restarted, enter the 

date and time of restart on the second line of item 28.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Cold Treatment in Refrigerated Warehouses

3-7-16 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Distribution of Clearance Documents

After final clearance, the completed PPQ Form 556 with supporting documents 

are to be distributed as follows:

Keep copies of the PPQ Form 556 and the chart printouts at the port of 

arrival.

Send copies of the PPQ Form 556 to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT.

Cold Treatment in Refrigerated Warehouses

The warehouse must be approved by PPQ (see Certifying Facilities). 

The consignment must move directly from the port of entry to the cold storage 

warehouse with no diversion or delay.

The warehouse must provide the necessary security for safeguarding each 

consignment.

The unloading of containers which arrive at the warehouse under seal must be 

conducted under PPQ supervision.

Initiating the Cold Treatment

The procedures for the verification of recording equipment and calibration of 

temperature sensors are the same as those outlined for vessels in Intransit Cold 

Treatment in Conventional Vessels, Self-Refrigerated (Integral) Containers, 

and Warehouses on page 3-7-2, Initiating Intransit Cold Treatment in Vessels 

and Containers on page 3-7-3, Verification of Temperature Recording 

Equipment on page 3-7-3, and Calibration of Temperature Sensors on page 

3-7-4. These activities must be performed under the direction of an authorized 

APHIS official.

Arrange stowage to provide for adequate air distribution throughout the 

consignment, and to allow for the sampling of pulp temperatures in any desired 

location. To accomplish this, leave aisles between rows of pallets, with the 

aisles parallel to the air flow. Allow space between pallets. Double stacking of 

pallets is not allowed; therefore treatments will not begin until pallets are 

reconfigured to a single stacked pallet arrangement. However, rack systems are 

acceptable provided they have been approved by S&T-TMT.
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Quick Freeze Guidelines

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-7-17

Placement of Temperature Sensors

After loading is completed, take fruit temperatures at various locations 

throughout the load to determine the location of the warmest fruit. Place 

temperature sensors throughout the load, being sure to place sensors in the 

warmest areas. Under some conditions, additional air circulation will be 

required to cool the consignment uniformly. The use of additional fans or 

blowers will depend on the particular circumstances at the time of treatment.

Placement of sensors should be under the direction of an authorized APHIS 

official. Insert the sensor well into the fruit. The tip of the sensor must not

extend through the fruit (Figure 3-7-1). If necessary (in the case of small fruit), 

the sensor should penetrate multiple fruit (Figure 3-7-2). The number and 

location of the temperature sensors are determined during warehouse 

certification. (Table 3-7-1)

Quick Freeze Guidelines

Freezing will ruin the market quality of most fresh fruits and vegetables, 

except for thick-skinned items such as durian and coconut. Generally, this 

treatment is used on fruits and vegetables that will be processed into another 

form (e.g. for puree, juice, or mashed vegetables).

Freezing is an acceptable method of mitigating the pests listed in the schedule. 

Treatment may result in commodity destruction. APHIS is not liable for 

damage to the commodity. Importers that choose freezing as a treatment do so 

at their own risk.

Operational procedures and equipment specifications are under development.

Table 3-7-1 Number of Sensors in a Warehouse

Cubic Feet Cubic Meters Number of 

Pallets

Number 

of Air 

Sensors

Number 

of Pulp 

Sensors

Total 

Number 

of 

Sensors

0 - 10,000 0 - 283 1 - 100 1 2 3

10,001 - 20,000 284 - 566 101 - 200 1 3 4

20,001 - 30,000 567 - 849 201 - 300 1 4 5

30,001 - 40,000 850 - 1132 301 - 400 1 5 6

40,001 - 50,000 1133 - 1415 401 - 500 1 6 7

50,001 - 60,000 1416 - 1698 501 - 600 1 7 8

60,001 - 70,000 1699 - 1981 601 - 700 1 8 9

70,001 - 80,000 1982 - 2264 701 - 800 1 9 10

80,001 - 90,000 2265 - 2547 801 - 900 1 10 11

90,001 - 100,000 2548 - 2830 901 - 1000 1 11 12

Over 100,000 > 2830 1000+ Must be approved by S&T-TMT
Nonchemical Treatments Cold Treatment (CT)

Contact Information

3-7-18 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Contact Information

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Fax: 305-278-4898
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-8-1

Chapter

3

Nonchemical Treatments

Irradiation

Contents

Introduction 3-8-1

Authorities and Other Responsible Parties 3-8-2

Treatment Objectives 3-8-2

Efficacy 3-8-2

Treatment 3-8-3

Dosimetry 3-8-3

Dose Mapping 3-8-4

Facility Approval 3-8-4

Documentation 3-8-4

Terminology 3-8-5

Introduction

This chapter provides background and general information for the use of 

irradiation as a phytosanitary treatment of plant pests. Irradiation was first 

approved by APHIS in 1997 for use on papayas from Hawaii for export to the 

U.S. mainland, Guam, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. In 2002, 

irradiation was approved as a phytosanitary treatment for all admissible fresh 

fruits and vegetables from all countries.
Nonchemical Treatments Irradiation

Authorities and Other Responsible Parties

3-8-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Authorities and Other Responsible Parties

7CFR 305.31 through 305.9

Food and Drug Administration (FDA) — The FDA is responsible for 

determining the labeling requirements for irradiated food.

International Standard for Phytosanitary Measures #18 (ISPM) — This 

International Standard provides technical guidance on the specific 

procedures for the application of ionizing radiation as a phytosanitary 

treatment for regulated pests or articles.

National nuclear regulatory authority of the country where the facility is 

located

Treatment Objectives

The objective of phytosanitary treatments is to prevent the introduction or 

spread of regulated pests. As a phytosanitary treatment, irradiation may reduce 

the risk of introduction by achieving certain responses, known as “endpoints,” 

in the targeted pest(s). These endpoints are:

Inability to emerge or fly

Inactivation or devitalization (seeds may germinate, but seedlings do not

grow, or tubers, bulbs, or cuttings do not sprout)

Mortality

Sterility (inability to reproduce)

Efficacy

Unlike the Probit 9 mortality required for many chemical and nonchemical 

quarantine treatments, the use of irradiation as a phytosanitary measure 

presents a new paradigm to PPQ. The officer inspecting the treated 

consignment upon arrival in the U.S. may encounter living insects. However, 

this is to be expected since the treatment endpoint may not necessarily be 

mortality.
Nonchemical Treatments Irradiation

Treatment

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-8-3

Treatment

There are three types of ionizing radiation:

Electrons generated from machine sources up to 10 MeV (eBeam)

Radioactive isotopes (gamma rays from cobalt-60 or cesium-137)

X-rays (up to 7.5 MeV)

The unit of measure for absorbed dose from any type of radiation is gray (Gy).

Modified atmospheres with low oxygen levels may reduce treatment efficacy 

at a prescribed dose. Do not irradiate commodities that are in packaging or 

other conditions that cause oxygen levels to be less than 10%. Modified 

atmosphere packaging must be approved by S&T. See Packaging—USDAApproved For Modified Atmosphere Irradiation on page E-29 for a list of 

APHIS-approved modified atmosphere irradiation packaging. Contact 

ppqtmt@usda.gov for approval specifications.

Treatment procedures should also ensure that the minimum absorbed dose 

(Dmin) is fully attained throughout the commodity to provide the prescribed 

level of efficacy. Owing to the differences in the configuration of lots being 

treated, higher doses than the Dmin may be received by some of the 

commodities to ensure that the Dmin is achieved throughout the configured 

commodity. All treatments must be certified by verifying Dmin with approved 

dosimetry systems.

The minimum absorbed dose for the most-tolerant unmitigated pest is required 

if more than one pest is present. Refer to Table 5-2-1 on page 5-2-25 to 

determine the required minimum absorbed dose. For example, if a 

consignment of grapes is infested with both Mediterranean fruit fly and 

codling moth, the commodity would be irradiated using a minimum dose of 

200 Gy.

Dosimetry

Dosimetry is the system used by the facility to determine absorbed dose. The 

absorbed dose is a quantity of radiation energy (measured in Gray (Gy)) 

absorbed per unit of mass of the commodity.

The dosimetry system should be calibrated in accordance with international 

standards or appropriate national standards (e.g., Standard ISO/ASTM 51261 

Guide for Selection and Calibration of Dosimetry Systems for Radiation 

Processing).
Nonchemical Treatments Irradiation

Facility Approval

3-8-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Dose Mapping

Prior to routine treatments, the region(s) of lowest and highest dose absorbance 

must be mapped for each treatment configuration. Configurations may be 

defined by a variety of criteria which may vary by facility. Factors that affect 

dose mapping commonly include:

Density and composition of the material treated

Orientation of the product, stacking, volume, and packaging

Shape and/or size

Dose mapping of the product in each geometric packing configuration, 

arrangement and product density that will be used during routine treatments 

should be required by APHIS prior to the approval of a facility for the 

treatment application. Only the configurations approved by APHIS should be 

used for actual treatments.

The data obtained from the dose mapping is used to determine the proper 

number and placement of dosimeters during routine operations.

Facility Approval

Chapter 6-8 of this manual, Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities, covers 

the requirements for irradiation facility approval.

Documentation

The tracking and reporting of an irradiation treatment is critical to the integrity 

of the entire irradiation process. Treatment failure is linked to non-compliance, 

not pest detection. Consequently, an electronic database, Irradiation Reporting 

and Accountability Database (IRADS) was developed to standardize data 

entry, accurately and quickly produce data summaries and analysis, and allow 

access to a geographically diverse group of people. PPQ officials must use 

IRADS to monitor all phytosanitary irradiation treatments. Contact 

ppqctis@aphis.usda.gov to request access and training.

NOTICE

The Irradiation Reporting and Accountability Database (IRAD) is a component of the 

Commodity Treatment Information System (CTIS) <https://treatments.cphst.org//>

developed by USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT. Access to this web-based system will 

be permitted depending on the user’s specific role or function in the irradiation 

process. 
Nonchemical Treatments Irradiation

Terminology

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 3-8-5

Terminology

absorbed dose. quantity of radiation energy (in gray) absorbed per unit of 

mass of a specified target [ISPM No. 18]

dose mapping. measurement of the absorbed dose distribution within a 

process load through the use of dosimeters placed at specific locations within 

the process load [ISPM No. 18]

dosimeter. a device that, when irradiated, exhibits a quantifiable change in 

some property of the device which can be related to absorbed dose in a given 

material using appropriate analytical instrumentation and techniques [ISPM 

No. 18]

dosimetry. a system used for determining absorbed dose, consisting of 

dosimeters, measurement instruments and their associated reference standards, 

and procedures for the system’s use [ISPM No. 18]

gray (Gy). unit of absorbed dose where 1 Gy is equivalent to the absorption of 

1 joule per kilogram (1 Gy = 1 J.kg-1) [ISPM No. 18]

ionizing radiation. charged particles and electromagnetic waves that, as a 

result of physical interaction, create ions by either primary or secondary 

processes [ISPM No. 18]

irradiation. treatment with any type of ionizing radiation [ISPM No. 18]

minimum absorbed dose. the localized minimum absorbed dose within the 

process load [ISPM No. 18] (Dmin)

radura. internationally recognized symbol used to indicate when a food 

product has been irradiated
Nonchemical Treatments Irradiation

Terminology

3-8-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66
08/2008-27 Treatment Manual 4-1-1

Chapter

4 Residue Monitoring

Collecting, Packaging, and Shipping

Contents

Overview 4-1-1

Safety 4-1-2

Collecting the Sample 4-1-2

Pretreatment Sample 4-1-2

Post-Treatment Sample 4-1-2

Labeling the Sample 4-1-3

Storing the Sample 4-1-3

Shipping Samples 4-1-3

Quarantine Requirements 4-1-3

Overview

Methyl bromide fumigants, except those with “Q” labels, are subject to 

requirements of the FIFRA Section 18 Quarantine Exemption. When 

commodities intended for food or feed are fumigated with methyl bromide 

under the FIFRA Section 18 Quarantine Exemption, one additional EPA 

requirement must be met: PPQ must monitor aeration by sampling the gas 

concentration to determine when a commodity may be released.

In the past, PPQ used residue monitoring to comply with the Environmental 

Protection Agency’s (EPA) guidelines for fumigation of edible food or feed 

products conducted under a Section 18 Quarantine Exemption. PPQ took and 

analyzed samples of fumigated commodities, and they reported the resulting 

data yearly to EPA. When a fumigation was conducted under a Section 18 

Quarantine Exemption, samples were taken only when the commodity would 

be eaten by people or fed to animals. When the commodity would not be used 

for food or feed, PPQ did not take samples.

For example, if thyme would be used as an herb and fumigated under the 

schedule (T101-n-2), PPQ would sample the commodity because it would be 

eaten. On the other hand, if that same thyme were treated but imported as a cut 

NOTICE

Currently, Plant Protection and Quarantine (PPQ) is not taking samples of 

commodities for residue monitoring. However, if residue monitoring becomes 

necessary, this section provides guidelines for taking samples that will be used for 

monitoring fumigant residues.
Residue Monitoring Collecting, Packaging, and Shipping

Safety

4-1-2 Treatment Manual 08/2008-27

flower, sampling would not be necessary because it would be used for 

decoration—not eating.

Safety

Pretreatment samples will be shipped with dry ice. Be sure to store dry ice in 

well-ventilated areas and to transport dry ice and samples packed in dry ice in 

well-ventilated containers. Wear gloves when handling dry ice. For detailed 

information, see Safety Data Sheets. 

The Department of Transportation (DOT) considers dry ice a hazardous 

material and requires that aircraft record the amount of dry ice carried in the 

cargo hold. Amounts of 5 pounds or less are not stringently regulated; 

however, include the weight of dry ice on the shipping label. In addition, some 

overnight delivery companies have restrictions on shipping dry ice. Equip 

shipping containers with loose-fitting lids to prevent an explosive release of 

sublimating carbon dioxide. Identify dry ice as ORM-A on the shipping label. 

Also indicate on the label that the package contains diagnostic specimens.

Collecting the Sample

You must take a sample prior to treatment (pretreatment) and after aeration is 

completed (post-treatment). To avoid contaminating the sample, handle it as 

little as possible. Take pretreatment and post-treatment samples from the same 

general location within a given lot (i.e., the same bags, boxes, or other 

containers).

Some ports receive commodities several times a month. These shipments need 

not be sampled each time. For frequently received commodities, ports should 

develop a routine sample collection plan, such as one sample collected per 

week. However, when a new commodity is received or a commodity is 

received infrequently (once a week or less), collect a sample each time the 

commodity is treated.

Pretreatment Sample

1. Collect a minimum of 450g (approximately 1 lb.), except for herbs, of 

which you need to collect 150 grams (approximately one-third pound). If 

you are collecting fruits or vegetables that are heavy (for example, 

grapefruit or yams), be sure to collect at least two pieces of produce that 

weigh 450g.

2. Place these samples in containers with dry ice.

3. Ship the pretreatment samples separately from post-treatment samples.

Post-Treatment Sample
Residue Monitoring Collecting, Packaging, and Shipping

Labeling the Sample

08/2008-27 Treatment Manual 4-1-3

1. Collect a minimum of 450g (approximately 1 lb.), except for herbs, of 

which you need to collect 150 grams (approximately one-third pound). If 

you are collecting fruits or vegetables that are heavy (for example, 

grapefruit or yams), be sure to collect at least two pieces of produce that 

weigh 450g.

2. Ship the post-treatment samples separately from the pretreatment samples 

and in accordance with standard shipping practices. If the samples require 

refrigeration, then ship the samples with wet ice or ice packs. If the 

samples are normally shipped at ambient temperature (e.g., yams), ship 

them without ice.

Labeling the Sample

Label each sample container with the State, county, date, and name of contents, 

and whether the sample is “pre” or “post” treatment. For this label, use 

waterproof ink on a strip of masking tape or other label material. Be sure to 

attach the label before leaving the sampling site. Securely fasten a plastic 

envelope containing the yellow copy of the APHIS Form 2061 to the side of 

the sampling container. Label this envelope with the same information that you 

placed on the sample container (State, county, date, and name of contents, and 

whether the sample was “pre” or “post” treatment).

Storing the Sample

Immediately place the samples in a freezer or refrigerator until ready to 

package the samples for shipping.

Shipping Samples

Quarantine Requirements

Contact the State Plant Health Director to determine where to ship the samples. 

Ship all samples in leakproof, double sealed containers. Ensure the 

pretreatment sample is secure since it does not meet entry requirements for the 

United States.

Ship samples in coolers with dry ice packed above the samples. The lid of the 

cooler should be loose fitting to allow gases to escape. Ship the samples using 

the contract overnight delivery service, or the U.S. Postal Service overnight 

delivery.
Residue Monitoring Collecting, Packaging, and Shipping

Shipping Samples

4-1-4 Treatment Manual 08/2008-27
02/2024-01 Treatment Manuals 5-1-1

Chapter

5

Treatment Schedules

Index

Contents

T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables 5-2-1

T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material 5-3-1

T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products 5-4-1

T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products 5-5-1

T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens 5-6-1

T600 - Controlled Atmosphere Temperature Treatment System 5-7-1

D301 - Schedules for Domestic Movement of Regulated Articles 5-8-1
Treatment Schedules Index

Contents

5-1-2 Treatment Manuals 02/2024-01
03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-1

Chapter

5

Treatment Schedules

T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and 

Vegetables

Contents

Reporting Commodity Injury 5-2-1

FIFRA Section 18 Exemption 5-2-2

Determine the Correct Label for Fumigation 5-2-2

How Fruits and Vegetables are Listed 5-2-2

T101—Methyl Bromide Fumigation 5-2-3

T102—Water Treatment 5-2-20

T103—High Temperature Forced Air 5-2-21

T104—Pest Specific/Host Variable 5-2-22

T105—Irradiation 5-2-24

T106—Vapor Heat 5-2-27

T107—Cold Treatment 5-2-29

T108—Fumigation Plus Cold Treatment of Fruits 5-2-35

T109—Cold Treatment Plus Fumigation of Fruits 5-2-36

T110-c Miscellaneous Food/Feed Commodities 5-2-37

Reporting Commodity Injury

Record any new or unusual observations relating to injury of commodity and 

report them to Quarantine Policy, Analysis and Support (QPAS) in Riverdale. 

Give pertinent details of the treatment and conditions regarding its application. 

In appraising the effect of a particular treatment, take care to distinguish 

between the actual or apparent effects directly attributable to the treatment and 

those relating to factors or conditions not subject to PPQ control.

Commodities in the T100 series are intended for consumption as food or feed. 

These commodities may have to be treated with methyl bromide to control a 

pest.
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

FIFRA Section 18 Exemption

5-2-2 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

FIFRA Section 18 Exemption

Methyl bromide fumigants, except those with “Q” labels, are subject to 

requirements of the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act 

(FIFRA), Section 18 Quarantine Exemption. When commodities intended for 

food or feed are fumigated with methyl bromide under the FIFRA Section 18 

Quarantine Exemption, one additional EPA requirement must be met: PPQ 

must monitor aeration by sampling the gas concentration to determine when a 

commodity may be released.

In ACIR, fumigation schedules under the FIFRA Section 18 Quarantine 

Exemption are identified by the following note:

Determine the Correct Label for Fumigation

Always use the label of the fumigant to determine if the commodity can be 

treated. Fumigation schedules in this publication are intended to clarify and 

expand commercial labels for methyl bromide. The EPA only authorizes 

fumigation for commodities that are listed on the label of the gas being used 

for the fumigation. Also, to comply with State regulations, a fumigant must be 

registered in the State where it is being used.

Although the EPA only authorizes the use of a pesticide on a crop, animal, or 

site that is listed on the label of a pesticide, specific pests do not have to be 

listed on the label to use the pesticide. An amendment to FIFRA in 1978 

permits the use of a pesticide to control a pest not on the label if the application 

is to a crop, animal, or site specified on the label, unless mentioned otherwise.

How Fruits and Vegetables are Listed

Fruits and vegetables that are to be fumigated with methyl bromide (T101s) 

will be listed in alphabetical order. Each schedule will have an assigned letter, 

e.g., Apples T101-a-1, Zucchini T101-h-3. For fruits and vegetables that 

require treatment as a condition of entry, refer to the Agricultural Commodity 

Import Requirements (ACIR) database for the specific treatment.

NOTICE

Do not use this treatment schedule if its FIFRA Section 18 Exemption has expired. 

For the current exemption status, call your local State Plant Health Director (SPHD).
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101—Methyl Bromide Fumigation

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-3

T101—Methyl Bromide Fumigation

T101-a-1 Apple and Pear

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-a-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-a-3 Apricot, Peach, Plum, Nectarine

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-a-3—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-b-1 Asparagus

Pest: External feeders, such as Noctuidae, Thrips spp. (except Scirtothrips

dorsalis from Thailand), Copitarsia spp.

Treatment: T101-b-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-b-1-1 Asparagus from Thailand, Australia, and New Zealand

Pest: Scirtothrips dorsalis (Thailand), Halotydeus destructor (Australia, New 

Zealand)

Treatment: T101-b-1-1

T101-c-1 Avocado (from Hawaii, Israel, or the Philippines)

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly), Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental 

fruit fly), and Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon fly; formerly known as 

Bactrocera cucurbitae) 

Treatment: T101-c-1

T101-d-1 Banana

Pest: External feeders such as Noctuidae, Thrips spp., Copitarsia spp.

Treatment: T101-d-1
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-e-1 Bean (except Faba Bean), Dry

5-2-4 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T101-e-1 Bean (except Faba Bean), Dry

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles)

Treatment: T101-e-1

T101-g-1 Beet

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T101-g-1

T101-g-1-1 Beet

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-g-1-1

T101-h-1 Blackberry

Pest: External feeders such as Noctuidae, Thrips spp., Copitarsia spp., 

Pentatomidae, and Tarsonemus spp.

Treatment: T101-h-1

T101-i-1 Blueberry

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-i-1

T101-i-1-1 Blueberry

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly), Anastrepha fraterculus

(South American fruit fly), and Lobesia botrana (European grapevine moth)

Treatment: T101-i-1-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-i-1-2 Blueberry

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-5

T101-i-1-2 Blueberry

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly), Anastrepha fraterculus

(South American fruit fly), and Lobesia botrana (European grapevine moth)

Treatment: T101-i-1-2—MB at NAP—chamber

T101-i-1-3 Blueberry

Pest: Lobesia botrana (European grapevine moth)

Treatment: T101-i-1-3—MB at NAP—tarpaulin

T101-i-1-4 Blueberry

Pest: Lobesia botrana (European grapevine moth)

Treatment: T101-i-1-4—MB at NAP—chamber

T101-n-2 Broccoli (Brassica oleracea var. botrytis)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Broccoli, Chinese (Gai Lon) (Brassica oleracea L. var. 

alboglabra)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Broccoli raab (Rapini) (Brassica rapa or B. campestris)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-n-2 Brussels Sprouts (Brassica oleracea var. gemmifera)

5-2-6 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T101-n-2 Brussels Sprouts (Brassica oleracea var. gemmifera)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-j-1 Cabbage

Includes both European and Chinese cabbage

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-j-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Cabbage (Brassica oleracea)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Cabbage, Chinese (Bok Choy) (Brassica chinensis)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Cabbage, Chinese (Napa) (Brassica pekinensis)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Cabbage, Chinese Mustard (Gai Choy) (Brassica 

campestris)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-k-1 Cantaloupe

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-7

T101-k-1 Cantaloupe

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-k-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-l-1 Carrot

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-l-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-m-1 Carrot

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T101-m-1—MB, chamber, 15” vacuum

T101-n-1 Cassava (Manihot and Yuca)

Pest: External feeders, Slugs

Treatment: T101-n-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Cauliflower (Brassica oleracea var. botrytis)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Cavalo broccolo (Brassica oleracea var botrytis)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-1 Celeriac (Celery Root)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-n-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-o-1 Celery (Above Ground Parts)

5-2-8 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T101-o-1 Celery (Above Ground Parts)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-o-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-p-1 Chayote (Fruit Only)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-p-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-r-1 Cherry

Pest: Insects other than fruit flies

Treatment: T101-r-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-s-1 Cherry

Pest: Rhagoletis indifferens (Western cherry fruit fly) and Cydia pomonella

(codling moth)

Treatment: T101-s-1—MB at NAP—chamber only

T101-s-1-1 Cherry From Australia

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T101-s-1-1—MB at NAP—chamber only

T101-t-1 Chestnut (Except Water Chestnut)

Pest: Cydia splendana (nut fruit tortrix) and Curculio spp.

Treatment: T101-t-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-u-1 Chestnut (Except Water Chestnut)

Pest: Cydia splendana (nut fruit tortrix) and Curculio spp.

Treatment: T101-u-1—MB in 26” vacuum—chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-v-1 Chicory (Above Ground Parts)

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-9

T101-v-1 Chicory (Above Ground Parts)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-v-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-1 Chicory Root

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-n-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-w-1 Cipollini (Bulbs)

Pest: Exosoma lusitanica (chrysomelid beetle)

Treatment: T101-w-1—MB in 15” vacuum—chamber

T101-w-1-2 Citrus From United States (Interstate Movement)

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T101-w-1-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2-1 Grapefruit, Kumquat, Lemon, Lime, Orange,Tangerine/

Clementine/Mandarin, Tangelo, and Tango from Chile

Pest: External feeders and Brevipalpus chilensis (Chilean false red mite)

Treatment: T101-n-2-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-j-2-1 Clementine (Tangerine), Grapefruit, Orange From Mexico 

and Quarantine Areas of the U.S.

Pest: Anastrepha spp.

Treatment: T101-j-2-1—MB at NAP—chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-n-2 Coles (Brassica spp.)

5-2-10 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T101-n-2 Coles (Brassica spp.)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Collard Greens (Brassica oleracea var. acephala)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-x-1 Copra

(Dried coconuts and whole coconuts without the husk)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-x-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-x-1-1 Corn-On-the-Cob (Green corn, Sweet Corn)

Pest: Ostrinia nubilalis (European corn borer)

Treatment: T101-x-1-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-y-1 Cucumber

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-y-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-z-1 Dasheen (Eddoe, Malanga, Tannia, Tanya, Taro, and Yautia)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-z-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-a-2 Dasheen

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T101-a-2—MB chamber, 15” vacuum—chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-b-2 Endive

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-11

T101-b-2 Endive

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-b-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-c-2 Faba (Fava) Bean (Dried)

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles)

Treatment: T101-c-2—MB in 26” vacuum—chamber

T101-d-2 Faba (Fava) Bean (Dried)

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles)

Treatment: T101-d-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-e-2 Garlic

Pest: Brachycerus spp.(garlic beetles and Dyspessa ulula garlic 

carpenterworm)

Treatment: T101-e-2—MB in 15” vacuum—chamber

T101-f-2 Ginger (Rhizome)

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T101-f-2—MB chamber, 15” vacuum—chamber

T101-g-2 Ginger (Rhizome)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-g-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-h-2 Grape

Pest: Lobesia botrana (European grapevine moth)

Treatment T101-h-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-h-2-1 Grape

5-2-12 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T101-h-2-1 Grape

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T101-h-2-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-i-2 Grape

Pest: External feeders and insects other than Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean 

fruit fly) and mealybugs

Treatment: T101-i-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-i-2-1 Grape, Baby Kiwi (Actinidia arguta), and Pomegranate

Pest: Brevipalpus chilensis (Chilean false red mite)

Treatment: T101-i-2-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-i-2-2 Fig (Ficus carica)

Pest: Brevipalpus chilensis (Chilean false red mite)

Treatment: T101-i-2-2—MB at NAP—chamber

T101-j-2 Grapefruit and Other Kinds of Citrus

Pest: Aleurocanthus woglumi (citrus blackfly)

Treatment: T101-j-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-k-2 Green Pod Vegetables

(Snap, string, yard-long beans, peas, pigeon peas, and lablab beans)

Pest: Cydia fabivora, Crocidosema aporema, Maruca vitrata (exotic legume 

pod borers), Melanagromyza obtusa (pigeon pea pod fly), and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-k-2—MB in 15” vacuum—chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-k-2-1 Green Pod Vegetables

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-13

T101-k-2-1 Green Pod Vegetables

(Snap, string, yard-long beans, peas, pigeon peas, and lablab beans)

Pest: Cydia fabivora, Crocidosema aporema, Maruca vitrata (exotic legume 

pod borers), Melanagromyza obtusa (pigeon pea pod fly), and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-k-2-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2-1-1 Dried Herbs, Spices, and Mint (Mentha spp.) (All Plant 

Parts and Seeds)

Pest: Various stored product pests, not including khapra beetle

Treatment: T101-n-2-1-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T101-n-2 Fresh Herbs, Spices, and Mint (Mentha spp.) (All Plant 

Parts Except Seeds)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-l-2 Horseradish

Pest: Baris lepidii (imported crucifer weevil)

Treatment: T101-l-2—MB in 15” vacuum—chamber

T101-n-2 Kale (Brassica oleracea var. acephala)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-m-2 Kiwi

Pest: External feeders (excludes Brevipalpus chilensis), Nysius huttoni (wheat 

bug) 

Treatment: T101-m-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-m-2-1 Kiwi

5-2-14 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T101-m-2-1 Kiwi

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T101-m-2-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-m-2-2 Kiwi

Pest: Brevipalpus chilensis (Chilean false red mite)

Treatment: T101-m-2-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Kohlrabi (Brassica oleracea var. gongylodes)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-3 Kumquat (Fortunella japonica)

Pest: Brevipalpus chilensis, Ceratitis capitata (Wiedemann) and Anastrepha 

fracterculus (Wiedmann)

Treatment: T101-n-3 MB at NAP—chamber

T101-n-2 Leafy Vegetables

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-q-2 Leeks

Pest: Internal feeders (including leaf miners)

Treatment: T101-q-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-e-1 Lentils (Dry)

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles)

Treatment: T101-e-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-n-2 Lettuce From Spain

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-15

T101-n-2 Lettuce From Spain

Pest: Autographa gamma, Helicoverpa armigera, Mamestra brassicae, 

Spodoptera littoralis

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-b-1-1 Lychee (Litchi)

Pest: Mealybugs (Pseudococcidae)

Treatment: T101-b-1-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-o-2 Melons (Including Honeydew, Muskmelon, and 

Watermelon)

Pest: External feeders such as Noctuidae, Thrips spp., Copitarsia spp.

Treatment: T101-o-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Mizuna (Brassica rapa Japonica Group)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Mustard Greens (Brassica juncea)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-n-2 Mustard Spinach (Brassica rapa Perviridis group)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-p-2 Okra

Pest: Pectinophora gossypiella (pink bollworm)

Treatment: T101-p-2—MB at NAP—chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-p-2-1 Okra

5-2-16 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T101-p-2-1 Okra

Pest: Pectinophora gossypiella (pink bollworm)

Treatment: T101-p-2-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin

T101-q-2 Onion

Pest: Internal feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-q-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-g-1 Parsnip

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T101-g-1—MB chamber, 15” vacuum—chamber

T101-e-1 Peas (Dry)

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles)

Treatment: T101-e-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-a-3 Peppers

Pest: Internal pests (except fruit flies) and external pests (except mealybugs)

Treatment: T101-a-3—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-r-2 Pineapple

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T101-r-2—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-s-2 Pineapple

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-s-2—MB (“Q” label if under 70 oF(21.1 oC)) at NAP—

tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-t-2 Plantain

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-17

T101-t-2 Plantain

Pest: External feeders such as Noctuidae, Thrips spp., Copitarsia spp.

Treatment: T101-t-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-AA—Plum

Pest: Lobesia botrana (European grapevine moth)

There are two alternative treatments, T101-AA-1 and -AA-2.

Fumigate after cold storage (34 °F or lower) for a minimum of 10 days. 

The cold storage is not subject to verification by PPQ nor CBP and is not a 

quarantine treatment.

T101-AA-1—Plum

Treatment: T101-AA-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-AA-2—Plum

Treatment: T101-AA-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-u-2 Potato (White or Irish)

Pest: Graphognathus spp. (white fringed beetles)

Treatment: T101-u-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-v-2 Potato (White or Irish)

Pest: Ostrinia nubilalis (European corn borer) and Phthorimaea operculela

(potato tuberworm)

Treatment: T101-v-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-e-1 Pulses, Dried

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles)

Treatment: T101-e-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-w-2 Pumpkin

5-2-18 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T101-w-2 Pumpkin

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-w-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-g-1 Radish

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T101-g-1—MB chamber, 15” vacuum—chamber

T101-n-2 Rape Greens (Brassica napus)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-n-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-x-2 Raspberry

Pest: External feeders such as Noctuidae, Thrips spp., Copitarsia spp., 

Pentatomidae

Treatment: T101-x-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-q-2 Shallots

Pest: Internal feeders (including leaf miners)

Treatment: T101-q-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-y-2 Squash (Winter, Summer, and Chayote)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-y-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-z-2 Strawberry

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-z-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-b-3-1 Sweet Potato (Ipomoea)

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-19

T101-b-3-1 Sweet Potato (Ipomoea)

Pest: External and internal feeders

Treatment: T101-b-3-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-c-3 Tomato (from quarantine areas in the United States)

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T101-c-3—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-c-3-1 Tomato (From Chile)

Pest: Phthorimaea absoluta (tomato leafminer) (formerly Tuta absoluta

(tomato fruit moth)) and Rhagoletis tomatis (tomato fruit fly)

Treatment: T101-c-3-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-d-3 Tuna (Opuntia) and All Other Fruits From Cacti (Dragon 

Fruit, Yellow Dragon Fruit, Prickly Pear, Pitaya, Pitahaya)

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T101-d-3—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-e-3 Tuna (Opuntia) and All Other Fruits From Cacti (Dragon 

Fruit, Yellow Dragon Fruit, Prickly Pear, Pitahaya, Pitaya)

Pest: External feeders and leaf miners

Treatment: T101-e-3—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T101-g-1 Turnip

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T101-g-1—MB chamber, 15” vacuum—chamber

T101-f-3 Yam (Dioscorea spp.)

Pest: Internal and external feeders

Treatment: T101-f-3—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T101-h-3 Zucchini

5-2-20 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T101-h-3 Zucchini

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T101-h-3—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T102—Water Treatment

T102-b Cherimoya From Chile

Pest: Brevipalpus chilensis (Chilean false red mite)

Treatment: T102-b—Soapy water and wax

T102-c Durian and Other Large Fruits, such as Breadfruit

Pest: External feeders, scales, and mealybugs (Pseudococcidae)

Treatment: T102-c—Warm, soapy water and brushing

T102-e Limes

Pest: Mealybugs (Pseudococcidae) and other surface pests

Treatment: T102-e—Hot water immersion

T102-b-1 Limes From Chile

Pest: Brevipalpus chilensis (Chilean false red mite)

Treatment: T102-b-1—Soapy water and wax

! CAUTION

Whenever water comes into contact with fresh produce, the water’s quality dictates 

the potential for pathogen contamination. To reduce the risk of food-borne illnesses, 

the water used for washing, treatments, and cooling must be fortified with sodium 

hypochlorite (household bleach), and constantly maintained at a chlorine level not to 

exceed 200 ppm.
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T102-d-1 Longan Fruit From Hawaii

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-21

T102-d-1 Longan Fruit From Hawaii

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly) and Bactrocera dorsalis

(Oriental fruit fly)

Treatment: T102-d-1—Hot water immersion

T102-d Lychee (Litchi) Fruit From Hawaii

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly) and Bactrocera dorsalis

(Oriental fruit fly)

Treatment: T102-d—Hot water immersion

T102-a Mango

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly), Anastrepha spp., Anastrepha 

ludens (Mexican fruit fly)

Treatment: T102-a—Hot water immersion

T102-b-2 Passion Fruit From Chile

Pest: Brevipalpus chilensis (Chilean false red mite)

Treatment: T102-b-2—Soapy water and wax

T103—High Temperature Forced Air

T103-a-1 Citrus From Mexico and Infested Areas in the United States

Pest: Anastrepha spp.

Treatment: T103-a-1—High temperature forced air

T103-b-1 Citrus From Hawaii

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly), Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental 

fruit fly), and Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon fly; formerly known as 

Bactrocera cucurbitae)

Treatment: T103-b-1—High temperature forced air
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T103-c-1 Mango From Mexico

5-2-22 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T103-c-1 Mango From Mexico

Pest: Anastrepha ludens (Mexican fruit fly), Anastrepha obliqua (West Indian 

fruit fly), and Anastrepha serpentina (black fruit fly)

Treatment: T103-c-1—High temperature forced air

T103-d Mountain Papaya From Chile (T103-d-1) and Papaya From 

Belize and Hawaii (T103-d-2)

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly), Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental 

fruit fly), and Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon fly; formerly known as 

Bactrocera cucurbitae)

Treatment: T103-d—High temperature forced air

T103-e Rambutan From Hawaii

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly), and Bactrocera dorsalis

(Oriental fruit fly)

Treatment: T103-e—High temperature forced air

T104—Pest Specific/Host Variable

For the treatments that follow, never exceed the labeled or Section 18 dosage 

and time for the specific commodity at a given temperature. The specific 

commodity being treated determines if the schedule is a labeled treatment or 

one authorized under a Section 18 exemption.

For example, oranges cannot be treated for hitchhikers using T104-a-1 at 40-

49 °F because this schedule requires 4 lbs. of methyl bromide/1,000 ft3. The 

methyl bromide “Q” label allows a maximum of only 3 lbs. at this temperature 

range. Therefore, the oranges would have to be heated to at least 50 °F before 

fumigation because at 50 °F a dosage of only 3 lbs./1,000 ft3 is required.

Although the following treatments are pest specific, the treatment schedule for 

the associated host will determine if and when a pest specific treatment can be 

used. Always check the schedule for the host before selecting the proper 

treatment schedule. Also, consult the methyl bromide label, and do not exceed 

the restrictions on dosage and exposure time.
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T104-a-1 Various Commodities

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-23

T104-a-1 Various Commodities

Pest: Hitchhikers and surface pests such as: thrips, aphids, scale insects, leaf 

miners, spider mites (Tetranychidae), lygaeid bugs, ants, earwigs, surfacefeeding caterpillars, and slugs

Treatment: T104-a-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T104-a-1: 70 °F or above - FIFRA Yes, Various Commodities

T104-a-1: 70 °F or above - FIFRA No, Various Commodities

T104-a-1: 60 °F or above - FIFRA Yes, Various Commodities

T104-a-1: 60 °F or above - FIFRA No, Various Commodities

T104-a-1: 50 °F or above - FIFRA Yes, Various Commodities

T104-a-1: 50 °F or above - FIFRA No, Various Commodities

T104-a-1: 40 °F or above - FIFRA Yes, Various Commodities

T104-a-1: 40 °F or above - FIFRA No, Various Commodities

T104-a-2 Various Commodities

Pest: Mealybugs (Pseudococcidae)

Treatment: T104-a-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T104-a-2: 80 °F or above - FIFRA Yes, Various Commodities

T104-a-2: 80 °F or above - FIFRA No, Various Commodities

T104-a-2: 70 °F or above - FIFRA Yes, Various Commodities

T104-a-2: 70 °F or above - FIFRA No, Various Commodities

T104-a-2: 60 °F or above - FIFRA Yes, Various Commodities

T104-a-2: 60 °F or above - FIFRA No, Various Commodities
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T105—Irradiation

5-2-24 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T105—Irradiation

Irradiation (IR) is an approved treatment for all imported fruits and vegetables 

and for fruits and vegetables moved interstate from Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and 

the U.S. Virgin Islands. In addition, irradiation can be used against particular 

pests of cut flowers and foliage; however, some damage may occur. Refer to 

Table 5-2-1 for a list of pest-specific doses.

Treatment must be conducted at approved facilities in a foreign country, 

Hawaii, Puerto Rico, U.S. Virgin Islands, or any area in the U.S. mainland. 

Refer to 7 CFR 305.9(a)(1) when irradiating in facilities located in AL, AZ, 

CA, FL, GA, KY, LA, MS, NV, NM, NC, SC, TN, TX, or VA. 

Refer to the Agricultural Commodity Import Requirements (ACIR) database 

Facilities tab for a list of approved United States irradiation facilities.

Refer to chapter Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities on page 6-8-1 of 

this manual for facility certification requirements.

Commodities that are currently admissible with a treatment or systems 

approach could also use irradiation as an alternative treatment, provided all the 

pests targeted by the treatment or systems approach are neutralized by the 

irradiation dose. Use of irradiation in place of a systems approach or another 

treatment must be approved and appear in the this manual and the Agricultural 

Commodity Import Requirements (ACIR) database prior to use.

NOTICE

When designing the facility’s dosimetry system and procedures for its operation, the 

facility operator must address guidance and principles from American Society for 

Testing Materials (ASTM) standards or an equivalent standard recognized by the 

Administrator of APHIS.

The American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) publication, ISO/ASTM 51261-

2002 (E), “Standard Guide for Selection and Calibration of Dosimetry Systems for 

Radiation Processing” is available from:

ASTM

100 Barr Harbor Drive

West Conshohocken, PA

USA

19428-2959
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T105—Irradiation

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-25

The minimum absorbed doses (MAD) listed in Table 5-2-1 can be applied only

when all pests of concern can be mitigated. For example, if a country has 

Mexican fruit fly, West Indian fruit fly, and Sapote fruit fly, the MAD would 

have to be 100 Gy, not 70 Gy.

Table 5-2-1 Pest-Specific Minimum Absorbed Dose (Gy) For Any Approved Imported Fruits, 

Vegetables, and Cut Flowers, and Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers Moved Interstate 

from Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands

Scientific Name Common Name

Minimum 

Absorbed 

Dose (Gy) Not 

To Exceed 

1,000 Gy

Rhagoletis pomonella Apple maggot 60

Anastrepha ludens Mexican fruit fly 70

Anastrepha obliqua West Indian fruit fly

Anastrepha suspensa Caribbean fruit fly

Conotrachelus nenuphar Plum curculio 92

Anastrepha serpentina Sapote fruit fly 100

Bactrocera jarvisi Jarvis fruit fly

Bactrocera tryoni Queensland fruit fly

Ceratitis capitata Mediterranean fruit fly

Copitarsia decolora (only eggs and larvae)

Aspidiotus destructor Coconut scale 150

 Zeugodacus cucurbitae (formerly known as 

Bactrocera cucurbitae) 

Melon fruit fly

Bactrocera dorsalis Oriental fruit fly

Cylas formicarius elegantulus Sweet potato weevil

Euscepes postfasciatus West Indian sweet potato weevil

Omphisa anastomosalis Sweet potato vine borer

Pseudaulacaspis pentagona White peach scale

All other fruit flies of the family Tephritidae which are 

not listed above

Sternochetus frigidus (Fabr.) Mango pulp weevil 165

Cydia pomonella Codling moth (only eggs and larvae) 200

Epiphyas postvittana Light Brown Apple Moth (only eggs and larvae)

Grapholita molesta Oriental fruit moth (only eggs and larvae)

Cryptophlebia ombrodelta Litchi fruit moth (only eggs and larvae) 250

Cryptophlebia illepida Koa seedworm

Eggs and larvae of the family Tortricidae not listed 290

Brevipalpus chilensis Chilean false red mite 300

Sternochetus mangiferae Mango seed weevil

Plant pests of the class Insecta not listed above, 

except pupae and adults of the order Lepidoptera

400
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T105-a-1 Approved Imported Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers from Specific Countries; Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut

5-2-26 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T105-a-1 Approved Imported Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers 

from Specific Countries; Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers Moved 

Interstate from Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands

Pest: All fruit flies from the family Tephritidae (Refer to Table 5-2-1 for other 

pests that can be treated at 150 Gy or less.) Treat using a minimum absorbed 

dose of 150 Gy, not to exceed 1,000 Gy.

Treatment: T105-a 1—IR at 150 Gy

T105-a-2 Approved Imported Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers 

from Specific Countries; Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers Moved 

Interstate from Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands

Pest: Fruit flies from the family Tephritidae and all insect pests except adults 

and pupae of the order Lepidoptera

Treatment: T105-a-2—IR at 400 Gy

T105-a-3 Approved Imported Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers 

from Specific Countries; Fruits, Vegetables, and Cut Flowers Moved 

Interstate from Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands

Pest: Sternochetus mangiferae (mango seed weevil), and all fruit flies from the 

family Tephritidae

Treatment: T105-a-3—IR at 300 Gy

T105-a-4 Mango

Pest: Sternochetus frigidus (mango pulp weevil)

Treatment: T105-a-4—IR at 165 Gy
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T106—Vapor Heat

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-27

T106—Vapor Heat

T106-a Various Commodities From Mexico: Clementine (T106-a-1), 

Grapefruit (T106-a-2), Mango (Manila Variety Only; T106-a-3), Orange 

(T106-a-4)

Pest: Anastrepha spp. (includes Mexican fruit fly, A. ludens)

Treatment: T106-a-1—Vapor Heat

Treatment: T106-a-2—Vapor Heat

Treatment: T106-a-3—Vapor Heat

Treatment: T106-a-4—Vapor Heat

T106-b Bell Pepper (T106-b-1), Eggplant (T106-b-2), Mountain 

Papaya (T106-b-3), Papaya (T106-b-4), Pineapple (T106-b-5), Squash 

(T106-b-6), Tomato (T106-b-7), Zucchini (T106-b-8)

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly), Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental 

fruit fly), and Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon fly; formerly known as 

Bactrocera cucurbitae)

Treatment: T106-b—Vapor heat

Treatment: T106-b-1 Bell Pepper

Treatment: T106-b-2 Eggplant

Treatment: T106-b-3 Mountain Papaya

Treatment: T106-b-4 Papaya

Treatment: T106-b-5 Pineapple

Treatment: T106-b-6 Squash

Treatment: T106-b-7 Tomato

Treatment: T106-b-8 Zucchini
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T106-a-1-1 Clementine or Orange From Mexico

5-2-28 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T106-a-1-1 Clementine or Orange From Mexico

Treatment: T106-a-1-1—Vapor heat

T106-f Litchi and Longan From Hawaii

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly) and Bactrocera dorsalis

(Oriental fruit fly)

Treatment: T106-f—Vapor heat

T106-d-1 Mango From the Philippines (Island of Guimaras Only)

Pest: Bactrocera occipitalis, Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon fly; formerly 

known as Bactrocera cucurbitae), and Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental fruit fly; 

formerly known as Bactrocera philippinensis)

Treatment: T106-d-1—Vapor heat

T106-d Mango from Taiwan

Pest: Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental fruit fly) and Zeugodacus cucurbitae

(melon fly; formerly known as Bactrocera cucurbitae)

Treatment: T106-d—Vapor heat

T106-c Papaya

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly), Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental 

fruit fly), and Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon fly; formerly known as 

Bactrocera cucurbitae)

Treatment: T106-c—Vapor heat

T106-e Yellow Dragon Fruit (Hylocereus megalanthus) From 

Colombia

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly) and Anastrepha fraterculus

(South American fruit fly)

Treatment: T106-e—Vapor heat
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T106-g Rambutan From Hawaii

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-29

T106-g Rambutan From Hawaii

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly) and Bactrocera dorsalis

(Oriental fruit fly)

Treatment: T106-g—Vapor heat

T106-h Sweet Potato From Hawaii

Pest: Cylas formicarius (sweet potato weevil), Euscepes postfasciatus (West 

Indian sweet potato weevil), and Omphisa anastomosalis (sweet potato vine 

borer)

Treatment: T106-h—Vapor heat

T107—Cold Treatment

Pulp of the Fruit

The pulp of the fruit must be at or below the indicated temperature at time of 

beginning treatment for all cold treatments.

Fruits for Which Cold Treatment is Authorized

The following cold treatment schedules are authorized by Plant Protection and 

Quarantine (PPQ) for the control of specific pests associated with 

consignments of fruit. The cold treatment schedule that must be used for a 

specific commodity from a specific country is listed in the Agricultural 

Commodity Import Requirements (ACIR) database. These cold treatment 

schedules indicate the specific pests for which they are designed to control.

Treatment upon arrival may be accomplished at authorized ports as named in 

the permits.

Treatment in-transit may be authorized for specifically equipped and approved 

vessels or containers, and from approved countries for entry at ports named in 

the permits. Intransit cold treatment authorization must be preceded by a visit 

to the country of origin by a PPQ Official to explain loading, inspection, and 

certification procedures to designated certifying officials of the country of 

origin. Refrigerated compartments on carrying vessels and cold storage 

warehouses must have prior certification by PPQ. Authorization of cold 

treatments from countries with direct sailing time less than the number of days 

prescribed for in-transit cold treatment must be contingent on the importer 
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T107-a Apple, Apricot, Avocado, Blueberry, Cape Gooseberry, Cherry, Citrus, Ethrog, Grape, Kiwi, Loquat, Litchi (Lychee),

5-2-30 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

understanding that the prescribed in-transit refrigeration period must be met 

before arrival of the vessel at the approved U.S. port.

Gaps in the cold treatment data printout for pulp sensors and air sensors shall 

be allowed or disallowed on a case-by-case basis, taking into account the 

number of gaps, the length of each gap, and the temperatures before and after. 

Air temperatures may occasionally exceed treatment temperatures during 

defrost cycles; however, fruit temperatures should not rise appreciably during 

this time. During non-defrost times, the temperatures of the air sensors should 

never exceed the maximum allowable treatment temperature.

T107-a Apple, Apricot, Avocado, Blueberry, Cape Gooseberry, 

Cherry, Citrus, Ethrog, Grape, Kiwi, Loquat, Litchi (Lychee), 

Nectarine, Orange, Ortanique, Peach, Pear, Persimmon, Plum, 

Plumcot, Pomegranate, Pummelo, Quince, Sand Pear

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly) and Ceratitis rosa (Natal fruit 

fly)

Treatment: T107-a—Cold treatment

T107-a-1 Apple, Apricot, Blueberry, Cherry, Grape, Grapefruit, Kiwi, 

Mandarin, Nectarine, Orange, Peach, Pear, Plum, Pomegranate, 

Quince, Sweet Orange, Tangelo, Tangerine (Includes Clementine)

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly) and species of Anastrepha

(other than Anastrepha ludens)

Treatment: T107-a-1—Cold treatment

T107-a-2 Orange (Citrus sinensis) and Tangor (Citrus nobilis) From 

Australia

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-a-2—Cold treatment

NOTICE

The fruit must be precooled at or below the target treatment temperature prior to 

loading. A certified USDA representative must sample the fruit pulp temperatures 

during loading in all sections of the lot until precooling has been accomplished.
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T107-a-3 Lemon (Citrus limon) From Australia

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-31

T107-a-3 Lemon (Citrus limon) From Australia

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-a-3—Cold treatment

T107-b Apple, Apricot, Cherry, Ethrog, Grapefruit, Litchi, Longan, 

Orange, Peach, Persimmon, Plum, Pomegranate, Tangerine 

(includes Clementine), White Zapote

Pest: Anastrepha ludens (Mexican fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-b—Cold treatment

T107-c Apple, Apricot, Carambola, Cherry, Grape, Grapefruit, 

Orange, Pomegranate, Tangerine (Includes Clementine)

Pest: Species of ‘Anastrepha (other than Anastrepha ludens)

Treatment: T107-c—Cold treatment

T107-d Apple, Citrus, Kiwi, Pear

Pest: Bactrocera tryoni (Queensland fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-d—Cold treatment

T107-d-1 Cherry From Australia

Pest: Bactrocera tryoni (Queensland fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-d-1—Cold treatment

T107-d-2 Orange (Citrus sinensis), Tangerine/Clementine/Mandarin 

(C. reticulata), Tangelo (C. paradisi x C. reticulata), and Tangor (C. 

nobilis) From Australia

Pest: Bactrocera tryoni (Queensland fruit fly) and B. neohumeralis (lesser 

Queensland fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-d-2—Cold treatment
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T107-d-3 Lemon (Citrus limon) and Grapefruit From Australia

5-2-32 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T107-d-3 Lemon (Citrus limon) and Grapefruit From Australia

Pest: Bactrocera tryoni (Queensland fruit fly) and B. neohumeralis (lesser 

Queensland fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-d-3—Cold treatment
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T107-e Apricot, Citrus, Grape, Nectarine, Peach, Plum

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-33

T107-e Apricot, Citrus, Grape, Nectarine, Peach, Plum

Pest: Thaumatotibia leucotreta (false codling moth), Ceratitis capitata

(Mediterranean fruit fly), C. quinaria (five-spotted, Rhodesian, or 

Zimbabwean fruit fly), C. rosa (Natal fruit fly), and Bactrocera dorsalis 

(Oriental fruit fly; formerly known as Bactrocera invadens)

Treatment: T107-e—Cold treatment

T107-h Carambola, Litchi (lychee), Longan, Sand Pear

Pest: Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental fruit fly), Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon 

fly; formerly known as Bactrocera cucurbitae), and Conopomorpha sinensis

(lychee fruit borer)

Treatment: T107-h—Cold treatment

T107-j Carambola, Litchi (Lychee), Longan, Sand Pear

Pest: Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-j—Cold treatment

T107-g Pecans and Hickory Nuts

Pest: Curculio caryae (pecan weevil)

Treatment: T107-g—Cold treatment

T107-f Ya Pear From China

Treatment: T107-f—Cold treatment

T107-i Barhi Date (Phoenix dactylifera L. ‘Barhi’)

Pest: Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-i—Cold treatment
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T107-L Orange (Citrus sinensis) and Tangerine/Clementine/Mandarin (C. reticulata)

5-2-34 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T107-L Orange (Citrus sinensis) and Tangerine/Clementine/

Mandarin (C. reticulata)

Pest: Bactrocera zonata (Peach fruit fly), Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean 

fruit fly), C. rosa (Natal fruit fly), and Anastrepha spp. (other than A. ludens)

Treatment: T107-L Cold treatment

T107-m Guava (Psidium guajava)

Pest: Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental fruit fly)

Treatment: T107-m—Cold treatment

T107-n Guava (Psidium guajava)

Pest: Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental fruit fly), Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon 

fly; formerly known as B.cucurbitae), and Zeugodacus tau (formerly known as 

B. tau)

Treatment: T107-n—Cold treatment

T107-o Nanfeng Honey Mandarin (Citrus x aurantium cv. ’Kinokuni’); 

Ponkan (C. x poonensis hort. ex Tanaka); Sweet Orange (C. 

sinensis); and Unshu/Satsuma Orange (C. unshiu) from China

Pest: Bactrocera correcta, B. dorsalis, B. occipitalis, B. pedestris, Zeugodacus 

tau (formerly known as B. tau), and Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon fly; 

formerly known as B. cucurbitae)

Treatment: T107-o—Cold treatment
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T108—Fumigation Plus Cold Treatment of Fruits

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-35

T108—Fumigation Plus Cold Treatment of Fruits

The following treatment schedules (fumigation followed by cold treatment) are 

authorized by Plant Protection and Quarantine (PPQ) for the control of specific 

pests associated with consignments of fruit. The treatment schedule that must 

be used for a specific commodity from a specific country is listed in the 

Agricultural Commodity Import Requirements (ACIR) database. These 

treatment schedules indicate the specific pests for which they are designed to 

control.

T108-a Apple, Apricot, Avocado, Cherry, Grape, Kiwi, Nectarine, 

Peach, Pear, Plum, Quince

Pest: Zeugodacus cucurbitae (melon fly; formerly known as Bactrocera 

cucurbitae), Bactrocera dorsalis (Oriental fruit fly), Bactrocera tryoni

(Queensland fruit fly), Brevipalpus chilensis (Chilean false red mite), Ceratitis 

capitata (Mediterranean fruit fly)

Treatment: T108-a-1—MB at NAP—Tarpaulin or Chamber Followed by Cold 

Treatment

Treatment: T108-a-2—MB at NAP—Tarpaulin or Chamber Followed by Cold 

Treatment

Treatment: T108-a-3—MB at NAP—Tarpaulin or Chamber Followed by Cold 

Treatment

! CAUTION

Some varieties of fruit may be injured by exposure to MB. Importers should be 

encouraged to treat small samples of fruit to determine tolerance levels before shipping commercial quantities. The USDA is not liable for damages caused by quarantine.
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T108-b Apple, Grape, and Pear

5-2-36 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T108-b Apple, Grape, and Pear

Pest: Austrotortrix spp. and Epiphyas spp. (light brown apple moth complex), 

Bactrocera tryoni (Queensland fruit fly), Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean 

fruit fly), and other fruit flies.

Treatment: T108-b—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber followed by cold 

treatment

T109—Cold Treatment Plus Fumigation of Fruits

T109-d-1 Apple, Grape, and Pear From Australia

Pest: Austrotortrix spp. and Epiphyas spp. (light brown apple moth complex), 

Bactrocera tryoni (Queensland fruit fly), Ceratitis capitata (Mediterranean 

fruit fly), and other fruit flies

Treatment: T109-d-1—Cold treatment followed by MB at NAP—tarpaulin or 

chamber

T109-a Apple (All Varieties from Japan and ‘Fuji’ Variety From the 

Republic of Korea)

Pest: Carposina niponensis (peach fruit moth), Conogethes punctiferalis

(yellow peach moth), Tetranychus viennensis (fruit tree spider mite), 

Tetranychus kanzawai (Kanzawa mite)

Two alternative schedules based on type of container:

T109-a-1 Apple (All Varieties from Japan and ‘Fuji’ Variety From the 

Republic of Korea)

Apples in plastic field bins at maximum load factor 50 percent or less.

Treatment: T109-a-1—Cold treatment followed by MB at NAP—tarpaulin or 

chamber
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T109-a-2 Apple (All Varieties from Japan and ‘Fuji’ Variety From the Republic of Korea)

03/2024-02 Treatment Manual 5-2-37

T109-a-2 Apple (All Varieties from Japan and ‘Fuji’ Variety From the 

Republic of Korea)

Apples in only cardboard cartons at maximum load factor 40 percent or less.

Treatment: T109-a-2—Cold treatment followed by MB at NAP—tarpaulin or 

chamber

T110—Quick Freeze

Under Development: See Quick Freeze Guidelines on page 3-7-17 for 

operational guidelines and equipment specifications.

T110-a

Treatment: T110-a—Quick freeze

T110-b

Treatment: T110-b—Quick freeze for destruction

T110-c Miscellaneous Food/Feed Commodities

T110-c-1

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the families Camaenidae (including the 

former Bradybaenidae), Geomitridae, Helicidae, Hygromiidae, and 

Succineidae, including the following genera: Backeljaia, Bradybaena, 

Candidula, Cepaea, Cathaica, Cernuella, Cochlicella, Helicella, Theba, 

Trochoidea, Xerolenta, Xeropicta, Xeroplexa, Xerosecta, Xerotricha

Treatment: T110-c-1—Cold treatment

NOTICE

Never use this treatment for the control of bruchid beetles in dried beans. Research 

has shown that a treatment of -0.4 °F (-18 °C) for 14 days would be needed to be 

efficacious.

NOTICE

Historically these treatments have been used on nonfood/nonfeed commodities. Be 

aware that the treatment may result in severe damage to food or feed commodities.

T110-c schedules may only be used with permission from S&T-TMT. Contact TMT 

by phone (305) 278-4877 or email ppqtmt@usda.gov for official approval.
Treatment Schedules T100 - Schedules for Fruits, Nuts, and Vegetables

T110-c-2

5-2-38 Treatment Manual 03/2024-02

T110-c-2

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Helicidae, including the 

following genera: Helix, Otala

Treatment: T110-c-2 —Cold treatment

T110-c-3

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Achatinidae, including the 

following genera: Achatina, Archachatina, Lignus, Limicolaria, Lissachatina

Treatment: T110-c-3—Cold treatment
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-3-1

Chapter

5

Treatment Schedules

T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant 

Material

Contents

T201—Plants 5-3-2

T202—Bulbs, Corms, Tubers, Rhizomes, and Roots 5-3-10

T203—Seeds 5-3-12

The condition of the plants at the time of treatment may have a bearing on 

reaction to treatment.

Report any new or unusual observances relating to treatment tolerance of 

treated material to the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT, giving details of the 

treatment and the conditions of application. In appraising the effects of a 

particular treatment, take care to distinguish between the actual or apparent 

effects attributable to the treatment and those not related to the treatment.

NOTICE

Plant and plants parts treated under the T200 series schedules are not to be used 

for food or feed purposes.

NOTICE

Containers. Give boxes, crates, and other propagative containers the same 

treatment as the propagative material with which they are associated. Exceptions

are necessary, however, when significant pests are found infesting containers or 

packing materials that would not be controlled by the treatment required for the 

contents.
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T201—Plants

5-3-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T201—Plants

T201-q Aquatic Plants Infested with Freshwater Snails

Pest: Snails of the following families: Ampulariidae, Lymnaeidae, 

Planorbidae, Viviparidae

Treatment: T201-q

T201-e-1 Bromeliads

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-e-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T201-e-2 Bromeliads

Pest: Internal feeders, such as borers and miners

Treatment: T201-e-2 MB (“Q” label only) at 15” vacuum

T201-f-1 Cacti and Other Succulents

Pest: External feeders (other than soft scales) infesting collected dormant and 

nondormant plant material

Treatment: T201-f-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T201-f-2 Cacti and Other Succulents

Pest: Borers and soft scales

Treatment: T201-f-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 15” vacuum

! CAUTION

Plant Tolerance. In general, nursery stock should be fumigated in a normal atmospheric pressure (NAP) chamber. Damage may occur when treatment is performed 

under a tarpaulin. When selecting a treatment for a particular pest, consider the tolerance of the plant material to the treatment. Refer to the “Handbook of Plant Tolerances to Quarantine Treatments” to determine if a genus or species is tolerant to 

treatment.
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T201-g-1 Chrysanthemum spp., Rooted and Unrooted Cuttings

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-3-3

T201-g-1 Chrysanthemum spp., Rooted and Unrooted Cuttings

Pest: Aphids

Treatment: T201-g-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T201-g-2 Chrysanthemum spp., Rooted and Unrooted Cuttings

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-g-2 Malathion-carbaryl chemical dip—Hand removal of 

pests of infested parts plus a malathion-carbaryl chemical dip. Solution 

prepared by adding 3 level tablespoons of 25 percent malathion wettable 

powder and 3 level tablespoons of 50 percent carbaryl wettable powder to each 

gallon of water. The addition of a sticker-spreader formulation may be required 

for hard to wet plants. Use fresh chemicals and prepare dip for the same day 

use. Plants, including the roots, should be entirely submerged in the chemical 

dip for 30 seconds.

T201-g-3 Chrysanthemum spp., Rooted and Unrooted Cuttings*

Pest: Leaf miners, aphids, mites, etc.

Treatment: T201-g-3—Hot water at 110-111 °F for 20 minutes
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T201-l Commodities Infested with Quarantine-Significant Slugs

5-3-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T201-l Commodities Infested with Quarantine-Significant Slugs

Pest: Quarantine significant slugs of the families Agriolimacidae, Arionidae, 

Limacidae, Milacidae, Philomycidae, and Veronicellidae, including the 

following genera:

Agriolimax, Arion, Colosius, Deroceras, Diplosolenodes, Leidyula, Limax, 

Meghimatium, Milax, Pallifera, Pseudoveronicella, Sarasinula, 

Semperula, Vaginulus, Veronicella

Treatment: T201-l MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T201-h-1 Cycads—Excluding Dioon edule (Chestnut Dioon)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-h-1 MB (“Q” label only) in 15” vacuum

T201-a-1 Deciduous Woody Plants (Dormant)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-a-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T201-a-2 Deciduous Woody Plants (Dormant)

Pest: Borers

Treatment: T201-a-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T201-h-2 Dioon edule (Chestnut Dioon)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-h-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T201-i-1 Dieffenbachia spp., Dracaena spp., Philodendron spp. 

(Plants and Cuttings)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-i-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T201-i-2 Dieffenbachia spp., Dracaena spp., Philodendron spp. (Plants and Cuttings)

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-3-5

T201-i-2 Dieffenbachia spp., Dracaena spp., Philodendron spp. 

(Plants and Cuttings)

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T201-i-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T201-b-1 Evergreens (Broadleaved and Coniferous Genera)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-b-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T201-k-1 Foliated Host Plants of Dialeurodes citri (Citrus Whitefly), 

Excluding Osmanthus americanus

Pest: Dialeurodes citri (citrus whitefly)

Treatment: T201-k-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T201-c-1 Greenhouse-Grown Plants, Herbaceous Plants and 

Cuttings, and Greenwood Cuttings of Woody Plants

Pest: External feeders, leaf miners, mealybugs, thrips

Treatment: T201-c-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T201-c-2 Greenhouse-Grown Plants, Herbaceous Plants and 

Cuttings, and Greenwood Cuttings of Woody Plants

Pest: Borers, soft scales

Treatment: T201-c-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 15” vacuum

T201-n Host Plants of Aleurocanthus woglumi (Citrus Blackfly)

Pest: Aleurocanthus woglumi (citrus blackfly)

Treatment: T201-n MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T201-o-1 Host Plants of Omalonyx spp. and Succinea spp. (Snails)

5-3-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T201-o-1 Host Plants of Omalonyx spp. and Succinea spp. (Snails)

Pest: Omalonyx spp. and Succinea spp. (snails)

Treatment: T201-o-1 Water Spray

T201-o-2 Host Plants of Omalonyx spp. and Succinea spp. (Snails)

Treatment: T201-o-2 Chemical Dip—Dip plants with a Malathion-carbaryl 

chemical dip. Solution prepared by adding 3 level tablespoons of 25 percent 

Malathion wettable powder and 6 level tablespoons of 50 percent carbaryl 

wettable powder per gallon of water with a sticker-spreader formulation.

T201-k-2 Nonfoliated Host Plants of Dialeurodes citri (Citrus 

Whitefly), Excluding Osmanthus americanus

Pest: Dialeurodes citri (citrus whitefly)

Treatment: T201-k-2 MB (“Q” label) at NAP

T201-d-1 Orchids, Plants, and Cuttings (Dormant or Nondormant)

Pest: External feeders, other than soft scales

Treatment: T201-d-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T201-d-2 Orchids, Plants, and Cuttings

Pest: External feeders (other than soft scales) infesting greenhouse-grown 

plant material

Treatment: T201-d-2 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T201-d-3 Orchids, Plants, and Cuttings

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-3-7

T201-d-3 Orchids, Plants, and Cuttings

Pest: Borers, cattleya fly, Mordellistena spp., soft scales, Vinsonia spp.

Treatment: T201-d-3 MB (“Q” label only) in 15” vacuum

T201-d-4 Orchids, Plants, and Cuttings

Pest: Cecidomyid galls

Treatment: T201-d-4 Excised in all cases

T201-d-5 Orchids, Plants, and Cuttings

Pest: Leaf miner, Eurytoma spp., infesting Rhynchostylis

Treatment: T201-d-5 Hot water

T201-e-3-1 Pineapple Slips

Pest: Various

Treatment: T201-e-3-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T201-e-3-2 Pineapple Slips

Treatment: T201-e-3-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T201-j Pines (Pinus spp.) From Canada (destined to California, 

Idaho, Oregon, and Utah)

Pest: Rhyacionia buoliana (European pine shoot moth)

Treatment: T201-j MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T201-m-1 Plant Cuttings (Scion Wood)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-m-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T201-m-2 Plant Cuttings (Greenwood Cuttings of Woody Plants and Herbaceous Plant Cuttings)

5-3-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T201-m-2 Plant Cuttings (Greenwood Cuttings of Woody Plants and 

Herbaceous Plant Cuttings)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-m-2 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T201-m-3 Plant Cuttings (Root Cuttings)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-m-3 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—chamber

T201-m-4 Plant Cuttings (Root Cuttings)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T201-m-4 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T201-p Plant Material Not Tolerant to Fumigation

Three treatments based on pest

Propagative material known to be sensitive to fumigation (see Handbook of 

Plant Tolerance to Quarantine Treatments) should be handled using T201-p-1 

or T201-p-4. The selection of the method will depend upon the character of the 

plant material and the type of pests that may be found.

T201-p-1 Plant Material Not Tolerant to Fumigation

Pest: Actionable pests excluding scale insects

Treatment: T201-p-1 Hand removal
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T201-p-2 Plant Material Not Tolerant to Fumigation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-3-9

T201-p-2 Plant Material Not Tolerant to Fumigation

Pest: Actionable Pests

Treatment: T201-p-2 Hand removal plus chemical dip—Hand removal of pests 

of infested parts plus a malathion/carbaryl chemical dip. Solution prepared by 

adding 3 level tablespoons of 25 percent malathion wettable powder and 3 

level tablespoons of 50 percent carbaryl wettable powder to each gallon of 

water. The addition of a sticker-spreader formulation may be required for hard 

to wet plants. Use fresh chemicals and prepare dip for the same day use. Plants, 

including the roots, should be entirely submerged in the chemical dip for 30 

seconds.

T201-p-3 Plant Material Not Tolerant to Fumigation—Deleted (Docket 

APHIS-13-009-2, July 21, 2015)

T201-p-4 Plant Material Not Tolerant to Fumigation

Pests: 

Insects (Aphididae, Thripidae, Formicidae, Coccidae,, Pseudococcidae, 

Diaspididae, Pyralidae, Tortricidae, Syrphidae, Scarabaeidae, 

Curculionidae, Tenebrionidae)

Snails (Ampullariidae, Planorbidae)

Mites (Acaridae, Tarsonemidae, Tetranychidae, Tydeidae)

Nematodes (Pratylenchus (genus only))

Treatment: T201-p-4 Hand removal plus hot water treatment
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T202—Bulbs, Corms, Tubers, Rhizomes, and Roots

5-3-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T202—Bulbs, Corms, Tubers, Rhizomes, and Roots

T202-b Astilbe Roots

Pest: Otiorhynchus (formerly Brachyrhinus) larvae

Treatment: T202-b MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T202-c Banana Roots

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T202-c Hot water

T202-j Garlic

Pest: Brachycerus spp. (garlic beetles) and Dyspessa ulula (Bkh.) (onion/garlic 

carpenterworm)

Treatment: T202-j MB (“Q” label only) in 15” vacuum

T202-j-1 Garlic

Pest: Brachycerus spp. (garlic beetles) and Dyspessa ulula (Bkh.) (onion/garlic 

carpenterworm)

Treatment: T202-j-1 MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T202-e-1 Gladiolus spp.

Pest: Taeniothrips simplex (gladiolus thrips)

Treatment: T202-e-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T202-e-2 Gladiolus spp.

Pest: Taeniothrips simplex (gladiolus thrips)

Treatment: T202-e-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T202-f Horseradish Roots

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-3-11

T202-f Horseradish Roots

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T202-f MB in 15” vacuum

T202-g Lily Bulbs Packed in Subsoil

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T202-g MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T202-h Lycoris

Pest: Taeniothrips eucharii

Treatment: T202-h MB in 26” vacuum

T202-i-1 Narcissus

Pest: Steneotarsonemus laticeps (bulb scale mite)

Treatment: T202-i-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T202-i-2 Narcissus

Pest: Steneotarsonemus laticeps (bulb scale mite)

Treatment: T202-i-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum chamber

T202-i-3 Narcissus

Pest: Steneotarsonemus laticeps (bulb scale mite)

Treatment: T202-i-3 Hot water

T202-a-1 Selaginella spp. (Resurrection Plants)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T202-a-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—chamber
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T202-a-2 Selaginella spp. (Resurrection Plants)

5-3-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T202-a-2 Selaginella spp. (Resurrection Plants)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T202-a-2 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T202-a-3 Selaginella spp. (Resurrection Plants)

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T202-a-3 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum—chamber

T202-d Yams (Dioscorea spp.) and Sweet Potatoes (Ipomoea spp.)

Pest: Internal and external feeders

Treatment: T202-d MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T203—Seeds

T203-m Avocado (Seeds Only Without Pulp)

Pest: Avocado seed weevils (Conotrachelus spp., Heilipus lauri, and 

Caulophilus latinasus); avocado stem weevil (Copturus aguacatae), and 

avocado seed moth (Stenoma catenifer)

Treatment: T203-m MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

NOTICE

Any seed listed in other import manuals as requiring treatment, regardless of exception or waiver, is not eligible for a Small Lots of Seed (SLS) permit.

! CAUTION

MB fumigation may effect germination. Obtain the importers consent prior to 

fumigation.
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T203-e Chestnuts (Excludes Water Chestnuts) and Acorns

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-3-13

T203-e Chestnuts (Excludes Water Chestnuts) and Acorns

From all countries except Canada and Mexico

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T203-e MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T203-e-1 Chestnuts (Excludes Water Chestnuts) and Acorns

Pest: Cydia splendana (nut fruit tortrix) and Curculio spp.

Treatment: T203-e-1 MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T203-i-1 Conifer Seeds (Species with Small Seeds, Such as Picea

spp., Pinus sylvestris, and Pinus mugo)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T203-i-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T203-i-2 Conifer Seeds (Species With Small Seeds, Such as Picea

spp., Pinus sylvestris, and Pinus mugo)

Pest: Internal feeders, nutlike seeds, or when seeds are tightly packed so as to 

make fumigant penetration questionable.

Treatment: T203-i-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T203-i-3 Conifer Seeds (Species with Small Seeds, Such as Picea

spp., Pinus sylvestris, and Pinus mugo)

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T203-i-3 MB (“Q” label only) tarpaulin

T203-f-1 Cottonseed—Bagged, Packaged, or in Bulk

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T203-f-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—chamber
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T203-f-2 Cottonseed—Bagged, Packaged, or in Bulk

5-3-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T203-f-2 Cottonseed—Bagged, Packaged, or in Bulk

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T203-f-2 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T203-f-3 Cottonseed—Bagged, Packaged, or in Bulk

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T203-f-3 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum—chamber

T203-f-4 Cottonseed—Bagged, Packaged, or in Bulk

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T203-f-4 Phosphine at NAP

T203-g-1 Pods and Seeds of Kenaf, Hibiscus, and Okra

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T203-g-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T203-g-2 Pods and Seeds of Kenaf, Hibiscus, and Okra

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T203-g-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum—chamber (kenaf 

and okra seed only)

T203-g-3 Pods and Seeds of Kenaf, Hibiscus, and Okra

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T203-g-3 Phosphine at NAP

T203-k Macadamia Nuts (as Seeds)

Pest: Cryptophlebia illepida (koa seedworm)

Treatment: T203-k MB (“Q” label only) at NAP
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T203-k-1 Macadamia Nuts (as Seeds)

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-3-15

T203-k-1 Macadamia Nuts (as Seeds)

Pest: Cryptophlebia illepida (koa seedworm)

Treatment: T203-k-1 MB (“Q” label only) tarpaulin

T203-h Rosmarinus Seeds

Pest: Juvenile Helicella spp. (snails) or internal feeders

Treatment: T203-h MB (“Q” label only) at 26” vacuum

T203-l Seeds

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T203-l MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T203-b Seeds Excluding Seeds of Vicia spp.

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles)

Treatment: T203-b MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T203-o (deleted)

T203-a-1 Seeds Not Specifically Listed in the T203 Schedules

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T203-a-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T203-a-2 Seeds Not Specifically Listed in the T203 Schedules

Pest: Internal feeders, except Megastigmus spp.

Treatment: T203-a-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T203-a-3 Seeds Not Specifically Listed in the T203 Schedules

Pest: External feeders

Treatment: T203-a-3 MB (“Q” label only) tarpaulin
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T203-o-1 Seeds of Casuarina

5-3-16 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T203-o-1 Seeds of Casuarina

Pest: Bootanomyia spp. (in Casuarina)

Treatment: T203-o-1 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T203-j Seeds of Hevea brasiliensis (Rubber Tree)

Pest: Seed-boring insects

Treatment: T203-j MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T203-j-1 Seeds of Hevea brasiliensis (Rubber Tree)

Pest: Seed-boring insects

Treatment: T203-j-1 MB (“Q” label only) tarpaulin

T203-o-3 Seeds of Leguminosae (Fabaceae)

Pest: Bruchophagus spp., Eurytoma spp.

Treatment: T203-o-3 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T203-c Seeds of Leguminosae (Fabaceae)

Pest: Caryedon spp.

Treatment: T203-c MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—chamber

T203-o-4-1 Seeds of Leguminosae (Fabaceae)

Pest: Caryedon spp. (in or with, etc.)

Treatment: T203-o-4-1 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T203-o-4-2 Seeds of Leguminosae (Fabaceae)

Pest: Caryedon spp. (in or with, etc.)

Treatment: T203-o-4-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T203-d-1 Seeds of Leguminosae (Fabaceae), excluding Vicia faba

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-3-17

T203-d-1 Seeds of Leguminosae (Fabaceae), excluding Vicia faba

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles) excluding the beetles of Caryedon spp.

Treatment: T203-d-1 MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T203-o-5 Seeds of Lonicera and Other Seeds

Pest: Rhagoletis cerasi (European cherry fruit fly) pupae (Diptera: Tephritidae)

Treatment: T203-o-5 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T203-p Seeds of Citrus (Rutaceae Family)

Pest: Citrus canker (Xanthomonas citri)

Treatment: T203-p Hot water plus chemical dip

T203-o-2 Seeds of Umbelliferae

Pest: Systole spp. (in Umbelliferae)

Treatment: T203-o-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T203-c-1 Seeds of Vicia spp. (Vetch Seeds) Including Seeds of Vicia 

faba

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles)

Treatment: T203-c-1 MB (“Q” label only) at NAP tarpaulin or chamber

T203-d-2 Seeds of Vicia spp. (Vetch Seeds) Including Seeds of Vicia 

faba

Pest: Bruchidae (seed beetles)

Treatment: T203-d-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum (except Vicia faba)

Treatment: T203-d-2 MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum (use for Vicia faba)
Treatment Schedules T200 - Schedules for Propagative Plant Material

T203-n Seeds with Infested Pulp

5-3-18 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T203-n Seeds with Infested Pulp

Pest: Fruit flies and other pulp-infesting insects

Treatment: T203-n Depulping
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-4-1

Chapter

5

Treatment Schedules

T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant 

Products

Contents

T301-a—Cotton and Cotton Products (Pectinophora spp.) 5-4-2

T302—Grains and Seeds Not Intended for Propagation 5-4-4

T303—Rice 5-4-7

T304—Alpha (alfa) Grass and Handicrafts (Stipa tenacissima, Ampelodesmos 

mauritanicus) 5-4-9

T305—Cut Flowers and Greenery 5-4-10

T306—Bags and Bagging Material, Covers 5-4-10

T307—Khapra Beetle Infested Material 5-4-11

T308—Tobacco 5-4-13

T309—Broomcorn and Broomcorn Articles 5-4-14

T310—Tick-Infested Materials (Nonfood) 5-4-15

T311—Hay, Baled 5-4-16

T312—Oak Logs and Lumber 5-4-16

T313—Christmas Trees 5-4-16

T314—Logs and Firewood 5-4-17

During the extended exposure period, the concentrations must remain stable 

and the prescribed minimums be met at the end of the extension. Otherwise, 

the treatment may be voided and retreatment required. Examples of 

commodities for which extended exposure periods may be approved include: 

cotton piece goods, baled cotton, bagging, wood, marble, soil as such, etc. 

Examples of commodities for which no extension may be approved include: 

cottonseed, grain, tobacco, etc. An extension of exposure period for other 

purposes is not permitted except as may be prescribed in various schedules for 

concentration readings below minimum.

Additional safety precautions, including additional aeration, may be required 

because of the extended exposure period. The PPQ officer or the commercial 

fumigator will specify any needed precautions.

NOTICE

Exposure period may be extended for any commodity which cannot be used for 

food or propagation. This extension is only a matter of convenience for the importer 

and is intended only for the purpose of reducing treatment costs. The request for 

extension must come from the importer or an authorized representative and should 

be confirmed in writing. A letter is not required for each treatment. A single blanket 

request is acceptable and renewed each year, as required.
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T301-a—Cotton and Cotton Products (Pectinophora spp.)

5-4-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T301-a—Cotton and Cotton Products (Pectinophora spp.)

T301-a-3 Baled lint or linters

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-3—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T301-a-7 Cottonseed (samples and bulk)

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-7—Acid delinting and heat treatment (alternative 

treatment)

T301-b—Cotton and Cotton Products (Khapra Beetle)

T301-b-1-1 Baled lint, linters, waste, piece goods, gin trash

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T301-b-1-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP —tarpaulin

T301-b-1-2 Baled lint, linters, waste, piece goods, gin trash

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T301-b-1-2—MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum chamber

T301-b-2 Cottonseed, cottonseed products, or samples

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T301-b-2—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T301-b-3 Cottonseed meal (not for food or feed)

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T301-b-3—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T301-c Cotton and cotton products

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-4-3

T301-c Cotton and cotton products

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T301-c—MB (“Q” label) at NAP—chamber

T301-d-1-1 Cotton and cotton products

Pest: Anthonomus grandis (boll weevil)

Treatment: T301-d-1-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T301-d-1-2 Cotton and cotton products

Pest: Anthonomus grandis (boll weevil)

Treatment: T301-d-1-2—Phosphine at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T301-a-1-1 Lint, linters, cottonseed meal and hulls, gin trash, waste, 

or other baled or bulk commodities (except samples)

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-1-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—chamber

T301-a-1-2 Lint, linters, cottonseed meal and hulls, gin trash, waste, 

or other baled or bulk commodities (except samples)

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-1-2—MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum—chamber

T301-a-6 Lint, linters, and cottonseed (bulk, sacked, or packaged 

cottonseed, lint or linters, cottonseed hulls, gin trash, and all other 

baled or bulk cotton commodities)

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-6—Phosphine at NAP
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T301-a-2 Lint (except baled lint or linters), cottonseed hulls and meal, gin trash, waste, or other baled or bulk commodities

5-4-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T301-a-2 Lint (except baled lint or linters), cottonseed hulls and 

meal, gin trash, waste, or other baled or bulk commodities 

(excluding samples)

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-2—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T301-a-4 Packaged cottonseed

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-4—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T301-a-5-1 Samples of cotton and cotton products

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-5-1—MB at NAP—chamber

T301-a-5-2 Samples of cotton and cotton products

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-5-2—MB in 26” vacuum—chamber

T301-e Cottonseed for food or feed

Pest: Fusarium oxysporum f. sp. vasinfectum strains VCG 01111 and VCG 

01112

Treatment: 301-e—MB at NAP—tarpaulin

T302—Grains and Seeds Not Intended for Propagation

If grain and seeds are for propagation, use appropriate treatment in T203 

schedules.

T302-g-1 Acorns not intended for propagation

Pest: Cydia splendana (nut fruit tortrix) and Curculio spp. (weevils)

Treatment: T302-g-1—MB at NAP—tarpaulin, chamber, or van container
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T302-g-2 Acorns not intended for propagation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-4-5

T302-g-2 Acorns not intended for propagation

Pest: Cydia splendana (nut fruit tortrix) and Curculio spp. (weevils)

Treatment: T302-g-2—MB in 26” vacuum—chamber

T302-a-1-1 Ear corn

Pest: Borers

Treatment: T302-a-1-1—MB at NAP—chamber only

T302-a-1-2 Ear corn

Pest: Borers

Treatment: T302-a-1-2—Dry heat

T302-c—Grains and seeds not intended for propagation, and plant 

gums

T302-c-1 Grains and seeds not intended for propagation, and plant 

gums

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T302-c-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin

T302-c-2 Grains and seeds not intended for propagation, and plant 

gums

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T302-c-2—MB (“Q” label gas) in 26” vacuum—chamber (load 

limit 75 percent of chamber volume)
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T302-c-3 Grains and seeds not intended for propagation, and plant gums

5-4-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T302-c-3 Grains and seeds not intended for propagation, and plant 

gums

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T302-c-3—MB (“Q” gas only) in NAP—chamber

When both woodborers and khapra beetles are involved, use Schedule T404-d

T302-d Grains and seeds not intended for propagation and 

contaminated with cottonseed

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T301-a-1-1 Lint, linters, cottonseed meal and hulls, gin trash, 

waste, or other baled or bulk commodities (except samples) or T301-a-1-2 

Lint, linters, cottonseed meal and hulls, gin trash, waste, or trash waste or other 

baled or builk commodities (except samples)

T302-e-1 Grains and seeds not intended for propagation

The following commodities are considered as “grains and seeds not for 

propagation” and are on the MB labels at the rates in the bulleted list:

40 F and above: barley, corn, oats, popcorn, processed food and grains, 

rice, rye, sorghum (milo), wheat, dried beans and peas, dried faba beans, 

peanuts and tree nuts (almonds, Brazil nuts, bushnuts, butternuts, 

cashews, filberts, hickory nuts, macadamia nuts, pecans, pistachios, 

walnuts), seeds of dried herbs and spices (refer to T101-n-2-1-1)

FIFRA Section 18:

40 F and above: unprocessed cucurbit seed, coffee bean (green unroasted), 

and oilseeds (See Appendix F: Crop Group 20 for a list of commodities 

included in the oilseed group)

Pest: Insects other than Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T302-e-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—chamber
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T302-e-2 Grains and seeds not intended for propagation

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-4-7

T302-e-2 Grains and seeds not intended for propagation

Pest: Insects other than Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T302-e-2—MB (“Q” label only) at 26” vacuum—chamber

T302-e-3 Grains and seeds not intended for propagation

Pest: Insects other than Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T302-e-3—MB (“Q” label only) tarpaulin or chamber

T302-f Grains and seeds (excluding Rosmarinus seed) not intended 

for propagation

Pest: Snails

Treatment: T302-f—Mechanical separation by screening or hand removal

T302-b-1-1 Shelled corn

Treatment: T302-b-1-1 Reserved

T302-b-1-2 Shelled corn contaminated with cottonseed

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T302-b-1-2

T303—Rice

T303-a (removed)

T303-a-1 through T303-a-3 have been removed. Effective November 1, 2011, 

APHIS reclassified Panicle Rice Mite (Steneotarsonemus spinki, PRM) to a 

non-quarantine pest.
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T303-d-1 Articles made with rice straw

5-4-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T303-d-1 Articles made with rice straw

Pest: Fungal diseases of rice or internal feeders

Treatment: T303-d-1—Dry heat at 180-200 °F for 2 hours

T303-d-2 Articles made with rice straw

Pest: Fungal diseases of rice or internal feeders

Treatment: T303-d-2—Steam sterilization

T303-d-2-1 Articles made with rice straw

Pest: Fungal diseases of rice or internal feeders

Treatment: T303-d-2-1—Steam sterilization, use T303-b-1 Rice straw hulls 

(tightly packed) imported for purposes other than approved processing. 

T303-d-2-3 Articles made with rice straw for indoor use only

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T303-d-2-3—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T303-d-2-2 Articles made with rice straw for indoor use only

Pest: Internal feeders

Treatment: T303-d-2-2—MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T303-b-1 Rice straw and hulls (tightly packed) imported for purposes 

other than approved processing

Pest: Fungal diseases of rice

Treatment: T303-b-1—Steam sterilization, for closely packed commodity
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T303-b-2 Rice straw and hulls (loosely packed) imported for purposes other than approved processing

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-4-9

T303-b-2 Rice straw and hulls (loosely packed) imported for 

purposes other than approved processing

Pest: Fungal diseases of rice

Treatment: T303-b-2—Steam sterilization, for commodity packed as loose 

masses

Use T303-b-1 Rice straw and hulls (tightly packed) imported for purposes oter 

than approved processing or, if without initial vacuum, bleed air until steam 

vapor escapes.

T303-c-1 Rice straw and hulls imported in small lots of 25 lbs. or less

Pest: Fungal diseases of rice

Treatment: T303-c-1—Dry heat at 212 °F for 1 hour

T304—Alpha (alfa) Grass and Handicrafts (Stipa tenacissima, 

Ampelodesmos mauritanicus)

T304-a Alpha (alfa) grass and handicrafts (Stipa tenacissima, 

Ampelodesmos mauritanicus)

Pest: Infested with Harmolita spp. (jointworms)

Treatment: T304-a—MB at NAP—chamber only

T304-b Alpha (alfa) grass and handicrafts (Stipa tenacissima, 

Ampelodesmos mauritanicus)

Pest: Infested with Harmolita spp. (jointworms)

Treatment: T304-b—MB in 26” vacuum
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T305—Cut Flowers and Greenery

5-4-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T305—Cut Flowers and Greenery

T305-a Cut flowers and greenery

Pest: External feeders, leaf miners1, hitchhikers, surface pests, and slugs

Treatment: T305-a—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T305-b Cut flowers and greenery

Pest: Borers or soft scales

Treatment: T305-b—MB (“Q” label only) in 15” vacuum

T305-c Cut flowers and greenery

Pest: Mealybugs

Treatment: T305-c—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber

T306—Bags and Bagging Material, Covers

T306-a Bags and bagging material or covers used to contain root 

crops

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T306-a—MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T306-b Bags and bagging material or covers used for cotton only

Pest: Pectinophora spp.

Treatment: T306-b—MB (Bulk consignments)

Treatment: T306-b—MB (Other than bulk consignments)
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T306-c—Bags and bagging material or covers

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-4-11

T306-c—Bags and bagging material or covers

T306-c-1 Bags and bagging material or covers

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T306-c-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T306-c-2 Bags and bagging material or covers

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T306-c-2—MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T306-d-1Bagging from unroasted coffee beans

Pest: Various

Treatment: T306-d-1—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T306-d-2 Bagging from unroasted coffee beans

Pest: Various

Treatment: T306-d-2—MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T307—Khapra Beetle Infested Material

T307-a Feeds and milled products heated as part of the processing 

procedure, or other commodities that can be subjected to heat

Pest: Khapra beetle

Treatment: T307-a—Heat treatment
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

Reference Table for Miscellaneous Products Infested with Khapra beetle

5-4-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Reference Table for Miscellaneous Products Infested with Khapra 

beetle

Pest: Khapra beetle

Treatment: Summary of fumigation treatments

Table 5-4-1 Fumigation Treatment Options for Khapra Beetle Infested Material

Bags and bagging See T306-c—Bags and bagging material or covers

on page 5-4-11

Cotton products See T301-b—Cotton and Cotton Products (Khapra 

Beetle) on page 5-4-2

Finely ground oily meals See T306-c—Bags and bagging material or covers

on page 5-4-11

Grains and seeds See T302-c—Grains and seeds not intended for 

propagation, and plant gums on page 5-4-5

Flour See T306-c—Bags and bagging material or covers

on page 5-4-11

Sorptive materials (See 

Sorption on page 2-3-10 for a 

list of sorptive materials)

See T302-c—Grains and seeds not intended for 

propagation, and plant gums on page 5-4-5

Goatskins, lambskins, 

sheepskins (skins and 

hides),

See T416—Goatskins, Lambskins, Sheepskins (Skins 

and Hides) on page 5-5-19

Other miscellaneous productsSee T302-c—Grains and seeds not intended for 

propagation, and plant gums on page 5-4-5
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T308—Tobacco

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-4-13

T308—Tobacco

T308-e Blended strip tobacco

Pest: Lasioderma serricorne (cigarette beetle) and Ephestia elutella (tobacco 

moth)

Treatment: T308-e—Vacuum-steam flow method

T308-c Leaf tobacco 

Pest: Lasioderma serricorne (cigarette beetle) and Ephestia elutella (tobacco 

moth)

Treatment: T308-c—Vacuum-steam flow process followed by reconditioning

T308-d Stored tobacco

Pest: Lasioderma serricorne (cigarette beetle) and Ephestia elutella (tobacco 

moth)

Treatment: T308-d—Kabat®

T308-a-1 Tobacco (flue-cured and burley in hogshead and cases; 

Turkish in bales; cigar filler/binder in cases or bales; and cigar 

wrappers in bales)

Pest: Lasioderma serricorne (cigarette beetle) and Ephestia elutella (tobacco 

moth)

Treatment: T308-a-1—MB in 28” vacuum

T308-a-2 Tobacco (flue cured and burley in hogshead and cases; 

Turkish in bales; cigar filler/binder in cases or bales; and cigar 

wrappers in bales)

Pest: Lasioderma serricorne (cigarette beetle) and Ephestia elutella (tobacco 

moth)

Treatment: T308-a-2—MB at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T308-b-1 Tobacco (flue cured and burley in hogshead and cases; Turkish in bales; cigar filler/binder in cases or bales; and

5-4-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T308-b-1 Tobacco (flue cured and burley in hogshead and cases; 

Turkish in bales; cigar filler/binder in cases or bales; and cigar 

wrappers in bales)

Pest: Lasioderma serricorne (cigarette beetle) and Ephestia elutella (tobacco 

moth)

Treatment: T308-b-1—Phosphine at NAP—tarpaulin or freight containers

T308-b-2 Tobacco (flue cured and burley in hogshead and cases; 

Turkish in bales; cigar filler/binder in cases or bales; and cigar 

wrappers in bales)

Pest: Lasioderma serricorne (cigarette beetle) and Ephestia elutella (tobacco 

moth)

Treatment: T308-b-2—Phosphine at NAP—warehouses

T309—Broomcorn and Broomcorn Articles

T309-a Broomcorn and broomcorn articles

Pest: Ostrinia nubilalis (European corn borers)

Treatment: T309-a—MB in 26” vacuum

Pest: Ticks

Treatment: T309-a—MB in 26” vacuum

Pest: Sawflies

Treatment: T309-a—MB in 26” vacuum

T309-b-1 Broomcorn and broomcorn articles

Pest: Ostrinia nubilalis (European corn borers), ticks, and sawflies

Treatment: T309-b-1—MB at NAP—chamber
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T309-b-2 Broomcorn and broomcorn articles

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-4-15

T309-b-2 Broomcorn and broomcorn articles

Pest: Ostrinia nubilalis (European corn borers), ticks, and sawflies

Treatment: T309-b-2—MB at NAP—Railroad car, refrigerated container, 

highway van, tarpaulin

T309-c Broomcorn and broomcorn articles

Pest: Ostrinia nubilalis (European corn borers), ticks, and sawflies

Treatment: T309-c—Steam sterilization 

T310—Tick-Infested Materials (Nonfood)

T310-a Nonfood materials

Pest: Ticks

Treatment: T310-a—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T310-b Nonfood materials

Pest: Ticks

Treatment: T310-b—MB (“Q” label only) in 26” vacuum

T310-c Nonfood materials

Treatment: T310-c (Vacant)

T310-d Nonfood materials

Pest: Ticks

Treatment: T310-d—Sulfuryl fluoride at NAP
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T311—Hay, Baled

5-4-16 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T311—Hay, Baled

T311 Baled hay

Pest: Mayetiola destructor (Hessian fly), Oulema melanopus (cereal leaf 

beetle)

Treatment: T311—Phosphine at NAP

T312—Oak Logs and Lumber

There are two alternative treatments for the MB fumigation of Oak logs, T312-

a and T312-a-Alternative. Do not combine the schedules.

T312-a Oak Logs

Pest: Oak wilt disease

Treatment: T312-a—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T312-a-Alternative Oak logs

Pest: Oak wilt disease

Treatment: T312-a-Alternative—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T312-b Oak lumber

Pest: Oak wilt disease

Treatment: T312-b—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP

T313—Christmas Trees

T313-a Cut conifer Christmas trees

Pest: Lymantria dispar (spongy moth) and L. dispar dispar (flighted spongy 

moth complex egg masses)

Treatment: T313-a—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—tarpaulin or chamber
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T313-b Cut pine Christmas trees and pine logs

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-4-17

T313-b Cut pine Christmas trees and pine logs

Pest: Tomicus piniperda (pine shoot beetle)

Treatment: T313-b—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—chamber or tarpaulin

T313-c Cut Christmas trees (Araucariaceae, Cephalotaxaceae, 

Cupressaceae, Pinaceae, Podocarpaceae, Sciadopityaceae, 

Taxaceae)

Pest: External feeders, leaf miners, needle miners, sheath miners, hitchhikers, 

surface pests, and slugs

Treatment: T313-c—MB (“Q” label only) at NAP—chamber or tarpaulin

T314—Logs and Firewood

T314-a Regulated Wood Articles, Including Fraxinus (Ash Logs and 

Firewood) and all Hardwood Firewood From Emerald Ash Borer 

Quarantine Areas

Pest: Agrilus planipennis (emerald ash borer)

Treatment: T314-a—Heat treatment

T314-b All logs (including firewood) from spongy moth and flighted 

spongy moth complex quarantine areas

Pest: Lymantria dispar (spongy moth) and L. dispar dispar (flighted spongy 

moth complex egg masses)

Treatment: T314-b—Heat treatment

T314-c Regulated wood articles

Pest: Various wood pests

Treatment: T314-c—Heat treatment
Treatment Schedules T300 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Plant Products

T314-c Regulated wood articles

5-4-18 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-1

Chapter

5

Treatment Schedules

T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

Contents

Commodities treated with the schedules in this chapter are not to be used for 

food or feed.

T401—Railroad Cars (Empty) 5-5-3

T402—Containers, Ships, and Surrounding Areas 5-5-3

T403—Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities) 5-5-5

T404—Wood Products Including Containers 5-5-10

T405—Bags and Bagging Material 5-5-12

T406—Golden Nematode Contaminations 5-5-12

T407—Mechanical Cotton Pickers and Other Cotton Equipment 5-5-13

T408—Soil as Such and Soil Contaminating Durable Commodities 5-5-13

T409—Aircraft 5-5-15

T410—Tick Infestations 5-5-16

T411—Ant Infestations—Nonplant Products 5-5-16

T412—Noxious Weed Seeds (Devitalization Treatment) 5-5-16

T413—Brassware From Mumbai (Bombay), India 5-5-17

T414—Inanimate, Nonfood Articles with Spongy Moth or Flighted Spongy 

Moth Complex Egg Masses 5-5-17

T415—Garbage and Quarantine Material Interceptions for Destruction 

5-5-18

T416—Goatskins, Lambskins, Sheepskins (Skins and Hides) 5-5-19
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

Contents

5-5-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

During the extended exposure period, the concentrations must remain stable 

and the prescribed minimums be met at the end of the extension. Otherwise, 

the treatment may be voided and retreatment required. Examples of 

commodities for which extended exposure periods may be approved include: 

cotton piece goods, baled cotton, bagging, wood, marble, soil as such, etc. 

Examples of commodities for which no extension may be approved include: 

cottonseed, grain, tobacco, etc. An extension of exposure period for other 

purposes is not permitted except as may be prescribed in various schedules for 

concentration readings below minimum.

Additional safety precautions, including additional aeration, may be required 

because of the extended exposure period. The PPQ officer or the commercial 

fumigator will specify any needed precautions.

NOTICE

Exposure period may be extended for any commodity which cannot be used for 

food or propagation. This extension is only a matter of convenience for the importer 

and is intended only for the purpose of reducing treatment costs. The request for 

extension must come from the importer or his authorized representative and should 

be confirmed in writing. A letter is not required for each treatment. A single blanket 

request should be considered as acceptable and renewed each year, as required.
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T401—Railroad Cars (Empty)

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-3

T401—Railroad Cars (Empty)

T401-a Railroad Cars (Empty)

Pest: Pectinophora gossypiella (pink bollworm) and fruit flies

Treatment: T401-a

T401-b Railroad Cars (Empty)

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T401-b

T401-c Railroad Cars (Empty)

Pest: For nematode cysts

Treatment: T401-c

T402—Containers, Ships, and Surrounding Areas

T402-b-3-1 Pest: Trogoderma granarium (Khapra Beetle)

Treatment: T402-b-3-1

T402-b-3-2 Deleted

T402-d Pests: Miscellaneous Hitchhiking Insects (E.g., Crickets, 

Scarab Beetles, Ants, Africanized Honeybee Swarms, Spotted 

Lanternfly)

Treatment: T402-d

T402-c Empty Holds (Precautionary Treatment for Grain Exports)

Pest: Without khapra beetle infestation

Treatment: T402-c
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T402-a-1 Ship Holds and Any Nonplant Cargo Material Within Holds

5-5-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T402-a-1 Ship Holds and Any Nonplant Cargo Material Within Holds

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Achatinidea, including the 

following genera: Achatina, Archachatina, Lignus, Limicolaria, Lissachatina

Treatment: T402-a-1

T402-a-2 Ship Holds and Any Nonplant Cargo Material Within Holds

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Geomitridae, Hygromiidae, 

including the following genera: Backeljaia, Candidula, Cernuella, 

Cochlicella, Helicella, Helicopsis, Hygromia, Monacha, Monachoides, 

Platytheba, Pseudotrichia, Trochoidea, Xerolenta, Xeropicta, Xeroplexa, 

Xerosecta, Xerotricha

Treatment: T402-a-2

T402-a-3 Ship Holds and Any Nonplant Cargo Material Within Holds

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the families Helicidae and Succineidae, 

including the following genera: Arianta, Cepaea,Cornu, Helix, Massylaea, 

Omalonyx, Otala, Succinea, Theba

Treatment: T402-a-3

T402-b-1 Ship Holds and Storerooms That Do Not Contain Finely 

Milled Products, Such as Flour or Appreciable Quantities of Tightly 

Packed Cargo, Such as Baled Materials

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T402-b-1
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T402-b-2 Ship Holds and Storerooms That Contain Milled Products or With Appreciable Quantities of Tightly Packed or

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-5

T402-b-2 Ship Holds and Storerooms That Contain Milled Products 

or With Appreciable Quantities of Tightly Packed or Baled Materials

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T402-b-2

T402-e Articles Regulated for Spongy Moth (Lymantria dispar), 

Flighted Spongy Moth Complex (L. dispar dispar), and Spotted 

Lanternfly (Lycorma delicatula) Egg Masses 

Treatment: T402-e

T403—Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

T403-a-1 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Achatinidae, including the 

following genera: Achatina, Archachatina, Lignus, Limicolaria, Lissachatina

Treatment: T403-a-1—Use T402-a-1 for temperatures of 55 °F and above, use 

T403-a-6-1 for temperatures below 55 °F.

T403-a-2-1 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Geomitridae and 

Hygromiidae, including the following genera: Backeljaia, Candidula, 

Cernuella, Cochlicella, Helicella, Helicopsis, Hygromia, Monacha, 

Monachoides, Platytheba, Pseudotrichia, Trochoidea, Xerolenta, Xeropicta, 

Xeroplexa, Xerosecta, Xerotricha

Treatment: T403-a-2-1

T403-a-2-2 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Geomitridae and 

Hygromiidae, including the following genera: Backeljaia, Candidula, 

Cernuella, Cochlicella, Helicella, Helicopsis, Hygromia, Monacha, 

Monachoides, Platytheba, Pseudotrichia, Trochoidea, Xerolenta, Xeropicta, 

Xeroplexa, Xerosecta, Xerotricha

Treatment: T403-a-2-2
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T403-a-2-3 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

5-5-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T403-a-2-3 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Geomitridae and 

Hygromiidae, including the following genera: Backeljaia, Candidula, 

Cernuella, Cochlicella, Helicella, Helicopsis, Monacha, Platytheba, 

Pseudotrichia, Trochoidea, Xerolenta, Xeropicta, Xeroplexa, Xerosecta, 

Xerotricha

Treatment: T403-a-2-3

T403-a-3 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant slugs of the families Agriolimacidae, Arionidae, 

Limacidae, Milacidae, Philomycidae, and Veronicellidae, including the 

following genera: Agriolimax, Arion, Colosius, Deroceras, Diplosolenodes, 

Leidyula, Limax, Meghimatium, Milax, Pallifera, Pseudoveronicella, 

Sarasinula, Semperula, Vaginulus, Veronicella

Treatment: T403-a-3

T403-a-4-1 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Helicidae, including the 

following genera: Arianta, Cepaea, Cornu, Helix, Massylaea, Otala, Theba

Treatment: T403-a-4-1

T403-a-4-2 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Helicidae, including the 

following genera: Cepaea, Cornu, Helix, Massylaea, Otala, Theba

Treatment: T403-a-4-2

T403-a-4-3 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the family Helicidae, including the 

following genera: Arianta, Cepaea, Cornu, Helix, Otala, Theba

Treatment: T403-a-4-3—Cold treatment, use T403-a-6-1
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T403-a-5-1 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-7

T403-a-5-1 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the families Camaenidae (including the 

former Bradybaenidae) and Succineidae, including the following genera: 

Acusta, Bradybaena, Cathaica, Omalonyx, Succinea

Treatment: T403-a-5-1

T403-a-5-2 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the families Camaenidae (including the 

former Bradybaenidae) and Succineidae, including the following genera: 

Bradybaena, Cathaica, Omalonyx, Succinea

Treatment: T403-a-5-2

T403-a-5-3 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails of the families Camaenidae (including the 

former Bradybaenidae) and Succineidae, including the following genera: 

Bradybaena, Cathaica, Omalonyx, Succinea

Treatment: 403-a-5-3—Cold treatment, use T403-a-6-1

T403-a-6-1 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails sensitive to cold treatment, members of the 

families Camaenidae (including the former Bradybaenidae), Geomitridae, 

Helicidae, Helicellidae, Hygromiidae, and Succineidae, including the 

following genera: Blackeljaia, Bradybaena, Candidula, Cepaea, Cathaica, 

Cernuella, Cochlicella, Helicella, Theba, Trochoidea, Xerolenta, Xeropicta, 

Xerosecta, Xerotricha

Treatment: T403-a-6-1

T403-a-6-2 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails sensitive to cold treatment, certain members 

of the family Helicidae, including the following genera: Helix, Otala

Treatment: T403-a-6-2
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T403-a-6-3 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

5-5-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T403-a-6-3 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Quarantine-significant snails sensitive to cold treatment, of the family 

Achatinidae, including the following genera: Achatina, Archachatina, Lignus, 

Limicolaria, Lissachatina

Treatment: T403-a-6-3

T403-b Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T403-b—MB at NAP, use T401-b or T402-b-2.

T403-c Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T403-c

T403-d Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Wood borers or termites

Treatment: T403-d use appropriate T404 schedules

T403-e-1-1 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities) 

That is Not Sorptive or Difficult to Penetrate

Pest: Quarantine-significant insects not specifically provided for elsewhere in 

nonfood or nonfeed commodities

Treatment: T403-e-1-1

T403-e-1-2 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities) 

That is Sorptive or Difficult to Penetrate

Pest: Quarantine-significant insects not specifically provided for elsewhere in 

nonfood or nonfeed commodities

Treatment: T403-e-1-2
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T403-e-2 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities) That is Not Sorptive or Difficult to Penetrate

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-9

T403-e-2 Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities) 

That is Not Sorptive or Difficult to Penetrate

Pest: Quarantine-significant pests other than insects, including quarantinesignificant snail families Helicarionidae and Streptaxidae, and subfamily 

Subulininae

Treatment: T403-e-2

T403-f Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Pieris spp. (cabbageworms, all life stages) and all other Lepidoptera, 

hitchhiking insects, including non-Lepidoptera.

Treatment: T403-f
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T404—Wood Products Including Containers

5-5-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T404—Wood Products1 Including Containers

T404-b-5-1 Surface Spray for the Following Pests: Borers (Wood 

Wasps, Anobiidae, Bostrichiadae, Cerambycidae, and Lyctidae), 

Carpenter Ants, and Other Wood Infesting Ants, Carpenter Bees, 

and Termites

Treatment: T404-b-5-1

T404-a Wood Products Including Containers

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T404-a

T404-b-2 Wood Products Including Containers

Pest: Borers (wood wasps, carpenter ants, carpenter bees, and termites)

Treatment: T404-b-2

T404-b-1-1 Wood Products Including Containers

Pest: Listed in the treatment document

Treatment: T404-b-1-1

T404-b-1-2 Wood Products Including Containers

Pest: Listed in the treatment document

Treatment: T404-b-1-2

T404-b-4 Wood Products Including Containers

Pest: Listed in the treatment document

Treatment: T404-b-4

1 Bamboo: use T404-d to fumigate any bamboo products.
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T404-c-1-1 Wood Products Including Containers

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-11

T404-c-1-1 Wood Products Including Containers

Pest: Termites

Treatment: T404-c-1-1

T404-c-1-2 Wood Products Including Containers

Pest: Termites

Treatment: T404-c-1-2

T404-c-2 Wood Products Including Containers

Pest: Termites

Treatment: T404-c-2

T404-d Wood Products Including Containers

Pest: Borers and Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T404-d

T404-e—Approved Marking for Regulated Wood Packing Material

T404-e-1—Regulated Wood Packing Material (WPM)

Pest: Various

Treatment: T404-e-1

T404-e-2 Regulated Wood Packing Material (WPM)

Pest: Various

Treatment: T404-e-2
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T404-f Pinus radiata Wood Chips From Chile and Eucalyptus Wood Chips From South America

5-5-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T404-f Pinus radiata Wood Chips From Chile and Eucalyptus Wood 

Chips From South America

Treatment: T404-f (Eucalyptus)

Treatment: T404-f (Pinus radiata)

T405—Bags and Bagging Material

See T306 schedules.

T406—Golden Nematode Contaminations

T406-a Miscellaneous Cargo (Nonfood, Nonfeed Commodities)

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T406-a

T406-c Piers, Barges, Railroad Cars, Automobiles, Used Farm 

Equipment, etc.

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T406-c

T406-b Used Farm Equipment, Construction Equipment, Containers, 

etc.

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T406-b
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T406-d Used Farm Equipment (Without Cabs), Construction Equipment (Without Cabs), and Used Containers

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-13

T406-d Used Farm Equipment (Without Cabs), Construction 

Equipment (Without Cabs), and Used Containers

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T406-d

T407—Mechanical Cotton Pickers and Other Cotton Equipment

T407 Mechanical Cotton Pickers and Other Cotton Equipment

Pest: Pectinophora gossypiella (pink bollworm)

Treatment: T407

T408—Soil as Such and Soil Contaminating Durable Commodities

T408-e-1 Herbarium Specimens of Mosses and Liverworts in Soil 

and Originating in Golden Nematode-free Countries

Pest: (precautionary)

Treatment: T408-e-1

T408-e-2 Herbarium Specimens of Mosses and Liverworts in Soil 

and Originating in Countries with Golden Nematode

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T408-e-2

T408-a Soil As Such

Two alternative treatments

Pest: Various pests and pathogens found in soil (including striga)

Treatment: T408-a
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T408-b Soil As Such

5-5-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T408-b Soil As Such

Pest: Various pests and pathogens found in soil

Treatment: T408-b

T408-b-1 Soil Contaminating Durable Commodities (e.g., Equipment, 

Cobblestone, Marble)

Pest: Various pests and pathogens found in soil

Treatment: T408-b-1

T408-c-1 Soil As Such

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T408-c-1

T408-c-2 Soil As Such

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis (golden nematode)

Treatment: T408-c-2

T408-d-1 Soil As Such

Pest: Insects

Treatment: T408-d-1

T408-d-2 Soil As Such

Pest: Insects

Treatment: T408-d-2

T408-f Soil Contaminated Durable Commodities (e.g., Equipment, 

Cobblestone, Marble) (Precautionary Treatment)

Pest: Soil fungi, nematodes, and certain soil insects

Treatment: T408-f
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T408-g-1 Soil Contaminated Nonfood or Nonfeed Commodities

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-15

T408-g-1 Soil Contaminated Nonfood or Nonfeed Commodities

Pest: Striga spp. (witchweed)

Treatment: T408-g-1

T408-g-2 Soil Contaminated Nonfood or Nonfeed Commodities

Pest: Striga spp. (witchweed)

Treatment: T408-g-2

T409—Aircraft

T409-a Aircraft (cargo holds only)

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T409-a

T409-b Aircraft

T409-b-1 Aircraft

Pest: Hitchhiking insect pests, except khapra beetle

Treatment: T409-b-1

T409-b-2 (Placeholder)

This is a placeholder for a future treatment.

T409-b-3 Aircraft

Treatment: T409-b-3
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T410—Tick Infestations

5-5-16 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T410—Tick Infestations

T410 Nonplant Articles (i.e., Bat Guano, Fence Posts, etc.)

Pest: Ticks

Treatment: Use T310 schedules

T411—Ant Infestations—Nonplant Products

Pest: Ants

Treatment: T411

T412—Noxious Weed Seeds (Devitalization Treatment)

T412-a Guizotia abyssinica (Niger Seed)

Pest: Weed seeds of the following genera:

Asphodelus fistulosus (onionweed)

Digitaria spp. (includes African couchgrass)

Oryza spp. (red rice)

Paspalum scrobiculatum (Kodo-millet)

Prosopis spp. (includes mesquites)

Solanum viarum (tropical soda apple)

Striga spp. (witchweed)

Urochloa panicoides (liver-seed grass)

Treatment: T412-a

T412-b-1 Noxious Weed Seeds (Devitalization Treatment)

Pest: Cuscuta spp.

Treatment: T412-b-1

T412-b-2 Noxious Weed Seeds (Devitalization Treatment)

Pest: Cuscuta spp.

Treatment: T412-b-2
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T412-b-3 Deleted

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-17

T412-b-3 Deleted

T413—Brassware From Mumbai (Bombay), India

T413-a Brassware From Mumbai (Bombay), India

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T413-a

T413-b Brassware From Mumbai (Bombay), India

Treatment: T413-b

T414—Inanimate, Nonfood Articles with Spongy Moth or Flighted 

Spongy Moth Complex Egg Masses

T414 Inanimate, Nonfood Articles with Spongy Moth and Flighted 

Spongy Moth Egg Masses

Pest: Spongy moth (Lymantria dispar) and Flighted Spongy Moth Complex (L. 

dispar dispar) egg masses

Treatment: T414
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T415—Garbage and Quarantine Material Interceptions for Destruction

5-5-18 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T415—Garbage and Quarantine Material Interceptions for 

Destruction

Three alternative treatments are approved. The treatments can be used for 

commodity destruction. Refer to the Glossary for the definitions of quarantine 

material interceptions (QMI) and garbage.

Authorized users must refer to the APHIS Regulated Garbage Program 

Manual for guidance on handling regulated garbage.

T415-a Garbage and Quarantine Material Interceptions for 

Destruction

Pest: Insect pests and pathogens

Treatment: T415-a

T415-b Garbage and Quarantine Material Interceptions for 

Destruction

Pest: Insect pests and pathogens

Treatment: T415-b

T415-c Garbage and Quarantine Material Interceptions for 

Destruction

Pest: Insect pests and plant pathogens

Treatment: T415-c
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T416—Goatskins, Lambskins, Sheepskins (Skins and Hides)

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-5-19

T416—Goatskins, Lambskins, Sheepskins (Skins and Hides)

T416-a-1 Goatskins, Lambskins, Sheepskins (Skins and Hides)

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T416-a-1

T416-a-2 Goatskins, Lambskins, Sheepskins (Skins and Hides)

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T416-a-2

T416-a-3 Goatskins, Lambskins, Sheepskins (Skins and Hides)

Pest: Trogoderma granarium (khapra beetle)

Treatment: T416-a-3
Treatment Schedules T400 - Schedules for Miscellaneous Products

T416-a-3 Goatskins, Lambskins, Sheepskins (Skins and Hides)

5-5-20 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-1

Chapter

5

Treatment Schedules

T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

Contents

General Schedules

T501—Infestation of Chrysomyxa spp., Cercospora spp., and Phoma 

chrysanthemi on Various Commodities 5-6-4

T502—Treatment for Infestation of Potato Cyst Nematode on Various 

Commodities 5-6-5

T503—Treatments for Infestations of Downy Mildews and Physoderma 

Diseases of Maize 5-6-5

T504—Treatment for Infestation of Flag Smut on Various Commodities 

5-6-6

T505—Treatment for Infestation of Chrysomyxa spp. on Various Commodities 

5-6-6

T506—Treatment for Infestation of Potato Cyst Nematode on Various 

Commodities 5-6-7

T507—Treatment for Infestation of Phyllosticta bromeliae, Uredo, and 

Septoria gentianae (Gentian Leaf Spot) on Various Commodities 

5-6-7

T508—Treatment for Infestation of Rusts on Various Commodities 5-6-8

T509—Treatment for Infestation of Various Plant Pests of Camellia and 

Orchids 5-6-8

T510—Treatment for Infestation of Various Corn-Related Diseases 5-6-9

T511—Precautionary Treatment for Xanthomonas axonopodis, pv. citri (Citrus 

Canker) 5-6-9

T512—(Deleted) 5-6-9

T513—Treatment for Infestations of Ascochyta on Various Commodities 

5-6-9

T514—Treatment for Infestations of Xanthomonas albilineans and X. 

vasculorum 5-6-10

T515—Treatment for Infestations of Various Sugarcane-Related Diseases 

5-6-10

T516—(Deleted) 5-6-11

T517—(Deleted) 5-6-11

T518—Treatment for Infestations of Various Rice-Related Diseases 5-6-11

T519—Treatment for Infestations of Various Rice-Related Diseases 5-6-11

T520—Treatment for Infestation of Verticillium albo-atrum on Various 

Commodities 5-6-12

T521—Treatment for Infestation of Plant Pathogenic Fungi and Bacteria on 

Articles Made with Dried Plant Material 5-6-12
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

Contents

5-6-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Hot Water Treatments

T551—Treatment for Infestation of Globodera rostochiensis and G. pallida 

(Nematodes) on Convallaria (Pips) 5-6-12

T552—Treatment for Infestation of Ditylenchus dipsaci and D. destructor 

5-6-13

T553—Treatment for Infestations of Nematodes on Various Plant 

Commodities 5-6-14

T554—Treatment for Infestations of Ditylenchus dipsaci and D. destructor on 

Hyacinthus 5-6-15

T555—Treatment for Infestations of Ditylenchus dipsaci on Narcissus 

5-6-15

T556—Treatment for Infestations of Root-Knot Nematodes (Meloidogyne 

spp.) on Calla 5-6-15

T557—Treatment for Infestations of Meloidogyne spp. and Pratylenchus spp. 

on Chrysanthemum (not including Pyrethrum) 5-6-16

T558—Treatment for Infestations of Pratylenchus Surface Diseases on 

Fragaria (Strawberry) 5-6-16

T559—Treatment for Infestations of Foliar Nematodes on Begonia and Oryza 

(Paddy Rice) 5-6-16

T560—Treatment for Infestations of Meloidogyne spp. on Rosa 5-6-16

T561—Treatment for Infestations of Cercospora mamaonis and Phomopsis 

carica-papayae on Papayas 5-6-17

T562—(Deleted) 5-6-17

T563—(Deleted) 5-6-17

T564—Treatment for Infestations of Foliar Nematodes on Various 

Commodities 5-6-17

T565—Treatment for Infestations of Nematodes on Various Commodities 

5-6-17

T566—Treatment for Infestations of Various Diseases on Broomcorn, 

Broomcorn Articles, and Lilium (Bulbs) 5-6-18

T567—Treatment for Infestations of Bulb Nematodes on Various 

Commodities 5-6-19

T568—Treatment for Infestations of Foliar Nematodes on Senecio 5-6-19

T569—Treatment for Infestations of Foliar Nematodes on Fragaria 

(Strawberry) 5-6-19

T570—Treatment for Infestations of Various Diseases on Acalypha and 

Aconitum 5-6-19

T571—(Deleted) 5-6-20

The following section lists the recommended treatments or actions to be 

applied to items or commodities found infected with various diseases, or 

infested with various plant pests, including nematodes. Commodities may 

include cut flowers and greenery, propagative plant materials, as well as entire 

plants. Due to recent restrictions and prohibitions on the use of certain 

chemicals, every effort has been made to substitute the best alternative 
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

Contents

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-3

treatment available to us. The diseases and commodities for which these 

treatments are recommended are listed in the Index to Schedules, and with the 

following treatment schedules. Ports should endeavor to make post-treatment 

examinations or arrange to have the consignee or importer submit data 

concerning the material following the treatment. Ports should forward any 

information of this nature to:

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

Science and Technology, Treatment Mitigation Technology

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T501—Infestation of Chrysomyxa spp., Cercospora spp., and Phoma chrysanthemi on Various Commodities

5-6-4 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T501—Infestation of Chrysomyxa spp., Cercospora spp., and Phoma 

chrysanthemi on Various Commodities

T501-1—Azalea

Pest: Chrysomyxa spp.

Treatment: T501-1

T501-2—Azaleodendron

Pest: Chrysomyxa spp.

Treatment: T501-2

T501-4—Chrysanthemum

Pest: Phoma chrysanthemi

Treatment: T501-4

T501-5—Christmas Trees

Pest: Phoma chrysanthemi

Treatment: T501-5

T501-3—Orchid

Pest: Cercospora spp.

Treatment: T501-3

T501-6—Rhododendron

Pest: Chrysomyxa spp.

Treatment: T501-6
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T502—Treatment for Infestation of Potato Cyst Nematode on Various Commodities

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-5

T502—Treatment for Infestation of Potato Cyst Nematode on Various 

Commodities

T502-1—Bags and Bagging Used for Commodities Grown in Soil

Treatment: T502-1

T502-2—Covers Used for Commodities Grown in Soil

Treatment: T502-2

T502-3—Soil

Treatment: T502-3

T503—Treatments for Infestations of Downy Mildews and 

Physoderma Diseases of Maize

T503-1—Bags and Bagging (Used) for Small Grains

Pest: Diseases listed in 7CFR 319.24: Downy mildews and Physoderma

diseases of maize

Treatment: T503-1-2

Treatment: T503-1-3

Treatment: T503-1-4

T503-2—Covers Used for Small Grains

Pest: Diseases listed in 7CFR 319.24: Downy mildews and Physoderma

diseases of maize

Treatment: T503-2-2

Treatment: T503-2-3

Treatment: T503-2-4
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T504—Treatment for Infestation of Flag Smut on Various Commodities

5-6-6 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T504—Treatment for Infestation of Flag Smut on Various 

Commodities

T504-1—Bags and Bagging (Used) for Small Grains

Pest: Flag smut

Treatment: T504-1-1

Treatment: T504-1-2

T504-2—Covers Used for Wheat

Pest: Flag smut

Treatment: T504-2-1

Treatment: T504-2-2

T505—Treatment for Infestation of Chrysomyxa spp. on Various 

Commodities

T505-1—Azaleodendron

Pest: Chrysomyxa spp.

Treatment: T505-1-1

Treatment: T505-1-2

T505-2—Rhododendron

Pest: Chrysomyxa spp.

Treatment: T505-2-1

Treatment: T505-2-2
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T506—Treatment for Infestation of Potato Cyst Nematode on Various Commodities

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-7

T506—Treatment for Infestation of Potato Cyst Nematode on Various 

Commodities

T506-1—Containers

Pest: Potato cyst nematode

Treatment: T506-1-1

Treatment: T506-1-3

T506-2—Nonplant Articles

Pest: Potato cyst nematode

Treatment: T506-2-1

Treatment: T506-2-3

T507—Treatment for Infestation of Phyllosticta bromeliae, Uredo, 

and Septoria gentianae (Gentian Leaf Spot) on Various Commodities

T507-1—Bromeliads—Deleted

Pest: Phyllosticta bromeliae, Uredo spp. 

Treatment: T507-1—deleted

T507-2—Gentiana—Deleted

Pest: Septoria gentianae

Treatment: T507-2—deleted

Regulatory Authority

Captan is no longer labeled for use on Bromeliads. T507-1 has been removed under authorization of 7 CFR 305.3((b)(1)(iv)) and is subject to change pending notice and comment. 

Refuse entry, reexport, or destroy the commodity. (November 2020)

Regulatory Authority

Captan is no longer labeled for use on Gentiana. T507-2 has been removed under authorization of 7 CFR 305.3((b)(1)(iv)) and is subject to change pending notice and comment. 

Refuse entry, reexport, or destroy the commodity. (November 2020)
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T508—Treatment for Infestation of Rusts on Various Commodities

5-6-8 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T508—Treatment for Infestation of Rusts on Various Commodities

T508-1—Orchids (to Florida)

Pest: Rusts

Treatment: T508-1

T509—Treatment for Infestation of Various Plant Pests of Camellia

and Orchids

T509-1—Camellia

Pest: Cylindrosporium camelliae

Treatment: T509-1-1

Treatment: T509-1-2

T509-2—Orchids

Pest:

Hemileia spp.

Leptosphaeria spp.

Mycosphaerella spp.

Opiodothella orchidearum

Phomopsis orchidophilia

Phyllachora spp.

Phyllosticta spp.

Sphenospora spp.

Sphaerodothis spp.

Uredo spp. (except U. scabies)

Treatment: T509-2-1

Treatment: T509-2-2
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T510—Treatment for Infestation of Various Corn-Related Diseases

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-9

T510—Treatment for Infestation of Various Corn-Related Diseases

T510-1—Corn (Seed) (Commercial Lots Not for Propagation)

Pest: Various corn-related diseases

Treatment: T510-1

T510-2—Corn (seed) (small lots for propagation but not for food, 

feed, or oil purposes)

Pest: Various corn-related diseases

Treatment: T510-2

T511—Precautionary Treatment for Xanthomonas axonopodis, pv. 

citri (Citrus Canker)

T511-1—Seeds of Citrus spp., Fortunella spp., Clausena lansium and 

Poncirus trifoliata (and all cultivars, varieties, and hybrids)

Pest: Xanthomonas axonopodis, pv. citri (citrus canker)

Treatment: T511-1

T511-2—Fruit of Citrus spp., Fortunella spp., Clausena lansium and 

Poncirus trifoliata (and all cultivars, varieties, and hybrids)

Pest: Xanthomonas axonopodis, pv. citri (citrus canker)

Treatment: T511-2

T512—(Deleted)

T513—Treatment for Infestations of Ascochyta on Various 

Commodities
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T513-1—Orchids

5-6-10 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T513-1—Orchids

Pest: Ascochyta spp.

Treatment: T513-1

T514—Treatment for Infestations of Xanthomonas albilineans and X. 

vasculorum

T514-1—Saccharum (Sugarcane) (Seed pieces)

Pest: Xanthomonas albilineans and X. vasculorum

Treatment: T514-1

T514-2—Saccharum (Sugarcane) (True seed (fuzz))—Deleted

Pest: Xanthomonas albilineans and X. vasculorum

Treatment: T514-2

T514-3—Saccharum (Sugarcane) (Bagasse)

Pest: Xanthomonas albilineans and X. vasculorum

Treatment: T514-3

T514-4—Saccharum (Sugarcane) (Field and processing equipment)

Pest: Xanthomonas albilineans and X. vasculorum

Treatment: T514-4

T515—Treatment for Infestations of Various Sugarcane-Related 

Diseases

T515-1—Sugarcane (Baled)

Pest: Various sugarcane-related diseases

Treatment: T515-1
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T515-2—Sugarcane (Loose Sugarcane)

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-11

T515-2—Sugarcane (Loose Sugarcane)

Pest: Various sugarcane-related diseases

Treatment: T515-2-1

Treatment: T515-2-3

Treatment: T515-2-4

Treatment: T515-2-5

T516—(Deleted)

T517—(Deleted)

T518—Treatment for Infestations of Various Rice-Related Diseases

T518-1—Brooms Made of Rice Straw

Pest: Various rice-related diseases

Treatment: T518-1

T518-2-1—Novelties Made of Rice Straw

Pest: Various rice-related diseases

Treatment: T518-2-1

Treatment: T518-2-2

T519—Treatment for Infestations of Various Rice-Related Diseases

T519-1—Closely Packed Rice Straw and Hulls

Pest: Various rice-related diseases

Treatment: T519-1
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T519-2—Loose Rice Straw and Hulls

5-6-12 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T519-2—Loose Rice Straw and Hulls

Pest: Various rice-related diseases

Treatment: T519-2

T520—Treatment for Infestation of Verticillium albo-atrum on 

Various Commodities

T520-1—Seeds of Alfalfa (Medicago falcata, M. gaetula, M. glutinosa, 

M. media, and M. sativa) from Europe—Deleted

Pest: Verticillium albo-atrum

Treatment: T520-1-1

Treatment: T520-1-2

T521—Treatment for Infestation of Plant Pathogenic Fungi and 

Bacteria on Articles Made with Dried Plant Material

Pest: Various Plant Pathogenic Fungi and Bacteria

Treatment: T521

T551—Treatment for Infestation of Globodera rostochiensis and G. 

pallida (Nematodes) on Convallaria (Pips)

T551-1—Convallaria (Pips)

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis, G. pallida

Treatment: T551-1
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T552—Treatment for Infestation of Ditylenchus dipsaci and D. destructor

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-13

T552—Treatment for Infestation of Ditylenchus dipsaci and D. 

destructor

T552-1—Allium, Amaryllis, and Bulbs (NSPF)

Pest: Bulb nematodes: Ditylenchus dipsaci, D. destructor

Treatment: T552-1
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T553—Treatment for Infestations of Nematodes on Various Plant Commodities

5-6-14 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T553—Treatment for Infestations of Nematodes on Various Plant 

Commodities

T553-1—Achimenes, Actinidia, Agapanthus, Aloe, Amorphophallus

(bulbs), Ampelopsis, Anchusa, Anemone, Astilbe, Begonia (tubers), 

Bletilla hyacinthina (bulbs)(NSPF), Cactus, Calliopsis, Campanula, 

Cestrum, Cimicifuga, Cissus, Clematis, Convolvulus japonicus, 

Curcuma (turmeric), Cyclamen, Cytisus, Dahlia (tubers), Dracaena, 

Epimedium pinnatum (only; other spp. not tolerant), Euonymus alata

(only), Eupatorium, Euphorbia, Fragaria (strawberry), Gardenia, 

Gentiana, Gerbera, Gesneria, Geum, Gladiolus, Heliopsis, 

Helleborus, Hibiscus, Hosta, Hoya, Iris, Jasminum, Kaempferia, 

Kohleria, Naegelia, Orchid, Ornithogalum, Paeonia, Passiflora, 

Polyanthes (tuberose), Primula, Reichsteineria, Sansevieria, 

Scabiosa, Sedum, Senecio (Lingularis), Sinningia, Thompsonia 

nepalensis, Tydaea, Verbena, Vitis (grape), Weigela, Zantedeschia, 

Zingiberaceae

Pest: Root-knot nematodes (Meloidogyne spp.)

Treatment: T553-1

T553-2—Anchusa, Astilbe, Clematis, Dicentra, Gardenia, Helleborus, 

Hibiscus, Kniphofia, Primula

Pest: Lesion nematodes (Pratylenchus spp.)

Treatment: T553-2

T553-3—Armoracia (Horseradish Roots), Bulbs (NSPF)

Pest: Golden nematodes (Globodera rostochiensis and G. pallida)

Treatment: T553-3
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T553-4—Bletilla hyacinthina

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-15

T553-4—Bletilla hyacinthina

Pest: Foliar nematodes (Aphelenchoides fragariae)

Treatment: T553-4

T553-5—Humulus

Pest: Cyst nematodes (Heterodera humuli)

Treatment: T553-5

T554—Treatment for Infestations of Ditylenchus dipsaci and D. 

destructor on Hyacinthus

T554-1—Hyacinthus (bulbs), Iris (bulbs and rhizomes), Tigridia

Pest: Bulb nematodes—Ditylenchus dipsaci and D. destructor

Treatment: T554-1-1

Treatment: T554-1-2

T555—Treatment for Infestations of Ditylenchus dipsaci on 

Narcissus

T555-1—Narcissus (bulbs)

Pest: Bulb nematodes (Ditylenchus dipsaci)

Treatment: T555-1

T556—Treatment for Infestations of Root-Knot Nematodes 

(Meloidogyne spp.) on Calla

T556-1—Calla (rhizomes)

Pest: Root-knot nematodes (Meloidogyne spp.)
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T557—Treatment for Infestations of Meloidogyne spp. and Pratylenchus spp. on Chrysanthemum (not including Pyrethrum)

5-6-16 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

Treatment: T556-1

T557—Treatment for Infestations of Meloidogyne spp. and 

Pratylenchus spp. on Chrysanthemum (not including Pyrethrum)

T557-1—Chrysanthemum (not including Pyrethrum)

Pest: Meloidogyne spp. and Pratylenchus spp.

Treatment: T557-1

T558—Treatment for Infestations of Pratylenchus Surface Diseases 

on Fragaria (Strawberry)

T558-1—Fragaria (Strawberry)

Pest: Pratylenchus spp. (surface diseases)

Treatment: T558-1

T559—Treatment for Infestations of Foliar Nematodes on Begonia

and Oryza (Paddy Rice)

T559-1—Begonia

Pest: White tip nematode (Aphelenchoides besseyi)

Treatment: T559-1

T559-2—Oryza (Paddy Rice)

Pest: White tip nematode (Aphelenchoides besseyi)

Treatment: T559-2

T560—Treatment for Infestations of Meloidogyne spp. on Rosa

T560-1—Rosa spp. (except multiflora, which is not tolerant)

Pest: Meloidogyne spp.

Treatment: T560-1
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T561—Treatment for Infestations of Cercospora mamaonis and Phomopsis carica-papayae on Papayas

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-17

T561—Treatment for Infestations of Cercospora mamaonis and 

Phomopsis carica-papayae on Papayas

T561-1—Papaya

Pest: Cercospora mamaonis and Phomopsis carica-papayae

Treatment: T561-1

T562—(Deleted)

T563—(Deleted)

T564—Treatment for Infestations of Foliar Nematodes on Various 

Commodities

T564-1—Astilbe, Bletilla hyacinthina, Cimicifuga, Epimedium 

pinnatum (only; other spp. not tolerant), Hosta, Paeonia

Pest: Foliar nematode (Aphelenchoides besseyi)

Treatment: T564-1

T565—Treatment for Infestations of Nematodes on Various 

Commodities

T565-1—Amaryllis

Pest: Ditylenchus destructor

Treatment: T565-1

T565-2—Crocus

Pest: Aphelenchoides subtenuis, Ditylenchus destructor

Treatment: T565-2
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T565-3—Gladiolus

5-6-18 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T565-3—Gladiolus

Pest: Ditylenchus destructor

Treatment: T565-3

T565-4—Scilla

Pest: Ditylenchus dipsaci

Treatment: T565-4

T565-5—Solanum (Potato Tubers)

Pest: Globodera rostochiensis, G. pallida

Treatment: T565-5

T566—Treatment for Infestations of Various Diseases on 

Broomcorn, Broomcorn Articles, and Lilium (Bulbs)

T566-1—Broomcorn

Pest: Precautionary treatment for corn-related diseases

Treatment: T566-1

T566-2—Broomcorn Articles

Pest: Precautionary treatment for corn-related diseases

Treatment: T566-2

T566-3—Lilium (Bulbs)

Pest: Aphelenchoides fragariae

Treatment: T566-3
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T567—Treatment for Infestations of Bulb Nematodes on Various Commodities

02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-6-19

T567—Treatment for Infestations of Bulb Nematodes on Various 

Commodities

T567-1—Muscari, Ornithogalum, Polyanthes (Tuberose)

Pest: Bulb nematodes (Ditylenchus dipsaci)

Treatment: T567-1

T568—Treatment for Infestations of Foliar Nematodes on Senecio

T568-1—Senecio (Lingularis)

Pest: Foliar nematodes (Aphelenchoides fragariae)

Treatment: T568-1

T569—Treatment for Infestations of Foliar Nematodes on Fragaria

(Strawberry)

T569-1—Fragaria (Strawberry)

Pest: Foliar nematodes (Aphelenchoides fragariae)

Treatment: T569-1

T570—Treatment for Infestations of Various Diseases on Acalypha 

and Aconitum

T570-1—Acalypha

Pest: Pratylenchus spp.

Treatment: T570-1

T570-2—Aconitum

Pest: Aphelenchoides fragariae

Treatment: T570-2
Treatment Schedules T500 - Schedules for Plant Pests or Pathogens

T571—(Deleted)

5-6-20 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01

T571—(Deleted)
11/2013-100 Treatment Manual 5-7-1

Chapter

5

Treatment Schedules

T600 - Controlled Atmosphere Temperature 

Treatment System

This information in this chapter has been removed.
Treatment Schedules T600 - Controlled Atmosphere Temperature Treatment System

This information in this chapter has been removed.

5-7-2 Treatment Manual 11/2013-100
02/2024-01 Treatment Manual 5-8-1

Chapter

5

Treatment Schedules

D301 - Schedules for Domestic Movement of 

Regulated Articles

These treatments are to be used only for domestic movement of regulated 

articles and are conducted in conjunction with a systems approach. State and 

local guidelines may apply.

Refer to the Agricultural Commodity Import Requirements (ACIR) database 

Treatment Manual tab, Treatments - D301 - Schedules for Domestic 

Movement of Regulated Articles to find all of the domestic treatments in 7 

CFR 301 and several Federal Orders.
Treatment Schedules D301 - Schedules for Domestic Movement of Regulated Articles

5-8-2 Treatment Manual 02/2024-01
02/2020-30 Treatment Manual 6-1-1

Chapter

6 Certifying Facilities

Overview

Contents

Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers 6-2-1

Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers 6-3-1

Certification of Cold Treatment 6-4-1

Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities 6-5-1

Certification of Niger seed Treatment Facilities 6-6-1

Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities 6-7-1

Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities 6-8-1

Certifying Facilities for the Heat Treatment of Firewood 6-9-1

The Certification of Facilities section of this manual is organized by the 

following categories:

Vacuum Fumigation Chambers

Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Cold Treatment Facilities

Hot Water Immersion Facilities

Niger seed Treatment Facilities

Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities

Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Firewood Heat Treatment Facilities

Domestic and foreign treatment facilities must be certified by APHIS before 

they can perform treatments to meet United States quarantine requirements. 

Specific requirements for each type of facility are included in this section.

After the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT has approved blueprints or drawings 

of a treatment facility, the treatment facility can request certification from Plant 

Protection and Quarantine at local ports or State Plant Health Directors.
Certifying Facilities Overview

6-1-2 Treatment Manual 02/2020-30

NOTICE

Send blueprints or drawings of domestic treatment facilities to:

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Request certification from the State Plant Health Directors listed on the PPQ Plant 

Health Program Overview website.

NOTICE

Send blueprints or drawings and request for certification of foreign treatment 

facilities to:

Director, Preclearance Programs

USDA-APHIS-PPQ

4700 River Road, Unit 60

Riverdale, MD 20737

Phone: (301) 851-2312

For foreign treatment facilities, the company requesting certification is responsible 

for paying money into a trust fund account to pay the salary, travel costs, and per 

diem of a PPQ Officer to be sent on temporary duty.

Sea-going vessels that participate in the APHIS cold treatment program for fresh fruit 

may be certified at a port in the USA or at a foreign port. Also, if the certification is to 

be carried out overseas, a trust fund account will be needed to cover the costs.

For details, call PPQ Quarantine Policy, Analysis and Support (QPAS) at (301) 851-

2312.
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-2-1

Chapter

6 Certifying Facilities

Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers

Contents

Submission and Approval of a New Chamber Construction 6-2-1

Construction and Performance Standards 6-2-1

Vacuum Chamber 6-2-2

Vacuum Pump 6-2-2

Fumigant Introduction Systems 6-2-2

Circulation and Exhaust System 6-2-3

Accessories 6-2-3

Certification Standards 6-2-4

Checklist 6-2-6

Submission and Approval of a New Chamber Construction

The facility submits an engineering construction plan and chamber 

requirements to the appropriate State and country officials and to USDAAPHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for approval.

Download a fillable Application for USDA Fumigation Facility Approval 

Form located on the S&T website.

Contact ppqtmt@usda.gov with questions regarding the application. 

Construction and Performance Standards

Vacuum fumigation consists of placing the commodity in a gas tight metal 

chamber, removing most of the air, and replacing a small portion of it with a 

gas which is lethal to insects and other pests. Vacuum fumigation provides a 

more rapid penetration of commodities undergoing treatment than is obtained 

in normal atmospheric fumigations.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-2-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Vacuum Chamber

Vacuum chambers are usually welded steel construction. A rectangular 

chamber might be preferred for more effective use of space. Reinforcement of 

the chamber body by means of steel ribs, or other supports, is usually required 

to enable the chamber to withstand the difference in pressures when the 

vacuum is drawn. Doors can be provided at one or both ends of the chamber. In 

cylindrical chambers, the doors can be either concave or convex, but in 

rectangular chambers flat doors are commonly used with suitable 

reinforcements. The doors can be hinged at the side, or at the top and 

counterbalanced. Many doors are fitted with special mechanisms for rapid 

closing. Door gaskets should be durable and at the same time provide gastight 

seal. To a large extent, the efficiency of a chamber depends upon the tightness 

with which the door or doors will seal. All other chamber openings must be 

equally tight to sustain the prescribed vacuum over a specified period of time.

To permit circulation beneath the load, the chamber must be designed to 

enable the stacking of commodities on pallets, skids, or small trucks. Small 

chambers that are usually hand loaded have removable floors.

Vacuum Pump

Each installation requires a high quality, high capacity vacuum pump. The 

vacuum pump should have the capacity to reduce the chamber pressure to 1 to 

2 inches (25 to 51 millimeters) of mercury (28 to 29 inches or 711 to 737 

millimeters vacuum) in 15 minutes or less.

Fumigant Introduction Systems

The size of the chamber will determine the introduction system needed. For 

small chambers and for introducing fumigants in small quantities, measure the 

fumigant by volume using a graduated dispenser. For larger chambers, place 

the gas supply cylinder on a platform scale and measure the amount of 

fumigant by weight.

For methyl bromide, a volatilizing unit is required to ensure fumigant 

introduction in a gaseous state. The volatilizer is located outside of the 

chamber between the gas cylinder or dispenser and the introduction port of the 

chamber. Essentially, the volatilizer consists of a metal coil submerged in water 

hot enough to vaporize the fumigant. The volatilizer must maintain the water 

temperature to at least 150 °F throughout the entire gas introduction period.

Within the chamber, the gas introduction system should consist of tubing with 

multiple, graduated openings that will provide uniform distribution of the 

fumigant throughout the length of the chamber. Ensure that the fumigant enters 

the chamber from multiple points along the ceiling.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-2-3

Circulation and Exhaust System

Adequate gas distribution is often hindered by the cargo placed in the chamber. 

To overcome this, equip vacuum chambers with a circulation system. If fans 

are employed, the number of fans required would depend upon the chamber 

design, volume, and loading arrangements. A minimum of 2 fans is normally 

required for chambers of over 1,000 cubic feet capacity (28.31 m3). Place the 

fans at opposite ends of the chamber facing each other—one high, one low. 

Additional fans might be required for larger chambers. The fans should be 

capable of circulating air at the rate of at least one-third the volume of the 

chamber per minute. Some fumigants require nonsparking, explosion-proof 

circulation systems.

In most installations, the vacuum pump is used to remove the fumigant 

following the exposure period. The air-gas mixture is pumped out of the 

chamber through exhaust ducts or stacks installed for that purpose. The actual 

height of these stacks will vary with the location of the chamber, and may be 

regulated by local, state, or federal safety ordinances.

Accessories

Equip chambers with a vacuum gauge and an instrument for measuring and 

recording the vacuum drawn and maintained during the exposure period. 

Install a temperature monitoring device in chambers used for quarantine 

treatments that are 6 hours or more in length. Combination temperature and 

vacuum recorders are available.

Temperature sensors are usually attached to the outside of the chamber with a 

remote sensing unit attached to the inside wall or inserted into the product. 

Specifications for the temperature recording system are as follows:

Accurate to within ± 0.6 °C or ±1.0 °F in the treatment temperature range 

of 4.4 °C to 26.7 °C (40 °F to 80 °F)

Calibrated annually by the National Institute of Standards and Technology 

(NIST) or by the manufacturer

The calibration certificate will list a correction factor, if needed, and 

the correction factor would be applied to the actual temperature 

reading to obtain the true temperature.

Capable of printing all temperature readings or downloading data to a 

secure source once per hour throughout the entire treatment (all 

temperature data must be accessible at a safe distance during the 

fumigation)

Tamper-proof
Certifying Facilities Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-2-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

If one or more of the temperature readings go below 40 °F the fumigation will 

be considered a failed treatment. The commodity must be re-treated, returned 

to the country of origin, reexported, or destroyed.

Certification Standards

To qualify for program approval, vacuum chambers must be able to meet or 

exceed specified vacuum leakage tests. There are four classification levels in 

which a chamber may be certified. The tests are listed in Table 6-2-1 and 

determine the classification under which the chamber qualifies.

In addition to the classification tests in Table 6-2-1, ALL chambers must be 

capable of meeting the following requirement: A vacuum equivalent to 26 

inches (660 mm) of mercury is drawn. The vacuum is then reduced to 5 inches 

(127 mm) and held for a period of 4 hours. A vacuum of 2 inches (55 mm) or 

more after 4 hours is considered adequate for this test.

Chambers classified “Superior” or “A” are approved for all vacuum 

treatments. These chambers are to be tested annually.

Chambers classified “B” are approved for all vacuum schedules up to and 

including 28-inch (711 mm) sustained vacuum. These chambers are to be 

tested semi-annually.

Chambers classified “C” are approved for all vacuum schedules up to and 

including 26-inch (711 mm) sustained vacuum. These chambers are to be 

tested semi-annually.

! CAUTION

Commodities used for food or feed may not be re-treated. If commodities fall into this 

category, the only options are:

 Return to the country of origin

 Reexported to another country if they will accept the shipment

 Destroy by incineration

NOTICE

There should be no commodity in the chamber during the certification procedure.

Table 6-2-1 Vacuum Chamber Classification Table

Classification Initial Vacuum 

(inches)

Allowable Vacuum Loss

4 hr. 6 hr. 16 hr. 24 hr.

Superior 28 1/2 — 1/2” — 1”

A 28 1/2 1/2” — 1” 2”

B 28 1/2 1” — 2 1/2” 3”

C 26 1” — 2 1/2” 3”
Certifying Facilities Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-2-5

During each certification, conduct a preventative maintenance inspection. The 

maintenance inspection will ensure the merit of each unit and correct any 

deficiencies prior to certification. Refer to Table 6-2-2 for an inspection 

checklist.

Once the chamber has met the requirements in Table 6-2-1 and passes the 

preventative maintenance check, the approving APHIS official must complete 

PPQ Form 480 (Treatment Facility Construction, Operation and Test Data), 

and PPQ Form 482 (Certificate of Approval). A copy of each of the forms 

should be given to the owner/operator of the chamber and also mailed to:

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Approving a chamber for vacuum fumigation does not include approving 

atmospheric (NAP) fumigations. If the vacuum chamber will also be used as a 

normal atmospheric pressure chamber, it must also pass a pressure leakage test 

(see Pressure-leakage Test for NAP Fumigation Chambers).

Actual detailed instructions for constructing a vacuum chamber are not

included in this discussion. The information presented is designed to list the 

component parts needed and the function of each.

! CAUTION

Never use methyl bromide to check for leaks in the chamber. Use compressed air to 

check for leaks.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-2-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Checklist

Use the checklist in Table 6-2-2 as a guide during chamber certifications..

Table 6-2-2 Chamber Checklist 

CHAMBER AND VOLATILIZER YES NO

Has chamber been measured and total volume calculated?

Has chamber been checked for integrity?

 Smoke test

 Pressure test

Have fans been tested to recirculate at least one third of the total volume per minute?

Is gas monitoring required (by the workplan)?

 If yes, are sampling leads properly placed (in commodity, if required)?

 Are sampling leads one quarter inch inner diameter and free from blockage?

Will a scale be used to apply fumigant?

 If yes, has the scale been calibrated and certified this year?

 Is the graduated dispenser in good condition?

Are the door seals and gaskets in good condition?

Is the copper tubing in the volatilizer intact? (check for holes)

Are the vacuum and temperature gages accurate?

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT

Tape measure or electronic measuring device

Calculator

Stop watch

Air (leaf) blower with appropriate fittings and adapters

Manometer (including tubing and appropriate liquid)

Digital anemometer

Gas detection device (calibrated within one year)

Dessicant (Drierite®) and Ascarite®

Auxiliary pump (for large chambers)

Digital thermometer (accuracy 0.1 F) with probe

REQUIRED SAFETY EQUIPMENT

Gas leak detection device

Self contained breathing apparatus

First aid kit, including eye wash

Emergency medical treatment facility map and phone number
Certifying Facilities Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-2-7

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

PPQ Form 480, Treatment Facility

PPQ Form 482, Certificate of Approval

Material safety data sheet

Warning placard (English and Spanish)

Special local need label and permit (if applicable)

Table 6-2-2 Chamber Checklist (continued)
Certifying Facilities Certification of Vacuum Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-2-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-3-1

Chapter

6 Certifying Facilities

Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation 

Chambers

Contents

Construction and Performance Standards 6-3-1

Basic Elements for Design and Construction of Chambers 6-3-3

Pallets and Bins 6-3-3

Gastight Construction 6-3-4

Circulation and Exhaust Systems 6-3-6

Fumigant Dispensing System 6-3-8

Pressure-leakage Test for NAP Fumigation Chambers 6-3-9

Other Auxiliary Equipment 6-3-11

Phosphine Chambers 6-3-11

Checklist 6-3-13

Construction and Performance Standards

The primary purpose of a fumigation program is to obtain quarantine control of 

the pests in all stages of development in, on, or with the product being 

fumigated. A fumigation chamber is defined as a stationary enclosure into 

which the product can be loaded and where fumigant will be maintained at the 

prescribed concentration for the required exposure period.

When constructing a normal atmospheric (NAP) fumigation chamber, the 

primary consideration is to make it as gastight as possible. In addition, 

companies must install circulation equipment in chambers that are to be used 

for methyl bromide (MB) fumigations to ensure proper distribution of the 

fumigant throughout the chamber. The chamber must retain these qualities of 

tightness and fumigant circulation during every fumigation.

Although chamber sizes are not restricted to specific dimensions, companies 

should size chambers according to the volume of material to be fumigated. 

Experience has shown that two moderately sized chambers are preferable to 

one large chamber.

Chamber manufacturers should select the construction material according to 

the type of product to be fumigated and the method of operation involved. 

Wood frame construction with light metal sheathing or plywood can be used if 

the products to be fumigated are lightweight and are to be hand loaded. Heavy 

products, often loaded by machinery or handtrucks, require heavy-gauge sheet 
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-3-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

metal, masonry, or metal plate construction. It is advisable to construct the 

chamber in the most durable manner consistent with its intended use.

Auxiliary equipment is required to measure, vaporize, circulate, and exhaust 

the fumigant. Chamber manufacturers should size such equipment according to 

the volume of the chamber. When relatively small amounts of MB are to be 

used, they are often measured by volume in graduated dispensers. When larger 

amounts are to be used, the fumigant is most often measured by weight with 

the use of an approved and calibrated measuring scale.

Chambers can be equipped with heating or refrigeration units, depending on 

the climatic environment and the products to be fumigated. Product injury or 

an ineffective fumigation can occur within certain temperature ranges. 

Although provisions for temperature control are not generally mandatory, in 

certain fumigation operations, temperature control is necessary and therefore 

must be considered in the design and construction of fumigation chambers.

While complete construction details for an atmospheric fumigation chamber 

are not contained in this chapter, sufficient information is available to develop 

specifications for a proposed structure. Firms considering chambers for 

approval by the USDA must submit a completed fumigation chamber approval 

application and other required information (e.g. manuals, technical sheets) to 

their local APHIS-PPQ contact. 

Download a fillable Application for USDA Fumigation Facility Approval 

Form located on the S&T website.

Contact ppqtmt@usda.gov with questions regarding the application. 

Local APHIS-PPQ personnel will determine the feasibility of constructing the 

proposed chamber with regards to PPQ resources and requirements. If these 

are permitted, local personnel will review the submitted application for 

completeness and forward to the National Operations Manager for Import and 

Exclusion Treatments.

National Operations Manager for Import and Exclusion Treatments

USDA-APHIS-PPQ

1730 Varsity Drive, Suite 300

Raleigh, NC 27606
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-3-3

The National Operations Manager for Import and Exclusion Treatments will 

subsequently forward the application to the following office:

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Basic Elements for Design and Construction of Chambers

Gastight and remains so during every use

Provides an efficient system for circulating and exhausting the fumigant

Provides an efficient system for dispensing the fumigant

Provides heating or refrigeration units when required for fumigation 

efficiency, to prevent product injury, or to meet label temperature 

requirements

Provides a temperature recording system when treatments are 6 hours or 

longer in duration

Provides suitable fittings to facilitate a pressure-leakage test and gas 

concentration sampling

The criteria listed above deal primarily with the efficiency of the fumigation 

chamber itself. In determining the ultimate design and construction, it is 

essential to give consideration to the safe and practical operation of the facility.

All requirements outlined in this chapter apply to all USDA-approved 

fumigation chambers that use MB and phosphine, unless specifically noted. 

See Phosphine Chambers on page 6-3-11 for additional information specific to 

phosphine.

Pallets and Bins

All material placed in the chamber must be on pallets or bins. Load pallets and 

bins in the chamber so that there is at least two inches of space under the 

commodity and between each pallet or bin. Fumigation of double-stacked 

commodities has been conducted in some locations, and approval for this 

practice is granted on an individual basis. The proposed double-stacked 

configuration must be designed to ensure that safe and effective fumigations 

are conducted. Prior to chamber certification, take gas concentration readings 

throughout the fumigated load to demonstrate that even readings can be 

achieved with the proposed configuration.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-3-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Do not fumigate items or combinations of items (e.g., commodity, packaging) 

that are sorptive or whose sorptive capacities are unknown unless gas readings 

are taken by an APHIS representative. Take gas readings for each chamber 

certification and anytime there is a change in commodity, packaging material, 

increase in chamber load capacity, or changes to the chamber itself (unless the 

effect of the change is known and will not decrease gas concentrations below 

required levels.) See Sorption on page 2-3-10 for additional information on 

sorption, sorptive materials, and packaging.

Gastight Construction

Interior surfaces must be impervious to the fumigant and can be constructed of 

metal, cement, concrete block, tile, or plywood. Any other material that is to be 

used on the interior surface of the chamber must be approved by PPQ prior to 

installation. Sorbent materials (e.g., foam, insulation) cannot be installed on 

the interior surfaces of the chamber, although they can be used in areas that 

will not be exposed to the fumigant. PPQ does allow the use of foam to seal 

joints in a phosphine chamber. 

Introduction lines, fittings, pipes, exhaust stacks, and other structures that 

could come into contact with MB should be constructed of the following 

materials that are compatible with this gas:

Brass

Copper

Carbon steel

Stainless steel

Polyethylene

Polypropylene

Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE; Teflon®)

Aluminum and galvanized metal are also acceptable if no liquid MB could 

come into contact with these materials, although there may be possible 

reactivity problems with long-term use.

Do not use the following materials for introduction lines, fittings, pipes, or 

other structures that could come into contact with MB:

Natural rubber

Nylon

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)

Tygon® tubing should not be used as gas sampling or introduction lines
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-3-5

Seal joints with appropriate compound, solders, or welds for the construction 

materials used. When wood or a combination of wood and sheet metal are 

used, seal all joints and seams with a nonhardening material. This makes a 

gastight seal and allows for expansion and contraction without leakage. Use 

mastic tape to seal the seams between wall joints in plywood chambers. In 

masonry construction, joint (strike) the mortar between all courses of cement 

blocks to produce a smooth, compact surface. Poured concrete structures 

should also have smooth, compact surfaces. Weld all metal joints.

Fit all doors and vents with proper gaskets. PPQ recommends that chamber 

operators replace all door and vent door gaskets (regardless of construction 

material) once per season in chambers that receive moderate use. In chambers 

that receive heavier use (e.g., fumigations performed several times per week 

for an entire season), it is recommended that the gaskets be replaced more 

frequently. 

The following list of materials are compatible with MB and can be used as 

construction material for gaskets:

Fluoroelastomer (FKM) (for example, DupontTM Viton®)

Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) (acceptable even though 

chemical compatibility charts indicate that it should not be exposed to 

MB; inspect regularly for damage and replace when needed)

Neoprene (acceptable even though chemical compatibility charts indicate 

that it should not be exposed to MB; inspect regularly for damage and 

replace when needed)

Nitrile (Buna-N)

Silicone

Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE; Teflon®)

Ensure that all openings for wiring, thermometers, tubing, and ports for 

pressure-leakage tests, etc. are gastight. PPQ requires a minimum of three 

fittings to be installed in each chamber for measuring gas concentration. 

Additional fittings may be required in certain circumstances, such as large 

chambers or chambers in which the commodity will be double-stacked.

Paint interior surfaces (except for metal) with epoxy resin, vinyl plastic, or 

asphalt base paints. Additional paint types may be approved if the 

manufacturer’s specifications show compatibility of the paint with the 

fumigant to be used. Such paint coverings make the surfaces less sorptive, an 

important factor in maintaining gas concentrations. Although not mandatory, 

many fumigation chamber operators install concrete bumpers on the floor 

around the sides of the chamber to prevent forklift damage to the walls.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-3-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

The construction and fastening of chamber doors is most critical to the 

chamber’s ability to hold the gas. Chamber doors can be mounted using hinges, 

sliding rails, cantilevers, etc., and can be tightened against the associated 

gasket with turnscrews, hydraulic rams, clamps, etc. Approval will be based on 

review of the individual system. PPQ does note that small guillotine-style 

doors are less likely to leak than many other door types and chamber doors that 

are hinged at the top are less likely to sag than those hinged at the side. Heavyduty or industrial hinges are required for doors that are hinged at the side. 

Regardless of the method used to mount and fasten the doors, it is important 

that a high-quality gasket is installed around the entire perimeter of the 

chamber opening. To obtain the maximum seal possible, uniformly and tightly 

compress the doors against the gaskets.

Circulation and Exhaust Systems

Fans or blowers delivering the prescribed minimum air movement are essential 

to proper fumigant distribution.

Various methods can be used to circulate the fumigant within the chamber. 

Equipment should be capable of circulating air at the rate of at least one-third 

the volume of the chamber per minute. A minimum of two fans is required for 

chambers greater than 1,000 cubic feet, although this requirement may be 

waived by local APHIS-PPQ personnel on an individual basis, i.e., when one 

fan can be shown to achieve adequate and uniform gas concentrations 

throughout the fumigated load. Position the fans in one of these three 

configurations:

at opposite ends of the chamber, facing each other–one high and one low

all mounted high on one wall of the chamber

one fan is placed at the top and one at the bottom of a duct or enclosed 

space

Local APHIS-PPQ personnel may also approve chamber setups resembling 

precoolers. In this arrangement, two rows of pallets are positioned with 

approximately a two-foot tunnel in between them and a large fan (that meets 

minimum air flow requirements) at the front that pulls the fumigant through 

the pallets and redistributes it above the pallets into the room. In some cases, 

this setup may utilize a second fan which can both facilitate the circulation of 

the air/gas mixture and serve as the exhaust fan during aeration.

NOTICE

Aluminum base paints are not acceptable because of the corrosive effect caused by 

a reaction between such paints and the fumigant.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-3-7

Ductwork is recommended for larger chambers, especially those that are long 

and narrow. It serves to pick up the air/gas mixture near the floor and blow it 

across the top of the load.

Additional fans might be required in certain cases (e.g., larger chambers, 

chambers in which the commodities are double-stacked, chambers without 

ductwork or return fans.) A blower located outside the chamber can also be 

used, but this method increases the possibility of leakage considerably.

The exhaust fan(s) must be capable of a minimum of ten air exchanges per 

hour. The sum of cubic feet per minute (cfm) of the exhaust fan(s) or exhaust 

blower divided by the volume of enclosure (in cubic feet), and multiplying the 

fraction by 60, equals the number of complete gas volume exchanges per hour.

Refer to Figure 6-3-1 and the associated example for the formula for 

calculating the air exchange rate (AER). 

Size exhaust blowers according to the volume of the chamber. 

APHIS PPQ requires a minimum of four gas exchanges per hour during 

aeration, although fifteen or higher is preferable, especially for perishable 

commodities. The quality of perishable commodities may be impacted even at 

or around the minimum required aeration rate of four gas exchanges per hour. 

If the exhaust flow is connected to a MB recovery system, it must not impede 

the flow rate to less than four volumes per hour. Frequently, circulation and 

exhaust systems are designed to utilize the same blower. Extend the exhaust 

stack at least 15 feet above all nearby structures. Local air quality control 

agencies may require more stringent measures. It is essential that the air/gas 

mixture is vented to the outside, with all local safety ordinances being 

followed.

NOTICE

Deviations from these guidelines may be permissible but will require additional testing to ensure efficacy.

Figure 6-3-1 Formula to Calculate Air Exchange Rate (AER)

EXAMPLE
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-3-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Fumigant Dispensing System

The dispensing system needed will vary with the type of fumigant being used. 

The fumigant MB is usually introduced into the chamber through an 

introduction line extending from the volatilizer to the air stream in front of the 

introduction fan. Within the chamber, this tube should contain properly spaced 

openings through which the fumigant is dispersed.

Ensure that no liquid MB comes into contact with the commodity by one of the 

following methods:

Placing a piece of impermeable sheeting (e.g., plastic or rubberized 

canvas) over the commodity below and to the front of each gas 

introduction line

Placing a drip pan wherever the gas is introduced into the chamber

Using a gas introduction line with holes in the sides but solid on the 

bottom

Graduated dispensers are used to measure small quantities of MB by volume 

and generally should not be used to introduce fumigant into chambers larger 

than 2,000 cubic feet. Place the dispenser in the introduction line between the 

supply cylinder and the volatilizer. For larger quantities of fumigant, place the 

supply cylinder on a platform scale and weigh the fumigant used. The 

measured amount of fumigant must pass through a volatilizer where it is 

converted from a liquid to a vapor.

The volatilizer consists of a metal coil submerged in heated water. When 5 

pounds or less of MB are used, a simple volatilizer can be made with a 25-foot 

coil of 3/8 inch outer diameter coiled copper tubing immersed in a container of 

hot water. When amounts greater than 5 pounds are to be used, the copper 

tubing used in the volatilizer must consist of a minimum of 50 feet of 1/2 inch 

outer diameter coiled copper tubing. Volatilizers constructed as sealed metal 

units, in which there is no way to verify the amount or type of tubing inside, 

should be replaced at the discretion of local APHIS-PPQ personnel. The water 

in the volatilizer must reach 200 °F or above with a minimum temperature of 

150 °F during gas introduction. The fumigator must provide local PPQ 

personnel with a record of the temperature of the water in the volatilizer both at 

the beginning and the end of gas introduction.

The line that runs from the methyl bromide cylinder to the copper tubing in the 

volatilizer must be a 3000 PSI hydraulic high pressure hose (preferably steelbraided) with a 3/8 inch or larger inner diameter. The line that exits the 

NOTICE

You are not required to record the temperature of the water in the volatilizer on the 

PPQ Form 429B or in the electronic 429 database.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-3-9

volatilizer and runs into the enclosure must be a 350 PSI tubing with a 1⁄2 inch 

or greater inner diameter. The chamber operator may wish to install either a 

pressure release trap (i.e., burp tube) or pull a slight vacuum in the chamber 

prior to dispensing the fumigant to mitigate against the increased pressure 

accompanying gas introduction, although neither of these recommendations is 

mandatory.

The maximum rate of fumigant introduction from a gas introduction line is 4 

pounds of gas per minute, unless the fumigator can demonstrate that a faster 

rate of introduction would not result in the temperature of the water in the 

volatilizer falling below 150 o

F anytime during the entire gas introduction 

process. This temperature requirement is necessary to ensure that no MB can 

be introduced as a liquid into the chamber. Purge all gas introduction lines with 

either compressed air or nitrogen after gas introduction.

Calibrate both the scale and the thermometer on the volatilizer annually, 

although the latter may instead be replaced annually with a thermometer that 

comes with a certificate of calibration. Written documentation of calibration 

must be present at the time of fumigation. All calibrations must be performed 

by the appropriate state governmental department of weights and measures, the 

National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), or an approved 

calibration company.

Pressure-leakage Test for NAP Fumigation Chambers

Before a chamber is used for fumigation, it must be checked for tightness using 

a pressure-leakage test. The chamber must pass this test to be certified. The 

certifier may also perform a smoke candle test to identify the location of any 

leaks which could pose safety hazards during fumigation, especially if the 

retention time is low during the pressure-leakage test or the certifier suspects 

leakage. This will allow the operator the opportunity to correct these spots 

before any MB is introduced into the chamber, thus minimizing the likelihood 

of human exposure to the fumigant.

Conduct the pressure-leakage test using an open-arm or electronic manometer. 

See Open-Arm Manometer on page 8-1-19 for a detailed description of this 

type of manometer. Refer to Appendix E for a list of approved manometers.

The procedure for conducting a pressure-leakage test is as follows:

1. Install an opening (usually 2- inches in diameter) in the chamber to which a 

blower or other device for introducing air can be attached.

2. Attach a 2-inch ball-valve between the opening (pipe fitting) and the 

blower. This will stop the flow of air when the chamber has reached 

pressure and prevent the air from venting out of that opening.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-3-10 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

3. Install an additional opening, such as a gas sampling line opening, for the 

manometer. This opening should be located within 15 inches of the hole for 

the blower. Both openings should be situated approximately 4 to 5 feet 

from the floor, so readings can easily be taken.

4. Close chamber as for fumigation.

5. Attach one end of the manometer to the chamber opening.

6. Pressurize the chamber using a blower (or other device that blows high 

volumes of air) to a total pressure of 25 mm (12.5 mm in each arm of the 

manometer) for chambers constructed partially or entirely of plywood or 

50 mm for chambers constructed of materials such as cement or cinder 

blocks.

7. Discontinue blower and close its opening.

8. Observe time for pressure to recede.

For a chamber constructed of materials, such as cement or cinder blocks, the 

time lapse for the chamber pressure to recede from 25 mm to 2.5 mm in each

arm of the manometer must be:

22 to 29 seconds; reinspect chambers every 6 months

30 seconds or longer; reinspect chambers annually

For plywood chambers, the time lapse for the chamber pressure to recede from 

12.5 mm to 1.25 mm in each arm must be:

60 seconds or longer; reinspect chambers annually

During each certification, PPQ must conduct a preventative maintenance 

inspection. The maintenance inspection will ensure the merit of each unit and 

correct any deficiencies prior to certification. Refer to Table 6-3-1 for an 

inspection checklist.

Once the chamber has passed the pressure-leakage test and the preventative 

maintenance check, the approving APHIS official must complete PPQ Form 

480 (Treatment Facility Construction, Operation and Test Data), and PPQ 

Form 482 (Certificate of Approval). Give a copy of each of the forms to the 

owner/operator of the chamber and mail to:

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-3-11

Other Auxiliary Equipment

For chambers located inside a building, USDA requires that low-level gas 

monitoring devices be installed in the same room as the fumigation chamber. 

Multiple monitors may be necessary depending on the configuration of the 

facility.

According to the needs of the operation, other auxiliary equipment may be 

necessary. When heat is required, steam pipes or low-temperature electric strip 

heaters are generally recommended. Do not use open flame or exposed electric 

coils as they tend to break down the gas and form undesirable compounds. Size 

refrigeration units to the volume of the chamber and the type and amount of 

commodity involved. 

Install a temperature monitoring device in chambers used for quarantine 

treatments that are six hours or more in duration. Temperature recording 

thermometers are usually attached to the outside of the chamber with a remote 

sensing unit attached to the inside wall or inserted into the product. 

Specifications for the temperature recording system are:

Accurate to within ± 0.6 °C or ±1.0 °F in the treatment temperature range 

of 4.4 °C to 26.7 °C (40 °F to 80 °F)

Calibrated annually by the National Institute of Standards and Technology 

(NIST) or by the manufacturer

The calibration certificate will list a correction factor, if needed, and 

the correction factor would be applied to the actual temperature 

reading to obtain the true temperature.

Capable of printing all temperature readings or downloading data to a 

secure source once per hour throughout the entire treatment (all 

temperature data must be accessible at a safe distance during the 

fumigation)

Tamper-proof

Phosphine Chambers

Phosphine can react with certain metals (e.g., gold, silver, copper, brass, and 

other copper alloys) and cause corrosion, especially at higher temperatures and 

relative humidities. Fans, blowers, and tubing should not be constructed from 

these or any other materials, such as urethane or other rubber, that are not 

resistant to phosphine. It is recommended that all wiring be external to the 

chamber, but is required (at a minimum) that all wiring, electrical and exhaust 

systems be non-sparking and explosion proof.

All gas dispensing equipment used with cylinderized formulations of 

phosphine must be approved by the registrant. VAPORPH3OS can only be 

introduced via Cytec-approved blending equipment. ECO2FUME must be 
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-3-12 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

introduced via stainless steel or hydraulic dispensing lines of suitable pressure 

rating and materials of construction, as determined by Cytec. Heat sources are 

generally not used or necessary in phosphine introduction, although some 

methods of cylinderized phosphine introduction may use electric vaporizers. 

Contact the registrant for additional information on this issue. Circulation fans 

are not needed in phosphine chambers.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-3-13

Checklist

Use the checklist in Table 6-3-1 as a guide during chamber certifications.

Table 6-3-1 Chamber Checklist

Chamber and Volatilizer Yes No

Has chamber been measured and total volume calculated, including all areas where 

the fumigant penetrates (for example, ductwork)?

Has chamber been checked for integrity?

 Smoke test

 Pressure test

Have fans been tested to recirculate at least 1/3 of the total volume per minute?

Can gas monitoring be adequately performed?

 Are sampling leads properly placed?

 Are sampling leads 1/4 inch inner diameter polyethylene or polypropylene and free 

from blockage?

Will a scale be used to apply fumigant?

 If yes, has the scale been calibrated and certified this year?

 If no, Is the graduated dispenser in good condition?

Are the door seals and gaskets in good condition?

Is the copper tubing in the volatilizer intact? (check for holes, if possible)

Is the temperature gauge accurate and has it been calibrated within one year?

Required Equipment and Documentation

Tape measure or electronic measuring device

Calculator

Stop watch

Air (leaf) blower with appropriate fittings and adapters

Manometer (including tubing and appropriate liquid)

Digital anemometer

Gas detection device (calibrated within 1 year)

Dessicant (Drierite®) and Ascarite®

Auxiliary pump (for large chambers)

Digital thermometer (accuracy 0.1 °F) with probe

Smoke candles

Gas leak detection device

Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)

First aid kit, including eye wash

Emergency medical treatment facility map and phone number

PPQ Form 480, Treatment Facility Construction, Operation, and Test Data

PPQ Form 482, Certificate of Approval

Safety data sheet (SDS)

Warning placard (English and Spanish)

Special local need label and permit (if applicable)
Certifying Facilities Certifying Normal Atmospheric Fumigation Chambers

Construction and Performance Standards

6-3-14 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-4-1

Chapter

6 Certifying Facilities

Certification of Cold Treatment

Contents

Introduction 6-4-1

Standards for Temperature Recording Systems 6-4-2

Temperature Recording System 6-4-2

Temperature Sensors 6-4-3

Remote Data Transmission (RDT) Systems 6-4-3

Certification of Vessels Used for In-Transit Cold Treatment 6-4-5

Plan and Specification Approval 6-4-5

Certification Testing 6-4-6

Documentation 6-4-7

Certificate of Approval 6-4-8

Application for USDA Vessel Approval 6-4-9

Certification of Self-Refrigerated Containers Used for In-Transit Cold 

Treatment 6-4-9

Certification Requirements 6-4-9

Letter of Certification 6-4-9

Application for USDA Container Certification 6-4-10

Certification of Warehouses Used for Cold Treatment 6-4-10

Plan and Specification Approval 6-4-10

Certification Testing 6-4-11

Application for USDA Warehouse Approval 6-4-12

Calibration of Temperature Sensors 6-4-12

Contact Information 6-4-14

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT 6-4-14

Introduction

Since the early 1900s, sustained cold temperature has been employed as an 

effective post-harvest method for the control of the Mediterranean and certain 

other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2 °C (36 

°F) or below for specific periods of time results in the mortality of the various 

life stages of this group of notoriously injurious insects. Procedures were 

developed to effectively apply cold treatment (CT) to fruit while in transport in 

refrigerated holds of ships, in refrigerated containers, and in warehouses 

located in the country of origin or in the United States.

Self-refrigerated (integral) containers, conventional vessels, and warehouses 

utilized for regulatory cold treatment are subject to approval by the USDA. 
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Standards for Temperature Recording Systems

6-4-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Approval is needed only when treating fruit under USDA regulations and does 

not constitute an endorsement for the carrying or storage of refrigerated cargo.

Only officials authorized by APHIS have permission to conduct warehouse, 

vessel, or container certification under the general guidance of S&T-TMT. 

Refer to the S&T-TMT website for a complete list of USDA-certified vessels 

and containers for in-transit cold treatment.

Standards for Temperature Recording Systems

Temperature recording systems may consist of various electronic components 

such as temperature sensors, computers, printers, and cables, and are required 

for temperature recording installations in cold treatment vessels, refrigerated 

containers, or warehouses. Submit plans and specifications of the temperature 

recording system to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for review and approval 

before installation.

Temperature Recording System

Accuracy—The accuracy of the system must be within plus or minus 0.3 

°C (0.5 °F) of the true temperature in the range of minus 3 °C (27 °F) to 

plus 3 °C (37 °F).

Ensure the instrument is capable of repeatability in the range of minus 

3 °C to plus 3 °C (27 °F to 37 °F).

Automatic Operation—The system must be capable of automatic 

operation whenever the treatment system is activated.

Long-Term Recording—The system must be capable of continuous 

recording of date, time, sensor number, and temperature during all 

calibrations and for the duration of a voyage and/or treatment period.

Password Protection—All approved temperature recording devices must

be password protected and tamper proof.

Range—The recorder must be programmed to cover the entire range 

between minus 3 °C to plus 3 °C (27 °F to 37 °F), with a resolution of 0.1 

(°C or °F).

Recording Frequency—The time interval between prints will be no less 

than once every hour. For each sensor, the temperature value, location/

identification, time, and date must print once per hour.

Repeatability—When used under treatment conditions over an extended 

period of time, the system must be capable of repeatability in the range of 

minus 3 °C to plus 3 °C (27 °F to 37 °F). The design, construction, and 

materials must be such that the typical environmental conditions 

(including vibration) will not affect performance.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Standards for Temperature Recording Systems

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-4-3

Visual Display—The system must have a visual display so the 

temperature can be reviewed manually during the treatment and 

calibrations.

Temperature Sensors

Construction Standards—Sensors should have an outer sheath diameter 

of 0.25 inches (6.4 millimeters) or less. The sensing unit must be in the 

first inch of the sensor.

Identification—Identify all sensors to distinguish the sensors in one 

compartment from those in other compartments.

Place an identifying number on the box where the sensor originates 

and on a permanent tag where the cable joins the sensor.

Identify the sensors for each compartment so the air sensors are 

numbered first (e.g., A1, A2—air; A3, A4,....,etc.,—fruit pulp).

Location—Post a diagram next to the recording instrument that shows the 

location and identification of each sensor by compartment.

Air sensors—Place sensors on the center line of the vessel, fore and 

aft, approximately 30 centimeters from the ceiling and connected to 

cables at least 3 meters in length

Fruit sensors—Distribute fruit sensors throughout the compartment so 

all areas of the compartment can be reached (5- to 15-meter cable 

lengths are usually sufficient). The number and location is dependent 

upon cubic capacity of the compartment. Refer to Table 6-4-1 on page 

6-4-6 for guidance for vessels and Table 6-4-2 on page 6-4-11 for 

guidance for warehouses. Three temperature sensors are required for 

refrigerated containers. These are labeled USDA1, USDA2, and 

USDA3.

Contact USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for a complete list of approved 

temperature recording systems.

Remote Data Transmission (RDT) Systems

RDT systems communicate wirelessly via cellular or satellite connections with 

refrigerated container temperature controllers to monitor the temperature of 

commodities undergoing in-transit cold treatments. When connected to the 

communications grid, cold treatment data logs containing recorded data from 

the temperature controller’s memory are downloadable. Data records are 

currently output to Commodity Treatment Information System (CTIS) 556 InTransit Cold Treatment database (https://coldtreatment.cphst.org) in XML 

format. 

NOTICE

RDT systems are currently only approved for use in refrigerated containers.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Standards for Temperature Recording Systems

6-4-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Refer to Appendix E for a list of approved RDT systems.

Requirements for RDT Systems

RDT systems must be approved by USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT before 

they can be used in APHIS-approved cold treatments. Before requesting 

APHIS approval for RDT systems, the system must meet the following 

requirements:

1. Compatible with a USDA-approved refrigerated container temperature 

controller. The system must transmit temperature data retrieved directly 

from the USDA-approved controller/recorder built into the refrigerated 

container. The RDT system cannot use a separate or additional recorder.

2. Complete a minimum of 30 cold treatment trials of randomly selected 

commodity shipments. Trials must result in:

A. successful passing of the cold treatment schedule for the commodity 

shipped

B. successful RDT data matches with the USDA-approved temperature 

controller data

C. successful upload of RDT data to the CTIS 556 In-Transit Cold 

Treatment test database 

3. Complete a 3-month operational field implementation with details 

discussed between the manufacturer and USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT. 

The implementation phase consists of a successful passing of a minimum 

of 30 randomly selected RDT cold treatment data logs (minimum of 10 

data logs per month) that:

A. are identical to the data downloaded manually from the USDAapproved refrigerated container temperature controller 

B. are successfully uploaded to the CTIS 556 In-Transit Cold Treatment 

database (https://coldtreatment.cphst.org) in XML format.

C. successfully pass the cold treatment for the commodity being shipped

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT must also receive the most current technical 

brochure from the manufacturer. 

Contact USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for additional information. 
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Certification of Vessels Used for In-Transit Cold Treatment

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-4-5

Certification of Vessels Used for In-Transit Cold Treatment

Vessels used in cold treatment must be certified by a qualified APHIS-PPQ 

employee or a designated representative before treating fruit under USDA 

regulations. Refrigeration (reefer) vessels presented for approval must be 

classified under the rules of the American Bureau of Shipping or a comparable 

internationally recognized ship classification society.

Submit plans, drawings, and specifications to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

prior to the first vessel certification. Conduct certification tests prior to the 

vessel receiving final approval to conduct a cold treatment. Certification will 

be performed every 3 years or sooner if APHIS determines that a malfunction 

or alteration of the system warrants a recertification.

Plan and Specification Approval

Prior to the start of vessel construction, an application for vessel approval, 

detailed drawings of the vessel’s physical characteristics, and a written 

description of all the equipment related to treatment must be reviewed and 

approved by USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT. Submit all plans and supporting 

materials in Standard English.

Plans and specifications must include the following information:

Completed Application for USDA Vessel Approval

Drawings showing the dimensions of the refrigerated compartments

Example of an hourly printout from the recording system (must include 

date, time, temperature unit, vessel name)

Number and location of air and pulp sensors in each compartment (see 

Table 6-4-1 on page 6-4-6)

Specifications of the recording system

Specifications of refrigeration equipment (including air circulation)

The review of plans and process descriptions may take up to 60 days and 

subsequent requests for additional information may further extend this time.

Vessel owners will receive a letter granting plan approval or describing plan 

deficiencies and necessary remedial measures.

Following plan approval, build the vessel according to the plans. If deviations 

from the plans are necessary, USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT must approve 

the changes. Submit changes in a manner similar to a new construction 

application.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Certification of Vessels Used for In-Transit Cold Treatment

6-4-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Certification Testing

Make the vessel available for an on-site certification visit by a PPQ official 

when all documents and a completed application have been submitted and 

approved by the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT.

Contact the State Plant Health Director or Officer-in-Charge at the port of call 

to arrange vessel certification at a U.S. port.

Establish a cooperative agreement and other arrangements as needed with 

USDA for vessel certification inspections made at a foreign location. This will 

require a 60-day notification before the inspection can be scheduled. For 

specific information on the required procedure, contact:

USDA-APHIS-PPQ

Preclearance and Offshore Programs

4700 River Road, Unit 67

Riverdale, MD 20737

Phone: (301) 851-2162

A representative from the temperature recorder company who is familiar with 

the installation should be on hand to correct any deficiencies in the system.

Before requesting final inspection, the vessel’s owner must complete all 

arrangements. Calibration and identification tests will be made during the 

inspection. Refer to Calibration of Temperature Sensors for calibration 

procedures for all temperature sensors.

Determining the Number of Temperature Sensors

The number and location of temperature sensors is based on the cubic capacity 

of the compartment. Refer to Table 6-4-1 to determine the number and location 

of sensors. Always place the air sensors on the fore and aft bulkheads. Always 

distribute the pulp sensors throughout the compartment so that all areas can be 

reached.

NOTICE

Do not conduct vessel certification if temperatures in the vessel holds are lower than 

-1.0 °C (plus or minus 0.3 °C) or 30.2 °F (plus or minus 0.5 °F).

Table 6-4-1 Number of Temperature Sensors per Compartment

Cubic Feet Cubic Meters Number of 

Air Sensors1

Number of 

Pulp Sensors

Total Number 

of Sensors

0 - 10,000 0 - 283 2 or 3 2 4 or 5

10,001 - 15,000 284 - 425 2 or 3 3 5 or 6

15,001 - 25,000 426 - 708 2 or 3 4 6 or 7
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Certification of Vessels Used for In-Transit Cold Treatment

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-4-7

Frequency of Certification Testing

A certification test is required every 3 years. No extensions to this 3 year 

requirement will be granted. Make requests for renewal at least 60 days before 

expiration to the S&T-TMT or USDA-PPQ Preclearance Programs. 

Certification testing is also required any time a malfunction, breakdown, or 

other failure occurs (excluding temperature sensors) that requires 

modifications to the recording and monitoring system(s).

Documentation

The APHIS official will document all tests during certification. For final 

approval, email a copy of the signed PPQ Form 449—R, Temperature 

Recording Calibration Report, copies of all charts and/or printouts, and any 

other pertinent addenda or appendices to ppqctis@aphis.usda.gov.

25,001 - 45,000 709 - 1,274 2 or 3 5 7 or 8

45,000 - 70,000 1,275 - 1,980 2 or 3 6 8 or 9

70,001 - 100,000 1,981 - 2,830 2 or 3 8 10 or 11

> 100,000 >2,830 Contact S&T-TMT

1 In the case of twin deck compartments, two air sensors are required in the upper deck plus 

one air sensor in the lower compartment. This sensor should be located on the bulkhead farthest from the cooling unit.

NOTICE

It is highly recommended that more temperature sensors be installed than the 

minimum number required for each refrigerated compartment. If a sensor 

malfunctions during a treatment, the Port Director has the option of disregarding it, 

providing that an additional working sensor is present, and the functional sensors 

were uniformly distributed. Otherwise, the entire treatment must be repeated for the 

fruit in that compartment.

Designate two of the sensors as air sensors, and the others as pulp sensors. Any 

sensors above the required minimum may be either pulp or air sensors.

For compartments exceeding 100,000 cubic feet, contact the USDA-APHIS-PPQS&T-TMT for the minimum number of required sensors.

Table 6-4-1 Number of Temperature Sensors per Compartment

Cubic Feet Cubic Meters Number of 

Air Sensors1

Number of 

Pulp Sensors

Total Number 

of Sensors
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Certification of Vessels Used for In-Transit Cold Treatment

6-4-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Certificate of Approval 

Upon meeting all requirements, the vessel will be designated as approved to 

conduct in-transit cold treatments under the provisions of the PPQ Fruit and 

Vegetable Quarantine 56. A PPQ Form 482—Certificate of Approval, listing 

the approved refrigerated compartments will be issued to the vessel. This 

approval is for equipment only, and each consignment of fruit must satisfy all 

requirements as described in Sections 319.56 and 305.6 of the Code of Federal 

Regulations as a condition of entry into the United States.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Certification of Self-Refrigerated Containers Used for In-Transit Cold Treatment

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-4-9

Application for USDA Vessel Approval

Download a fillable Application for USDA Vessel Approval.

Contact ppqtmt@usda.gov with questions regarding the application.

Certification of Self-Refrigerated Containers Used for In-Transit Cold 

Treatment

Certify refrigerated containers used as cold treatment facilities before carrying 

treated fruit under USDA regulations. Classify refrigerated containers under 

the rules of the American Bureau of Shipping or a comparable internationally 

recognized classification society.

Certification Requirements

Download and complete an Application for USDA Container Certification.

Submit the completed application to ppqctis@usda.gov. Submit all plans and 

supporting materials in Standard English.

Include the following specifications in the application:

Air flow rate

Container size

Make and model of refrigeration unit

Make and model of temperature recorder/control unit

Type of sensor

At least three sensors are necessary for each container and must be 

labeled USDA1, USDA2, and USDA3

Letter of Certification

Upon meeting all requirements, the container(s) will be certified to conduct intransit cold treatments under the provisions of the PPQ Fruit and Vegetable 

Quarantine 56. A Letter of Certification listing the refrigerated container(s) 

will be issued to the owner. This certification is for container(s) only, and each 

consignment of fruit must satisfy all requirements as described in Sections 

319.56 and 305.6 of the Code of Federal Regulations as a condition of entry for 

importation into the United States.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Certification of Warehouses Used for Cold Treatment

6-4-10 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Application for USDA Container Certification

Download a fillable Application for USDA Container Certification.

Contact ppqctis@usda.gov for any questions regarding the application.

Certification of Warehouses Used for Cold Treatment

The local APHIS-PPQ inspector will certify refrigerated warehouses for use as 

cold treatment facilities before treating fruit under USDA regulations. In 

addition to the general requirements, warehouse approval is subject to specific 

geographical pest-risk considerations as outlined in Title 7, Section 305.6 of 

the Code of Federal Regulations.

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT will approve plans and specifications prior to 

the initial warehouse certification. Conduct a performance survey prior to the 

warehouse receiving approval to conduct cold treatments under USDA

regulations.

Plan and Specification Approval

Prior to the start of warehouse construction, submit a completed Application 

for USDA Warehouse Approval, detailed drawings of the physical 

characteristics, and a written description of all the treatment related equipment 

to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT. Submit all plans and supporting materials 

in Standard English. 

Include the following information in the application:

Address of the warehouse location

Drawings showing the dimensions, cubic capacity, and door locations

Make and model of the refrigeration equipment

Method for segregating fruit under treatment and securing it from other 

foreign or domestic articles

Name and address of the firm owning the warehouse chamber

Number and location of sensors (see Table 6-4-2 on page 6-4-11)

Specification of the air circulation system; must indicate the number of air 

changes and direction of air flow

Specifications of the recording system

NOTICE

Drawings may be hand-drawn, but must clearly show location of refrigeration units, 

circulation fans, temperature recorder, and sensors.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Certification of Warehouses Used for Cold Treatment

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-4-11

Certification Testing

When all documents and a completed application have been submitted and 

approved by the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT, the warehouse owner should 

make the warehouse available for an on-site certification visit by a local PPQ 

official. To arrange warehouse certification, contact the State Plant Health 

Director or Officer-in-Charge for the port. Before requesting final inspection, 

the warehouse owner must complete all arrangements as directed by the PPQ 

officer. The PPQ official will conduct calibration and identification tests during 

the inspection.

Refer to Calibration of Temperature Sensors for calibration procedures for all 

temperature sensors.

Determining the Number of Temperature Sensors

The number and location of temperature sensors is based on the cubic capacity. 

Refer to Table 6-4-2 to determine the number and location of sensors. The 

minimum requirement is three sensors—one air sensor and two pulp sensors. 

Sensor cables must be long enough to reach all areas of the load.

Table 6-4-2 Number of Temperature Sensors in a Warehouse

Cubic Feet Cubic 

Meters

Number of 

Pallets

Number 

of Air 

Sensors

Number of Pulp 

Sensors

Total Number of Sensors

0 - 10,000 0 - 283 1 - 

100

12 3

10,001 - 

20,000

284 - 

566

101 - 

200

13 4

20,001 - 

30,000

567 - 

849

201 - 

300

14 5

30,001 - 

40,000

850 - 

1132

301 - 

400

15 6

40,001 - 

50,000

1133 - 

1415

401 - 

500

16 7

50,001 - 

60,000

1416 - 

1698

501 - 

600

17 8

60,001 - 

70,000

1699 - 

1981

601 - 

700

18 9

70,001 - 

80,000

1982 - 

2264

701 - 

800

19 10

80,001 - 

90,000

2265 - 

2547

801 - 

900

1 10 11

90,001 - 

100,000

2548 - 

2830

901 - 

1000

1 11 12

> 100,000 >2830 1000+ Must be approved by S&T-TMT
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Calibration of Temperature Sensors

6-4-12 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Frequency of Certification Testing

A certification test is required every year. Submit requests for recertification to 

the local PPQ office at least 60 days before expiration. Certification testing is 

also required any time a malfunction, breakdown, or other failure occurs 

(excluding temperature sensors) that requires modifications to the recording 

and monitoring system(s).

Application for USDA Warehouse Approval

Download a fillable Application for USDA Warehouse Approval.

Contact ppqtmt@usda.gov with questions regarding the application.

Calibration of Temperature Sensors

Calibrate all temperature sensors using a clean freshwater ice water slurry at 0 

°C (32 °F).

Use the following steps to make the ice water slurry:

1. Check individual sensors to verify that they are properly labeled and 

correctly connected to the temperature recorder. This can be accomplished 

by hand warming each sensor when its’ number appears on the visual 

display panel of the recording instrument. A temperature change, observed 

on the instrument.should occur. If the instrument fails to react, the sensor is 

incorrectly connected or malfunctioning and should be corrected by the 

instrument representative.

2. Prepare a mixture of clean ice and fresh water in a clean insulated 

container.

NOTICE

If a refrigerated room is equipped according to the cubic capacity of the storage area 

(rather than of the load itself), the same criteria apply.

It is highly recommended that additional sensors beyond the required minimum be 

installed.

NOTICE

It is APHIS policy to use the standard “rounding rule.” In determining calibration 

factors, if the reading is 0.05 or higher, round to the next higher number in tenths. If it 

is 0.04 or lower, round to the lower number. For example: If the calibration factor was 

0.15, round to 0.2. If it was 0.32, round to 0.3. Similar rounding can be used in actual 

treatment readings. If an actual reading was 34.04, round to 34.0, add or subtract the 

calibration factor, if necessary. If it was 34.07, round to 34.1, add or subtract the 

calibration factor, if necessary.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Calibration of Temperature Sensors

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-4-13

3. Crush or chip the ice and completely fill the container.

4. Add enough water to stir the mixture.

5. Stir the ice and water for a minimum of 2 minutes to ensure the water is 

completely cooled and good mixing has occurred.

The percentage of ice is estimated at 80 to 85 percent while the water 

fills the air voids (15 to 20 percent).

6. Add more ice as the ice melts.

7. Prepare and stir the ice water slurry to maintain a temperature of 0 °C (32 

°F).

8. Submerge the sensors in the ice water slurry without touching the sides or 

bottom of the container.

9. Stir the mixture.

10. Continue testing of each sensor in the ice water slurry until the temperature 

reading stabilizes.

11. Record two consecutive readings of the stabilized temperature on the 

temperature chart or log sheet.

The temperature recording device should be in manual mode to 

provide an instantaneous readout.

12. Allow at least a 1-minute interval between two consecutive readings for 

any one sensor; however the interval should not exceed 5 minutes.

The variance between the two readings should not exceed 0.1 °.

13. Contact an instrument company representative immediately if the time 

interval exceeds the normal amount of time required to verify the reading 

and accuracy of the sensor and recorder system.

The recorder used with the sensors must be capable of printing or 

displaying on demand and not just at hourly intervals.

14. Correct any deficiencies in the equipment before certification.

15. Replace any sensor that reads more than plus or minus 0.3 °C (0.5 °F) from 

the standard 0 °C (32 °F).

16. Replace and recalibrate any sensors that malfunction.

17. Document the recalibration and replacement of the sensor(s) on the PPQ 

Form 449-R, Temperature Recording Calibration Report.

18. Determine the calibrations to the nearest tenth of 1 degree.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Cold Treatment

Contact Information

6-4-14 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Contact Information

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-5-1

Chapter

6 Certifying Facilities

Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities

Contents

Introduction 6-5-1

Submission and Approval of a New Facility Construction 6-5-2

Preliminary Performance Testing 6-5-2

New Procedures for Hot Water Facility Certification and Commercial Testing 

6-5-3

Mango Temperatures Prior to Treatment 6-5-4

Permanent Probe Temperature 6-5-4

Procedures for Conducting the Annual APHIS Performance Test 6-5-4

Protocols for Foreign Treatment Facilities 6-5-7

Addresses for Technical Contact 6-5-7

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT 6-5-7

Preclearance and Offshore Programs 6-5-7

Introduction

Quarantine treatment by immersion in hot water is used primarily for fruits that 

are hosts of tropical fruit flies. Exposing the fruit to a temperature of at least 

115 °F (46.1 °C) for specific periods of time (depending upon the specific pest, 

type of fruit, and size of fruit) constitutes a quarantine treatment. The U.S. 

Department of Agriculture (USDA), Animal and Plant Health Inspection 

Service (APHIS) incorporates this principle of insect control into its 

regulations to facilitate the importation or interstate movement of certain fruits 

from areas where tropical fruit flies are the significant pests of concern.

Commercial facilities using hot water immersion treatment are subject to 

USDA-APHIS certification on an annual basis. More frequent tests may be 

required at the option of APHIS. APHIS certification is given solely in 

conjunction with quarantine treatment requirements.

NOTICE

The certifying official shall check with the manager of the facility to be sure that he is 

aware of the requirement for using potable water. Whenever water comes into 

contact with fresh produce, the water’s quality dictates the potential for pathogen 

contamination. To reduce the risk of food-borne illnesses, the water used for 

washing, treatments, and cooling must be fortified with sodium hypochlorite 

(household bleach), and constantly maintained at a chlorine level not to exceed 200 

ppm.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities

Submission and Approval of a New Facility Construction

6-5-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Submission and Approval of a New Facility Construction

The facility submits an application for approval of a new facility or for 

approval of plans to begin construction of a new facility. 

Download and complete a fillable Application for USDA Hot Water Treatment 

Facility Approval.

Preliminary Performance Testing

If the facility has not been previously certified by APHIS, the operators should 

conduct preliminary, informal performance tests on their own (together with an 

engineer, if needed), to assure themselves that their equipment is in good 

working order.

By trial and error, the manager of the facility should decide on a tentative 

temperature set point for their tanks. This should be done by immersing one or 

more full baskets of fruit into each tank, to be certain that the water 

temperature (nearest the fruit) reaches at least 115.0 °F (46.1 °C) within 5 

minutes. A thermostatic set point for each tank is typically in the range of 

115.8 °F to 116.9 °F (46.6 °C to 47.2 °C).

As an option, some hot water immersion systems use an initial higher set point 

for the first several minutes, then automatically drop to a lower set point for the 

remainder of the treatment. (If this programming option is used, the change to 

the second set point must be done automatically, not manually.)

Data from the preliminary tests need not be recorded on official forms. These 

data, however, must be presented to APHIS, as evidence that the facility is 

ready for the official performance test.

Once the facility has been officially certified, APHIS does not require the 

facility to present the preliminary performance test data in subsequent years, 

except when there have been major engineering changes to the equipment.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities

New Procedures for Hot Water Facility Certification and Commercial Testing

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-5-3

New Procedures for Hot Water Facility Certification and Commercial 

Testing

These guidelines have been issued to provide a more accurate reflection of the 

tank’s coldest temperatures. They are not intended to replace existing 

procedures, but to be used in conjunction with the current operational 

framework. These guidelines are only needed for facilities not capturing 

interior probe temperatures with actual sensors and are only in place until each 

facility begins capturing interior temperatures with actual sensors. 

Furthermore, these guidelines will be in effect until each facility develops a 

procedure for placing probes in the coldest locations of the tank. Facilities 

already using temporary probes as a routine part of commercial testing can 

disregard the procedures outlined below. All new equipment and procedures 

must be approved by the USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT before 

implementation.

Refer to Table 6-5-1 for information regarding adjusted temperatures and set 

points:

1. Average minimum pulp temperatures must be taken from a minimum of 

five fruit extracted from the coldest fruit before treatment. On certification 

day, this average pulp temperature becomes the minimum commercial 

treatment pulp temperature permitted. All fruit must be at or above 70 °F 

to be hot water treated.

Table 6-5-1 Hypothetical Certification Results: Treatment Tank with Multiple Set 

Points

Column No.

1 2 3 45 6

Tank Sensor 

(Lowest) 

(°F)

Portable 

Sensor

(Lowest)

 (°F)

Adjusted 

Tank Sensor 

Temperature1

(°F)

1 Adjusted Tank Sensor Temperature Equation:

Take the amount of temperature exceeding 115.0 from Portable Sensor (Lowest) in column 2, 

and subtract it from Tank Sensor (Lowest) in column 1 (116.0 - 0.9 = 115.1).

Set Point

(°F)

Treatment 

Interval 

(minutes)

Pulp Temperature 

(°F)

116.0 115.9 115.1 117.0 5 78

115.5 115.4 115.1 116.0 6 - 30 78

115.3 115.2 115.1 115.5 31 - 60 78

115.1 115.0 115.1 115.3 61 - 75 78

115.0 115.0 115.0 115.0 76 - 90 78
Certifying Facilities Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities

Procedures for Conducting the Annual APHIS Performance Test

6-5-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

2. The “adjusted tank sensor temperature” is determined by taking the amount 

of temperature exceeding 115.0 from Portable Sensor (Lowest) in column 

2, and subtract it from Tank Sensor (Lowest) in column 1.

3. During certification, establish the set point with its lowest corresponding 

charted temperature. Document these values on the PPQ Form 482, 

Certificate of Approval, and an attachment in the format of Table 6-5-1.

4. The Table 6-5-1 attachment and PPQ Form 482 must be displayed in a 

prominent location at the facility.

5. During commercial treatments, the “Adjusted Tank Sensor Temperature” is 

used as the lowest treatment temperature. The commercial treatment fails if 

the tank temperature is below the “Adjusted Tank Sensor Temperature.”

Mango Temperatures Prior to Treatment

During certification, determine and record an average pulp temperature (prior 

to treatment). Calculate this averaged pulp temperature by averaging pulp 

temperatures from the five “coldest” mangoes before treatment (mangoes 

extracted from the coldest locations). This temperature becomes the minimum 

pretreatment pulp temperature allowable for commercial treatments. 

Therefore, during subsequent commercial treatments, mangoes must be at or 

above this minimum temperature before beginning treatment. (Any fruit below 

70 °F cannot be treated per manual requirements.)

Permanent Probe Temperature

During certification, record from the printout/chart each set point with its 

lowest corresponding charted (permanent probe) temperature. A treatment tank 

may have one set point or multiple set points. If the tank has multiple set 

points, these set points are for a fixed length of treatment time. Refer to 

Table 6-5-1 for a detailed explanation. This “adjusted tank temperature sensor” 

(always above 115.0 °F) becomes the lowest temperature permitted for that set 

point, or the “standard” at that set point. Commercial temperatures (permanent 

probe temperatures from the chart/printout) must be equal to or greater than 

the set point standard for each length of time. Document each “adjusted tank 

sensor temperature” determined during certification, on the PPQ Form 482, 

Certificate of Approval and on the attachment to the Certificate.

Procedures for Conducting the Annual APHIS Performance Test

To approve the facility, the APHIS officer (or designated representative) shall 

take the following steps:

1. If the facility has not been previously certified, or if modifications have 

been made since the last performance test, compare the plans and drawings 

with the actual installation.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities

Procedures for Conducting the Annual APHIS Performance Test

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-5-5

Clearly show dimensions, water circulation, temperature sensing and 

recording systems, and safeguarding precautions in the plans and 

specifications.

2. Conduct a performance test (at least annually), during an actual treatment 

as described below, to determine or verify a temperature “set point” for the 

system, and to determine the minimum duration of time required between 

the immersion of successive baskets of fruit within the same tank.

3. Inspect the heating, water circulation, and alarm systems, and check to see 

that all necessary safeguards (including screens, fans, locks, and air 

curtains) are secure and operational.

4. Calibrate the portable sensors, recording the results on APHIS Form 205, 

or a plain sheet of paper.

A. Using a factory-calibrated mercury, non-mercury, or digital 

thermometer as the standard, compare the reading of each portable 

sensor to the standard, and record any deviation.

B. To facilitate this process, a specially designed portable temperature 

calibrator may be used, which uses either hot air or a swirling hot water 

bath, set at approximately the temperature at which treatments will take 

place. A treatment tank can also be used for this purpose, provided that 

the water is kept in motion.

5. Examine the calibration of the tank’s permanent RTD sensors, and record 

the results on APHIS Form 206.

6. Tape the cords of three or four portable water temperature sensors to the 

skins of three or four selected fruits in each basket. Do not cover the end of 

the sensor with tape.

7. Insert a portable pulp temperature sensor approximately 1 centimeter into 

the flesh of one or more fruits in the tank.

A. Hold the sensor in place with tape.

B. It is not necessary to have a pulp temperature sensor in each basket.

8. Set the fruit at ambient temperature (70 °F or above) immediately prior to 

the performance test.

If the fruit is pre-warmed by artificial means, note this routine as a 

condition of approval that should be followed for each commercial 

treatment.

9. On the location diagram (APHIS Form 207), show the relative position of 

each portable sensor used in the test, and indicate whether it is a “water” or 

“pulp” sensor. Number each sensor.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities

Procedures for Conducting the Annual APHIS Performance Test

6-5-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

10. While the fruit are immersed in water, use an electronic thermometer to 

monitor the temperatures of each portable sensor at various times 

throughout the test. Record this information on APHIS Form 208 for each 

tank.

As a second option, a portable automatic recording instrument can be used. 

It must, however, operate independently from the temperature recording 

system installed at the facility.

11. During the performance test, lower the baskets of fruit into the hot water 

immersion tank.

A. Closely monitor the water temperature sensors during the first 5 

minutes of treatment.

APHIS requires that the temperatures of all water temperature sensors 

must reach at least 115 °F (46.1 °C) within 5 minutes; if not, in order 

to achieve the 5-minute temperature recovery requirement, repeat the 

test using other fruit using a slightly higher water temperature set point, 

and/or a slightly longer time interval between subsequent basket 

immersions.

B. Run the test for the full duration (up to 90 minutes, depending upon 

fruit size).

During that time, all water temperature sensors must read at least 115 

°F (46.1 °C) at the 5-minute point and beyond. In addition, the pulp 

temperature sensor (or sensors) must read at least 113 °F (45 °C) by the 

end of the test.

NOTICE

It should be noted that APHIS standards for passing the official performance test are 

higher than the standards accepted for commercial treatments. This is intentional. 

During commercial treatments of mangoes, the water in the tank is allowed up to 5 

minutes to reach the minimum treatment temperature of 115 °F after the fruit have 

been submerged.

NOTICE

The mango hot water schedules also have a built-in tolerance for subnormal 

temperatures in the range of 113.7 °F to 114.9 °F for up to 10 minutes (in the case of 

65 or 75-minute treatments), or 15 minutes (in the case of 90-minute treatments). 

This tolerance was designed to “save” an ongoing treatment during an emergency 

situation, such as an electrical power outage. However, for the purposes of the 

official performance test, all water temperature sensors are required to read at least 

115.0 °F within the first 5 minutes, and to maintain temperatures at or above that 

threshold during the remainder of the treatment.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities

Protocols for Foreign Treatment Facilities

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-5-7

12. For issuance of a Certificate of Approval (PPQ Form 482), submit all 

supporting documents to the APHIS Regional Office (or to another APHIS 

office delegated by the Region).

13. APHIS will certify the facility only when all requirements are met, 

including two successful hot water immersion treatments in each tank 

using standard fruit loads.

For annual recertification, however, only one successful performance test 

is required per tank, unless the work plan requires additional tests. Submit 

a copy of PPQ Form 482, the corresponding attachment (Table 6-5-1), all 

forms used in the certification or recertification, and printouts from the 

temperature recorder to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT.

Protocols for Foreign Treatment Facilities

Contact the USDA-APHIS-PPQ Preclearance and Offshore Programs to obtain 

protocols for foreign treatment facilities.

Addresses for Technical Contact

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Preclearance and Offshore Programs

Director, Preclearance and Offshore Programs

USDA, APHIS, PPQ, POP

4700 River Road, 4th Floor

Riverdale, MD 20737

Phone: (301) 851-2281
Certifying Facilities Certification of Hot Water Immersion Facilities

Addresses for Technical Contact

6-5-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-6-1

Chapter

6 Certifying Facilities

Certification of Niger seed Treatment Facilities

Contents

PPQ Regulation for the Entry of Niger Seeds into the United States 6-6-1

The Certification Process 6-6-1

Step 1—Submission and Approval of Engineering Construction Plan and 

Facility Requirements 6-6-2

Step 2—Request Certification for a Treatment Facility 6-6-2

Step 3—Conduct the Certification Test 6-6-2

Step 4—Certification of the Treatment Facility 6-6-4

PPQ Regulation for the Entry of Niger Seeds into the United States

In accordance with the guidance provided in this manual, heat treat Niger seeds 

(Guizotia abyssinica) from any foreign place for possible infestation with 

noxious weed seeds or prohibited pathogens at or before the time of arrival into 

the United States. Conduct the heat treatment in a foreign or domestic APHIScertified treatment facility.

The Certification Process

Certification of Niger seed treatment facilities includes the following steps:

Step 1—Submission and Approval of Engineering Construction Plan and 

Facility Requirements on page 6-6-2

Step 2—Request Certification for a Treatment Facility on page 6-6-2

Step 3—Conduct the Certification Test on page 6-6-2

Step 4—Certification of the Treatment Facility on page 6-6-4
Certifying Facilities Certification of Niger seed Treatment Facilities

PPQ Regulation for the Entry of Niger Seeds into the United States

6-6-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Step 1—Submission and Approval of Engineering 

Construction Plan and Facility Requirements

The facility submits an engineering construction plan and facility requirements 

to the appropriate State and country officials and to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&TTMT for approval. The plans must include facility dimensions, capacity, 

heating unit specifications, and temperature/time recording system 

specifications.

Download a fillable Application for USDA Niger Seed Heat Treatment 

Facility Approval form.

Contact ppqtmt@usda.gov with questions regarding the application. 

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Facilities must comply with state, local, and country requirements. Design the 

equipment in a manner that will maintain the temperature at or above 

temperatures prescribed in the treatment schedule, T412-a. When the plans and 

requirements are approved, construct the treatment facility accordingly. 

Advanced written approval from S&T-TMT is required for any modification of 

the original plans.

Step 2—Request Certification for a Treatment Facility

The facility must submit a written request to S&T-TMT to request certification 

of a Niger seed treatment facility. The request should include the following:

Assurance that the facility manager accepts responsibility for facility 

operations

Assurance that the required equipment is on-site

Data from at least two preliminary performance tests indicating the 

facility meets performance requirements for certification, including 

copies of completed recorder printouts

Names, addresses, and phone numbers of the facility, facility manager or 

supervisor, and plant construction engineer

Step 3—Conduct the Certification Test

Initial certification testing will be conducted by S&T-TMT in conjunction 

with PPQ. For the purpose of recertification, S&T-TMT can delegate this 

responsibility to others.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Niger seed Treatment Facilities

PPQ Regulation for the Entry of Niger Seeds into the United States

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-6-3

Equipment and Materials

The treatment facility must supply the following equipment and materials in 

order to conduct a performance test for certification:

Certified calibrated thermometer (temperature range to at least 270 °F 

(132.2 °C))

Copy of plans and specifications showing dimensions and other details of 

heating and temperature recording systems

Stopwatch and tape measure

Temperature recording system to record temperature and treatment time

Facility Standards and Specifications

To qualify for certification/recertification, the treatment facility must conform 

to the following minimum standards and specifications:

An action plan to address any pests that may be associated with the 

storage, treatment, and shipment of Niger seeds

Audible alarm or highly visible light on burners or other equipment to 

indicate that the treatment equipment is not operating properly

Automatic and continuous heating controls throughout the treatment 

process (manual adjustments are allowed, but must not negate the PPQ 

Form 480 guidelines)

Gear systems used to control the Niger seed conveyor (if applicable) 

capable of being adjusted as needed to meet treatment requirements (the 

speed of the treatment conveyor cannot exceed the speed recorded on the 

PPQ Form 480)

Permanent temperature sensors (minimum of two) placed at the beginning 

and end of treatment area in the seeds at commercial treatment depth

Accuracy of the temperature recording system and permanent sensors 

must be within plus or minus 0.5 °F (0.3 °C) of true temperature

Portable temperature sensors (provided by facility or certifier) accurate to 

plus or minus 0.1 °C and calibrated at least once a year. The sensor must

come with a calibration sheet containing correction factors not to exceed 

plus or minus 0.1 °C. Apply the calibration factors to the portable sensor 

readings.

Proper sanitation measures to ensure there are no potential breeding 

grounds for pests on the premises and therefore, little risk of reinfestation 

or cross-contamination

Recording system capable of recording temperature readings on a recorder 

printout in time intervals not exceeding 4 minutes between readings
Certifying Facilities Certification of Niger seed Treatment Facilities

PPQ Regulation for the Entry of Niger Seeds into the United States

6-6-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Secure valves and controls that affect heat flow to the treatment system to 

avoid manipulation during the treatment process by unauthorized 

personnel

Seed processing equipment with the ability to divert for retreatment any 

untreated or treated seeds that do not meet treatment standards

Speed indicator located on the conveyor for continuous treatment areas

System to divert any untreated seeds away from the treated seeds (DO

NOT mix treated and untreated seeds)

Treated seeds stored in a location separate from the untreated seeds. The 

treated and untreated seeds must be handled in a manner to prevent crosscontamination

Step 4—Certification of the Treatment Facility

Use the following steps to obtain certification:

1. Record the speed of the belt before Niger seeds are in the treatment area. 

Place an object at beginning of belt. Use a stop watch or digital watch to 

record the time for the object to go from the beginning to end of treatment 

area. The speed must be 15 minutes or greater.

2. Attach approved portable temperature sensors (minimum of two) to the 

facility permanent sensors to duplicate the same angle and depth as the 

permanent sensors (the sensors are located at the beginning and end of the 

treatment area).

3. Niger seeds must be at a maximum depth during certification.

4. Treat the seed at 248 °F/120 °C for 4 or more hours. Seed that passes the 

certification is considered a positive treatment. The treated seed must pass 

TZ (tetrazolium) testing as stated in the work plan or compliance 

agreement.

5. Record the hertz or RPM of the treatment conveyor belt speed during 

certification. Verify that the speed indicator has been calibrated during the 

past year. Record the speed of the treatment conveyor belt on the PPQ 

Form 482.

6. Record the time that the treatment started and stopped on the portable 

sensor printout and facility recorder printout.

7. Check the system to verify that no cross-contamination has occurred.

8. Place the treated seed in new bags or store in silos designated for treated 

seed.

NOTICE

The appropriate permits and approval to import Niger seeds must be approved by 

the PPQ Permit Unit prior to shipping the commodity to the United States.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Niger seed Treatment Facilities

PPQ Regulation for the Entry of Niger Seeds into the United States

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-6-5

9. Verify that all portable sensors recorded 248 °F/121 °C or higher during the 

4 or more hour treatment.

10. Ensure compliance with the latest work plan or compliance agreement.

11. Repeat treatment if certification fails.

If treatment standards are not met during performance testing, APHIS will not

certify the facility. Provide a copy of the data sheet with explanation as to why 

the test was not acceptable to the facility operator for corrective action.

Certification of the Niger seed facility and equipment will be given after a 

successful treatment has been recorded (4 or more hours at 248 °F/120 °C). 

Upon certification, APHIS will issue a Certificate of Approval (PPQ Form 

482). The conditions of approval must contain the following:

Must operate under the latest work plan or compliance agreement

Treat the seed for at least 15 minutes at a temperature of at least 248 °F/

120 °C. Temperatures below 248 °F/120 °C will nullify the treatment.

Treatment conveyor belt must operate at a speed not to exceed (x)Hertz 

or (x)RPM (x=speed of treatment conveyor belt)
Certifying Facilities Certification of Niger seed Treatment Facilities

PPQ Regulation for the Entry of Niger Seeds into the United States

6-6-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-7-1

Chapter

6 Certifying Facilities

Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat 

Treatment Facilities

Contents

Introduction 6-7-1

Plan and Process Approval 6-7-2

Preliminary Performance Testing 6-7-4

Official Certification Testing 6-7-4

Calibrating the Sensors 6-7-4

Thermal Mapping 6-7-5

Conducting a Test Treatment 6-7-7

Certification 6-7-7

Verification of Sensor Calibration 6-7-7

Documentation 6-7-8

Contact Information 6-7-8

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT 6-7-8

Preclearance and Offshore Programs 6-7-8

Introduction

Forced hot air (FHA) and vapor heat (VH) treatment facilities must be 

certified by a qualified APHIS inspector. For brevity, “certification” and 

“recertification” will both be referred to as “certification” in this chapter.

For foreign treatment facilities, the physical location of the facility must be 

approved by the USDA APHIS PPQ Preclearance and Offshore Programs

(POP). Domestic treatment facilities are approved by PPQ Field Operations or 

other entity defined in the workplan. After PPQ or POP approves the facility 

location and prior to the first facility certification, USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&TTMT must approve the plan and process description. Facilities must conduct 

tests prior to APHIS certification to ensure that the chamber meets treatment 

requirements. Certification tests must be carried out prior to treatment at the 

beginning of the shipping season once per year or whenever APHIS 

determines that a malfunction or alteration in the system warrants a 

certification test.

Certification will be granted on the basis of the ability of the chamber to meet 

treatment requirements, extent and condition of phytosanitary safeguards, 

sanitary (human health) conditions, and safety conditions. Facilities must be 

certified for each species (in some cases each variety or subspecies) of fruit, 
Certifying Facilities Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities

Plan and Process Approval

6-7-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

each chamber load configuration (half full, quarter full, etc.) and, for some 

species, each size class of fruit treated. For example, mango and papaya are 

separate species and must be certified separately.

Facilities should be aware that certification may not be the only condition 

under which they may treat fruit for shipment to or within the United States. In 

addition to certification, there are other requirements, such as operational 

workplans, compliance agreements, and import permits that must be satisfied 

prior to treatment. Treatment facility managers outside the United States 

should contact POP. Managers of facilities in the United States or its territories 

should contact their local PPQ office for a complete list of requirements.

Plan and Process Approval

Prior to the start of facility construction, a detailed plan of the facility’s 

physical characteristics and a written, step by step description of all the 

processes related to treatment must be approved by USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&TTMT (all plans and supporting materials must be submitted in Standard 

English). Plans and process descriptions for facilities within the United States 

and its territories must be submitted through the local PPQ office. Facilities 

outside the United States should consult POP for the appropriate plan 

submission procedure.

Download a fillable Application for USDA Vapor Heat/Forced Hot Air 

Treatment Chamber Approval form.

Contact ppqtmt@usda.gov with questions regarding the application. 

At a minimum, plans must include the following information as diagrams and/

or written descriptions:

Areas designated for fruit arrival

Areas designated for loading of treated fruit

Areas for storage of untreated fruit

Crates, lugs, bins, etc., that will be used to hold fruit during treatment, 

including total volume and projected fruit capacity

Delineations of area(s) for storage of treated and untreated fruit

Description of all processes related to treatment of fruit. These 

descriptions should reference diagrams with numbers where appropriate

Hot water bath used for sensor calibration must have an accuracy of 

±0.3°C (0.5 °F)

Physical location of facility
Certifying Facilities Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities

Plan and Process Approval

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-7-3

Post-treatment cooling system

Post-treatment packing

Pre-treatment sorting and grading areas

Reference thermometer must be approved by USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&TTMT or listed in Equipment on page 8-1-1. Calibrate reference 

thermometers once per year using an approved company listed in 

Appendix E of this manual.

Systems designed to ensure phytosanitary security of the treated fruit

Systems designed to ensure water which comes into contact with fruit is 

free of microbial or any other contaminants that may adversely affect 

human health

Temperature recording system requirements:

Permanent and portable sensors and the temperature recorder must 

have an accuracy of ±0.3 °C (0.5 °F) and must be approved by USDAAPHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT or listed in Appendix E.

Permanent sensors issued by the chamber manufacturer (not portable 

sensors) must be platinum 100-ohm resistive thermal detectors (RTD). 

The sensor unit must be within the distal 1 inch (2.54 cm) of the 

sensor. The sensor must have an outer sheath of 0.25 inches (6.4 mm) 

or less in diameter.

Recorder must be capable of printing the date, time, temperature (°F or 

°C), and alarms.

Treatment chamber including heating system, crate arrangement within 

the chamber, and air flow

The number of permanent sensors is determined by the facility manufacturer. 

The APHIS official is responsible for facility approval and has the option to 

increase the number of permanent sensors as determined during chamber 

certification.

The process of reviewing the plans and process descriptions may take as long 

as sixty days and subsequent requests for additional information may further 

extend this time. Facilities should take this time constraint into account when 

developing a project timeline. Facilities will receive a letter granting plan 

approval or describing plan deficiencies. Plan approvals expire one year from 

the approval date if the facility has not been certified.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities

Preliminary Performance Testing

6-7-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Preliminary Performance Testing

Following plan approval, the facility should be built according to the facility 

engineered plans. If deviations from the plans (including changes to the 

heating and temperature recording systems) are necessary, USDA-APHISPPQ-S&T-TMT must approve these changes. Submit changes in a manner 

similar to that described in Plan and Process Approval. 

After construction is completed, the facility must be tested to be sure it can 

meet all treatment requirements. These trials should test the ability of the 

treatment chambers to heat a full (maximum) load of fruit according to the 

treatment guidelines. Any problems or deficiencies found in the facility must

be corrected and the preliminary tests must be re-run until all treatment 

requirements are met. After the facility representative is satisfied that the 

treatment system is running properly and can fully meet treatment 

requirements, they must submit results of the test to Preclearance and Offshore 

Programs or the local APHIS office for review.

Facilities will be provided with specific requirements as part of the plan 

approval letter. General requirements for test result submission are as follows:

A diagram of chamber that shows location of each permanent sensor

Amount, type, and size of fruit in load and in each crate

Time and temperature data from the test run(s)

After POP reviews the results from the preliminary performance test, they will 

issue an approval or rejection letter. If approval is granted, the facility 

representative can then schedule an official certification test.

Official Certification Testing

The official certification test has two main components:

1. Calibrating the portable and permanent sensors 

2. Thermal mapping (cold spot mapping)

These steps are discussed below in detail. Complete a certification test for each 

combination of fruit species, chamber load configuration, and, in some cases, 

fruit size class.

Calibrating the Sensors

If the facility is outside the United States, it is the responsibility of the exporter 

to provide sensors for the certification procedure. Temperature sensors can be 

either permanent or portable.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities

Official Certification Testing

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-7-5

Calibrate temperature sensors in a swirling hot water bath with a factory 

calibrated certified reference mercury, non-mercury, or digital thermometer 

with 0.1 °C (0.2 °F) graduations as a standard. The temperature of the swirling 

hot water bath must consistently read the treatment temperature on the certified 

reference thermometer. Place temperature sensors into the hot water bath and 

keep them there until the certified reference thermometer reads the treatment 

temperature for 10 consecutive minutes. After the temperature stabilizes, 

remove the sensors and read the data. Do not use any sensor that deviates by 

more than ±0.3 °C (0.5 °F) from the treatment temperature. Record the greatest 

deviation for each sensor as the correction factor for that sensor. Any sensor 

that cannot be calibrated or repaired may not be used.

Thermal Mapping

Thermal mapping determines the placement of sensors in the chamber. 

Because the sensors will be placed in the coldest areas of the chamber, this 

process is also referred to as “cold spot mapping” or “cold spot testing”. The 

sensors are placed throughout the chamber and the treatment is conducted. The 

sensors that took the longest time to record treatment temperature represent 

colder areas of the chamber. The thermal mapping procedure is as follows:

1. Based on basic thermodynamics and data from the preliminary 

performance test, develop hypotheses about which regions of the chamber 

are most likely to have cold spots. This will be based primarily on the 

direction of the air flow in the chamber. Chambers in which air flows in a 

single vertical direction will generally have cold regions in portions of the 

load that come into contact with the heated air last. For example, if the 

chamber delivers hot air from the bottom, the top of the load is likely to 

take longer to heat up because the fruit at the bottom absorbs heat first. In 

chambers where the air flow changes direction or the air delivery is 

horizontal, it may be more difficult to form these types of hypotheses.

2. The fruits selected for the test must be similar in size, ripeness, and variety. 

Sort the fruit and select a subset totaling the number of sensors plus 20 

percent. The difference between the heaviest and lightest fruit must not be 

more than 5 percent or higher (at the discretion of the certifying official) of 

the heaviest fruit’s weight.

NOTICE

Use only sensors approved by USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT. Refer to Appendix E

for a list of approved sensors. 

The number of portable and permanent sensors is determined by the APHIS certifying official. The APHIS official has the option to increase the number of sensors 

required.

NOTICE

Refer to Appendix E for a list of approved digital thermometers.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities

Official Certification Testing

6-7-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

3. Place one sensor in each of the largest fruit collected. Place the most 

sensitive portion of the sensor in the area of the fruit pulp most resistant to 

temperature change, usually the center of the fruit or close to the pit.

4. Based on the hypotheses formed in #1 above, place the majority of the 

sensors in the areas thought to be cold regions. In order to verify the 

hypothesis, place a portion of the sensors in the areas thought to be warmer. 

If no hypotheses were formed in #1 above, sensors must be placed in a 

systematic pattern that can provide a complete thermal map of the entire 

load. 

5. Create a map of the chamber that shows the relative horizontal and vertical 

location of each sensor.

6. Conduct the treatment.

7. Remove the sensors and read their data.

8. Determine the amount of time each sensor took to reach treatment 

temperature. The sensors which required the longest time to reach 

treatment temperature indicate cold spots.

9. Create a map of the cold spots based on the map created in step #5 and the 

analysis completed in step #8.

10. Repeat this process for each load/volume configuration to ensure that 

correct and consistent cold spots are found. Results from the two 

consecutive tests must be similar.

11. Based on the conclusion of two consecutive tests, create a map showing the 

location of each permanent temperature sensor for each load/volume 

configuration.

NOTICE

Each chamber may require a different number of sensors depending on factors such 

as the chamber size, chamber dimensions, air flow patterns, and size and species of 

the fruit. Typically, a chamber approximately the size of a standard 40 ft. shipping 

container will require about 60 sensors. 

NOTICE

All sensors must reach treatment temperature.

NOTICE

If thermal mapping shows that difference in the time required to reach treatment 

temperature between any two sensors is greater than 2 hours, the chamber will not

be certified.

A facility cannot perform a commercial treatment between recertification tests.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities

Conducting a Test Treatment

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-7-7

Conducting a Test Treatment

Conduct a test treatment in order to verify that the chamber is capable of 

meeting treatment requirements and for any of the following situations:

A new facility is approved

The heating system is changed

The recording system is changed

Test treatments are only required for the maximum load/volume configuration 

that the facility will be certified for and may be done in conjunction with the 

thermal mapping. The procedure for conducting a test treatment is as follows:

1. Place sensors in areas of the load that are thought to be cold spots (based on 

thermal mapping data).

2. Conduct the treatment.

3. During treatment, inspect the outside of the chamber to be sure it is free of 

leaks, is operating smoothly, and generally is in good working order.

4. After treatment is completed, review the temperature logs. All sensors 

must have reached the treatment temperature.

5. After a successful test treatment, continue to Certification section.

Certification

Upon successful completion of the facility certification test (as indicated by 

completion of the APHIS Form 482), the commercial treatments can begin. 

A certification test is required once a year, usually at the beginning of the 

shipping season, if a new heating or recording system is approved, or 

whenever the system has a malfunction, breakdown, or other failure (excluding 

malfunction of temperature sensors.)

Verification of Sensor Calibration

Verify the integrity of the temperature sensors daily using the process 

described in Calibrating the Sensors on page 6-7-4.

Calibration can also occur whenever any part of the permanent temperature 

recording system fails or is replaced, or at the discretion of the APHIS 

inspector.
Certifying Facilities Certification of Forced Hot Air and Vapor Heat Treatment Facilities

Documentation

6-7-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Documentation

All tests performed during certification must be documented by the APHIS 

official. Send a copy of the signed APHIS Form 482, copies of all thermal 

maps, description of load size limitations, description of any other special 

limitations placed on the treatment, and any other pertinent addenda or 

appendices, to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for final approval.

Contact Information

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Preclearance and Offshore Programs

Director, Preclearance and Offshore Programs

USDA, APHIS, PPQ, POP

4700 River Road, 4th Floor

Riverdale, MD 20737

Phone: (301) 851-2281
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-8-1

Chapter

6 Certifying Facilities

Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Contents

Introduction 6-8-1

Pre-Certification Requirements 6-8-2

Plan Approval Application 6-8-2

Certification Requirements 6-8-3

Certification by the National Nuclear Regulatory Authority 6-8-4

Approved Source 6-8-4

Dosimetry System 6-8-5

Standard Operating Procedures 6-8-7

Staff Training 6-8-9

Infrastructure 6-8-9

Safeguarding 6-8-10

Process Configurations 6-8-10

Facility Compliance Agreement 6-8-10

PPQ Form 482 Certificate of Approval 6-8-11

Recertification 6-8-11

Adding Cobalt 60 6-8-12

Audits 6-8-13

Contacts 6-8-13

Introduction

Certification of irradiation facilities ensures that each facility’s equipment and 

personnel are able to safely, accurately, and consistently administer the 

required minimum absorbed dose (MAD) to all components of the commodity. 

This chapter describes the process and requirements for certification of 

facilities that irradiate agricultural products for import into or movement 

within the United States.

Facilities, exporters, and others interested in the administrative and operational 

processes for establishing irradiation programs, applying for permits, and 
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Pre-Certification Requirements

6-8-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

signing compliance agreements can find more information on the USDA 

APHIS PPQ irradiation treatment website.

PPQ officials reviewing plan approval applications or conducting certification 

and recertification activities must follow the guidelines in this chapter. If a 

PPQ official finds that a deviation from these guidelines is necessary, or if a 

facility requests a deviation, the PPQ official will direct the facility to develop 

a detailed proposal outlining the need for the deviation. The proposal will be 

forwarded to USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT for review. Following review, 

S&T-TMT will make a recommendation to the Treatment Cross Functional 

Working Group (TCFWG) for a decision. The TCFWG will make the final 

decision on the proposal and the operational unit will communicate the 

decision to the facility. The process of reviewing a proposal may take as long 

as 60 days.

Pre-Certification Requirements

Prior to starting any certification work, facilities located in the United States 

should contact USDA-APHIS PPQ Field Operations to discuss the 

certification process and requirements. This discussion will help facilitate the 

certification process and processes associated with the establishment of an 

operational program.

Facilities located in countries other than the Unites States should contact the 

National Plant Protection Organization (NPPO) in their country to request 

information and certification to PPQ via official channels. Foreign facilities 

should not contact PPQ without first consulting with their NPPO.

Plan Approval Application

The first step in the certification process is a to download and complete the 

Application for Irradiation Facility Approval form.

The application collects information about the facility, including radiation 

source type and strength, standard operating procedures, facility diagram, and 

other information that helps PPQ understand how the facility operates.

Facilities located in the United States should send the completed application to 

USDA-APHIS PPQ Field Operations. Facilities located in countries other

than the United States must submit their applications through their NPPO, 

which will then forward the application to USDA-APHIS International 

Services (IS). The application will then be forwarded to PPQ Phytosanitary 
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Certification Requirements

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-8-3

Issues Management (PIM), and Preclearance and Offshore Programs (POP) 

(refer to Figure 6-8-1).

The S&T-TMT review may take as long as 60 days. Facilities are encouraged 

to submit their applications well in advance of the desired certification date. 

Following review, S&T-TMT will communicate the results of the review 

through the appropriate operational unit, including Field Operations and POP. 

The results may be approval of the application or a request for additional 

information or clarification.

Once the application is approved by S&T-TMT, an onsite certification 

inspection can be scheduled. The appropriate operational unit will work with 

the facility to schedule a date for the certification inspection. S&T-TMT will 

provide a copy of the application, along with any notes or relevant information 

to the certifying official. This information will help prepare the certifying 

official.

Certification Requirements

Certification will include a review of the following:

Dosimetry system

Phytosanitary safeguards

Standard operating procedures and documentation

The facility structure

Treatment and certification records

Figure 6-8-1 Flow Diagram for Plan Approval Application for Irradiation 

Facilities in Countries Other Than the United States
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Certification Requirements

6-8-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Other processes, procedures, equipment or infrastructure that may affect 

treatment or safeguarding

Prior to conducting the certification activities, the certifying official must:

Carefully review the Application for Irradiation Facility Approval to gain 

a full understanding of the processes, procedures, and systems used at the 

facility.

Develop an agenda with the facility to ensure that the official is able to 

observe or examine all the necessary minimum processes, procedures, 

and/or systems required for certification.

Familiarize themselves with the American Society for Testing and 

Materials (ASTM) standards that apply to the facility. See ASTM 

Standards on page 6-8-13.

Review the standards for selection and calibration of dosimetry systems, 

estimating uncertainty, processing standards, and the standards specific to 

the routine dosimetry system.

Certification by the National Nuclear Regulatory Authority

For facilities using radioactive isotopes, certification by the National Nuclear 

Regulatory Authority (NNRA) of the country in which the facility is located is 

one of the most important things to verify during certification. This 

certification is important because it indicates that the facility meets national 

and international standards for safety, security, and monitoring. In the United 

States, some States have agreements with the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory 

Commission (NRC) that allow agencies in those states to issue the 

certifications. Certifying officials who certify facilities must verify that the 

certificate issued by the NNRA is current.

Approved Source

Three sources of radiation are approved by APHIS for phytosanitary 

treatments:

Electrons generated from machine sources up to 10 MeV (eBeam)

Radioactive isotopes (gamma rays from cobalt-60)

X-rays (up to 7.5 MeV)

The certifying official must verify that the facility is using one of these sources 

by examining the facility’s records and/or verifying that standard operating 

procedures (SOPs) are in place that ensure delivery of radiation at the 

appropriate energy level.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Certification Requirements

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-8-5

Dosimetry System

The routine dosimetry system is critical for accurate and precise measurement 

of dose. Measurements of dose may not provide assurance that the proper 

treatment was delivered if the dosimetry system is not properly configured, 

calibrated, operated by qualified individuals, and precise in the appropriate 

dose range. The certifying official must ensure that the dosimetry system, and 

the management and operation of that system, meet the requirements in this 

chapter.

The facility’s routine dosimetry system must follow guidance in ISO/ASTM 

standard 51261 “Standard Guide for Selection and Calibration of Dosimetry 

Systems for Radiation Processing” and other ASTM standards that specifically 

address the routine dosimetry system in use. Facility staff should be wellversed in the applicable standards and have copies on hand for reference. See 

ASTM Standards on page 6-8-13.

Absorbed Dose Range

The facility’s routine dosimetry system must be accurate and precise in the 

dose range required for PPQ treatments. When selecting a routine dosimetry 

system, facilities must follow guidance from dosimetry system-specific ASTM 

standards to determine which systems meet PPQ’s dose range requirements. 

For example, ISO/ASTM 51310 “Standard Practice for Use of a Radiochromic 

Optical Waveguide Dosimetry System” provides guidance that “The absorbed 

dose range is from 1 to 10,000 Gy for photons.”. Because this range includes 

the PPQ irradiation treatments, this is an acceptable dosimetry system. See 

ASTM Standards on page 6-8-13

Calibration

Calibration of the routine dosimetry system is critical to measuring absorbed 

dose during routine treatments. Descriptions of calibration techniques and 

procedures can be found in ISO/ASTM standard 51261 “Standard Guide for 

Selection and Calibration of Dosimetry Systems for Radiation Processing”. 

Facilities must follow guidance in the procedures and techniques described in 

these standards or in equivalent standards recognized by the APHIS 

Administrator. The certifying official should review calibration procedures and 

documentation with the facility staff to verify that the routine dosimetry system 

has been calibrated using guidance from and adherence to the applicable 

ASTM standards. 

All routine dosimetry system calibration must be traceable to the U.S National 

Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Facilities must keep records 

that show traceability of calibration to NIST, including certificates of 

calibration from NIST. 
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Certification Requirements

6-8-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Uncertainty Estimates

Facilities must develop estimates of measurement uncertainty associated with 

routine dosimetry systems. Uncertainty parameters describe variability in 

measurement estimates and measurement correction factors can be calculated 

from these estimates. Each facility must follow guidance in ISO/ASTM 51707 

“Standard Guide for Estimating Uncertainties in Dosimetry for Radiation 

Processing”. Certifying officials should review uncertainty estimates and 

related correction values with facility staff and verify that procedures used to 

develop the estimates and correction values follow guidance in the relevant 

ASTM standards. See ASTM Standards on page 6-8-13. 

Influence Factors

Dosimetry systems can be influenced by factors that introduce error into 

estimates of absorbed dose. The influencing factors may include heat, 

humidity, or light, and the magnitude of the effects of these factors vary 

between dosimetry systems. Influencing factors are described in ASTM 

standards for specific dosimetry systems, such as ISO/ASTM 51310 “Standard 

Practice for Use of a Radiochromic Optical Waveguide Dosimetry System”. 

Facilities must follow guidance in these standards when developing procedures 

to mitigate the effect of influence factors on dose estimates. Certifying officials 

should verify that facilities are aware of the influencing factors with the 

potential to affect their dosimetry systems and have taken steps to minimize 

these effects and/or account for the effect in measurement estimates. 

Dosimetry Procedures

The facility dosimetry staff should demonstrate important dosimetry 

procedures to the certifying official. These procedures should include, but are 

not limited to:

Archiving dosimeters

Calculating estimates of absorbed dose and applying correction factors

Preparing and reading dosimeters

Storage and handling of dosimeters

Tracking dosimeters

Verification of calibration

The certifying official should verify that these procedures match those in the 

facility’s SOPs and follow the guidance in the applicable ASTM standards. 
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Certification Requirements

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-8-7

Standard Operating Procedures

Irradiation facilities must have SOPs that fully describe processes related to 

treatment of APHIS regulated articles. Additionally, these SOPs must include 

documentation of important data and events. The SOPs and documentation are 

critical for ensuring that well designed processes are executed and that records 

show that the processes were followed. The certifying official should carefully 

examine the SOPs and documentation to ensure that they are being 

implemented. Additionally, the facility should demonstrate to the certifying 

official the procedures related to:

Analyzing routine dosimeters and reporting results

Certification of treatment, releasing articles for shipping, loading articles 

into conveyances

Creating configurations and placing routine dosimeters on configurations 

prior to treatment

Emergency shutdown and natural disaster preparedness

Inspection of conveyances

Managing pest detections and disposal or destruction of infested and/or 

untreated articles (information on disposal and destruction for facilities in 

the United States can be found in the Manual for Agricultural Clearance)

Maps of agricultural production areas within a four-square mile area (for 

U.S. facilities in AL, AZ, CA, FL, GA, KY, LA, MS, NV, NC, SC, TN, 

TX, VA)

Pest trapping, monitoring, and control

Post-treatment handling of articles and collection of routine dosimeters

Receiving articles and preparing them for treatment

Safeguarding or protecting articles from potential pest infestation pre- and 

post-treatment

Verifying article, package condition, and package weights and labeling

Other procedures the PPQ official deems appropriate

Change Control

All facilities must maintain a change control system for managing changes to 

SOPs and documentation. The change control system should be designed to 

capture information about changes to the SOPs and documentation. This 

system should collect information about:

Details about the change to the SOP or document

The person, or people, who authorized the change to the SOP or document

The reason the change was made to the SOP or document
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Certification Requirements

6-8-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

When the SOP or document was changed

Additionally, the change control system must include processes for ensuring 

that old SOPs and documents are retired or no longer available for use. 

The certifying official must review this system with the facility staff to ensure 

that the change control system is properly implemented. 

PPQ Specific Data Collection and Storage Requirements

PPQ has program specific data storage requirements that all facilities must 

meet. All facilities must store the following general records:

Configuration and dose mapping records for each commodity that is 

treated

Dosimetry system calibration records

Ionizing energy source

Operational Workplan(s) for the commodities treated at the facility

PPQ Form 482, Certificate of Approval

PPQ Treatment Schedule(s)

PPQ Compliance Agreement

Record(s) of training and credentials of facility employees

Written agreements with participating packing houses (for facilities 

located outside the United States only)

Additionally, each facility must have a system for collecting and storing 

information related to each treatment. The following information must be 

stored for at least one year:

Date of irradiation treatment

Dosimetry data for each PPQ treatment

Evidence of compliance with the prescribed treatment

Irradiation processor’s certificate of treatment

Lot number (except for interstate movement)

Name and quantity of article treated

Packinghouse code (PHC) assigned by the NPPO of the exporting country 

to the packinghouse where the articles were packed (except for interstate 

movement)

Prescribed treatment
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Certification Requirements

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-8-9

Production unit code (PUC) assigned by the NPPO of the exporting 

country to the area where the articles were produced (except for interstate 

movement)

Treatment identification number (TIN)

Staff Training

All facility personnel with treatment-related responsibilities must have 

received training in applicable standards, PPQ treatment requirements, 

applicable operational workplans, and facility SOPs and documentation 

systems. Training should be documented and available for review by the 

inspecting official. Additionally, the inspecting official should evaluate the 

knowledge of facility staff by requesting that they demonstrate operations, as 

described in the Standard Operating Procedures section.

Infrastructure

Facilities may be designed and built to meet the needs of the operator and must 

meet international safety and security requirements. However, there are several 

PPQ specific requirements that must be met:

Inspection area

The facility must have an area for inspection of articles and packages. 

Facilities located in the United States must have scales for verification 

of box and load weights. Facilities located outside the United States 

must be equipped with cutting boards, knives, magnifying glass, and 

scales for use by PPQ officials. 

Internet connection

The facility must have a high speed Internet connection that allows 

uninterrupted connection to the Irradiation Reporting and 

Accountability Database (IRADS). 

Physical barrier between treated and untreated articles

The facility must have a sturdy physical barrier that separates the areas 

where untreated and treated articles are present. The barrier may have 

a door for personnel or equipment to pass through. However, this door 

must remain closed when not in use. 

PPQ workspace

The facility must set aside an area for the PPQ official to work. This 

area should include a desk, chair, and access to high speed Internet.

The certifying official must verify that the infrastructure is in place and 

functional.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Certification Requirements

6-8-10 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Safeguarding

Facilities must have phytosanitary safeguards in place to prevent pest 

infestation and movement of pests. Safeguarding requirements may vary 

depending on the location of the facility, the proximity of host crops, and the 

risk of pests associated with commodities treated at the facility. PPQ 

operational staff will develop safeguarding requirements for each facility based 

on the unique circumstances at each facility. However, safeguarding 

requirements frequently include measures such as:

Air curtains

Cold storage areas

Double doors

Screens on windows

Sealed cracks or holes that insects might move through

Process Configurations

During the certification activity, each facility must test at least one process 

configuration. This test must be observed by the certifying official. This initial 

test helps ensure that the facility fully understands the PPQ process 

configuration, testing, and approval process, and can successfully conduct the 

testing. Additionally, the configuration test also serves to provide evidence that 

the facility can deliver a dose in the required range. 

Contact USDA-APHIS PPQ Field Operations for more information on process 

configurations.

Facility Compliance Agreement

Each PPQ certified facility must have a compliance agreement (or equivalent) 

in place prior to certification. There are three standard compliance agreements, 

one each for:

Facilities in the United States that treat articles imported from foreign 

countries

Facilities in the United States that treat articles for interstate movement

Facilities located outside the United States 

These standard compliance agreements may be modified to include 

information specific to a facility or specific risks associated with the articles 
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Recertification

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-8-11

that may be treated at the facility. Operational managers must review and 

approve modifications to the compliance agreements.

PPQ Form 482 Certificate of Approval

When the certification activity is complete and the certifying official is 

satisfied that all requirements are met, the certifying official will issue a PPQ 

Form 482 Certificate of Approval. This form is the official certificate, and once 

the facility receives the Form 482 it may begin routine treatments, provided it 

has a current compliance agreement. 

The certifying official should send electronic copies of the PPQ 482 to USDAAPHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT and USDA-APHIS PPQ Field Operations.

Recertification

Periodic certification of irradiation facilities is not required. However, 

facilities will be recertified under the following conditions:

Changes to operations or infrastructure

Examples include but are not limited to altering the manner in which 

articles are exposed to the source or changing dosimetry systems

Change to the source

Any irradiation source replenishment requires recertification. Further 

examples include, but are not limited to, changes to the equipment that 

delivers radiation, changing the cobalt configuration, or increasing or 

reducing source strength by adding or removing source material

Management change

Change in management that results in new processes or procedures 

that change operations at the facility

Problems with the facility

Examples include but are not limited to the inability to accurately 

measure dose or the failure or inability to follow SOPs or document 

processes

Facilities that are unsure if they require recertification should contact the 

appropriate operational unit.

NOTICE

Compliance agreements will be reviewed annually by PPQ.

The compliance agreement between PPQ and the irradiation facility is different from 

the compliance agreement between PPQ and importers. Refer to the USDA APHIS 

PPQ Irradiation website for more information on compliance agreements with importers.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Recertification

6-8-12 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Certified facilities must provide at least 90 days’ notice prior to making 

changes to the radiation source or changes to operations or infrastructure. 

Notice of change in management or problems at a certified facility must be 

made within 14 days. All information related to changes in source, occurrence 

of problems, change in management, and/or changes to operations or 

infrastructure should be detailed and specific, and clearly describe the situation 

and the steps the facility is proposing to address any issues.

Facilities located in the United States should send recertification notifications 

to USDA-APHIS PPQ Field Operations. Facilities located in other countries 

must submit their recertification notifications through their NPPO, which will 

in turn forward it to APHIS IS. The information will then be forwarded to PIM 

and POP.

In some cases, recertification will not require an onsite recertification 

inspection. Operational staff will review requests for recertification and decide 

whether an onsite or remote recertification is appropriate. 

Adding Cobalt 60

One of the most common reasons for recertification is the addition of new 

cobalt 60 to increase total source strength. When cobalt 60 is added to an 

irradiator, the facility must characterize the dose distribution of the new source 

configuration. Facilities must follow the source characterization as described 

in ISO/ASTM standard 51702 “Standard Practice for Dosimetry in a Gamma 

Irradiation Facility for Radiation Processing”. Generally, the goal of this 

characterization will be to describe the dose distribution of the new source and 

its affects, if any, on the dose delivered to articles during treatment. 

Facilities should send the written results of the source characterization to PPQ 

operational units when the characterization is complete. These results should 

include the following:

A detailed and specific narrative that describes the characterization 

process that was followed

Analysis of the characterization data along with a detailed and specific 

explanation of the analysis

Proposed course of action, including proposed actions for changing 

existing process configurations

The data from the characterization study

PPQ will review the characterization information and determine if the facility’s 

proposed course of action is appropriate and if the facility can be recertified. 
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Audits

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 6-8-13

Audits

Onsite audits of facilities may be performed from time to time by PPQ. These 

audits may cover a wide range of processes, procedures, and documentation at 

a facility. Facilities should be prepared to demonstrate operational procedures 

and have records available for review by the PPQ auditor. Audits will be 

conducted when operational units determine that they are necessary. 

Electronic audits may also be performed by PPQ. These electronic audits will 

generally utilize data from the IRADS system to look for anomalies or 

indications that treatments are not being applied correctly.

Contacts

ASTM Standards

Copies of the ISO/ASTM methods may be examined at the USDA APHIS 

PPQ Headquarters Library located at 4700 River Road, Riverdale, MD, 20737. 

Copies of ISO/ASTM Standard Methods may also be obtained from the 

American Society for Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Dr., West 

Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.

USDA-APHIS International Services (IS)

Refer to the USDA-APHIS International Services website for a list of 

International Service offices.

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

USDA-APHIS PPQ Field Operations

email: PPQ.Ops.Treatments@usda.gov
Certifying Facilities Certifying Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Contacts

6-8-14 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66
09/2023-68 Treatment Manual 6-9-1

Chapter

6 Certifying Facilities

Certifying Facilities for the Heat Treatment of 

Firewood

Contents

Introduction 6-9-1

Plan and Process Approval 6-9-2

Official Certification Testing 6-9-3

Calibrating the Temperature Sensors 6-9-3

Thermal Mapping 6-9-4

Conducting a Test Treatment 6-9-5

Frequency of Certification and Temperature Sensor Calibration 6-9-5

Documentation 6-9-6

Contact Information 6-9-6

Introduction

Agrilus planipennis Fairmaire (Coleoptera: Buprestidae), commonly known as 

the emerald ash borer (EAB), is a wood-boring insect that infests firewood. 

This destructive beetle attacks all North American species of ash trees and has 

been detected in many states across the United States and Canada. For more 

information on EAB and biological control activities, visit the USDA Emerald 

Ash Borer website.

The spongy moth (Lymantria dispar dispar), formerly known as the European 

gypsy moth) is native to Europe and is well-established in parts of the United 

States. The caterpillars feed on more than 300 species of trees and shrubs. 

Potentially, all temperate hardwood growing areas of North America are at risk 

from attack by the moth. Despite all attempts to prevent its movement, the 

moth has been quite successful in increasing its range along the leading edge of 

the quarantine area. For more information on the pest and a map of current 

quarantine areas, visit the USDA Spongy Moth website.

The flighted spongy moth complex (FSMC; including Lymantria dispar 

asiatica, L. dispar japonica, L. albescens, L. umbrosa, and L. post-alba, 

formerly known as the Asian gypsy moth) is a group of exotic pests of Asian 

origin not known to occur in the United States. FSMC are similar to the spongy 

moth, but have a broader host range. For more information on FSMC, visit the 

USDA Flighted Spongy Moth Complex website. USDA-APHIS-PPQ requires 

heat treatment for egg masses of regulated Lymantria moths and all life stages 

of Agrilus planipennis.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Facilities for the Heat Treatment of Firewood

Plan and Process Approval

6-9-2 Treatment Manual 09/2023-68

The treatment must occur in a certified heat treatment facility. The purpose of 

this chapter is to provide guidelines for the certification of a heat treatment 

facility.

Heat treatment facilities must be certified by a qualified PPQ official. For 

brevity, “certification” and “recertification” will both be referred to as 

“certification” in this chapter.

Certification tests must be carried out prior to treatment to allow movement of 

wood from the current quarantine areas, or whenever a malfunction or 

alteration in the system warrants a certification test.

Certification will be granted on the basis of the ability of the chamber to meet 

treatment requirements, extent and condition of phytosanitary safeguards, and 

safety conditions.

Facilities should be aware that certification may not be the only condition 

under which firewood for shipment can be moved from quarantine areas. In 

addition to certification, there are other requirements that must be satisfied 

prior to treatment:

A compliance agreement

An operational work plan

Appropriate federal, state, or local permits

Treatment facility managers should contact their local PPQ office and/or local 

state departments of agriculture for state-specific requirements.

Plan and Process Approval

Prior to the start of the certification process for a new or existing facility, a 

detailed plan of the facility’s physical characteristics and a written, step by step 

description of all the processes related to treatment must be approved by 

USDA-APHIS. Plans and process descriptions must be submitted through the 

local PPQ office.

At a minimum, plans must include a description of all processes related to the 

heat treatment of firewood. These descriptions should reference diagrams with 

numbers where appropriate. Submit the following information as diagrams 

and/or written descriptions:

Areas designated for:

Arrival and storage of untreated firewood

Loading of untreated and treated firewood
Certifying Facilities Certifying Facilities for the Heat Treatment of Firewood

Official Certification Testing

09/2023-68 Treatment Manual 6-9-3

Storage of untreated and treated firewood

Crates, bins, racks, etc., used to hold firewood during treatment, including 

total volume and projected capacity

Physical location of facility

Post-treatment cooling system

Post-treatment packaging

Pre-treatment sorting and grading areas

Systems to ensure phytosanitary security of the treated wood

Treatment chamber including heating system, arrangement within the 

chamber, and air flow

The process of reviewing the plans and process descriptions may take as long 

as 60 days, and subsequent requests for additional information may further 

extend this time. Facilities should take this time constraint into account when 

developing a project timeline. Facilities will receive a letter granting plan 

approval or describing plan deficiencies. Plan approvals expire 1 year from the 

approval date if the facility has not been certified.

Official Certification Testing

Following plan approval, facilities seeking certification must be tested to 

ensure they can meet all treatment requirements. If deviations from the plans 

are necessary, PPQ must approve these changes prior to testing. Changes 

should be submitted in a manner similar to that described in Plan and Process 

Approval.

The official certification test has three main components:

Calibrating the Temperature Sensors

Thermal Mapping (cold spot mapping)

Conducting a Test Treatment

These steps are discussed below in detail. A certification test must be 

completed for each chamber load configuration.

Calibrating the Temperature Sensors

Calibrate all temperature sensors prior to facility certification tests and a 

minimum of once annually thereafter. In addition, if a permanent temperature 

NOTICE

Only temperature sensors approved by USDA-APHIS may be used. Contact the 

PPQ personnel listed in Contact Information.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Facilities for the Heat Treatment of Firewood

Official Certification Testing

6-9-4 Treatment Manual 09/2023-68

recording system is used, the system must be recalibrated when any part or 

portion of the system is repaired or replaced. Calibrations must be performed 

by the temperature sensor manufacturer or by manufacturer trained 

technicians. All temperature sensors must read within +/- 0.5 °C (0.9 °F) of the 

treatment temperature.

Thermal Mapping

Thermal mapping determines the placement of permanent temperature sensors 

in the chamber. Because the permanent temperature sensors will be placed in 

the coldest areas of the chamber, this process is also referred to as cold spot 

mapping, or cold spot testing. The process of thermal mapping is relatively 

simple: portable temperature sensors are placed throughout the chamber and 

the treatment is conducted. The sensors that took the longest time to record 

treatment temperatures represent colder areas of the chamber.

The thermal mapping procedure is as follows:

1. Drill holes a minimum of 4 inches deep into the ends of the largest pieces 

of wood. The diameter of the hole should be equivalent to the outer 

diameter of the sensor.

2. Place sensors in the wood and in various locations throughout the entire 

chamber.

3. Create a diagram of the chamber that shows the relative horizontal and 

vertical location of each temperature sensor.

4. Conduct the treatment.

5. Remove the temperature sensors and analyze the temperature data.

6. Determine the amount of time each temperature sensor took to reach the 

treatment temperature. The temperature sensors that required the longest 

time to reach treatment temperatures indicate cold spots.

7. Create a map of the cold spots based on the map created in step #3.

8. Repeat this process for each load and volume configuration to ensure that 

correct and consistent cold spots are found.

9. Based on the thermal maps created in step #7, create a map to indicate 

where temperature sensors should be placed for each load and volume 

configuration during daily operational treatments.

NOTICE

Each facility may require a different number of portable sensors depending on 

factors such as the chamber size, chamber dimensions, and air flow patterns. A 

facility that is less than or equal to 10,000 ft3 will require about 20 sensors for a 

thorough temperature mapping. Contact the PPQ personnel listed at the end of this 

chapter for help in determining the number of sensors required for a facility larger 

than 10,000 ft3.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Facilities for the Heat Treatment of Firewood

Frequency of Certification and Temperature Sensor Calibration

09/2023-68 Treatment Manual 6-9-5

Conducting a Test Treatment

A test treatment must be performed to verify that the chamber is capable of 

meeting treatment requirements. Test treatments are only required for the 

maximum load/volume configuration that the facility will be certified for, and 

may be done in conjunction with the thermal mapping described above. The 

procedure for conducting a test treatment is as follows:

1. Place permanent temperature sensors in areas of the load that are thought to 

be cold spots (based on thermal mapping data).

2. Conduct the treatment.

3. After treatment is completed, review the temperature data from the 

temperature sensors. All temperature sensors must have reached the 

treatment temperature.

These trials should test the ability of the treatment chambers to heat a full 

(maximum) load of wood according to the treatment guidelines. Any problems 

or deficiencies found in the facility or with the treatment must be corrected 

and the tests run again until all treatment requirements are met. After the 

facility representative is satisfied the treatment system is running properly and 

can fully meet treatment requirements, test results must be submitted to 

USDA-APHIS for review.

The process of reviewing results from preliminary performance tests may take 

as long as 30 days. After USDA-APHIS-PPQ reviews the results from the 

preliminary performance test, a letter will be issued either approving or 

rejecting the results. Once the facility is approved, treatment and shipment may 

begin.

Frequency of Certification and Temperature Sensor Calibration

A certification test is required once a year, and/or whenever the system has a 

malfunction, breakdown, or other failure that requires modifications that alter 

the manner in which the system functions. This excludes the replacement of a 

faulty temperature sensor.

All temperature sensors must be calibrated at the discretion of the PPQ 

official, annually, or whenever any part of the temperature recording system 

fails or is replaced. Use the process described in the Calibrating the 

Temperature Sensors section of this chapter.
Certifying Facilities Certifying Facilities for the Heat Treatment of Firewood

Documentation

6-9-6 Treatment Manual 09/2023-68

Documentation 

All tests performed during certification must be documented by the PPQ 

official. A copy of the signed APHIS Form 482, copies of all thermal maps, 

description of load size limitations, description of any other special limitations 

placed on the treatment, and any other pertinent addenda or appendices must

be sent to USDA-APHIS-PPQ for final approval.

Contact Information

USDA-APHIS-PPQ

Russ Bulluck, National Operations Manager

Raleigh, NC 27606-5210

Phone: (919) 855-7182

Russ.Bulluck@usda.gov

USDA-APHIS-PPQ

Herbert Bolton, National Program Coordinator

4700 River Road, Unit 137

Riverdale, MD 20737

Phone: (301) 851-3594

Herbert.Bolton@usda.gov
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 7-1-1

Chapter

7

Hazard Communication 

Standard

Safety Data Sheets

Contents

Overview 7-1-1

OSHA Requirements 7-1-1

Overview

Safety data sheets (SDS) provide information about hazardous chemicals that 

are used in the workplace. This information is necessary to safely handle 

hazardous chemicals.

OSHA Requirements

The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requires that the 

hazards of all chemicals produced or imported be evaluated, and information 

concerning chemical hazards is communicated to employers and employees by 

means of a comprehensive hazard communication program. A hazard 

communication program should include, but not be limited to, the following:

Developing and maintaining a written hazard communication program for 

the workplace, including lists of hazardous chemicals present at the 

workplace

Development and implementation of employee training programs 

regarding hazards of chemicals and protective measures

Labeling of containers of chemicals in the workplace, as well as 

containers of chemicals being shipped to other workplaces

Preparation and distribution of SDS to employees and downstream 

employees

Employers who do not produce or import chemicals need only focus on those 

parts of 29 CFR 1910.1200 that deal with establishing a workplace program 

and communicating information to their workers. Refer to the OSHA Hazard 

Communication Standard for a general guide for employers to help determine 

the compliance obligations under the regulation. The Hazard Communication 

Standard includes the following topics:
Hazard Communication Standard Safety Data Sheets

OSHA Requirements

7-1-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Becoming familiar with the Rule

Identify Responsible Staff

Identify Hazardous Chemicals in the Workplace

Preparing and Implementing a Hazard Communication Program

Labels and Other Forms of Warning

Safety Data Sheets (SDS’s)

Employee Information and Training

Other Requirements

Checklist for Compliance

Further Assistance
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 7-2-1

Chapter

7 Emergency Aid and Safety

Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Contents

Introduction 7-2-1

Emergency Spill Procedures 7-2-2

Identify Contacts and Telephone Numbers 7-2-3

Evaluate The Situation: Take Care of People First!!! 7-2-3

Safety and First Aid 7-2-3

Crash Notification 7-2-4

Contamination Control 7-2-5

Notification 7-2-5

Site Security 7-2-7

Cleanup Techniques 7-2-7

Decontamination 7-2-8

Post-Spill Procedures 7-2-9

Disposal of Contaminated Material 7-2-9

Environmental Monitoring 7-2-9

Reporting 7-2-9

Planning for Pesticide Spills 7-2-10

State Hazardous Waste Management Agencies 7-2-11

Accident or Spill Emergency Kit 7-2-11

Safety 7-2-11

Cleanup 7-2-12

Introduction

This document provides instructions for dealing with pesticide spills during 

program operations. “Pesticide spill” refers to any unplanned spill or leakage 

into the environment that occurs during storage, use, transport, or disposal of 

pesticide. Examples include aircraft and surface vehicular crashes, jettisoning 

pesticide cargoes from the air, and leaks or other equipment failures. After a 

pesticide spill, the responsible program person should evaluate the situation 

and begin appropriate corrective measures. Use Figure 7-2-1 to identify your 

responsible program contact.

The Officer in Charge (OIC), Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR), or 

other responsible program official should prepare a site-specific plan based on 

the generic plan, Emergency Spill Procedures. (Refer to Figure 7-2-1 for an 

abbreviated plan. Make a copy of this Figure, and keep it for your pocket 

reference.) Prepare the plan before program operations begin by filling in the 
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Emergency Spill Procedures

7-2-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

names, telephone numbers, and other required information. Specific objectives 

of each plan include:

Protecting people working in the spill area

Preventing or minimizing the risk of further pesticide exposure to people, 

animals, and the environment

Cleanup of the area and disposal or detoxification of residual material

Notifying Federal, State, and local government officials of the magnitude 

and details of the pesticide spill

Evaluation of the potential impact to the environment based on chemical 

residues found in environmental components

Emergency Spill Procedures

Use this section as your guide to prepare a site-specific plan for pesticide spills. 

Please complete the blanks for your specific program. The following is a 

summary of factors you must consider when a pesticide spill occurs (details 

follow this summary):

Identify Contacts and Phone Numbers

Evaluate the Situation

Safety and First Aid

Crash Notification

Contamination Control

Responsible Program Contact (Name)

(Work telephone number)

(Home telephone number)

IF A PESTICIDE SPILLS TAKE THE FOLLOWING STEPS:

1. Evaluate. (Take care of people first!!!) 

2. Safety and First Aid. The most immediate concern is for the health and wellbeing of persons in and around the area. 

3. Call 911 for fire/rescue squad to obtain medical assistance for injured or contaminated persons.

4. Contamination Control. Consult pesticide label & SDS for appropriate protective clothing and hazards (or CHEMTREC Emergency Hotline (800) 424-9300). 

Figure 7-2-1 Abbreviated Spill Plan, Personal Reference Card (Wallet-size) 
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Emergency Spill Procedures

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 7-2-3

Notification 

Site Security

Cleanup Techniques

Decontamination

Identify Contacts and Telephone Numbers

You must know who to contact and where to call if a pesticide spill occurs. 

Figure 7-2-2 identifies preliminary information that you will need in case of an 

emergency. Fill in the blanks for your site-specific plan.

Evaluate The Situation: Take Care of People First!!!

1. Injury/pesticide exposure. Refer to Safety and First Aid.

2. Vehicle or aircraft crash. Refer to Crash Notification.

3. Spill containment. Refer to Contamination Control.

Safety and First Aid

The most immediate concern is for the health and well-being of persons in and 

around the area. 

1. Call 911 for fire/rescue squad to obtain medical assistance for injured or 

contaminated persons.

2. Evacuate the immediate area, if necessary get upwind.

(Program name)

Responsible Program Contact (Name)

(Work telephone number)

(Home telephone number)

Alternative Program Contact (Name)

(Work telephone number)

(Home telephone number)

Figure 7-2-2 Emergency Contacts for Pesticide Spills
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Emergency Spill Procedures

7-2-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

3. Remove injured people from the area. (Do not move a seriously injured 

person unless absolutely essential because of the risk of further injury.)

4. Consult the pesticide label and/or MSDS for appropriate protective 

equipment and hazards.

5. Administer first aid as necessary. See the pesticide’s SDS or contact the 

nearest poison control center. Figure 7-2-3 identifies information that you 

will need in case of an emergency. Fill in the blanks for your site-specific 

plan.

6. Remove contaminated clothing and wash affected area with soap and 

water. If eyes are contaminated, flush with clean water.

7. If individuals experience pesticide poisoning symptoms (blurred vision, 

trembling, nausea, etc.) then transport them to the nearest medical 

emergency facility.Figure 7-2-4 identifies information that you will need in 

case of an emergency. Fill in the blanks for your site-specific plan. 

8. Eliminate sources of ignition (e.g., pilot lights, electric motors, gasoline 

engines, or smoking) to prevent the threat of fire or explosion from 

flammable vapors.

Crash Notification

1. If the spill involved a vehicle or aircraft crash, contact the local police 

(911) as soon as possible.

2. If the spill involved an aircraft crash, notify the nearest Federal Aviation 

Administration (FAA) office. Figure 7-2-5 identifies information that you 

(Center Name)

(Telephone)

Figure 7-2-3 Poison Control Center

(Address)

(How to get there)

Figure 7-2-4 Medical Emergency Facility
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Emergency Spill Procedures

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 7-2-5

will need in case of an emergency. Fill in the blank for your site-specific 

plan.

Contamination Control

1. Consult the pesticide label and/or SDS for appropriate protective clothing 

and hazards (or call the CHEMTREC Emergency Hotline at (800) 424-

9300).

2. Try to contain the spilled pesticide at the original site, and prevent it from 

entering streams, rivers, ponds, storm drains, wells, and water systems, as 

follows:

A. If possible, reposition the pesticide container to stop further leakage.

B. Prevent the spill from spreading by trenching or encircling the area 

with a dike of sand, sand snakes, absorbent material, soil, or rags.

C. If a liquid formulation spills, cover it with absorbent material; however, 

use absorbent sparingly, since it also becomes hazardous waste. Use no

more than necessary.

D. If a dry formulation spills, securely cover it with polyethylene or plastic 

tarpaulin to prevent tracking or airborne spreading of dust.

Notification

1. Notify state officials and the PPQ regional office by telephone. 

Headquarters management will be notified through normal channels.

2. Contact the local Community-Right-To-Know or Emergency Planning 

Coordinator (often the Fire Marshall). Figure 7-2-6 identifies information 

that you will need in case of an emergency. Fill in the blanks for your sitespecific plan.

3. Call the CHEMTREC Emergency Hotline at (800) 424-9300.

(Telephone number)

Figure 7-2-5 Federal Aviation Administration (FFA) Office

(Name)

(Telephone number)

Figure 7-2-6 Community-Right-To-Know or Emergency Planning Coordinator 

(Fire Marshall)
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Emergency Spill Procedures

7-2-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

4. Notify the USDA-APHIS-PPQ Biloxi Station in Biloxi, Mississippi, at 

(228) 385-9278.

5. If the spill involves a large area (4 hectares (10 acres) or more) or you 

judge that it could affect a large area through runoff or other movement, 

notify the State Fish and Game Department or equivalent through 

appropriate channels. Figure 7-2-7 identifies information that you will 

need in case of an emergency. Fill in the blank for your site-specific plan.

6. If animal poisoning may occur, notify the Regional Veterinary Services 

(RVS) Office. Figure 7-2-8 identifies information that you will need in case 

of an emergency. Fill in the blank for your site-specific plan.

7. If the spilled product is a Comprehensive Environmental Response, 

Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) classified hazardous 

substance, or a Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 

(SARA) Title III classified extremely hazardous substance, spills of active 

ingredient exceeding the reportable quantities may be reportable.

8. If you are unsure as to reporting under CERCLA or SARA, look at the 

product’s SDS or call the National Response Center at (800) 424-8802 for 

CERCLA, and for SARA call (800) 535-0202.

9. Notify your Regional Safety and Health Coordinator. Figure 7-2-9

identifies information that you will need in case of an emergency. Fill in 

the blank for your site-specific plan.

(Telephone number)

Figure 7-2-7 Fish and Game Department

(Telephone number)

Figure 7-2-8 Regional Veterinary Services (VS) Office

(Telephone number)

Figure 7-2-9 Regional Safety and Health Coordinator
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Emergency Spill Procedures

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 7-2-7

Site Security

Secure the spill site from unauthorized entry by roping off the area and posting 

warning signs. If necessary, request assistance from local police. Figure 7-2-10

identifies information that you will need in case of an emergency. Fill in the 

blank for your site-specific plan.

Cleanup Techniques

The following are general techniques. Consult local hazardous waste officials, 

the pesticide’s label, or its SDS to determine specific cleanup and disposal 

techniques. Refer to State Hazardous Waste Management Agencies for a list of 

local hazardous waste officials. Figure 7-2-11 identifies information that you 

will need in case of an emergency. Fill in the blanks for your site-specific plan.

Adequate cleanup of spilled pesticides is essential to minimize health or 

environmental hazards. When cleaning pesticide spills, NEVER WORK 

ALONE. Be sure to ventilate the area and use appropriate protective 

equipment. Clean up dry spills (dusts, wettable powders, granular 

formulations) as follows:

Clean up liquid spills by placing an appropriate absorbent material (floorsweeping compound, sawdust, sand, etc.) over the spilled pesticide. Work 

the absorbent into the spill using a broom or other tool to force the 

absorbent material into contact with the pesticide. Collect all spent 

absorbent material and place into a properly labeled metal drum for 

disposal.

Collect the pesticide and place it in heavy-duty plastic bags. Secure and 

label the bags, properly identifying the pesticide and possible hazards. Set 

the bags aside in a secured area for disposal.

(Telephone number)

Figure 7-2-10 Local Police

(Name)

(Telephone)

Figure 7-2-11 Local Hazardous Waste Official
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Emergency Spill Procedures

7-2-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Immediately cover powders, dusts, or granular materials with 

polyethylene or plastic tarpaulin to prevent them from becoming 

airborne. If outside, weight the tarp ends, especially the end facing into 

the wind. Begin cleanup operations by rolling up the tarp while 

simultaneously sweeping up the spilled pesticide using a broom and 

shovel or dust pan. Avoid brisk movements to keep the dry pesticide from 

becoming airborne. When practical, lightly sprinkle the material with 

water to minimize dust. Always use an approved dust mask or respirator 

when working with dry pesticide materials.

Depending on the pesticide, the size of the spill, and local conditions, you may 

need to remove the top 1-inch layer of contaminated soil with a shovel and 

dispose of it.

Decontamination

As soon as practical, decontaminate crashed aircraft, wrecked vehicles, and 

pavements. See the pesticide’s SDS or label for specific instructions. For 

aircraft, coordinate with investigating officials and FAA authorities. For 

automobile wrecks, coordinate with appropriate law enforcement agencies or 

investigative bodies.

Chlorine bleach, caustic soda (lye, sodium hydroxide) detergents, or burnt or 

hydrated lime effectively decontaminate most spill areas (see appropriate SDS 

for precautions when using these substances).

Spread decontaminates thinly and evenly over the spill area. Then, lightly 

sprinkle the area with water to activate the decontaminate. Repeat the cleanup 

procedures until all the spilled pesticide is removed.

Clean all equipment used for spill cleanup with detergent and appropriate 

decontaminates. Collect all used decontaminates and rinse water and place 

them in labeled metal drums. Place clothing and gloves that cannot be 

decontaminated in the drums for proper disposal.

It may also be necessary to completely remove and dispose of contaminated 

porous materials.

If pesticides have leaked or spilled on the soil, removal of the visibly 

contaminated soil (top 1-inch) may be required using a shovel. In such cases, 

! CAUTION

Use bleach or lye, but never both together since this combination may liberate 

poisonous chlorine gas. Lye or lime readily decomposes many pesticides, especially 

the organophosphates, and carbamates. Clean up and remove as much of the 

spilled pesticide as possible prior to applying any decontaminate. Allow 1 to 6 hours 

reaction with the decontaminate before using an absorbent material.
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Post-Spill Procedures

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 7-2-9

place the contaminated soil in metal drums for disposal. Chemical analysis of 

monitoring samples may govern removal of additional soil.

Post-Spill Procedures

Disposal of Contaminated Material

You may contact the pesticide’s manufacturers for specific instructions 

regarding their product. Also contact the State or Federal EPA office with 

jurisdiction over the pesticide spill location about disposal, and consult with 

the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) prior to shipping/transporting 

across state lines. Shipping by licensed transporters may be required.

In general, place contaminated materials in sealed leak-proof metal disposal 

drums. Label all drums properly and dispose of in an approved hazardous 

waste disposal facility (incinerator, landfill site, etc.) under current EPA or 

State permit. The pesticide’s labeling and MSDS contain specific information 

concerning disposal.

Environmental Monitoring

After cleanup and disposal, if the pesticide spilled into the environment, collect 

environmental monitoring samples. Contact USDA-APHIS-PPQ Field 

Operations and request an Environmental Monitoring Coordinator if you need 

help with sample collection.

Reporting

Report information regarding pesticide spills in accordance with the program’s 

specific monitoring plan, and as required by state and federal law. In general, 

reports should include:

1. Detailed map with the site of the pesticide spill clearly marked.

2. Information on location, time, spill area, terrain, pesticide spilled, how spill 

occurred, and how managed.

3. Any other information the writer deems pertinent to the pesticide spill.

Upon completion of the chemical analyses, S&T will report its findings and 

include the spill residue data in its programmatic environmental monitoring 

report and distribute as appropriate.
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Planning for Pesticide Spills

7-2-10 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Planning for Pesticide Spills

Pesticides vary in toxicity as described in the pesticide’s labeling and SDS. 

Actions taken following an accidental spill will depend upon the pesticide 

toxicity involved. Always consult the labeling and SDS for your program’s 

pesticides when planning for spills. Ensure that the telephone number of the 

local poison control center is on your plan.

The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) under the Federal Insecticide, 

Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), Resource Conservation and Recover 

Act (RCRA), and CERCLA or Superfund are responsible for enforcing safe 

pesticide use and disposal to most states. States may, therefore, acquire 

primary responsibility for determining pesticide spill, cleanup, and disposal 

procedures.

Not all states will perform or react to pesticide spills in the same way. 

Therefore, the Port Director or COR should assist with cleanup, sample 

collection, sample analysis, securing affected area, etc. The Port Director or 

COR must monitor such activities to assure PPQ that the responsible parties 

take proper actions during and after a spill. Keep in mind that legal actions as a 

result of a pesticide spill may place liability on the cooperating Federal agency.

Program Managers should inform the PPQ Assistant Regional Director’s office 

of procedures to follow when pesticide spills occur within their jurisdictions so 

they may support field operations when needed. The Port Director, COR, or 

Senior Staff Officer for any given PPQ operation is responsible for 

implementing pesticide spill procedures. These officers must be familiar with 

these guidelines and should make contingency plans for such pesticide spills in 

advance of field operations.

Useful information for completing your spill plan is found in the appendices to 

these guidelines. Include copies of the SDS (obtainable from the manufacturer) 

for your program’s pesticides in your spill plan.
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

State Hazardous Waste Management Agencies

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 7-2-11

State Hazardous Waste Management Agencies

Consult local hazardous waste officials, the pesticide’s label, and its SDS when 

a pesticide spill occurs to determine specific cleanup and disposal techniques. 

Refer to the EPA website Links to Hazardous Waste Programs and U.S. State 

Environmental Agencies for a list of State waste management agencies.

Accident or Spill Emergency Kit

The Port Director, COR, or their designee should have available a fully 

supplied pesticide emergency spill cleanup/decontamination kit with 

instructions for its use. The kit will have the label designation “For Use in 

Handling and Cleanup of Accident Pesticide Spills Only.”

Responsible officials should use their discretion as to what items will be stored 

in vehicles for immediate use. The following items should be immediately 

available for responding to a pesticide spill:

Safety

First aid kit—bus and truck kit, (GSA #6545-00-664-5312), or equivalent

Fire extinguisher, 5-lb. size for class A, B, C fires
Emergency Aid and Safety Guidelines for Managing Pesticide Spills

Accident or Spill Emergency Kit

7-2-12 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Cleanup

One shovel, square-point, “D” handle (GSA 5120-00-224-9326, or 

equivalent)

Twenty-five large, heavy-duty plastic bags with ties (GSA 8105-00-848-

9631, or equivalent)

Two pairs, unlined vinyl rubber boots

Four pairs, disposable coveralls

One 5-gallon water container

Four pairs, unlined vinyl rubber gloves

Two approved respirators with approved pesticide canisters (Selfcontained breathing apparatus must also be available in operations where 

methyl bromide is utilized.)

One broom and dust pan

One pint bottle of liquid detergent

Two scrub brushes (GSA 7920-00-068-7903, or equivalent)

One plastic cover or tarpaulin (to cover dry spills) (GSA 8135-00-529-

6487)

Twenty-five pound bag, absorbent material (GSA 7930-00-269-1272), or 

sweeping compound, sawdust, “kitty litter,” or other absorbent materials

One large metal or heavy-duty plastic garbage can with removable cover 

for storing contaminated materials for later disposal

Several sand snakes should be kept in storage areas

Obtain many of these items through the GSA Federal Supply System or from a 

local hardware store.

NOTICE

Use this can to store the spill kit materials during transport.
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-1

Chapter

8 Equipment

Contents

Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers 8-1-2

Instrument Description 8-1-2

Drierite® 8-1-4

Ascarite® 8-1-5

Instrument Standardization 8-1-5

Operation Procedures 8-1-6

Maintenance 8-1-8

Repair and Calibration 8-1-8

Infrared Spectroscopy Gas Monitoring Device 8-1-9

General Operation 8-1-11

Calibration and Service 8-1-13

Contact Information 8-1-13

Respiratory Protection 8-1-13

Gas Detector Tubes or Gas Samples 8-1-13

Principles of Operations 8-1-14

Volatilizer 8-1-14

Air Velocity Measuring Instruments 8-1-17

Anemometer 8-1-17

Auxiliary Pump 8-1-18

Manometers 8-1-19

Open-Arm Manometer 8-1-19

Digital Manometer 8-1-21

Magnehelic® Pressure Gage 8-1-22

Mityvac Hand-Held Vacuum Pump 8-1-23

Usage 8-1-23

Phosphine Detector 8-1-23

PortaSens Phosphine Detector 8-1-23

Photo Ionization Detector 8-1-24

Principles of Operations 8-1-24

Description 8-1-24

Calibration 8-1-24

Certified Precision Thermometers: Calibration Guidelines 8-1-24

Water Trap 8-1-25

Electrochemical Gas Sensor and Pyrolyzer 8-1-26

Fans—Introduction and Aeration 8-1-27
Equipment 

Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers

8-1-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers

The thermal conductivity gas analyzer (T/C) is a portable instrument 

specifically designed to determine the concentration of gases under a tarpaulin 

or within a chamber during a fumigation. These fumigation gases include 

methyl bromide (MB) and sulfuryl fluoride (SF).

Instrument Description

Currently, there is one company that manufactures USDA-approved T/C 

instruments used during a PPQ-monitored fumigation. The Fumiscope®

(Figure 8-1-1) Models D, 4.0, 4.2, and 5.1 are manufactured by Key Chemical 

and Equipment Co., Inc.

The Fumiscope® is lightweight, portable, and completely contained in a 

compact metal case. It contains a thermal conductivity cell, scale, gas pump, 

range switch, and gas flow meter. A gas drying tube is also included. For large 

enclosures, an auxiliary pump may be needed.

Inlet

The inlet tube connector is the gas inlet for the instrument. The sampling lines 

are 1/4” inner diameter (I.D.) and are connected to the inlet through the drying 

tube.

Flow Rate Meter

The flow rate meter indicates the gas flow rate in “simulated cubic feet per 

hour (SCFH).” Note: The flow rate should always be read at the middle of the 

ball.

Figure 8-1-1 Fumiscope® Models D, 4.0, and 5.1
Equipment 

Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-3

Flow Rate Adjustment

The flow rate adjustment dial controls the air or gas flow rate by adjusting the 

pump. After connecting to the gas sampling line, adjust the flow rate upward 

until it reads exactly 1.0 SCFH.

Scale or Digital Display

The scale or digital display indicates the concentration of the fumigant in 

ounces per 1,000 cubic feet (milligrams per liter or grams per cubic meter). 

Record the gas concentration reading only after this meter stabilizes, which 

may take a minute or more (depending on the length of the tubing and whether 

an auxiliary pump is being used). Digital Fumiscope® models can indicate a 

range from 0 to 2,999 ounces per 1,000 cubic feet.

Zero Adjustment

The zero adjustment knob is used to adjust the display to zero after the 

instrument has warmed up for at least 20 minutes. Set the Fumiscope® to zero 

prior to taking a reading and after each reading.

The Model 5.1, has two knobs used to zero the display. The “Recenter Zero” 

red knob acts as a coarse zero adjustment and the “Zero Adjust” knob acts as a 

fine zero adjustment. (See Figure 8-1-2.) Adjust the red “Recenter Zero” knob 

first to bring the display as close to zero as possible. Then adjust the “Zero 

Adjust” knob to set the unit on zero.

Figure 8-1-2 Fumiscope® Model 5.1
Equipment 

Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers

8-1-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Line Switches

Line switches control the electrical supply to the pump and scale.

Fumigant Selector Switch

The fumigant selector switch (Fumiscope®) changes the display to register 

either methyl bromide or sulfuryl fluoride (Vikane®).

Exhaust Outlet

Always connect an exhaust line to the exhaust outlet to carry gas away from 

the instrument and operator. When using the T/C unit in confined or poorly 

ventilated areas, recirculate the exhaust gas back to the fumigation space or 

exhaust it to the outside.

Drying Tube

Use drying tubes (filter tube) with a prepared chemical for removing certain 

contaminant gases or vapors that interfere with correct fumigant concentration 

readings. The tubes will contain a desiccant, such as Drierite® (granules of 

anhydrous calcium sulfate), or Ascarite® (sodium hydroxide). Both are 

available from scientific supply houses. Never mix Drierite® and Ascarite® in 

the same tube.

When a drying tube is used, place a thin layer of glass wool or aquarium filter 

wool at the bottom and top of the tube to prevent small particles from sifting 

into the T/C unit. Using absorbent cotton or similar materials is not

recommended. Cotton tends to pick up moisture and to become matted, and 

once matted, the cotton may restrict normal air flow, thus adversely affecting 

the T/C unit’s operation.

Mount the drying tube vertically so the gas mixture moves through the drying 

material and does not pass over the top. The gas mixture will pass over the top 

of the drying tube when the tube is mounted horizontally (lengthwise).

Drierite®

Always use anhydrous calcium sulfate (Drierite®) to remove moisture from the 

gas sample. Insert the drying tubes in the gas sampling line just before the inlet 

connection. Drierite® should be fresh and frequently changed to ensure correct 

readings. Drierite®, blue in color when dry, turns pink when moisture is 

absorbed. Replace the Drierite® when most of it has turned pink. In extremely 

high moisture conditions, two Drierite® tubes can be connected in tandem. 

Close drying tube openings when not in use.
Equipment 

Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-5

Ascarite®

T/C gas analyzers are sensitive to a number of gases other than MB. For 

example, CO2 may be troublesome when fumigating fruit where kerosene 

heaters are placed under the tarpaulin to raise pulp temperatures, or with plant 

material packed in peat moss or subsoil. Correct MB gas concentration 

readings may be obtained if a CO2 absorbent is used in the gas sampling line 

before the air-gas mixture enters the T/C unit. A CO2 absorbent that can be 

used is Ascarite®. Observe the poison warning labels on the containers when 

using Ascarite®. Tubes containing Ascarite® should be clearly labeled, 

“Warning—Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothing.”

Because a chemical reaction will occur, never use Ascarite® when taking 

readings of SF. 

Instrument Standardization

Instrument standardization is the first and basic operation. In order to 

standardize the instrument, do the following:

1. Connect the instrument to an electrical outlet with proper voltage and set 

the pump and meter switches to “on”; if inoperable, check fuse 

(replacements—Little Fuse or Buss #3AG 1/2 Amp.—should be kept on 

hand).

2. Attach the drying tube to the inlet port.

A. Give the instrument a tightness test.

B. A tightness test can be accomplished by placing a finger over the inlet 

of the drying tube; if the tubing and connections are tight, the flow ball 

in the flow meter should then fall to zero.

3. Warm up the instrument for 20 to 30 minutes

4. Adjust the gas flow rate to one SCFH by adjusting the flow rate knob.

! WARNING

During a fumigation of living plant products, such as plants, plant material, logs, 

wood and wood products, use tubes containing Ascarite® to remove carbon dioxide 

from gas samples. Discard used Ascarite® per label instructions. Connect the 

Ascarite® tube between the Drierite® tube and the sample inlet. Never mix Drierite®

and Ascarite® in the same tube. Replace Ascarite® when the granules begin to 

aggregate or become moist.

NOTICE

The manufacturer recommends that the analyzer be kept at the same temperature 

as the fumigated site. It may take up to two hours for the analyzer to acclimate if 

moved from extreme temperatures.
Equipment 

Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers

8-1-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

A. If the flow rate knob is turned counterclockwise too far, the pump will 

emit noises and cease to operate properly.

B. When properly adjusted, the flow ball should float at the center mark, 

or slightly below it, on the calibrated glass cylinder.

C. The pump now draws dry, fresh air through the T/C cell; the air enters 

via the inlet on the face of the instrument, passes through the cell, and 

leaves through the exhaust outlet.

5. Turn the zero adjustment knob to obtain a zero reading on the meter.

A. To obtain a stable zero reading, several additional adjustments during 

the first few minutes may be necessary.

If using Model 5.1, adjust the “Recenter Zero” red knob first, then adjust 

the “Zero Adjust” knob to zero.

Standardization is now complete and readings can be made of fumigant-air 

mixture drawn through the unit. At this point, it may be necessary to replace 

the desiccant.

The difference in the thermal conductivity of the fumigant-air mixture as 

compared with fresh air is measured electrically and indicated on the meter as 

concentration readings in ounces of gas per 1,000 cubic feet. T/C units used in 

PPQ must be calibrated for MB and/or SF by the manufacturer or an approved 

outside contractor prior to use. When fumigations are under even a small 

vacuum, readings will not be accurate.

Operation Procedures

Because of the variety of fumigation situations, some adjustments may be 

necessary to meet specific needs. Nevertheless, this outline should be helpful 

in establishing correct operational procedures.

The proper use of the T/C unit is discussed under two headings:

Selecting Operational Site

Measuring Gas Concentrations

Selecting Operational Site

The T/C unit should be at least 30 feet upwind from the fumigation site to 

allow the operator to function without the fear of accidental exposure to gas 

and to allow for easy exit in an emergency. It should be close enough to the 

fumigation site to avoid using unreasonable lengths of sampling lines, to allow 

for constant surveillance of the fumigation during testing, and to avoid 

interference with other activities in the area. Avoid excessive wiring length. 

When T/C unit readings in multiple locations are necessary, see that each 

location is the best available.
Equipment 

Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-7

The T/C unit should be supported on a sturdy, level surface, outside the traffic 

pattern, and protected from wind, rain, excessive cold, and in hot weather, sun. 

In some cases, temporary shelter, such as a tarpaulin cover, may be adequate. 

The gas concentration readings indicated by the T/C unit may be inaccurate 

unless the unit is placed in an area that is approximately the same temperature 

as the gas mixture in the enclosure being fumigated. If the temperature of the 

gas mixture within the fumigated enclosure is approximately equal to that of 

the ambient air outside the enclosure, the gas concentration readings indicated 

by the T/C unit’s meter will be generally more accurate. If there are great 

differences between the two temperatures, water vapor may condense inside 

the gas sampling leads. Such condensation, if desiccant is saturated, can result 

in a lower than normal T/C meter reading, thus leading to the unnecessary 

addition of fumigant to compensate for the apparent shortage. Therefore, if 

vapor condensation appears inside the gas sampling leads, purge the line and 

move the T/C unit to a new location where the ambient temperature 

approximates that of the enclosure.

Most T/C units operate on 110 to 120 volts alternating current (AC). T/C units 

operating on 210 to 220 volts AC on direct current (DC) are available for 

overseas or other assignments, as necessary. A converter is required to use DC. 

Keep extension wiring and gas sampling line length to a practical minimum 

and raise extension wiring above floor level when feasible.

Measuring Gas Concentrations

As a protection for the cell and the pump of T/C units, use a drying tube filled 

with Drierite® at all times.

When taking gas concentration readings, first warm up the unit for at least 20 

to 30 minutes depending on ambient temperatures. Then turn on the pump and 

adjust the gas flow meter to a 1.0 SCFH flow. Turn the zero adjustment knob to 

obtain a zero reading on the meter. If using Model 5.1, adjust the “Recenter 

Zero” red knob first, then adjust the “Zero Adjust” knob to zero.

The unit is now ready to measure gas samples drawn through labeled gas 

sampling lines from the area being treated. The meter will indicate gas 

concentrations in ounces per 1,000 cubic feet (grams per cubic meter).

NOTICE

If monitoring lines are stored outside, water may accumulate in the lines after heavy 

rainfall.

If you observe water or suspect that there may be water in the sampling lines, install 

a water trap. See Water Trap on page 8-1-25 for details on obtaining and using water 

traps.
Equipment 

Thermal Conductivity Gas Analyzers

8-1-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Connect the gas sampling line to the Drierite® tube using 1/4 inch ID 

polyethylene tubing. Allow sufficient time to draw a true sample. With 150 to 

200 feet of 1/4 inch ID tubing and a temperature of 70 °F, a sufficient amount 

of time will be approximately 7 minutes. Stations equipped with small 

auxiliary pumps can draw a sample through the same length of tubing in 12 to 

15 seconds.

Wait until the analyzer reaches the maximum reading (at least 30 seconds) and 

does not move for 30 seconds. Ensure the flow meter still reads 1.0 SCFH. 

This is the gas reading. Record this reading on the PPQ Form 429A, 429B, and 

in the electronic 429 database.

Disconnect the sampling line and allow the pump to draw uncontaminated air 

through the T/C cell. The instrument should return to zero; however, it may be 

necessary to re-zero the analyzer. Again, ensure that the flow meter reads 1.0 

SCFH. Always re-zero the analyzer before taking the next reading.

After taking the final reading at the end of the fumigation, thoroughly purge 

the unit by disconnecting it from the gas sampling line and allowing the pump 

to draw fresh air through the instrument for several minutes.

Maintenance

If it is to function properly, the T/C unit requires the same attention as any 

other equipment. While the instrument is designed specifically for field use, 

the components, particularly the meter, may be damaged easily. To maintain an 

instrument capable of accurate gas concentration readings, careful handling is 

essential. If repairs are needed and are extensive, or the parts are not readily 

available, there will be a delay in returning the instrument. Should the need for 

a substitute T/C unit occur, the port should be prepared to obtain one from 

another source.

Repair and Calibration

Under normal service, the T/C unit will hold its calibration for a considerable 

length of time. To ensure all units are providing accurate gas concentration 

readings, recalibrate T/C units at least annually; calibrate more often if use is 

frequent.

Send the instrument by insured delivery service (i.e., Federal Express, United 

Parcel Service, U.S. Postal Service priority mail) to one of the contractors 

listed below. To prevent damage, the unit must be well-packed and shipped in 

a durable, tamper-proof box.

Prepare a memorandum to accompany each instrument explaining the need for 

sending the unit. Ensure all instruments are shipped with a proper return 

address, name of a contact person, and telephone number. The T/C unit will be 
Equipment 

Infrared Spectroscopy Gas Monitoring Device

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-9

calibrated for MB only, unless the PPQ office requests calibration for SF. 

Notify the contractor if Ascarite® will be utilized during the readings, as 

the T/C must be calibrated using this type of absorbent. All port locations 

will be responsible for payments to contractors.

Use one of the following contractors for repair and calibration:

Cardinal Professional Products (BPA #45-6395-3-2871)

2675 W. Woodland Drive

Anaheim, CA 92801-2628

Phone: (714) 761-3292

http://cardinalproproducts.com/

Key Chemical and Equipment Co. (BPA #45-6395-3-2872)

13195 49th St. North

Unit A

Clearwater, Fl 33762

Phone: (727) 572-1159

Fax: (727) 572-4595

http://www.fumiscope.com/

Infrared Spectroscopy Gas Monitoring Device

Infrared spectroscopy is an accurate and efficient method for measuring methyl 

bromide gas concentrations. There is one unit currently approved for use by 

PPQ. The MB-ContainIRTM is manufactured by Spectros Instruments Inc., 

Hopedale, MA, and will be referred to in this document as the “Spectros.” The 

Spectros is lightweight (9 pounds; 4 kg) and battery operated.

The Spectros uses a technology known as “non-dispersive infrared 

technology” (NDIR). NDIR is based on Beer’s Law (also known as LambertBeer Law or Beer-Lambert-Bouguer Law) that relates the absorption of light to 

Figure 8-1-3 Spectros Methyl Bromide Monitor
Equipment 

Infrared Spectroscopy Gas Monitoring Device

8-1-10 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

the properties of the material through which the light is traveling. The Spectros 

is not affected by other volatile organic compounds such as carbon dioxide, 

eliminating the need for Ascarite®. Other benefits of the unit include:

Audible and visible programmable alarm

Battery powered and portable

Measuring range for methyl bromide 0-240 oz./1000 ft3 (g/m3)

Accuracy 0.08 oz./1000 ft3 (g/m3)

Sensitivity 0.16 oz/1000 ft3 (g/m3)

Operating temperature 32 °F — 122 °F (0 °C — 50 °C)

Variable temperature compensation

The information and guidelines in this chapter are based on the Spectros Inc. 

Operation and Maintenance Guide. Contact Spectros Instruments for more 

detailed operating instructions or technical assistance. 

Important points to remember:

NOTICE

 Install a water trap and particulate filter in-line between the fumigation site and the monitoring unit. See Respiratory Protection on page 8-1-13.

 This monitor is not and should not be used as a worker safety clearance device.

 This monitor is not set up to evaluate, test, or determine readings for other approved fumigants that PPQ uses, such as phosphine or sulfuryl fluoride.

 Do not operate the monitor in the presence of flammable liquids, vapors, or aerosols.

 Do not use soap and water to clean the monitor; use a dry cloth to clean the monitor.

 Maintain proper care and storage of the monitor when not in use.

 Use only batteries supplied by the factory.

 Operate the monitor at all times in a horizontal position. Operating the monitor in a vertical 

position may cause inaccurate measurements.

 Never operate this unit at or above 6,562 feet (2,000 meters).

 The monitor must be maintained free of moisture or other contaminants.

 Always place supplied filter on the gas sample line between the monitor and the sampling 

line.

 Always ensure that the direction of flow is correct for the supplied filter before using the monitor.

 Cap the ends of the gas sampling lines to prevent the possibility of mists, aerosol, oil, water, 

dust, or other contaminants being drawn into the monitor.

 The maximum length of the gas sampling line is 1,000 feet.

 The monitor does not require Drierite® if the measuring range is greater than

2 oz./1000 ft3.

 Return the monitor to the manufacturer for calibration every 6 months.
Equipment 

Infrared Spectroscopy Gas Monitoring Device

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-11

General Operation

Prior to taking gas concentration readings, follow the guidelines in Chapter 2-

4, Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Tarpaulin Fumigation, Conducting the 

Fumigation, to ensure proper installation of gas sampling lines and circulation 

fans.

If not using direct current, ensure that the battery for the Spectros is fully 

charged before the fumigation begins. When using the Spectros in battery 

mode, press the “test” button and observe the number of LEDs that light up.

A red flashing LED on the battery indicates a low battery. Recharge the 

battery per manufacturer instructions before using for gas monitoring. 

Charging time is 3-4 hours for a fully discharged battery pack.

Four green LEDs on the battery indicate that the unit is fully charged and 

monitoring can begin. A fully charged battery pack will power the 

monitor for 8-10 hours.

Water Trap

Install a water trap and particulate filter in-line between the fumigation site and 

the monitor in order to keep water from damaging the monitor. See Water Trap

on page 8-1-25 for more information.

Gas Sample Line

Using 1/4-inch flex tubing, connect the gas sample line to the monitor by 

pushing the tubing onto the gas sample port on the front of the monitor. The 

gas sample line can be up to 50 feet in length and should be free of kinks or 

obstructions. If the gas sample line is longer than 300 feet, the instrument will 

display “FAULT” on the display screen. Ensure that the end of the line is 

positioned to prevent moisture or water intake, or utilize the filter element.

Purge Air Line

Connect the purge air line to the monitor by pushing the tubing onto the purge 

air port on the left side of the monitor. The purge line can be up to 100 feet 

maximum in length and should be in an area of fresh air. Ensure that the end of 

the line is positioned to prevent moisture or water intake, or utilize the filter 

element.

Exhaust Line

Connect the exhaust line to the monitor by pushing the tubing onto the exhaust 

port’s barbed fitting. The exhaust line can be up to 50 feet in length and should 

terminate outside the building. Ensure that the end of the tube is positioned to 

prevent moisture or water intake.
Equipment 

Infrared Spectroscopy Gas Monitoring Device

8-1-12 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Measuring Gas Concentration

To turn on the monitor, lift the shield in front of the handle and press the red 

power ON/OFF toggle switch. Allow the monitor to warm up for 15 minutes.

The WARM UP screen is displayed and the ON light (green) will blink. After 

15 minutes the ON light will stop blinking and glows steadily.

The data display screen will show:

ZONETEMP – enter temperature of the area being monitored in °C. The zone 

is the area where the monitor is being operated, rather than the temperature of 

the commodity undergoing fumigation.

The factory default temperature setting is 25 °C.

After the warm up period, the Data Display Screen will read either MEASURE 

or PURGE in the upper left corner of the screen.

MEASURE indicates the monitor is actively measuring gas. The measurement 

is shown in the lower section of the screen. The monitor measures up to 240g/

m3 with a sensitivity of 0.16g/m3.

The measurement (reading) should stabilize (stop) before recording the 

reading. This may take one or more purge cycles depending on the length of 

the gas sample line.

The measurement cycle will run for 4 minutes before the purge cycle begins. 

When the display shows “PURGE,” the monitor is resetting its infrared 

detector to baseline. The PURGE cycle runs for 10 seconds.

A zero reading indicates the concentration measured is below the lower limit 

of detection of 0.77g/m3 (200ppm approximately).

NOTICE

If the monitor is turned off at any time during operation, the monitor will run through 

an entire 15 minute WARM UP cycle, regardless of how long the monitor has been 

running.

NOTICE

If kinks or obstructions occur in the line, the monitor may not function properly.

Check for crimped sampling lines. Make sure nothing is restricting the flow of either 

the inlet sample air, purge air, or the exhaust (return sample line).
Equipment 

Respiratory Protection

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-13

Calibration and Service

Return the Spectros to the manufacturer every 6 months for a calibration check 

and service. Contact Spectros to obtain a Service Request Form and Return 

Materials Authorization Number (RMA). Ship the unit using an insured 

carrier.

Contact Information

Spectros

Spectros Instruments, Inc.

17-D Airport Road

Hopedale, MA 01747

Phone: (508) 478-1648

Fax: (508) 590-0262

http://www.spectrosinstruments.com/

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Respiratory Protection

Fumigation or other treatments conducted under the monitored conditions 

stated in this manual and other program manuals are safe operations. The 

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) has ruled that 

employees with possible exposure to pesticides (including fumigants) must be 

provided adequate respiratory protection from such exposure. Refer to 

Appendix G for detailed respiratory protection information. USDA employees 

may also refer to Chapter 11 in the APHIS Safety and Health Manual website 

for additional respiratory information.

Gas Detector Tubes or Gas Samples

Use gas detector tubes to measure low level concentrations of MB, SF, and PH. 
Equipment 

Volatilizer

8-1-14 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Principles of Operations

Special pumps are used to draw a measured sample (usually 100 milliliters) of 

an air-gas mixture. The sample is drawn through one or two detector tubes 

where a chemical reaction with the tube reagent takes place, creating a stain. 

The length of the stain is proportional to the concentration of the gas. Measure 

the length of the stain by using a calibrated chart or by simply reading the 

number from a scale printed on the glass tube.

Gas detector tubes are manufactured with a constant reagent weight with 

corrections for variations in the diameter of each tube. Detailed operational 

instructions accompany the equipment.

The detector tubes are specific for each fumigant and are usually available 

from several manufacturers. However, it is advisable to use the pump supplied 

by the manufacturer of the tube used. In an emergency, detector tubes available 

under the trade names Auer, Draeger, Gastec, Kitagawa, and Mine Safety 

Appliances can be used with pumps manufactured by any of these companies 

provided they draw 100 milliliters. Because of the different diameters of the 

tubes sold by each manufacturer, adapters may be necessary. The Kitagawa 

pump uses a removable, stainless steel micro-orifice to reduce the rate of air 

flow through many of its detector tubes. This provides greater accuracy in the 

chemical reaction within the tube. Remove the orifice when using tubes 

manufactured by other companies.

To increase shelf life, store tubes under refrigeration. Before each day’s use, 

test pumps as provided by instructions with each kit and make repairs as 

necessary. Keep spare parts and operational instructions with each kit for use 

as needed.

When many samples must be drawn to a common point during a large 

fumigation, an auxiliary pump can be used. If only one sample lead is 

involved, it may be necessary to pull the fumigant through the line by pumping 

several times. A used tube can be inserted in the pump to determine when the 

fumigant has reached the pump.

Volatilizer

Methyl bromide must pass through a volatilizer (vaporizer) to ensure adequate 

conversion of liquid MB to gaseous MB. Introduce the volatilized fumigant 

into or near to the air flow of the gas introduction fan. When 5 pounds or less 

of MB are used, a simple volatilizer can be made with a 25-foot coil of 3/8 inch 

O.D. (outer diameter) coiled copper tubing immersed in a container of hot 

water.
Equipment 

Volatilizer

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-15

When amounts greater than 5 pounds are to be used, the copper tubing used in 

the volatilizer must consist of a minimum of 50 feet of 1/2 inch O.D. coiled 

copper tubing immersed in a container of hot water.

Heat the water in all sizes of volatilizers to temperatures of 200 °F or above 

with a minimum of 150 °F during the gas introduction process. Insert a 

calibrated thermometer into the water to determine the water temperature. 

Calibrate the thermometer once a year by an approved calibration company. 

Present written documentation of calibration at the time of fumigation.

The line that runs from the MB cylinder to the copper tubing in the volatilizer 

must be a 3000 PSI hydraulic high pressure hose with a 3/8 inch I.D. (inner 

The volatilizer should be made of semi-hard copper tubing. It is important that gas be 

introduced and discharged as shown by arrows. If applied in reverse order, it may move so 

rapidly that some liquid will pass into the chamber.

Figure 8-1-4 Methyl Bromide Volatilizer Coil
Equipment 

Volatilizer

8-1-16 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

diameter) or larger. The line that exits the volatilizer and runs into the 

enclosure must be a 350 PSI tubing with a 1/2 inch I.D. or greater.

Introduce the fumigant through the tubing at the rate of 3 to 4 pounds of gas 

per minute. The gas introduction tube should feel hot to the touch as a good 

measure of satisfactory vaporization.

Figure 8-1-5 Tubing Specifications
Equipment 

Air Velocity Measuring Instruments

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-17

Air Velocity Measuring Instruments

Anemometer

Use an anemometers (wind meters) to measure the air velocity of circulation 

fans and air curtains. Wind meters must be approved by the USDA-APHISPPQ-S&T-TMT. Submit specifications of unapproved wind meters to S&TTMT for approval. Refer to Appendix E for a list of approved models.

Fan Velocity

Measure the cubic feet per minute (cfm) of a fan by placing the anemometer 12 

inches from the face of the fan to be tested. Take a minimum of three readings; 

one from the center, and the others from points toward the outside of the fan. 

Average the readings. If an anemometer is used, each measurement should be 

for 1 minute, thereby giving the result in feet per minute. If a wind speed 

indicator is used, the reading in miles per hour should be converted to feet per 

minute by multiplying the miles per hour by 5,280 and dividing by 60.

Area of the fan is calculated by first measuring the radius (R)—distance from 

the center of the fan to the end of a blade. Formula for area is Pi* R2 where Pi 

is equivalent to 3.14. The final answer should be given in cfm. Therefore, if the 

radius of the blade is given in inches and not feet, the factor 1/144 must be 

multiplied in to convert square inches to square feet. The full formula would 

be: Feet per minute x R2 (in inches) x 3.14 x 1/144 = cfm.

Air Curtain Velocity

Measure the velocity of air curtains with an anemometer. Anemometers used in 

this capacity must meet the following specifications:

Calibrated once a year to NIST calibration and certification

CE certified with a certificate of conformity

Digital

Hand-held

+/- 3 percent accuracy

Record in at least one of the following units with the resolution in 

parenthesis:

Beaufort (0.1)

ft/min (1)

EXAMPLE If average air movement is 1,600 feet for 1 minute from a fan having 

a 7 inch radius (14 inch diameter), the calculations are as follows:

1,600 x 72 x 3.14 x 1/144 = 1,700 cfm (approximate)
Equipment 

Auxiliary Pump

8-1-18 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

mph (1)

m/s (0.1)

km/h (0.1)

knots (0.1)

Tested to NIST-Traceable standards with a written certificate of tests

Auxiliary Pump

During large-enclosure fumigations, it is necessary to take numerous gas 

concentration readings from various locations throughout the enclosure. Thus, 

some sample leads may be over 200 feet long. Pump the fumigant to the 

sampling point before making an accurate concentration reading using an 

auxiliary pump. If the inspector must rely on the pump provided with the gas 

sampler or T/C unit to pull the fumigant, a great deal of time will be needed 

between readings.

Because it pumps the fumigant from many areas and keeps a constant pull, the 

auxiliary pump will reduce sampling time to only the reading time. 

Constructing a unit is relatively simple. Petcocks capable of accepting sample 

leads are tapped and soldered to a short length of pipe. The pipe is connected to 

the suction side of the pump. The pipe acts as a manifold. Opening or closing 

the petcocks allows the gas samples to be drawn as required. Connect an 

exhaust line of sufficient length to the pump to ensure the fumigant is removed 

from the sample area.

It is important that all soldering be done in such a manner as to provide 

gastight construction of the petcocks. The pump should be of sufficient size to 

pull 1 cubic foot per minute through all of the leads on the manifold. 

Therefore, the more leads, the higher the required capacity of the pump. Mount 

the whole unit on a board large enough to keep vibration to a minimum. Keep 

the unit weight down to allow easy transport.

Disconnect each sampling line from the auxiliary pump in turn, and close the 

petcock. Attach the line to the T/C unit or gas detector. Obtain a reading and 

reconnect the line to the auxiliary pump and open the petcock.
Equipment 

Manometers

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-19

Manometers

Manometers are devices that can be used to measure pressure during a 

pressure-leakage test in a fumigation chamber. Pressure is defined as a force 

per unit area. Refer to Appendix E for a list of commercial suppliers. Contact 

S&T-TMT1 for approval of manometers not list in Appendix E. Select a model 

that encompasses the pressure range needed for pressure-leakage testing and 

that displays the results in the required units of measurement. Consult the 

operation manual of the specific manometer for complete information on 

operation and maintenance.

Manometers offer a selection of pressure units, such as inches of water (inch 

WC), pounds per square inch (PSI), bar (g), mbar (mb), pascal (Pa) , kilopascal 

(kPa), ounce square in (ozin2), inches of mercury (in Hg), millimeters of 

mercury (mmHg), foot water (ft. H2O), centimeters of water (cmH2), and 

kilograms centimeters squared (kgcm2).

Open-Arm Manometer2

The most accurate way to measure low air pressure is to balance a column of 

liquid of known weight against it and measure the height of the liquid column 

so balanced. The units of measure commonly used are inches of mercury (in. 

Hg), using mercury as the fluid and inches of water (in. w.c.), using water or oil 

as the fluid.

Figure 8-1-6 Auxiliary Pump

1 USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT, 13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63, Miami, FL 33158 USA, Phone: 305-

278-4877

2 The information included in this section has been extracted from the Dwyer-inst.com website.
Equipment 

Manometers

8-1-20 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

An open-arm manometer is typically a U-shaped tube partially filled with 

liquid. The tube may be of glass or transparent plastic tubing. A ruler 

calibrated in millimeter (mm) divisions or carefully measured lines on a 

background is used to measure the difference in level of the liquid in the two 

arms (or the level in one arm).

As displayed by the picture the center in Figure 8-1-7, when positive pressure 

is applied to one arm, the liquid is forced down in that arm and up in the other. 

The difference in height, “h,” which is the sum of the readings above and 

below zero, indicates the pressure.

The picture of the manometer on the right in Figure 8-1-7 shows that when a 

vacuum is applied to one arm, the liquid rises in that arm and falls in the other. 

The difference in height “h,” which is the sum of the readings above and below 

zero, indicates the amount of vacuum.

No manometer can be read more accurately than the accuracy with which the 

specific gravity of the liquid inside the manometer is known. The liquid must

also have good “wetting” characteristics and be capable of forming a 

consistent, well-shaped meniscus in the indicating tube to facilitate accurate, 

repeatable readings.

The liquid used also affects the operating range of the manometer. Mercury, 

being 13.6 times the weight of water, will move 1/13.6th the distance water 

will move in response to a given pressure. Red gage oil, having a specific 

gravity of 0.826 which is lighter than water, will move about 1.2 times farther 

than water in response to a given pressure. This obviously, expands the scale 

for easier, more precise reading.

Figure 8-1-7 Example of Pressure Measurement in an Open-arm Manometer
Equipment 

Manometers

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-21

Manometers for use with water are furnished with a fluorescent green 

concentrate which, when added to water, serves as a setting agent and a dye to 

improve the consistency and visibility of the meniscus for easier, more 

accurate readability. Because of increased accuracy and consistency, S&TTMT recommends the use of red gage oil manometers.

Digital Manometer

The operating instructions for digital manometers differ depending on the 

manufacturer and/or model, but all have the following basic functions:

1. Use fresh, new batteries before testing begins. Replace as needed.

A. Turn the power on.

B. Re-zero the manometer immediately before use.

C. Connect the positive port to the tubing of the component and vent to the 

opposite port to the atmosphere to measure single positive pressure.

D. Connect the lower positive pressure to the negative port and the higher 

positive pressure to the plus port to measure differential positive 

pressure. The manometer calculates the difference.

E. Add positive pressure to the chamber. When the manometer reaches the 

highest pressure, begin recording time. Stop time when the low 

pressure is reached. Record the low and high pressures.

Electronic Manometer

When a fumigant is volatilized in a chamber at atmospheric pressure, a positive 

pressure is created, which may then be continuously reduced by leakage of the 

air-fumigant mixture. PPQ-approved chambers must be sufficiently tight to 

retain the fumigant during the exposure period. A manometer is used during 

the pressure leakage test for NAP chamber certification and the vacuum 

leakage test for vacuum chamber certification. (See Pressure-leakage Test for 

NAP Fumigation Chambers on page 6-3-9, and Certification Standards on 

page 6-2-4 for detailed descriptions of the certification processes.) Use the 

following example for the most accurate way to determine the pressure 

measurement from a manometer.

EXAMPLE Referencing Figure 8-1-8, the left arm of the open-arm manometer 

measures 8 mm below zero. The right arm measures 7 above zero. 

The sum of the two measurements equals 15 mm. Therefore, in this 

example, 15 mm is the actual reading.
Equipment 

Manometers

8-1-22 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Magnehelic® Pressure Gage3

Magnehelic® Pressure Gages can be used instead of U-Tube or digital 

manometers. The most common gages have units in “inches of water”, Pascals, 

or PSI units. The most common unit is “inches of water”.

The operating instructions for Magnehelic® Pressure Gages differ depending 

on the manufacturer and/or model, but all have the following basic functions:

Select an operating location that is free from excessive vibration and 

ambient temperature below 140 F. Avoid direct sunlight. Sensing lines 

have no length restrictions. Do not restrict the lines.

Calibrate the gage with the diaphragm in a vertical position. To ensure 

maximum accuracy, mount the diaphragm in a vertical position during 

operation.

Zero the gage after installation using the external zero adjust screw.

Connect tubing from the source of the pressure to either of the two highpressure pots. Plug the port not used. Vent one or both low-pressure pots 

to the atmosphere.

Calibrate once per year if it is used less than 10 times per year.

Calibrate every four months if it is used at least 10 times per year.

Source: APHIS-PPQ

Figure 8-1-8 Example of U Tube Manometer

3 Dwyer-Inst.com
Equipment 

Mityvac Hand-Held Vacuum Pump

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-23

Mityvac Hand-Held Vacuum Pump

Detect blocked monitoring leads by using a Mityvac® hand-held vacuum 

pump (for supplier, see Appendix E).

Usage

1. Prior to introducing fumigant, connect the Mityvac® hand-held vacuum 

pump to a monitoring lead.

2. Squeeze the handle on the Mityvac® unit; if the lead is blocked, a vacuum 

will be indicated on the vacuum gauge of the Mityvac® unit (squeeze the 

handle two or three times for monitoring leads longer than 25 feet; the 

Mityvac® hand-held pump has the capacity to attain and hold 25 inches of 

Hg vacuum and a minimum of 7 psi pressure).

3. Disconnect the Mityvac ®hand-held pump from the monitoring lead, and 

repeat this procedure for each monitoring lead (connect monitoring leads to 

the gas analyzer prior to fumigant introduction).

Phosphine Detector

PortaSens Phosphine Detector

Description

Historically, measuring phosphine has been done using detector tubes specific 

for phosphine (see Gas Detector Tubes or Gas Samples). The high cost 

associated with these tubes has been a deterrent for many ports.

A more accurate, portable unit is recommended for use during phosphine 

fumigations. The PortaSens, available from Analytical Technology, Inc. (ATI), 

is a portable, battery-operated instrument for measuring various gas 

concentrations in ambient air. The instrument can be ordered specifically for 

phosphine in the 0 to 1,000 ppm range. Ranges from 0 to 1 ppm are available 

also, along with other configurations. The PortaSens is a complete measuring 

instrument containing an electrochemical sensor, sampling pump, flow cell 

assembly, microprocessor electronics, and a two-line, backlit LCD display. The 

unit is powered by a rechargeable NiCad battery located in the handle, with the 

charger connection located at the bottom of the handle. Refer to the 

manufacturer’s product literature for detailed operation instructions.
Equipment 

Photo Ionization Detector

8-1-24 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Photo Ionization Detector

The Photo Ionization Detector (PID) is a portable vapor and gas detector that 

detects a variety of organic compounds. For methyl bromide, the PID has been 

used both as a leak detector to locate fumigant leakage around chambers, 

application equipment, and temporary enclosures, and as a safety device 

around fumigation sites.

Principles of Operations

The PID is used to indicate the presence and approximate concentration of 

methyl bromide or other volatile organic compounds (VOC’s) present. This is 

accomplished by photo ionization that occurs when an atom or molecule 

absorbs light of sufficient energy to cause an electron to leave and create a 

positive ion. Because PID’s measure all VOC’s, careful attention must be paid 

to the presence of other VOC’s in the air. Other VOC include, but are not

limited to, cigarette smoke, perfume, soap, and exhaust fumes from vehicles.

Description

All PID’s have the same basic construction, differing only in detail by the 

various manufacturers. Each has an ultraviolet lamp that emits photons that are 

absorbed by the compound in an ionization chamber. Electrodes collect the 

ions that are produced. The current that is generated provides a measure of the 

concentration.

Calibration

PID’s are typically calibrated using isobutylene, a stable gas with a slightly 

pungent odor. This gas is easy to handle and can be stored at high pressure, 

allowing calibration bottles to be used for calibrations many times. The PID 

manufacturer supplies a reference manual that describes calibration procedures 

and provides a list of correction factors.

For a partial list of manufacturers, refer to Appendix E.

Certified Precision Thermometers: Calibration Guidelines

Before a thermometer can be used as a calibration standard, it must meet the 

following requirements from an approved facility. All calibration facilities 

must be approved by USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT, 13601 Old Cutler Road, 

Bldg. 63, Miami, FL 33158; Phone (305) 278-4877.

A list of current approved facilities can be accessed in Appendix E.

Accuracy must be 0.1 °C or less for Centigrade thermometer or 0.1 °F or 

less for Fahrenheit thermometer
Equipment 

Water Trap

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-25

ASTM thermometers must have five or more calibration points. NonASTM precision thermometers must have calibration points at the 

treatment temperature.

The calibration certificate issued by calibration facility lists one to five 

calibration points, tabulated corrections for each calibration point, serial 

and test identification number of the NIST standard, and explanatory 

notes defining the conditions under which the test results were made.

The thermometer must be calibrated annually or as designated by S&TTMT. Thermometers with expired calibration certificates cannot be used 

in quarantine treatments.

Thermometer must be calibrated against standards that are approved by 

the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)

Water Trap

When there is a large difference in temperature between the fumigation and 

monitoring locations, water vapor may condense inside the gas monitoring 

leads. Additionally, if monitoring leads are stored outside, water may 

accumulate in the leads after heavy rainfall. If water is observed or suspected 

in the monitoring leads, use forced air to remove water from the leads. If water 

is observed in the water trap, remove the water from the trap and use forced air 

to remove water from the leads.

Install a water trap in-line between the fumigation site and the monitor in order 

to keep water from damaging the monitor. If using an infrared spectroscopy 

analyzer to monitor gas concentrations, also install a particulate filter. A 

particulate filter is not needed if monitoring gas concentrations with a T/C.

Contact your National Treatment Program Manager to obtain information 

about acquiring a water trap.
Equipment 

Electrochemical Gas Sensor and Pyrolyzer

8-1-26 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Electrochemical Gas Sensor and Pyrolyzer

Pyrolyzer technology combined with a renewable electrochemical sensor cell 

provides sensitive and specific methyl bromide monitoring. Currently, there is 

one unit approved for use during PPQ fumigations. The Air Check Advantage 

methyl bromide monitor is manufactured by PureAire Monitoring Systems, 

Inc.4

The Air Check system may be permanently installed in a fumigation facility 

and can continuously and remotely sample over distances of up to 100 feet.

The system has the following features:

Accuracy: ±10% or reading

Dimensions: 10" W x 7.0" H x 7.0" D

Operating Temperatures: -4 to 122 oF (-20 to +50 oC)

Power requirements: 24 VDC 2.0 amp

Figure 8-1-9 Example of a Water Trap

4 PureAire Monitoring Systems, Inc., 557 Capital Drive, Lake Zurich, IT 60047. PH: 888-788-8050; 

pureairmonitoring.com
Equipment 

Fans—Introduction and Aeration

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual 8-1-27

Repeatability: ±10% of full scale

Response time: within 60 seconds

Sensor range: 0-10 ppm (other ranges are available)

Sensor type: renewable electrochemical cell that is field rechargeable

User selectable alarms

Weight: 10 pounds (4.5 kg)

Initial Startup

Refer to the Air Check Advantage Manual for more detailed operating 

instructions.

Allow at least a 2 hour warm up period. The sensor’s zero will stabilize during 

this warm up period.

If, after the 2 hour warm up period, the LED display is reading a positive PPM, 

then adjust the LED display to zero.

Connect a gas sampling tube to the monitor and begin gas sampling readings. 

The MB gas is drawn through a pyrolyzer where it is heated and converted into 

bromine that is detected by the electrochemical sensor.

Maintenance and Calibration

Ensure that the fumigator replaces the electrochemical cell every 6 months and 

replaces the pyrolizer and O-rings when damaged. Ensure that the fumigator 

calibrates the sensor every 3 months under continuous MB exposure or every 6 

months under normal use.

Fans—Introduction and Aeration

When fumigating with methyl bromide, fans must be operational during gas 

introduction and for at least 30 minutes after the gas has been introduced. Fans 

are also required for aeration. Do not use plastic fans.

Fans must be:

Constructed of steel

Capable of circulating the equivalent cubic feet per minute (cfm) of the 

total volume of the enclosure, but a minimum of 2,500 cfm

Minimum of 18 inches in diameter

NOTICE

The monitor is designed for continuous 24/7 operation. Do not power down unless 

the monitor will be stored for a long period of time.
Equipment 

Fans—Introduction and Aeration

8-1-28 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Require the fumigator to turn on all fans before gas introduction to ensure they 

are functioning properly. Refer to Figure 8-1-13 for an example of an approved 

fan.

Figure 8-1-10 Example of an Approved Fan

PMC Siz Cover
02/2021-44 Treatment Manual Glossary-1-1

Treatment 

Manual

Glossary

Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms

absorbed dose. quantity of radiation (energy) absorbed per unit of mass of a 

specified target

aeration, active. the use of fans or any other mechanical devices to aerate or 

ventilate the treatment area

aeration, passive. non-mechanical ventilation (i.e. emoving tarpaulins, 

opening doors or windows) of the treatment area

aeration buffer zone. an area that extends from the point of methyl bromide 

emissions from the treatment area to a specified distance where access is 

limited

a.i. active ingredient

anemometer. wind meter

APHIS. Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service

CERCLA. Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and 

Liability Act

CHEMTREC. 24-hour emergency telephone service for spills

copra. dried coconuts and whole coconuts without the husk

COR. contracting officer’s representative

dose mapping. measurement of the absorbed dose distribution within a 

process load through the use of dosimeters placed at specific locations within 

the process load

dosimeter. a devices that when irradiated, exhibits a quantifiable change in 

some property of the device which can be related to absorbed dose in a given 

material using appropriate analytical instrumentation and techniques
Glossary 

Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms

Glossary-1-2 Treatment Manual 02/2021-44

dosimetry. a system used for determining absorbed dose, consisting of 

dosimeters, measurement instruments and their associated reference standards, 

and procedures for the system’s use

DOT. U.S. Department of Transportation

EPA. Environmental Protection Agency

exhaust duct/stack. a duct or stack used to exhaust methyl bromide from the 

treatment area

external Feeder. pest that normally inhabits the outside or outer part of its 

host; contrast with hitchhiker and internal feeder

FAA. Federal Aviation Administration

FIFRA. Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act

g. grams

garbage. all waste material that is derived in whole or in part from fruits, 

vegetables, meats, or other plant or animal (including poultry) material, and 

other refuse of any character whatsoever that has been associated with any 

such material

Gy. gray

hitchhiker. pest transported by chance and not found inhabiting its host; 

contrast with external feeder

internal feeder. a pest that normally inhabits the inside or inner part of its 

host; contrast with external feeder

ionizing radiation. charged particles and electromagnetic waves that, as a 

result of physical interaction, create ions by either primary or secondary 

processes

irradiation. treatment with any type of ionizing radiation

ISPM. International Standards for Phytosanitary Measures; international 

measures developed by the International Plant Protection Convention

m. meter

manometer. a device used to measure pressure during a pressure leakage test
Glossary 

Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms

02/2021-44 Treatment Manual Glossary-1-3

mbar. millibar; mb; a unit of pressure

MB. methyl bromide

mg. milligram

mg/L. milligrams per liter

minimum absorbed dose. the localized minimum absorbed dose within the 

process load (Dmin)

mmHg. millimeters of mercury; a measure of pressure

NIOSH. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

OIC. officer-in-charge

OSHA. U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration

Pa. pascal; a unit of pressure

PH. phosphine

PID. photoionization detector; a portable vapor and gas detector that detects a 

variety of organic compounds

PSI. pounds per square inch

PEL. permissible exposure limit

ppb. parts per billion

ppm. parts per million

PPQ. Plant Protection and Quarantine

quarantine material interceptions (QMI). APHIS-regulated materials 

confiscated from passenger and crew or found in the Customs and Border 

Protection passenger and crew clearance areas, including bathrooms. QMI is 

not Regulated Garbage. 

radura. internationally recognized symbol used to indicate when a food 

product has been irradiated

SCBA. self contained breathing apparatus
Glossary 

Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms

Glossary-1-4 Treatment Manual 02/2021-44

SDS. safety data sheet (replaces Material Safety Data Sheet)

SF. sulfuryl flouride

STEL. short-term exposure limit

TLV. threshold limit value

treatment area. the structure, area, or space, which is or was enclosed or 

sealed, to contain fumigant during fumigation and continuing until the 

commodity or structure is moved or released

treatment buffer zone. an area surrounding a treatment area during the 

treatment period where access is limited

USDA. U.S. Department of Agriculture

volatilizer. vaporizes liquid methyl bromide into a gaseous state
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-1

Appendix

A Appendix A

Forms

Contents

APHIS Form 2061 (Residue Sample for Food or Feed Product) A-2

APHIS Form 205-R, Instructions and Worksheet for Calibrating Portable 

Temperature Sensors A-3

APHIS Form 206-R, Test of the Accuracy of the Permanent RTD Sensors 

Installed in Hot Water Tanks A-4

APHIS Form 207-R, Sensor Location Diagram Fruit Weights and Pulp 

Temperatures A-5

APHIS Form 208, Performance Test for Mango Hot Water Immersion Tank 

A-6

Calibration of Temperature Probes (Cold Treatment) A-7

Location of Temperature Sensors in Containerized Cargo (Cold Treatment) 

A-8

PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record A-9

PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record (Without Tarpaulin) A-12

PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement A-17

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification A-20

PPQ Form 449-R, Temperature Recording Calibration Report A-30

PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or Treatment A-32

PPQ Form 556, In Transit Cold Treatment Clearance Report A-35

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template A-36
Appendix A Forms

APHIS Form 2061 (Residue Sample for Food or Feed Product)

A-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

APHIS Form 2061 (Residue Sample for Food or Feed Product)

The APHIS Form 2061 has been removed from this manual. Contact the 

Manuals Unit to obtain a copy and instructions for use.
Appendix A Forms

APHIS Form 205-R, Instructions and Worksheet for Calibrating Portable Temperature Sensors

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-3

APHIS Form 205-R, Instructions and Worksheet for Calibrating 

Portable Temperature Sensors

Figure A-1 APHIS Form 205-R, Instructions and Worksheet for Calibrating Portable Temperature 

Sensors
Appendix A Forms

APHIS Form 206-R, Test of the Accuracy of the Permanent RTD Sensors Installed in Hot Water Tanks

A-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

APHIS Form 206-R, Test of the Accuracy of the Permanent RTD 

Sensors Installed in Hot Water Tanks

Figure A-2 APHIS Form 206-R, Test of the Accuracy of the Permanent RTD Sensors Installed in Hot 

Water Tanks
Appendix A Forms

APHIS Form 207-R, Sensor Location Diagram Fruit Weights and Pulp Temperatures

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-5

APHIS Form 207-R, Sensor Location Diagram Fruit Weights and Pulp 

Temperatures

Figure A-3 APHIS Form 207-R, Sensor Location Diagram Fruit Weights and Pulp Temperatures
Appendix A Forms

APHIS Form 208, Performance Test for Mango Hot Water Immersion Tank

A-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

APHIS Form 208, Performance Test for Mango Hot Water Immersion 

Tank

Figure A-4 APHIS Form 208, Performance Test for Mango Hot Water Immersion Tank
Appendix A Forms

Calibration of Temperature Probes (Cold Treatment)

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-7

Calibration of Temperature Probes (Cold Treatment)

Figure A-5 Calibration of Temperature Probes (Cold Treatment)
Appendix A Forms

Location of Temperature Sensors in Containerized Cargo (Cold Treatment)

A-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Location of Temperature Sensors in Containerized Cargo (Cold 

Treatment)

Figure A-6 Location of Temperature Sensors in Containerized Cargo (Cold Treatment)
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-9

PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record

Use PPQ Form 429A as a station record for all treatments conducted in 

approved chambers or in temporary enclosures (containers, truck vans, railroad 

cars, ships, warehouses, or other similar enclosures.)

Complete a paper PPQ Form 429A at the completion of every fumigation. Use 

the information as a guide to complete the electronic 429 Fumigation Report in 

the Commodity Treatment Information System (CTIS). The PPQ official must

record treatment oversight data into the electronic 429 database within 48 

hours of the treatment being completed or approved by the supervisor. After 

the electronic fumigation record is completed, the PPQ official must file the 

paper PPQ Form 429A for a minimum of 3 years.

Treatments conducted under temporary enclosures require reporting of 

minimum gas concentration readings. S&T-TMT tracks MB fumigant usage 

using the electronic 429 database. Contact ppqctis@aphis.usda.gov to request 

access.
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record

A-10 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Figure A-7 Example of PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record, With Tarpaulin (front)

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

ANIMAL AND PLANT HEALTH INSPECTION SERVICE

PLANT PROTECTION AND QUARANTINE

FUMIGATION RECORD

(WITH TARPAULIN)

1. STATION REPORTING

2. PEST AND INTERCEPTION NUMBER

3. CARRIER 4. ARRIVAL DATE 5. DATE INTERCEPTED 6. ORIGIN

7. PLACE OF ARRIVAL 8. DATE CONFIRMED 9. PORT OF LADING

10. FUMIGATION CONTRACTOR 11. DATE FUMIGATION ORDERED 12. COMMODITY

13. FUMIGATION SITE 14. DATE FUMIGATED 15. QUANTITY

16. MARKS 17. B/L NUMBER 18. ENTRY NUMBER 19. SHIPPER 20. CONSIGNEE

21. FUMIGANT AND TREATMENT SCHEDULE 22. TEMPERATURE

a. SPACE b. COMMODITY

23. GAS ANALYZER (type and serial number)

24. ENCLOSURE 25. WEATHER CONDITIONS 26. CUBIC CAPACITY 27. TREATMENT UNDER SECTION 18 EXEMPTION

YES NO

28. NUMBER OF FANS 29. TOTAL CFM’S FANS 30. TIME FANS OPERATED 31. FOOD OR FEED COMMODITY

YES NO

32. GAS INTRODUCTION

a. START b. FINISH

33. AMOUNT GAS INTRODUCED 34. GAS ADDED 35. RESIDUE SAMPLE TAKEN

YES NO

SAMPLE NUMBER

GAS CONCENTRATIONS (gram per cubic meter [oz./1000 cu. ft.])

(To be prepared for fumigations when gas concentration readings are required while treatment is in progress.)

36.

DATE/TIME

37. PLACEMENT OF TEST LINES 38.

TIME INTERVAL

(from Block 32b)

39.

SPACE COMMODITY INSPECTOR’S INITIALS

DEFGH I J

FRONT

A

CENTER

B

REAR

C

40. DETECTOR TUBE READINGS (PPM)

41. REMARKS 42. CALCULATIONS

43. INSPECTOR SIGNATURE 44. DATE 45. REVIEWER SIGNATURE 46. DATE

PPQ FORM 429A (Previous edition is obsolete.)

AUG 2018
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-11

Figure A-8 Example of PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record, With Tarpaulin (back)

FUMIGATION WITH TARPAULIN

NOTE: In preparation for the fumigation and prior to site selection, the officer should have determined (1) the immediate pest risk associated with the infested 

commodity, (2) the temperature requirements for the fumigation, and (3) the permeability of the packaging.

MATERIALS

FUMIGATOR PPQ

Tarpaulin

Sand Snakes

Loose Sand

Burlap / Padding

Masking Tape

Spray Adhesive

Pesticide and Spray 

Equipment

Tarpaulin Supports

Fans (metal)

Extension Cords

2-3 Prong Plug Adapters

Fumigant with Pesticide 

Label Attached

Gas Introduction Line

T/C Gas Analyzer 

(Fumiscope) or Spectros 

Unit

Volatilizer

Heat Supply for Volatilizer

Aeration Fans with Ducts 

(introduction and exhaust)

Sampling Tubes/Lines

Weight Scales

Fumigation Warning 

Treatment Placards

Self-Contained Breathing 

Apparatus (SCBA)

Drierite

Ascarite

Approved Air Monitoring 

Device per Fumigation 

Label, PID-Photo Ionization 

Detector

Tape Measure

Thermometer

Gas Detector Kit and 

Detector Tubes for Section 

18’s

Approved Heaters

(non-electrical heating 

elements)

Approved Temperature 

Recording Devices for 

Treatments Over 6 Hours

Approved Temperature 

Sensors for Treatments 

Over 6 Hours

Auxiliary Pump or Mighty 

Vacuum Pump

PPQ Treatment Manual

Fans (circulation and 

introduction)

Self-Contained Breathing 

Apparatus (SCBA)

PID-Photo Ionization 

Detector

Tape Measure

Thermometer

Blank PPQ Form 429

PPQ Treatment Manual

PREPARATION PROCEDURES

(Section III Treatment Manual)

1. Site Selection

Ventilated Area

Sheltered Area

Impervious Surface

Non-Work Area

Proximity to Electrical 

Source

Proximity to Commodity

2. Arrangement of Commodity 

and Equipment

Stack Size Limitation

Air, Space, Below, and 

Between Load

Placement of Tarpaulin 

Supports

Placement of Padding

Placement of Fans

Placement of Gas 

Introduction Line(s)

Placement of Sampling 

Tubes/Lines

3. Tarpaulin Enclosure Cover

a. Cover

Condition

Air Space, Above Load

Floor Area 30 cm (12”) 

Space Around Load

Overlap 45 cm (18”) 

Border

b. Snakes

Contact Along Sides

Contact Around Corners

Overlap 15 cm (8”) 

Minimum

Filled and Not Leaking

c. Sand

Perimeter

d. Adhesive

Perimeter

4. Treatment Schedule

Determination

Plant Pest

Commodity Temperature

Space Temperature

Volume Determination

Sorptive Commodity

Amount of Fumigant

5. Fumigant Introduction

Area Clear of 

Unauthorized Personnel

Tarpaulin Condition of 

Wear

Fan Operation

Fumigant Cylinder Weight

Gas Line Connections

Volatilizer Heated to 150 

Degrees Fahrenheit

Introduction Rate

Check for Leaks

6. Safety

Gas Detection Tests for 

Leakage

Wind Sock

7. Concentration Readings

T/C Gas Analyzer 

(Fumiscope) or Spectros 

Unit Calibrated

Reading Time Intervals

Gas Distribution

Maximum/Minimum 

Readings Taken

8. Aeration (Multiple Stacks)

Exhaust Fan(s)

Exhaust Tube(s)

Exhausted in a NonFumigation Area

Negligible Gas Readings 

Before Tarpaulin 

Removed

PID-Photo Ionization 

Detector or Other 

Detection Tests Used 

During Aeration

PPQ FORM 429A (Reverse)
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record (Without Tarpaulin)

A-12 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record (Without Tarpaulin)

Use PPQ Form 429B as a station record for all treatments conducted in 

containers that meet the conditions in Fumigants—Methyl Bromide—Special 

Procedures for Container Fumigations Without a Tarpaulin on page 2-8-1.

Complete a paper PPQ Form 429B at the completion of every fumigation. Use 

the information as a guide to complete the electronic 429 Fumigation Report in 

the Commodity Treatment Information System (CTIS). The PPQ official must

record treatment oversight data into the electronic 429 database within 48 

hours of the treatment being completed or approved by the supervisor. After 

the electronic fumigation record is completed, the PPQ official must file the 

paper PPQ Form 429B for a minimum of 3 years.

Treatments conducted under temporary enclosures require reporting of 

minimum gas concentration readings. S&T-TMT tracks MB fumigant usage 

using the electronic 429 database. Contact ppqctis@aphis.usda.gov to request 

access.
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record (Without Tarpaulin)

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-13

Figure A-9 Example of PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record, Without Tarpaulin (front)

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

ANIMAL AND PLANT HEALTH INSPECTION SERVICE

PLANT PROTECTION AND QUARANTINE

FUMIGATION RECORD

(WITHOUT TARPAULIN)

1. STATION REPORTING

2. PEST AND INTERCEPTION NUMBER

3. CARRIER 4. ARRIVAL DATE 5. DATE INTERCEPTED 6. ORIGIN

7. PLACE OF ARRIVAL 8. DATE CONFIRMED 9. PORT OF LADING

10. FUMIGATION CONTRACTOR 11. DATE FUMIGATION ORDERED 12. COMMODITY

13. FUMIGATION SITE 14. DATE FUMIGATED 15. QUANTITY

16. MARKS 17. B/L NUMBER 18. ENTRY NUMBER 19. SHIPPER 20. CONSIGNEE

21. FUMIGANT AND TREATMENT SCHEDULE 22. TEMPERATURE

a. SPACE b. COMMODITY

23. GAS ANALYZER (type and serial number)

24. ENCLOSURE 25. WEATHER CONDITIONS 26. CUBIC CAPACITY 27. TREATMENT UNDER SECTION 18 EXEMPTION

YES NO

28. NUMBER OF FANS 29. TOTAL CFM’S FANS 30. TIME FANS OPERATED 31. FOOD OR FEED COMMODITY

YES NO

32. GAS INTRODUCTION

a. START b. FINISH

33. AMOUNT GAS INTRODUCED 34. GAS ADDED 35. RESIDUE SAMPLE TAKEN

YES NO

SAMPLE NUMBER

GAS CONCENTRATIONS (gram per cubic meter [oz./1000 cu. ft.])

(To be prepared for fumigations when gas concentration readings are required while treatment is in progress.)

36.

DATE/TIME

37. PLACEMENT OF TEST LINES 38.

TIME INTERVAL

(from Block 32b)

39.

SPACE COMMODITY INSPECTOR’S INITIALS

D E F G H I J

FRONT

A

CENTER

B

REAR

C

40. DETECTOR TUBE READINGS (PPM)

41. REMARKS 42. CALCULATIONS

43. INSPECTOR SIGNATURE 44. DATE 45. REVIEWER SIGNATURE 46. DATE

PPQ FORM 429B (Previous edition is obsolete.)

JUN 2018
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record (Without Tarpaulin)

A-14 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Figure A-10 Example of PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record, Without Tarpaulin (back)

FUMIGATION WITHOUT TARPAULIN

NOTE: In preparation for the fumigation and prior to site selection, the officer should have determined (1) the immediate pest risk associated with the infested 

commodity, (2) the temperature requirements for the fumigation, and (3) the permeability of the packaging.

MATERIALS

FUMIGATOR PPQ

Masking Tape

Spray Adhesive

Pesticide and Spray 

Equipment

Extension Cords

2-3 Prong Plug Adapters

Fumigant with Pesticide 

Label Attached

Gas Introduction Line

T/C Gas Analyzer 

(Fumiscope) or Spectros 

Unit

Volatilizer

Heat Supply for Volatilizer

Aeration Fans with Ducts 

(introduction and exhaust)

Sampling Tubes/Lines

Weight Scales

Fumigation Warning 

Treatment Placards

Self-Contained Breathing 

Apparatus (SCBA)

Drierite

Ascarite

Approved Air Monitoring 

Device per Fumigation 

Label, PID-Photo Ionization 

Detector

Tape Measure

Thermometer

Gas Detector Kit and 

Detector Tubes for Section 

18’s

Approved Heaters

(non-electrical heating 

elements)

Approved Temperature 

Recording Devices for 

Treatments Over 6 Hours

Approved Temperature 

Sensors for Treatments 

Over 6 Hours

Auxiliary Pump or Mighty 

Vac Pump

PPQ Treatment Manual

Fans (circulation and 

introduction)

Pressure Testing 

Equipment, Manometer, 

Sealing Putty, Device or 

Equipment with Ability to 

Pressurize a Contaner

Self-Contained Breathing 

Apparatus (SCBA)

PID-Photo Ionization 

Detector

Tape Measure

Thermometer

Blank PPQ Form 429

PPQ Treatment Manual

PREPARATION PROCEDURES

(Section III Treatment Manual)

1. Site Selection

Ventilated Area

Sheltered Area

Impervious Surface

Non-Work Area

Proximity to Electrical 

Source

Proximity to Commodity

2. Pressure Testing

Use Approved Pressure 

Testing Equipment

3. Arrangement of Commodity 

and Equipment

Stack Size Limitation

Placement of Plastic 

Sheeting Over Commodity 

Near Introduction Line

Placement of Fans Inside 

Container

Placement of Gas 

Introduction Lines

Placement of Sampling 

Tubes/Lines

4. Adhesive and Tape

Cover Vents and Door 

Seals

5. Treatment Schedule

Determination

Plant Pest

Commodity Temperature

Space Temperature

Volume Determination

Sorptive Commodity

Amount of Fumigant

6. Fumigant Introduction

Area Clear of 

Unauthorized Personnel

Fan Operation

Fumigant Cylinder Weight

Gas Line Connections

Volatilizer Heated to 150 

Degrees Fahrenheit

Introduction Rate

Check for Leaks by 

Fumigator

7. Safety

Gas Detection Tests for 

Leakage

Wind Sock

Self-Contained Breathing 

Apparatus (SCBA)

8. Concentration Readings

T/C Gas Analyzer 

(Fumiscope) or Spectros 

Unit Calibrated

Reading Time Intervals

Gas Distribution

Maximum/Minimum 

Readings Taken

9. Aeration (Multiple 

Containers)

Exhaust Fan(s)

Exhaust Tube(s)

Exhausted in a NonFumigation Area

Negligible Gas Readings 

Before Opening Doors

PID-Photo Ionization 

Detector or Other 

Detection Tests Used 

During Aeration

PPQ FORM 429B (Reverse)
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record (Without Tarpaulin)

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-15

Table A-1 Instructions for Completing PPQ Form 429A and PPQ Form 429B 

Block Instruction

1 Fill in the name of the PPQ work station where the fumigation occurs.

2 Fill in scientific name(s) of pest or insert “Precautionary” when fumigation is mandatory as a condition of 

entry or movement. Include station interception number(s) if fumigation is based on pest findings.

3 Fill in ocean vessel name or aircraft identifying marks.

4 Fill in the date of arrival of the commodity at the port of entry.

5 Fill in the date the pest was intercepted.

6 Fill in the foreign port the commodity originated from.

7 Fill in the US port of arrival.

8 Fill in the date the pest was identified by the specialist.

9 Fill in the port of lading the commodity originated from.

10 Fill in the fumigation contractor performing the fumigation.

11 Fill in the date the fumigation was ordered.

12 Fill in the commodity requiring fumigation. if the commodity is a fruit or vegetable, enter the common name 

and/or variety. Common names and varieties help track fumigant tolerances.

13 Fill in where the fumigation occurred.

14 Fill in the date the fumigation was completed.

15 Fill in the quantity of fumigated commodity.

16 Fill in any distinguishing marks to identify the fumigated commodity.

17 Fill in the bill of lading information of the fumigated commodity.

18 Fill in teh customs entry number of the shipment.

19 Fill in the shipper information.

20 Fill in teh consignee information who will receive the commodity.

21 Fill in fumigant (for example: MB, PH, SF), treatment schedule number, dosage rate, and exposure period 

(MB 4 lbs/1,000 ft3 for 12 hours).

22 Fill in the initial temperature of the (a) space in the enclosure and (b) commodity temperature. Specify 

Celsius or Fahrenheit.

23 Fill in the type, model name, and serial number of gas monitoring equipment used (Fumiscope® #1234.)

24 Fill in the enclosure type: chamber, tarpless container, or tarped container. Indicate whether the tarp is 

single- or multiple-use and the thickness (4 mil or 6 mil).

25 If treatment is conducted outside, fill in the weather conditions.

26 Fill in the cubic capacity of the enclosure (ft3).

27 If commodity is treated under APHIS Section 18 Exemption, check “Yes.” If commodity is treated at label 

dosage or less, check “No.”

28 Fill in the number of fans used.

29 Fill in the total cubic feet per minute of air movement.

30 Fill in the amount of time the fans are operated.

31 If the commodity is for food or feed, check “Yes.” If nonfood or feed, check “No.”

32 Record time gas introduction (a) began and (b) ended. Treatment does not begin until gas is completely 

introduced in the chamber or enclosure.

33 When the fumigant dosage is calculated by weight, fill in the dosage to the nearest quarter pound. If liquid 

measures are needed, convert from weight to volume by using the conversion table in Appendix C. 
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 429B, Fumigation Record (Without Tarpaulin)

A-16 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Distribution

File the original paper copies as directed by your supervisor. The original must 

be retained for 3 years.

34 If additional gas is required, note under Remarks (Block 40) and show calculations (Block 41).

35 Check “Yes” or “No”. If needed, see Block 7 on APHIS Form 2061 for the Sample Number.

36 Record the date and time gas concentration readings are taken. Refer to the treatment schedule for 

required times.

Gas concentration readings are not required for chamber treatments.

37 Specify where each gas sampling line is located, either in the space or the commodity. Use a minimum of 

three gas sampling lines.

Methyl Bromide: Record the gas reading directly from the gas analyzer (lbs./1,000 ft3)

Sulfuryl Fluoride: Record the gas reading directly from the gas analyzer (lbs./1,000 ft3) or apply a correction 

factor if calibrated using a correction factor.

Phosphine: Record the gas reading directly from the gas analyzer or colorimetric tubes (PPM)

38 Fill in the time intervals when gas concentration readings are taken.

39 Fill in PPQ official initials.

40 Fill in colorimetric tube readings (PPM).

41 Show calculations when additional gas is added. Note any unusual events that occurred during the 

treatment. If the fumigation is aborted record details in this block.

For tarpless container fumigations, record the results of the pressure test in this block.

42 Show calculations for determining volume (L x W x H = ft3)

43 Fill in PPQ official signature.

44 Fill in date the fumigation was completed.

45 Fill in the reviewer signature

46 Fill in the date the reviewer signed.

Table A-1 Instructions for Completing PPQ Form 429A and PPQ Form 429B (continued)

Block Instruction
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-17

PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement

Figure A-11 Example of PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement

According to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, an agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information 

unless it displays a valid OMB control number. The valid OMB control numbers for this information collection are 0579-0054, 0088, 0129, 0198, 0257, 0310, 0317, 

0322, 0337, 0346, 0363, and 0369. The time required to complete this information collection is estimated to average 1.25 hours per response, including the time

for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information.

20%$33529('









81,7('67$7(6'(3$570(172)$*5,&8/785(

$1,0$/$1'3/$17+($/7+,163(&7,216(59,&(

3/$173527(&7,21$1'48$5$17,1( &203/,$1&($*5((0(17

1$0($1'0$,/,1*$''5(662)3(562125),50 /2&$7,21

5(*8/$7('$57,&/(6

$33/,&$%/()('(5$/48$5$17,1(6255(*8/$7,216

,:($*5((727+()2//2:,1*

6,*1$785( 7,7/( '$7(6,*1('

7KHDIIL[LQJRIWKHVLJQDWXUHVEHORZZLOOYDOLGDWHWKLVDJUHHPHQWZKLFKVKDOOUHPDLQLQ

HIIHFWXQWLOFDQFHOHGEXWPD\EHUHYLVHGDVQHFHVVDU\RUUHYRNHGIRUQRQFRPSOLDQFH

$*5((0(17180%(5

'$7(2)$*5((0(17

334&%32)),&,$/1$0($1'7,7/( $''5(66

6,*1$785(

86*29(510(1767$7($*(1&<2)),&,$/1$0($1'7,7/( $''5(66

6,*1$785(

334)250$OOSUHYLRXVHGLWLRQVDUHREVROHWH

6(3
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement

A-18 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Purpose

The PPQ Form 519 is a form that provides a signed, written agreement with 

fumigators to indicate their understanding of methods, conditions, and 

procedures necessary for compliance with regulations.

The PPQ Form 519 is also available electronically.

Instructions

PPQ ports that provide import, domestic, and predeparture treatments are 

required to maintain Compliance Agreements with commercial pesticide 

applicators, cold treatment facilities, irradiation facilities, and any other 

entities performing treatments that mitigate a pest. PPQ may discontinue 

certification of a particular treatment that did not meet the required time, 

temperature, and concentration levels indicated in the treatment schedule. 

Similarly, PPQ may not want to begin monitoring a fumigation if the tarp 

appears inadequate and excessive leakage may lead to a safety problem. 

Review compliance agreements at least annually, but preferably twice a year. 

Amend compliance agreements as appropriate.

If the establishment fails to abide by the conditions of the agreement, then the 

Port Director may cancel that agreement orally or in writing.

If you make an oral cancellation, confirm it in writing as soon as possible. The 

establishment has 10 days to appeal the cancellation. Appeals must be made to 

the Deputy Administrator.

Table A-2 Instructions for Completing PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement

Block Instruction

1, 8, 9, 10-12 Fill in.

2 Fill in the location of the specific property(s) for which the agreement is signed.

3 Fill in the specific regulated articles to which the agreement applies.

4 Fill in the titles, parts, and subparts.

5 Outline stipulations which apply to the fumigator for each quarantine or regulation affecting the 

fumigator. Make clear to the fumigator that stipulations in the compliance agreement do not preclude 

compliance with other sections of the quarantine or regulations. If space in Block 6 is inadequate for 

listing the stipulations, then write “see Attached Sheets.”

6 Have a responsible official of the fumigator’s sign.

9 Assign a compliance agreement number.

13 Have the PPQ Port Director sign.

14-16 Complete only when State is involved in cooperating with enforcing Federal quarantines.
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-19

Distribution

Table A-3 Distribution of PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement

If: Then:

Compliance agreement affects one work unit 1. GIVE original to the fumigator, and

2. KEEP a copy for port files in the area 

where the fumigator is located

Compliance agreement affects more than 

one work unit

1. GIVE original to the fumigator, and

2. GIVE copies to all work units affected by 

the compliance agreement, and

3. KEEP a copy for port files in the area 

where the fumigator is located
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

A-20 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

Figure A-12 Example of PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

FORM APPROVED - OMB NO. 0579-0102

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

ANIMAL AND PLANT HEALTH INSPECTION SERVICE

PLANT PROTECTION AND QUARANTINE

EMERGENCY ACTION NOTIFICATION

1. PPQ LOCATION

3. NAME AND QUANTITY OF ARTICLE(S) 4. LOCATION OF ARTICLES

5. DESTINATION OF ARTICLES

8. SHIPMENT ID NO.(S)

13. COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

7. NAME OF CARRIER

10. PORT OF LADING 11. DATE OF ARRIVAL

17. AFTER RECEIPT OF THIS NOTIFICATION COMPLETE SPECIFIED ACTION

 WITHIN (Specify No. Hours or No. Days):

18. SIGNATURE OF OFFICER:

 ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT OF EMERGENCY ACTION NOTIFICATION

I hereby acknowledge receipt of the foregoing notification.

SIGNATURE AND TITLE: DATE AND TIME:

19. REVOCATION OF NOTIFICATION

ACTION TAKEN:

SIGNATURE OF OFFICER: DATE:

PPQ FORM 523 (JULY 2002) Previous editions are obsolete.

9. OWNER/CONSIGNEE OF ARTICLES

Name:

Address:

PHONE NO. FAX NO.

SS NO. TAX ID NO.

15. FOREIGN CERTIFICATE NO.

15a. PLACE ISSUED 15b. DATE

Under Sections 411, 412, and 414 of the Plant Protection Act (7 USC 7711, 7712, and 7714) and Sections 10404 through 10407 of the Animal Health Protection Act (7 USC 8303 through 8306), you are hereby notified, as owner or agent of the owner of said carrier, premises, and/or articles, to apply remedial measures for the pest(s), noxious weeds, and or article(s) specified in Item 12, in a manner satisfactory to and under the supervision of an Agriculture Officer. Remedial measures shall be in accordance with the action specified in Item 16 and shall be completed within the time specified in Item 17.

AFTER RECEIPT OF THIS NOTIFICATION, ARTICLES AND/OR CARRIERS HEREIN DESIGNATED MUST NOT BE MOVED EXCEPT AS DIRECTED BY AN AGRICULTURE OFFICER. THE LOCAL OFFICER MAY BE CONTACTED AT:

Should the owner or owner's agent fail to comply with this order within the time specified below, USDA is authorized to recover from the owner or

agent cost of any care, handling, application of remedial measures, disposal, or other action incurred in connection with the remedial action,

destruction, or removal.

6. SHIPPER

12. ID OF PEST(S), NOXIOUS WEEDS, OR ARTICLE(S)

16. ACTION REQUIRED

TREATMENT:

RE-EXPORTATION:

DESTRUCTION:

OTHER:

SERIAL NO.

According to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, no persons are required to respond to a collection of information unless it displays a valid OMB control number. The valid OMB control number for this

information is 0579-0102. The time required to complete this information collection is estimated to average 1 hour per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources,

gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information.

2. DATE ISSUED

14. GROWER NO.

12a. PEST ID NO. 12b. DATE INTERCEPTED
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-21

Purpose

The Emergency Action Notification (EAN) is a document that serves purposes 

for APHIS regulations. When an emergency action must be taken on a 

consignment, this form allows Customs and Border Protection Agriculture 

pecialists (CBPAS) and/or Plant Protection and Quarantine (PPQ) to 

communicate the need for a specific action on a consignment to the interested 

parties. The EAN specifies to the broker, shipper, market owner, or other 

stakeholder the reason(s) why the consignment is being refused and basic 

explanation(s) as to what action is necessary.

The document also serves other critical needs. Use of the EAN information 

assists in determining risks and identifying trends. Through data compilation 

and analysis PPQ will use the information to update regulations, inform trade 

partners of areas of concern in foreign countries, and help with domestic 

emergencies. Targeting is another use for the information. CBPAS will be 

better able to determine which consignments may need closer inspection.

An EAN must be issued from the Agricultural Risk Management System 

(ARM) every time an emergency action is ordered for an agricultural purpose 

in the cargo or express courier environment. Agricultural purposes would be 

those that relate back to a violation of a regulation within the 7 CFR or 9 CFR 

chapters.

Issue an EAN when:

The Agriculture Specialist finds an actionable pest, potential quarantine 

pest, a contaminant, or prohibited product

The Agriculture Specialist needs to record a commercial seizure

The consignment contains non-compliant WPM

The consignment is in the express courier environment (i.e. FedEx, UPS, 

DHL, etc.)

The consignment lacks proper documentation

Do not issue an EAN for the following reasons:

Condition of Entry/Precautionary Treatments—An EAN is not to be 

issued for a consignment requiring treatment as a condition of entry.

Holding a Consignment—An EAN is only for taking immediate action. 

Do not use an EAN as a hold or supplemental hold for a consignment for 

any other reason than immediate treatment.

NOTICE

Do not issue the official EAN as a handwritten document, typed on a manual typewriter, from any local database, or any means of issuance other than the ARM.
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

A-22 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Mail—Do not issue an EAN for any USPS mail. A Mail Interception 

Notification (PPQ 287) must be used for these consignments.

No Inspection—An EAN is only to be issued if a consignment has been 

inspected (either a physical inspection of the goods or a paperwork 

inspection when that is the requirement) and an agricultural problem has 

been found. Do not write an EAN in lieu of inspection.

Other Agencies’ Regulations—EAN's are not to be issued for a violation 

of other agencies regulations. The only regulations that may be cited on 

the EAN are chapters 7 CFR and 9 CFR.

Quality Issues—An EAN is not to be issued for the quality of a 

consignment. If the consignment does not pose a pest risk, do not write 

an EAN.

Selected Animal Products—EAN's are not to be issued on consignments 

of live animals or live animal commodities that are regulated by 

Veterinary Services. Refer to the Animal Product Manual for instructions 

on these products.

Instructions

The instructions in Table A-4 are for initiating an EAN. The ARM electronic 

version of PPQ Form 523 is the only method by which an official EAN may be 

issued. Emergency Action Notifications may not be issued in any other 

format. Fields marked with an asterisk (*) are mandatory fields.

Table A-4 Instructions for Initiating an EAN 

Block Field Name Instructions

1 Issuing Port Select the port in which the EAN is being issued. Please note that some users 

will have multiple locations. If the user is assigned to multiple locations, be sure 

to select the correct location. If the user is not assigned to a port to which he/

she requires access, contact the help desk.

2 Date Issued Enter the date that the EAN was issued.
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-23

3 Name and 

Quantity of 

Manifested 

Article

Article Category*

Article Name*

This block is to determine the commodity of the consignment. Only one 

commodity is allowed to be listed per EAN. Do not list pallets, crates, 

dunnage, etc., as the Name of Article unless they are the actual commodity 

being shipped.

Article Category–Select a category (Animal Product, Plant Product, or 

Miscellaneous). The user must select the appropriate category, as the other 

fields in this block are dependent on it.

Animal Products

Animal Classification–Select the classification of the consignment. The 

classification selected will determine the drop down list for the classification 

category in the next field. See the Animal Products Manual (APM) contents 

page for further clarification.

Classification Category–Select the classification category. The classification 

category will determine if a classification subcategory is required. To decide on 

a classification category see the APM classification selected in the previous 

field.

Classification Subcategory–Select the classification subcategory. This 

information can be found in consignment documentation.

*The drop down lists in this category have come directly from the Animal 

Products Manual. If you need assistance with this menu, see the APM.

Plant Products

This selection is for fresh cut flowers, fresh fruits and vegetables, logs, lumber, 

and propagative materials only. Any processed plant products (mulch, 

handicrafts, potpourri, Chinese teas, etc.) will be found in the Miscellaneous 

Category.

Miscellaneous Products

This category is for all products that do not fit into either Animal Products or 

Plant Products as defined above. Select the category that best fits the 

commodity. If there is not a category that fits your item, please contact the help 

desk, National Coordinator, or Regional Coordinators before continuing. If the 

user selects miscellaneous, a description of the article must be entered. The 

description should be as accurate as the information available. For example, 

brake pads, bolt screws, linen fabric, stuffed toys, etc. if the product is 

agricultural but processed, the user must give an exact description of the 

article. For example, wooden birdhouses with grass roofs, dried whole 

apricots, wood carvings with bark edging, etc.

Article Name–This drop down list has been determined by the user’s previous 

selections. If the user does not find the article name in the drop down list 

please contact the help desk.

Quantity*

Unit of Measure*

Enter the numerical quantity of the consignment. When determining the article 

quantity, use the most specific number. For example, kilograms is a better 

selection than box count when dealing with most produce or meat products, 

but square meter is a better selection for veneer. “Boxes/Crates” may not be 

used if another option is available.

APHIS Permit 

Number

APHIS Permit Number–If the consignment has any kind of APHIS permit, 

enter the number here.

Table A-4 Instructions for Initiating an EAN (continued)

Block Field Name Instructions
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

A-24 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

3 Name and 

Quantity of 

Manifested 

Article 

(continued)

Wood Packing 

Material*

Check the appropriate boxes. If the user selects none or non-compliant, only 

one box may be selected, but if the wood is non-compliant the user may 

choose both non-compliant for timber pest and no markings. If wood is not

marked with an acceptable symbol, then it is considered unmarked.

4 Location of 

Articles*

The location of articles is the place where the consignment is located when it is 

inspected. For example: US Air Warehouse, 123 Airplane Way, Butte, MT 

12345. Each port will have a local drop down list so that users will not have to 

type addresses that have already been added to the system. If using the drop 

down list, ensure that the correct location has been selected. If the location that 

the user needs to select is not on the default list, it may be added by port users 

and supervisors by selecting “Set Defaults.” All locations must contain the 

name of the facility, the physical address, city, state, and zip code.

5 Delivery 

Address of 

Articles

Name* Enter the name of the company/individual accepting the goods as destination 

of the articles (delivery address). Do not use the broker as destination. Do not

automatically assume that the consignee address and delivery address is the 

same.

Address where the 

articles will be 

delivered*

Enter the address where the goods are intended to be delivered including 

street address, city, state (within the US), country, and zip/postal code.

If the consignment has multiple destinations, the officer should include the 

destination to which the majority of the consignment is being delivered. If the 

consignments will be distributed evenly then choose the location to which the 

product could potentially cause the greatest risk. When determining the 

address to select, the officer should use his/her best judgment. Additional 

delivery addresses should be entered into the “Comments” field on page 4 of 

the data entry screens. Questions regarding this should be directed to the 

officer’s first line supervisor.

6 Shipper Name* Enter the name of the shipper.

Address of 

Shipper*

Enter the address of the shipper including street address, city, and country. 

Enter state/province and postal code, if known. This must be a foreign 

address.

7 Name of 

Carrier

Name* Enter the name of the carrier company. For example: Northwest Airlines, M/V 

Panama, Canadian Pacific, Yellow Freight. On the land borders, independent 

trucks frequently cross. If the truck is independent, use the name of the owner 

of the tractor. Do not enter vehicle numbers in this field. Do not enter 

abbreviations for the name of carrier including airline codes.

Flight/Voyage Trip 

Number*

Enter the appropriate number based on pathway. For trucks, use the trailer 

license number.

8

Consignment 

Identification 

Numbers

Airway Bill, Bill of 

Lading, PAPS 

Code*

Enter the bill of lading number. If the cargo is border cargo and does not have 

a bill number, use the PAPS code. This is a mandatory field. Every 

consignment will have this number at the time that consignment is 

presented for inspection.

Tariff Number* Enter the 10-character tariff number as provided in ACS or ATS. This is 

indicated in ATS as the HTS number. Do not add any punctuation, numbers 

only. If the user cannot find the tariff number in ATS or ACS, then refer to the 

U.S. International Trade Commission Harmonized Tariff Schedule website.

Table A-4 Instructions for Initiating an EAN (continued)

Block Field Name Instructions
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-25

8

Consignment 

Identification 

Numbers 

(continued)

Customs Entry 

Number*

Enter the Customs Entry Number. Do not add any punctuation, numbers only.

*If the entry has not yet been filed at the time of inspection, enter “Not Yet 

Filed.”

*If the consignment is of low value (under $2,000 as of 09/2006) it is 

considered informal and no entry number will ever be processed, enter 

“Informal.”

Do not enter N/A or Not Available. If the user doesn’t have an entry 

number other than listed above, describe why.

Container Number Enter the complete container number. This is usually a 4-letter code followed 

by 5 or 6 numbers. Include the check digit.

ISPM Markings Enter the complete information from the ISPM Marking (IPPC wood marking). If 

the officer finds a pest in marked wood, this is a required field.

Other Identifying 

Number

This field is available to include another number that there is either not a field 

for or can be used for a number collected for port policy. Examples include 

invoice number, consignment number, etc. If the pathway is air cargo, the 

House Airway Bill must be entered here.

Other Identifying 

Number 

Description

If the user enters an “Other Identifying Number” then this field must be 

completed. The entry should clearly identify what the “Other Identifying 

Number” is. Do not use abbreviations in the description other than HAWB for 

“House Airway Bill.”

9 Consignee of 

Articles

Name* Enter the name of the Consignee. This will be a company name most of the 

time. If the consignment owner is an individual, enter the name of the 

individual. 

The Consignee is the owner of the consignment. The broker is usually not the 

consignee.

Address of 

Consignee*

Enter the street address of the consignee. Street address, city, and country 

must be entered. Enter the state/province and postal code, if known.

Phone and Fax 

Numbers

Enter the phone and fax numbers of consignee, if known.

10 Port of 

Lading

City* Enter the foreign city where the consignment was last loaded onto a vessel, 

plane, rail car, or vehicle.

Country* Enter the foreign country where the consignment was last loaded onto a 

vessel, plane, rail car, or vehicle.

11 Date of Arrival* Enter the date that the consignment entered the port.

Table A-4 Instructions for Initiating an EAN (continued)

Block Field Name Instructions
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

A-26 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

12 Reason for EAN* Select the reason(s) that the EAN is being issued. The following is a guideline 

to help determine the reason.

Pest - If a pest or disease is found on, in, or with a consignment. Do not enter 

a tentative ID. A national AQAS Pest ID number will be required.

Lacks Documentation or Certification - Consignment is missing 

documentation or the documentation is not acceptable. Documents may 

include, but are not limited to health certificates, FSIS paperwork, permits, 

phytosanitary certificates, etc.

Contaminant (seed) - Consignment is found to have seed or seed heads that 

are contaminants, but not part of the manifested commodity. A national AQAS 

Pest ID number is required.

Contaminant (other) - Consignment is found to have any contaminant that 

does not need to be sent to an identifier. Examples include blood, soil, manure, 

etc.

Lacking ISPM15 Marking - Consignment was found to have unmarked or 

improperly marked WPM.

Prohibited Animal Product - Consignment was found to be prohibited by 9 

CFR regulation.

Prohibited Product - Consignment was found to be prohibited by 7 CFR 

regulation.

12a Pest ID Number* Enter the Pest ID number generated by the Pest ID system. This number must

be provided by the identifier or an APHIS employee acting on behalf of an 

identifier. If pest or seed contaminant is selected as the reason for the EAN, 

then the user will have to enter the 17-digit Pest ID number. If the user does 

not have the Pest ID number, the EAN may be saved and printed; however, 

the EAN cannot be closed until this information has been added. The system 

will not accept local pest ID numbers in any form.

12b Date Intercepted* Enter the date that the reason for writing the EAN was found. This date must

match the date that is entered on the Pest ID record (309A).

13 Country of Origin Enter country of origin. The country of origin is not necessarily the country from 

which it is being shipped. The country of origin is the location where the 

commodity was grown, manufactured, or produced. For example, a 

consignment of handicrafts might be shipped from Canada, but were made in 

China. China is the country of origin. Canada is the country of lading.

14 Grower/Facility 

Number

Enter the number of the foreign facility in which the product was processed, or 

the foreign grower number. This number is frequently found on the invoice. It 

may also be available in ATS.

15 Foreign Sanitary 

Certificate Status*

Select the status of the certificate. If a certificate is not required, continue to 

Block 16.

15a Foreign Sanitary 

Certificate Number

Enter the certificate number.

15b Place Issued Enter City/Country where the certificate was issued. This will be a foreign 

address.

Date Issued Enter the date on which the certificate was issued.

Contact 

Number

Phone Number* Enter the phone number at which the user issuing the EAN can be reached.

Table A-4 Instructions for Initiating an EAN (continued)

Block Field Name Instructions
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-27

16 Treatment 

Schedule

Using the drop down menu, if treatment is available, select the appropriate 

treatment schedule. The treatment schedule must be provided by a PPQ 

Identifier or PPQ employee acting on behalf of an Identifier. CBPAI should not

select a treatment schedule that has not been approved by a PPQ Identifier or 

PPQ employee acting on behalf of an Identifier.

Explanation Text* Select the explanation text that best matches the scenario for this EAN. This 

explanation tells the acceptor of the EAN two things: 1) what the problem is, 

and 2) how to correct the situation. This is where the options are given. Do not 

use the “check boxes” printed on the form.

The identifier will verify Federally Recognized State Managed Phytosanitary 

(FRSMP) Program status and/or FRSMP options. If the pest is a FRSMP Program pest, then movement may be restricted.

Phyto-Fumigation 

Disclaimer

If fumigation is an option, the phyto disclaimer must be selected.

CFR Regulation* Select the CFR under which the consignment is being regulated. More than 

one CFR can be selected. To look up a CFR, refer to the Code of Federal 

Regulations. 

Seal Text If the consignment must be transferred to another location under seal, select 

the text that is appropriate to the scenario. If the consignment is being sent for 

treatment by PPQ, the quantity of the consignment being transferred 

(preferable in box count) must be included.

NOTE: If the PPQ Officer supervising the treatment does not know the quantity 

to be treated, the consignment will not be treated until that information is 

provided from CBP.

Comments If the user has any additional comments to make, they should be recorded in 

the Comment field. Do not repeat information that has previously been 

provided. Do not enter any pest name in this location.

It may be helpful on a local level to enter a local ID number or broker 

information here.

NOTE: These comments will print on the paper EAN.

Table A-4 Instructions for Initiating an EAN (continued)

Block Field Name Instructions

If the pest is:

And the commodity 

is: Then:

A FRSMP 

Program pest

Arriving in a FRSMP 

Program State for that 

pest

Use one of the following options:

 Treat

 Export

 Destroy

 Other

If "Other" is selected, then follow 

requirements to "Re-direct and 

Avoid" the FRSMP Program 

State

Arriving in other than a 

FRSMP Program State 

for that pest

Use option "Other" and notify the 

broker/importer of movement 

restriction to "Avoid" FRSMP 

Program States.

Not as above No FRSMP action is required.
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

A-28 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

( * denotes a mandatory field)

Special Instructions for Infested Vessels Sailing Foreign Without 

Treatment

When an infested vessel is allowed to sail foreign without treatment, type the 

following statement in the “Comments” field on the EAN:

17 After Receipt of 

Notification 

Complete Specified 

Action Within:

The user should select the amount of time allowed before treatment begins. 

For example, if the consignment is to be re-exported then the user should 

select the amount of time before the consignment must be on the conveyance 

back to country of origin.

18 Name of Inspecting 

Officer

Enter the name of the officer who inspected the consignment.

Do not enter the name of the person entering the data unless it is the same 

individual.

Acknowledgment of 

Receipt of 

Notification

Name of Recipient Enter the first and last name of the person accepting the EAN. The user must

have this person print their name next to the signature. The only acceptable 

entry in this field is the first and last name of the person accepting the EAN. Do 

not enter “On File.”

Title of Recipient Enter the title of the person accepting and signing the EAN. Preferably enter 

name of their company as well. Example: Dispatcher, American Shipping.

Date Signed Enter the date the EAN was signed and accepted.

19 Revocation 

Notification

Reason for Action 

Taken*

Enter the reason that the EAN was written. This should match the data 

entered in block 12.

19 Revocation 

Notification 

(continued)

Action Taken* Enter the action that was actually taken. Do not enter an action unless that 

action was taken.

If the action was “Treatment,” select the treatment type.

If the action was “Other,” enter what action was taken in the “Additional 

Remarks” section. Be descriptive in the narrative. If FRSMP option “Avoid” was 

selected, then the additional comment should read “Broker/importer has been 

notified.”

Was the Article 

Mislabeled, 

Misrepresented, or 

Concealed?*

Select yes or no.

Form 518 

Reference Number

If the above answer is yes, then a 518 number must be entered.

Additional Remarks If the user has additional information that was not previously recorded, it 

should be entered here. This field is required if Action Taken-Treatment Type is 

equal to “Other.” This field will not print at any time. These are private 

comments visible only to system users.

Signature of 

Officer*

Enter the name of the officer who completed or monitored the treatment, 

received confirmation of destruction, or received confirmation of re-exportation. 

Do not enter the data entry clerk’s name unless it is the same officer as 

described above. This may be a different user than originally opened the EAN.

Date Action was 

Completed*

Enter the date that the final action was completed.

Table A-4 Instructions for Initiating an EAN (continued)

Block Field Name Instructions
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-29

“The requirements of the Emergency Action Notification are suspended 

upon condition that this vessel shall leave the territorial limits of the United 

States within [list number] of hours after receipt of this notice. This vessel 

shall not re-enter any port in the United States unless it has been treated in 

accordance with the notification and certified by the person who applied 

the treatment. If the certificate is not presented to the CBP officer when 

arriving at a port in the United States, or if the CBP officer for any other 

reason is not satisfied that the infestation has been eliminated, the 

notification shall immediately become effective and treatment required.”

Distribution

Because PPQ Form 523 is now electronic, distribution as in the past, on every 

EAN, is unnecessary. The procedure has been that the signing party, who is 

responsible for the cargo, receives a hard copy of the notification. The hard 

copy is necessary to communicate to the consignee or shipper, and also gives 

the broker time to review the options and select one. The CBP contact number 

is listed as well.

Routinely sending the EAN to any other parties is not required. Sharing 

courtesy copies between PPQ and CBP should continue for local, regional, or 

national projects. Ports may also keep their own hard copies.
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 449-R, Temperature Recording Calibration Report

A-30 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

PPQ Form 449-R, Temperature Recording Calibration Report

Use the PPQ Form 449-R to document the calibration of temperature sensors 

for in transit cold treatment in vessels.

Figure A-13 Example of PPQ Form 449-R, Temperature Recording Calibration Report
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 449-R, Temperature Recording Calibration Report

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-31

Instructions for Completing PPQ Form 449-R

Table A-5 Instructions for Completing PPQ Form 449-R

Block Instructions

1 Verify that the vessel name agrees with the name on the S&T-TMT intransit cold treatment website.

2 PPQ Officer’s duty station

3 Date of inspection

4 Place of inspection

5 Verify that the hull number and dockyard agrees with the S&T-TMT intransit cold treatment website.

6 The IMO number is a unique identification number for every vessel engaged in commerce and provides a complete history of the vessel. Verify that the IMO number agrees with the S&T-TMT intransit 

cold treatment website. If this information is not on the S&T-TMT website, collect the number from the 

ship’s officer and record in this block.

7 Verify that the flag (country of registry) agrees with the 3-letter code on the S&T-TMT intransit cold 

treatment website.

8 Name of Captain, Chief Engineer, Reefer Engineer, or First Officer

9 Name of the shipping line owner or agent. Verify with S&T-TMT intransit cold treatment website.

10a, b Verify the make and model agree with the information on the website. If the information differs from 

that listed on the website, gather as much information as possible from the vessel’s crew regarding 

when (date) instrument was changed, and whether or not they have any documentation from S&TTMT approving the changes. Record this additional information in the remarks section.

11a, b Multiple recorders may be used. Record the make and model.

12 Verify that the sensor and cable locations match the diagram on the S&T-TMT website.

13 Verify that the sensors and cables are labeled correctly and in accordance with the sensor diagram.

14 Confirm that air sensors are capable of reaching the floor and fruit sensors are capable of reaching all 

areas of the compartment from their location along the walls (each should reach past the center line of 

the compartment).

15 Do the sensors respond appropriately when hand-warmed?

16 TEST ALL AIR AND PULP SENSORS. If officer suspects a compartment to be a hanging deck, test 

any sensors located in the space and make a notation in this block and in the narrative.

17 Record names of all USDA officials participating in the inspection, indicating lead officer for the report. 

Include any other information deemed appropriate.

18 Include as much information as possible.

19 Company email.

20 Company phone number.

21 Signature of Lead Inspector.

22 Date the report is completed.
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or Treatment

A-32 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or 

Treatment

Figure A-14 Example of PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or Treatment

According to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, no persons are required to respond to a collection of information unless it displays a valid OMB control num ber. The

valid OMB control numbers for this information collection are 0579-0190 and 017 3. The time required to complete this information collection is estimated to a verage 

.5 hours per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completi ng and

reviewing the collection of information.

OMB APPROVED

0579-0190 and 0173

U.S DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

ANIMAL AND PLANT HEALTH INSPECTION SERVICE

PLANT PROTECTION AND QUARANTINE

1. CERTIFICATE NO. 2. COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

3. DATE LOADED 4. FOREIGN PORT OF EXPORT FOREIGN SITE CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

 AND/OR TREATMENT

5. CARRIER IDENTIFICATION 6. U.S. PORT OF ENTRY

7. SHIPPER (Name and Address - Include Zip Code) 8. CONSIGNEE (Name and Address - Include Zip Code)

10. NO. CONTAINERS

(Identify as box, sack,

1/2 Bruce box, flat,

cardboard box, etc.)

11. CONTAINER 

IDENTIFICATION MARKS 9. COMMODITY

12. LOCATION OF INSPECTION AND/OR TREATMENT 13. DATE

This certifies that the shipment described above has been inspected and/or treated in accordance with agricultural requirements for

entry into the United States.

14. SIGNATURE OF PLANT PROTECTION AND QUARANTINE OFFICER 15. DATE ISSUED

PPQ FORM 203

(JUL 2007)
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or Treatment

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-33

Purpose

PPQ Form 203 verifies that PPQ has precleared the commodity it accompanies 

(either through inspection or treatment) at the foreign site.

An electronic copy of this form is available in the APHIS-PPQ forms library.

Instructions

The Agriculture Specialist at Port of Entry (POE) examines this form when a 

precleared commodity arrives at the port.

The APHIS officer completes this form at the foreign site where the 

commodity is inspected or treated. The form may either be handwritten in ink 

or typed. Use Table A-6 to decide what paperwork should be presented upon 

the arrival of a precleared commodity.

Verify that any seals listed on the form are still intact. Also, confirm that the 

information and conditions described on the form agree with the cargo 

manifest, invoice, or any other CBP entry documents. Contact QPAS at 301-

851-2312 if any of the following occurs:

Information on the PPQ Form 203 does not match the entry documents

Table A-6 Determine Paperwork to Be Presented upon Arrival of a Precleared Commodity

If arriving from: And by: Then the exporter or the exporter’s agent must provide the 

following paperwork:

Australia, Japan, Korea, 

or the Republic of South 

Africa

 Original (yellow or white) PPQ Form 203 for the commodity

 Copy of the master PPQ Form 203 or original Phytosanitary 

Certificate, specifying the number of units shipped or 

remaining in cold storage from the master PPQ Form 203

Chile Vessel  Original Chilean Phytosanitary Certificate

 E-mail notification of the cargo on board and its status from 

the IS Region II office to the POE

NOTE: No PPQ Form 203 will accompany the commodity

Air  Original (yellow or white) PPQ Form 203 for the commodity

 Original Chilean Phytosanitary Certificate

India or Thailand  Original (yellow or white) PPQ Form 203 for the commodity

 Original Indian or Thailand Phytosanitary Certificate

New Zealand  Original PPQ Form 203 for the commodity, or a copy of the 

master 203

 If a master PPQ Form 203 is submitted, it must be 

accompanied by an original “Details of Loading Certificate”, 

which is a New Zealand Ministry of Agriculture form 

specifying the number of units shipped or remaining in cold 

storage from the master PPQ Form 203.

Other than a country 

listed in the cells above

 Original (yellow or white) PPQ Form 203 for the commodity
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or Treatment

A-34 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

PPQ Form 203 is missing

Seals are broken

Instructions for Issuing Officer

The APHIS Issuing Officer will complete PPQ Form 203, as follows:

1. Type the form or write in ink.

2. Number the certificate using the numbering system assigned by the Area 

Office with responsibility for the program.

3. If the commodity was treated, mark the form with the plant’s approved 

stamp.

4. Fill in the remaining, self-explanatory information.

Distribution

Issuing Officer

The APHIS Issuing Officer will distribute PPQ Form 203 using Table A-7 as a 

guide.

NOTICE

Refer to the Agricultural Commodity Import Requirements (ACIR) database for the 

commodity being shipped. The commodity may be undergoing in-transit cold 

treatment. If it is, you need to ensure that the commodity meets the time and 

temperature requirements.

Table A-7 Distribution of PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection 

and/or Treatment

If: Then:

Original and first copy GIVE to the exporter (the original must be presented at 

the first POE)

Copy SEND to the Area Office, IS, with responsibility for the 

program

Copy RETAIN by the certifying APHIS officer

Copy (through the office of 

cooperator)1

1 This does not apply to all programs. Check the technical packet or with the IS Field Office in 

Charge.

FAX a copy to the U.S. Port of Arrival

Copy ATTACH to trip report
Appendix A Forms

PPQ Form 556, In Transit Cold Treatment Clearance Report

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-35

PPQ Form 556, In Transit Cold Treatment Clearance Report

Figure A-15 Example of PPQ Form 556, In Transit Cold Treatment Clearance Report
Appendix A Forms

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

A-36 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

A worksite specific respiratory protection plan is mandatory. Refer to 

Figure A-16 through Figure A-23 for a generic template. Authorized users can 

also refer to the Safety and Health Sharepoint site for other worksite plans. 

Contact your FO Safety Manager for a site specific plan.

Figure A-16 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 1 of 8)

MANDATORY WORKSITE SPECIFIC RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PLAN

TEMPLATE

APHIS /PPQ FIELD OPERATIONS

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM

COMPLIANCE WITH THIS PUBLICATION IS MANDATORY

This operation instruction (OI) contains information and guidance for proper respirator selection, use, care 

and maintenance. Template meets OSHA 29 CFR 190.134 Respiratory Protection requirements to 

establish worksite specific plan. 

DIRECTIONS:

1.1. Review Policy

1.2. Input your Program management position in accordance with identified font in black.

1.3. May edit or add specific procedures with approval of PPQ FO Safety and Health.

DOCUMENT APPROVAL:

1.4. Approval by Local Manager with signature/date

1.5. Approval by State Plant Health Director with signature/date

1.6. Approval by PPQ FO Safety Manager with signature/date

RECORDKEEPING:

1.7. Approved/signed copy (PDF file) of original must be sent to PPQ FO Safety Health Office.

1.8. Copy will be kept on Site, readily available for review. 

- http://sp.we.aphis.gov/PPQ/fieldops/safehealth/SitePages/Respiratory%20Protection.aspx
Appendix A Forms

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-37

Figure A-17 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 2 of 8)

TEMPLATE FOR SITE USE

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM

COMPLIANCE WITH THIS PUBLICATION IS MANDATORY

Approved By: NAME OF SPHD

This operation instruction (OI) contains information and guidance for proper respirator selection, use, care 

and maintenance. 

REFERENCES:

29 CFR 1910.134, Respiratory Protection

USDA APHIS Safety and Health Manual, Chap 11

GENERAL:

The use of respiratory protection should be a last resort. Substituting less hazardous materials or 

processes, eliminating hazards through engineering changes or controls, isolating hazardous operations, or 

providing administrative controls shall be considered before the decision is made to protect workers with 

respirators.

No personnel may wear a respirator unless required or recommended by Site Supervisor in conjunction 

with advice from Safety and Occupational Health Manager/Specialist.

CATEGORIES OF RESPIRATOR USAGE: Site Supervisor shall identify the location and use of all 

respirators worn by employees. 

Operation/Process

Type of 

Respirator

Cartridge

Category 

of Use

Type Change out 

Frequency

Fumigation Process

Methyl Bromide

Readings > 5ppm

Full Face (SCBA) n/a n/a Required

Fumigation Process

Methyl bromide

Reading >1- < =4 ppm

APR ( Half Face)

or

APR (Full Face)

Organic 

Vapor/Acid 

Gas/P100 

cartridges

-Change 

immediately after 

each use or if 

air is restricted 

when breathing

Required

Medical Clearance: Medical evaluation and clearance is required before performing tasks requiring use of 

respirators in order to determine an employee is physically able to do the work and utilize the equipment 

medically (ref. APHIS Safety and Health Manual, Chap 11, Sec 11.3.4, Para F) or (new ref. APHIS Safety 

and Health Manual, Chap 7, Section 9, Dec. 2010). The evaluation must be performed by a physician or 
Appendix A Forms

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

A-38 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Figure A-18 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 3 of 8)

licensed health care professional. Final evaluation approval shall be determined by an authorized APHIS 

medical provider. The respirator user's medical status should be reviewed every year or as certifying 

physician determines. The medical evaluation should include, as a minimum, an evaluation to identify 

pulmonary and cardiovascular impairment.

Training: All personnel will receive initial respiratory protection training prior to wearing a respirator. 

Periodic training will be accomplished by a work place supervisor annually. Documentation of the initial 

and annual training will be documented on SF form 182 or equivalent. A copy of the training plan is 

located in attachment 2.

Fit-Testing: After instruction, a quantitative fit-testing will be conducted. Contact Candace Robl for 

assistance at (941) 359-3281. Fit Test documentation will be recorded and maintained by Site Supervisor. 

Employees are only allowed to wear respirators for which they have been fit tested/trained. A respirator 

fit-test shall be carried out for each wearer of a tight-fitting respirator at least once every 12 months. A 

new fit test will be accomplished when a worker experiences a change in physical condition that could 

affect respirator fit (e.g., weight change of more than 20 pounds, facial scarring, dental changes cosmetic 

surgery, disfigurement, ... etc.).

Program Compliance:

Site Supervisor: Supervisors will be familiar with the training/fit-testing status of all respirator wearers. 

SF form 182 or computerized equivalent and 429 data base shall be used to record and track the date of the 

most current certification. Supervisors will ensure personnel on the respirator protection program wear the 

correct respiratory protection for which they have been fit-tested and trained prior to utilization.

Individuals: Individuals provided respiratory protection will use it according to the instructions and 

training received. Report to their supervisor any change in medical status, which may impact their ability to 

safely wear respiratory protection. Inspect, clean, and maintain any respiratory protection device issued to 

them for their individual use. Wear only respiratory protection (mfg, make, model and size) for which they 

have received fit-testing and training, and only for the tasks specified.

User Seal Check Procedures:

Workers who use tight-fitting respirators will perform positive and negative pressure checks to ensure 

adequate seal is achieved each time the respirator is put on.

Positive Pressure Check: Close off exhalation valve and exhale gently into the face piece. The face fit is 

considered satisfactory if a slight positive pressure can be built up inside the face piece without any 

evidence of outward leakage of air at the seal. For most respirators this method of leak testing requires the 

wearer to first remove the exhalation valve cover before closing off the exhalation valve and then carefully 

replacing it after the test.

Negative Pressure Check: Close off inlet opening of the canister or cartridge(s) by covering with palm of 

the hand(s) or by replacing the filter seal(s), inhale gently so that the face piece collapses slightly, and hold 

breath for ten seconds. The design of the inlet opening of some cartridges cannot be effectively covered 

with the palm of the hand; in those circumstances, covering the inlet opening of the cartridge with a thin 

latex or nitrile glove can perform this test. If face piece remains in its slightly collapsed condition and no 

inward leakage of air is detected, tightness of the respirator is considered satisfactory.

Respirator Sealing Problems:

A head covering which passes between the sealing surface of a tight-fitting respirator face piece and the 

wearer’s face shall not be used.
Appendix A Forms

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-39

Figure A-19 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 4 of 8)

Wearing of protective equipment used by the wearer shall not interfere with seal of the respirator. 

Personnel who are not clean-shaven or on a shaving waiver will not be permitted to wear a tight fitting 

respirator. If personnel are on a shaving waiver they are disqualified from the tight fitting respirator 

program until they can shave again.

Vision:

When a respirator user must wear corrective lenses, the wearer must use protective spectacles, goggles, 

face shields or other eye and face protective devices such that the item shall be fitted to provide good 

vision and shall be worn in such a manner as not to interfere with the proper seal of the respirator.

Spectacles with straps or temple bars that pass through the sealing surface of either negative or positive 

pressure, tight-fitting, full-face piece respirators shall not be used.

Contact lenses will not be worn with respirators in a fuel systems repair area.

If an individual who must wear corrective lenses uses spectacle inserts with a full-face piece respirator, 

then the government will purchase the spectacle inserts for the respirator, using a prescription provided by 

the user.

Care, Inspection, and Maintenance of Respirators:

General Discussion: Each individual issued a respirator is responsible for its primary maintenance and 

care. Supplied Air shall be of high purity and tested according to 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(1)(ii) . Copy 

of results of breathing air shall be received form vendor and kept by supervisor or designated 

Respiratory Program Manager.

Care:

Cleaning and sanitizing: Respirators issued to an individual shall be cleaned and sanitized at the end of 

each day in which the respirator is used. Each respirator shall be cleaned and sanitized with MSA Cleaner 

Sanitizer II before and after each use. (See Attachment 1)

Storage: Respirators shall be stored in a manner that will protect them against chemical agents and 

physical agents such as vibration, shock, sunlight, heat, extreme cold, excessive moisture, or damaging 

chemicals. Respirators shall be stored to prevent distortion of rubber or other elastomeric parts. 

Respirators shall not be stored in such places as lockers and toolboxes unless they are protected from 

contamination, distortion, and damage. 

Inspection: The user shall inspect the respirator immediately before each use to ensure it is in proper 

working condition. After cleaning and sanitizing, each respirator shall be inspected to determine if it is in 

proper working condition, needs replacement of parts, needs repairs, or should be discarded. Air supplied 

respirators will be inspected each month. Respirators, which do not meet applicable inspection criteria, 

shall be immediately removed from service. Respirator inspection shall include a check for tightness of 

connections; for the condition of the respiratory inlet covering, head harness, valves, connecting tubes, 

harness assemblies, hoses, filters, cartridges and for the proper functioning of regulators, alarms, and other 

warning systems. Each rubber or other elastomeric part shall be inspected for pliability and signs of 

deterioration. The breathing air system shall be inspected to ensure it is fully charged prior to use 

according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Maintenance:

Only personnel trained in proper respirator maintenance and assembly shall do replacement of parts or 

repairs.
Appendix A Forms

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

A-40 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Figure A-20 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 5 of 8)

Replacement parts shall be used only as designated for specific respirators. 

Respiratory Documentation and Respirator Recordkeeping:

Site Supervisor establish and retain written information regarding medical evaluation, fit testing, respirator 

training. Itemized PPE maintenance/care/cleaning and appropriate respirator cartridge/filter change-out 

schedule shall be documented and retained. The documentation shall include User/respirator 

model/cartridge type/change-out date/cleaning date/initials shall be readily available. The respirator itself 

shall have a change-out date incorporated on the outside of each cartridge/filter which matches the latest 

documentation entry.

Print Name / signature

POSITION or RESPONSIBLE SUPERVISOR

Attachments:

1. Respirator Cleaning Procedures

2. Respiratory Protection Shop Specific Training 

3. Voluntary use of Respirator-Where Respirators are Not Required

Approved/Disapproved

Signature________________________________________Date_____________

Local Director/Manager

Signature________________________________________Date_____________

State Plant Health Director 

Signature________________________________________Date____________

 Safety and Health Office 

 
Appendix A Forms

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-41

Figure A-21 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 6 of 8)

Attachment 1

RESPIRATOR CLEANING PROCEDURES

The following procedure is recommended for cleaning and disinfecting respirators:

1. Remove any filters, cartridges, canisters, or communication devices.

2. Wash face piece and breathing tube in a cleaner-disinfectant solution. Use a soft brush to facilitate 

dirt removal.

3. Use MSA Cleaner Sanitizer II for proper sanitizing of respirators.

4. Rinse completely in clean, warm, water, which is less than or equal to 120 degrees F.

5. Air-dry in a clean area.

6. Clean other respirator parts as recommended by the manufacturer.

7. Inspect valves, head straps, and other parts; replace defective parts with new ones.

8. Insert new filters, cartridges, or canisters periodically as specified by the manufacturer; make sure 

seal is tight.

9. Place in plastic bag or other closed container for storage.

10. Document cleaning date, respirator model and user for recordkeeping.
Appendix A Forms

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

A-42 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Figure A-22 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 7 of 8)

Attachment 2

SHOP SPECIFIC TRAINING LESSON PLAN

Respirator Requirement (Type and number of RP must be the same. Change to update for local 

work unit)

This work center has a requirement for the use of XX different respirators.

List required respirators.

Why is a respirator required?

IAW USDA, PPQ Treatment Manual dated 1 Mar 2006 respirators are required when using 

various fumigants during the following processes: Installing the exhaust system, opening the tarplin

for aeration, removing the tarpaulin if measured levels of fumigant are above 5 ppm and any time 

during the aeration process when a risk of exposure to concentration above 5 ppm exists. This 

includes any time the concentration is unknown.

Confined space incinerator inspection maintenance, cleaning and inspection of propagated material 

shall require respirator use from possible unknown residual chemical exposure. 

What are the potential acute and chronic health effects of exposure to the following material(s)?:

Headache, fatigue, skin irritation, loss of appetite, experience shortness of breath, dizziness, 

unconsciousness, central nervous system depression, fever and death.

Weight of Respirators:

List weight of required respirators.

List Duration of Use. 

List Frequency of Use. 

List Expected Physical Work Effort. 

List Additional Required PPE. 

List Temperature/Humidity Extremes. 

Administrative Controls.
Appendix A Forms

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual A-43

Figure A-23 Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template (page 8 of 8)

Attachment 3

Voluntary use of Respirator-Where Respirators are Not Required

APHIS may provide respirators at the request of employees if the Agency determines the respirator will not 

in itself create a hazard. APHIS has determined disposable respirators will not be used when performing 

PPQ plant inspection and incinerator duties. Disposable respirators do not protect against possible 

contamination of pesticides. Disposable respirators will only protect against particulates at a given 

efficiency rate and size. At a minimum, half face and or full face APR respirators with combination 

VOC/HEPA cartridge shall be used when suspect possible unknown contaminates.
Appendix A Forms

Worksite Specific Respiratory Protection Plan—Template

A-44 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66
08/2012-79 Treatment Manual B-1

Appendix

B Appendix B

Coast Guard Regulations

This Appendix contains information reprinted from 46CFR, October 1, 2011

Title 46—Shipping

Chapter 1—Coast Guard, Dept. of Transportation

Part 147A—Interim Regulations for Shipboard Fumigation

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

General

Sec. 147A.1 Purpose.

Sec. 147A.3 Applicability.

Sec. 147A.5 General requirement.

Sec. 147A.6 Right of Appeal.

Sec. 147A.7 Definitions.

Sec. 147A.9 Persons in charge of fumigation and the vessel; designation.

Sec. 147A.10 Notice to Captain of the Port.

Before Fumigation

Sec. 147A.11 Person in charge of fumigation; before fumigation.

Sec. 147A.13 Person in charge of the vessel, before fumigation.

During Fumigation

Sec. 147A.21 Person in charge of fumigation; during fumigation.

Sec. 147A.23 Person in charge of vessel; during fumigation.

Sec. 147A.25 Entry.

After Ventilation

Sec. 147A.31 Removal of fumigation material and warning signs.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FLAMMABLE FUMIGANTS

Sec. 147A.41 Person in charge of fumigation; flammable fumigants.

Sec. 147A.43 Other sources of ignition; flammable fumigants.

Authority: 46U.S.C. 5103; Department of Homeland Security Delegation, No. 

0170.1.

Source: CGD 74-144, 39 FR 32998, Sept. 13, 1974, unless otherwise noted.
Appendix B Coast Guard Regulations

General

B-2 Treatment Manual 08/2012-79

General

Sec. 147A.1 Purpose.

The purpose of this part is to prescribe the requirements for shipboard 

fumigation that are critical for the health and safety of the crew and any other 

person who is on board a vessel during fumigation. These are interim rules 

pending further study and promulgation of comprehensive regulations on 

shipboard fumigation.

Sec. 147A.3 Applicability.

This part prescribes the rules for shipboard fumigation on vessels to which 49 

CFR parts 171-179 apply under 49 CFR 176.5.

Sec. 147A.5 General requirement.

No person may cause or authorize shipboard fumigation contrary to the rules in 

this part.

Sec. 147A.6 Right of Appeal.

Any person directly affected by a decision or action taken under this part, by or 

on behalf of the Coast Guard, may appeal therefrom in accordance with 

subpart 1.03 of this chapter.

Sec. 147A.7 Definitions.

As used in this part:

(a) Qualified person means a person who has experience with the particular 

fumigant or knowledge of its properties and is familiar with fumigant detection 

equipment and procedures, or an applicator who is certified by the 

Environmental Protection Agency if his certification covers the fumigant that 

is used.

(b) Fumigant means a substance or mixture of substances that is a gas or is 

rapidly or progressively transformed to the gaseous state though some 

nongaseous or particulate matter may remain in the space that is fumigated.

(c) Fumigation means the application of a fumigant on board a vessel to a 

specific treatment space.

Sec. 147A.9 Persons in charge of fumigation and the vessel; 

designation.

(a) The person, including any individual, firm, association, partnership, or 

corporation, that is conducting a fumigation operation shall designate a person 

in charge of fumigation for each operation.
Appendix B Coast Guard Regulations

Before Fumigation

08/2012-79 Treatment Manual B-3

(b) The operator of each vessel shall designate a person in charge of the vessel 

for each fumigation operation.

Sec. 147A.10 Notice to Captain of the Port.

Unless otherwise authorized by the Captain of the Port, at least 24 hours before 

fumigation the operator of the vessel shall notify the Coast Guard Captain of 

the Port for the area where the vessel is to be fumigated, of the time and place 

of the fumigation, and the name of the vessel that is to be fumigated.

Before Fumigation

Sec. 147A.11 Person in charge of fumigation; before 

fumigation.

(a) The person in charge of fumigation shall notify the person in charge of the 

vessel of:

(1) The space that is to be fumigated;

(2) The name, address, and emergency telephone number of the fumigation 

company;

(3) The dates and times of fumigation;

(4) The characteristics of the fumigant;

(5) The spaces that are determined to be safe for occupancy paragraph 

(b)(1)(i) of this section;

(6) The maximum allowable concentration of fumigant in spaces, if any, that 

are determined to be safe for occupancy under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this 

section;

(7) The symptoms of exposure to the fumigant; and

(8) Emergency first aid treatment for exposure to the fumigant.

(b) The person in charge of fumigation shall ensure that:

(1) A marine chemist or other qualified person who has knowledge of and 

experience in shipboard fumigation evaluates the vessel’s construction and 

configuration and determines:

(i) Which spaces, if any, are safe for occupancy during fumigation; and
Appendix B Coast Guard Regulations

Before Fumigation

B-4 Treatment Manual 08/2012-79

(ii) The intervals that inspections must be made under Sec. 147A.21(a)(1);

(2) No persons or domestic animals are in the space that is to be fumigated 

or the spaces that are designated as unsafe for occupancy under paragraph 

(b)(1)(i) of this section;

(3) There is proper and secure sealing to confine the fumigant to the space 

that is to be fumigated, including blanking off and sealing any ventilation 

ducts and smoke detectors;

(4) The personal protection and fumigation detection equipment for the 

fumigant that is to be used is on board the vessel;

(5) Warning signs are:

(i) Posted upon all gangplanks, ladders, and other points of access to the 

vessel;

(ii) Posted on all entrances to the spaces that are designated as unsafe for 

occupancy under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section; and

(iii) In accordance with 49 CFR 173.9(c) or section 8.10 of the General 

Introduction of the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code. The 

word “unit” on the warning sign may be replaced with “vessel,” “barge,” 

“hold,” or “space,” as appropriate.

(6) Watchmen are stationed at all entrances to:

(i) Spaces that are not determined to be safe for occupancy under 

paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section; or

(ii) The vessel, if no spaces are determined to be safe for occupancy 

under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.

Sec. 147A.13 Person in charge of the vessel, before 

fumigation.

(a) After notice under Sec. 147A.11(a)(5), the person in charge of the vessel 

shall notify the crew and all other persons on board the vessel who are not

participating in the fumigation of the spaces that are determined to be safe for 

occupancy under Sec. 147A.11(b)(1)(i).

(b) If no spaces are determined to be safe for occupancy under Sec. 

147A.11(b)(1)(i), the person in charge of the vessel shall ensure that the crew 

and all persons who are not participating in the fumigation leave the vessel and 

remain away during fumigation.
Appendix B Coast Guard Regulations

During Fumigation

08/2012-79 Treatment Manual B-5

During Fumigation

Sec. 147A.21 Person in charge of fumigation; during 

fumigation.

(a) Until ventilation begins, or until the vessel leaves port, the person in charge 

of fumigation shall ensure that a qualified person inspects the vessel as 

follows:

(1) He must use detection equipment for the fumigant that is used to ensure 

that the fumigant is confined to:

(i) The space that is fumigated, if partial occupancy is allowed under Sec. 

147A.11(b)(1)(i).

(ii) The vessel, if no space is determined to be safe for occupancy under 

Sec. 147A.11(b)(1)(i).

(2) He must make inspections at the intervals that are determined to be 

necessary by the marine chemist or qualified person under Sec. 

147A.11(b)(1)(i).

(b) If leakage occurs, the person in charge of fumigation shall:

(1) Notify the person in charge of the vessel that there is leakage;

(2) Ensure that all necessary measures are taken for the health and safety of 

any person; and

(3) Notify the person in charge of the vessel when there is no danger to the 

health and safety of any person.

(c) After the exposure period, if the vessel is in port, the person in charge of 

fumigation shall ensure that fumigators or other qualified persons ventilate the 

space that is fumigated as follows:

(1) Hatch covers and vent seals must be removed, other routes of access to 

the atmosphere must be opened, and if necessary, mechanical ventilation 

must be used.

(2) Personal protection equipment that is appropriate for the fumigant that is 

used must be worn.

(d) If ventilation is completed before the vessel leaves port, the person in 

charge of fumigation shall:
Appendix B Coast Guard Regulations

During Fumigation

B-6 Treatment Manual 08/2012-79

(1) Ensure that a qualified person, who is wearing the personal protection 

equipment for the fumigant that is used if remote detection equipment is not

used, tests the space that is fumigated and determines if there is any danger to 

the health and safety of any person, including a danger from fumigant that 

may be retained in bagged, baled, or other absorbent cargo;

(2) Notify the person in charge of the vessel of this determination; and

(3) If it is determined that there is a danger:

(i) Ensure that all measures are taken that are necessary for the health and 

safety of all persons; and

(ii) Notify the person in charge of the vessel when there is no danger to the 

health and safety of any person.

Sec. 147A.23 Person in charge of vessel; during fumigation.

(a) The person in charge of the vessel shall ensure that the crew and all other 

persons on board the vessel who are not participating in the fumigation restrict 

their movement during fumigation to the spaces that are determined to be safe 

for occupancy under Sec. 147A.11(b)(1)(i).

(b) The person in charge of the vessel shall ensure that the crew and all other 

persons who are not participating in the fumigation follow any instructions of 

the person in charge of fumigation that are issued under Sec. 147A.21(b)(2) or 

(d)(3)(i) and that the vessel does not leave port if he is notified under:

(1) Section 147A.21(b)(1) that there is leakage, unless the person in charge of 

fumigation notifies him under Sec. 147A.21(b)(3) of this subpart that there is 

no danger; or

(2) Section 147A.21(d)(2) that there is a danger after ventilation, unless the 

person in charge of the fumigation notifies him under Sec. 147A. 21(d)(3)(ii) 

that there is no danger.

(c) If fumigation is not completed before the vessel leaves port, the person in 

charge of the vessel shall ensure that personal protection and fumigant 

detection equipment for the fumigant that is used is on board the vessel.

(d) If the vessel leaves port before fumigation is completed, the person in 

charge of the vessel shall ensure that a qualified person makes periodic 

inspections until ventilation is completed and this person shall use detection 

equipment for the fumigant that is used to determine if:

(1) There is leakage of fumigant; or
Appendix B Coast Guard Regulations

During Fumigation

08/2012-79 Treatment Manual B-7

(2) There is a concentration of fumigant that is a danger to the health and 

safety of any person.

(e) If the qualified person determines under paragraph (d) of this section that 

there is leakage or a concentration of fumigant that is a danger to the health and 

safety of any person, the person in charge of the vessel shall take all measures 

that are, in his discretion, necessary to ensure health and safety of all persons 

who are on board the vessel. If the danger is due to leakage, he shall also 

ensure that qualified persons immediately ventilate in accordance with 

paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of Sec. 147A.21.

(f) If the vessel leaves port during the exposure period, the person in charge of 

the vessel shall ensure that the space that is fumigated is ventilated by qualified 

persons after the exposure period in accordance with paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) 

of Sec. 147A.21.

(g) If ventilation is completed after the vessel leaves port, the person in charge 

of the vessel shall ensure that a qualified person, who is wearing the personal 

protection equipment for the fumigant that is used if remote detection 

equipment is not used, tests the space that is fumigated to determine if there is 

a danger to the health and safety of any person, including a danger from 

fumigant that may be retained in bagged, baled, or other absorbent cargo. If the 

qualified person determines that there is a danger, the person in charge of the 

vessel shall take all measures that are, in his discretion, necessary to ensure the 

health and safety of all persons who are on board the vessel.

Sec. 147A.25 Entry.

(a) No person may enter the spaces that immediately adjoin the space that is 

fumigated during fumigation unless entry is for emergency purposes or the 

space is tested and declared safe for human occupancy by a marine chemist or 

other qualified person and is inspected under Sec. 147A.21(a)(2) or Sec. 

147A.23(d).

(b) If entry is made for emergency purposes:

(1) No person may enter the space that is fumigated or any adjoining spaces 

during fumigation unless he wears the personal protection equipment for the 

fumigant that is in use;

(2) No person may enter the space that is fumigated unless the entry is made 

by a two person team; and

(3) No person may enter the space that is fumigated unless he wears a lifeline 

and safety harness and each lifeline is tended by a person who is outside the 
Appendix B Coast Guard Regulations

After Ventilation

B-8 Treatment Manual 08/2012-79

space and who is wearing the personal protection equipment for the fumigant 

that is in use.

After Ventilation

Sec. 147A.31 Removal of fumigation material and warning 

signs.

After ventilation is completed and a marine chemist or other qualified person 

determines that there is no danger to the health and safety of any person under 

Sec. 147A.21(d) or Sec. 147A.23(g), the person in charge of fumigation or, if 

the vessel has left port, the person in charge of the vessel shall ensure that all 

warning signs are removed and fumigation containers and materials are 

removed and disposed of in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommendations.

Special Requirements for Flammable Fumigants

Sec. 147A.41 Person in charge of fumigation; flammable 

fumigants.

(a) The person in charge of fumigation shall ensure that:

(1) Before the space that is to be fumigated is sealed, it is thoroughly cleaned, 

and all refuse, oily waste, and other combustible material is removed;

(2) Before fumigation, all fire fighting equipment, including sprinklers and 

fire pumps, is in operating condition; and

(3) Before and during fumigation, electrical circuits that are in the space that 

is fumigated are de-energized.

(b) [Reserved]

Sec. 147A.43 Other sources of ignition; flammable fumigants.

While the space that is fumigated is being sealed or during fumigation, no

person may use matches, smoking materials, fires, open flames, or any other 

source of ignition in any spaces that are not determined to be safe for 

occupancy under Sec. 147A.11(b)(1)(i).
10/2016-01 Treatment Manual C-1

Appendix

C Appendix C

Conversion Tables

Table C-1 Conversion Tables 

To convert from: To: Multiply by:

Acres (a) Hectares (ha) 0.4047

Acres (a) Square meters (m2) 4,047.0

Celsius Fahrenheit 9/5 (then add 32)

Centimeters, cu. (cm3) Cubic inches (in3) 0.061

Centimeters, sq. (cm2) Square inches (in2) 0.155

Centimeters (cm) Inches (in) 0.3937

Fahrenheit Celsius First subtract 32, 

then multiply by 5/9

Feet, cubic (ft3) Liters (L) 28.32

Feet, cubic (ft3) Cubic meters (m3) 0.0283

Feet, square (ft2) Square meters (m2) 0.0929

Feet, square (ft2) Sq. centimeters (cm2) 929.0

Feet (ft) Centimeters (cm) 30.48

Feet (ft) Meters (m) 0.3048

Gallons (gal) Liters (L) 3.785

Grams (g) Ounces (oz) 0.0353

Hectares (ha) Acres (a) 2.471

Inches (in) Centimeters (cm) 2.54

Inches, square (in2) Sq. centimeters (cm2) 6.4516

Inches, cubic (in3) Cu. centimeters (cm3) 16.387

Kilograms (kg) Pounds (lb) 2.205

Kilograms (kg) Ounces (oz) 35.27

Kilometers, sq. (km2) Square miles (mi2) 0.3861

Kilometers, sq. (km2) Acres (a) 247.1

Kilometers (km) Miles (mi) 0.6214

Liters (L) Gallons (gal) 0.2642

Liters (L) Quarts (qt) 1.0567

Meters, cubic (m3) Cubic feet (ft3) 35.314

Meters, cubic (m3) Cubic yards (yd3) 1.308

Meters (m) Feet (ft) 3.281

Meters (m) Yards (yd) 1.0936

Meters, sq. (m2) Square inches (in2) 1,550.00

Meters (m) Inches (in) 39.37
Appendix C Conversion Tables

C-2 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

Miscellaneous:

Pounds per acre (lb/a) x 1.1206 = kg/ha

Ounces (liquid) per acre x 73.14 = ml/ha

Gallons per acre (gal/a) x 9.3527 = liters per hectare (L/ha)

Pressure per square inch (PSI) x 6.894757 = kilopascals (kPa)

Inches mercury x 3.38 = kilopascals (kPa)

Kilogram per hectare (kg/ha) x 0.8924 = pounds per acre

Milliliters per hectare x 0.01367 = ounces (lq.) per acre

Liters per hectare (L/ha) x 0.1069 = gallons per acre

Kilopascals (kPa) x 0.145038 = pounds per square inch (PSI)

Grams per liter x 0.008345 = pounds per gallon

Kilopascals (kPa) x 0.29586 = inches mercury

Pound per cubic feet = 0.016 grams per cubic meter

Meters, sq. (m2) Square feet (ft2) 10.764

Miles, square (mi2) Hectares (ha) 258.99

Miles, square (mi2) Sq. kilometers (km2) 2.5899

Miles, statute (mi) Meters (m) 1,609.347

Miles, statute (mi) Kilometers (km) 1.609

Milliliters (ml) Liquid ounces (lq oz) 0.0338

Nautical miles Meters (m) 1,852.00

Ounces, fluid (fl oz) Milliliters (ml) 29.57

Ounces (oz) Kilograms (kg) 0.0284

Ounces (oz) Grams (gm) 28.35

Pounds (lb) Kilograms (kg) 0.4536

Pounds (lb) Grams (g) 453.6

Quarts (qt) Liters (L) 0.9464

Tons, short (2000 lb) Metric tons (t) 0.9072

Tons, Metric (t) Tons, short 1.102

Yards, cubic (yd3) Liters (L) 764.6

Yards, cubic (yd3) Cubic meters (m3) 0.765

Yards (yd) Meters (m) 0.9144

Yards (yd) Centimeters (cm) 91.44

Table C-1 Conversion Tables (continued)

To convert from: To: Multiply by:
04/2021-46 Treatment Manual D-1

Appendix

D Appendix D

APHIS Certified Treatment Facilities and 

Conveyances

Refer to Table D-1 for hyperlinks to lists of USDA-APHIS-PPQ certified 

treatment facilities, vessels, and containers.

Table D-1 Hyperlinks to Lists of Certified Treatment Facilities, Vessels, and 

Containers

Type Hyperlink

Cold treatment facilities United States- APHIS Certified Cold Treatment Facilities

Fumigation providers in 

the Uniited States under 

APHIS compliance 

agreement

United States- Import Fumigation Treatment Facilities Under 

APHIS Compliance Agreement

Grinding and processing 

treatment facilities in the 

United States

United States- APHIS Certified Grinding and Processing 

Treatment Facilities

Heat treatment facilities 

in the United States

United States- APHIS Certified Heat Treatment Facilities

Irradiation facilities United States- APHIS Certified Irradiation Treatment Facilities

Maritime containers and 

vessels

https://vessels.cphst.org/
Appendix D APHIS Certified Treatment Facilities and Conveyances

D-2 Treatment Manual 04/2021-46
05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-1

Appendix

E Appendix E

Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of 

Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

This list is not intended to be all inclusive and is intended to be a reference 

guide solely for the convenience of potential users, particularly PPQ plant 

inspection stations. No endorsement is intended of the particular items listed, 

and no discrimination is intended toward those products or companies that 

may not be listed.

Products

Aeration Duct, Flexible E-4

Aerosol Insecticides E-4

Air Pump, Auxiliary E-5

Air-Purifying Respirator E-5

Air Velocity Measuring (Anemometer) E-6

Aluminum Phosphide E-7

Applicator (Dispenser) for Methyl Bromide E-8

Ascarite II E-8

Balances, Portable (for Weighing Individual Fruit) E-8

Batch Systems (Complete Installations, Hot Water Immersion Treatments) 

E-9

Blower E-12

Bubble Fumigation System E-12

Cascade Air Tank Recharging System (for SCBA) E-12

Chain Hoist (Electronic) (for Hot Water Immersion Treatments) E-12

Consultants (for Hot Water Immersion Treatments) E-13

Curtains (Air, Safeguarding) E-14

Digital Thermistor Instrument (Hand-Held for Hot Water Immersion 

Treatments) and Portable Sensors (Used in Performance Test) E-14

Drierite® (Anhydrous Calcium Sulfate) E-16

Electrochemical Gas Sensor and Pyrolyzer E-16

Exhaust Duct (Tube), Flexible E-16

Fans E-17

Fruit Crates (Plastic for Hot Water Immersion Treatments) E-17

NOTICE

Product manufacturer names and addresses are subject to change without notice. 

PPQ does not routinely verify the accuracy of the information in this Appendix.
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Products

E-2 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Fruit Sizing Equipment (Automatic) E-17

Fumigators, Commercial E-17

Fungicides E-17

Gas Analyzers E-19

Gas Detector Tube (Colorimetric) and Apparatus E-20

Gas Drying Tube for Drierite® E-21

Germicides/Disinfectants E-22

Halide Gas Leak Detector (removed) E-22

Incinerators E-22

Magnesium Phosphide E-22

Manometer (Used in Pressure Leakage Test) E-23

Metam-Sodium E-25

Methyl Bromide E-25

Moisture Meter (For Wood) E-27

Newsletters and Trade Journals E-27

Packaging—Non-Routine USDA-Approved For Fumigation E-28

Packaging—USDA-Approved For Modified Atmosphere Irradiation E-29

Packaging—USDA-Approved For Cold Treatment E-30

Photo Ionization Detector E-31

Remote Data Transmission Systems E-31

Safety Equipment E-31

Scale (Portable Platform) E-31

Sealing Tape E-32

Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) E-32

Smoking Candle E-33

Snakes (Sand or Water Snakes) E-33

Soil Fumigants E-33

Spill Recovery Materials E-34

Steam Boilers (for Hot Water Immersion Treatments) E-34

Steam Generators E-35

Steam Sterilizers/Autoclaves E-35

Sulfuryl Fluoride (Vikane) E-35

Tarpaulins E-35

Temperature Recorders (Portable Type) for Cold Treatment in Self-Regulated 

Containers E-36

Temperature Recorders/Controllers (Built-In Type) for Cold Treatment in SelfRegulated Containers E-37

Temperature Recorders (Portable Type) for Cold Treatment in Warehouses 

E-39

Temperature Recorders for Hot Water Immersion Treatment E-40

Temperature Recorders and Sensors—High Temperature (Niger Seed) E-43

Thermocouple Wire E-43

Thermometers E-44

Thermometers, Glass Mercury, Certified Precision E-45

Thermometers, Glass Non-mercury, Certified Precision E-47
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Products

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-3

Thermometers, Digital, Certified Precision E-47

Thermometers, Certified Precision, Approved Calibration Companies E-51

Thermometers, Recorders, and Sensors—General Use E-52

Tubing, Gas-Sampling E-54

Vacuum Pump E-54

Vapam E-55

Vapor Heat/Forced Hot Air (VH/FHA) Chamber Manufacturers E-55

Vapor Heat/Forced Hot Air (VH/FHA) Recorders E-55

Volatilizer E-56

Warning Signs and Placards E-57
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Aeration Duct, Flexible

E-4 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Aeration Duct, Flexible

(specify diameter and length)

Biesterfeld, U.S. Inc.

200 Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10016

Resmethrin

Fumigation Service and Supply, Inc.

16950 Westfield Park Road

Westfield, IN 46074

Aerosol Insecticides

Gilmore Marketing and Development, Inc.

80 Monroe Street, Suite G1

Memphis, TN 38103

Otis Laboratory

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T

1398 W. Truck Road

Buzzards Bay, MA 02542

10% d-phenothrin

Southern Agricultural Insecticides, Inc.

Mailing Address: 

P.O. Box 218

Palmetto, FL 34220

Physical Address:

7400 Bayshore Road

Rubonia, FL 34221

Resmethrin
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Air Pump, Auxiliary

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-5

Air Pump, Auxiliary

Barnant

(Sold as Thermo Scientific brand)

28W092 Commercial Avenue

Barrington, IL 60010

Cole-Parmer

625 East Bunker Court

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

“Air Cadet” Vacuum/Pressure Pump; Single-J7530-40; dual J7530-60)

McMaster-Carr Supply Co.

P.O. Box 740100

Atlanta, GA 30374-0100

Hand-held Mityvac® vacuum/pressure pump, zinc alloy, cat. no. 

9963K12)

Air-Purifying Respirator (gas masks with cartridge for organic vapors)

Thermo Scientific

81 Wyman Street

Waltham, MA 02454

Air-Purifying Respirator

Air purifying respirators are available from many different companies, 

including but not limited to Mine Safety Appliances (MSA), ULine, Northern 

Safety and Industrial, Grainger, etc.

APHIS-approved air purifying respirators are:

MSA Advantage (half face) 420 and (full face) 1000

3M (half face) 6100, 6200, 6300 and (full face) 6700, 6800, 6900

North (half face) 7700 and (full face) 76008AS, 76008A

Survivair/Sperian (half face) 250000, 260000, 270000

For APHIS-approved cartridges, contact a PPQ Field Operations Safety and 

Health Manager for approved organic vapor/acid gas N95 P100 cartridges.
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Air Velocity Measuring (Anemometer)

E-6 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Air Velocity Measuring (Anemometer)

Extech Instruments®

9 Townsend West

Nashua, NH 03063

Mini Thermo-Anemometer Model #45118; Mini Thermo-Anemometer 

with humidity model #45158

NK Nielson-Kellerman

21 Creek Circle

Boothwyn, PA 19061

Kestrel® Pocket Wind Meters (all models)

Trutech Tools

515 Turkey Foot Lake Road

Akron, OH 44319

Testo 417 Large Vane Anemometer

TSI, Inc. Alnor Products

500 Cardigan Road

Shoreview, MN 55126

Velometer Jr.®
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Aluminum Phosphide

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-7

Aluminum Phosphide

Degesch America, Inc.

P.O. Box 116

153 Triangle Drive

Weyers Cave, VA 24486

Fumigation Service and Supply, Inc.

16950 Westfield Park Road

Westfield, IN 46074

Gilmore Marketing and Development, Inc.

80 Monroe Street, Suite G1

Memphis, TN 38103

Helena Chemical Co.

225 Schilling Boulevard, Suite 300

Collierville, TN 38017

ICD Group Metals, LLC

600 Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10022-1615

INCHEMA, Inc.

180 Old Tappan Road, Building 6

Old Tappan, NJ 07675

Loveland Products, Inc.

3005 Rocky Mountain Avenue

Loveland, CO 80538

Pestcon Systems, Inc.

1808 Firestone Parkway

Wilson, NC 27893-7991
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Applicator (Dispenser) for Methyl Bromide

E-8 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

United Suppliers, Inc.

Box 538

30473 260th Street

Eldora, IA 50627

Applicator (Dispenser) for Methyl Bromide (sight gauges calibrated in ml, 

grams, or pounds)

Applicator (Dispenser) for Methyl Bromide

Vuscamante North

(Attn: Sr. Maurilio Plata)

307 Montemorelos

Nuevo Leon, Mexico

Ascarite II

(Granules of sodium hydroxide-coated silica used to remove carbon dioxide 

from gas samples)

Fisher Scientific

2000 Park Lane Drive

Pittsburgh, PA 15275

Sigma-Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc.

6000 North Teutonia Avenue

Milwaukee, WI 53209

Thomas Scientific

P.O. Box 99

99 High Hill Road at I-295

Swedesboro, NJ 08085-0099

Balances, Portable (for Weighing Individual Fruit)

Ohaus Corporation

7 Campus Drive

Suite 310

Parsippany, NJ 07054
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Batch Systems (Complete Installations, Hot Water Immersion Treatments)

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-9

Batch Systems (Complete Installations, Hot Water Immersion 

Treatments)

Agri Machinery and Parts, Inc.

3489 All American Boulevard

Orlando, FL 32810

Agroindustrias Entegradas, S.A. de C.V.

Calle Cernicalo, No. 590

Col. Mor. S.H.C.P. 44490

Guadalajara, Jalisco

Mexico

Calderas Astro, S.A. de C.V.

Jose Herrera, No. 607-B

C.P. 36350

San Francisco del Rincon

Guanajuato, Guan.

Mexico

Construcciones Pyrsa

Depto. de Ingenieria

Anil No. 100

Col. Los Pinos

Celaya, Guanajuato

Mexico

Consultecnia

3a Calle 28-70, Zona 1

Quetzaltenango

Apartado Postal 537-1

Guatemala

Dica de Mexico, S.A.

Corretera - Navolato, km 8

Culiacan, Sinaloa

Mexico
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Batch Systems (Complete Installations, Hot Water Immersion Treatments)

E-10 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Diseños y Maquinaria Jer, S.A. de C.V. (“Jersa”)

Emiliano Zapata, No. 51-A

Cuatitlan Izcalli

Estado do Mexico, C.P. 54710

Mexico

Equipos Agroindustriales de Occidente, S.A. de C.V.

Avenida Washington, No. 1370

Guadalajara, Jalisco

Mexico

Frutico International

P.O. Box 35-A

Avenida Vallarta 2095

Culiacan, Sinaloa

Mexico

Guiar Industrial, S.A. de C.V.

Rayon No. 989

Colonia Moderna, Sector Juarez

Guadalajara, C.P. 44190, Jalisco

Mexico

“System Model No. 63-89”

Industria de Maquinas Agricolas GB Ltda.

Via Anhanguera, Km 150

Limeira / Sao Paulo

Brazil CEP 13480-970-Cx. Pt. 385

Industrial Equipment & Engineering Co. (I.E. & E.)

2045 Sprint Boulevard

Apopka, FL 32703
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Batch Systems (Complete Installations, Hot Water Immersion Treatments)

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-11

NOJOXTEN S.A. de C.V.

Eduardo Velazquez

Av Santa Margarit Razoa #283

Santa Margarita

Zapopan, Jalisco CP 45140

Mexico

NOJOXTEN-BR Automation Studio V3.09 IEC 61131-3-ST)

Produce Sorters International

7403 West Sunnyview Avenue

Visalia, CA 93291

Proyect Asesoria Industrial

Av. Los Diplomaticos 1318

San Salvador, El Salvador

or

8a Avenida 33-10, Zona 11

Guatemala, Guatemala

Pyrsa de Celaya

Calle Violeta No. 1204

Colonia Las Flores

Celaya, Guanajuato

Mexico

Silsa, S.A. de C.V.

Avenida Acueducto

597 Planta Alta

Colonia Tecoman

07330 Mexico 14, D.F.

Mexico

William B. Cresse, Inc.

117 Commerce Avenue

Lake Placid, FL 33852
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Blower

E-12 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Blower

(Used in pressure leakage test; may also be used to evacuate a fumigation 

chamber)

W.W. Grainger, Inc.

Branch offices in various cities

William W. Meyer & Sons, Inc.

1700 Franklin Boulevard

Libertyville, IL 60048-4407

Bubble Fumigation System

Inflatable tarpaulin

B&G Equipment Company

135 Region South Drive

Jackson, GA 30233

Power Plastics

Station Road

Thirsk, N. Yorkshire Y07 1PZ

England

Cascade Air Tank Recharging System (for SCBA)

Mine Safety Appliance Co. (MSA)

1000 Cranberry Woods Drive

Cranberry Twp, PA 16066

Chain Hoist (Electronic) (for Hot Water Immersion Treatments)

Chemonics

1717 H Street, NW

Washington, DC 20006

Post-harvest advice; international consulting)
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Consultants (for Hot Water Immersion Treatments)

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-13

Columbus McKinnon Corp.

Industrial Products Division

140 John James Audubon Parkway

Amherst, NY 14228

Lodestar electronic chain hoist, capacity to 3 tons

Consultants (for Hot Water Immersion Treatments)

C.C. Coutinho Consulting

Av. Princess Leopddina, 238

Ap. 101 D

Graca - Ed Olga Pontes

Cep 40150-080 Salvador, Bahia

Brazil

USDA-APHIS-PPQ Science and Technology

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

APHIS technical contact; approval of plans and drawings

Consultecnia

3a Calle 28-70, Zona 1

Quetzaltenango

Aparto Postal 537-1

Guatemala

Dica de Mexico, S.A.

Corretera - Navolato, km 8

Culiacan, Sinaloa

Mexico

Frutico International

P.O. Box 35-A

Avenida Vallarta 2095

Culiacan, Sinaloa

Mexico
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Curtains (Air, Safeguarding)

E-14 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

GEC Instruments

5530 NW 97th Street

Gainesville, FL 32653

Engineering consulting

Nojoxten

Sta. Martha No. 276-A Col. Sta.

Margarita C.P. 45140

Zapopan, Jalisco

Mexico

North Bay Produce, Inc.

10a Calle 1-4, Zona 9

Guatemala, Guatemala

Societe d’Entretien & d’Installation (SODEIN)

Route de Carrefour #83

P.O. Box 995

Port-au-Prince, Haiti

Installation of temperature recording equipment, especially the Chessel 

346

Curtains (Air, Safeguarding)

W.W. Grainger, Inc.

Branch offices in many cities

Digital Thermistor Instrument (Hand-Held for Hot Water Immersion 

Treatments) and Portable Sensors (Used in Performance Test)

Advanced Industrial Services, Inc. (AIS)

3250 Susquehanna Trail 

York, PA 17406 

YSI 400 series thermister sensors

Allied Electronics

15721 NW 60th Avenue
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Digital Thermistor Instrument (Hand-Held for Hot Water Immersion Treatments) and Portable Sensors (Used in Performance

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-15

Miami Lakes, FL 33014

(Additional sales outlets in other cities)

Instruments include Cooper Instrument Corp.’s Model TM99A, and 

thermister sensors with submersible 10 or 20 ft. cord, Catalog No. 2010

Contech

Rafael G. De Avila Aceves

Miguel Galindo 2033, J. del Country

Guadalajara, Jalisco, Mexico, C.P. 44210

Term 2252 thermometer; sensors SP20758-1 (see Measurement 

Specialties) and adapter Part #364-A for Oakton Acorn Temp 4) and 

sensors with YSI 400 series sensors (see Advanced Industrial Services, 

Inc. (AIS))

Cooper Instrument Corp.

33 Reeds Gap Road

Middlefield, CT 06455

(Note: This company manufactures the Cooper instruments sold by Allied 

Electronics, but does not sell directly to retail customers.)

Oakton Instruments

P.O. Box 5136

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Acorn® Temp 4 Meter: use 400 series thermistor probe. Suggested 

general purpose probes are:

Oakton air probe #WD-08491-08

Oakton penetration probe #WD-08491-16

Oakton general purpose probe 10, 50, or 100 feet #WD-08491-02, 

#WD-08491-03, #WD-08491-04

Oakton Acorn® Temp 5 #EW-35626-10

Oakton products can be purchased at numerous distributors such as ColeParmer, Davis Instruments, etc.

Recommended temperature sensors for Acorn® Temp 4.5 and 6 are from 

Measurement Specialties. 

Measurement Specialties

2670 Indian Ripple Road

Dayton, OH 45440

Sensor Model SP20758-1, long term immersion sensor with 4-meter cable 

for use with Acorn® Temp 4, 5, an 6. Use Switchcraft adapter Part #364-
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Drierite® (Anhydrous Calcium Sulfate)

E-16 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

A to connect sensor to Acorn® Temp 4, 5, and 6. Two conductor adapters 

from 3.5mm to phone jack mono to 6.35 phone jack mono.

Switchcraft, Inc.

555 N. Elston Ave.

Chicago, IL 60630

Adapter Part #364-A (to connect SP20758-1 to the Acorn® Temp 4

Drierite® (Anhydrous Calcium Sulfate)

Fisher Scientific

2000 Park Lane Drive

Pittsburgh, PA 15275

Sigma-Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc.

6000 North Teutonia Avenue

Milwaukee, WI 53209

W.A. Hammond Drierite Co. (Manufacturer)

138 Dayton Avenue

Xenia, OH 45385

Electrochemical Gas Sensor and Pyrolyzer

PureAir Monitoring Systems, Inc.

557 Capital Drive

Lake Zurizh, IL 60047

Exhaust Duct (Tube), Flexible

Stock sizes available in diameters of 12, 16, and 24 inches. Available in 10 and 

20 feet lengths, which may be attached by a ring coupling.

Gaskets, Inc.

301 W. Highway 16

Rio, WI 53960
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Fans

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-17

Super Vacuum Manufacturing Company, Inc.

P.O. Box 87

Loveland, CO 80539-0087

Fans

Super Vacuum Manufacturing Company, Inc.

P.O. Box 87

Loveland, CO 80539-0087

Fruit Crates (Plastic for Hot Water Immersion Treatments)

No listings.

Fruit Sizing Equipment (Automatic)

Hortagro International, b.v.

P.O. Box 4050

8901 EB Leeuwarden

Holland

Mechanical weight sizer with conveyor belt

Kerian Machines, Inc.

1709 Highway 81 South

P.O. Box 311

Roller type of sizing equipment

Fumigators, Commercial

Refer to your preferred Internet search engine to locate commercial 

fumigators.

Fungicides

Bordeaux Mixture (hydrated lime + copper sulfate)
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Fungicides

E-18 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Chemtura Corporation

199 Benson Road

Middlebury, CT 06749

Product name: Nutra-Spray, Captan

Crystal Chemical Inter-America

6800 SW. 40th Street, Suite 499

Miami, FL 33155-3708

Product Name: Captanex

Drexel Chemical Co.

P.O. Box 13327

Memphis, TN 38113-0327

Phone: (901) 774-4370

Syngenta

1800 Concord Pike

P.O. Box 8353

Wilmington, DE 19803

Ferbam

Cytec Industries, Inc.

5 Garrett Mountain Plaza

West Patterson, NJ 07424

Product names: Carbamate WDB, Ferbam 76 WDG, Ferbam Granuflo

FMC Agricultural Products

Chemical Group

1735 Market Street

Philadelphia, PA 19103

Product names: Carbamate, Mancozeb

Arkema, Inc.

2000 Market Street

Philadelphia, PA 19103-3222

Product name: Penncozeb 80 WP

Rohm and Haas

100 Independence Mall West

Philadelphia, PA 19106
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Gas Analyzers

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-19

Product names: Dithane, Thiram

Bayer CropScience LP

P.O. Box 12014

2 T.W. Alexander Drive

Research Triangle Park, NC 27709

Product names: Cuprothex Super Mix

Cytec Industries, Inc.

5 Garrett Mountain Plaza

West Patterson, NJ 07424

Product names: Tech TMTD, Thianosan, THiLor, Thipel, Thiram 

Granuflo, Thiram 65, Thiram 75-WDG, Zineb

Gas Analyzers

Analytical Technology, Inc.

6 Iron Bridge Drive

Collegeville, PA 19426

PortaSens Phosphine Detector

EB & S Solutions

6587 66th Avenue North

Pinellas Park, FL 33781
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Gas Detector Tube (Colorimetric) and Apparatus

E-20 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Interscan Corporation

4590 Ish Drive, #110

Simi Valley, CA 93063

Interscan Model GF 1900 pyrolysis unit, sensitive to SF at 0–50 ppm.)

Key Chemical and Equipment Co., Inc.

13195 49th Street North, Unit A

Clearwater, FL 33762

Fumiscope, Models D, 4.0, 4.2, and 5.12

Neal Systems, Inc.

122 Terry Drive

Newtown, PA 18940

Porta-Sens Phosphine Detector

Pest Fog, Inc.

1424 Bonita

P.O. Box 3703

Corpus Christi, TX 78463

Spectros Instruments, Inc.

17D Airport Road

Hopedale, MA 01747

Methyl bromide monitor MB-ContainIR

Sulfuryl fluoride monitor SF-Contain IR

Gas Detector Tube (Colorimetric) and Apparatus

APHIS/NOAA Centralized Warehouse

(must order by Fedstrip procedure)

FTS: 758-6222 (Draeger tubes)

Draeger Safety, Inc.

101 Technology Drive

Pittsburgh, PA 15275-1057

Draeger tubes in the ranges of 0.2–8.0 ppm Product #8103391; and 0.5–

30.0 ppm Product #8101671
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Gas Drying Tube for Drierite®

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-21

Lab Safety Supply 

is now W.W. Grainger, Inc.

Branch offices in various cities

Matheson TriGas

Matheson-Kitagawa tubes in the range 0.5–10 ppm Product #8014-187sc

Protech Safety Equipment

37 East 21st Street

P.O. Box 455

Linden, NJ 07036

Draeger tubes

Sensidyne, LP

16333 Bay Vista Drive

Clearwater, FL 33760

Sensidyne/Gastec tubes in the range of 0.1–20 ppm Product #157SD

SKC, Inc.

863 Valley View Road

Eighty Four, PA 15330

Union Carbide Corp., Linde Division

National Specialty Gases Office

40 Veronica Avenue

Somerset, NJ 08873-3498

Sensidyne/Gastec tubes and apparatus

Gas Drying Tube for Drierite®

Wilmad-LabGlass

1172 NW Boulevard

Vineland, NJ 08360

Glass tube: Catalog #301-7501
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Germicides/Disinfectants

E-22 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Germicides/Disinfectants

Georgia-Pacific Corp.

300 W. Laurel Street

Bellingham, WA 98225

Halide Gas Leak Detector (removed)

Incinerators

Whitten Technology, Inc.

Air Burners Products Division

4390 Cargo Way

Palm City, FL 34990

Air Curtain Incinerators

Magnesium Phosphide

Degesch America, Inc.

P.O. Box 116

153 Triangle Drive

Weyers Cave, VA 24486

Fumigation Service and Supply, Inc.

16950 Westfield Park Road

Westfield, IN 46074

Helena Chemical Co.

225 Schilling Boulevard, Suite 300

Collierville, TN 38017
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Manometer (Used in Pressure Leakage Test)

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-23

Manometer (Used in Pressure Leakage Test)

Select the device based on pressure range and suitability.

Amazon

Digital, Magnehelic, U-tube

Cole-Parmer

625 East Bunker Court

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Digital, Magnehelic, U-tube

Davis Calibration

1946 Greenspring Drive, Suite A

Timonium, MD 21093

Digital, U-tube

Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

102 Indiana Highway 212

Michigan City, IN 46360

Digital, Magnehelic, U-tube

E&E Process Instrumentation

4-40 North Rivermede Road

Concord, ON L4K 2H3

Digital, Magnehelic, U-tube

Extech

9 Townsend West

Nashua, NH 03063

Digital, Magnehelic

Fisher Scientific

2000 Park Lane Drive

Pittsburgh, PA 15275

Digital, Magnehelic, U-tube
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Manometer (Used in Pressure Leakage Test)

E-24 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Instrumart

35 Green Mountain Drive

S Burlington, VT 05403

Digital, Magnehelic

LabX

Digital, used

Meriam Process Technologies

10920 Madison Avenue

Cleveland, OH 44102

MSC Industrial Supply

75 Maxess Road

Melville, NY 11747-3151

Digital

OMEGA Engineering, Inc.

800 Connecticut Avenue

Suite 5N01

Norwalk, CT 06854

Digital

TruTech Tools

Digital

W.W. Granger, Inc.

Branch offices in many cities.

Zellweger Analytics

Neotronics Sieger Solomat Division

4331 Thurmond Tanner Road

P.O. Box 2100

Flowery Branch, GA 30542

Model No. 530 (0–19.99 inches of water
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Metam-Sodium

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-25

Metam-Sodium

Amvac Chemical Corporation

4100 East Washington Boulevard

Los Angeles, CA 90023

Methyl Bromide

Biesterfeld, U.S. Inc.

200 Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10016

Chemtura Corporation

199 Benson Road

Middlebury, CT 06749

Table E-1 Cylinder Tare, Net, and Gross Weights

Net Weight 

Product 

Description

Cylinder Tare 

Weight (lbs.)

Cylinder Net 

Weight (lbs.)

Cylinder 

Gross Weight 

(lbs.)

Comments

50 lbs–short 25 50 75

50 lbs–tall 30 50 80 Used for 

Meth-O-Gas Q 

only

100 lbs 35 100 135

175 lbs 50 175 225

200 lbs 50 200 250

1,500 lbs 350 1,500 1,850
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Methyl Bromide

E-26 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Degesch America, Inc.

Houston Division

P.O. Box 451036

Houston, TX 77245

Fumigation Service and Supply, Inc.

16950 Westfield Park Road

Westfield, IN 46074

Helena Chemical Co.

225 Schilling Boulevard, Suite 300

Collierville, TN 38017

ICD Group Metals, LLC

600 Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10022-1615

ICL Industrial Products (formerly Ameribrom, Inc.)

622 Emerson Road, Suite 500

St. Louis, MO 63141

Pestcon Systems, Inc.

1808 Firestone Parkway

Wilson, NC 27893-7991

Southern Agricultural Insecticides, Inc.

Mailing Address: 

P.O. Box 218

Palmetto, FL 34220

Physical Address:

7400 Bayshore Road

Rubonia, FL 34221
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Moisture Meter (For Wood)

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-27

Moisture Meter (For Wood)

Delmhorst Instrument Company

51 Indian Lane East

Towaco, NJ 07082

Order: Moisture Meter G30

Electrode 26ES

Type 496 pin

(Above comes as package in carrying case)

Lignomat USA Ltd.

14345 NE Morris Court

Portland, OR 97230

Newsletters and Trade Journals

(containing articles on fumigation)

Fumigants and Pheromones

(free newsletter)

Fumigation Service and Supply, Inc.

16950 Westfield Park Road

Westfield, IN 46074

Pest Control Technology

(monthly for professional pest control operators)

4020 Kinross Lakes Parkway, Suite 201

Richfield, OH 44286

Pest Management Professional

(monthly for professional pest control operators)

Questex Media Group, Inc.

600 Superior Avenue East. Suite 1100

Cleveland, OH 44114

Customer Service Mailing Address:

Pest Management Monthly

P.O. Box 2090

Skokie, IL 60076-7990
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Packaging—Non-Routine USDA-Approved For Fumigation

E-28 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Packaging—Non-Routine USDA-Approved For Fumigation

Non-routine packaging is approved by S&T upon request. Contact 

ppqtmt@usda.gov for specifications for approval. 

DupontTM Tyvek® Air Cargo Covers (approved for methyl bromide 

fumigation only)

12316 Amoretto Way

Raleigh, NC 27613

USA

Los Tres Castillos Ltda. (approved for methyl bromide fumigation only)

Bombero Gabriel Lima Millán N°1417

San Ramón

Santiago, Chile|

PACKFRESH SPA (approved for methyl bromide fumigation only)

Camino Lonquen

Sur Paradero #18

Calera de Tango, Santiago, Chile

PSS Envases SA (PacLife) (approved for methyl bromide fumigation only; 

see also Packaging—USDA-Approved For Cold Treatment)

Los Duraznos 0683

La Pintana, Región Metropolitana

Chile

Quimas S.A. (SmartPac) (approved for methyl bromide fumigation only)

Los Yacimientos 1301

Maipu

Santiago, Chile

NOTICE

See Packaging Materials Approved for Fumigation on page 2-3-8 for a list of routine 

packaging.
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Packaging—USDA-Approved For Modified Atmosphere Irradiation

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-29

VIJOM (approved for methyl bromide fumigation only)

Manufacturas de Plásticos Vijom Ltda.

Escorial s/n

Panquehue

San Felipe, Chile

VK Packaging SPA (approved for methyl bromide fumigation only)

Av Las Industrias 5155

San Antonio, V Region, Chile

Packaging—USDA-Approved For Modified Atmosphere Irradiation

Modified atmosphere irradiation packaging is approved by S&T upon request. 

Contact ppqtmt@usda.gov for specifications for approval.

Amcor AFAP

15 Keys Road Moorabbin

Victoria 3189

Australia

Aypek Packaging

NOSAB SEDIR CAD No. 15

PK 16140 Nilufer

Bursa, Turkey

Chantler Packages Inc. 880 Lakeshore Road East

Mississauga, ON 

Canada L5E 1E1
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Packaging—USDA-Approved For Cold Treatment

E-30 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

San Jorge Packaging SA

Avenida Einstein 923

Recoleta, Santiago, Chile

StePac L.A. Ltd.

Tefen Industrial Park

Building 12

P.O. Box 73

Tefen

Israel 2495900

TrendLife Deka Plastik Ltd. Sti.

Dogu Sanayi Sitesi 9. Blok No:11 Yenibosna

Istanbul

Turkey

Packaging—USDA-Approved For Cold Treatment

Cold treatment packaging is approved by S&T upon request. Contact 

ppqtmt@usda.gov for specifications for approval.

INDUPACK

Elias Aguirre 358 Of. 102

Miraflores, Lima, Peru

Liventus

Estoril 120 Torre A - Of. 716

Las Condes

Santiago, Chile|

PSS Envases SA (PacLife)

Los Duraznos 0683

La Pintana, Región Metropolitana

Chile

SURAGRA

Calle Chinchon 830 Of. 301

San Isidro Lima 27

Peru
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Photo Ionization Detector

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-31

Photo Ionization Detector

Mine Safety Appliances Co. (MSA)

1000 Cranberry Woods Drive

Cranberry Twp, PA 16066

Sirius Multigas Detector

Rae Systems

3775 North First Street

San Jose, CA 95134

Remote Data Transmission Systems

A.P. Moller-Maersk A/S

180 Park Avenue

Florham Park, NJ 07932

Remote Container Management System

Safety Equipment

United States Plastic Corporation

1390 Neubrecht Road

Lima, OH 45801-3196

Safety guards for belt and chain drives; fan guards; fire extinguishers; 

safety equipment in general

Scale (Portable Platform)

(for weighing gas cylinders) Refer to your preferred Internet search engine for 

additional manufacturers.

Arlington Scale Co., Inc.

38 Davey Street

Bloomfield, NJ 07003

Atlantic Scale Co., Inc.

136 Washington Avenue

Nutley, NJ 07110
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Sealing Tape

E-32 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

See website for other locations in Hicksville, NY and Yonkers, NY

Eastern Scale of NJ

1053 Pennsylvania Avenue

Linden, NJ 07036-2240

Phifer Incorporated

Mailing address:

P.O. Box 1700

Tuscaloosa, AL 35403-1700

Shipping Address:

4400 Kauloosa Avenue

Tuscaloosa, AL 35401-7042

Fiberglass insect screening of various mesh sizes and colors

Sealing Tape

Degesch America, Inc.

Houston Division

P.O. Box 451036

Houston, TX 77245

Fumigation Service and Supply, Inc.

16950 Westfield Park Road

Westfield, IN 46074

ARMAK sealing tape

Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)

Mine Safety Appliances Co. (MSA)

MSA World Headquarters

Customer Service Center

P.O. Box 426

Pittsburg, PA 15230

MAS AirHawk Ultra Elite

USDA employees monitoring fumigations must order model ATO#AA2LB33A00F11AA1. The letter “F” is the size of the face mask. “F” is 

medium, “G” is large, and “E” is small. Spectacle kits: center support part 

#493581 or sidewire part #804638.
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Smoking Candle

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-33

Smoking Candle

(Candles of various sizes used in pressure leakage test.)

Superior Signal Co., Inc.

P.O. Box 96

Spotswood, NJ 08884

Snakes (Sand or Water Snakes)

Fumigation Service and Supply, Inc.

16950 Westfield Park Road

Westfield, IN 46074

Soil Fumigants

(Metam-Sodium, Vapam, etc.)

Buckman Laboratories International Inc.

1256 North McLean Boulevard

Memphis, TN 38108-1241

Product name: Busan 1020

Cytec Industries, Inc.

5 Garrett Mountain Plaza

West Patterson, NJ 07424

Products: Metam 32.7, Metam 42, Ucetam

OR-CAL, Inc.

29454 Meadowview Road

Junction City, OR 97448

Product name: Sectagon

NOTICE

Purchase only candles that emit white smoke. If candles that emit colored smoke 

are used, their residue will stain the interior walls of the fumigation chamber, skin, 

and clothing. Store candles in a dry, cool place.
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Spill Recovery Materials

E-34 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Syngenta

1800 Concord Pike

P.O. Box 8353

Wilmington, DC 19803

Product name: Vapam

Spill Recovery Materials

This section lists products to absorb spills of hazardous materials.

Ansul

One Stanton Street

Marinette, WI 54143

Product: Spill-X

Fumigation Service and Supply, Inc.

16950 Westfield Park Road

Westfield, IN 46074

New Pig Corp.

One Pork Avenue

P.O. Box 304

Tipton, PA 16684-0304

WYK Sorbents, LLC

11721 Lackland Road

St. Louis, MO 63146

Product: absorbent pillows and socks (free samples available)

Steam Boilers (for Hot Water Immersion Treatments)

Fulton Boiler Works, Inc.

3981 Port Street

Pulaski, NY 13142

oil-fired, gas-fired, or combination
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Steam Generators

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-35

Steam Generators

Sioux Corporation

One Sioux Plaza

Beresford, SD 57004

Steam Sterilizers/Autoclaves

Environmental Tectonics Corporation

125 James Way

Southhampton, PA 18966

Sulfuryl Fluoride (Vikane)

Dow AgroSciences LLC

9330 Zionsville Road

Indianapolis, IN 46268

Southern Agricultural Insecticides, Inc.

Mailing Address: 

P.O. Box 218

Palmetto, FL 34220

Physical Address:

7400 Bayshore Road

Rubonia, FL 34221

Tarpaulins

Tarpaulins for fumigation are made by many companies. Use your preferred 

Internet search engine to find additional manufacturers.

Elastec/American Marine

1309 West Main

Carmi, IL 62821

(see website for other locations)
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Temperature Recorders (Portable Type) for Cold Treatment in Self-Regulated Containers

E-36 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Poly-Flex, Inc.

2000 W. Marshall Drive

Grand Prairie, TX 75051

Raven Industries

205 E. 6th Street

Sioux Falls, SD 57104

Reef Industries, Inc. (Griffolyn Division)

9209 Almeda Genoa

Houston, TX 77075

Product: Inflatable tarpaulin (see “Bubble Fumigation System”)

Temperature Recorders (Portable Type) for Cold Treatment in SelfRegulated Containers

Controlyne, Inc.

14 Highpoint

Cedar Grove, NJ 07009

ACR SmartReader 8 Logger)

DeltaTRAK, Inc.

P.O. Box 398

Pleasanton, CA 94566

DeltaTrak T-8, DeltaTrak CDX-100, CDX-300, CDX-22000

GE Sensing (formerly Kaye Instruments)

1100 Technology Park Drive

Billerica, MA 01821

Model DR-2B Digistrip II

International Reactor Corporation

521 Kiser Street

Dayton, OH 45404

Grant Squirrel Meter/Logger, Squirrel 2020 series with thermistors or 

PT100 sensors
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Temperature Recorders/Controllers (Built-In Type) for Cold Treatment in Self-Regulated Containers

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-37

Metrosonics, Inc.

1060 Corporate Center Drive

Oconomowoc, WI 53066

DocuTemp 714A

Remonsys Limited

The Stables

Church Hanborough

WITNEY

Oxfordshire OX29 8AB

United Kingdom

Autolog Time/Temperature Monitor, AUTOLOG 2000 Data Logger, 

Multilog2

Sensitech, Inc.

800 Cummings Center

Suite 258X

Beverly, MA 01915-6197

Data Mentor, RTM 2000 CTU

Wescor, Inc.

370 West 1700 South

Logan, UT 84321

Datapod

Temperature Recorders/Controllers (Built-In Type) for Cold 

Treatment in Self-Regulated Containers

Carrier Transicold Division

Carrier Corporation

United Technologies

P.O. Box 4808, Carrier Parkway

Syracuse, NY 13221-4808

Micro Link 2 DataCorder

Micro Link 2i Controller/DataCorder

Micro Link 3 DataCorder

Micro Link 3i DataCorder

Micro Link 4 Controller

Micro Link 5 Controller
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Temperature Recorders/Controllers (Built-In Type) for Cold Treatment in Self-Regulated Containers

E-38 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Daikin Industries, Ltd.

Umeda Center Building, 2-4-12

Nakazaki-Nishi, Kita-ku, Osaka,

530-8323, Japan

Decos III Microproc. Temp. Controller

Decos IIIA, Decos IIIB

Decos IIIC

Decos IIID

DecosIIIE

DecosIIIF

DecosIIIG

DecosIIIH

DecosIIIi

DecosIIIJ

Decos V

Decos Va

Denso Corporation

1-1 Showa-Cho

Kariya, Aichi 44808661

Japan

Deft1000

Klinge Corporation

4075 East Market Street

York, PA 17402

ThermLogger II

Maersk Container Industry

Qingdao Ltd.

2 Lu, Weishan Cun, Liuting Zhen

Cheng Yang Qu

Qingdao, China

StarCool units CIM5 and CIM6

Matrix Dynamics

501 Doylestown Road

Lansdale, PA 19446
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Temperature Recorders (Portable Type) for Cold Treatment in Warehouses

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-39

Road Warrior 1, HACCP Warrior

Mitsubishi Heavy Industries

3-1, Asahi, Nishi, biwajima-cho, kiyosu,

Aichi Prefecture, 452-8561, Japan

MMCC III & MMCC IIIA, MMCC IIIA-47B

Thermo King Corporation

314 West 90th Street

Minneapolis, MN 55420

Thermoguard PA Microprocessor Temperature Controller

MP-D Microprocessor Controller

Thermoguard PA+ Microprocessor Controllers) (MP-2000, MP-3000, 

MP-3000a, MP-4000)

Temperature Recorders (Portable Type) for Cold Treatment in 

Warehouses

Computer Aided Solutions

8437 Mayfield Rd., Unit 104

Chesterland, OH 44026

Products: RTR-505-Pt Wireless Data Logger

Sensors: thermistor Pt 100

Evidencia LLP

505 Tennessee Street, Suite 502

Memphis, TN 38103

Products: ThermAssureRF, ThermProbeRF

Fluke Electronics Corporation

Comark Instruments

P.O. Box 500

Building 50-209

Beaverton, OR 97077

Comark RF500; RF500A/USA, and RF500AP/USA Wireless 

Temperature Monitoring System

Inteligistics, Inc.

210 William Pitt Way, A11

Pittsburgh, PA 15238
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Temperature Recorders for Hot Water Immersion Treatment

E-40 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

TES-31 wireless recorder, USP14966 sensor

Madge Tech

6 Warner Road

Warner, NH 03278

Model RFOT wireless temperature logger, sensors: RFOT-FR, RFOT-4, 

RFOT-4-TD, RFOT-7, RFOT-12

MicroDAQ.com LTD

879 Maple Street

Contoocook, NH 03229

RTR-505-Pt wireless data logger; sensors: thermistor Pt 100

Temperature Recorders for Hot Water Immersion Treatment

Agri Machinery and Parts, Inc.

3489 All American Boulevard

Orlando, FL 32810

Honeywell strip chart recorders

Conax Technologies

2300 Walden Avenue

Buffalo, NY 14225

Contech

Avenida Circunvalacion #1590

Jardine Del Country, C.P. 42210

Guadalajara, Jalisco

Mexico

Contech data logger

Electro Scientific Industries, Inc.

13900 Science Park Drive

Portland, OR 97229-5497

Dekabox Delade Resister Instrument, Model No. DB62, which may be 

used in the calibration of RTD sensors

Enterprise S.A. de C.V.

Rodriguez Saro 424

Colonia del Valle
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Temperature Recorders for Hot Water Immersion Treatment

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-41

03100 Mexico D.F.

Mexico

Honeywell and Molytek 2702 temperature recorders

Equipos Industriales Guadalajara

Aguador No. 3959-A

Int. 5 Fracc. La Calma

C.P. 45070, Zapopan, Jalisco

Honeywell instruments

Eurotherm Chessell

44621 Guilford Drive, Suite 100

Ashburn, VA 20147

Chessel strip-unit recorder, Model 346

Guiar Industrial, S.A. de C.V.

Rayon No. 989

Colonia Moderna

Sector Juarez

Guadalajara, C.P. 44190, Jalisco

Mexico

Honeywell instruments)

Honeywell International, Inc.

101 Columbia Road

Mailstop - M6/LM

Morristown, NJ 07962

Honeywell instruments)

Instrumentacion y Control Industrial

Santa Martha No. 269

Zapopan, Jalisco

Mexico

National and Honeywell instruments

Laboratorios Jael

Automation Division

Calle 2 Norte #7

Parque Industrila Francisco I. Madero

Puerto Chiapas, Tapachula, Chiapas

Mexico
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Temperature Recorders for Hot Water Immersion Treatment

E-42 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

HyThsoft v 2

Nanmac Corporation

11 Mayhew Street

Framingham, MA 01702

Nanmac data logger, Model H30-1

National Instruments Corporation

11500 N. Mopac Expressway

Austin, TX 78759-3504

National Instruments

Neuberger Messinstrumente Gmbh

Steinerstr 16, D-8000

Munchen, Germany

Neuberger strip chart recorder P1Y

NOJOXTEN S.A. de C.V.

Eduardo Velazquez

Av Santa Margarit Razoa #283

Santa Margarita

Zapopan, Jalisco CP 45140

Mexico

NOJOXTEN-BR Automation Studio V3.09 IEC 61131-3-ST

NZ Automacao Ltda-ME

R. Areal

99 - Box Retiro 01125-20

Sao Paulo SP

Process Technologies, Inc.

154 Whitaker Road

Tampa, FL 33549

Telecontrol Y Systemas Automaticos Sac

Tacna 230 La Arena

Piura, Peru
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Temperature Recorders and Sensors—High Temperature (Niger Seed)

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-43

Vacuum Research Corp.

2419 Smallman Street

Pittsburgh, PA 15222

Molytek temperature recorder, Model 2702

William B. Cresse, Inc.

P.O. Box 906

117 Commerce Avenue

Lake Placid, FL 33852

Honewell strip chart recorder; Temperature Sensors TRD, 100 ohm

Temperature Recorders and Sensors—High Temperature (Niger 

Seed)

Madge Tech Inc.

879 Maple Street

Contoocook, NH 03229 or

P.O. Box 50

Warner, NH 03278

Product: Model HiTemp 140

Omega Engineering, Inc.

P.O. Box 4047

One Omega Drive

Stamford, CT 06907-0047

Product: Model OM-CP-HiTemp 140

Mesa Laboratories, Inc.

Data Trace Division

12100 West 6th Avenue

Lakewood, CO 80228

Models: Data Trace Hi Temp Micropack III

Thermocouple Wire

Omega Engineering, Inc.

P.O. Box 4047

One Omega Drive

Stamford, CT 06907-0047

Product: Type “T” thermocouple wire Catalog No. PR-T-24
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers

E-44 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Thermometers

Cole-Parmer

625 East Bunker Court

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Product: Digital thermometers, hand-held; EW-90080-09 Scientific 

Thermistor Thermometer with USB

Contech

Rafael G. De Avila Aceves

Miguel Galindo 2033, J. del Country

Guadalajara, Jalisco, Mexico, C.P. 44210

Product: Term 2252 thermometer; sensors SP20758-1 (see Measurement 

Specialties) and adapter Part #364-A for Oakton Acorn Temp 4) and 

sensors with YSI 400 series sensors (see Advanced Industrial Services, 

Inc. (AIS)

Cooper Atkins

33 Reeds Gap Road

Middlefield, CT 06455

Product: Electro-Therm hand-held digital thermometer. Instrument Model 

Tm-99a (Electro-Therm), general purpose air/surface probes, 12 feet in 

length, Cat. #20-10, puncture probe #1075 (no longer comes with offset 

adjustment to change the temperature to true temperature with the aid of a 

reference thermometer)

Davis Instruments

625 East Bunker Court

Vernon Hills, IL 60061-1844

Oakton Instruments

P.O. Box 5136

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

South/Latin America

Product: Acorn® Temp 4 Meter (use 400 series thermistor probe; 

suggested general purpose probes are: Oakton air probe #WD-08491-08; 

Oakton penetration probe #WD-08491-16; Oakton general purpose probe 

10, 50, or 100 feet #WD-08491-02, #WD-08491-04, #WD-08491-03)
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers, Glass Mercury, Certified Precision

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-45

Omega Engineering, Inc.

P.O. Box 4047

One Omega Drive

Stamford, CT 06907-0047

Thermo Electric Company, Inc.

60-A Commerce Way

Totowa, NJ 07512

Product: Micromite indicator/calibrator: Model 3115-1-T-0-1-0-1

Probe for Micromite: Model T-18-G-304-0-036-4M1

Thermometers, Glass Mercury, Certified Precision

These thermometers are used as calibration standards in cold treatment, hot 

water dip treatment, and hot air treatment.

Thermometers from other sources may be considered, as long as they meet the 

specifications outlined in Chapter 8: Equipment.

Request approval for thermometers from:

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

DC Scientific Glass

Mail. P.O. Box 1099

Pasadena, MD 21123

Physical Location: 510 McCormick Drive, Suite D

Hanover, MD 21076

Table E-2 DC Scientific Glass - Approved Thermometers 

Catalog No. Type Range Scale 

Division Calibration Points Length (mm) Immersion

210-624 Extreme 

Precision

30 to 124 °F 0.1 °F Minimum of one at 

the treatment 

temperature

610 Total

210-626 Extreme 

Precision

30 to 124 °F 0.1 °F Minimum of one at 

the treatment 

temperature

610 3 inches
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers, Glass Mercury, Certified Precision

E-46 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Fisher Scientific

2000 Park Lane Drive

Pittsburgh, PA 15275

VWR

1310 Goshen Parkway

Westchester, PA 19380

10064F-C ASTM 77 to 131 °F 0.2 °F 5 calibration points 

(32, 80, 95, 115, 

130 °F)

379 Total

10064C-C ASTM 25 to 55 °C 0.1 °C 5 calibration points 

(0, 25, 35, 45, 55 

°C)

379 Total

67C-100MMCASTM 95 to 155 °C 0.2 °C 5 calibration points 

(0, 100, 110, 130, 

150 °C)

379 100 mm

Table E-2 DC Scientific Glass - Approved Thermometers (continued)

Catalog No. Type Range Scale 

Division Calibration Points Length 

(mm) Immersion

Table E-3 Fisher Scientific - Approved Thermometers

Catalog No. Type Range Scale 

Division Calibration Points Length (mm) Immersion

15-142C ASTM Mercury 77 to 131 °F 0.2 °F 5 calibration points 

(32, 80, 95, 115, 

130 °F)

379 Total

15-140C ASTM Mercury 25 to 55 °C 0.1 °C 5 calibration points 

(0, 25, 35, 45, 55 

°C)

379 Total

15-169-120 ASTM Mercury 95 to 155 °C 0.2 °C 5 calibration points 

(0, 100, 110, 130, 

150 °C)

379 Total

Table E-4 VWR - Approved Thermometers

Catalog No. Type Range Scale 

Division

Calibration 

Points

Length 

(mm) Immersion

61099-068 ASTM Mercury 77 to 131 °F 0.2 °F 5 calibration points 

(32, 80, 95, 115, 

130 °F)

379 Total

15-61099-057 ASTM Mercury 25 to 55 °C 0.1 °C 5 calibration points 

(0, 25, 35, 45, 55 

°C)

379 Total
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers, Glass Non-mercury, Certified Precision

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-47

Thermometers, Glass Non-mercury, Certified Precision

These thermometers are used as calibration standards in cold treatment, hot 

water dip treatment, and hot air treatment.

Thermometers from other sources may be considered, as long as they meet the 

specifications outlined in Chapter 8: Equipment.

Request approval for thermometers from:

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Cole-Parmer

625 East Bunker Court

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Thermometers, Digital, Certified Precision

These thermometers are used as a calibration standard and can be substituted 

for mercury and non-mercury thermometers in cold treatment, hot water dip 

treatment, and hot air treatment.

Thermometers from other sources may be considered, as long as they meet the 

specifications outlined in Chapter 8: Equipment.

Request approval for thermometers from:

Table E-5 Cole-Parmer - Approved Thermometers

Catalog No. Type Range Scale 

Division Calibration Points Length (mm) Immersion

K-08007-15 ThermoScientific 

ERTCO®

77 to 131 °F 0.2 °F 5 calibration points 

(32, 80, 95, 115, 

130 °F)

379 Total

K-08007-14 ThermoScientific 

ERTCO®

25 to 55 °C 0.1 °C 5 calibration points 

(0, 25, 35, 45, 55 

°C)

379 Total

EW-08007-20 ThermoScientific 

ERTCO®

95 to 155 °C 0.2 °C 5 calibration points 

(0, 100, 110, 130, 

150 °C)

379 100 mm
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers, Digital, Certified Precision

E-48 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

USDA-APHIS-PPQ-S&T-TMT

13601 Old Cutler Road, Bldg. 63

Miami, FL 33158 USA

Phone: 305-278-4877

Fax: 305-278-4898

email: ppqtmt@usda.gov

Contech

Rafael G. De Avila Aceves

Miguel Galindo 2033, J. del Country

Guadalajara, Jalisco, Mexico, C.P. 44210

Term 2252 thermometer; sensors SP20758-1 (see Measurement 

Specialties) and adapter Part #364-A for Oakton Acorn Temp 4) and 

sensors with YSI 400 series sensors (see Advanced Industrial Services, 

Inc. (AIS)))

Eutech Instruments

For Africa, Asia, Middle East and Pacific Rim:

Eutech Instruments Pte Ltd.

Blk 55, Ayer Rajah Crescent, #04-16/24, Singapore 139949

For Europe:

Eutech Instruments Europe B.V.

P.O. Box 254, 3860 AG Nijkerk

The Netherlands

For North and South America:

Oakton Instruments

P.O. Box 5136

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Acorn® Temp 4 Meter (use 400 series thermistor probe; suggested 

general purpose probes are: Oakton air probe #WD-08491-08; Oakton 

penetration probe # WD-08491-16; Oakton general purpose probe 10, 50, 

or 100 feet #WD-08491-02, #WD-08491-04, #WD-08491-03; Oakton 

Acron Temp 5 #EW-35626-10))

Oakton products can be purchased at numerous distributors such as ColeParmer, Davis Instruments, etc.

Cole-Parmer

625 East Bunker Court
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers, Digital, Certified Precision

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-49

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

For China:

Thermo Fisher Scientific

Building 6, No. 27 Xin Jinqiao Road

Shanghai 201206, China

For India:

Thermo Fisher Scientific

102, 104 Delphi ‘C’ Wing

Hiranandani Business Park

Powai, Mumbai - 400 076

Catalog # 60010-85: Digital thermometer with range -330 to 2210 °F or -

201 to 1210 °C; Resolution 0.1 °C/°F at 100.0 to 999.9 C/F; Accuracy +/- 

0.1 °C/°F at 100 to 999.9 °C/°F; various probe lengths. Request NIST 

traceable calibration with 5 temperature points or more and a certificate.

Fluke Corporation

6920 Seaway Boulevard

Everett, WA 98203

Model Name 1551A -9 to 20: 1551A EX Thermometer, Fixed RTD, -50 

°C to -160 °C (-58 °F to 320 °F), choice of sensor length can be 9, 12, and 

20 inches; Accuracy +/- 0.05 °C. Includes NVLAP-accredited report of 

calibration; NIST traceable, User’s guide on CD-ROM, 3 AAA batteries

Model Name 1552A -9 to 20: 1552A EX Thermometer, Fixed RTD, -80 

°C to 300 °C (-112 °F to 572 °F), Sensor length 12 inches; Accuracy +/- 

0.05 °C; Includes NVLAP-accredited report of calibration; NIST 

traceable, User’s guide on CD-ROM, 3 AAA batteries

OpticsPlanet, Inc.

3150 Commercial Avenue

Northbrook, IL 60062

Catalog #C1-LB-4000: Control Company Digital Data Logger 

Thermometer with Probe 4000/61220-601; Accuracy +/- 0.05 °C; 

Request NIST calibration and certificate with 5 or more temperature 

points in treatment range.
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers, Digital, Certified Precision

E-50 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group

234 Old Weaverville Road

Asheville, NC 28804-1228

Model DST600 Series: Precision hand-held reference thermometer; 

Range -50 °F to 500 °F; Accuracy +/- 0.1 °C/°F over a 1 year period; with 

certificate of calibration. Request NIST calibration and certificate with 

temperature points in treatment range; choice of temperature sensors.

Tech Instrumentation, Inc.

750 E. Kiowa Avenue

P.O. Box 2029

Elizabeth, CO 80107

Catalog #TL-1W: Digital thermometer with range -44 °F to 600 °F and 

-43 °C to 315 °C; Resolution 0.01 degrees; Accuracy -/+ 0.1 F below 300 

°F; Various stem lengths; 4 point NIST traceable calibration included; 1 

year warranty.

Thermco Products, Inc.

10 Millpond Drive

Lafayette, NJ 07848

Catalog #ACCD650P: High Precision Digital Pt100 Platinum 

Thermometer; Range Pt100: -200 °C to +850 °C: Accuracy Pt100 +/- 

0.03 from -50 °C to +199.99 °C; with certificate of calibration. Request 

NIST calibration and certificate with 5 or more temperature points in 

treatment range; ACCD1019 High Precision Probe Pt100 Platinum 12” 

(405 mm)

Thermoprobe, Inc.

112-A Jetport Drive

Pearl, MS 39208

Catalog #TL-1W: Digital thermometer with range -44 °F to 600 °F and 

-43 °C to 315 °C; Resolution 0.01 degrees; Accuracy -/+ 0.1 F below 300 

°F; Various stem lengths; 4 point NIST traceable calibration included; 1 

year warranty.

ThermoWorks

1762 W. 20 S., #100

Lindon, UT 84042
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers, Certified Precision, Approved Calibration Companies

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-51

Model P600 Series: Precision hand-held reference thermometer: Range

-328 °F to 842 °F; Accuracy 0.05 °F from -148 to 302 °F; with certificate 

of calibration. Request NIST calibration and certificate with temperature 

points in treatment range; choice of temperature sensors.

Thermometers, Certified Precision, Approved Calibration 

Companies

Conduct thermometer calibration by USDA-approved calibration companies. 

Follow the procedures for calibration summarized in Equipment.

DC Scientific Glass

Mail. P.O. Box 1099

Pasadena, MD 21123

Physical Location: 510 McCormick Drive, Suite D

Hanover, MD 21076

Barnstead International

(sold as Thermo Scientific brand)

2555 Kerper Boulevard

Dubuque, IA 52001

Fluke Corporation

6920 Seaway Boulevard

Everett, WA 98203

ICL Calibration Laboratories, Inc.

1501 Decker Avenue, Suite 118

Stuart, FL 34994

Calibration, repair, and adjustment of the Thermoprobe TL-1W

INNOCAL

625 East Bunker Court M/S 14

Vernon Hills, IL 60061-1844

Instrumentation Technical Services

20 Hagerty Boulevard, Suite 1

West Chester, PA 19382
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers, Recorders, and Sensors—General Use

E-52 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Measurement Assurance Technology

1600 Corporate Court, Suite 150

Irving, TX 75038

Phoenix Calibration DR

Calle 8, No. 9

Rosmil Residential

Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic

Thermoprobe, Inc.

112-A Jetport Drive

Pearl, MS 39208

VWR

Radnor Corporate Center

Building One, Suite 200

P.O. Box 6660

100 Matsonford Road

Radnor, PA 19087-8660

Thermometers, Recorders, and Sensors—General Use

CAS Datalogger

12628 Chillicothe Road, Unit J

Chesterland, OH 44026

dataTaker DT-85, Delphin Expert Logger Models 100, 200, 300
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Thermometers, Recorders, and Sensors—General Use

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-53

Cole-Parmer

625 East Bunker Court

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Contech

Rafael G. De Avila Aceves

Miguel Galindo 2033, J. del Country

Guadalajara, Jalisco, Mexico, C.P. 44210

Term 2252 thermometer; sensors SP20758-1 (see Measurement 

Specialties) and adapter Part #364-A for Oakton Acorn Temp 4) and 

sensors with YSI 400 series sensors (see Advanced Industrial Services, 

Inc. (AIS)))

GEC Instruments

5530 NW 97th Street

Gainesville, FL 32653

Model S16TC Type T Thermocouple

Model S4TC Type T Thermocouple

MadgeTech, Inc.

6 Warner Road

Warner, NH 03278

Model HITEMP 150A

Mesa Laboratories, Inc.

Data Trace Division

12100 West 6th Avenue

Models: Data Tracers, STO, LTO, and Micropack III

Nanmac Corporation

11 Mayhew Street

Framingham, MA 01702

National Instruments Corporation

11500 N. Mopac Expressway

Austin, TX 78759-3504

Nordic Sensors Industrial, Inc. (NSI)

1350 rue Nationale
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Tubing, Gas-Sampling

E-54 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Terrebonne, Quebec

Canada J6W 6M1

Omega Engineering, Inc.

P.O. Box 4047

One Omega Drive

Stamford, CT 06907-0047

Tubing, Gas-Sampling

(polyethylene or polypropylene)

Cole-Parmer

625 East Bunker Court

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Consolidated Plastics Co. Inc.

4700 Prosper Drive

Stow, OH 44224

Fisher Scientific

2000 Park Lane Drive

Pittsburgh, PA 15275

Thomas Scientific

P.O. Box 99

99 High Hill Road at I-295

Swedesboro, NJ 08085-0099

Vacuum Pump

Air compressor for use with vacuum fumigation chambers.

Neward Enterprises, Inc.

Distributor: McMaster-Carr

P.O. Box 740100

Atlanta, GA 30374-0100

Product: Mityvac® hand-held vacuum pump. Zinc-alloy pump #9963K12
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Vapam

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-55

Sargent Welch

P.O. Box 4130

Buffalo, NY 14217

Vapam

(see Metam-Sodium)

Vapor Heat/Forced Hot Air (VH/FHA) Chamber Manufacturers

Quarantine Technologies International

463 Frankton Road

Queenstown, New Zealand

Forced Hot Air Model: Wide Body

FoodPro International, Inc. (FHA)

P.O. Box 53110

San Jose, CA, 95153-0110

Forced Hot Air Model 5S-VID-CS

Sanshu Sangyo Co., LTD.

11-2, Nanei 4-chome

Kagoshima 891-01 Japan

Model EHK-600P; EHK-1000P

Vapor Heat/Forced Hot Air (VH/FHA) Recorders

CHINO Works America, Inc.

Los Angeles Office

22301 S. Western Ave.

Suite 105

Torrence, CA 90501

Chicago Office

121 S. Wilke Rd.

Suite 226

Arlington Heights, IL. 60005
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Volatilizer

E-56 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66

Product: Model LE5100 Hybrid recorder LE5200; LE11733RNI; AA 

series;

LE5133-111; AA-03-NRA

Contech

Rafael G. De Avila Aceves

Miguel Galindo 2033, J. del Country

Guadalajara, Jalisco, Mexico, C.P. 44210

Product: Contech monitoring and distributed control system with Smart 

Seda to operate up to six forced air chambers.

Leeds & Northrup Instruments

615 E. Carson Street

Pittsburg, PA 15203-1021

Product: Micromax® Process Management Center 1986

OMEGA Engineering, INC.

800 Connecticut Ave.

Suite, 5N01

Norwalk, CT 06854

Product: OM6 data products recorder

Volatilizer

(for volatilizing liquid methyl bromide into a fumigant gas)

Degesch America, Inc.

Houston Division

P.O. Box 451036

Houston, TX 77245

Vacudyne, Inc.

375 East Joe Orr Road

Chicago Heights, IL 60411
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Warning Signs and Placards

05/2023-66 Treatment Manual E-57

Warning Signs and Placards

Carlton Industries, L.P.

P.O. Box 280

La Grange, TX 78945

Champion America

P.O. Box 3092

Stony Creek, CT 06405
Appendix E Reference Guide to Commercial Suppliers of Treatment and Related Safety Equipment

Warning Signs and Placards

E-58 Treatment Manual 05/2023-66
12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-1

Appendix

F Appendix F

EPA Crop Groups

Contents

Crop Group 1: Root and Tuber F-2

Crop Group 2: Leaves of Root and Tuber Vegetables F-3

Crop Group 3: Bulb Vegetable (Allium spp.) F-4

Crop Group 4: Leafy Vegetables (except Brassica vegetables) F-5

Crop Group 5: Brassica (Cole) Leafy Vegetables F-6

Crop Group 6: Legume Vegetables (succulent or dried) F-7

Crop Group 7: Leaves of Legume Vegetables F-8

Crop Group 8: Fruiting Vegetables F-9

Crop Group 9: Cucurbit Vegetables F-10

Crop Group 10: Citrus Fruit F-11

Crop Group 11: Pome Fruit F-12

Crop Group 12: Stone Fruit F-13

Crop Group 13: Berries and Small Fruit F-14

Crop Group 14: Tree Nuts F-16

Crop Group 15: Cereal Grains F-17

Crop Group 16: Forage, Fodder, and Straw of Cereal Grains F-18

Crop Group 17: Grass, Forage, Fodder, and Hay F-19

Crop Group 18: Nongrass Animal Feeds (Forage, Fodder, Straw, and Hay) 

F-20

Crop Group 19: Herbs and Spices F-21

Crop Group 20: Oilseed F-23

Crop Group 21: Edible Fungi F-24

Crop Group 22: Stalk, Stem, and Leaf Petiole Vegetables F-25

Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels F-26

Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible Peels F-30

Introduction

The EPA requires chemical tolerances for residue data on raw agricultural 

commodities intended for human or animal consumption.

This Appendix lists the individual commodities in each crop group and is 

intended as a quick reference for the reader. These tables are updated annually 

and may not reflect the current crop groups in the EPA Crop Group tables 

(CFR 40 180.41). Refer to the EPA Crop Group tables for the most recent 

information. All commodities included in the EPA sub-groups of each EPA 

crop group are also eligible for the FIFRA Section 18 exemption fumigation.
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 1: Root and Tuber

F-2 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 1: Root and Tuber

Table F-1 Crop Group 1: Root and Tuber

Arracacha (Arracacia xanthorrhiza)

Arrowroot (Maranta arundinacea)

Artichoke, Chinese (Stachys affinis)

Artichoke, Jerusalem (Helianthus tuberosus)

Beet, garden (Beta vulgaris)

Beet, sugar (Beta vulgaris)

Burdock, edible (Arctium lappa)

Canna, edible (Queensland arrowroot) (Canna indica)

Carrot (Daucus carota)

Cassava, bitter and sweet (Manihot esculenta)

Celeriac (celery root) (Apium graveolens var. rapaceum)

Chayote (root) (Sechium edule)

Chervil, turnip-rooted (Chaerophyllum bulbosum)

Chicory (Cichorium intybus)

Chufa (Cyperus esculentus)

Dasheen (taro) (Colocasia esculenta)

Ginger (Zingiber officinale)

Ginseng (Panax quinquefolius)

Horseradish (Armoracia rusticana)

Leren (Calathea allouia)

Parsley, turnip-rooted (Petroselinum crispum var. tuberosum)

Parsnip (Pastinaca sativa)

Potato (Solanum tuberosum)

Radish (Raphanus sativus)

Radish, oriental (daikon) (Raphanus sativus subvar. longipinnatus)

Rutabaga (Brassica campestris var. napobrassica)

Salsify (oyster plant) (Tragopogon porrifolius)

Salsify, black (Scorzonera hispanica)

Salsify, Spanish (Scolymus hispanicus)

Skirret (Sium sisarum)

Sweet potato (Ipomoea batatas)

Tanier (cocoyam) (Xanthosoma sagittifolium)

Turmeric (Curcuma longa)

Turnip (Brassica rapa var. rapa)

Yam bean (jicama, manoic pea) (Pachyrhizus spp.)

Yam, true (Dioscorea spp.)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 2: Leaves of Root and Tuber Vegetables

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-3

Crop Group 2: Leaves of Root and Tuber Vegetables

Table F-2 Crop Group 2: Leaves of Root and Tuber Vegetables

Beet, garden (Beta vulgaris)

Beet, sugar (Beta vulgaris)

Burdock, edible (Arctium lappa)

Carrot (Daucus carota)

Cassava, bitter and sweet (Manihot esculenta)

Celeriac (celery root) (Apium graveolens var. rapaceum)

Chervil, turnip-rooted (Chaerophyllum bulbosum)

Chicory (Cichorium intybus)

Dasheen (taro) (Colocasia esculenta)

Parsnip (Pastinaca sativa)

Radish (Raphanus sativus)

Radish, oriental (daikon) (Raphanus sativus subvar. longipinnatus)

Rutabaga (Brassica campestris var. napobrassica)

Salsify, black (Scorzonera hispanica)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 3: Bulb Vegetable (Allium spp.)

F-4 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 3: Bulb Vegetable (Allium spp.)

Table F-3 Crop Group 3: Bulb Vegetable (Allium spp.)

Chive, fresh leaves (Allium schoenoprasum L.)

Chive, Chinese, fresh leaves (Allium tuberosum Rottler ex Spreng)

Daylily, bulb (Hemerocallus fulva (L.) L. var. fulva)

Elegans hosta (Hosta sieboldiana (Hook.) Engl)

Fritillaria, bulb (Fritillaria L. fritillary)

Fritillaria, leaves (Fritillaria L. fritillary)

Garlic, bulb (Allium sativum)

Garlic, bulb (Allium sativum L. var. sativum) (A. sativum Common Garlic Group)

Garlic, great headed, bulb (Allium ampeloprasum L. var. ampeloprasum) (A. ampeloprasum

Great Headed Garlic Group)

Garlic, great headed (elephant) (Allium ampeloprasum var. ampeloprasum)

Garlic, Serpent, bulb (Allium sativum var. ophioscorodon or A. sativum Ophioscorodon 

Group)

Kurrat (Allium kurrat Schweinf. Ex. K. Krause or A. ampeloprasum Kurrat Group)

Lady’s leek (Allium cernuum Roth)

Leek (Allium ampeloprasum, A. porrum, A. tricoccum)

Leek Allium porrum L. (syn: A. ampeloprasum L. var. porrum (L.) J. Gay) (A. ampeloprasum

Leek Group)

Leek, wild (Allium tricoccum Aiton)

Lily, bulb (Lilium spp. (Lilium Leichtlinii var. maximowiczii, Lilium lancifolium)

Onion, Beltsville bunching (Allium x proliferum (Moench) Schard.) (syn: Allium fistulosum L. x 

A. cepa L.)

Onion, Chinese, bulb (Allium chinense G. Don.) (syn: A. bakeri Regel)

Onion, dry bulb and green (Allium cepa, A. fistulosum)

Onion, fresh (Allium fistulosum L. var. caespitosum Makino)

Onion, green (Allium cepa L. var. cepa) (A. cepa Common Onion Group)

Onion, macrostem (Allium macrostemom) Bunge

Onion, pearl (Allium porrum var. sectivum or A. ampeloprasum Pearl Onion Group)

Onion, potato, bulb (Allium cepa L. var. aggregatum G. Don.) (A. cepa Aggregatum Group)

Onion, tree, tops (Allium x proliferum (Moench) Schrad. ex Willd.) (syn: A. cepa var. 

proliferum (Moench) Regel; A. cepa L. var. bulbiferum L.H. Bailey; A. cepa L. var. viviparum

(Metz.) Alef.)

Onion, Welsh (Allium fistulosum)

Onion, Welsh, tops (Allium fistulosum L.)

Shallot (Allium cepa var. cepa)

Shallot, bulb (Allium cepa var. aggregatum G. Don.)

Shallot, fresh leaves (Allium cepa var. aggregatum G. Don.)

Cultivars, varieties, and/or hybrids of these.
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 4: Leafy Vegetables (except Brassica vegetables)

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-5

Crop Group 4: Leafy Vegetables (except Brassica vegetables)

Table F-4 Crop Group 4: Leafy Vegetables (except Brassica vegetables)

Amaranth (leafy amaranth, Chinese spinach, tampala) (Amaranthus spp.)

Arugula (Roquette) (Eruca sativa)

Cardoon (Cynara cardunculus)

Celery (Apium graveolens var. dulce)

Celery, Chinese (Apium graveolens var. secalinum)

Celtuce (Lactuca sativa var. angustana)

Chervil (Anthriscus cerefolium)

Chrysanthemum, edible-leaved (Chrysanthemum coronarium var. coronarium)

Chrysanthemum, garland (Chrysanthemum coronarium var. spatiosum)

Corn salad (Valerianella locusta)

Cress, garden (Lepidium sativum)

Cress, upland (yellow rocket, winter cress) (Barbarea vulgaris)

Dandelion (Taraxacum officinale)

Dock (sorrel) (Rumex spp.)

Endive (escarole) (Cichorium endivia)

Fennel, Florence (finochio) (Foeniculum vulgare Azoricum Group)

Lettuce, head and leaf (Lactuca sativa)

Orach (Atriplex hortensis)

Parsley (Petroselinum crispum)

Purslane, garden (Portulaca oleracea)

Purslane, winter (Montia perfoliata)

Radicchio (red chicory) (Cichorium intybus)

Rhubarb (Rheum rhabarbarum)

Spinach (Spinacia oleracea)

Spinach, New Zealand (Tetragonia tetragonioides, T. expansa)

Spinach, vine (Malabar spinach, Indian spinach) (Basella alba)

Swiss chard (Beta vulgaris var. cicla)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 5: Brassica (Cole) Leafy Vegetables

F-6 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 5: Brassica (Cole) Leafy Vegetables

Table F-5 Crop Group 5: Brassica (Cole) Leafy Vegetables

Broccoli (Brassica oleracea var. botrytis)

Broccoli, Chinese (gai lon) (Brassica alboglabra)

Broccoli raab (rapini) (Brassica campestris)

Brussels sprouts (Brassica oleracea var. gemmifera)

Cabbage (Brassica oleracea)

Cabbage, Chinese (bok choy) (Brassica chinensis)

Cabbage, Chinese (napa) (Brassica pekinensis)

Cabbage, Chinese mustard (gai choy) (Brassica campestris)

Cauliflower (Brassica oleracea var. botrytis)

Cavalo broccolo (Brassica oleracea var. botrytis)

Collards (Brassica oleracea var. acephala)

Kale (Brassica oleracea var. acephala)

Kohlrabi (Brassica oleracea var. gongylodes)

Mizuna (Brassica rapa Japonica Group)

Mustard Greens (Brassica juncea)

Mustard spinach (Brassica rapa Perviridis Group)

Rape greens (Brassica napus)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 6: Legume Vegetables (succulent or dried)

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-7

Crop Group 6: Legume Vegetables (succulent or dried)

Table F-6 Crop Group 6: Legume Vegetables (succulent or dried)

Bean (Lupinus spp.) (includes grain lupin, sweet lupin, white lupin, and white sweet lupin)

Bean (Phaseolus spp.) (includes field bean, kidney bean, lima bean, navy bean, pinto bean, 

runner bean, snap bean, tepary bean, wax bean)

Bean (Vigna spp.) (includes adzuki bean, asparagus bean, blackeyed pea, catjang, Chinese 

longbean, cowpea, Crowder pea, moth bean, mung bean, rice bean, southern pea, urd bean 

yardlong bean)

Broad bean (fava bean) (Vicia faba)

Chickpea (garbanzo bean) (Cicer arietinum)

Guar (Cyamopsis tetragonoloba)

Jackbean (Canavalia ensiformis)

Lablab bean (hyacinth bean) (Lablab purpureus)

Lentil (Lens esculenta)

Pea (Pisum spp.) includes dwarf pea, edible-pod pea, English pea, field pea, garden pea, 

green pea, snow pea, sugar snap pea)

Pigeon pea (Cajanus cajan)

Soybean (Glycine max)

Soybean (immature seed) (Glycine max)

Sword bean (Canavalia gladiata)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 7: Leaves of Legume Vegetables

F-8 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 7: Leaves of Legume Vegetables

Table F-7 Crop Group 7: Leaves of Legume Vegetables

Any cultivar of bean (Phaseolus spp.), field pea (Pisum spp.), and soybean (Glycine max). 

Plant parts of any legume vegetable included in the legume vegetables that will be used as 

animal feed.
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 8: Fruiting Vegetables

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-9

Crop Group 8: Fruiting Vegetables

Table F-8 Crop Group 8: Fruiting Vegetables

African eggplant (Solanum macrocarpon L.)

Bush tomato (Solanum centrale J.M. BlackCocona, Solanum sessiliflorum Dunal)

Currant tomato (Lycopersicon pimpinellifolium)

Eggplant (Solanum melongena L.)

Garden huckleberry (Solanum scabrum Mill)

Goji berry (Lycium barbarum)

Groundcherry (Physalis alkekengi L., P. grisea (Waterf.) M. Martinez, P. peruviana L., P. 

pubescens)

Martynia (Proboscidea louisianica (Mill.) Thell)

Naranjilla (Solanum quitoense Lam)

Okra (Abelmoschus esculentus (L.) Moench)

Pea eggplant (Solanum torvum Sw.)

Pepino (Solanum muricatum Aiton)

Pepper, bell (Capsicum annuum L. var. annuum, Capsicum spp.)

Pepper, nonbell (Capsicum chinense Jacq., C. annuum L. var. annuum, C. frutescens L., C. 

baccatum L., C. pubescens Ruiz & Pav., Capsicum spp.)

Roselle (Hibiscus sabdariffa L.)

Scarlet eggplant (Solanum aethiopicum L.)

Sunberry (Solanum retroflexum Dunal)

Tomatillo (Physalis philadelphica Lam)

Tomato (Solanum lycopersicum L., Solanum lycopersicum L. var. lycopersicum)

Tree tomato (Solanum betaceum Cav)

Cultivars, varieties, and/or hybrids of these
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 9: Cucurbit Vegetables

F-10 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 9: Cucurbit Vegetables

Table F-9 Crop Group 9: Cucurbit Vegetables

Chayote (fruit) (Sechium edule)

Chinese waxgourd (Chinese preserving melon) (Benincasa hispida)

Citron melon (Citrullus lanatus var. citroides)

Cucumber (Cucumis sativus)

Gherkin (Cucumis anguria)

Gourd, edible (Lagenaria spp.) (includes hyotan, cucuzza); (Luffa acutangula, L. cylindrica) 

(includes hechima, Chinese okra)

Momordica spp. (includes balsam apple, balsam pear, bitter melon, Chinese cucumber)

Muskmelon (hybrids and/or cultivars of Cucumis melo) (includes true cantaloupe, cantaloupe, casaba, crenshaw melon, golden pershaw melon, honeydew melon, honey balls, 

mango melon, Persian melon, pineapple melon, Santa Claus melon, and snake melon)

Pumpkin (Cucurbita spp.)

Squash, summer (Cucurbita pepo var. melopepo) (includes crookneck squash, scallop 

squash, straightneck squash, vegetable marrow, zucchini)

Squash, winter (Cucurbita maxima; C. moschata) (includes butternut squash, calabaza, 

hubbard squash); (C. mixta; C. pepo) (includes acorn squash, spaghetti squash)

Watermelon (includes hybrids and/or varieties of Citrullus lanatus)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 10: Citrus Fruit

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-11

Crop Group 10: Citrus Fruit

Table F-10 Crop Group 10: Citrus Fruit

Australian desert lime (Eremocitrus glauca (Lindl.) Swingle)

Australian finger lime (Microcitrus australasica (F. Muell.) Swingle)

Australian round lime (Microcitrus australis (A. cunn. Ex Mudie) Swingle)

Brown River finger lime (Microcitrus papuana Winters)

Calamondin (Citrofortunella microcarpa (Bunge) Wijnands)

Citron (Citrus medica L.)

Citrus hybrids (Citrus spp., Eremocitrus spp., Fortunella spp., Microcitrus spp., and Poncirus

spp.)

Grapefruit (Citrus paradisi Macfad)

Japanese summer grapefruit (Citrus natsudaidai Hayata)

Kumquat (Fortunella spp.)

Lemon (Citrus limon (L.) Burm. f.)

Lime (Citrus aurantiifolia (Christm.) Swingle)

Mediterranean mandarin (Citrus deliciosa Ten)

Mount White lime (Microcitrus garrowayae (F.M. Bailey) Swingle)

New Guinea wild lime (Microcitrus warburgiana (F.M. Bailey) Tanaka)

Orange, sour (Citrus aurantium L.)

Orange, sweet (Citrus sinensis (L.) Osbeck)

Pummelo (Citrus maxima (Burm.) Merr)

Russell River lime (Microcitrus inodora (F.M. Bailey) Swingle)

Satsuma mandarin (Citrus unshiu Marcow)

Sweet lime (Citrus limetta Risso)

Tachibana orange (Citrus tachibana (Makino) Tanaka)

Tahiti lime (Citrus latifolia (Yu. Tanaka) Tanaka)

Tangelo (Citrus x tangelo J.W. Ingram & H.E. Moore)

Tangerine (Mandarin) (Citrus reticulata Blanco)

Tangor (Citrus nobilis Lour)

Trifoliate orange (Poncirus trifoliata (L.) Raf.)

Uniq fruit (Citrus aurantium Tangelo Group)

Cultivars, varieties, and/or hybrids of these
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 11: Pome Fruit

F-12 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 11: Pome Fruit

Table F-11 Crop Group 11: Pome Fruit

Apple (Malus domestica Borkh.)

Azarole (Crataegus azarolus L.)

Crabapple (Malus sylvestris (L.) Mill., M. prunifolia (Willd.) Borkh.)

Loquat (Eriobotrya japonica (Thunb.) Lindl.)

Mayhaw (Crataegus aestivalis (Walter) Torr. & A. Gray, C. opaca Hook. & Arn., and C. rufula

Sarg.)

Medlar (Mespilus germanica L.)

Pear (Pyrus communis L.)

Pear, Asian (Pyrus pyrifolia (Burm. f.) Nakai var. culta (Makino) Nakai)

Quince (Cydonia oblonga Mill.)

Quince, Chinese (Chaenomeles speciosa (Sweet) Nakai, Pseudocydonia sinensis (Thouin) 

C.K. Schneid.)

Quince, Japanese (Chaenomeles japonica (Thunb.) Lindl. ex Spach)

Tejocote (Crataegus mexicana DC.)

Cultivars, varieties, and/or hybrids of these
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 12: Stone Fruit

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-13

Crop Group 12: Stone Fruit

Table F-12 Crop Group 12: Stone Fruit

Apricot (Prunus armeniaca)

Apricot, Japanese (Prunus mume)

Capulin (Prunus serotina)

Cherry, black (Prunus serotina)

Cherry, Nanking (Prunus tomentosa)

Cherry, sweet (Prunus avium)

Cherry, tart (Prunus cerasus)

Jujube, Chinese (Ziziphus jujuba)

Nectarine (Prunus persica)

Peach (Prunus persica)

Plum (Prunus domestica, Prunus spp.)

Plum, American (Prunus americana)

Plum, beach (Prunus maritima)

Plum, Canada (Prunus nigra)

Plum, cherry (Prunus cerasifera)

Plum, Chickasaw (Prunus angustifolia)

Plum, Damson (Prunus domestica spp. insititia)

Plum, Japanese (Prunus salicina)

Plum, Klamath (Prunus subcordata)

Plum, prune (Prunus domestica L. subsp. domestica)

Plumcot (Prunus hybr.)

Sloe (Prunus spinosa L.)

Cultivars, varieties, and/or hybrids of these
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 13: Berries and Small Fruit

F-14 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 13: Berries and Small Fruit

Table F-13 Crop Group 13: Berries and Small Fruit 

Amur river grape (Vitis amurensis Rupr)

Aronia berry (Aronia spp.)

Bayberry (Myrica spp.)

Bearberry (Arctostaphylos uva-ursi)

Bilberry (Vaccinium myrtillus L.)

Blackberry (Rubus spp.) (including Andean blackberry, arctic blackberry, bingleberry, black 

satin berry, boysenberry, brombeere, California blackberry, Chesterberry, Cherokee blackberry, Cheyenne blackberry, common blackberry, coryberry, darrowberry, dewberry, Dirksen 

thornless berry, evergreen blackberry, Himalayaberry, hullberry, lavacaberry, loganberry, lowberry, Lucretiaberry, mammoth blackberry, marionberry, mora, mures deronce, nectarberry, 

Northern dewberry, olallieberry, Oregon evergreen berry, phenomenalberry, rangeberry, 

rossberry, Shawnee blackberry, Southern dewberry, tayberry, youngberry, zarzamora, and 

cultivars, varieties, and/or hybrids of these)

Blueberry, highbush (Vaccinium spp.)

Blueberry, lowbush (Vaccinium angustifolium Aiton)

Buffalo currant (Ribes aureum Pursh)

Buffaloberry (Shepherdia argentea (Pursh) Nutt.)

Che (Cudrania tricuspidata Bur. Ex Lavallee)

Chilean guava (Myrtus ugni Mol.)

Chokecherry (Prunus virginiana L.)

Cloudberry (Rubus chamaemorus L.)

Cranberry (Vaccinium macrocarpon Aiton)

Currant, black (Ribes nigrum L.)

Currant, red (Ribes rubrum L.)

Elderberry (Sambucus spp.)

European barberry (Berberis vulgaris L.)

Gooseberry (Ribes spp.)

Grape (Vitis spp.)

Highbush cranberry (Viburnum opulus L. var. Americanum Aiton)

Honeysuckle, edible (Lonicera caerula L. var. emphyllocalyx Nakai, Lonicera caerula L. var. 

edulis Turcz. ex herder)

Huckleberry (Gaylussacia spp.)

Jostaberry (Ribes x nidigrolaria Rud. Bauer and A. Bauer)

Juneberry (Saskatoon berry) (Amelanchier spp.)

Kiwifruit, fuzzy (Actinidia deliciosa A. Chev.) (C.F. Liang and A.R. Fergusons, Actinidia 

chinensis Planch.)

Kiwifruit, hardy (Actinidia arguta (Siebold and Zucc.) Planch. ex Miq)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 13: Berries and Small Fruit

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-15

Lingonberry (Vaccinium vitis-idaea L.)

Maypop (Passiflora incarnata L.)

Mountain pepper berries (Tasmannia lanceolata) (Poir.) A.C. Sm.

Mulberry (Morus spp.)

Muntries (Kunzea pomifera F. Muell.)

Native currant (Acrotriche depressa R. BR.)

Partridgeberry (Mitchella repens L.)

Phalsa (Grewia subinaequalis DC.)

Pincherry (Prunus pensylvanica L.f.)

Raspberry, black and red (Rubus spp.)

Riberry (Syzygium luehmannii)

Salal (Gaultheria shallon Pursh.)

Schisandra berry (Schisandra chinensis (Turcz.) Baill.)

Sea buckthorn (Hippophae rhamnoides L.)

Serviceberry (Sorbus spp.)

Strawberry (Fragaria x ananassa Duchesne)

Wild raspberry (Rubus muelleri Lefevre ex. P.J. Mull)

Cultivars, varieties, and/or hybrids of these

Table F-13 Crop Group 13: Berries and Small Fruit (continued)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 14: Tree Nuts

F-16 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 14: Tree Nuts

Table F-14 Crop Group 14: Tree Nuts

Almond (Prunus dulcis)

Beech nut (Fagus spp.)

Brazil nut (Bertholletia excelsa)

Butternut (Juglans cinerea)

Cashew (Anacardium occidentale)

Chestnut (Castanea spp.)

Chinquapin (Castanea pumila)

Filbert (hazelnut) (Corylus spp.)

Hickory nut (Carya spp.)

Macadamia nut (bush nut) (Macadamia spp.)

Pecan (Carya illinoensis)

Walnut, black and English (Persian) (Juglans spp.)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 15: Cereal Grains

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-17

Crop Group 15: Cereal Grains

Table F-15 Crop Group 15: Cereal Grains

Barley (Hordeum spp.)

Buckwheat (Fagopyrum esculentum)

Corn (Zea mays)

Millet, pearl (Pennisetum glaucum)

Millet, proso (Panicum milliaceum)

Oats (Avena spp.)

Popcorn (Zea mays var. everta)

Rice (Oryza sativa)

Rye (Secale cereale)

Sorghum (milo) (Sorghum spp.)

Teosinte (Euchlaena mexicana)

Triticale (Triticum-Secale hybrids)

Wheat (Triticum spp.)

Wild rice (Zizania aquatica)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 16: Forage, Fodder, and Straw of Cereal Grains

F-18 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 16: Forage, Fodder, and Straw of Cereal Grains

Table F-16 Crop Group 16: Forage, Fodder,and Straw of Cereal Grains

Crop Group 16 includes forage, fodder, stover, and straw of all commodities included in corn, 

wheat, and the cereal grains group.
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 17: Grass, Forage, Fodder, and Hay

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-19

Crop Group 17: Grass, Forage, Fodder, and Hay

Table F-17 Crop Group 17: Grass, Forage, Fodder, and Hay

The commodities included in Crop Group 17 are forage, fodder, stover, and hay of any grass, 

Gramineae/Poaceae family (either green or cured) except sugarcane, and those included in 

the cereal grains group, that will be fed to or grazed by livestock, all pasture and range 

grasses and grasses grown for hay or silage (e.g. grass forage, fodder, and hay of Bermuda 

grass, bluegrass, bromegrass, and fescue.)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 18: Nongrass Animal Feeds (Forage, Fodder, Straw, and Hay)

F-20 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 18: Nongrass Animal Feeds (Forage, Fodder, Straw, and 

Hay)

Table F-18 Crop Group 18: Nongrass Animal Feeds (Forage, Fodder, Straw, and 

Hay)

Alfalfa (Medicago sativa subsp. sativa)

Bean, velvet (Mucuna pruriens var. utilis)

Clover (Trifolium spp., Melilotus spp.)

Kudzu (Pueraria lobata)

Lespedeza (Lespedeza spp.)

Lupin (Lupinus spp.)

Sainfoin (Onobrychis viciifolia)

Trefoil (Lotus spp.)

Vetch (Vicia spp.)

Vetch, crown (Coronilla varia)

Vetch, milk (Astragalus spp.)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 19: Herbs and Spices

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-21

Crop Group 19: Herbs and Spices

Table F-19 Crop Group 19: Herbs and Spices 

Angelica (Angelica archangelica)

Anise (anise seed) (Pimpinella anisum)

Anise, star (Illicium verum)

Annatto (seed)

Balm (lemon balm) (Melissa officinalis)

Basil (Ocimum basilicum)

Borage (Borago officinalis)

Burnet (Sanguisorba minor)

Camomile (Anthemis nobilis)

Caper buds (Capparis spinosa)

Caraway (Carum carvi)

Caraway, black (Nigella sativa)

Cardamom (Elettaria cardamomum)

Cassia bark (Cinnamomum aromaticum)

Cassia buds (Cinnamomum aromaticum)

Catnip (Nepeta cataria)

Celery seed (Apicum graveolens)

Chervil (dried) (Anthriscus cerefolium)

Chive (Allium schoenoprasum)

Chive, Chinese (Allium tuberosum)

Cinnamon (Cinnamomum verum)

Clary (Salvia sclarea)

Clove buds (Eugenia caryophyllata)

Coriander (cilantro or Chinese parsley) (leaf) (Coriandrum sativum)

Costmary (Chrysanthemum balsamita)

Culantro (leaf) (Eryngium foetidum)

Culantro (seed) (Eryngium foetidum)

Cumin (Cuminum cyminum)

Curry (leaf) (Murraya koenigii)

Dill (dillweed) (Anethum graveolens)

Dill (seed) (Anethum graveolens)

Fennel (common) (Foeniculum vulgare)

Fennel, Florence (seed) (Foeniculum vulgare Azoricum Group)

Fenugreek (Trigonella foenumgraecum)

Grains of paradise (Aframomum melegueta)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 19: Herbs and Spices

F-22 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Horehound (Marrubium vulgare)

Hyssop (Hyssopus officinalis)

Juniper berry (Juniperus communis)

Lavender (Lavandula officinalis)

Lemongrass (Cymbopogon citratus)

Lovage (leaf) (Levisticum officinale)

Lovage (seed) (Levisticum officinale)

Mace (Myristica fragrans)

Marigold (Calendula officinalis)

Marjoram (Origanum spp.) (includes sweet or annual marjoram, wild marjoram or oregano, 

and pot marjoram)

Mustard (seed) (Brassica juncea, B. hirta, B. nigra)

Nasturtium (Tropaeolum majus)

Nutmeg (Myristica fragrans)

Parsley (dried) (Petroselinum crispum)

Pennyroyal (Mentha pulegium)

Pepper, black (Piper nigrum)

Pepper, white

Poppy (seed) (Papaver somniferum)

Rosemary (Rosmarinus officinalis)

Rue (Ruta graveolens)

Saffron (Crocus sativus)

Sage (Salvia officinalis)

Savory, summer and winter (Satureja spp.)

Sweet bay (bay leaf) (Laurus nobilis)

Tansy (Tanacetum vulgare)

Tarragon (Artemisia dracunculus)

Thyme (Thymus spp.)

Vanilla (Vanilla planifolia)

Wintergreen (Gaultheria procumbens)

Woodruff (Galium odorata)

Wormwood (Artemisia absinthium)

Table F-19 Crop Group 19: Herbs and Spices (continued)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 20: Oilseed

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-23

Crop Group 20: Oilseed

Table F-20 Crop Group 20: Oilseed

Borage (Borago officinalis L.)

Calendula (Calendula officinalis L.)

Castor oil plant (Ricinus communis L.)

Chinese tallowtree, (Triadica sebifera (L.) Small)

Cottonseed (Gossypium hirsutum L.; Gossypium spp.)

Crambe (Crambe hispanica L.; C. abyssinica Hochst. ex R.E. Fr.)

Cuphea (Cuphea hyssopifolia Kunth)

Echium (Echium plantagineum L.)

Euphorbia (Euphorbia esula L.)

Evening primrose (Oenothera biennis L.)

Flax seed (Linum usitatissimum L.)

Gold of pleasure (Camelina sativa (L.) Crantz)

Hare's ear mustard (Conringia orientalis (L.) Dumort)

Jojoba (Simmondsia chinensis (Link) C.K. Schneid.)

Lesquerella (Lesquerella recurvata (Engelm. ex A. Gray) S. Watson)

Lunaria (Lunaria annua L.)

Meadowfoam (Limnanthes alba Hartw. ex Benth.)

Milkweed (Asclepias spp.)

Mustard seed (Brassica hirta Moench, Sinapis alba L. subsp. Alba.)

Niger seed (Guizotia abyssinica (L.f.) Cass.)

Oil radish (Raphanus sativus L. var. oleiformis Pers.)

Poppy seed (Papaver somniferum L. subsp. Somniferum)

Rapeseed (Brassica spp.; B. napus L.)

Rose hip (Rosa rubiginosa L.)

Safflower (Carthamus tinctorious L.)

Sesame (Sesamum indicum L., S. radiatum Schumach. & honn.)

Stokes aster (Stokesia laevis (Hill) Greene)

Sunflower (Helianthus annuus L.)

Sweet rocket (Hesperis matronalis L.)

Tallowwood (Ximenia americana L.)

Tea oil plant (Camellia oleifera C. Abel)

Vernonia (Vernonia galamensis (Cass.) Less)

Cultivars, varieties, and/or hybrids of these
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 21: Edible Fungi

F-24 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 21: Edible Fungi

Table F-21 Crop Group 21: Edible Fungi

Blewitt (Lepista nuda)

Bunashimeji (Hypsizygus marrmoreus)

Chinese mushroom (Volvariella volvacea (Bull.) Singer)

Enoki (Flammulina velutipes (Curt.) Singer )

Hime-Matsutake (Agaricus blazei Murill)

Hirmeola (Auricularia auricular)

Maitake (Grifola frondosa)

Morel (Morchella spp.)

Nameko (Pholiota nameko)

Net Bearing (Dictyophora)

Oyster mushroom (Pleurotus spp. )

Pom Pom (Hericium erinaceus)

Reishi mushroom (Ganoderma lucidum (Leyss. Fr.) Karst.)

Rodman's agaricus (Agaricus bitorquis (Quel.) Saccardo)

Shiitake mushroom (Lentinula edodes (Berk.) Pegl.)

Shimeji (Tricholoma conglobatum)

Stropharia (Stropharia spp.)

Truffle (Tuber spp.)

White button mushroom (Agaricus bisporous (Lange) Imbach)

White Jelly Fungi (Tremella fuciformis)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 22: Stalk, Stem, and Leaf Petiole Vegetables

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-25

Crop Group 22: Stalk, Stem, and Leaf Petiole Vegetables

Table F-22 Crop Group 22: Stalk, Stem, and Leaf Petiole Vegetables

Agave (Agave spp.)

Aloe vera (Aloe vera (L.) Burm.f.)

Asparagus (Asparagus officinialis L.)

Bamboo shoots (Arundinaria spp., Bambusa spp.,Chimonobambusa spp.; Dendrocalamus

spp., Fargesia spp.; Gigantochloa spp., Nastus elatus; Phyllostachys spp.; Thyrsostachys

spp.)

Cardoon/Globe artichoke (Cynara cardunculus L.)

Celery (Apium graveolens var. dulce (Mill.) Pers.)

Celery, Chinese (Apium graveolens L. var. secalinum (Alef.) Mansf.)

Celtuce (Lactuca sativa var. angustana L.H. Bailey)

Fennel, Florence, fresh leaves and stalk (Foeniculum vulgare subsp. vulgare var. azoricum

(Mill.) Thell.)

Fern, edible, fiddlehead

Fuki (Petasites japonicus (Siebold & Zucc.) Maxim.)

Kale, sea (Crambe maritima L.)

Kohlrabi (Brassica oleracea L. var gongylodes L.)

Palm hearts (various species)

Prickly pear, pads (Opuntia ficus-indica (L.) Mill., Opuntia spp.)

Prickly pear, Texas, pads (Opuntia engelmannii Salm-Dyck ex Engelm. var. lindheimeri

(Engelm.) B.D. Parfitt & Pinkav)

Rhubarb (Rheum x rhabarbarum L.)

Udo (Aralia cordata Thunb.)

Zuiki (Colocasia gigantea (Blume) Hook. f.)

Cultivars, varieties, and hybrids of these commodities
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels

F-26 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels

Table F-23 Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels 

Açaí (Euterpe oleracea Mart.)

Acerola (Malpighia emarginata DC.)

Achachairú (Garcinia gardneriana (Planch. & Triana) Zappi)

African plum (Vitex doniana Sweet)

Agritos (Berberis trifoliolata Moric.)

Almondette (Buchanania lanzan Spreng.)

Ambarella (Spondias dulcis Sol. ex Parkinson)

Apak palm (Brahea dulcis (Kunth) Mart.)

Appleberry (Billardiera scandens Sm.)

Arazá (Eugenia stipitata McVaugh)

Arbutus berry (Arbutus unedo L.)

Babaco (Vasconcellea x heilbornii (V.M. Badillo) V.M. Badillo)

Bacaba palm (Oenocarpus bacaba Mart.)

Bacaba-de-leque (Oenocarpus distichus Mart.)

Bayberry, red (Morella rubra Lour.)

Bignay (Antidesma bunius (L.) Spreng.)

Bilimbi (Averrhoa bilimbi L.)

Borojó (Borojoa patinoi Cuatrec.)

Breadnut (Brosimum alicastrum Sw.)

Cabeluda (Plinia glomerata (O. Berg) Amshoff)

Cajou, fruit (Anacardium giganteum Hance ex Engl.)

Cambucá (Marlierea edulis Nied.)

Carandas-plum (Carissa edulis Vahl)

Carob (Ceratonia siliqua L.)

Cashew apple (Anacardium occidentale L.)

Ceylon iron wood (Manilkara hexandra (Roxb.) Dubard)

Ceylon olive (Elaeocarpus serratus L.)

Cherry-of-the-Rio-Grande (Eugenia aggregata (Vell.) Kiaersk.)

Chinese olive, black (Canarium tramdenum C.D. Dai & Yakovlev)

Chinese olive, white (Canarium album (Lour.) Raeusch.)

Chirauli-nut (Buchanania latifolia Roxb.)

Ciruela verde (Bunchosia armeniaca (Cav.) DC.)

Cocoplum (Chrysobalanus icaco L.)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-27

Table F-24 Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels 

Date (Phoenix dactylifera L.)

Davidson's plum (Davidsonia pruriens F. Muell.)

Desert-date (Balanites aegyptiacus (L.) Delile)

Doum palm coconut (Hyphaene thebaica (L.) Mart.)

False sandalwood (Ximenia americana L.)

Feijoa (Acca sellowiana (O. Berg) Burret)

Fig (Ficus carica L.)

Fragrant manjack (Cordia dichotoma G. Forst.)

Gooseberry, abyssinian (Dovyalis abyssinica (A. Rich.) Warb.)

Gooseberry, Ceylon (Dovyalis hebecarpa (Gardner) Warb.)

Gooseberry, Indian (Phyllanthus emblica L.)

Gooseberry, otaheite (Phyllanthus acidus (L.) Skeels)

Governor's plum (Flacourtia indica (Burm. F.) Merr.)

Grumichama (Eugenia brasiliensis Lam)

Guabiroba (Campomanesia xanthocarpa O. Berg)

Guava (Psidium guajava L.)

Guava berry (Myrciaria floribunda (H. West ex Willd.) O. Berg)

Guava, Brazilian (Psidium guineense Sw.)

Guava, cattley (Psidium cattleyanum Sabine)

Guava, Costa Rican (Psidium friedrichsthalianum (O. Berg) Nied.)

Guava, Para (Psidium acutangulum DC.)

Guava, purple strawberry (Psidium cattleyanum Sabine var. cattleyanum)

Guava, strawberry (Psidium cattleyanum Sabine var. littorale (Raddi) Fosberg)

Guava, yellow strawberry (Psidium cattleyanum Sabine var. cattleyanum forma lucidum O.

Deg.)

Guayabillo (Psidium sartorianum (O. Berg) Nied.)

Illawarra plum (Podocarpus elatus R. Br. Ex Endl.)

Imbé (Garcinia livingstonei T. Anderson)

Imbu (Spondias tuberosa Arruda ex Kost.)

Indian-plum (Flacourtia jangomas (Lour.). basionym)

Jaboticaba (Myrciaria cauliflora (Mart.) O. Berg)

Jamaica-cherry (Muntingia calabura L.)

Jambolan (Syzygium cumini (L.) Skeels)

Jelly palm (Butia capitata (Mart.) Becc.)

Jujube, Indian (Ziziphus mauritiana Lam.)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels

F-28 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Table F-25 Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels 

Kaffir-plum (Harpephyllum caffrum Bernh. Ex C. Krauss)

Kakadu plum (Terminalia latipes Benth. subsp. psilocarpa Pedley)

Kapundung (Baccaurea racemosa (Reinw.) Mull. Arg.)

Karanda (Carissa carandas L.)

Kwai muk (Artocarpus hypargyreus Hance ex Benth.)

Lemon aspen (Acronychia acidula F. Muell)

Mangaba (Hancornia speciosa Gomes)

Marian plum (Bouea macrophylla Griff.)

Mombin, malayan (Spondias pinnata (J. Koenig ex L. f.) Kurz)

Mombin, purple (Spondias purpurea L.)

Mombin, yellow (Spondias mombin L.)

Monkeyfruit (Artocarpus lacucha Buch. Ham.)

Monos plum (Pseudanamomis umbellulifera (Kunth) Kausel)

Mountain cherry (Bunchosia cornifolia Kunth)

Nance (Byrsonima crassifolia (L.) Kunth)

Natal plum (Carissa macrocarpa (Eckl.) A. DC.)

Noni (Morinda citrifolia L.)

Olive (Olea europaea L. subsp. europaea)

Papaya, mountain (Vasconcellea pubescens A. DC.)

Patauá (Oenocarpus bataua Mart.)

Peach palm, fruit (Bactris gasipaes Kunth var. gasipaes)

Persimmon, black (Diospyros texana Scheele)

Persimmon, Japanese (Diospyros kaki Thunb.)

Pitomba (Eugenia luschnathiana Klotzsch ex O. Berg)

Plum-of-Martinique (Flacourtia inermis Roxb.)

Pomerac (Syzygium malaccense (L.) Merr. & L.M. Perry)

Rambai (Baccaurea motleyana (Mull. Arg.) Mull. Arg.)

Rose apple (Syzygium jambos (L.) Alston)

Rukam (Flacourtia rukam Zoll. & Moritizi)

Rumberry (Myrciaria dubia (Kunth) McVaugh Myrtaceae)

Sea grape (Coccoloba uvifera (L.) L.)

Sentul (Sandoricum koetjape (Burm. F.) Merr.)

Sete-capotes (Campomanesia guazumifolia (Cambess.) O. Berg)

Silver aspen (Acronychia wilcoxian (F. Muell.) T.G. Hartley)

Starfruit (Averrhoa carambola L.)

Surinam cherry (Eugenia uniflora L.)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-29

Table F-26 Crop Group 23: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Edible Peels 

Tamarind (Tamarindus indica L.)

Uvalha (Eugenia pyriformis Cambess )

Water apple (Syzygium aqueum (Burm. F.) Alston)

Water pear (Syzygium guineense (Willd.) DC)

Water berry (Syzygium cordatum Hochst. Ex C. Krauss)

Wax jambu (Syzygium samarangense (Blume) Merr. & L.M. Perry)

Cultivars, varieties, and hybrids of these commodities
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible Peels

F-30 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible Peels

Table F-27 Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible Peels

Abiu (Pouteria caimito (Ruiz & Pav.) Radlk)

Aisen (Boscia senegalensis (Pers.) Lam.)

Akee apple (Blighia sapida K.D. Koenig)

Atemoya (Annona cherimola Mill. X A. squamosa L.)

Avocado (Persea americana Mill.)

Avocado, Guatemalan (Persea americana Mill. var. guatemalensis)

Avocado, Mexican (Persea americana Mill. var. drymifolia (Schltdl. & Cham.) S.F. Blak)

Avocado, West Indian (Persea americana var. americana)

Bacury (Platonia insignis Mart.)

Bael fruit (Aegle marmelos (L.) Corrêa)

Banana (Musa spp.)

Banana, dwarf (Musa hybrids; Musa acuminata Colla)

Binjai (Mangifera caesia Jack)

Biriba (Annona mucosa Jacq.)

Breadfruit (Artocarpus altilis (Parkinson) Fosberg)

Burmese grape (Baccaurea ramiflora Lour.)

Canistel (Pouteria campechiana (Kunth) Baehni)

Cat's-eyes (Dimocarpus longan Lour. subsp. malesianus Leenh.)

Champedak (Artocarpus integer (Thunb.) Merr.)

Cherimoya (Annona cherimola Mill.)

Cupuacú (Theobroma grandiflorum (Willd. Ex Spreng.) K. Schum.)

Custard apple (Annona reticulata L.)

Dragon fruit (Hylocereus undatus (Haw.) Britton & Rose)

Durian (Durio zibethinus L.)

Elephant-apple (Limonia acidissima L.)

Etambe (Mangifera zeylanica (Blume) Hook. F.)

Granadilla (Passiflora ligularis Juss.)

Granadilla, giant (Passiflora quadrangularis L.)

Ilama (Annona macroprophyllata Donn. Sm.)

Ingá (Inga vera Willd. subsp. affinis (DC.) T.D. Penn.)

Jackfruit (Artocarpus heterophyllus Lam.)

Jatobá (Hymenaea courbaril L.)

Karuka (Pandanus julianettii Martelli)

Kei apple (Dovyalis caffra (Hook. F. & Harv.) Warb.)

Langsat (Lansium domesticum Corrêa)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible Peels

12/2020-42 Treatment Manual F-31

Table F-28 Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible Peels

Lanjut (Mangifera lagenifera Griff.)

Longan (Dimocarpus longan Lour.)

Lucuma (Pouteria lucuma (Ruiz & Pav.) Kuntze)

Lychee (Litchi chinensis Sonn.)

Mabolo (Diospyros blancoi A. DC.)

Madras-thorn (Pithecellobium dulce (Roxb.) Benth.)

Mammy-apple (Mammea americana L.)

Manduro (Balanites maughamii Sprague)

Mango (Mangifera indica L.)

Mango, horse (Mangifera foetida Lour.)

Mango, Saipan (Mangifera odorata Griff.)

Mangosteen (Garcinia mangostana L. )

Marang (Artocarpus odoratissimus Blanco)

Marmaladebox (Genipa americana L.)

Matisia (Matisia cordata Humb. & Bonpl.)

Mesquite (Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC.)

Mongongo, fruit (Schinziophyton rautanenii (Schinz) Radcl.-Sm)

Monkey-bread-tree (Adansonia digitata L.)

Monstera (Monstera deliciosa Liebm.)

Nicobar-breadfruit (Pandanus leram Jones ex Fontana)

Paho (Mangifera altissima Blanco)

Pandanus (Pandanus utilis Bory)

Papaya (Carica papaya L.)

Passionflower, winged-stem (Passiflora alata Curtis)

Passionfruit (Passiflora edulis Sims)

Passionfruit, banana (Passiflora tripartita var. mollissima (Kunth) Holm-Niels. & P. Jorg.)

Passionfruit, purple (Passiflora edulis Sims forma edulis)

Passionfruit, yellow (Passiflora edulis Sims forma flavicarpa O. Deg.)

Pawpaw, common (Asimina triloba (L.) Dunal)

Pawpaw, small-flower (Asimina parviflora (Michx.) Dunal)

Pelipisan (Mangifera casturi Kosterm.)

Pequi (Caryocar brasiliense Cambess)

Pequia (Caryocar villosum (Aubl.) Pers.)

Persimmon, American (Diospyros virginiana L.)

Pineapple (Ananas comosus (L.) Merr.)

Pitahaya (Hylocereus polyrhizus (F.A.C. Weber) Britton & Rose)
Appendix F EPA Crop Groups

Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible Peels

F-32 Treatment Manual 12/2020-42

Table F-29 Crop Group 24: Tropical and Subtropical Fruit, Inedible Peels

Pitaya (Hylocereus sp. including H. megalanthus (H. ocamponis and H. polychizus)

Pitaya, amarilla (Hylocereus triangularis Britton & Rose)

Pitaya, roja (Hylocereus ocamponis (Salm-Dyck) Britton & Rose)

Pitaya, yellow (Hylocereus megalanthus (K. Schum. ex Vaupel) Ralf Bauer)

Plantain (Musa paradisiaca L.)

Pomegranate (Punica granatum L.)

Poshte (Annona liebmanniana Baill.)

Prickly pear, fruit (Opuntia ficus-indica (L.) Mill.)

Prickly pear, Texas, fruit (Opuntia engelmannii Salm-Dyck ex Engelm. var. lindheimeri

(Engelm.) B.D. Parfitt & Pinkav)

Pulasan (Nephelium ramboutan-ake (Labill.) Leenh.)

Quandong (Santalum acuminatum (R. Br.) DC.)

Rambutan (Nephelium lappaceum L.)

Saguaro (Carnegiea gigantea (Engelm.) Britton & Rose)

Sapodilla (Manilkara zapota (L.) P. Royen)

Sapote, black (Diospyros digyna Jacq.)

Sapote, green (Pouteria viridis (Pittier) Cronquist)

Sapote, mamey (Pouteria sapota (Jacq.) H.E. Moore & Stearn)

Sapote, white (Casimiroa edulis La Llave & Lex)

Sataw (Parkia speciosa Hassk.)

Satinleaf (Chrysophyllum oliviforme L.)

Screw-pine (Pandanus tectorius Parkinson)

Sierra Leone-tamarind (Dialium guineense Willd.)

Soncoya (Annona purpurea Moc. & Sessé ex Dunal)

Soursop (Annona muricata L.)

Spanish lime (Melicoccus bijugatus Jacq.)

Star apple (Chrysophyllum cainito L.)

Sugar apple (Annona squamosa L.)

Sun sapote (Licania platypus (Hemsl.) Fritsch)

Tamarind-of-the-Indies (Vangueria madagascariensis J.F. Gmel.)

Velvet tamarind (Dialium indum L.)

Wampi (Clausena lansium (Lour.) Skeels)

White star apple (Chrysophyllum albidum G. Don)

Wild loquat (Uapaca kirkiana Müll. Arg.)

Cultivars, varieties, and hybrids of these commodities
10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-1

Appendix

G Appendix G

Respirator Protection Information

Contents

Introduction G-1

Equipment Selection G-1

MB 2016 Label G-2

Responsibilities G-4

Workplace Specific Respiratory Protection Program Elements G-7

Respirator Selection, Use, and Limitations G-9

Occupational Medical Monitoring Program (OMMP) G-11

Fit Testing G-13

Training G-13

Care, Inspection, and Maintenance G-14

Verbal Communication Considerations G-16

Low Temperature Environment Considerations G-17

High Temperature Environment Considerations G-18

Introduction

The information in this chapter has been developed from the Department of 

Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standard Title 

29, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 1910.134, and the APHIS Safety 

and Health Manual (under revision). These guidelines apply to all APHIS 

employees who must wear respiratory protection equipment. These are the 

minimum requirements for an effective respiratory protection program. USDA 

employees should also refer to the USDA-APHIS-PPQ Safety and Health 

Sharepoint site or Chapter 11 in the APHIS Safety and Health Manual on the 

APHIS myportal website for additional information.

Equipment Selection

USDA APHIS PPQ recommends two different types of supplied air systems to 

provide breathing air to employees conducting fumigation activities. These 

are:

Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)

Cascade air supply system

Each of these systems is configured for one style of air mask. When methyl 

bromide concentrations are unknown or 5 ppm and above, employees must 
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

MB 2016 Label

G-2 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

wear and use SCBA. There is one approved air mask, the MSA Airhawk Ultra 

Elite. (Figure G-5)

MB 2016 Label

Refer to Figure G-1 for approved half face respirators.

NOTICE

USDA APHIS PPQ approves the following half and full face air purifying respirators 

for use in areas where methyl bromide levels are between 1 and 5 ppm (refer to 

Appendix E for ordering information):

 Half face respirators: MSA Advantage 420, 3M 6100, 6200, 6300, North 7700, Survivair/

Sperian 250000, 260000, 270000

 Full face respirators: MSA Advantage 1000, 3M 6700, 6800, 6900, North 76008AS/

76008A

Figure G-1 Approved Half Face Respirators

3M 6100, 6200, 6300

North 7700

MSA Advantage 420 Surviviar/Sperian 250000, 

260000, 270000
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

MB 2016 Label

10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-3

Refer to Figure G-2 for approved full face respirators.

Refer to Figure G-3 for approved organic vapor/acid gas/P100 cartridges for 

both full and half face respirators.

Refer to Figure G-4 for approved SCBA.

Figure G-2 Approved Full Face Respirators

Figure G-3 Approved Organic Vapor/Acid Gas/P100 Cartridges

Figure G-4 Approved SCBA

3M 6700, 6800, 6900 North 76008AS/76008A MSA Advantage 1000

3M MSA Advantage North

MSA AirHawk Ultra Elite
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Responsibilities

G-4 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

If needed, employees may also order spectacle kits for the MSA AirHawk. 

Models available include a center-support kit and a sidewire kit. See Figure G5. 

Responsibilities

APHIS Safety, Health, and Environmental Programs

APHIS Safety, Health and Environmental Programs (SHEP) is responsible for: 

ensuring that a physician or other licensed health care professional 

determines that an employee is physically able to wear a respirator

establishing a medical evaluation protocol for respirator users and is the 

authority on medical surveillance of respirators 

establishing and conducting a respiratory protection program according to 

the requirements of this manual and applicable OSHA standards when 

respiratory protection is required and used

Managers and Supervisors

In workplaces where respiratory protection is used managers and supervisors 

have a direct responsibility for protecting their employees and must: 

advise all respirator wearers that they may safely leave the area at any 

time for relief from respirator use in the event of equipment malfunction, 

physical or psychological distress, procedural or communication failure, 

significant deterioration of operating conditions, or any other conditions 

that might warrant such relief

annually review the workplace-specific written plan and provide a copy to 

the appropriate safety and health office with proper signature for approval

Figure G-5 Approved AirHawk Ultra Elite Spectacle Kit-Sidewire

MSA AirHawk Ultra Elite Spectacle Kit
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Responsibilities

10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-5

appoint an individual to be responsible for the use, maintenance, 

inspection, and care of common use, emergency, or escape respirators

contact applicable safety and health office whenever workplace operations 

change to schedule appropriate evaluations when new hazardous 

materials are introduced, processes or procedures are changed, or 

engineering controls are modified or added

develop, maintain, and enforce a workplace-specific written plan 

according to the guidance in 29 CFR 1910.134, Appendix A

document training on the employee safety and health record, or electronic 

equivalent

ensure employees in the respiratory protection program wear the approved 

respiratory protection for the hazard and for which they have been fit 

tested and trained

ensure employees have received the necessary medical evaluations, 

training, and fit testing before engaging in workplace operations requiring 

the use of the respirator. Supervisors receive training from the applicable 

safety office and should contact applicable safety office if they become a 

manager/supervisor of a new work place

follow and enforce the cartridge change-out schedule developed by 

supervisor/manager at worksite and include the schedule in the 

workplace-specific written plan

maintain applicable standards in the workplace

notify applicable safety and health office of conflicts between respiratory 

protection guidance and applicable standards

notify applicable safety office when new employees require fit testing or 

when current employees have a change affecting their wear of respiratory 

protection

provide copies of workplace-specific written plan to employees to handcarry to their medical evaluation when requested

provide for quality control of respirator breathing air (if used)

provide initial and periodic (annual and as changes occur) respiratory 

protection training, including training to all employees in their workplace 

who use “voluntary” use (filtering facepieces) respirators. (Refer to 29 

CFR 1910.134, Appendix D for mandatory training requirements for 

voluntary use respirators.)

NOTICE

Cylinders of purchased breathing air have a certificate of analysis from the supplier. 

Discontinue the use of compressed breathing air and contact applicable safety office 

if sample results are unsatisfactory and/or employees complain of taste, odor or irritation from compressed breathing air.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Responsibilities

G-6 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

Employee Responsibilities

Employees who wear respiratory protection will:

complete initial respirator medical evaluation questionnaire (APHIS 29 

Form, Occupational Exposures) and other physical examination 

requirements as needed prior to performing duties requiring respiratory 

protection

ensure that no facial hair comes between the sealing surface of the 

facepiece and the face or interferes with valve function, if required, to 

wear a tight-fitting facepiece

guard respirators against damage, do not use unsanitary, damaged or 

unserviceable respirators, and turn in unserviceable respirators to their 

supervisor

inspect, clean, and maintain any respiratory protection device issued to 

them for their individual use

maintain the integrity of the National Institute of Occupational, Safety and 

Health (NIOSH) certification by not mixing respirator parts from 

different manufacturers

provide workplace-specific written program to the provider for the 

medical evaluation when requested

receive initial and periodic training and fit testing (annual, and as changes 

occur)

report to their supervisor any change in medical status which may impact 

their ability to safely wear respiratory protection (e.g., weight changes, 

facial scarring, dental changes, cosmetic surgery, disfigurement, etc.)

use the provided respiratory protection according to the instructions and 

training received

wear only that respiratory protection for which they have received fit 

testing and training, and only for the tasks specified

Work Unit Responsibilities

With assistance from the applicable safety office, the work unit will:

conduct fit testing on those individuals who have been medically cleared 

by a physician or licensed health care provider

conduct routine surveys in workplaces where respirators are used

educate and train workplace supervisors, and those individuals appointed 

to oversee the use, maintenance, and care of common use, or escape-only 

respirators. Supervisor training will be repeated when a supervisor 

becomes a supervisor of a different workplace

ensure fit testing is conducted according to OSHA and APHIS guidelines
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Workplace Specific Respiratory Protection Program Elements

10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-7

maintain or have immediate access to current copies (paper or electronic) 

of applicable OSHA standards (i.e., 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1926), and the 

NIOSH Certified Equipment List

provide guidance to workplace supervisors, as necessary, in the 

preparation of the workplace-specific written plan and annual training 

program

review workplace-specific written plans annually to ensure respiratory 

protection procedures are addressed and submit to applicable safety office 

for approval (refer to Figure A-22 on page A-1-42 for a site plan template 

or see the USDA-APHIS-PPQ Safety and Health Sharepoint site for sitespecific plans)

Physician or Other Licensed Health Care Professional 

(PLHCP)

The physician or PLHCP will:

conduct medical evaluations of individuals identified to wear a respirator, 

as required

medically clear individuals to wear a respirator

review the respirator medical evaluation questionnaires and document as 

outlined in Occupational Medical Monitoring Program (OMMP)

Workplace Specific Respiratory Protection Program Elements

The respiratory protection program must be conducted in accordance with 

OHSA's standard 29 CFR 1910.134, APHIS Safety and Health Manual, and 

this Treatment Manual.

The program elements of a respiratory protection program will be shared 

among workplace supervisors, employees and the applicable safety office. 

Only NOISH/MSHA approved respirators can be used by employees in federal 

workplaces. No privately-procured respiratory protection device will be used 

by federal employees in workplaces

Management must develop procedures to address the following at each 

workplace:

fit testing procedures for tight-fitting respirators in 29 CFR 1910.134(f)

program evaluation procedures in 29 CFR 1910.134(l)

NOTICE

Management must ensure the respiratory protection program is evaluated annually. 

The applicable safety office should assist management during review and report the 

findings in writing to workplace supervisor with recommendation for correction if necessary.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Workplace Specific Respiratory Protection Program Elements

G-8 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

training procedures in 29 CFR 1910.134(k)

The program evaluation will review the adequacy of the following elements as 

a minimum:

air supply and breathing air (review of air testing results as appropriate) 

and checking for breathing air outlet incompatibilities with other gas lines

filters used for each hazard

maintenance and storage practices (shared, emergency use, and individual 

respirators)

the respirator for workplace exposures

work practices, documentation of inspections of shared and emergency 

use respirators, and documentation of respirator training

The findings of these evaluations may be included in the workplace survey 

reports.

Medical evaluations will be conducted as outlined in Occupational Medical 

Monitoring Program (OMMP).

Workplace-Specific Program Elements

Supervisors in workplaces where respiratory protection is used must develop a 

written plan as required by 29 CFR 1910.134(c). The plan must be approved 

by the applicable safety office. Workplace-specific written plans must include 

the following:

duration and frequency of respirator use (including use for rescue and 

escape if applicable)

expected physical work effort involved in the process requiring 

respiratory protection (see 29 CFR 1910.134 Appendix C, Part B)

proper use of respirators in routine and emergency situations

protective clothing and equipment to be worn while wearing the respirator

selection criteria—describe the processes in which respirators are required

type and weight of the respirators used by employees

temperature and humidity extremes that may be encountered

training procedures for required respirators (see 29 CFR 1910.134(k)(1-

6))

use, maintenance, and care procedures (describe the criteria that 

employees use to determine when respirator filters, cassettes, or 

cartridges must be changed)
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Respirator Selection, Use, and Limitations

10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-9

Supervisors must ensure that approved respirators in their workplace are used, 

are used correctly, and are in good condition.

Respirator Selection, Use, and Limitations

Select respirators according to 29 CFR 1910.134 (d) and the NIOSH Certified 

Equipment List. Document the rationale for selection in the workplace-specific 

written plan.

If a more stringent standard such as a substance-specific OSHA standard exists 

for the contaminants, follow those guidelines and requirements for respirator 

selection.

Employee Activity

Consider each employee’s activity and location in an inhalational hazardous 

area when selecting the proper respiratory protection. For example, whether 

the employee is in the hazardous area continuously or intermittently during the 

work shift and whether the work rate is light, medium, or heavy.

Respirator Use Conditions

Take into account the period of time a respirator must be worn when selecting 

a respirator. Consider the type of respirator application, such as for routine, 

non-routine, emergency, or rescue use.

Location of the Potential Hazardous Area

Consider the location of the hazardous area with respect to a safe area, which 

has respirable air, when selecting a respirator. This will permit planning for the 

escape of employees if an emergency occurs, entry of employees to perform 

maintenance duties, and rescue operations.

Operational Limitations

Environmental conditions and level of effort required of the respirator wearer 

may affect respirator service life. For example, extreme physical exertion can 

cause the user to deplete the air supply in a SCBA such that its service life is 

reduced by half or more.

Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) Conditions

Evaluate all possible actions, such as increasing ventilation or isolating the 

source of contaminants, to attain an atmosphere that is not IDLH before 

authorizing employees to enter areas known to have IDLH conditions. Refer to 

29 CFR 1910.134 g (3) and g(4) for procedures for IDLH atmospheres.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Respirator Selection, Use, and Limitations

G-10 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

Other Exposure Routes

Consider other exposure routes (e.g., skin absorption or external radiation) 

when selecting respiratory protection. Wearing the respirator could increase 

exposure by longer stay times in a hazardous environment such as exposures to 

external radiation.

Document respirator selection on the workplace-specific written respiratory 

protection plans.

Respirator Limitations

In addition to the following, refer to the requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134:

Communications—consider ambient environmental noise and 

communication needs when specific respirators are selected. See Verbal 

Communication Considerations.

Eye Irritation—if contaminants cause eye irritation, wear full facepiece 

respirators or chemical protective goggles with half facepiece respirators.

Respirators in Low Temperature Environments—low temperatures may 

cause detrimental effects on the performance of respirators. Consider the 

effects of low temperatures in the selection and maintenance of 

respirators and respirable gas supplies. See Low Temperature 

Environment Considerations. 

Respirators In High Temperature Environments—high temperatures may 

affect the performance of the respirator, and may add undue physiological 

stress. Consider the effects of high temperatures in respirator selection 

and for medical approvals. See High Temperature Environment 

Considerations.

Corrective Lenses

PPQ will pay for corrective lenses; however, employees are required to pay for 

the personal doctor visit to get the prescription for the lenses.

! WARNING

Wearing of contact lenses in contaminated atmospheres with a respiratory protection 

device is prohibited.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Occupational Medical Monitoring Program (OMMP)

10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-11

Occupational Medical Monitoring Program (OMMP)

Medical Evaluation

Potential respirator wearers must complete a respirator medical evaluation 

questionnaire and/or may receive a physical examination prior to initial fit 

testing to identify existing medical conditions that would place the employee at 

an increased health risk from the use of a respirator or interfere with the use or 

wear of a respirator. The OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.134 (e) and Appendix 

C specifies the minimum mandatory requirements for medical evaluations. 

Supervisors will assist employees in the completion of the APHIS Form 29 

Occupational Exposure and ensure that the employees required to use 

respirators are medically qualified and fit-tested for the appropriate respirator. 

Contact the applicable PPQFO safety manager with any questions regarding 

the medical clearance process before using a respirator.

Respirator Questionnaires and Medical Evaluations

All health care providers conducting medical evaluations and reviewing 

completed respirator medical evaluation questionnaires for the respiratory 

protection program must be a physician or other licensed health care 

professional (PLHCP), as defined in 29 CFR 1910.134 (b). The Federal 

Occupational Health (FOH) Medical Advisor meets the requirements of the 

PLHCP and will be referred to as such in this section.

The medical evaluation consists of the respirator medical evaluation 

questionnaire and a physical examination if wearing SCBA. The FOH Medical 

Advisor determines medical evaluation expirations.

Following review of the respirator medical evaluation questionnaire, follow-up 

medical evaluation may be needed. The FOH Medical Advisor will determine 

what is needed. The FOH Medical Advisor is the determining official for the 

employee’s ability to use a respirator.

The FOH Medical Advisor’s written recommendation will be in the form of a 

medical clearance letter (MCL). The MCL is sent to the employee and 

employer (applicable PPQFO Safety Manager). It is the employee’s 

responsibility to provide a copy of the MCL to his/her supervisor. MCL’s will 

be one of the following:

MCL for respirator use without restrictions

MCL for respirator use with restrictions. Follow all restrictions on the 

MCL.

If an employee recovers from the medical condition and the 

restrictions can be lifted, the employee’s personal doctor must notify 
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Occupational Medical Monitoring Program (OMMP)

G-12 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

the FOH Medical Advisor so the recommendations and restrictions 

can be updated.

MCL for no respirator use.

The employee will not be allowed to perform any work activities that 

require the use of a respirator. The FOH Medical Advisor will convey 

to the employee the reason for the failure to pass the examination and 

give the employee appropriate options. The reasons are personal 

health issues identified through the medical history and physical 

examination (including any testing) during the clearance process. In 

some cases, there may be no options available. In most cases, there are 

remedies that can be achieved by the employee working with his/her 

healthcare provider. The employee has the option to do nothing, in 

which case, the MCL for no respirator use will still stand.

The employee may elect to go to their personal physician to treat the 

condition. All expenses for personal health issues are the 

responsibility of the employee. Any documentation to support 

reconsideration for medical clearance by the FOH Medical Advisor, 

must be submitted to the FOH medical advisor by the employee or 

their healthcare provider. Final determination for medical clearance 

rests with the FOH medical advisor.

Follow-up Medical Evaluations

Based on an employee’s answers on the respirator medical evaluation 

questionnaire, a follow-up medical evaluation may be required. The follow up 

medical evaluation can be in the form of a physical examination, blood work, 

and/or a stress test.

Workplace supervisors should be communicating with their employees and 

know if they may have developed medical conditions affecting respirator use 

since initial fit testing. Discretion is advised.

Supervisors should brief employees if there are any questions or concerns 

about an employee’s ability to use a respirator due to a medical condition.

The supervisor will notify as soon as possible, the applicable safety and health 

office if a worker who uses a respirator develops a medical condition that could 

affect their ability to use a respirator.

When a worker reports to an annual respirator fit test, a program appointed fittester will formally (e.g., with written verification that is locally developed) 

ask if the employee has experienced any difficulty wearing a respirator and if 

personnel are medically cleared to wear a respirator. If the worker responds 

with a change in medical history, he or she will be directed back to the 

supervisor, and will not be fit-tested until cleared by the FOH Medical Advisor.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Fit Testing

10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-13

Fit Testing

Fit Testing Procedures

Before an employee may be required to wear a respirator with a tight-fitting 

facepiece, the employee must be fit tested with the same make, model, style, 

and size of respirator that will be used in the workplace. Current fit tests from 

other installations may be used if the employee will be using the same make, 

model and style of respirator.

Perform fit testing according to 29 CFR 1910.134 and the APHIS Safety and 

Health Manual.

Fit Test Failures

If a medically cleared employee cannot attain an adequate fit with a tightfitting respirator the applicable safety and health office should be contacted for 

assistance.

Record Keeping

Records of respirator fit test results will include the information required in 29 

CFR 1910.134 (m)(2)(i)(A-E). This information will be recorded on an 

Certificate of Respirator Fit Test, or equivalent.

Copies of respirator fit test results will be given to the employee and their 

supervisor to be maintained and filled in personnel records.

User Seal Check Procedures

Employees who use tight-fitting respirators will perform a user seal check to 

ensure that an adequate seal is achieved each time the respirator is donned. 

Employees will use either the positive and negative pressure check methods 

listed in 29 CFR 1910.134, Appendix B-1, or the respirator manufacturer’s 

recommended user seal check method.

Training

Initial Training

All personnel will receive initial respiratory protection training prior to 

wearing a respirator. Use the USDA SF Form 182, Authorization, Agreement 

and Certification of Training, to document the initial and annual training.

Management will provide or arrange for the initial training of supervisors who 

have the responsibility of overseeing work activities of one or more persons 

who must wear respirators and respirator wearers. Training will include the 

requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134 (k).
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Care, Inspection, and Maintenance

G-14 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

Periodic Training

Trained workplace supervisors will provide annual instruction and retraining to 

respirator wearers. Training may also be conducted by applicable safety office 

or fit-tester during the annual fit testing. Management will provide retraining 

when notified by the supervisor of changes in the workplace or the type of 

respirator which render previous training obsolete. Management will also 

provide retraining when notified of or observed inadequacies in the employee’s 

knowledge or use of the respirator indicate that the employee has not retained 

the requisite understanding or skills.

Supervisors must discuss respiratory protection requirements with employees 

during routine surveillance inspection. Supervisor training will be repeated 

when a supervisor is relocated to a different workplace.

Documentation

Document training in AgLearn or electronic equivalent.

Care, Inspection, and Maintenance

Employees who are issued a respirator are responsible for its primary 

maintenance and care. Where respirators are used collectively or kept ready for 

emergencies by a workplace or operating activity, the supervisor of the activity 

is responsible for establishing a respirator maintenance and cleaning program 

as specified in 29 CFR 1910.134. This program includes care, inspection, and 

maintenance of respirators.

Respirators

Cleaning and Disinfecting

In addition to the requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134, respirators issued 

to an individual must be cleaned and disinfected, at a minimum, using 

a respirator wipe at the end of each day in which the respirator is used. 

Each respirator must be thoroughly cleaned and disinfected before 

being worn by a different individual. Emergency use respirators must 

be thoroughly cleaned and disinfected after being used. Refer to 29 

CFR 1910.134, Appendix B-2.

Storage

Refer to 29 CFR 1910.134

Respirable Air and Oxygen for SCBA and Air-line Respirators

Compressed gaseous air, compressed gaseous oxygen, liquid air, and 

liquid oxygen used for respiration must be of high purity and tested.

Inspection
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Care, Inspection, and Maintenance

10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-15

Inspect respirators per 29 CFR 1910.134.

Each air and oxygen cylinder must be inspected to ensure that it is 

fully charged according to the manufacturer's instructions.

The employee must inspect the respirator immediately before each use 

and during cleaning to ensure that it is in proper working condition. 

Inspect emergency or escape-only respirators prior to carrying it into 

the workplace. After cleaning and disinfecting, inspect each respirator 

to determine if it is in proper working condition, needs replacement of 

parts or repairs, or needs to be discarded. Each respirator stored for 

emergency or rescue use must be inspected at least monthly. Refer to 

29 CFR 1910.134 (h)(3).

The record of inspection of emergency or rescue respirators must be 

maintained on Inspection/Maintenance Record. Respirators that do not 

meet applicable inspection criteria must be immediately removed from 

service and repaired or replaced.

Maintenance

Refer to 29 CFR 1910.134(h) for maintenance and repair instructions.

Change cartridges, filters, or canisters of air-purifying respirators 

immediately after each use or if air is restricted when breathing.

If, at any time an employee detects an increase in breathing resistance, 

smells or tastes the contaminant, or detects the irritant properties of the 

contaminant the employee must immediately leave the area and 

replace the cartridge, filter or canister.

Breathing Air Quality and Use and Testing of Breathing Air 

Containers

Breathing air quality and use, testing, and breathing air containers must 

comply with 29 CFR 1910.134(i).

Ambient or Free-Air Pumps and Compressors

The workplace supervisor is responsible for inspecting ambient or free-air 

pumps and compressors used with air-line (supplied-air) systems.

Air-line couplings must be incompatible with outlets for other gas systems 

to prevent inadvertent servicing of air-line respirators with other gases or 

oxygen.

Inspect the air-line, compressor and respirator to ensure all three 

components match the air pressure and other requirements specified by 

the manufacturers.

Place the pumps in a position to avoid entry of contaminated air into the 

system.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Verbal Communication Considerations

G-16 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

Verbal Communication Considerations

Verbal communication in a noisy industrial environment can be difficult. It is 

important to ensure that respirator wearers can comfortably communicate 

when necessary because an employee who is speaking very loudly or yelling 

may cause a facepiece seal leak, and the employee may be tempted to 

temporarily dislodge the device in order to communicate. Both situations are 

undesirable. There are several options that may be used to aid communications 

when wearing respirators.

Speaking Diaphragms

A speaking diaphragm consists of a resonating surface and cavity that vibrates 

during speech, amplifying the speaker’s voice outside of the respirator. 

Consider the following when using speaking diaphragms:

Not all facepiece respirators are available with a speaking diaphragm. 

Contact the equipment manufacturer for availability.

There are key components in maintaining the airtight integrity of the 

facepiece requiring care when installing and handling.

Use of a respirator with a speaking diaphragm during welding, cutting, 

burning, or grinding operations is of special concern, as flying sparks may 

burn a hole in the diaphragm, creating a leak. Some manufacturers have 

compensated for these applications by providing shrouds to cover the 

diaphragm or by using metal diaphragms.

Built-In Microphones

Some respirator manufacturers make small microphones that are mounted 

inside or connected to the respiratory inlet covering. The microphone may be 

connected to a radio, telephone, loudspeaker, or other means of electronic 

transmittal. Consider the following when using built-in microphones:

Any component that is attached to or through the respiratory inlet 

covering may affect its function. In cases where the manufacturer 

provides components, strictly adhere to the installation instructions and 

leak test procedures to ensure that airtight integrity is maintained.

Voice activated communication systems may cause continuous sound 

pickup of the blower, when used with powered air-purifying respirators, 

or air flow noise, when used with supplied air devices.

Hand or Coded Signals

A predetermined set of signals may be useful in communicating.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

Low Temperature Environment Considerations

10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-17

Cranial, Throat, or Ear Microphones

Cranial and throat microphones are held in place with a harness against the 

wearer's head and larynx, respectively. Ear microphones are worn in the same 

manner as a transistor radio earphone and function as both a microphone and 

speaker. Use of these devices does not require making penetrations or 

attachments to the respirator, and does not impact the NIOSH certification 

status. They may be used with radios, telephones, loudspeakers, or other means 

of electronic transmittal, similar to facepiece microphones. Consider the 

following when using cranial, throat, or ear microphones:

Do not place cranial microphones under the head harness of facepiece 

respirators since their dislodgement may loosen the respirator straps.

When connecting wires are passed underneath the bibs or neck seals of 

supplied-air hoods or helmets, attach them to the wearer’s body to avoid 

disturbing the bib positioning.

Telephone Handsets

Since a person exhales while speaking, the exhalation valve in a facepiece 

respirator is partially open. This is a perfect location to place a handset or 

hand-held microphone to obtain the clearest voice transmission. An alternative 

is to hold the handset or microphone to the wearer's throat while speaking.

Safety Considerations

Electronic devices shall be selected and used with caution in explosive 

atmospheres or Class I hazardous locations identified in Article 501 of the 

National Electric Code (NEC). When required, ensure all such devices comply 

with requirements for permissibility and intrinsically safe systems according to 

Article 504 of the NEC. Consider the effects of radio frequency emissions 

when utilizing such devices in the vicinity of sensitive electronic equipment.

Low Temperature Environment Considerations

A low temperature environment may cause lens fogging in a respiratory inlet 

covering and freezing or improper sealing of the valves. Coating the inside 

surface of the lens may inhibit fogging at temperatures approaching 0 degrees 

Celsius (°C) (32 degrees Fahrenheit (°F)). Full facepieces are available with 

nose cups that direct the warm and moist exhaled air through the exhalation 

valve without contacting the lens. Facepieces with nose cups may provide 

satisfactory vision at temperatures as low as -32 °C (-25 °F).

SCBA equipped with a full facepiece and certified for use below 32 °F shall be 

equipped with a nose cup or other suitable accessory or coating to maintain the 

device's NIOSH certification when it is used in environments below 32 °F.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

High Temperature Environment Considerations

G-18 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01

Additionally, there are several other important considerations that users should 

be aware of when using SCBA in a low temperature environment. Users 

should thoroughly review the manufacturer's instructions and, if necessary, 

consult with the manufacturer to become thoroughly familiar with the 

precautions and recommendations for use of a specific SCBA in cold weather

conditions. In general, consider the following:

Storage—elastomeric components such as facepieces and breathing tubes 

may be prone to distortion if improperly stored in cold weather; such 

distortion could prevent the user from an adequate fit

Accessory availability—cold temperature accessories and components 

such as special elastomeric gaskets and diaphragms may not be readily 

available

Respirator valves may freeze open or closed due to the presence of moisture at 

very low temperatures. Some air-line respirators are approved with a device 

called a “vortex tube” that warms the air supplied to the respiratory inlet 

covering of the respirator.

High Temperature Environment Considerations

Working in a high temperature environment while wearing a respirator creates 

additional stress on the wearer. Using a respirator that has a low weight, offers 

a low resistance to breathing, possesses a minimal dead air space, and, if 

feasible, provides a tempering of inlet air should minimize the additional 

stress. 

Dead air volume is the volume of previously exhaled air (which is available to 

be inhaled) remaining in a respiratory inlet covering. Reducing the amount of 

dead air volume in a respirator reduces the level of carbon dioxide in the 

inhaled air, which is a major source of respirator usage related stress. This can 

be accomplished through the use of powered air-purifying respirators, 

continuous flow air-line respirators, use of a half facepiece respirator in lieu of 

a full facepiece, and use of a nose cup in full face- piece devices (regardless of 

the mode of operation).

Air-line respirators are recommended for use in a high temperature 

environment. Air-line respirators approved with a vortex tube will 

substantially reduce the temperature of the air supplied to the respirator. If airpurifying respirators are to be used, a half facepiece respirator, where it offers 

adequate protection, is preferable to the full facepiece.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

High Temperature Environment Considerations

10/2016-01 Treatment Manual G-19

Elastomeric components of respirators stored in high temperature 

environments may deteriorate at an accelerated rate and the facepiece may 

become permanently distorted. Use special care to prevent facepiece distortion.
Appendix G Respirator Protection Information

High Temperature Environment Considerations

G-20 Treatment Manual 10/2016-01
10/2023-01 Treatment Manual G-1-1

Treatment 

Manual

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

Index

A

a.i. Glossary-1-1

ability to heat

methyl bromide 2-4-8

absorbed dose 3-8-5

Acalypha

treatment options 5-6-19

Achatina

cold treatment 5-2-38, 5-5-8

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-4

other treatment options 5-5-5

Achatinidae

cold treatment 5-2-38, 5-5-8

Achimenes 5-6-14

Aconitum

treatment options 5-6-19

acorn

nonpropagative 5-4-4, 5-4-5

propagative 5-3-13

actionable pests 5-3-9

additional readings

methyl bromide 2-4-31

aerating

fresh fruit, vegetables, and cut flowers 2-4-43

nonsorptive containerized cargo 2-4-40

nonsorptive, noncontainerized cargo 2-4-41

sorptive containerized cargo 2-4-47

sorptive noncontainerized cargo 2-4-45

aeration

flexible duct E-1-4

requirements

methyl bromide 2-4-12

phosphine 2-11-30

sulfuryl flouride 2-10-5

aerosol insecticides E-1-4

Africanized honeybee swarms

residual insect spray treatment 5-5-3

Agrilus planipennis

heat treatment 5-4-17

Agriolimacidae

MB at NAP treatment 5-3-4, 5-5-6

Agriolimax

MB at NAP treatment 5-3-4, 5-5-6

air curtain velocity measurement 8-1-17

air pump, auxiliary E-1-5

air velocity measuring instrument 8-1-17

aircraft

treatment options 5-5-15

air-purifying respirator E-1-5

Aleurocanthus woglumi

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-12, 5-3-5

Aleurocanthus woglumi host plants

treatment options 5-3-5

alfalfa seeds 5-6-12

Allium 5-6-13

Aloe 5-6-14

alpha grass and handicrafts

treatment options 5-4-9

Amaryllis 5-6-13, 5-6-17

Amorphophallus 5-6-14

Ampelodesma mauritanicus 5-4-9

Ampelopsis 5-6-14

Amphulariidae

hot water treatment 5-3-2

Anastrepha fraterculus

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-4, 5-2-5

vapor heat treatment 5-2-28

Anastrepha ludens

cold treatment 5-2-31

forced hot air treatment 5-2-22

hot water treatment 5-2-21

Anastrepha obliqua

forced hot air treatment 5-2-22

Anastrepha serpentina

forced hot air treatment 5-2-22

Anastrepha spp.

cold treatment 5-2-31

forced hot air treatment 5-2-21

MB at NAP/chamber only treatment 5-2-9

vapor heat treatment 5-2-27

Anchusa 5-6-14

anemometer 8-1-17

Anemone 5-6-14

Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service Glossary-1-1

ant

residual insecticidal spray treatment 5-5-3

Anthonomus grandis

MB at NAP/tarpaulin only treatment 5-4-3

ants

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-23, 5-5-16

Aphelenchoides besseyi

hot water treatment 5-6-16, 5-6-17

Aphelenchoides fragariae 5-6-15

hot water treatment (Lilium) 5-6-18

hot water treatment (Senecio) 5-6-19

Aphelenchoides subtenuis

hot water treatment 5-6-17

aphids

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-23, 5-3-3

APHIS Glossary-1-1

APHIS Form

205-R, Instructions and Worksheet for Calibrating Portable Temperature Sen-
Index 

G-1-2 Treatment Manual 10/2023-01

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

sors A-1-3

2061, Residue Sample for Food or Feed Product A-1-2

206-R, Test of the Accuracy of the Permanent

RTD Sensors Installed in Hot Water

Tanks A-1-4

207-R, Sensor Location Diagram Fruit

Weights and Pulp Temperatures A1-5

208, Performance Test for Mango Hot Water

Immersion Tan

t A-1-6

apple maggot

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

apples 5-2-3

T107-a 5-2-30

T107-a-1 5-2-30

T107-b 5-2-31

T107-d 5-2-31

T109-a-1 5-2-36

T109-d-1 5-2-36

apricot 5-2-3, 5-2-30, 5-2-31

Archachatina 5-5-5

cold treatment 5-5-8

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-4

Arion

MB at NAP treatment 5-3-4, 5-5-6

Arionidae

MB at NAP treatment 5-3-4, 5-5-6

Armoracea 5-6-14

Ascarite® 8-1-5, E-1-8

Ascochyta spp. 5-6-10

ash logs 5-4-17

asparagus

from Thailand, Australia, and New Zealand 5-

2-3

Asphodelus fistulosus 5-5-16

Astilbe 5-6-14, 5-6-17

root 5-3-10

atmospheric fumigation chambers

basic design elements 6-3-3

certification of 6-1-1

circulation and exhaust systems 6-3-6

construction and performance standards 6-3- 1

other auxiliary equipment 6-3-11

Austrotortrix spp.

cold treatment followed by MB at NAP 5-2-36

MB at NAP followed by cold treatment 5-2-36

autoclaves E-1-35

Autographa gamma

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-15

automobiles 5-5-12

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

auxiliary pump 8-1-18

avocado 5-2-30, 5-2-35

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

from Hawaii, Israel, Philippines 5-2-3

seeds only, without pulp 5-3-12

avocado seed moth

MB in 26" vacuum treatment 5-3-12

avocado seed weevil

MB in 26" vacuum treatment 5-3-12

avocado stem weevil

MB in 26" vacuum treatment 5-3-12

B

Bactrocera cucurbitae

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

Bactrocera dorsalis

cold treatment 5-2-21, 5-2-22, 5-2-33, 5-2-34

fumigation plus cold treatment 5-2-35

hot water immersion treatment 5-2-21

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-3

vapor heat treatment 5-2-27, 5-2-28

Bactrocera jarvisi

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

Bactrocera occipitalis

vapor heat treatment 5-2-28

Bactrocera philippinensis

vapor heat treatment 5-2-28

Bactrocera tryoni

cold treatment 5-2-31

cold treatment followed by MB at NAP 5-2-36

fumigation plus cold treatment 5-2-35

MB at NAP followed by cold treatment 5-2-36

bags and bagging material 5-4-11

for cotton only 5-4-10

for small grains 5-6-5

for soil-grown commodities 5-6-5

for unroasted coffee beans 5-4-11

to contain root crops 5-4-10

treatment schedules for 5-4-10, 5-5-12

baking powder

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

balances (portable) for weighing individual E-1-8

baled hay

treatment options 5-4-16

baled lint

treatment options 5-4-2

banana 5-2-3

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

FIFRA section 18 exempton 2-3-3

irradiated from Hawaii 5-3-10

barges 5-5-12

Baris lepidii

MB in 15" vacuum treatment 5-2-13

batch system E-1-9

bean

dry 5-2-4

fava, dried 5-2-11

lablab 5-2-12

snap 5-2-12

string 5-2-12

beet 5-2-4

Begonia 5-6-14, 5-6-16

black fruit fly

forced hot air treatment 5-2-22

blackberry 5-2-4

blended strip tobacco 5-4-13

Bletilla hyacinthina 5-6-14, 5-6-15, 5-6-17

blower E-1-12

blueberry 5-2-4, 5-2-5, 5-2-30

blueprints

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

boilers and thermostatic controls
Index 

10/2023-01 Treatment Manual G-1-3

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

adequate water heating capacity 3-3-7

boll weevil

MB at NAP/tarpaulin only treatment 5-4-3

phosphine at NAP treatment 5-4-3

bone meal

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

borers

dry heat treatment 5-4-5

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-11

MB at NAP/chamber only treatment 5-4-5

MB in 15" vacuum treatment 5-3-2, 5-3-7, 5-

4-10

MB in 26" vacuum treatment 5-3-4

SF at NAP treatment 5-5-10

box and package

penetration 2-3-8

Brachycerus

MB in 15" vacuum treatment 5-3-10

MB in 15" vacuum/chamber only treatment 5-

2-11

Brachyrhinus

MB in 26" vacuum treatment 5-3-10

Bradybaena

cold treatment 5-2-37, 5-5-7

Bradybaena

cold treatment 5-5-7

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-7

Brassica

campestris 5-2-5, 5-2-6

Brassica leafy vegetables 2-3-4

Brassica leafy vegetables F-1-6

Brassica napus 5-2-18

Brassica oleracea 5-2-6

Brassica oleracea L. var. alboglabra 5-2-5

Brassica oleracea var. acephala 5-2-10

Brassica oleracea var. botrytis 5-2-5, 5-2-7

Brassica oleracea var. gemmifera 5-2-6

Brassica oleracea var. gongylode 5-2-14

Brassica pekinensis 5-2-6

Brassica rapa Japonica group 5-2-15

Brassica rapa Perviridis group 5-2-15

brassware

from Mumbai, India 5-5-17

breadfruit 5-2-20

break bulk cargo

fan arrangement and operation 2-4-16

gas introduction lines 2-4-17

gas sampling tubes 2-4-18, 2-4-20

Brevipalpus chilensis

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-9

soapy water and wax treatment 5-2-20, 5-2-

21

broccoli 5-2-5

Chinese 5-2-5

raap 5-2-5

bromeliads 5-3-2, 5-6-7

broomcorn and broomcorn articles 5-4-14, 5-4-15

treatment 5-4-14, 5-6-18

brooms made of rice straw 5-6-11

Bruchidae

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-4, 5-2-11, 5-2-16, 5-2-18, 5-3-17

MB in 26" vacuum treatment 5-3-15, 5-3-17

MB in 26" vacuum/chamber only treatment 5-

2-11

Bruchophagus

MB in 26"vacuum treatment 5-3-16

brussels sprouts 5-2-6

bubble fumigation system E-1-12

bulb nematode

hot water dip treatment 5-6-19

other treatment options 5-6-13, 5-6-15

bulb scale mite

hot water treatment 5-3-11

MB at NAP treatment 5-3-11

bulb vegetables not on the label

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-4

bulbs 5-6-13

bulbs, corms, tubers, rhizomes, and roots 5-3-10

butter

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

C

cabbage 5-2-6

Chinese 5-2-6

Chinese mustard 5-2-6

cabbageworm

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-9

cactus 5-3-2, 5-6-14

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

calibration companies approved E-1-51

calibration of temperature probes

cold A-1-7

Calla

rhizomes 5-6-15

Calliopsis 5-6-14

Camellia 5-6-8

Campanula 5-6-14

Candidula 5-2-37, 5-5-4, 5-5-5, 5-5-7

cantaloupe 5-2-7

Cape gooseberry 5-2-30

carambola 5-2-31, 5-2-33

carbon dioxide 2-11-4

Caribbean fruit fly

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

carpenter bee

SF at NAP treatment 5-5-10

Carposina niponensis

cold treatment followed by MB at NAP 5-2-36

carrot 5-2-7

Caryedon spp. 5-3-16

Cascade Air Tank Recharging System E-1-12

cassava

manihot 5-2-7

Cathaica 5-5-7

Cathaica 5-2-37, 5-5-7, 5-5-7

cattleya fly

MB in 15" vacuum treatment 5-3-7

cauliflower 5-2-7

Caulophilus latinasus

MB in 26" vacuum treatment 5-3-12

cavalo broccolo 5-2-7

cecidomyid galls 5-3-7

celeriac 5-2-7

celery
Index 

G-1-4 Treatment Manual 10/2023-01

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

above ground 5-2-8

root 5-2-7

Cepaea

cold treatment 5-2-37, 5-5-7

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-4, 5-5-6

Cerambycidae

chlorpyrifos spray treatment 5-5-10

Ceratitis capitata 5-2-22

Ceratitis capitata

cold treatment 5-2-30, 5-2-33

cold treatment followed by MB at NAP 5-2-36

forced hot air treatment 5-2-21, 5-2-22

fumigation plus cold treatment 5-2-35

hot water immersion treatment 5-2-21

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

MB at NAP followed by cold treatment 5-2-36

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-3, 5-2-4, 5-2-5, 5-

2-9, 5-2-12, 5-2-14, 5-2-19

vapor heat treatment 5-2-27, 5-2-28

Ceratitis rosa

cold treatment 5-2-30, 5-2-33

CERCLA Glossary-1-1

Cercospora mamaonis

hot water dip treatment 5-6-17

Cercospora spp.

Bordeaux dip or spray treatment 5-6-17

Cernuella

cold treatment 5-2-37, 5-5-7

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-4, 5-5-5

Cersospora spp.treatment options 5-6-4

certified precision 8-1-24

certifying

facilities 6-1-1, 6-2-1

forced hot air treatment facilities 6-7-1

heat treatment of firewood facilities 6-9-1

hot water immersion treatment facilities 6-5-1

irradiation treatment facilities 6-8-1

vacuum fumigation chambers 6-2-1

vapor heat treatment facilities 6-7-1

certifying atmospheric fumigation chambers 6-3-1

certifying facilities 6-4-1

Cestrum 5-6-14

CFM calculation (fans) 8-1-17

chain hoist, electronic E-1-12

charcoal

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

chayote fruit only 5-2-8

chemical treatments

fumigants 2-2-1

methyl bromide 2-3-1

overview 2-1-1

CHEMTREC Glossary-1-1

cherimoya from Chile 5-2-20

cherry 5-2-8, 5-2-30, 5-2-31, 5-2-35

chestnut 5-2-8, 5-3-13

chestnut dioon 5-3-4

chicory

above ground 5-2-9

root 5-2-9

Chilean false red mite

soapy water and wax treatment 5-2-20

Chilean false red mite of grapes

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-9

soapy water and wax treatment 5-2-21

Christmas trees 5-6-4

treatment schedules for 5-4-16

Chrysanthemum 5-6-4, 5-6-16

rooted and unrooted cuttings 5-3-3

Chrysanthemum spp.

rooted and unrooted cuttings 5-3-3

chrysomelid beetle

MB in 15" vacuum/chamber only treatment 5-

2-9

Chrysomyxa spp. 5-6-4, 5-6-6

cigarette beetle

Kabat application treatment 5-4-13

MB in 28" vacuum treatment 5-4-13

vacuum steam flow treatment 5-4-13

Cimicifuga 5-6-14, 5-6-17

cinder blocks

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

Cipollini bulbs 5-2-9

Cissus 5-6-14

citrus

from citrus canker countries 5-6-9

from Hawaii 5-2-21

from Mexico and infested U.S. areas 5-2-21

from the U.S. 5-2-9

seeds of 5-3-17

citrus blackfly

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-12, 5-3-5

citrus canker

hot water treatment plus chemical dip 5-3-17

citrus whitefly

MB at NAP treatment 5-3-5, 5-3-6

Clematis 5-6-14

clementine 5-2-30

from Chile 5-2-9

from Mexico 5-2-27, 5-2-28

clementine from Mexico and U.S. quarantine areas

5-2-9

CO2 scrubbers

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

coast guard regulations B-1-1

Cochlicella

cold treatment 5-2-37, 5-5-7

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-4, 5-5-5

coconut

whole, without husk 5-2-10

codling moth

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

MB at NAP/chamber only treatment 5-2-8

cold treatment

certifying self refrigerated containers 6-4-9

integral containers used for cold treatment

temperature recording instrument 6-4-10

vessels used for intransit cold treatment 6-4-2

approval requirements 6-4-5

temperature recording systems standards 6-4-2

warehouse certification 6-4-10

coles 5-2-10

collard greens 5-2-10

Colosius 5-3-4

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-6

commercial suppliers E-1-1
Index 

10/2023-01 Treatment Manual G-1-5

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) Glossary-1-

1

conifer seeds 5-3-13

Conogethes punctiferalis

cold treatment followed by MB at NAP 5-2-36

Conopomorpha sinensis

cold treatment 5-2-33

Conotrachelus nenuphar 5-2-25

Conotrachelus spp.

MB in 26" vacuum treatment 5-3-12

construction equipment 5-5-12

without cabs 5-5-13

consultants, hot water immersion treatments E-1-

13

containerized cargo

methyl bromide 2-4-13

tarpaulin fumigation 2-4-13

fan arrangement and operation 2-4-17

gas introduction lines 2-4-17

gas sampling tubes 2-4-19

containers 5-5-12, 5-6-7

used 5-5-13

continuous flow system 3-3-5

contracting officer’s representative Glossary-1-1

Convallaria 5-6-12

conversion tables C-1-1

Convolvulus japonicus 5-6-14

Copitarsia spp.

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-3, 5-2-4, 5-2-15, 5-

2-17, 5-2-18

copra 5-2-10, Glossary-1-1

Copturus aguacatae

MB in 26" vacuum treatment 5-3-12

COR Glossary-1-1

corn

corn-on-the-cob 5-2-10

related diseases, treatment schedules for 5-6-

9

seed, nonpropagative 5-6-9

seed, not for food, feed, or oil purposes 5-6-9

shelled and contaminated with cottonseed 5-

4-7

cotton and cotton products 5-4-3

samples of 5-4-4

treatment schedules for 5-4-2

cottonseed 5-4-3, 5-4-4

bagged, packaged, or bulk 5-3-13

hulls 5-4-3, 5-4-4

meal 5-4-2, 5-4-3, 5-4-4

covers

for small grains 5-6-5

for soil-grown commodities 5-6-5

for wheat 5-6-6

CPK Glossary-1-2

creatine phosphokinase Glossary-1-2

Crocidosema aporema

MB in 15" vacuum/chamber only treatment 5-

2-12

crop group

berries and small fruit F-1-14

bulb vegetables F-1-4

cereal grains F-1-17

citrus fruit F-1-11

cucurbit vegetables F-1-10

edible fungi F-1-24

forage, fodder, and straw of cereal grains F-1-

18

fruiting vegetables F-1-9

grass forage, fodder, hay F-1-19

herbs and spices F-1-21

leafy vegetables except Brassica F-1-5

leaves of legume vegetables F-1-8

leaves of root and tuber vegetables F-1-3

legume vegetables F-1-7

nongrass animal feed F-1-20

oilseed F-1-23

pome fruit F-1-12

root and tuber F-1-2

stone fruit F-1-13

tree nuts F-1-16

tropical and subtropical fruit, edible peels F-1-

26, F-1-27, F-1-28, F-1-29

Cryptophlebia

illepida 5-2-25

illepida, MB at NAP treatment 5-3-14, 5-3-15

ombrodelta 5-2-25

cucumber 5-2-10

cucurbit vegetables

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-4

Curculio caryae 5-2-33

Curculio spp.

MB at NAP 5-4-4

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-8, 5-3-13, 5-4-5

MB in 26" vacuum/chamber only treatment 5-

2-8

Curcuma 5-6-14

Cuscuta spp.

steam heat treatment 5-5-16

cut

flowers and greenery 5-4-10

flowers and greenery treatment schedules 5-

4-10

pine Christmas trees 5-4-17

pine logs 5-4-17

cycads 5-3-4

Cyclamen 5-6-14

Cydia fabivora

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-12

MB in 15" vacuum/chamber only treatment 5-

2-12

Cydia pomonella

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

MB at NAP/chamber only treatment 5-2-8

Cydia splendana

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-8, 5-3-13, 5-4-4

MB in 26" vacuum/chamber only treatment 5-

2-8, 5-4-5

Cylas formicarius elegantulus

irradiation treatment 5-2-25

cyst nematode

hot water treatment 5-6-15

Cytec® Industries, Inc. 2-11-31

Cytisus 5-6-14
Index 

G-1-6 Treatment Manual 10/2023-01

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

D

Dahlia 5-6-14

dasheen 5-2-10

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

deciduous woody plants, dormant 5-3-4

decision tables, how to use 1-1-6

Deroceras 5-3-4, 5-5-6

Dialeurodes citri

MB at NAP treatment 5-3-5, 5-3-6

nonfoliated host plants treatment options 5-3- 6

Dicentra 5-6-14

Dieffenbachia spp. 5-3-4

digital thermistor instrument E-1-14

Digitaria spp.

dry heat treatment 5-5-16

Dioscorea spp. 5-2-19, 5-3-12

dip treatment

equipment 2-13-1

procedures

clean u

p 2-13-4

designate restricted use areas 2-13-3

dip plants 2-13-4

disinfect original shipping containers 2-

13-4

dry plants 2-13-4

prepare pesticide solution 2-13-3

prepare plant material 2-13-3

release cargo 2-13-4

remove plants 2-13-4

responsibilities 2-13-8

Diplosolenodes 5-3-4

disinfectants E-1-22

dosage calculations

preparation 2-4-25, 2-9-15

dose mapping 3-8-5

dosimeter 3-8-5

dosimetry 3-8-5

DOT

U.S. Department of Transportation Glossary1-2

Drierite® 8-1-4, E-1-16

drying tube

thermal conductivity gas analyzers 8-1-4

E

ECO2FUME® 2-11-8

electrical power supply

tarpaulin fumigation sites 2-4-11

electronic equipment

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

emerald ash borer

heat treatment 5-4-17

empty holds 5-5-3

Environmental Protection Agency Glossary-1-2

EPA Glossary-1-2

EPDM rubber

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

equipment reference guide to commercial suppliers

E-1-1

exhaust duct E-1-16

exhaust outlet 8-1-4

exhausting gas

conducting fumigation 2-9-21

external feeder Glossary-1-2 F

FAA Glossary-1-2

feather pillows

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

Federal Aviation Administration Glossary-1-2

Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act

Glossary-1-2

feeds and milled products 5-4-11

FIFRA Glossary-1-2

FIFRA Section 18 Exemption 5-2-2

FIFRA section 18 exemption

avocado 2-3-3

banana 2-3-3

cactus 2-3-3

crop group

Brassica leafy vegetables 2-3-4

cucurbit vegetables 2-3-4

leafy vegetables 2-3-4

leaves of roots and tubers 2-3-4

root and tuber 2-3-3

stone fruit 2-3-4

unlabeled commodities from bulb vegetables 2-3-4

dasheen 2-3-3

herbs and spices, fresh 2-3-3

ivy gourd 2-3-3

kaffir lime leaves 2-3-3

longan 2-3-3

lychee 2-3-3

Malvaceae seeds 2-3-3

mint, dried 2-3-3

mint, fresh 2-3-3

plantain 2-3-3

pointed gourd 2-3-3

pomegranate 2-3-3

rambutan 2-3-3

treatment schedules 1-1-9

final reading methyl bromide 2-4-31

forced hot air treatment facilities

certification of 6-7-1

documentation 6-7-8

plan and process approval 6-7-2

preliminary performance testing 6-7-4

forced hot air treatment official performance testing

6-7-4

forms

APHIS Form 205-R, Instructions and Worksheet for Calibrating Portable Temperature Sensors A-1-3

APHIS Form 206-R, Test of the Accuracy of

the Permanent RTD Sensors Installed in Hot Water Tanks A-1-4

APHIS Form 207-R, Sensor Location Diagram

Fruit Weights and Pulp Temperatures A-1-5

Calibration of Temperature Probes (Cold

Treatment) A-1-7

Location of Temperature Sensors in Containerized Cargo (Cold Treatment) A-1- 8
Index 

10/2023-01 Treatment Manual G-1-7

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

PPQ Form 203, Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or Treatment A-1-32

PPQ Form 429A, Fumigation Record A-1-9, A-1-12

PPQ Form 449-R, Temperature Recording

Calibration Report A-1-30

PPQ Form 519, Compliance Agreement A-1-

17

PPQ Form 523, Emergency Action Notification

A-1-20

PPQ Form 556, In Transit Cold Treatment

Clearance Report A-1-35

fresh herbs

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

fresh mint

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

fresh spices

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

fruit sizing equipment 3-3-6, E-1-17

fumigant selector switch

thermal conductivity gas analyzers 8-1-4

fumigants

physical properties of 2-2-5

thermal conductivity gas analyzer 8-1-2

fumigation

definition of 2-2-1

guidelines 2-2-3

Fumiscope® 8-1-2

fungal diseases

steam sterilization treatment 5-4-9

fungal rice diseases

dry heat treatment 5-4-8

fungicides E-1-17

G

g Glossary-1-2

gas analyzers E-1-19

gas detector tubes 8-1-13

gas detector tubes or gas samples 8-1-13

gas drying tube for Drierite® E-1-21

gas introduction

methyl bromide 2-4-27, 2-9-17

gas introduction lines

methyl bromide 2-4-17

gas penetration and distribution 2-4-15

gas sampling tubes

methyl bromide 2-4-18, 2-9-12

grams Glossary-1-2

gray 3-8-5, Glossary-1-2

Gy 3-8-5, Glossary-1-2

H

hazard communication program 7-1-1

HDT

highest dose tested Glossary-1-2

heat treatment o firewood facilities

conducting test treatment 6-9-2, 6-9-5

contact information 6-9-6

documentation 6-9-6

heat treatment of firewood facilities

calibrating temperature sensors 6-9-3

certification 6-9-2

certification frequency 6-9-5

official certification testing 6-9-3

plan approval 6-9-2

thermal mapping 6-9-4

heat treatments, list of 3-2-1

herbs and spices, fresh

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

high-protein flours

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

hitchhiker Glossary-1-2

hot water immersion

circulation 3-3-8

hydrocooling 3-3-15

post-treatment cooling options 3-3-14

pretreatment warming options 3-3-14

safeguarding treated fruit 3-3-13

temperature recorder specifications 3-3-9

temperature sensor specifications 3-3-8

hot water immersion treatment

batch system 3-3-5

continuous flow system 3-3-5

facilities

annual performance test 6-5-4

certification 6-5-1

foreign treatment facility protocols 6-5-7

permanent probe temperature 6-5-4

preliminary performance testing 6-5-2

facility electrical components 3-3-6

USDA checklist 3-3-4

facility design 3-3-4

on-site inspection 3-3-4

proposal submission 3-3-4

hot water immersion treatment consultants E-1-13

I

impervious surface

methyl bromide 2-4-10

infrared spectroscopy gas monitoring device

Spectros 8-1-9

internal feeder Glossary-1-2

intransit cold treatment

certified vessels and containers 6-4-2

temperature recording equipment standards

6-4-2

vessel certification 6-4-5

ionizing radiation 3-8-5

irradiation 3-8-1, 3-8-5

approved sources 6-8-4

ASTM Standards 6-8-13

audits 6-8-13

compliance agreements 6-8-10

conditions for recertification 6-8-11

documentation 3-8-4

domestic pre-certification 6-8-2

dose mapping 3-8-4

dosimetry 3-8-3

dosimetry system 6-8-5

facility certification 6-8-1

foreign pre-certification 6-8-2

standard operating procedures 6-8-7

terminology 3-8-5

treatment objectives 3-8-2

irradiation treatment facilities

certification of 6-8-1

ivy gourd
Index 

G-1-8 Treatment Manual 10/2023-01

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions 2-3-3

K

kaffir lime leaves

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

FIFRA Section 18 Exemptions 2-3-3

L

lard

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-11

leafy vegetables

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-4

leather goods

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

leaves of roots and tubers

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-4

line switch

thermal conductivity gas analyzers 8-1-4

line switches

thermal conductivity gas analyzers 8-1-4

Lobesia botrana

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-4

MB chamber treatment 5-2-5

MB tarp or chamber treatment 5-2-5, 5-2-17

location of temperature sensors in containerized

cargo (cold treatment) A-1-8

longan

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

lychee

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

Mm Glossary-1-2

magazines

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

magnesium articles

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

magnesium phosphide E-1-22

Malvaceae seeds

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

manometer 8-1-19, E-1-23

MB Glossary-1-3

metam-sodium E-1-25

meter Glossary-1-2

methyl bromide Glossary-1-3

"Q labels" and section 18 exemptions 2-3-2

box and package aeration 2-3-8

chamber fumigation 2-5-1

container fumigations without tarpaulin 2-8-1

gas analysis 2-3-5

humidity effects 2-3-8

properties and use 2-3-1

residual effect 2-3-11

ship fumigation 2-6-1

sorption 2-3-10

structure fumigation 2-7-1

tarpaulin fumigation 2-4-1

break bulk cargo 2-4-12

preparation 2-4-20

tarpaulin fumigation sites

ability to heat area 2-4-8

electrical power supply 2-4-11

impervious surface 2-4-10

nonwork area 2-4-11

water supply 2-4-11

well-ventilated sheltered area 2-4-8

methyl bromide 100% E-1-25

mg Glossary-1-3

milligram Glossary-1-3

milligrams per liter

mg/L Glossary-1-3

millimeters of mercury Glossary-1-3

minimum absorbed dose 3-8-5

mint, dried

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

mint, fresh

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

Mityvac hand-held vacuum pump 8-1-23

mmHg Glossary-1-3

moisture meter (for wood) E-1-27 N

National Institute for Occupational Safety and

Health Glossary-1-3

natural rubber goods

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

neoprene

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

newspapers

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

NIOSH Glossary-1-3

non-chemical treatments

cold treatment 3-7-1

nonwork area methyl bromide 2-4-11, 2-9-10 O

OIC

officer-in-charge Glossary-1-3

OSHA Glossary-1-3 P

padding corners

methyl bromide 2-4-20

paper with high rag or sulfur content

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

parts per billion Glossary-1-3

parts per million Glossary-1-3

PEL Glossary-1-3

perishable commodities in temporary enclosures 2-

2-3

permissible exposure Glossary-1-3

pesticide spills

contaminated material 7-2-9

contamination control 7-2-5

crash notification 7-2-4

decontamination 7-2-8

emergency kit 7-2-11

emergency procedures 7-2-2

environmental monitoring 7-2-9

evaluate the situation 7-2-3

identify contacts 7-2-3

managing 7-2-1

planning for 7-2-10

post-spill procedure 7-2-9

reporting 7-2-9

safety and first aid 7-2-3

security 7-2-7

phosphine 2-11-16

phosphine detector 8-1-23
Index 

10/2023-01 Treatment Manual G-1-9

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

photography chemicals

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

photography prints

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

placards E-1-57

Plant Protection and Quarantine Glossary-1-3

plantain

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

pointed gourd

FIFRA Section 18 Exemption 2-3-3

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

polyurethane foam

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

pomegranate

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

pomegranate, fresh

FIFRA Section 18 Exemption 2-3-3

portable sensors E-1-14

PortaSens phosphine detector 8-1-23

ppb Glossary-1-3

ppm Glossary-1-3

PPQ Glossary-1-3

PPQ Form 203 Foreign Site Certificate of Inspection and/or Treatment A-1-32

PPQ Form 429 Fumigation Record A-1-17

PPQ Form 429A Fumigation Record A-1-9, A-1-12

PPQ Form 523 Emergency Action Notification A-1-

20

PPQ Form 556 In Transit Cold Treatment Clearance Report A-1-35

preclearance programs 6-4-1

pressure-leakage test for nap fumigation chambers

6-3-9

pulpy fruit definition 2-4-21

Q

quarantine treatments

monitoring of 2-2-2

fumigation guidelines 2-2-3

nonperishable commodities in temporary

enclosures 2-2-2

perishable commodities in temporary enclosures 2-2-3

monitoring of perishable in temporary enclosures 2-2-3

quarantine-significant slug treatment options 5-3-4

quick-release dispensing equipment 2-11-13

R

radura 3-8-5

rambutan

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

rambutan from Hawaii 5-2-22, 5-2-29

refrigerated warehouses used for cold treatment 6-

4-10

residue monitoring 4-1-1

safety 4-1-2

sample

collection 4-1-2

labeling 4-1-3

shipment 4-1-3

storage 4-1-3

respiratory protection 8-1-13

restricted MB fumigation

automobiles 2-3-11

baking powder 2-3-11

restricted MB fumigation item

blueprints 2-3-11

bone meal 2-3-11

butter 2-3-11

charcoal 2-3-11

cinder blocks 2-3-11

CO2 scrubbers 2-3-11

electronic equipment 2-3-11

EPDM rubber 2-3-11

feather pillows 2-3-11

high-protein flours 2-3-12

lard 2-3-11

magazines 2-3-12

magnesium 2-3-12

natural rubber goods 2-3-12

neoprene 2-3-12

newspapers 2-3-12

paper 2-3-12

photography chemicals 2-3-12

photography prints 2-3-12

polyurethane 2-3-12

rug pads 2-3-12

silver polishing papers 2-3-12

soft yarns 2-3-12

sweaters 2-3-12

viscose rayon fabrics 2-3-12

woolens 2-3-12

yak rugs 2-3-12

root and tuber

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-3

root and tuber crop group

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-4

S

safety equipment E-1-31

sealing tape E-1-32

Section 18 Exemption

commodities covered by 2-3-3

section 18 exemptions

commodities covered by 2-3-3

ship

hold 5-5-5

short-term exposure limit Glossary-1-4

silver polishing papers

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

smoking candle E-1-33

snakes, sand or water E-1-33

soft yarns

restricted MB fumigation 2-3-12

soil fumigants E-1-33

Spectros 8-1-9

spill recovery materials E-1-34

stack covering

methyl bromide 2-4-23

state hazardous waste management agencies 7-2-

11

steam boilers for hot water immersion treatments

E-1-34

steam generators E-1-35

steam jet method 3-4-3

steam pressure sterilization 3-4-1
Index 

G-1-10 Treatment Manual 10/2023-01

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

steam sterilizers E-1-35

steam treatments 3-4-1

STEL Glossary-1-4

stone fruit

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-4

sulfuryl fluoride E-1-35

suppliers E-1-1

sweaters

restricted MB fumigation 2-3-12

T

T100—Treatment Schedules 5-2-1

T101—Methyl Bromide Fumigation Schedules 5-2- 3

T102—Water Treatment Schedules 5-2-20

T103—High Temperature Forced Air Schedules 5-

2-21

T104—Pest Specific/Host Variable Treatment

Schedules 5-2-22

T105—Irradiation Treatment Schedules 5-2-24

T106—Vapor Heat Schedules 5-2-27

T107—Cold Treatment Schedules 5-2-29

T108—Fumigation Plus Cold Treatment of Fruits

Schedules 5-2-35

T109—Cold Treatment Plus Fumigation of Fruits

Schedules 5-2-36

T200—Schedules 5-3-1

T201—Plant Treatment Schedules 5-3-2

T202—Bulbs, Corms, Tubers, Rhizomes, and

Roots Treatment Schedules 5-3-10

T203—Seeds Treatment Schedules 5-3-12

T300—Miscellaneous Treatment Schedules 5-4-1

T302—Grains and Seeds Not Intended for Propagation Treatment Schedules 5-4-4

T303—Rice Straw and Hulls Treatment Schedules

5-4-7

T304—Alpha (alfa) Grass and Handicrafts Treatment Schedules 5-4-9

T305—Cut Flowers and Greenery Treatment

Schedules 5-4-10

T306—Bags and Bagging Material Treatment

Schedules 5-4-10

T308—Tobacco Treatment Schedules 5-4-13

T309—Broomcorn and Broomcorn Articles Treatment Schedules 5-4-14

T310—Tick-Infested Materials (Nonfood) Treatment Schedules 5-4-15

T311 Baled Hay Treatment Schedules 5-4-16

T312—Oak Logs and Lumber Treatment Schedules 5-4-16

T313—Christmas Trees Treatment Schedules 5-4-

16

T401—Railroad Cars Empty Treatment Schedules

5-5-3

T401—Treatment Schedules 5-5-1

T403—Nonfood Miscellaneous Cargo Treatment

Schedules 5-5-5

T404—Wood Products Treatment Schedules 5-5-

10

T405—Bags and Bagging Material Treatment

Schedules 5-5-12

T407—Mechanical Cotton Pickers and Other Cotton Equipment Treatment Schedules 5-5-13

T408—Soil as Such and Soil Contaminating Durable Commodities Treatment Schedules 5-5-13

T409—Aircraft Treatment Schedules 5-5-15

T410—Tick Infestations Treatment Schedules 5-5-

16

T412—Noxious Weed Seeds Treatment Schedules

5-5-16

T413—Brassware from Mumbai, India Treatment

Schedules 5-5-17

T414—Inanimate, Nonfood Articles with Gypsy

Moth Egg Masses Treatment Schedules 5-5-17

T415—Garbage Treatment Schedules 5-5-18

T416—Goatskins, Lambskins, Sheepskins Treatment Schedules 5-5-19

T501—Chrysomyxa spp., Cercospora spp., and

Phoma chrysanthemi Treatment Schedules 5-6-4

T501—Plant Pests or Pathogens Treatment Schedules 5-6-1

T502—Potato Cyst Nematode Treatment Schedules 5-6-5

T503—Downy Mildews and Physoderma Diseases

of Maize Treatment Schedules 5-6-5

T504—Flag Smut Treatment Schedules 5-6-6

T505—Chrysomyxa spp. Treatment Schedules 5-

6-6

T506—Potato Cyst Nematode Treatment Schedules 5-6-7

T507—Phyllosticta bromeliae, Uredo, and Septoria

gentianae Treatment Schedules 5-6-7

T508—Rusts Treatment Schedules 5-6-8

T509—Plant Pests of Camellia and Orchids Treatment Schedule 5-6-8

T510—Infestation of Corn-Related Diseases Treatment Schedules 5-6-9

T511—Xanthomonas axonopodis, pv. citri (Citrus

Canker) 5-6-9

T513—Ascochyta on Various Commodities Treatment Schedules 5-6-9

T514—Xanthomonas albilineans and X. vasculorum Treatment Schedules 5-6-10

T515—Sugarcane-Related Diseases Treatment

Schedules 5-6-10

T518—Rice-Related Diseases Treatment Schedules 5-6-11

T519—Rice-Related Diseases Treatment Schedules 5-6-11

T520—Verticillium albo-atrum Treatment Schedules 5-6-12

T521—Plant Pathogenic Fungi and Bacteria Treatment Schedules 5-6-12

T551—Globodera rostochiensis and G. pallida on

Convallaria Treatment Schedules 5-6-12

T552—Ditylenchus dipsaci and D. destructor Treatment Schedules 5-6-13

T553—Nematodes Treatment Schedules 5-6-14

T554—Ditylenchus dipsaci and D. destructor on

Hyacinthus Treatment Schedules 5-6-15

T555—Ditylenchus dipsaci on Narcissus Treatment

Schedule 5-6-15

T556—Root-Knot Nematodes (Meloidogyne spp.)

on Calla 5-6-15

T557—Meloidogyne spp. and Pratylenchus spp. on

Chrysanthemum 5-6-16
Index 

10/2023-01 Treatment Manual G-1-11

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

T558—Pratylenchus Surface Diseases on Fragaria

5-6-16

T559—Foliar Nematodes on Begonia and Oryza

Treatment Schedules 5-6-16

T560—Treatment for Infestations of Meloidogyne

spp. on Rosa 5-6-16

T561—Cercospora mamaonis and Phomopsis carica-papayae on Papayas 5-6-17

T564—Foliar Nematodes Treatment Schedules 5-

6-17

T565—Nematodes Treatment Schedules 5-6-17

T566—Diseases on Broomcorn, Broomcorn Articles, and Lilium (Bulbs) 5-6-18

T567—Bulb Nematodes Treatment Schedules 5-6-

19

T568—Foliar Nematodes on Senecio Treatment

Schedules 5-6-19

T569—Foliar Nematodes on Fragaria Treatment

Schedules 5-6-19

T570—Diseases on Acalypha and Aconitum 5-6-19

Taeniothrips eucharii 5-3-11

Taeniothrips simplex 5-3-10

taking concentration readings

methyl bromide 2-4-30, 2-9-19

tarpaulin

10 mil uses 2-4-24

4 mil uses 2-4-23

6 mil uses 2-4-23

tarpaulin sealing

phosphine 2-11-24

sulfuryl fluoride 2-10-2

tarpaulins E-1-35

temperature measurements

methyl bromide 2-4-21, 2-9-13

temperature recorder

APHIS-approved models 3-3-10

temperature recorders (built-in type) for cold treatment in self-regulated containers E-1-37

temperature recorders and sensors, general use E1-52

temperature recorders for hot water immersion

treatment E-1-40

temperature recording systems

standards for cold treatment 6-4-2

termites

MB at NAP treatment 5-5-11

testing for leaks

methyl bromide 2-4-29

phosphine 2-11-26

sulfuryl fluoride 2-10-2

thermal conductivity gas analyzers 8-1-2

fumigant selector switch 8-1-4

instrument description 8-1-2

line switches 8-1-4

thermocouple wire E-1-43

thermometers E-1-44

certified precision 8-1-24

certified precision approved calibration companies E-1-51

digital certified precision E-1-47

glass mercury certified precision E-1-45

glass non-mercury certified precision E-1-47

threshold limit value Glossary-1-4

TLV Glossary-1-4

treatment facilities

certifying 6-4-1

treatment manual

advisories used 1-1-5

conventions of 1-1-4

ordering 1-1-10

purpose 1-1-2

related documents of 1-1-4

restrictions of 1-1-2

scope 1-1-2

updating 1-1-10

use of 1-1-9

users of 1-1-4

treatment schedules index 5-1-1

tubing, gas sampling E-1-54

U

U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Glossary-1-3

United States Department of Agriculture Glossary1-4

unlabeled commodities from bulb vegetable

FIFRA section 18 exemption 2-3-4

USDA Glossary-1-4

V

vacuum chambers 6-2-1

vacuum fumigation chamber 2-5-13

accessories 6-2-3

certification 6-2-1

certification standards 6-2-4

circulation and exhaust system 6-2-3

construction and performance standards 6-2-

1

fumigant introduction systems 6-2-2

vacuum pumps 6-2-2, E-1-54

vapor heat treatment 3-5-1

vapor heat treatment facilities

certification 6-7-1

documentation 6-7-8

official performance testing 6-7-4

plan and process approval 6-7-2

preliminary performance testing 6-7-4

VAPORPH3OS® 2-11-14

Vikane E-1-35

viscose rayon fabrics

restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

volatilizer 8-1-14, E-1-56

W

warehouses used for cold treatment 6-4-10

warning signs E-1-57

water

supply

tarpaulin fumigation sites 2-4-11, 2-9-10

water trap 8-1-25

well-lighted areas

tarpaulin fumigation sites 2-4-11

wind meter 8-1-17

woolens, restricted MB fumigation item 2-3-12

Z

Zeugodacus cucurbitae (formerly known as Bactrocera cucurbitae)
Index 

G-1-12 Treatment Manual 10/2023-01

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

MB at NAP treatment 5-2-3, 5-2-21, 5-2-22, 5-2-27, 5-2-28, 5-2-33, 5-2-34, 5-

2-35